PROJECT MANUAL - Connecticut...PROJECT MANUAL TOWN OF FAIRFIELD CONNECTICUT Emergency Communications Center Sacred Heart University 5151 Park Avenue Fairfield, Connecticut 06825 Bid

PROJECT MANUAL TOWN OF FAIRFIELD CONNECTICUT Emergency Communications Center Sacred Heart University 5151 Park Avenue Fairfield, Connecticut 06825 Bid #2021-28 S/P+A Project No. 19.373

VOLUME 1 OF 1

90%CD Submission: August 21, 2020 Issued for Bid: September 23, 2020

Architect/Engineers/Interior Designers Silver/Petrucelli + Associates, Inc. 3190 Whitney Avenue, Hamden, Connecticut 06518 One Post Hill Place, New London, Connecticut 06320

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Emergency Communications Center Tenant Fit-Out & Renovation – SHU/Fairfield TOC-1

TENANT FIT-OUT & RENOVATION

EMERGENCY COMMUNICATIONS CENTER SACRED HEART UNIVERSITY 5151 PARK AVENUE FAIRFIELD, CT 06825 BID #2021-28

S/P+A PROJECT NO. 19.373

DIVISION 00 – PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS PAGES

Town of Fairfield Invitation to Bid/Instructions for Bidders 10 Instructions to Bidders (AIA A701) 8 Supplementary Instructions to Bidders 6 Bid Form 3 CHRO Contract Compliance Regulations Notification To Bidders 5 Standard Form of Agreement between Owner and Contractor (AIA A101) 8 General Conditions of the Contract for Construction (AIA A201) 38 Supplementary General Conditions 7 Project Application and Project Certificate for Payment (AIA G702) 1 Project Application Continuation Sheet (AIA G703) 1 Prevailing Wage Rate Information 30 Drawing List 2

DIVISION 01 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

Section 011000 Summary of Work 5 Section 012100 Allowances 3 Section 012300 Alternates 2 Section 012500 Substitution Procedures 4 Section 012600 Contract Modification Procedures 2 Section 012900 Payment Procedures 4 Section 013100 Project Management and Coordination 10 Section 013200 Construction Progress Documentation 6 Section 013233 Photographic Documentation 2 Section 013300 Submittal Procedures 9 Section 014000 Quality Requirements 10 Section 014200 References 10 Section 015000 Temporary Facilities and Controls 5 Section 016000 Product Requirements 5 Section 017300 Execution 7 Section 017700 Closeout Procedures 4 Section 017823 Operation and Maintenance Data 8 Section 017839 Project Record Documents 4 Section 017900 Demonstration and Training 4

DIVISION 02 – EXISTING CONDITIONS

Section 024119 Selective Demolition 7

TABLE OF CONTENTS


DIVISION 03 – CONCRETE

Section 033000 Cast-In-Place Concrete 10 Section 035416 Hydraulic Cement Underlayment 3

DIVISION 05 – METALS

Section 055000 Metal Fabrications 5

DIVISION 06 – WOOD, PLASTICS AND COMPOSITES

Section 061000 Rough Carpentry 6 Section 062023 Interior Finish Carpentry 5 Section 064116 Plastic-Laminate-Clad Architectural Cabinets 7

DIVISION 07 – THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION

Section 074213.19 Insulated Metal Wall Panels 6 Section 076200 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 6 Section 078413 Penetration Firestopping 4 Section 079200 Joint Sealants 7

DIVISION 08 – OPENINGS

Section 081213 Hollow Metal Frames 5 Section 081216 Aluminum Doors and Frames 5 Section 081416 Flush Wood Doors 4 Section 083113 Access Doors and Frames 3 Section 083400 Bullet-Resistant Doors and Frames 8 Section 084333.23 Security Storefronts 7 Section 087100 Door Hardware 16 Section 088000 Glazing 14 Section 089000 Louvers and Vents 5

DIVISION 09 – FINISHES

Section 092216 Non-Structural Metal Framing 4 Section 092900 Gypsum Board 6 Section 093000 Tiling 10 Section 095113 Acoustical Panel Ceilings 8 Section 096513 Resilient Base and Accessories 5 Section 096519 Resilient Tile Flooring 6 Section 096536 Static-Control Resilient Flooring 6 Section 096813 Tile Carpeting 5 Section 098433 Sound-Absorbing Wall Units 5 Section 099113 Exterior Painting 5 Section 099123 Interior Painting 6

DIVISION 10 – SPECIALTIES

Section 101100 Visual Display Units 6

TABLE OF CONTENTS


Section 101400 Signage 5 Section 102641 Bullet-Resistant Panels 4 Section 102800 Toilet, Bath, and Laundry Accessories 4 Section 104413 Fire Protection Cabinets 4 Section 104416 Fire Extinguishers 3

DIVISION 11 – EQUIPMENT

Section 113100 Residential Appliances 5

DIVISION 12 – FURNISHINGS

Section 123661.16 Solid Surfacing Countertops 4

DIVISION 21 – FIRE PROTECTION

Section 210517 Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Fire-Suppression Piping 5 Section 210518 Escutcheons for Fire-Suppression Piping 3 Section 210523 General-Duty Valves for Water-Based Fire Protection Piping 5 Section 210548 Vibration & Seismic Controls for Fire-Suppression Piping & Equipment 9 Section 210553 Identification for Fire-Suppression Piping and Equipment 6 Section 211313 Wet-Pipe Sprinkler Systems 12 Section 212200 Clean-Agent Fire-Extinguishing Systems 7

DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING

Section 220513 Common Motor Requirements for Plumbing Equipment 2 Section 220517 Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Plumbing Piping 5 Section 220518 Escutcheons for Plumbing Piping 3 Section 220519 Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping 3 Section 220523.12 Ball Valves for Plumbing Piping 4 Section 220529 Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment 12 Section 220548 Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment 13 Section 220553 Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment 7 Section 220719 Plumbing Piping Insulation 17 Section 221116 Domestic Water Piping 10 Section 221119 Domestic Water Piping Specialties 5 Section 221316 Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping 11 Section 221319 Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties 5 Section 221319.13 Sanitary Drains 3 Section 221623 Facility Natural-Gas Piping 7 Section 223300 Electric, Domestic-Water Heaters 5 Section 224213.13 Commercial Water Closets 5 Section 224216.13 Commercial Lavatories 5 Section 224216.16 Commercial Sinks 4

DIVISION 23 – HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING

Section 230000 Basic Mechanical Requirements 4 Section 230517 Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for HVAC Piping 4 Section 230529 Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment 10

TABLE OF CONTENTS


Section 230548 Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC 14 Section 230553 Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment 6 Section 230593 Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC 19 Section 230713 Duct Insulation 18 Section 230719 HVAC Piping Insulation 17 Section 230993 Sequence of Operations for HVAC Controls 4 Section 232300 Refrigerant Piping 11 Section 233113 Metal Ducts 16 Section 233300 Air Duct Accessories 11 Section 233346 Flexible Ducts 3 Section 233423 HVAC Power Ventilators 6 Section 233713 Diffusers, Registers, and Grilles 4 Section 237200 Air-To-Air Energy Recovery Equipment 6 Section 238123.13 Computer-Room Air-Conditioners, Ceiling-Mounted Units 10 Section 238129 Variable-Refrigerant-Flow HVAC Systems 27 Section 238413.29 Self-Contained Steam Humidifiers 6

DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL

Section 260500 Common Work Results for Electrical 4 Section 260519 Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables 6 Section 260526 Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems 5 Section 260529 Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems 6 Section 260533 Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems 10 Section 260548 Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems 7 Section 260553 Identification for Electrical Systems 9 Section 260923 Lighting Control Devices 5 Section 262416 Panelboards 9 Section 262726 Wiring Devices 6 Section 262816 Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers 8 Section 263213 Engine Generators 14 Section 263600 Transfer Switches 8 Section 265119 LED Interior Lighting 9 Section 265619 LED Exterior Lighting 9

DIVISION 27 – COMMUNICATIONS

Section 270536 Cable Trays for Communications Systems 8 Section 271100 Communications Equipment Rooms 8 Section 271300 Communications Backbone Cabling 12 Section 271500 Communications Horizontal Cabling 12 Section 275119 Sound Masking Systems 12

DIVISION 31 – EARTHWORK

Section 312000 Earth Moving 6

DIVISION 32 – EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS

Section 321216 Asphalt Paving 6 Section 323119 Decorative Metal Fences and Gates 4

TABLE OF CONTENTS


Section 329200 Turf and Grasses 6

END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS

2021-28 Tenant Fit-Out & Renovation – Emergency Communications Center Page 2 of 10

INVITATION TO BID The Town of Fairfield (Town), on behalf of the Fairfield Police Department is seeking competitive bid submissions from qualified contractors to make renovations to the existing Sacred Heart University facility, 5151 Park Avenue, Fairfield, CT 06825, creating a new, fully operational Emergency Communications Center for the Fairfield Emergency Services.

PRE-BID VIRTUAL CONFERENCE A virtual meeting will commence at 11:00 am on Tuesday, 29th September, 2020 for prospective bidders to scope the conditions.

Join Zoom Meeting https://us02web.zoom.us/j/82590865066?pwd=Wm9ZbzRiczlVMHFOZ0dORWdXTGhoQT09

or Dial by your location

+1 646 558 8656 Meeting ID: 825 9086 5066

Password: 749921

While the meeting is non-mandatory, prospective bidders will be required to sign-in at commencement of the meeting. The sign-in sheet will be posted on the Purchasing Department website as noted below. Copies will not be made available at the meeting, nor will they be faxed out.

All requests for information will be answered in writing as specified below under Addenda.

ADDENDA/REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION (RFI) Addenda concerning important information and/or modifications to specifications will be posted on the Fairfield Purchasing Department website at www.fairfieldct.org/purchasing.

It is each Bidder’s sole responsibility to monitor the above website for all updated information. Addenda will not be mailed, e-mailed or faxed out. Written requests for information will not be accepted after 11:00am on Tuesday, 6th October, 2020. Verbal requests for information via phone or other means will not be accepted. Failure to comply with these conditions will result in the Bidder waiving the right to dispute bid

specifications and conditions, no exceptions.

Questions concerning this bid must be submitted in writing and directed only to: Corinne Dyer, Senior Buyer: [email protected]

Response will be in the form of an addendum that will be posted approximately 8th October, 2020 to the Town of Fairfield website, which is www.fairfieldct.org/purchasing. It is the responsibility of each Bidder to retrieve addenda from the website. Any contact about this bid between a Bidder and any other Town official and/or department manager and/or Town of Fairfield employee, other than as set forth above, may be grounds for disqualification of that Bidder. No questions or clarifications shall be answered by phone, in person or in any other manner than specified above.

BID BOND/BID SECURITY A five percent (5%) bid bond or equal approved security as stated per the Terms and Conditions must be submitted with the proposal.

All bonds, including payment and performance bonds when applicable, shall be written by a surety company or companies licensed to issue bonds in the State of Connecticut, and shall have at least an A-VII policy holders rating, as reported by A.M. Best Rating Services, or otherwise deemed acceptable by the Town. The Town always reserves the right to reject surety companies, if an approved surety bond cannot be provided the bidder shall be deemed non-responsive.

A complete list of certified surety companies can be accessed on the U.S. Government Department of Treasury website; https://www.fiscal.treasury.gov/fsreports/ref/suretyBnd/c570_a-z.htm

REQUIREMENTS A. Any sizes or estimate of quantities as shown on Drawings are approximate and are not guaranteed in any

respect. Prospective Bidders are to visit the site to verify scope of the work, measurements, quantities, etc., prior to bidding. The Town reserves the right at all times to increase or decrease the amount of work if deemed in its best interest.


B. Price is to include all labor, materials, tools, equipment, plans, mobilization, permits, insurances, etc., required to properly complete the project.

C. The Town of Fairfield reserves the right to award the bid with multiple items: to more than one (1) bidder, based on meeting the item(s) specification, cost, availability, or any

combination of these criteria; to a single bidder who meets the specifications for all items, and offers the best combination of lowest

cost, best availability, and broadest product range; and may add, subtract, or delete any item and/or quantity as deemed in the best interest of the Town.

D. The Bidder must not discriminate, nor permit discrimination, against any person on the grounds of race, color, national origin, religion, sex, handicap, or veteran status, in their employment practices, in any of their contractual arrangements, in all service and accommodations they offer to the public, and in any of their other business operations.

E. The successful bidder MUST secure all required licenses and permits (local, state, federal) prior to commencing work on the site.

F. Award of the project, either partial or in its entirety, is contingent upon funding approval by the applicable boards of the Town of Fairfield, including state and federal agencies.

G. This is a prevailing wage rates project and is subject to all CTDOL requirements. Certified Payroll will be required for all work completed.

H. Upon Award, all bidding documents shall constitute a legal contract including but not limited to the following; Bid Invitation, Addenda, CT DOL Prevailing Wage Documents, Award Resolution, Town Purchase Order, and AIA Contracts.

I. In the instance the Contactor discovers unanticipated hazardous material, whether it be in nature or capacity, the Town reserves the right to terminate the Contract and regain possession of the project site.

J. Work shall not commence until 7:00 am on weekdays and 8:00 am on weekends in accordance with the Town Noise Ordinance.

K. DAS Prequalification: The Contractor shall hold a current “DAS Contractor Prequalification Certificate” (not a predetermination letter) from the Department of Administrative Services of the State of Connecticut according to C.G.S.§4b-91. Bidders are advised that both the DEPARTMENT OF ADMINISTRATIVE SERVICES PREQUALIFICATION CERTIFICATE and UPDATE (BID) STATEMENT must accompany the bid proposal for bids of Five Hundred Thousand Dollars ($500,000) or more (C.G.S. 4b-91), or must be in-place at the time of contract signing. Failure to supply these documents with the bid will result in rejection of the bid. Further information may be obtained from the Department of Administrative Services (DAS) Contractor Prequalification Program: http://das.ct.gov/cr1.aspx?page=10 All Bidders shall be DAS Prequalified Construction Contractors with a classification of a General

Building Construction (Group B) as a minimum. L. To meet the requirements of the State of Connecticut Department of Economic and Community

Development (DECD), each bid shall include a signed copy of the Commission of Human Rights and Opportunities Contract Compliance Regulations Notification to Bidders (CHRO).

M. The contractor who is selected to perform this State project must comply with CONN. GEN. STAT. §§ 4a-60, 4a-60a, 4a-60g, and 46a-68b through 46a-68f, inclusive, as amended by June 2015 Special Session Public Act 15-5. An Affirmative Action Plan must be filed with and approved by the Commission on Human Rights and Opportunities prior to the commencement of construction.

State law requires a minimum of twenty-five percent (25%) of the state-funded portion of the contract for award to subcontractors holding current certification from the Connecticut Department of Administrative Services (“DAS”) under the provisions of CONN. GEN. STAT. § 4a-60g, as amended. (Twenty-five percent (25%) of the work with DAS certified Small and Minority owned businesses and twenty-five percent (25%) of that work with DAS certified Minority, Women and/or Disabled owned businesses.) The contractor must demonstrate good faith effort to meet the twenty-five percent (25%) set-aside goals.

For municipal public works contracts and quasi-public agency projects, the contractor must file a written or electronic non-discrimination certification with the Commission on Human Rights and Opportunities. Forms can be found at http://www.ct.gov/opm/cwp/view.asp?a=2982&q=390928&opmNav_GID=1806


ENCLOSURES 1. Project manual and Construction Docs prepared by Silver/Petrucelli + Associates, Inc. 2. Draft AIA Documents – AIA Document A701 (Instructions to Bidders), AIA Document 201 (General

Conditions of the Contract for Construction), AIA Document G702 (Sample Application for payment) – part of project manual

3. CT DOL Prevailing Wage Rate package – part of project manual 4. Commission of Human Rights and Opportunities Contract Compliance Regulations Notification to Bidders

(CHRO) – part of project manual


PURCHASING AUTHORITY TOWN OF FAIRFIELD

INSTRUCTIONS FOR BIDDERS TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF BID

BID PROPOSALS Bid proposals are to be submitted in a sealed envelope and clearly marked on the outside “BID #2021-28” including all outer packaging such as DHL, FedEx, UPS, etc. All prices and notations must be printed in ink or typewritten. No erasures are permitted. Bid proposals are to be in the office of the Purchasing Authority, First Floor, Independence Hall, 725 Old Post Road, Fairfield, Connecticut, prior to date and time specified, at which time they will be publicly opened. RIGHT TO ACCEPT/REJECT AFTER REVIEW OF ALL FACTORS, TERMS AND CONDITIONS, INCLUDING PRICE, THE PURCHASING AUTHORITY OF THE TOWN OF FAIRFIELD RESERVES THE RIGHT TO REJECT ANY AND ALL BIDS, OR ANY PART THEREOF, OR WAIVE DEFECTS IN SAME, OR ACCEPT ANY PROPOSAL DEEMED TO BE IN THE BEST INTEREST OF THE TOWN OF FAIRFIELD. QUESTIONS Questions concerning conditions, bidding guidelines and specifications should only be directed in writing to: Ms. Corinne M. Dyer, Senior Buyer: [email protected] Inquiries must reference date of bid opening, requisition or contract number, and must be received no later than as indicated in the bid documents prior to date of bid opening. Failure to comply with these conditions will result in the bidder waiving the right to dispute the bid specifications and conditions. PRICES Prices quoted must be firm, for acceptance by the Town of Fairfield, for a period of ninety (90) days. Prices shall include all applicable duties. Bidders shall be required to deliver awarded items at prices quoted in their original bid. F.O.B. DESTINATION Prices quoted shall be Net – Delivered to destination. Bids quoting other than F.O.B. Destination may be rejected. BID BOND The BID BOND furnished, as bid security, must be duly executed by the bidder as principal. It must be in the amount equal to five percent (5%) of the total estimated bid, as guarantee that, in case the contract is awarded to the bidder, the bidder will, within ten (10) days thereafter, execute such contract and furnish a Performance Bond and Payment Bond. Small businesses may elect to obtain an irrevocable letter of credit or cashier’s check in lieu of the Bid Bond. Such surety must also be in an amount equal to at least five percent (5%) of the total estimated bid. All bid bonds shall be written by a surety company or companies licensed in the State of Connecticut, and shall have at least an A-VII policy holders rating, as reported by A.M. Best Rating Services, or otherwise deemed acceptable by the Town. The Town always reserves the right to reject surety companies, if an approved surety bond cannot be provided, the bidder shall be deemed non-responsive. A complete list of certified surety companies can be accessed on the U.S. Government Department of Treasury website: https://www.fiscal.treasury.gov/fsreports/ref/suretyBnd/c570_a-z.htm NOTE: Failure to provide a Bid Bond or equivalent security is not cause for a waiver defect. Any bid not accompanied by such security will be excluded from consideration. PERMITS The Contractor will be responsible for securing all necessary permits, state and local, as required by the Town of Fairfield. The Town will waive its application and permit fees for Town of Fairfield projects except for the State Education permit cost of $0.26/$1,000 value. PAYMENT PROCEDURES No voucher, claim, or charge against the Town shall be paid without the approval of the Fiscal Officer for correctness and legality. Appropriate checks shall be drawn by the Fiscal Officer for approved claims or charges and they shall be valid without countersignature unless the Board of Selectmen otherwise prescribed.


PAYMENT PERIOD The Town of Fairfield shall put forth its best effort to make payment within thirty (30) days after delivery of the item acceptance of the work, or receipt of a properly completed invoice, whichever is later. Payment period shall be net thirty (30) days unless otherwise specified. For projects that do not require a performance or bid bond, The Town of Fairfield reserves the right to retain five percent (5%) of total bid amount, which is payable ninety (90) days after final payment or acceptance of the work. THE CONTRACTOR The Contractor for the work described shall be thoroughly familiar with the requirements of all specifications, and the actual physical conditions of various job sites. The submission of a proposal shall be construed as evidence that the Contractor has examined the actual job conditions, requirements, and specifications. Any claim for labor, equipment, or materials required, or difficulties encountered which could have been foreseen had such an examination been carefully made will not be recognized. ASSIGNMENT OF CONTRACT No contract may be assigned or transferred without the consent of the Purchasing Authority. AWARD OF BIDS Contracts and purchases will be made or entered into with the lowest responsible bidder meeting specifications, except as otherwise specified in the invitation. If more than one (1) item is specified in the invitation, the Town of Fairfield reserves the right to determine the low bidder on an individual basis or on the basis of all items included in the Invitation for Bids, unless otherwise expressed by the Town. Additionally, the Town reserves the right to consider other factors in an award, such as the Town’s prior experience with a vendor for services previously provided. PERFORMANCE AND LABOR AND MATERIAL BOND The successful bidder, within seven (7) business days after notification of award, will be required to furnish Performance and Labor and Material Bond provided by a company authorized to issue such bonds in the State of Connecticut, or Certified Check or properly executed Irrevocable Letter of Credit equal to a hundred percent (100%) of the award. In the event that the Contractor where required to provide evidence of insurance and a performance bond does not do so before beginning work, the Town of Fairfield reserves the right to withhold payment from such supplier until the evidence of insurance and performance bond has been received by the Town. All payment and performance bonds shall be written by a surety company or companies licensed to issue bonds in the State of Connecticut, and shall have at least an A-VIII policy holders rating, as reported by A.M. Best Rating Services, or otherwise deemed acceptable by the Town. The Town always reserves the right to reject surety companies, if approved surety bonds cannot be provided the contract shall be terminated. A complete list of certified surety companies can be accessed on the U.S. Government Department of Treasury website: https://www.fiscal.treasury.gov/fsreports/ref/suretyBnd/c570_a-z.htm BOND REQUIREMENT – NON-RESIDENT CONTRACTORS

1. Non-resident contractors are required to deposit with the Department of Revenue Services a sum equivalent to five percent (5%) of the total contract value, as assurance that personal property taxes and/or any other State taxes assessed and due the State during the contract will be paid.

2. If this surety is not deposited with the State, the Town is required to deduct and submit to the State five percent (5%) of the total contract value.

GUARANTEE Equipment, materials, and/or work executed shall be guaranteed for a minimum period of one (1) year against defective material and workmanship. The cost of all labor, materials, shipping charges, and other expenses in conjunction with the replacement of defective equipment, and/or unsatisfactory work, shall be borne by the Contractor. CATALOGUE REFERENCE Unless expressly stated otherwise, any and all reference to commercial types, sales, trade names, and catalogues are intended to be descriptive only and not restrictive; the intent is to indicate the kind and quality of the articles that will be acceptable. Bids on other equivalent makes, or with reference to other catalogue items will be considered. The Bidder is to clearly state exactly what will be furnished. Where possible and feasible, submit an illustration, descriptive material, and/or product sample. INSURANCE The Contractor shall not commence any work under this Contract until all insurance required by this section has been obtained and Certificates of Insurance and any other evidence of required coverage requested by the Town, including a copy of the policy itself, have been received and approved by the Town.


Such policies shall stipulate that no coverage can be changed or canceled, including for non-payment of premium, unless the Town has had thirty (30) days prior notice in writing. Certificates of renewals or changes in policies shall be delivered to the Owner at least thirty (30) days prior to the expiration of the policy. The Town always reserves the right to reject insurance companies, if approved insurance policies cannot be provided the contract shall be terminated. The insurance requirements set forth below are minimum limits of coverage only and in no way limit the Contractor’s liability. The following insurance is required to be maintained in full force until all work required by the contract has been fully completed, except that Products/Completed Operations coverage shall be maintained for five (5) years. Insurance will be primary and non/contributory with a 30-day notice of cancelation in favor of the Town of Fairfield. Insurance carriers will be no less than A-rated and admitted carrier or subject to review by Town of Fairfield. Worker’s Compensation Insurance: The Contractor shall carry Worker’s Compensation and Employer’s Liability Insurance in the form and in such amounts as may be currently required to comply with the Labor Laws of the State of Connecticut. Automobile Insurance: The Contractor shall carry and maintain during the life of the Contract a policy with a combined single limit of $1,000,000 and rider CA9948 or equivalent. This policy shall include all liability of the Contractor arising from the operation of all self-owned motor vehicles used in the performance of the Contract; and shall also include a “non-Ownership” provision covering the operation of motor vehicles not owned by the Contractor, but used in the performance of the work. Comprehensive General Liability:

Bodily Injury and Property Damage $1,000,000 each occurrence/$2,000,000 aggregate Products/Completed Operations $1,000,000 each occurrence/$2,000,000 aggregate

This policy shall include Subcontractor's Liability coverage, protecting the Contractor and the Town against liability arising out of the activities of Subcontractors engaged by him in the performance of the work. Umbrella/Excess Policy: An umbrella policy in the amount of $5,000,000, with respect to all operations the Contractor performs, is required. Waiver of Subrogation: Waiver of subrogation is required on all policies. Pollution Liability Insurance: Where applicable, a policy in the amount of $5,000,000 including coverage for transport and other offsite risks. Such policy must be given to the Town for review and determination of acceptability before an award will be made. Additional Insureds: The Town of Fairfield, Fairfield Board of Education, its officers, officials, employees, agents, Boards, and Commissions shall be named as Additional Insureds on the General Contractor's and Subcontractors’ Comprehensive General Liability, (for ongoing and completed projects), Automobile, and Umbrella. The coverage shall be primary and non-contributory and contain no special limitations on the scope of protection afforded to the Town of Fairfield. A waiver of subrogation applies under general liability, auto liability and workers compensation. Subcontractor’s Insurance: Each Subcontractor engaged by the Contractor to perform any work under the Contract shall obtain all insurance required of the Contractor in the same amounts and subject to the same provisions specified above for the Contractor, including the Additional Insured requirement. Certificates of Insurance shall be submitted to the Contractor and the Town and approved by the Town, before commencing any work. HOLD HARMLESS Contractor shall defend, indemnify, and hold harmless the Town of Fairfield, its officers, employees, agents, or volunteers, from and against any and all claims and demands of any nature for any loss, damage, or injury which any person may suffer by reason of, or in any way arising out of, this Agreement, unless caused by the sole negligence of the Town. OSHA The bidder will certify all equipment complies with all regulations and conditions stipulated under the Williams-Steiger Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1971, as amended. The successful bidder will further certify that all items furnished under this project will conform and comply with Federal and State of Connecticut OSHA standards. The successful bidder will agree to indemnify and hold harmless the Town of Fairfield for any and all damages that may be assessed against the Town.


LIFE CYCLE COSTING Where applicable, Life Cycle Costing will be used as a criterion for awarding bids. This is a method of calculating total cost of ownership of an item over the life of the product, which may include operation and maintenance expenses, transportation, salvage value, and/or disposal costs. FEDERAL, STATE, AND LOCAL LAWS All applicable Federal, State, and local laws, rules, and regulations of all authorities having jurisdiction over the locality of the project shall apply to the contract and are deemed to be included herein. If the total amount of the project, including any current or future change orders, exceeds $100,000.00 all work is to be done in accordance with Connecticut Department of Labor (CT-DOL) rules and regulations. More information may be obtained from: www.ctdol.state.ct.us The Davis-Bacon and Related Acts shall apply to contractors and subcontractors performing on federally funded or assisted contracts in excess of $2,000 for the construction, alteration, or repair (including painting and decorating) of public buildings or public works. More information may be obtained from: https://www.dol.gov/whd/govcontracts/dbra.htm NOTE: The Town shall apply the most current wage decision applicable at the time of contract award. CONFLICT OF INTEREST No officer or employee or member of any elective or appointive board, commission, or committee of the Town, whether temporary or permanent, shall have or acquire any financial interest gained from a successful bid, direct or indirect, aggregating more than one hundred dollars ($100.00), in any project, matter, contract, or business within his/her jurisdiction or the jurisdiction of the board, commission, or committee of which he/she is a member. Nor shall the officer/employee/member have any financial interest, direct or indirect, aggregating more than one hundred dollars ($100.00) in any contract or proposed contract for materials or services to be furnished or used in connection with any project, matter, or thing which comes under his/her jurisdiction or the jurisdiction of the board, commission, committee of which he/she is a member. NON-WAIVER CLAUSE The failure by the Town to require performance of any provision of this bid shall not affect the Town’s right to require performance at any time thereafter, nor shall a waiver of any breach or default of a contract award constitute a waiver of any subsequent breach or default or a waiver of the provision itself. ATTORNEY FEES In the event of litigation relating to the subject matter of this bid document or any resulting contract award, the non-prevailing party shall reimburse the prevailing party for all reasonable attorney fees and costs resulting therefrom. SCOPE OF WORK/SITE INSPECTIONS The bidder declares that the scope of the work has been thoroughly reviewed and any questions resolved (see above for name and number of individual to contact for questions). If applicable, the bidder further declares that the site has been inspected as called for in the specifications (q.v.). EXCEPTION TO SPECIFICATIONS No protest regarding the validity or appropriateness of the specifications or of the Invitation for Bids will be considered, unless the protest is filed in writing with the Purchasing Authority prior to the closing date for the bids. All bid proposals rendered shall be considered meeting the attached specifications unless exceptions are noted on a separate page dated and signed by the bidder. UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED It will be assumed that all terms and conditions and specifications will be complied with and will be considered as part of the Bid Proposal. TAX EXEMPT Federal Tax Exemption 06-6001998. Exempt from State Sales Tax under State General Statues Chapter 219-Section 12-412 Subsection A. No exemption certificates are required, and none will be issued.


REFERENCES Provide reference details of most recent similar scope projects performed: REFERENCE #1:

Name of Company Phone Contact Person Cell Company Address Fax Date work completed Email

REFERENCE #2:


REFERENCE #3:


REFERENCE #4:


REFERENCE #5:



SUBCONTRACTORS Provide subcontractor details if any are to be employed as part of this contract, including labor rates: SUBCONTRACTOR #1:

Name of Company Fed ID # Contact Person Title Company Address Phone Trade Email Rates: Supervisor $_______/hr Foreman $_______ /hr Journeyman $________ /hr Apprentice $________ /hr

SUBCONTRACTOR #2:


SUBCONTRACTOR #3:


SUBCONTRACTOR #4:

Name of Company Fed ID # Contact Person Title Company Address Phone Trade Email Rates: Supervisor $_______/hr Foreman $________ /hr Journeyman $________ /hr Apprentice $________ /hr

NOTE: All sub-contractors are subject to approval by the Town of Fairfield and are required to provide Fed ID #.

AIA®

Document A701TM – 2018 Instructions to Bidders

AIA Document A701™ – 2018. Copyright © 1970, 1974, 1978, 1987, 1997 and 2018 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 11:03:14 ET on 11/01/2019 under Order No. 3038737814 which expires on 10/31/2020, and is not for resale. User Notes: (3B9ADA41)

1

ADDITIONS AND DELETIONS: The author of this document has added information needed for its completion. The author may also have revised the text of the original AIA standard form. An Additions and Deletions Report that notes added information as well as revisions to the standard form text is available from the author and should be reviewed.

This document has important legal consequences. Consultation with an attorney is encouraged with respect to its completion or modification.

FEDERAL, STATE, AND LOCAL LAWS MAY IMPOSE REQUIREMENTS ON PUBLIC PROCUREMENT CONTRACTS. CONSULT LOCAL AUTHORITIES OR AN ATTORNEY TO VERIFY REQUIREMENTS APPLICABLE TO THIS PROCUREMENT BEFORE COMPLETING THIS FORM. It is intended that AIA Document G612™–2017, Owner’s Instructions to the Architect, Parts A and B will be completed prior to using this document.

ELECTRONIC COPYING of any portion of this AIA® Document to another electronic file is prohibited and constitutes a violation of copyright laws as set forth in the footer of this document.

for the following Project: (Name, location, and detailed description) « » « » « » THE OWNER: (Name, legal status, address, and other information) « »« » « » « » « » THE ARCHITECT: (Name, legal status, address, and other information) « »« » « » « » « » TABLE OF ARTICLES 1 DEFINITIONS 2 BIDDER’S REPRESENTATIONS 3 BIDDING DOCUMENTS 4 BIDDING PROCEDURES 5 CONSIDERATION OF BIDS 6 POST-BID INFORMATION 7 PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND 8 ENUMERATION OF THE PROPOSED CONTRACT DOCUMENTS


2

ARTICLE 1 DEFINITIONS § 1.1 Bidding Documents include the Bidding Requirements and the Proposed Contract Documents. The Bidding Requirements consist of the advertisement or invitation to bid, Instructions to Bidders, supplementary instructions to bidders, the bid form, and any other bidding forms. The Proposed Contract Documents consist of the unexecuted form of Agreement between the Owner and Contractor and that Agreement’s Exhibits, Conditions of the Contract (General, Supplementary and other Conditions), Drawings, Specifications, all Addenda, and all other documents enumerated in Article 8 of these Instructions. § 1.2 Definitions set forth in the General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, or in other Proposed Contract Documents apply to the Bidding Documents. § 1.3 Addenda are written or graphic instruments issued by the Architect, which, by additions, deletions, clarifications, or corrections, modify or interpret the Bidding Documents. § 1.4 A Bid is a complete and properly executed proposal to do the Work for the sums stipulated therein, submitted in accordance with the Bidding Documents. § 1.5 The Base Bid is the sum stated in the Bid for which the Bidder offers to perform the Work described in the Bidding Documents, to which Work may be added or deleted by sums stated in Alternate Bids. § 1.6 An Alternate Bid (or Alternate) is an amount stated in the Bid to be added to or deducted from, or that does not change, the Base Bid if the corresponding change in the Work, as described in the Bidding Documents, is accepted. § 1.7 A Unit Price is an amount stated in the Bid as a price per unit of measurement for materials, equipment, or services, or a portion of the Work, as described in the Bidding Documents. § 1.8 A Bidder is a person or entity who submits a Bid and who meets the requirements set forth in the Bidding Documents. § 1.9 A Sub-bidder is a person or entity who submits a bid to a Bidder for materials, equipment, or labor for a portion of the Work. ARTICLE 2 BIDDER’S REPRESENTATIONS § 2.1 By submitting a Bid, the Bidder represents that:

.1 the Bidder has read and understands the Bidding Documents;

.2 the Bidder understands how the Bidding Documents relate to other portions of the Project, if any, being bid concurrently or presently under construction;

.3 the Bid complies with the Bidding Documents;

.4 the Bidder has visited the site, become familiar with local conditions under which the Work is to be performed, and has correlated the Bidder’s observations with the requirements of the Proposed Contract Documents;

.5 the Bid is based upon the materials, equipment, and systems required by the Bidding Documents without exception; and

.6 the Bidder has read and understands the provisions for liquidated damages, if any, set forth in the form of Agreement between the Owner and Contractor.

ARTICLE 3 BIDDING DOCUMENTS § 3.1 Distribution § 3.1.1 Bidders shall obtain complete Bidding Documents, as indicated below, from the issuing office designated in the advertisement or invitation to bid, for the deposit sum, if any, stated therein. (Indicate how, such as by email, website, host site/platform, paper copy, or other method Bidders shall obtain Bidding Documents.) « » § 3.1.2 Any required deposit shall be refunded to Bidders who submit a bona fide Bid and return the paper Bidding Documents in good condition within ten days after receipt of Bids. The cost to replace missing or damaged paper


3

documents will be deducted from the deposit. A Bidder receiving a Contract award may retain the paper Bidding Documents, and the Bidder’s deposit will be refunded. § 3.1.3 Bidding Documents will not be issued directly to Sub-bidders unless specifically offered in the advertisement or invitation to bid, or in supplementary instructions to bidders. § 3.1.4 Bidders shall use complete Bidding Documents in preparing Bids. Neither the Owner nor Architect assumes responsibility for errors or misinterpretations resulting from the use of incomplete Bidding Documents. § 3.1.5 The Bidding Documents will be available for the sole purpose of obtaining Bids on the Work. No license or grant of use is conferred by distribution of the Bidding Documents. § 3.2 Modification or Interpretation of Bidding Documents § 3.2.1 The Bidder shall carefully study the Bidding Documents, shall examine the site and local conditions, and shall notify the Architect of errors, inconsistencies, or ambiguities discovered and request clarification or interpretation pursuant to Section 3.2.2. § 3.2.2 Requests for clarification or interpretation of the Bidding Documents shall be submitted by the Bidder in writing and shall be received by the Architect at least seven days prior to the date for receipt of Bids. (Indicate how, such as by email, website, host site/platform, paper copy, or other method Bidders shall submit requests for clarification and interpretation.) « » § 3.2.3 Modifications and interpretations of the Bidding Documents shall be made by Addendum. Modifications and interpretations of the Bidding Documents made in any other manner shall not be binding, and Bidders shall not rely upon them. § 3.3 Substitutions § 3.3.1 The materials, products, and equipment described in the Bidding Documents establish a standard of required function, dimension, appearance, and quality to be met by any proposed substitution. § 3.3.2 Substitution Process § 3.3.2.1 Written requests for substitutions shall be received by the Architect at least ten days prior to the date for receipt of Bids. Requests shall be submitted in the same manner as that established for submitting clarifications and interpretations in Section 3.2.2. § 3.3.2.2 Bidders shall submit substitution requests on a Substitution Request Form if one is provided in the Bidding Documents. § 3.3.2.3 If a Substitution Request Form is not provided, requests shall include (1) the name of the material or equipment specified in the Bidding Documents; (2) the reason for the requested substitution; (3) a complete description of the proposed substitution including the name of the material or equipment proposed as the substitute, performance and test data, and relevant drawings; and (4) any other information necessary for an evaluation. The request shall include a statement setting forth changes in other materials, equipment, or other portions of the Work, including changes in the work of other contracts or the impact on any Project Certifications (such as LEED), that will result from incorporation of the proposed substitution. § 3.3.3 The burden of proof of the merit of the proposed substitution is upon the proposer. The Architect’s decision of approval or disapproval of a proposed substitution shall be final. § 3.3.4 If the Architect approves a proposed substitution prior to receipt of Bids, such approval shall be set forth in an Addendum. Approvals made in any other manner shall not be binding, and Bidders shall not rely upon them. § 3.3.5 No substitutions will be considered after the Contract award unless specifically provided for in the Contract Documents.


4

§ 3.4 Addenda § 3.4.1 Addenda will be transmitted to Bidders known by the issuing office to have received complete Bidding Documents. (Indicate how, such as by email, website, host site/platform, paper copy, or other method Addenda will be transmitted.) « » § 3.4.2 Addenda will be available where Bidding Documents are on file. § 3.4.3 Addenda will be issued no later than four days prior to the date for receipt of Bids, except an Addendum withdrawing the request for Bids or one which includes postponement of the date for receipt of Bids. § 3.4.4 Prior to submitting a Bid, each Bidder shall ascertain that the Bidder has received all Addenda issued, and the Bidder shall acknowledge their receipt in the Bid. ARTICLE 4 BIDDING PROCEDURES § 4.1 Preparation of Bids § 4.1.1 Bids shall be submitted on the forms included with or identified in the Bidding Documents. § 4.1.2 All blanks on the bid form shall be legibly executed. Paper bid forms shall be executed in a non-erasable medium. § 4.1.3 Sums shall be expressed in both words and numbers, unless noted otherwise on the bid form. In case of discrepancy, the amount entered in words shall govern. § 4.1.4 Edits to entries made on paper bid forms must be initialed by the signer of the Bid. § 4.1.5 All requested Alternates shall be bid. If no change in the Base Bid is required, enter “No Change” or as required by the bid form. § 4.1.6 Where two or more Bids for designated portions of the Work have been requested, the Bidder may, without forfeiture of the bid security, state the Bidder’s refusal to accept award of less than the combination of Bids stipulated by the Bidder. The Bidder shall neither make additional stipulations on the bid form nor qualify the Bid in any other manner. § 4.1.7 Each copy of the Bid shall state the legal name and legal status of the Bidder. As part of the documentation submitted with the Bid, the Bidder shall provide evidence of its legal authority to perform the Work in the jurisdiction where the Project is located. Each copy of the Bid shall be signed by the person or persons legally authorized to bind the Bidder to a contract. A Bid by a corporation shall further name the state of incorporation and have the corporate seal affixed. A Bid submitted by an agent shall have a current power of attorney attached, certifying the agent’s authority to bind the Bidder. § 4.1.8 A Bidder shall incur all costs associated with the preparation of its Bid. § 4.2 Bid Security § 4.2.1 Each Bid shall be accompanied by the following bid security: (Insert the form and amount of bid security.) « » § 4.2.2 The Bidder pledges to enter into a Contract with the Owner on the terms stated in the Bid and shall, if required, furnish bonds covering the faithful performance of the Contract and payment of all obligations arising thereunder. Should the Bidder refuse to enter into such Contract or fail to furnish such bonds if required, the amount of the bid security shall be forfeited to the Owner as liquidated damages, not as a penalty. In the event the Owner fails to comply with Section 6.2, the amount of the bid security shall not be forfeited to the Owner.


5

§ 4.2.3 If a surety bond is required as bid security, it shall be written on AIA Document A310™, Bid Bond, unless otherwise provided in the Bidding Documents. The attorney-in-fact who executes the bond on behalf of the surety shall affix to the bond a certified and current copy of an acceptable power of attorney. The Bidder shall provide surety bonds from a company or companies lawfully authorized to issue surety bonds in the jurisdiction where the Project is located. § 4.2.4 The Owner will have the right to retain the bid security of Bidders to whom an award is being considered until (a) the Contract has been executed and bonds, if required, have been furnished; (b) the specified time has elapsed so that Bids may be withdrawn; or (c) all Bids have been rejected. However, if no Contract has been awarded or a Bidder has not been notified of the acceptance of its Bid, a Bidder may, beginning« »days after the opening of Bids, withdraw its Bid and request the return of its bid security. § 4.3 Submission of Bids § 4.3.1 A Bidder shall submit its Bid as indicated below: (Indicate how, such as by website, host site/platform, paper copy, or other method Bidders shall submit their Bid.) « » § 4.3.2 Paper copies of the Bid, the bid security, and any other documents required to be submitted with the Bid shall be enclosed in a sealed opaque envelope. The envelope shall be addressed to the party receiving the Bids and shall be identified with the Project name, the Bidder’s name and address, and, if applicable, the designated portion of the Work for which the Bid is submitted. If the Bid is sent by mail, the sealed envelope shall be enclosed in a separate mailing envelope with the notation “SEALED BID ENCLOSED” on the face thereof. § 4.3.3 Bids shall be submitted by the date and time and at the place indicated in the invitation to bid. Bids submitted after the date and time for receipt of Bids, or at an incorrect place, will not be accepted. § 4.3.4 The Bidder shall assume full responsibility for timely delivery at the location designated for receipt of Bids. § 4.3.5 A Bid submitted by any method other than as provided in this Section 4.3 will not be accepted. § 4.4 Modification or Withdrawal of Bid § 4.4.1 Prior to the date and time designated for receipt of Bids, a Bidder may submit a new Bid to replace a Bid previously submitted, or withdraw its Bid entirely, by notice to the party designated to receive the Bids. Such notice shall be received and duly recorded by the receiving party on or before the date and time set for receipt of Bids. The receiving party shall verify that replaced or withdrawn Bids are removed from the other submitted Bids and not considered. Notice of submission of a replacement Bid or withdrawal of a Bid shall be worded so as not to reveal the amount of the original Bid. § 4.4.2 Withdrawn Bids may be resubmitted up to the date and time designated for the receipt of Bids in the same format as that established in Section 4.3, provided they fully conform with these Instructions to Bidders. Bid security shall be in an amount sufficient for the Bid as resubmitted. § 4.4.3 After the date and time designated for receipt of Bids, a Bidder who discovers that it made a clerical error in its Bid shall notify the Architect of such error within two days, or pursuant to a timeframe specified by the law of the jurisdiction where the Project is located, requesting withdrawal of its Bid. Upon providing evidence of such error to the reasonable satisfaction of the Architect, the Bid shall be withdrawn and not resubmitted. If a Bid is withdrawn pursuant to this Section 4.4.3, the bid security will be attended to as follows: (State the terms and conditions, such as Bid rank, for returning or retaining the bid security.) « » ARTICLE 5 CONSIDERATION OF BIDS § 5.1 Opening of Bids If stipulated in an advertisement or invitation to bid, or when otherwise required by law, Bids properly identified and received within the specified time limits will be publicly opened and read aloud. A summary of the Bids may be made available to Bidders.


6

§ 5.2 Rejection of Bids Unless otherwise prohibited by law, the Owner shall have the right to reject any or all Bids. § 5.3 Acceptance of Bid (Award) § 5.3.1 It is the intent of the Owner to award a Contract to the lowest responsive and responsible Bidder, provided the Bid has been submitted in accordance with the requirements of the Bidding Documents. Unless otherwise prohibited by law, the Owner shall have the right to waive informalities and irregularities in a Bid received and to accept the Bid which, in the Owner’s judgment, is in the Owner’s best interests. § 5.3.2 Unless otherwise prohibited by law, the Owner shall have the right to accept Alternates in any order or combination, unless otherwise specifically provided in the Bidding Documents, and to determine the lowest responsive and responsible Bidder on the basis of the sum of the Base Bid and Alternates accepted. ARTICLE 6 POST-BID INFORMATION § 6.1 Contractor’s Qualification Statement Bidders to whom award of a Contract is under consideration shall submit to the Architect, upon request and within the timeframe specified by the Architect, a properly executed AIA Document A305™, Contractor’s Qualification Statement, unless such a Statement has been previously required and submitted for this Bid. § 6.2 Owner’s Financial Capability A Bidder to whom award of a Contract is under consideration may request in writing, fourteen days prior to the expiration of the time for withdrawal of Bids, that the Owner furnish to the Bidder reasonable evidence that financial arrangements have been made to fulfill the Owner’s obligations under the Contract. The Owner shall then furnish such reasonable evidence to the Bidder no later than seven days prior to the expiration of the time for withdrawal of Bids. Unless such reasonable evidence is furnished within the allotted time, the Bidder will not be required to execute the Agreement between the Owner and Contractor. § 6.3 Submittals § 6.3.1 After notification of selection for the award of the Contract, the Bidder shall, as soon as practicable or as stipulated in the Bidding Documents, submit in writing to the Owner through the Architect:

.1 a designation of the Work to be performed with the Bidder's own forces;

.2 names of the principal products and systems proposed for the Work and the manufacturers and suppliers of each; and

.3 names of persons or entities (including those who are to furnish materials or equipment fabricated to a special design) proposed for the principal portions of the Work.

§ 6.3.2 The Bidder will be required to establish to the satisfaction of the Architect and Owner the reliability and responsibility of the persons or entities proposed to furnish and perform the Work described in the Bidding Documents. § 6.3.3 Prior to the execution of the Contract, the Architect will notify the Bidder if either the Owner or Architect, after due investigation, has reasonable objection to a person or entity proposed by the Bidder. If the Owner or Architect has reasonable objection to a proposed person or entity, the Bidder may, at the Bidder’s option, withdraw the Bid or submit an acceptable substitute person or entity. The Bidder may also submit any required adjustment in the Base Bid or Alternate Bid to account for the difference in cost occasioned by such substitution. The Owner may accept the adjusted bid price or disqualify the Bidder. In the event of either withdrawal or disqualification, bid security will not be forfeited. § 6.3.4 Persons and entities proposed by the Bidder and to whom the Owner and Architect have made no reasonable objection must be used on the Work for which they were proposed and shall not be changed except with the written consent of the Owner and Architect. ARTICLE 7 PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND § 7.1 Bond Requirements § 7.1.1 If stipulated in the Bidding Documents, the Bidder shall furnish bonds covering the faithful performance of the Contract and payment of all obligations arising thereunder.


7

§ 7.1.2 If the furnishing of such bonds is stipulated in the Bidding Documents, the cost shall be included in the Bid. If the furnishing of such bonds is required after receipt of bids and before execution of the Contract, the cost of such bonds shall be added to the Bid in determining the Contract Sum. § 7.1.3 The Bidder shall provide surety bonds from a company or companies lawfully authorized to issue surety bonds in the jurisdiction where the Project is located. § 7.1.4 Unless otherwise indicated below, the Penal Sum of the Payment and Performance Bonds shall be the amount of the Contract Sum. (If Payment or Performance Bonds are to be in an amount other than 100% of the Contract Sum, indicate the dollar amount or percentage of the Contract Sum.) « » § 7.2 Time of Delivery and Form of Bonds § 7.2.1 The Bidder shall deliver the required bonds to the Owner not later than three days following the date of execution of the Contract. If the Work is to commence sooner in response to a letter of intent, the Bidder shall, prior to commencement of the Work, submit evidence satisfactory to the Owner that such bonds will be furnished and delivered in accordance with this Section 7.2.1. § 7.2.2 Unless otherwise provided, the bonds shall be written on AIA Document A312, Performance Bond and Payment Bond. § 7.2.3 The bonds shall be dated on or after the date of the Contract. § 7.2.4 The Bidder shall require the attorney-in-fact who executes the required bonds on behalf of the surety to affix to the bond a certified and current copy of the power of attorney. ARTICLE 8 ENUMERATION OF THE PROPOSED CONTRACT DOCUMENTS § 8.1 Copies of the proposed Contract Documents have been made available to the Bidder and consist of the following documents:

.1 AIA Document A101™–2017, Standard Form of Agreement Between Owner and Contractor, unless otherwise stated below. (Insert the complete AIA Document number, including year, and Document title.)

« »

.2 AIA Document A101™–2017, Exhibit A, Insurance and Bonds, unless otherwise stated below.

(Insert the complete AIA Document number, including year, and Document title.)

« » .3 AIA Document A201™–2017, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, unless otherwise

stated below. (Insert the complete AIA Document number, including year, and Document title.)

« »

.4 AIA Document E203™–2013, Building Information Modeling and Digital Data Exhibit, dated as

indicated below: (Insert the date of the E203-2013.)

« »

.5 Drawings

Number Title Date « »


8

.6 Specifications

Section Title Date Pages « »

.7 Addenda:

Number Date Pages « »

.8 Other Exhibits:

(Check all boxes that apply and include appropriate information identifying the exhibit where required.)

[ « » ] AIA Document E204™–2017, Sustainable Projects Exhibit, dated as indicated below:

(Insert the date of the E204-2017.)

« »

[ « » ] The Sustainability Plan:

Title Date Pages « »

[ « » ] Supplementary and other Conditions of the Contract:

Document Title Date Pages « »

.9 Other documents listed below:

(List here any additional documents that are intended to form part of the Proposed Contract Documents.) « »

SUPPLEMENTARY INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS

Emergency Communications Center Tenant Fit-Out & Renovation – SHU/Fairfield SIB-1

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 COMPLETION DATE

A. All work as required by these specifications and drawings shall be completed by the date stipulated in the Contractor's bid form. There is no exception to this contract requirement, unless approved otherwise by contract change order.

B. If the Contractor neglects, fails or refuses to achieve substantial completion by 11:59 pm by the date stipulated in the Contractor's bid form for each of the bid components requiring durations or deadlines, liquidated damages of Five Hundred Dollars ($500.00) per day or part thereof shall be due for each bid component to the Owner and subtracted from the unpaid contract amount or bond held by the Owner. "Substantial completion" is as defined in the General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, AIA Document A201 included in this project manual. "Substantial completion" is further defined as the date at which the local authorities with jurisdiction over this project grant a temporary or permanent certificate of occupancy (if required for occupancy) for each project area.

1.2 RESPONSIBILITY FOR MEASUREMENT OF QUANTITIES

A. The Contractor shall have sole responsibility for the accuracy of all measurements and for estimating the material quantities required to satisfy these specifications.

1.3 DISCREPANCIES AND ADDENDA

A. Should a Bidder find any discrepancies in the Drawings and Specifications, or should they be in doubt as to their meaning, they shall notify the Owner at once, who will post a written Addendum to the Town’s website at www.fairfieldct.org. Oral instructions or decisions, unless confirmed by Addenda, will not be considered valid, legal, or binding. No change order requests will be authorized or considered because of the failure of the Contractor to include work called for in the Addenda in their bid.

1.4 MODIFICATIONS TO AIA DOCUMENT A701, Instructions to Bidders, 2018.

The following sections modify the provisions and procedures to the degree listed in the sections and articles listed in these supplementary instructions.

ARTICLE 3 Make the following changes:

3.1.1 Delete all but the first sentence and “, as indicated below,” from the first sentence.

3.1.2 Delete in its entirety.


3.3.2.1 Delete all but the first sentence.

3.4.1 Revise to read as follows: Addenda will be posted to the Town of Fairfield’s website, www.fairfieldct.org.



3.4.3 Revise to read as follows: Addenda will be issued no later than October 8, 2020 except an Addendum withdrawing the request for Bids or one which includes postponement of the date for receipt of bids.


4.2.1 Revise to read as follows: “Each Bid shall be accompanied by the bid security as indicated on the Invitation to Bid.”

4.2.3 Revise to read as follows: Bid surety to be furnished on standard forms by Bidder’s surety.

4.2.4 Revise last sentence to read as follows: “However, if no Contract has been awarded or a Bidder has not been notified of the acceptance of its Bid, a Bidder may withdraw its Bid and request the return of its bid security after the length of time on the Invitation to Bid.”

4.3.1 Add to the end the following: “Paper copy”.

4.4.3 Add to the end the following: “Owner will return bid security to the Bidder.”


5.1 Revise to read as follows: The properly identified Bids received on time will be publicly opened and read aloud. An abstract of the Bids may be made available to Bidders and will be posted on the Town of Fairfield’s website, www.fairfieldct.org.


6.1 Delete the phrase “properly executed AIA Document A305”.

Add the following:

6.1.1 The Owner will make investigations as he deems necessary to determine the ability of the Bidder to perform the Work, and the Bidder shall furnish the Owner all such information and data for this purpose as the Owner may request.

6.2 Delete in its entirety.

6.4 Work Phasing Schedule Bidders to whom award of the Contractor is under consideration shall submit to the Architect within fifteen (15) days of the Contract date, a detailed work Phasing Schedule describing the bodies of work to be undertaken and areas of the project to be addressed in per week periods between the Award of the Contract and the Bidder's proposed date of Substantial Completion.



7.3 The Contractor and the Surety, jointly and severally, bind themselves, their heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns to the Owner for the performance of the Construction Contract, which is incorporated herein by reference.



7.4 If the Contractor performs the Construction Contract, the Surety and the Contractor shall have no obligation under this Bond, except to participate in conferences as provided in Subparagraph 7.5.1.

7.5 If there is no Owner Default, the Surety's obligation under this Bond shall arise after:

7.5.1 The Owner has notified the Contractor and the Surety at its address described in Paragraph 7.12 below that the Owner is considering declaring a Contractor Default and has requested and attempted to arrange a conference with the Contractor and the Surety to be held not later than fifteen days after receipt of such notice to discuss methods of performing the Construction Contract. If the Owner, the Contractor and the Surety agree, the Contractor shall be allowed a reasonable time to perform the Construction Contract, but such an agreement shall not waive the Owner's right, if any, subsequently to declare a Contractor Default and

7.5.2 The Owner has declared a Contractor Default and formally terminated the Contractor's right to complete the contract. Such Contractor Default shall not be declared earlier than twenty (20) days after the Contractor and the Surety have received notice as provided in Subparagraph 7.5.1; and

7.5.3 The Owner has agreed to pay the Balance of the Contract Price to the Surety in accordance with the terms of the Construction Contract or to a contractor selected to perform the Construction Contract in accordance with the terms of the contract with the Owner.

7.6 When the Owner has satisfied the conditions of Paragraph 7.5.3, the Surety shall promptly and at the Surety's expense take one of the following actions:

7.6.1 Arrange for the Contractor, with consent of the Owner, to perform and complete the Construction Contract; or

7.6.2 Undertake to perform and complete the Construction Contract itself, through its agents or through independent contractors; or

7.6.3 Obtain bids from qualified contractors acceptable to the Owner for a contract for performance and completion of the Construction Contract, arrange for a contract to be prepared for execution by the Owner and the contractor selected with the Owner's concurrence, to be secured with performance and payment bonds executed by a qualified surety equivalent to the bonds issued on the Construction Contract, and pay to the Owner the amount of damages (as described in Paragraph 7.8) in excess of the Balance of the Contract Price incurred by the Owner resulting from the Contractor's default: or

7.6.4 Waive its right to perform and complete, arrange for completion, or obtain a new contractor and with reasonable promptness under the circumstances:

.1 After investigation, determine the amount for which it may be liable to the Owner and, as soon as practicable after the amount is determined, tender payment therefore to the Owner; or

.2 Deny liability in whole or in part and notify the Owner citing reasons therefore.



7.7 If the Surety does not proceed as provided in Paragraph 7.6 with reasonable promptness, the Surety shall be deemed to be in default on this Bond fifteen (15) days after receipt of an additional written notice from the Owner to the Surety demanding that the Surety perform its obligations under this Bond, and the Owner shall be entitled to enforce any remedy available to the Owner. If the Surety proceeds as provided in Subparagraph 7.6.4, and the Owner refuses the payment rendered or the Surety has denied liability, in whole or in part, without further notice the Owner shall be entitled to enforce any remedy available to the Owner.

7.8 After the Owner has terminated the Contractor's right to complete the Construction Contract, and if the Surety elects to act under Subparagraph 7.6.1, 7.6.2, or 7.6.3 above, then the responsibilities of the Surety to the Owner shall not be greater than those of the Contractor under the Construction Contract, and the responsibilities of the Owner to the Surety shall not be greater than those of the Owner under the Construction Contract. To the limit of the amount of this Bond, but subject to commitment by the Owner of the Balance of the Contract Price to mitigation of costs and damages on the Construction Contract, the Surety is obligated without duplication for:

7.8.1 The responsibilities of the Contractor for correction of defective work and completion of the Construction Contract;

7.8.2 Additional legal, design professional and delay costs resulting from the Contractor's Default, and resulting from the actions or failure to act of the Surety under Paragraph 7.6; and

7.8.3 Late delivery penalties or if penalties are not specified in the Construction Contract, actual damages caused by delayed performance or non-performance of the Contractor.

7.9 The Surety shall not be liable to the Owner or others for obligations of the Contractor that are unrelated to the Construction Contract, and the Balance of the Contract Price shall not be reduced or set off on account of any such unrelated obligations. No right of action shall accrue on this Bond to any person or entity other than the Owner or its heirs, executors, administrators, or successors.

7.10 The Surety hereby waives notice of any change, including changes of time, to the Construction Contract or to related subcontracts, purchase orders, and other obligations.

7.11 Any proceeding, legal or equitable, under this Bond may be instituted in any court of competent jurisdiction in the location in which the work or part of the work is located and shall be instituted within two (2) years after Contractor Default or within two (2) years after the Contractor ceased working or within two (2) years after the Surety refuses or fails to perform its obligations under this Bond, whichever occurs first. If the provisions of this Paragraph are void or prohibited by law, the minimum period of limitation available to sureties as a defense in the jurisdiction of the suit shall be applicable.

7.12 Notice to the Surety, the Owner or the Contractor shall be mailed or delivered to the address shown on the signature page.

7.13 When this Bond has been furnished to comply with a statutory or other legal requirement in the location where the construction was to be performed, any provision in this Bond conflicting with said statutory or legal requirement shall be deemed deleted herefrom and provisions



conforming to such statutory or other legal requirement shall be deemed incorporated herein. The intent is that this Bond shall be construed as a statutory bond and not as a common-law bond.

7.14 Definitions.

7.14.1 Balance of the Contract Price: The total amount payable by the Owner to the Contractor under the Construction Contract after all proper adjustments have been made, including allowance to the Contractor of any amounts received or to be received by the Owner in settlement of insurance or other claims for damages to which the Contractor is entitled, reduced by all valid and proper payments made to or on behalf of the Contractor under the Construction Contract.

7.14.2 Construction Contract: The agreement between the Owner and the Contractor identified on the signature page, including all Contract Documents and changes thereto.

7.14.3 Contractor Default: Failure of the Contractor, which has neither been remedied nor waived, to perform or otherwise to comply with the terms of the Construction Contract.

7.14.4 Owner Default: Failure of the Owner, which has neither been remedied nor waived, to pay the Contractor as required by the Construction Contract or to perform and complete or comply with the other terms thereof.


Delete in its entirety.

Add the following Articles:

ARTICLE 9 MISCELLANEOUS REQUIREMENTS

9.1 Watchman The employment of continuous watchman service to guard the property during any and all hours shall be at the discretion of the Contractor. However, the Contractor shall remove and restore all work or temporary structures damaged by fire, vandalism or similar acts at no extra cost to the Owner.

9.2 Overtime The Contractor must include within their base price all overtime, nights, holidays and weekends as required to meet the Project Completion date.

9.3 Supervision The Contractor must provide full-time, properly qualified on-site supervision for the entire duration of the project, while workpersons are on site.

ARTICLE 10 BIDDERS REPRESENTATION Each bidder shall fully acquaint himself with conditions as they exist, so that he fully understands the complexities and restrictions attending the execution of the Work included in the Bid Documents. The failure to receive or examine any form, instrument, or document, or to visit the site to become acquainted with field conditions, shall in no way relieve the Bidder from any obligation with respect to the Bidder's proposal.



END OF SECTION

BID FORM

Emergency Communications Center Tenant Fit-Out & Renovation – SHU/Fairfield Bid Form-1

(To be submitted in duplicate)

BIDDER: __________________________________________ Name __________________________________________ Address

To: Town of Fairfield c/o Purchasing Department 725 Old Post Road Fairfield, CT 06825

Project: Emergency Communications Center Tenant Fit-Out & Renovation Sacred Heart University 5151 Park Avenue Fairfield, CT 06825 Bid #2021-28

In preparing this bid, we have carefully examined the Bidding Documents for this Project. We have visited the site and noted the conditions affecting the Work.

The Bidding Documents referred to include Drawings and Project Manual dated September 23, 2020, prepared by Silver/Petrucelli + Associates, Inc., Hamden, Connecticut.

We propose to perform the work described in the Bidding Documents, in keeping with definitions of Article 1 of the Instructions to Bidders, for the Base Bid Sum as follows:

Base Bid:

Entire Project for the Total Cost of:

$ Dollars ($ .00). written figure

We will commence work on the project _______ calendar days after receipt of "Notice to Proceed" or signing of Contract, whichever is sooner. We will be able to substantially complete the project within ________ calendar days thereafter. (See Invitation to Bid and SIB 1.1.B).

Allowances: (See Section 012100)

Allowance No. 1: Gas Utility Service Charges (part of Base Bid) $ __________

Alternates:

The undersigned proposes to furnish all Labor, Materials, Equipment and Services necessary to construct the items listed in the Alternates described in Section 012300 for the stipulated sum of:

DEDUCT ALTERNATE NO. 1: Generator: Deduct from the Base Bid a Total of:


BID FORM


The project schedule will be (increased/decreased) by _____ calendar days to complete the work indicated under Deduct Alternate 1.

DEDUCT ALTERNATE NO. 2: UPS: Deduct from the Base Bid a Total of:


The project schedule will be (increased/decreased) by _____ calendar days to complete the work indicated under Deduct Alternate 2.

If written notice of the acceptance of this Bid is mailed, telegraphed or delivered to the undersigned at the Address designated below, within ninety (90) days after the date of Bid Opening, or any time thereafter before this Bid is withdrawn, the undersigned will, within ten (10) days after the date of mailing, telegraphing or delivering of the notice, execute and deliver a contract in the Standard Form of Agreement Between the Owner and Contractor, AIA Document A101, or similar contract modified as may be mutually agree upon.

The undersigned acknowledges that he has examined the documents, visited and examined the site as required under "Instructions to Bidders", examined the availability of labor and materials and further agrees to comply with all the requirements as to the conditions of employment and wage rates set forth by the Department of Labor.

Addenda:

The undersigned acknowledges receipt of the following addenda to the Contract Documents, listed by number and date:

Number , Dated: Number , Dated: Number , Dated: Number , Dated:

Exceptions:

ATTACHMENTS – Attached hereto is:

1. Town of Fairfield Invitation to Bid 2. Bid Bond 3. Contractor Prequalification Statement 4. Update Bid Statement 5. CHRO Bidder Contract Compliance Monitoring Report

NON-COLLUSIVE BID STATEMENT

The undersigned bidder certifies that this bid is made independently and without collusion, agreement, understanding or planned course of action with any other bidder and that the contents of the bid shall not be disclosed to anyone other than employees, agents or sureties prior to the official bid opening.

BID FORM


Signature: Date:

Printed Name and Title of Agent submitting bid:

Name of Company:

Address:

Telephone Number: Fax Number:

E-mail:

This Bid may be withdrawn prior to the scheduled Bid Opening or any postponement thereof.

COMMISSION ON HUMAN RIGHTS AND OPPORTUNITIES

CONTRACT COMPLIANCE REGULATIONS

NOTIFICATION TO BIDDERS (Revised 09/3/15)

The contract to be awarded is subject to contract compliance requirements mandated by Sections 4a-60 and 4a-

60a of the Connecticut General Statutes; and, when the awarding agency is the State, Sections 46a-71(d) and

46a-81i(d) of the Connecticut General Statutes. There are Contract Compliance Regulations codified at Section

46a-68j-21 through 43 of the Regulations of Connecticut State Agencies, which establish a procedure for

awarding all contracts covered by Sections 4a-60 and 46a-71(d) of the Connecticut General Statutes.

According to Section 46a-68j-30(9) of the Contract Compliance Regulations, every agency awarding a contract

subject to the contract compliance requirements has an obligation to “aggressively solicit the participation of

legitimate minority business enterprises as bidders, contractors, subcontractors and suppliers of materials.”

“Minority business enterprise” is defined in Section 4a-60 of the Connecticut General Statutes as a business

wherein fifty-one percent or more of the capital stock, or assets belong to a person or persons: “(1) Who are

active in daily affairs of the enterprise; (2) who have the power to direct the management and policies of the

enterprise; and (3) who are members of a minority, as such term is defined in subsection (a) of Section 32-9n.”

“Minority” groups are defined in Section 32-9n of the Connecticut General Statutes as “(1) Black Americans . . .

(2) Hispanic Americans . . . (3) persons who have origins in the Iberian Peninsula . . . (4)Women . . . (5) Asian

Pacific Americans and Pacific Islanders; (6) American Indians . . .” An individual with a disability is also a

minority business enterprise as provided by Section 4a-60g of the Connecticut General Statutes. The above

definitions apply to the contract compliance requirements by virtue of Section 46a-68j-21(11) of the Contract

Compliance Regulations.

The awarding agency will consider the following factors when reviewing the bidder’s qualifications under the

contract compliance requirements:

(a) the bidder’s success in implementing an affirmative action plan;

(b) the bidder’s success in developing an apprenticeship program complying with Sections 46a-68-1 to

46a-68-17 of the Administrative Regulations of Connecticut State Agencies, inclusive;

(c) the bidder’s promise to develop and implement a successful affirmative action plan;

(d) the bidder’s submission of employment statistics contained in the “Employment Information

Form”, indicating that the composition of its workforce is at or near parity when compared to the

racial and sexual composition of the workforce in the relevant labor market area; and

(e) the bidder’s promise to set aside a portion of the contract for legitimate minority

business enterprises. See Section 46a-68j-30(10)(E) of the Contract Compliance Regulations.

INSTRUCTIONS AND OTHER INFORMATION

The following BIDDER CONTRACT COMPLIANCE MONITORING REPORT must be completed in full, signed, and

submitted with the bid for this contract. The contract awarding agency and the Commission on Human Rights and Opportunities

will use the information contained thereon to determine the bidders compliance to Sections 4a-60 and 4a-60a CONN. GEN.

STAT., and Sections 46a-68j-23 of the Regulations of Connecticut State Agencies regarding equal employment opportunity, and

the bidder’s good faith efforts to include minority business enterprises as subcontractors and suppliers for the work of the

contract.

1) Definition of Small Contractor Section 4a-60g CONN. GEN. STAT. defines a small contractor as a company that has been doing business under the same

management and control and has maintained its principal place of business in Connecticut for a one year period immediately

prior to its application for certification under this section, had gross revenues not exceeding fifteen million dollars in the

most recently completed fiscal year, and at least fifty-one percent of the ownership of which is held by a person or persons who

are active in the daily affairs of the company, and have the power to direct the management and policies of the company, except

that a nonprofit corporation shall be construed to be a small contractor if such nonprofit corporation meets the requirements

of subparagraphs (A) and (B) of subdivision 4a-60g CONN. GEN. STAT.

2) Description of Job Categories (as used in Part IV Bidder Employment Information) (Page 2)

MANAGEMENT: Managers plan, organize, direct, and

control the major functions of an organization through

subordinates who are at the managerial or supervisory

level. They make policy decisions and set objectives for the

company or departments. They are not usually directly

involved in production or providing services. Examples

include top executives, public relations managers,

managers of operations specialties (such as financial,

human resources, or purchasing managers), and

construction and engineering managers.

BUSINESS AND FINANCIAL OPERATIONS: These

occupations include managers and professionals who work

with the financial aspects of the business. These

occupations include accountants and auditors, purchasing

agents, management analysts, labor relations specialists,

and budget, credit, and financial analysts.

MARKETING AND SALES: Occupations related to the

act or process of buying and selling products and/or

services such as sales engineer, retail sales workers and

sales representatives including wholesale.

LEGAL OCCUPATIONS: In-House Counsel who is

charged with providing legal advice and services in regards

to legal issues that may arise during the course of standard

business practices. This category also includes assistive

legal occupations such as paralegals, legal assistants.

COMPUTER SPECIALISTS: Professionals responsible

for the computer operations within a company are grouped

in this category. Examples of job titles in this category

include computer programmers, software engineers,

database administrators, computer scientists, systems

analysts, and computer support specialists

ARCHITECTURE AND ENGINEERING: Occupations

related to architecture, surveying, engineering, and drafting

are included in this category. Some of the job titles in this

category include electrical and electronic engineers,

surveyors, architects, drafters, mechanical engineers,

materials engineers, mapping technicians, and civil

engineers.

OFFICE AND ADMINISTRATIVE SUPPORT: All

clerical-type work is included in this category. These jobs

involve the preparing, transcribing, and preserving of

written communications and records; collecting accounts;

gathering and distributing information; operating office

machines and electronic data processing equipment; and

distributing mail. Job titles listed in this category include

telephone operators, bill and account collectors, customer

service representatives, dispatchers, secretaries and

administrative assistants, computer operators and clerks

(such as payroll, shipping, stock, mail and file).

BUILDING AND GROUNDS CLEANING AND

MAINTENANCE: This category includes occupations

involving landscaping, housekeeping, and janitorial

services. Job titles found in this category include

supervisors of landscaping or housekeeping, janitors,

maids, grounds maintenance workers, and pest control

workers.

CONSTRUCTION AND EXTRACTION: This

category includes construction trades and related

occupations. Job titles found in this category include

boilermakers, masons (all types), carpenters, construction

laborers, electricians, plumbers (and related trades),

roofers, sheet metal workers, elevator installers,

hazardous materials removal workers, paperhangers, and

painters. Paving, surfacing, and tamping equipment

operators; drywall and ceiling tile installers; and carpet,

floor and tile installers and finishers are also included in

this category. First line supervisors, foremen, and helpers

in these trades are also grouped in this category..

INSTALLATION, MAINTENANCE AND REPAIR:

Occupations involving the installation, maintenance, and

repair of equipment are included in this group. Examples

of job titles found here are heating, ac, and refrigeration

mechanics and installers; telecommunication line

installers and repairers; heavy vehicle and mobile

equipment service technicians and mechanics; small

engine mechanics; security and fire alarm systems

installers; electric/electronic repair, industrial, utility and

transportation equipment; millwrights; riggers; and

manufactured building and mobile home installers. First

line supervisors, foremen, and helpers for these jobs are

also included in the category.

MATERIAL MOVING WORKERS: The job titles

included in this group are Crane and tower operators;

dredge, excavating, and lading machine operators; hoist

and winch operators; industrial truck and tractor

operators; cleaners of vehicles and equipment; laborers

and freight, stock, and material movers, hand; machine

feeders and offbearers; packers and packagers, hand;

pumping station operators; refuse and recyclable material

collectors; and miscellaneous material moving workers.

PRODUCTION WORKERS: The job titles included in

this category are chemical production machine setters,

operators and tenders; crushing/grinding workers; cutting

workers; inspectors, testers sorters, samplers, weighers;

precious stone/metal workers; painting workers;

cementing/gluing machine operators and tenders;

etchers/engravers; molders, shapers and casters except

for metal and plastic; and production workers.

3) Definition of Racial and Ethnic Terms (as used in Part IV Bidder Employment Information) (Page 3)

White (not of Hispanic Origin)- All persons having

origins in any of the original peoples of Europe, North

Africa, or the Middle East.

Black(not of Hispanic Origin)- All persons having

origins in any of the Black racial groups of Africa.

Hispanic- All persons of Mexican, Puerto Rican, Cuban,

Central or South American, or other Spanish culture or

origin, regardless of race.

Asian or Pacific Islander- All persons having origins in any

of the original peoples of the Far East, Southeast Asia, the

Indian subcontinent, or the Pacific Islands. This area includes

China, India, Japan, Korea, the Philippine Islands, and

Samoa.

American Indian or Alaskan Native- All persons having

origins in any of the original peoples of North America, and

who maintain cultural identification through tribal affiliation

or community recognition.

BIDDER CONTRACT COMPLIANCE MONITORING REPORT

PART I - Bidder Information

Company Name

Street Address

City & State

Chief Executive

Bidder Federal Employer

Identification Number

Or

Social Security Number

Major Business Activity (brief description)

Bidder Identification

(response optional/definitions on page 1)

-Bidder is a small contractor. Yes No

-Bidder is a minority business enterprise Yes No

(If yes, check ownership category)

Black Hispanic Asian American American Indian/Alaskan

Native Iberian Peninsula Individual(s) with a Physical Disability

Female

- Bidder is certified as above by State of CT Yes No

Bidder Parent Company (If any)

Other Locations in Ct. (If any)

PART II - Bidder Nondiscrimination Policies and Procedures

1. Does your company have a written Affirmative Action/Equal Employment

Opportunity statement posted on company bulletin boards?

Yes No

7. Do all of your company contracts and purchase orders contain non-discrimination

statements as required by Sections 4a-60 & 4a-60a Conn. Gen. Stat.?

Yes No

2. Does your company have the state-mandated sexual harassment prevention in

the workplace policy posted on company bulletin boards?

Yes No

8. Do you, upon request, provide reasonable accommodation to employees, or

applicants for employment, who have physical or mental disability?

Yes No

3. Do you notify all recruitment sources in writing of your company’s

Affirmative Action/Equal Employment Opportunity employment policy?

Yes No

9. Does your company have a mandatory retirement age for all employees?

Yes No

4. Do your company advertisements contain a written statement that you are an

Affirmative Action/Equal Opportunity Employer? Yes No

10. If your company has 50 or more employees, have you provided at least two (2)

hours of sexual harassment training to all of your supervisors?

Yes No NA

5. Do you notify the Ct. State Employment Service of all employment

openings with your company? Yes No

11. If your company has apprenticeship programs, do they meet the Affirmative

Action/Equal Employment Opportunity requirements of the apprenticeship standards

of the Ct. Dept. of Labor? Yes No NA

6. Does your company have a collective bargaining agreement with workers?

Yes No

6a. If yes, do the collective bargaining agreements contain

non-discrim ination clauses covering all workers? Yes No

6b. Have you notified each union in writing of your commitments under the

nondiscrimination requirements of contracts with the state of Ct?

Yes No

12. Does your company have a written affirmative action Plan? Yes No

If no, please explain.

13. Is there a person in your company who is responsible for equal

employment opportunity? Yes No

If yes, give name and phone number.

Part III - Bidder Subcontracting Practices (Page 4)

1. Will the work of this contract include subcontractors or suppliers? Yes No

1a. If yes, please list all subcontractors and suppliers and report if they are a small contractor and/or a minority business enterprise. (defined on page 1 / use

additional sheet if necessary)

1b. Will the work of this contract require additional subcontractors or suppliers other than those identified in 1a. above? Yes No

PART IV - Bidder Employment Information Date:

JOB CATEGORY *

OVERALL TOTALS

WHITE (not of Hispanic origin)

BLACK (not of Hispanic

origin)

HISPANIC

ASIAN or PACIFIC ISLANDER

AMERICAN INDIAN or ALASKAN NATIVE

Male

Female

Male

Female

Male

Female

Male

Female

male

female

Management

Business & Financial Ops

Marketing & Sales

Legal Occupations

Computer Specialists

Architecture/Engineering

Office & Admin Support

Bldg/ Grounds Cleaning/Maintenance

Construction & Extraction

Installation , Maintenance

& Repair

Material Moving Workers

Production Occupations

TOTALS ABOVE

Total One Year Ago

FORMAL ON THE JOB TRAINEES (ENTER FIGURES FOR THE SAME CATEGORIES AS ARE SHOWN ABOVE)

Apprentices

Trainees

*NOTE: JOB CATEGORIES CAN BE CHANGED OR ADDED TO (EX. SALES CAN BE ADDED OR REPLACE A CATEGORY NOT USED IN YOUR COMPANY)

PART V - Bidder Hiring and Recruitment Practices (Page 5)

1. Which of the following recruitment sources are used by you? (Check yes or no, and report percent used)

2. Check (X) any of the below listed requirements that you use as a hiring qualification

(X)

3. Describe below any other practices or actions that you take which show that you hire, train, and promote employees without discrimination

SOURCE

YES

NO

% of applicants provided by source

State Employment Service

Work Experience

Private Employment Agencies

Ability to Speak or Write English

Schools and Colleges

Written Tests

Newspaper Advertisement

High School Diploma

Walk Ins

College Degree

Present Employees

Union Membership

Labor Organizations

Personal Recommendation

Minority/Community Organizations

Height or Weight

Others (please identify)

Car Ownership

Arrest Record

Wage Garnishments

Certification (Read this form and check your statements on it CAREFULLY before signing). I certify that the statements made by me on this BIDDER CONTRACT COMPLIANCE MONITORING REPORT are complete and true to the best of my knowledge and belief, and are made in good faith. I understand that if I knowingly make any misstatements of facts, I am subject to be declared in non-compliance with Section 4a-60, 4a-60a, and related sections of the CONN. GEN. STAT.

(Signature)

(Title)

(Date Signed)

(Telephone)

AIA®

Document A101TM – 2017 Standard Form of Agreement Between Owner and Contractor where the basis of payment is a Stipulated Sum

AIA Document A101™ – 2017. Copyright © 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1967, 1974, 1977, 1987, 1991, 1997, 2007 and 2017 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 10:59:40 ET on 11/01/2019 under Order No. 3038737814 which expires on 10/31/2020, and is not for resale. User Notes: (3B9ADA43)

1



The parties should complete A101™–2017, Exhibit A, Insurance and Bonds, contemporaneously with this Agreement. AIA Document A201™–2017, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, is adopted in this document by reference. Do not use with other general conditions unless this document is modified.


AGREEMENT made as of the « » day of « » in the year « » (In words, indicate day, month and year.) BETWEEN the Owner: (Name, legal status, address and other information) « »« » « » « » « » and the Contractor: (Name, legal status, address and other information) « »« » « » « » « » for the following Project: (Name, location and detailed description) « » « » « » The Architect: (Name, legal status, address and other information) « »« » « » « » « » The Owner and Contractor agree as follows.


2

TABLE OF ARTICLES 1 THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 2 THE WORK OF THIS CONTRACT 3 DATE OF COMMENCEMENT AND SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION 4 CONTRACT SUM 5 PAYMENTS 6 DISPUTE RESOLUTION 7 TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION 8 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS 9 ENUMERATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS EXHIBIT A INSURANCE AND BONDS ARTICLE 1 THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS The Contract Documents consist of this Agreement, Conditions of the Contract (General, Supplementary, and other Conditions), Drawings, Specifications, Addenda issued prior to execution of this Agreement, other documents listed in this Agreement, and Modifications issued after execution of this Agreement, all of which form the Contract, and are as fully a part of the Contract as if attached to this Agreement or repeated herein. The Contract represents the entire and integrated agreement between the parties hereto and supersedes prior negotiations, representations, or agreements, either written or oral. An enumeration of the Contract Documents, other than a Modification, appears in Article 9. ARTICLE 2 THE WORK OF THIS CONTRACT The Contractor shall fully execute the Work described in the Contract Documents, except as specifically indicated in the Contract Documents to be the responsibility of others. ARTICLE 3 DATE OF COMMENCEMENT AND SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION § 3.1 The date of commencement of the Work shall be: (Check one of the following boxes.) [ « » ] The date of this Agreement. [ « » ] A date set forth in a notice to proceed issued by the Owner. [ « » ] Established as follows:

(Insert a date or a means to determine the date of commencement of the Work.) « » If a date of commencement of the Work is not selected, then the date of commencement shall be the date of this Agreement. § 3.2 The Contract Time shall be measured from the date of commencement of the Work. § 3.3 Substantial Completion § 3.3.1 Subject to adjustments of the Contract Time as provided in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall achieve Substantial Completion of the entire Work: (Check one of the following boxes and complete the necessary information.)


3

[ « » ] Not later than « » ( « » ) calendar days from the date of commencement of the Work. [ « » ] By the following date: « » § 3.3.2 Subject to adjustments of the Contract Time as provided in the Contract Documents, if portions of the Work are to be completed prior to Substantial Completion of the entire Work, the Contractor shall achieve Substantial Completion of such portions by the following dates:

Portion of Work Substantial Completion Date « »

§ 3.3.3 If the Contractor fails to achieve Substantial Completion as provided in this Section 3.3, liquidated damages, if any, shall be assessed as set forth in Section 4.5. ARTICLE 4 CONTRACT SUM § 4.1 The Owner shall pay the Contractor the Contract Sum in current funds for the Contractor’s performance of the Contract. The Contract Sum shall be « » ($ « » ), subject to additions and deductions as provided in the Contract Documents. § 4.2 Alternates § 4.2.1 Alternates, if any, included in the Contract Sum:

Item Price « »

§ 4.2.2 Subject to the conditions noted below, the following alternates may be accepted by the Owner following execution of this Agreement. Upon acceptance, the Owner shall issue a Modification to this Agreement. (Insert below each alternate and the conditions that must be met for the Owner to accept the alternate.)

Item Price Conditions for Acceptance « »

§ 4.3 Allowances, if any, included in the Contract Sum: (Identify each allowance.)

Item Price « »

§ 4.4 Unit prices, if any: (Identify the item and state the unit price and quantity limitations, if any, to which the unit price will be applicable.)

Item Units and Limitations Price per Unit ($0.00) « »

§ 4.5 Liquidated damages, if any: (Insert terms and conditions for liquidated damages, if any.) « » § 4.6 Other: (Insert provisions for bonus or other incentives, if any, that might result in a change to the Contract Sum.) « »


4

ARTICLE 5 PAYMENTS § 5.1 Progress Payments § 5.1.1 Based upon Applications for Payment submitted to the Architect by the Contractor and Certificates for Payment issued by the Architect, the Owner shall make progress payments on account of the Contract Sum to the Contractor as provided below and elsewhere in the Contract Documents. § 5.1.2 The period covered by each Application for Payment shall be one calendar month ending on the last day of the month, or as follows: « » § 5.1.3 Provided that an Application for Payment is received by the Architect not later than the « » day of a month, the Owner shall make payment of the amount certified to the Contractor not later than the « » day of the « » month. If an Application for Payment is received by the Architect after the application date fixed above, payment of the amount certified shall be made by the Owner not later than « » ( « » ) days after the Architect receives the Application for Payment. (Federal, state or local laws may require payment within a certain period of time.) § 5.1.4 Each Application for Payment shall be based on the most recent schedule of values submitted by the Contractor in accordance with the Contract Documents. The schedule of values shall allocate the entire Contract Sum among the various portions of the Work. The schedule of values shall be prepared in such form, and supported by such data to substantiate its accuracy, as the Architect may require. This schedule of values shall be used as a basis for reviewing the Contractor’s Applications for Payment. § 5.1.5 Applications for Payment shall show the percentage of completion of each portion of the Work as of the end of the period covered by the Application for Payment. § 5.1.6 In accordance with AIA Document A201™–2017, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, and subject to other provisions of the Contract Documents, the amount of each progress payment shall be computed as follows: § 5.1.6.1 The amount of each progress payment shall first include:

.1 That portion of the Contract Sum properly allocable to completed Work;

.2 That portion of the Contract Sum properly allocable to materials and equipment delivered and suitably stored at the site for subsequent incorporation in the completed construction, or, if approved in advance by the Owner, suitably stored off the site at a location agreed upon in writing; and

.3 That portion of Construction Change Directives that the Architect determines, in the Architect’s professional judgment, to be reasonably justified.

§ 5.1.6.2 The amount of each progress payment shall then be reduced by:

.1 The aggregate of any amounts previously paid by the Owner;

.2 The amount, if any, for Work that remains uncorrected and for which the Architect has previously withheld a Certificate for Payment as provided in Article 9 of AIA Document A201–2017;

.3 Any amount for which the Contractor does not intend to pay a Subcontractor or material supplier, unless the Work has been performed by others the Contractor intends to pay;

.4 For Work performed or defects discovered since the last payment application, any amount for which the Architect may withhold payment, or nullify a Certificate of Payment in whole or in part, as provided in Article 9 of AIA Document A201–2017; and

.5 Retainage withheld pursuant to Section 5.1.7. § 5.1.7 Retainage § 5.1.7.1 For each progress payment made prior to Substantial Completion of the Work, the Owner may withhold the following amount, as retainage, from the payment otherwise due: (Insert a percentage or amount to be withheld as retainage from each Application for Payment. The amount of retainage may be limited by governing law.) « »


5

§ 5.1.7.1.1 The following items are not subject to retainage: (Insert any items not subject to the withholding of retainage, such as general conditions, insurance, etc.) « » § 5.1.7.2 Reduction or limitation of retainage, if any, shall be as follows: (If the retainage established in Section 5.1.7.1 is to be modified prior to Substantial Completion of the entire Work, including modifications for Substantial Completion of portions of the Work as provided in Section 3.3.2, insert provisions for such modifications.) « » § 5.1.7.3 Except as set forth in this Section 5.1.7.3, upon Substantial Completion of the Work, the Contractor may submit an Application for Payment that includes the retainage withheld from prior Applications for Payment pursuant to this Section 5.1.7. The Application for Payment submitted at Substantial Completion shall not include retainage as follows: (Insert any other conditions for release of retainage upon Substantial Completion.) « » § 5.1.8 If final completion of the Work is materially delayed through no fault of the Contractor, the Owner shall pay the Contractor any additional amounts in accordance with Article 9 of AIA Document A201–2017. § 5.1.9 Except with the Owner’s prior approval, the Contractor shall not make advance payments to suppliers for materials or equipment which have not been delivered and stored at the site. § 5.2 Final Payment § 5.2.1 Final payment, constituting the entire unpaid balance of the Contract Sum, shall be made by the Owner to the Contractor when

.1 the Contractor has fully performed the Contract except for the Contractor’s responsibility to correct Work as provided in Article 12 of AIA Document A201–2017, and to satisfy other requirements, if any, which extend beyond final payment; and

.2 a final Certificate for Payment has been issued by the Architect. § 5.2.2 The Owner’s final payment to the Contractor shall be made no later than 30 days after the issuance of the Architect’s final Certificate for Payment, or as follows: « » § 5.3 Interest Payments due and unpaid under the Contract shall bear interest from the date payment is due at the rate stated below, or in the absence thereof, at the legal rate prevailing from time to time at the place where the Project is located. (Insert rate of interest agreed upon, if any.) « » % « » ARTICLE 6 DISPUTE RESOLUTION § 6.1 Initial Decision Maker The Architect will serve as the Initial Decision Maker pursuant to Article 15 of AIA Document A201–2017, unless the parties appoint below another individual, not a party to this Agreement, to serve as the Initial Decision Maker. (If the parties mutually agree, insert the name, address and other contact information of the Initial Decision Maker, if other than the Architect.) « » « » « » « »


6

§ 6.2 Binding Dispute Resolution For any Claim subject to, but not resolved by, mediation pursuant to Article 15 of AIA Document A201–2017, the method of binding dispute resolution shall be as follows: (Check the appropriate box.) [ « » ] Arbitration pursuant to Section 15.4 of AIA Document A201–2017 [ « » ] Litigation in a court of competent jurisdiction [ « » ] Other (Specify) « » If the Owner and Contractor do not select a method of binding dispute resolution, or do not subsequently agree in writing to a binding dispute resolution method other than litigation, Claims will be resolved by litigation in a court of competent jurisdiction. ARTICLE 7 TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION § 7.1 The Contract may be terminated by the Owner or the Contractor as provided in Article 14 of AIA Document A201–2017. § 7.1.1 If the Contract is terminated for the Owner’s convenience in accordance with Article 14 of AIA Document A201–2017, then the Owner shall pay the Contractor a termination fee as follows: (Insert the amount of, or method for determining, the fee, if any, payable to the Contractor following a termination for the Owner’s convenience.) « » § 7.2 The Work may be suspended by the Owner as provided in Article 14 of AIA Document A201–2017. ARTICLE 8 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS § 8.1 Where reference is made in this Agreement to a provision of AIA Document A201–2017 or another Contract Document, the reference refers to that provision as amended or supplemented by other provisions of the Contract Documents. § 8.2 The Owner’s representative: (Name, address, email address, and other information) « » « » « » « » « » « » § 8.3 The Contractor’s representative: (Name, address, email address, and other information) « » « » « » « » « » « » § 8.4 Neither the Owner’s nor the Contractor’s representative shall be changed without ten days’ prior notice to the other party.


7

§ 8.5 Insurance and Bonds § 8.5.1 The Owner and the Contractor shall purchase and maintain insurance as set forth in AIA Document A101™–2017, Standard Form of Agreement Between Owner and Contractor where the basis of payment is a Stipulated Sum, Exhibit A, Insurance and Bonds, and elsewhere in the Contract Documents. § 8.5.2 The Contractor shall provide bonds as set forth in AIA Document A101™–2017 Exhibit A, and elsewhere in the Contract Documents. § 8.6 Notice in electronic format, pursuant to Article 1 of AIA Document A201–2017, may be given in accordance with AIA Document E203™–2013, Building Information Modeling and Digital Data Exhibit, if completed, or as otherwise set forth below: (If other than in accordance with AIA Document E203–2013, insert requirements for delivering notice in electronic format such as name, title, and email address of the recipient and whether and how the system will be required to generate a read receipt for the transmission.) « » § 8.7 Other provisions: « » ARTICLE 9 ENUMERATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS § 9.1 This Agreement is comprised of the following documents:

.1 AIA Document A101™–2017, Standard Form of Agreement Between Owner and Contractor

.2 AIA Document A101™–2017, Exhibit A, Insurance and Bonds

.3 AIA Document A201™–2017, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction

.4 AIA Document E203™–2013, Building Information Modeling and Digital Data Exhibit, dated as indicated below: (Insert the date of the E203-2013 incorporated into this Agreement.)

« »

.5 Drawings

Number Title Date « »

.6 Specifications

Section Title Date Pages « »

.7 Addenda, if any:

Number Date Pages « »

Portions of Addenda relating to bidding or proposal requirements are not part of the Contract Documents unless the bidding or proposal requirements are also enumerated in this Article 9.

.8 Other Exhibits:

(Check all boxes that apply and include appropriate information identifying the exhibit where required.)

[ « » ] AIA Document E204™–2017, Sustainable Projects Exhibit, dated as indicated below: (Insert the date of the E204-2017 incorporated into this Agreement.)

« »


8

[ « » ] The Sustainability Plan:

Title Date Pages « »

[ « » ] Supplementary and other Conditions of the Contract:

Document Title Date Pages « »

.9 Other documents, if any, listed below:

(List here any additional documents that are intended to form part of the Contract Documents. AIA Document A201™–2017 provides that the advertisement or invitation to bid, Instructions to Bidders, sample forms, the Contractor’s bid or proposal, portions of Addenda relating to bidding or proposal requirements, and other information furnished by the Owner in anticipation of receiving bids or proposals, are not part of the Contract Documents unless enumerated in this Agreement. Any such documents should be listed here only if intended to be part of the Contract Documents.)

« »

This Agreement entered into as of the day and year first written above. « » « » OWNER (Signature) CONTRACTOR (Signature)

« »« » « »« » (Printed name and title) (Printed name and title)

AIA®

Document A201TM – 2017 General Conditions of the Contract for Construction

AIA Document A201™ – 2017. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997, 2007 and 2017 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 10:44:16 ET on 01/30/2020 under Order No.3038737814 which expires on 10/31/2020, and is not for resale. User Notes: (1484353863)

1



For guidance in modifying this document to include supplementary conditions, see AIA Document A503™, Guide for Supplementary Conditions.


for the following PROJECT: (Name and location or address) « » « » THE OWNER: (Name, legal status and address) « »« » « » THE ARCHITECT: (Name, legal status and address) « »« » « » TABLE OF ARTICLES 1 GENERAL PROVISIONS 2 OWNER 3 CONTRACTOR 4 ARCHITECT 5 SUBCONTRACTORS 6 CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE CONTRACTORS 7 CHANGES IN THE WORK 8 TIME 9 PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION 10 PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY 11 INSURANCE AND BONDS 12 UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK 13 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS 14 TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE CONTRACT 15 CLAIMS AND DISPUTES


2

INDEX (Topics and numbers in bold are Section headings.) Acceptance of Nonconforming Work 9.6.6, 9.9.3, 12.3 Acceptance of Work 9.6.6, 9.8.2, 9.9.3, 9.10.1, 9.10.3, 12.3 Access to Work 3.16, 6.2.1, 12.1 Accident Prevention 10 Acts and Omissions 3.2, 3.3.2, 3.12.8, 3.18, 4.2.3, 8.3.1, 9.5.1, 10.2.5, 10.2.8, 13.3.2, 14.1, 15.1.2, 15.2 Addenda 1.1.1 Additional Costs, Claims for 3.7.4, 3.7.5, 10.3.2, 15.1.5 Additional Inspections and Testing 9.4.2, 9.8.3, 12.2.1, 13.4 Additional Time, Claims for 3.2.4, 3.7.4, 3.7.5, 3.10.2, 8.3.2, 15.1.6 Administration of the Contract 3.1.3, 4.2, 9.4, 9.5 Advertisement or Invitation to Bid 1.1.1 Aesthetic Effect 4.2.13 Allowances 3.8 Applications for Payment 4.2.5, 7.3.9, 9.2, 9.3, 9.4, 9.5.1, 9.5.4, 9.6.3, 9.7, 9.10 Approvals 2.1.1, 2.3.1, 2.5, 3.1.3, 3.10.2, 3.12.8, 3.12.9, 3.12.10.1, 4.2.7, 9.3.2, 13.4.1 Arbitration 8.3.1, 15.3.2, 15.4 ARCHITECT 4 Architect, Definition of 4.1.1 Architect, Extent of Authority 2.5, 3.12.7, 4.1.2, 4.2, 5.2, 6.3, 7.1.2, 7.3.4, 7.4, 9.2, 9.3.1, 9.4, 9.5, 9.6.3, 9.8, 9.10.1, 9.10.3, 12.1, 12.2.1, 13.4.1, 13.4.2, 14.2.2, 14.2.4, 15.1.4, 15.2.1 Architect, Limitations of Authority and Responsibility 2.1.1, 3.12.4, 3.12.8, 3.12.10, 4.1.2, 4.2.1, 4.2.2, 4.2.3, 4.2.6, 4.2.7, 4.2.10, 4.2.12, 4.2.13, 5.2.1, 7.4, 9.4.2, 9.5.4, 9.6.4, 15.1.4, 15.2 Architect’s Additional Services and Expenses 2.5, 12.2.1, 13.4.2, 13.4.3, 14.2.4 Architect’s Administration of the Contract 3.1.3, 3.7.4, 15.2, 9.4.1, 9.5 Architect’s Approvals 2.5, 3.1.3, 3.5, 3.10.2, 4.2.7 Architect’s Authority to Reject Work 3.5, 4.2.6, 12.1.2, 12.2.1

Architect’s Copyright 1.1.7, 1.5 Architect’s Decisions 3.7.4, 4.2.6, 4.2.7, 4.2.11, 4.2.12, 4.2.13, 4.2.14, 6.3, 7.3.4, 7.3.9, 8.1.3, 8.3.1, 9.2, 9.4.1, 9.5, 9.8.4, 9.9.1, 13.4.2, 15.2 Architect’s Inspections 3.7.4, 4.2.2, 4.2.9, 9.4.2, 9.8.3, 9.9.2, 9.10.1, 13.4 Architect’s Instructions 3.2.4, 3.3.1, 4.2.6, 4.2.7, 13.4.2 Architect’s Interpretations 4.2.11, 4.2.12 Architect’s Project Representative 4.2.10 Architect’s Relationship with Contractor 1.1.2, 1.5, 2.3.3, 3.1.3, 3.2.2, 3.2.3, 3.2.4, 3.3.1, 3.4.2, 3.5, 3.7.4, 3.7.5, 3.9.2, 3.9.3, 3.10, 3.11, 3.12, 3.16, 3.18, 4.1.2, 4.2, 5.2, 6.2.2, 7, 8.3.1, 9.2, 9.3, 9.4, 9.5, 9.7, 9.8, 9.9, 10.2.6, 10.3, 11.3, 12, 13.3.2, 13.4, 15.2 Architect’s Relationship with Subcontractors 1.1.2, 4.2.3, 4.2.4, 4.2.6, 9.6.3, 9.6.4, 11.3 Architect’s Representations 9.4.2, 9.5.1, 9.10.1 Architect’s Site Visits 3.7.4, 4.2.2, 4.2.9, 9.4.2, 9.5.1, 9.9.2, 9.10.1, 13.4 Asbestos 10.3.1 Attorneys’ Fees 3.18.1, 9.6.8, 9.10.2, 10.3.3 Award of Separate Contracts 6.1.1, 6.1.2 Award of Subcontracts and Other Contracts for Portions of the Work 5.2 Basic Definitions 1.1 Bidding Requirements 1.1.1 Binding Dispute Resolution 8.3.1, 9.7, 11.5, 13.1, 15.1.2, 15.1.3, 15.2.1, 15.2.5, 15.2.6.1, 15.3.1, 15.3.2, 15.3.3, 15.4.1 Bonds, Lien 7.3.4.4, 9.6.8, 9.10.2, 9.10.3 Bonds, Performance, and Payment 7.3.4.4, 9.6.7, 9.10.3, 11.1.2, 11.1.3, 11.5 Building Information Models Use and Reliance 1.8 Building Permit 3.7.1 Capitalization 1.3 Certificate of Substantial Completion 9.8.3, 9.8.4, 9.8.5 Certificates for Payment 4.2.1, 4.2.5, 4.2.9, 9.3.3, 9.4, 9.5, 9.6.1, 9.6.6, 9.7, 9.10.1, 9.10.3, 14.1.1.3, 14.2.4, 15.1.4 Certificates of Inspection, Testing or Approval 13.4.4


3

Certificates of Insurance 9.10.2 Change Orders 1.1.1, 3.4.2, 3.7.4, 3.8.2.3, 3.11, 3.12.8, 4.2.8, 5.2.3, 7.1.2, 7.1.3, 7.2, 7.3.2, 7.3.7, 7.3.9, 7.3.10, 8.3.1, 9.3.1.1, 9.10.3, 10.3.2, 11.2, 11.5, 12.1.2 Change Orders, Definition of 7.2.1 CHANGES IN THE WORK 2.2.2, 3.11, 4.2.8, 7, 7.2.1, 7.3.1, 7.4, 8.3.1, 9.3.1.1, 11.5 Claims, Definition of 15.1.1 Claims, Notice of 1.6.2, 15.1.3 CLAIMS AND DISPUTES 3.2.4, 6.1.1, 6.3, 7.3.9, 9.3.3, 9.10.4, 10.3.3, 15, 15.4 Claims and Timely Assertion of Claims 15.4.1 Claims for Additional Cost 3.2.4, 3.3.1, 3.7.4, 7.3.9, 9.5.2, 10.2.5, 10.3.2, 15.1.5 Claims for Additional Time 3.2.4, 3.3.1, 3.7.4, 6.1.1, 8.3.2, 9.5.2, 10.3.2, 15.1.6 Concealed or Unknown Conditions, Claims for 3.7.4 Claims for Damages 3.2.4, 3.18, 8.3.3, 9.5.1, 9.6.7, 10.2.5, 10.3.3, 11.3, 11.3.2, 14.2.4, 15.1.7 Claims Subject to Arbitration 15.4.1 Cleaning Up 3.15, 6.3 Commencement of the Work, Conditions Relating to 2.2.1, 3.2.2, 3.4.1, 3.7.1, 3.10.1, 3.12.6, 5.2.1, 5.2.3, 6.2.2, 8.1.2, 8.2.2, 8.3.1, 11.1, 11.2, 15.1.5 Commencement of the Work, Definition of 8.1.2 Communications 3.9.1, 4.2.4 Completion, Conditions Relating to 3.4.1, 3.11, 3.15, 4.2.2, 4.2.9, 8.2, 9.4.2, 9.8, 9.9.1, 9.10, 12.2, 14.1.2, 15.1.2 COMPLETION, PAYMENTS AND 9 Completion, Substantial 3.10.1, 4.2.9, 8.1.1, 8.1.3, 8.2.3, 9.4.2, 9.8, 9.9.1, 9.10.3, 12.2, 15.1.2 Compliance with Laws 2.3.2, 3.2.3, 3.6, 3.7, 3.12.10, 3.13, 9.6.4, 10.2.2, 13.1, 13.3, 13.4.1, 13.4.2, 13.5, 14.1.1, 14.2.1.3, 15.2.8, 15.4.2, 15.4.3 Concealed or Unknown Conditions 3.7.4, 4.2.8, 8.3.1, 10.3 Conditions of the Contract 1.1.1, 6.1.1, 6.1.4 Consent, Written 3.4.2, 3.14.2, 4.1.2, 9.8.5, 9.9.1, 9.10.2, 9.10.3, 13.2, 15.4.4.2

Consolidation or Joinder 15.4.4 CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE CONTRACTORS 1.1.4, 6 Construction Change Directive, Definition of 7.3.1 Construction Change Directives 1.1.1, 3.4.2, 3.11, 3.12.8, 4.2.8, 7.1.1, 7.1.2, 7.1.3, 7.3, 9.3.1.1 Construction Schedules, Contractor’s 3.10, 3.11, 3.12.1, 3.12.2, 6.1.3, 15.1.6.2 Contingent Assignment of Subcontracts 5.4, 14.2.2.2 Continuing Contract Performance 15.1.4 Contract, Definition of 1.1.2 CONTRACT, TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE 5.4.1.1, 5.4.2, 11.5, 14 Contract Administration 3.1.3, 4, 9.4, 9.5 Contract Award and Execution, Conditions Relating to 3.7.1, 3.10, 5.2, 6.1 Contract Documents, Copies Furnished and Use of 1.5.2, 2.3.6, 5.3 Contract Documents, Definition of 1.1.1 Contract Sum 2.2.2, 2.2.4, 3.7.4, 3.7.5, 3.8, 3.10.2, 5.2.3, 7.3, 7.4, 9.1, 9.2, 9.4.2, 9.5.1.4, 9.6.7, 9.7, 10.3.2, 11.5, 12.1.2, 12.3, 14.2.4, 14.3.2, 15.1.4.2, 15.1.5, 15.2.5 Contract Sum, Definition of 9.1 Contract Time 1.1.4, 2.2.1, 2.2.2, 3.7.4, 3.7.5, 3.10.2, 5.2.3, 6.1.5, 7.2.1.3, 7.3.1, 7.3.5, 7.3.6, 7, 7, 7.3.10, 7.4, 8.1.1, 8.2.1, 8.2.3, 8.3.1, 9.5.1, 9.7, 10.3.2, 12.1.1, 12.1.2, 14.3.2, 15.1.4.2, 15.1.6.1, 15.2.5 Contract Time, Definition of 8.1.1 CONTRACTOR 3 Contractor, Definition of 3.1, 6.1.2 Contractor’s Construction and Submittal Schedules 3.10, 3.12.1, 3.12.2, 4.2.3, 6.1.3, 15.1.6.2 Contractor’s Employees 2.2.4, 3.3.2, 3.4.3, 3.8.1, 3.9, 3.18.2, 4.2.3, 4.2.6, 10.2, 10.3, 11.3, 14.1, 14.2.1.1 Contractor’s Liability Insurance 11.1 Contractor’s Relationship with Separate Contractors and Owner’s Forces 3.12.5, 3.14.2, 4.2.4, 6, 11.3, 12.2.4


4

Contractor’s Relationship with Subcontractors 1.2.2, 2.2.4, 3.3.2, 3.18.1, 3.18.2, 4.2.4, 5, 9.6.2, 9.6.7, 9.10.2, 11.2, 11.3, 11.4 Contractor’s Relationship with the Architect 1.1.2, 1.5, 2.3.3, 3.1.3, 3.2.2, 3.2.3, 3.2.4, 3.3.1, 3.4.2, 3.5.1, 3.7.4, 3.10, 3.11, 3.12, 3.16, 3.18, 4.2, 5.2, 6.2.2, 7, 8.3.1, 9.2, 9.3, 9.4, 9.5, 9.7, 9.8, 9.9, 10.2.6, 10.3, 11.3, 12, 13.4, 15.1.3, 15.2.1 Contractor’s Representations 3.2.1, 3.2.2, 3.5, 3.12.6, 6.2.2, 8.2.1, 9.3.3, 9.8.2 Contractor’s Responsibility for Those Performing the Work 3.3.2, 3.18, 5.3, 6.1.3, 6.2, 9.5.1, 10.2.8 Contractor’s Review of Contract Documents 3.2 Contractor’s Right to Stop the Work 2.2.2, 9.7 Contractor’s Right to Terminate the Contract 14.1 Contractor’s Submittals 3.10, 3.11, 3.12, 4.2.7, 5.2.1, 5.2.3, 9.2, 9.3, 9.8.2, 9.8.3, 9.9.1, 9.10.2, 9.10.3 Contractor’s Superintendent 3.9, 10.2.6 Contractor’s Supervision and Construction Procedures 1.2.2, 3.3, 3.4, 3.12.10, 4.2.2, 4.2.7, 6.1.3, 6.2.4, 7.1.3, 7.3.4, 7.3.6, 8.2, 10, 12, 14, 15.1.4 Coordination and Correlation 1.2, 3.2.1, 3.3.1, 3.10, 3.12.6, 6.1.3, 6.2.1 Copies Furnished of Drawings and Specifications 1.5, 2.3.6, 3.11 Copyrights 1.5, 3.17 Correction of Work 2.5, 3.7.3, 9.4.2, 9.8.2, 9.8.3, 9.9.1, 12.1.2, 12.2, 12.3, 15.1.3.1, 15.1.3.2, 15.2.1 Correlation and Intent of the Contract Documents 1.2 Cost, Definition of 7.3.4 Costs 2.5, 3.2.4, 3.7.3, 3.8.2, 3.15.2, 5.4.2, 6.1.1, 6.2.3, 7.3.3.3, 7.3.4, 7.3.8, 7.3.9, 9.10.2, 10.3.2, 10.3.6, 11.2, 12.1.2, 12.2.1, 12.2.4, 13.4, 14 Cutting and Patching 3.14, 6.2.5 Damage to Construction of Owner or Separate Contractors 3.14.2, 6.2.4, 10.2.1.2, 10.2.5, 10.4, 12.2.4 Damage to the Work 3.14.2, 9.9.1, 10.2.1.2, 10.2.5, 10.4, 12.2.4 Damages, Claims for 3.2.4, 3.18, 6.1.1, 8.3.3, 9.5.1, 9.6.7, 10.3.3, 11.3.2, 11.3, 14.2.4, 15.1.7 Damages for Delay 6.2.3, 8.3.3, 9.5.1.6, 9.7, 10.3.2, 14.3.2

Date of Commencement of the Work, Definition of 8.1.2 Date of Substantial Completion, Definition of 8.1.3 Day, Definition of 8.1.4 Decisions of the Architect 3.7.4, 4.2.6, 4.2.7, 4.2.11, 4.2.12, 4.2.13, 6.3, 7.3.4, 7.3.9, 8.1.3, 8.3.1, 9.2, 9.4, 9.5.1, 9.8.4, 9.9.1, 13.4.2, 14.2.2, 14.2.4, 15.1, 15.2 Decisions to Withhold Certification 9.4.1, 9.5, 9.7, 14.1.1.3 Defective or Nonconforming Work, Acceptance, Rejection and Correction of 2.5, 3.5, 4.2.6, 6.2.3, 9.5.1, 9.5.3, 9.6.6, 9.8.2, 9.9.3, 9.10.4, 12.2.1 Definitions 1.1, 2.1.1, 3.1.1, 3.5, 3.12.1, 3.12.2, 3.12.3, 4.1.1, 5.1, 6.1.2, 7.2.1, 7.3.1, 8.1, 9.1, 9.8.1, 15.1.1 Delays and Extensions of Time 3.2, 3.7.4, 5.2.3, 7.2.1, 7.3.1, 7.4, 8.3, 9.5.1, 9.7, 10.3.2, 10.4, 14.3.2, 15.1.6, 15.2.5 Digital Data Use and Transmission 1.7 Disputes 6.3, 7.3.9, 15.1, 15.2 Documents and Samples at the Site 3.11 Drawings, Definition of 1.1.5 Drawings and Specifications, Use and Ownership of 3.11 Effective Date of Insurance 8.2.2 Emergencies 10.4, 14.1.1.2, 15.1.5 Employees, Contractor’s 3.3.2, 3.4.3, 3.8.1, 3.9, 3.18.2, 4.2.3, 4.2.6, 10.2, 10.3.3, 11.3, 14.1, 14.2.1.1 Equipment, Labor, or Materials 1.1.3, 1.1.6, 3.4, 3.5, 3.8.2, 3.8.3, 3.12, 3.13, 3.15.1, 4.2.6, 4.2.7, 5.2.1, 6.2.1, 7.3.4, 9.3.2, 9.3.3, 9.5.1.3, 9.10.2, 10.2.1, 10.2.4, 14.2.1.1, 14.2.1.2 Execution and Progress of the Work 1.1.3, 1.2.1, 1.2.2, 2.3.4, 2.3.6, 3.1, 3.3.1, 3.4.1, 3.7.1, 3.10.1, 3.12, 3.14, 4.2, 6.2.2, 7.1.3, 7.3.6, 8.2, 9.5.1, 9.9.1, 10.2, 10.3, 12.1, 12.2, 14.2, 14.3.1, 15.1.4 Extensions of Time 3.2.4, 3.7.4, 5.2.3, 7.2.1, 7.3, 7.4, 9.5.1, 9.7, 10.3.2, 10.4, 14.3, 15.1.6, 15.2.5 Failure of Payment 9.5.1.3, 9.7, 9.10.2, 13.5, 14.1.1.3, 14.2.1.2 Faulty Work (See Defective or Nonconforming Work) Final Completion and Final Payment 4.2.1, 4.2.9, 9.8.2, 9.10, 12.3, 14.2.4, 14.4.3 Financial Arrangements, Owner’s 2.2.1, 13.2.2, 14.1.1.4


5

GENERAL PROVISIONS 1 Governing Law 13.1 Guarantees (See Warranty) Hazardous Materials and Substances 10.2.4, 10.3 Identification of Subcontractors and Suppliers 5.2.1 Indemnification 3.17, 3.18, 9.6.8, 9.10.2, 10.3.3, 11.3 Information and Services Required of the Owner 2.1.2, 2.2, 2.3, 3.2.2, 3.12.10.1, 6.1.3, 6.1.4, 6.2.5, 9.6.1, 9.9.2, 9.10.3, 10.3.3, 11.2, 13.4.1, 13.4.2, 14.1.1.4, 14.1.4, 15.1.4 Initial Decision 15.2 Initial Decision Maker, Definition of 1.1.8 Initial Decision Maker, Decisions 14.2.4, 15.1.4.2, 15.2.1, 15.2.2, 15.2.3, 15.2.4, 15.2.5 Initial Decision Maker, Extent of Authority 14.2.4, 15.1.4.2, 15.2.1, 15.2.2, 15.2.3, 15.2.4, 15.2.5 Injury or Damage to Person or Property 10.2.8, 10.4 Inspections 3.1.3, 3.3.3, 3.7.1, 4.2.2, 4.2.6, 4.2.9, 9.4.2, 9.8.3, 9.9.2, 9.10.1, 12.2.1, 13.4 Instructions to Bidders 1.1.1 Instructions to the Contractor 3.2.4, 3.3.1, 3.8.1, 5.2.1, 7, 8.2.2, 12, 13.4.2 Instruments of Service, Definition of 1.1.7 Insurance 6.1.1, 7.3.4, 8.2.2, 9.3.2, 9.8.4, 9.9.1, 9.10.2, 10.2.5, 11 Insurance, Notice of Cancellation or Expiration 11.1.4, 11.2.3 Insurance, Contractor’s Liability 11.1 Insurance, Effective Date of 8.2.2, 14.4.2 Insurance, Owner’s Liability 11.2 Insurance, Property 10.2.5, 11.2, 11.4, 11.5 Insurance, Stored Materials 9.3.2 INSURANCE AND BONDS 11 Insurance Companies, Consent to Partial Occupancy 9.9.1 Insured loss, Adjustment and Settlement of 11.5 Intent of the Contract Documents 1.2.1, 4.2.7, 4.2.12, 4.2.13 Interest 13.5

Interpretation 1.1.8, 1.2.3, 1.4, 4.1.1, 5.1, 6.1.2, 15.1.1 Interpretations, Written 4.2.11, 4.2.12 Judgment on Final Award 15.4.2 Labor and Materials, Equipment 1.1.3, 1.1.6, 3.4, 3.5, 3.8.2, 3.8.3, 3.12, 3.13, 3.15.1, 5.2.1, 6.2.1, 7.3.4, 9.3.2, 9.3.3, 9.5.1.3, 9.10.2, 10.2.1, 10.2.4, 14.2.1.1, 14.2.1.2 Labor Disputes 8.3.1 Laws and Regulations 1.5, 2.3.2, 3.2.3, 3.2.4, 3.6, 3.7, 3.12.10, 3.13, 9.6.4, 9.9.1, 10.2.2, 13.1, 13.3.1, 13.4.2, 13.5, 14, 15.2.8, 15.4 Liens 2.1.2, 9.3.1, 9.3.3, 9.6.8, 9.10.2, 9.10.4, 15.2.8 Limitations, Statutes of 12.2.5, 15.1.2, 15.4.1.1 Limitations of Liability 3.2.2, 3.5, 3.12.10, 3.12.10.1, 3.17, 3.18.1, 4.2.6, 4.2.7, 6.2.2, 9.4.2, 9.6.4, 9.6.7, 9.6.8, 10.2.5, 10.3.3, 11.3, 12.2.5, 13.3.1 Limitations of Time 2.1.2, 2.2, 2.5, 3.2.2, 3.10, 3.11, 3.12.5, 3.15.1, 4.2.7, 5.2, 5.3, 5.4.1, 6.2.4, 7.3, 7.4, 8.2, 9.2, 9.3.1, 9.3.3, 9.4.1, 9.5, 9.6, 9.7, 9.8, 9.9, 9.10, 12.2, 13.4, 14, 15, 15.1.2, 15.1.3, 15.1.5 Materials, Hazardous 10.2.4, 10.3 Materials, Labor, Equipment and 1.1.3, 1.1.6, 3.4.1, 3.5, 3.8.2, 3.8.3, 3.12, 3.13, 3.15.1, 5.2.1, 6.2.1, 7.3.4, 9.3.2, 9.3.3, 9.5.1.3, 9.10.2, 10.2.1.2, 10.2.4, 14.2.1.1, 14.2.1.2 Means, Methods, Techniques, Sequences and Procedures of Construction 3.3.1, 3.12.10, 4.2.2, 4.2.7, 9.4.2 Mechanic’s Lien 2.1.2, 9.3.1, 9.3.3, 9.6.8, 9.10.2, 9.10.4, 15.2.8 Mediation 8.3.1, 15.1.3.2, 15.2.1, 15.2.5, 15.2.6, 15.3, 15.4.1, 15.4.1.1 Minor Changes in the Work 1.1.1, 3.4.2, 3.12.8, 4.2.8, 7.1, 7.4 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS 13 Modifications, Definition of 1.1.1 Modifications to the Contract 1.1.1, 1.1.2, 2.5, 3.11, 4.1.2, 4.2.1, 5.2.3, 7, 8.3.1, 9.7, 10.3.2 Mutual Responsibility 6.2 Nonconforming Work, Acceptance of 9.6.6, 9.9.3, 12.3


6

Nonconforming Work, Rejection and Correction of 2.4, 2.5, 3.5, 4.2.6, 6.2.4, 9.5.1, 9.8.2, 9.9.3, 9.10.4, 12.2 Notice 1.6, 1.6.1, 1.6.2, 2.1.2, 2.2.2., 2.2.3, 2.2.4, 2.5, 3.2.4, 3.3.1, 3.7.4, 3.7.5, 3.9.2, 3.12.9, 3.12.10, 5.2.1, 7.4, 8.2.2 9.6.8, 9.7, 9.10.1, 10.2.8, 10.3.2, 11.5, 12.2.2.1, 13.4.1, 13.4.2, 14.1, 14.2.2, 14.4.2, 15.1.3, 15.1.5, 15.1.6, 15.4.1 Notice of Cancellation or Expiration of Insurance 11.1.4, 11.2.3 Notice of Claims 1.6.2, 2.1.2, 3.7.4, 9.6.8, 10.2.8, 15.1.3, 15.1.5, 15.1.6, 15.2.8, 15.3.2, 15.4.1 Notice of Testing and Inspections 13.4.1, 13.4.2 Observations, Contractor’s 3.2, 3.7.4 Occupancy 2.3.1, 9.6.6, 9.8 Orders, Written 1.1.1, 2.4, 3.9.2, 7, 8.2.2, 11.5, 12.1, 12.2.2.1, 13.4.2, 14.3.1 OWNER 2 Owner, Definition of 2.1.1 Owner, Evidence of Financial Arrangements 2.2, 13.2.2, 14.1.1.4 Owner, Information and Services Required of the 2.1.2, 2.2, 2.3, 3.2.2, 3.12.10, 6.1.3, 6.1.4, 6.2.5, 9.3.2, 9.6.1, 9.6.4, 9.9.2, 9.10.3, 10.3.3, 11.2, 13.4.1, 13.4.2, 14.1.1.4, 14.1.4, 15.1.4 Owner’s Authority 1.5, 2.1.1, 2.3.32.4, 2.5, 3.4.2, 3.8.1, 3.12.10, 3.14.2, 4.1.2, 4.2.4, 4.2.9, 5.2.1, 5.2.4, 5.4.1, 6.1, 6.3, 7.2.1, 7.3.1, 8.2.2, 8.3.1, 9.3.2, 9.5.1, 9.6.4, 9.9.1, 9.10.2, 10.3.2, 11.4, 11.5, 12.2.2, 12.3, 13.2.2, 14.3, 14.4, 15.2.7 Owner’s Insurance 11.2 Owner’s Relationship with Subcontractors 1.1.2, 5.2, 5.3, 5.4, 9.6.4, 9.10.2, 14.2.2 Owner’s Right to Carry Out the Work 2.5, 14.2.2 Owner’s Right to Clean Up 6.3 Owner’s Right to Perform Construction and to Award Separate Contracts 6.1 Owner’s Right to Stop the Work 2.4 Owner’s Right to Suspend the Work 14.3 Owner’s Right to Terminate the Contract 14.2, 14.4

Ownership and Use of Drawings, Specifications and Other Instruments of Service 1.1.1, 1.1.6, 1.1.7, 1.5, 2.3.6, 3.2.2, 3.11, 3.17, 4.2.12, 5.3 Partial Occupancy or Use 9.6.6, 9.9 Patching, Cutting and 3.14, 6.2.5 Patents 3.17 Payment, Applications for 4.2.5, 7.3.9, 9.2, 9.3, 9.4, 9.5, 9.6.3, 9.7, 9.8.5, 9.10.1, 14.2.3, 14.2.4, 14.4.3 Payment, Certificates for 4.2.5, 4.2.9, 9.3.3, 9.4, 9.5, 9.6.1, 9.6.6, 9.7, 9.10.1, 9.10.3, 14.1.1.3, 14.2.4 Payment, Failure of 9.5.1.3, 9.7, 9.10.2, 13.5, 14.1.1.3, 14.2.1.2 Payment, Final 4.2.1, 4.2.9, 9.10, 12.3, 14.2.4, 14.4.3 Payment Bond, Performance Bond and 7.3.4.4, 9.6.7, 9.10.3, 11.1.2 Payments, Progress 9.3, 9.6, 9.8.5, 9.10.3, 14.2.3, 15.1.4 PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION 9 Payments to Subcontractors 5.4.2, 9.5.1.3, 9.6.2, 9.6.3, 9.6.4, 9.6.7, 14.2.1.2 PCB 10.3.1 Performance Bond and Payment Bond 7.3.4.4, 9.6.7, 9.10.3, 11.1.2 Permits, Fees, Notices and Compliance with Laws 2.3.1, 3.7, 3.13, 7.3.4.4, 10.2.2 PERSONS AND PROPERTY, PROTECTION OF 10 Polychlorinated Biphenyl 10.3.1 Product Data, Definition of 3.12.2 Product Data and Samples, Shop Drawings 3.11, 3.12, 4.2.7 Progress and Completion 4.2.2, 8.2, 9.8, 9.9.1, 14.1.4, 15.1.4 Progress Payments 9.3, 9.6, 9.8.5, 9.10.3, 14.2.3, 15.1.4 Project, Definition of 1.1.4 Project Representatives 4.2.10 Property Insurance 10.2.5, 11.2 Proposal Requirements 1.1.1 PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY 10


7

Regulations and Laws 1.5, 2.3.2, 3.2.3, 3.6, 3.7, 3.12.10, 3.13, 9.6.4, 9.9.1, 10.2.2, 13.1, 13.3, 13.4.1, 13.4.2, 13.5, 14, 15.2.8, 15.4 Rejection of Work 4.2.6, 12.2.1 Releases and Waivers of Liens 9.3.1, 9.10.2 Representations 3.2.1, 3.5, 3.12.6, 8.2.1, 9.3.3, 9.4.2, 9.5.1, 9.10.1 Representatives 2.1.1, 3.1.1, 3.9, 4.1.1, 4.2.10, 13.2.1 Responsibility for Those Performing the Work 3.3.2, 3.18, 4.2.2, 4.2.3, 5.3, 6.1.3, 6.2, 6.3, 9.5.1, 10 Retainage 9.3.1, 9.6.2, 9.8.5, 9.9.1, 9.10.2, 9.10.3 Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions by Contractor 3.2, 3.12.7, 6.1.3 Review of Contractor’s Submittals by Owner and Architect 3.10.1, 3.10.2, 3.11, 3.12, 4.2, 5.2, 6.1.3, 9.2, 9.8.2 Review of Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples by Contractor 3.12 Rights and Remedies 1.1.2, 2.4, 2.5, 3.5, 3.7.4, 3.15.2, 4.2.6, 5.3, 5.4, 6.1, 6.3, 7.3.1, 8.3, 9.5.1, 9.7, 10.2.5, 10.3, 12.2.1, 12.2.2, 12.2.4, 13.3, 14, 15.4 Royalties, Patents and Copyrights 3.17 Rules and Notices for Arbitration 15.4.1 Safety of Persons and Property 10.2, 10.4 Safety Precautions and Programs 3.3.1, 4.2.2, 4.2.7, 5.3, 10.1, 10.2, 10.4 Samples, Definition of 3.12.3 Samples, Shop Drawings, Product Data and 3.11, 3.12, 4.2.7 Samples at the Site, Documents and 3.11 Schedule of Values 9.2, 9.3.1 Schedules, Construction 3.10, 3.12.1, 3.12.2, 6.1.3, 15.1.6.2 Separate Contracts and Contractors 1.1.4, 3.12.5, 3.14.2, 4.2.4, 4.2.7, 6, 8.3.1, 12.1.2 Separate Contractors, Definition of 6.1.1 Shop Drawings, Definition of 3.12.1 Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples 3.11, 3.12, 4.2.7 Site, Use of 3.13, 6.1.1, 6.2.1 Site Inspections 3.2.2, 3.3.3, 3.7.1, 3.7.4, 4.2, 9.9.2, 9.4.2, 9.10.1, 13.4

Site Visits, Architect’s 3.7.4, 4.2.2, 4.2.9, 9.4.2, 9.5.1, 9.9.2, 9.10.1, 13.4 Special Inspections and Testing 4.2.6, 12.2.1, 13.4 Specifications, Definition of 1.1.6 Specifications 1.1.1, 1.1.6, 1.2.2, 1.5, 3.12.10, 3.17, 4.2.14 Statute of Limitations 15.1.2, 15.4.1.1 Stopping the Work 2.2.2, 2.4, 9.7, 10.3, 14.1 Stored Materials 6.2.1, 9.3.2, 10.2.1.2, 10.2.4 Subcontractor, Definition of 5.1.1 SUBCONTRACTORS 5 Subcontractors, Work by 1.2.2, 3.3.2, 3.12.1, 3.18, 4.2.3, 5.2.3, 5.3, 5.4, 9.3.1.2, 9.6.7 Subcontractual Relations 5.3, 5.4, 9.3.1.2, 9.6, 9.10, 10.2.1, 14.1, 14.2.1 Submittals 3.10, 3.11, 3.12, 4.2.7, 5.2.1, 5.2.3, 7.3.4, 9.2, 9.3, 9.8, 9.9.1, 9.10.2, 9.10.3 Submittal Schedule 3.10.2, 3.12.5, 4.2.7 Subrogation, Waivers of 6.1.1, 11.3 Substances, Hazardous 10.3 Substantial Completion 4.2.9, 8.1.1, 8.1.3, 8.2.3, 9.4.2, 9.8, 9.9.1, 9.10.3, 12.2, 15.1.2 Substantial Completion, Definition of 9.8.1 Substitution of Subcontractors 5.2.3, 5.2.4 Substitution of Architect 2.3.3 Substitutions of Materials 3.4.2, 3.5, 7.3.8 Sub-subcontractor, Definition of 5.1.2 Subsurface Conditions 3.7.4 Successors and Assigns 13.2 Superintendent 3.9, 10.2.6 Supervision and Construction Procedures 1.2.2, 3.3, 3.4, 3.12.10, 4.2.2, 4.2.7, 6.1.3, 6.2.4, 7.1.3, 7.3.4, 8.2, 8.3.1, 9.4.2, 10, 12, 14, 15.1.4 Suppliers 1.5, 3.12.1, 4.2.4, 4.2.6, 5.2.1, 9.3, 9.4.2, 9.5.4, 9.6, 9.10.5, 14.2.1


8

Surety 5.4.1.2, 9.6.8, 9.8.5, 9.10.2, 9.10.3, 11.1.2, 14.2.2, 15.2.7 Surety, Consent of 9.8.5, 9.10.2, 9.10.3 Surveys 1.1.7, 2.3.4 Suspension by the Owner for Convenience 14.3 Suspension of the Work 3.7.5, 5.4.2, 14.3 Suspension or Termination of the Contract 5.4.1.1, 14 Taxes 3.6, 3.8.2.1, 7.3.4.4 Termination by the Contractor 14.1, 15.1.7 Termination by the Owner for Cause 5.4.1.1, 14.2, 15.1.7 Termination by the Owner for Convenience 14.4 Termination of the Architect 2.3.3 Termination of the Contractor Employment 14.2.2 TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE CONTRACT 14 Tests and Inspections 3.1.3, 3.3.3, 3.7.1, 4.2.2, 4.2.6, 4.2.9, 9.4.2, 9.8.3, 9.9.2, 9.10.1, 10.3.2, 12.2.1, 13.4 TIME 8 Time, Delays and Extensions of 3.2.4, 3.7.4, 5.2.3, 7.2.1, 7.3.1, 7.4, 8.3, 9.5.1, 9.7, 10.3.2, 10.4, 14.3.2, 15.1.6, 15.2.5 Time Limits 2.1.2, 2.2, 2.5, 3.2.2, 3.10, 3.11, 3.12.5, 3.15.1, 4.2, 5.2, 5.3, 5.4, 6.2.4, 7.3, 7.4, 8.2, 9.2, 9.3.1, 9.3.3, 9.4.1, 9.5, 9.6, 9.7, 9.8, 9.9, 9.10, 12.2, 13.4, 14, 15.1.2, 15.1.3, 15.4 Time Limits on Claims 3.7.4, 10.2.8, 15.1.2, 15.1.3

Title to Work 9.3.2, 9.3.3 UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK 12 Uncovering of Work 12.1 Unforeseen Conditions, Concealed or Unknown 3.7.4, 8.3.1, 10.3 Unit Prices 7.3.3.2, 9.1.2 Use of Documents 1.1.1, 1.5, 2.3.6, 3.12.6, 5.3 Use of Site 3.13, 6.1.1, 6.2.1 Values, Schedule of 9.2, 9.3.1 Waiver of Claims by the Architect 13.3.2 Waiver of Claims by the Contractor 9.10.5, 13.3.2, 15.1.7 Waiver of Claims by the Owner 9.9.3, 9.10.3, 9.10.4, 12.2.2.1, 13.3.2, 14.2.4, 15.1.7 Waiver of Consequential Damages 14.2.4, 15.1.7 Waiver of Liens 9.3, 9.10.2, 9.10.4 Waivers of Subrogation 6.1.1, 11.3 Warranty 3.5, 4.2.9, 9.3.3, 9.8.4, 9.9.1, 9.10.2, 9.10.4, 12.2.2, 15.1.2 Weather Delays 8.3, 15.1.6.2 Work, Definition of 1.1.3 Written Consent 1.5.2, 3.4.2, 3.7.4, 3.12.8, 3.14.2, 4.1.2, 9.3.2, 9.10.3, 13.2, 13.3.2, 15.4.4.2 Written Interpretations 4.2.11, 4.2.12 Written Orders 1.1.1, 2.4, 3.9, 7, 8.2.2, 12.1, 12.2, 13.4.2, 14.3.1


9

ARTICLE 1 GENERAL PROVISIONS § 1.1 Basic Definitions § 1.1.1 The Contract Documents The Contract Documents are enumerated in the Agreement between the Owner and Contractor (hereinafter the Agreement) and consist of the Agreement, Conditions of the Contract (General, Supplementary and other Conditions), Drawings, Specifications, Addenda issued prior to execution of the Contract, other documents listed in the Agreement, and Modifications issued after execution of the Contract. A Modification is (1) a written amendment to the Contract signed by both parties, (2) a Change Order, (3) a Construction Change Directive, or (4) a written order for a minor change in the Work issued by the Architect. Unless specifically enumerated in the Agreement, the Contract Documents do not include the advertisement or invitation to bid, Instructions to Bidders, sample forms, other information furnished by the Owner in anticipation of receiving bids or proposals, the Contractor’s bid or proposal, or portions of Addenda relating to bidding or proposal requirements. § 1.1.2 The Contract The Contract Documents form the Contract for Construction. The Contract represents the entire and integrated agreement between the parties hereto and supersedes prior negotiations, representations, or agreements, either written or oral. The Contract may be amended or modified only by a Modification. The Contract Documents shall not be construed to create a contractual relationship of any kind (1) between the Contractor and the Architect or the Architect’s consultants, (2) between the Owner and a Subcontractor or a Sub-subcontractor, (3) between the Owner and the Architect or the Architect’s consultants, or (4) between any persons or entities other than the Owner and the Contractor. The Architect shall, however, be entitled to performance and enforcement of obligations under the Contract intended to facilitate performance of the Architect’s duties. § 1.1.3 The Work The term “Work” means the construction and services required by the Contract Documents, whether completed or partially completed, and includes all other labor, materials, equipment, and services provided or to be provided by the Contractor to fulfill the Contractor’s obligations. The Work may constitute the whole or a part of the Project. § 1.1.4 The Project The Project is the total construction of which the Work performed under the Contract Documents may be the whole or a part and which may include construction by the Owner and by Separate Contractors. § 1.1.5 The Drawings The Drawings are the graphic and pictorial portions of the Contract Documents showing the design, location and dimensions of the Work, generally including plans, elevations, sections, details, schedules, and diagrams. § 1.1.6 The Specifications The Specifications are that portion of the Contract Documents consisting of the written requirements for materials, equipment, systems, standards and workmanship for the Work, and performance of related services. § 1.1.7 Instruments of Service Instruments of Service are representations, in any medium of expression now known or later developed, of the tangible and intangible creative work performed by the Architect and the Architect’s consultants under their respective professional services agreements. Instruments of Service may include, without limitation, studies, surveys, models, sketches, drawings, specifications, and other similar materials. § 1.1.8 Initial Decision Maker The Initial Decision Maker is the person identified in the Agreement to render initial decisions on Claims in accordance with Section 15.2. The Initial Decision Maker shall not show partiality to the Owner or Contractor and shall not be liable for results of interpretations or decisions rendered in good faith. § 1.2 Correlation and Intent of the Contract Documents § 1.2.1 The intent of the Contract Documents is to include all items necessary for the proper execution and completion of the Work by the Contractor. The Contract Documents are complementary, and what is required by one shall be as binding as if required by all; performance by the Contractor shall be required only to the extent consistent with the Contract Documents and reasonably inferable from them as being necessary to produce the indicated results.


10

§ 1.2.1.1 The invalidity of any provision of the Contract Documents shall not invalidate the Contract or its remaining provisions. If it is determined that any provision of the Contract Documents violates any law, or is otherwise invalid or unenforceable, then that provision shall be revised to the extent necessary to make that provision legal and enforceable. In such case the Contract Documents shall be construed, to the fullest extent permitted by law, to give effect to the parties’ intentions and purposes in executing the Contract. § 1.2.2 Organization of the Specifications into divisions, sections and articles, and arrangement of Drawings shall not control the Contractor in dividing the Work among Subcontractors or in establishing the extent of Work to be performed by any trade. § 1.2.3 Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, words that have well-known technical or construction industry meanings are used in the Contract Documents in accordance with such recognized meanings. § 1.3 Capitalization Terms capitalized in these General Conditions include those that are (1) specifically defined, (2) the titles of numbered articles, or (3) the titles of other documents published by the American Institute of Architects. § 1.4 Interpretation In the interest of brevity the Contract Documents frequently omit modifying words such as “all” and “any” and articles such as “the” and “an,” but the fact that a modifier or an article is absent from one statement and appears in another is not intended to affect the interpretation of either statement. § 1.5 Ownership and Use of Drawings, Specifications, and Other Instruments of Service § 1.5.1 The Architect and the Architect’s consultants shall be deemed the authors and owners of their respective Instruments of Service, including the Drawings and Specifications, and retain all common law, statutory, and other reserved rights in their Instruments of Service, including copyrights. The Contractor, Subcontractors, Sub-subcontractors, and suppliers shall not own or claim a copyright in the Instruments of Service. Submittal or distribution to meet official regulatory requirements or for other purposes in connection with the Project is not to be construed as publication in derogation of the Architect’s or Architect’s consultants’ reserved rights. § 1.5.2 The Contractor, Subcontractors, Sub-subcontractors, and suppliers are authorized to use and reproduce the Instruments of Service provided to them, subject to any protocols established pursuant to Sections 1.7 and 1.8, solely and exclusively for execution of the Work. All copies made under this authorization shall bear the copyright notice, if any, shown on the Instruments of Service. The Contractor, Subcontractors, Sub-subcontractors, and suppliers may not use the Instruments of Service on other projects or for additions to the Project outside the scope of the Work without the specific written consent of the Owner, Architect, and the Architect’s consultants. § 1.6 Notice § 1.6.1 Except as otherwise provided in Section 1.6.2, where the Contract Documents require one party to notify or give notice to the other party, such notice shall be provided in writing to the designated representative of the party to whom the notice is addressed and shall be deemed to have been duly served if delivered in person, by mail, by courier, or by electronic transmission if a method for electronic transmission is set forth in the Agreement. § 1.6.2 Notice of Claims as provided in Section 15.1.3 shall be provided in writing and shall be deemed to have been duly served only if delivered to the designated representative of the party to whom the notice is addressed by certified or registered mail, or by courier providing proof of delivery. § 1.7 Digital Data Use and Transmission The parties shall agree upon protocols governing the transmission and use of Instruments of Service or any other information or documentation in digital form. The parties will use AIA Document E203™–2013, Building Information Modeling and Digital Data Exhibit, to establish the protocols for the development, use, transmission, and exchange of digital data. § 1.8 Building Information Models Use and Reliance Any use of, or reliance on, all or a portion of a building information model without agreement to protocols governing the use of, and reliance on, the information contained in the model and without having those protocols set forth in AIA Document E203™–2013, Building Information Modeling and Digital Data Exhibit, and the requisite AIA Document G202™–2013, Project Building Information Modeling Protocol Form, shall be at the using or relying party’s sole risk


11

and without liability to the other party and its contractors or consultants, the authors of, or contributors to, the building information model, and each of their agents and employees. ARTICLE 2 OWNER § 2.1 General § 2.1.1 The Owner is the person or entity identified as such in the Agreement and is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number. The Owner shall designate in writing a representative who shall have express authority to bind the Owner with respect to all matters requiring the Owner’s approval or authorization. Except as otherwise provided in Section 4.2.1, the Architect does not have such authority. The term “Owner” means the Owner or the Owner’s authorized representative. § 2.1.2 The Owner shall furnish to the Contractor, within fifteen days after receipt of a written request, information necessary and relevant for the Contractor to evaluate, give notice of, or enforce mechanic’s lien rights. Such information shall include a correct statement of the record legal title to the property on which the Project is located, usually referred to as the site, and the Owner’s interest therein. § 2.2 Evidence of the Owner’s Financial Arrangements § 2.2.1 Prior to commencement of the Work and upon written request by the Contractor, the Owner shall furnish to the Contractor reasonable evidence that the Owner has made financial arrangements to fulfill the Owner’s obligations under the Contract. The Contractor shall have no obligation to commence the Work until the Owner provides such evidence. If commencement of the Work is delayed under this Section 2.2.1, the Contract Time shall be extended appropriately. § 2.2.2 Following commencement of the Work and upon written request by the Contractor, the Owner shall furnish to the Contractor reasonable evidence that the Owner has made financial arrangements to fulfill the Owner’s obligations under the Contract only if (1) the Owner fails to make payments to the Contractor as the Contract Documents require; (2) the Contractor identifies in writing a reasonable concern regarding the Owner’s ability to make payment when due; or (3) a change in the Work materially changes the Contract Sum. If the Owner fails to provide such evidence, as required, within fourteen days of the Contractor’s request, the Contractor may immediately stop the Work and, in that event, shall notify the Owner that the Work has stopped. However, if the request is made because a change in the Work materially changes the Contract Sum under (3) above, the Contractor may immediately stop only that portion of the Work affected by the change until reasonable evidence is provided. If the Work is stopped under this Section 2.2.2, the Contract Time shall be extended appropriately and the Contract Sum shall be increased by the amount of the Contractor’s reasonable costs of shutdown, delay and start-up, plus interest as provided in the Contract Documents. § 2.2.3 After the Owner furnishes evidence of financial arrangements under this Section 2.2, the Owner shall not materially vary such financial arrangements without prior notice to the Contractor. § 2.2.4 Where the Owner has designated information furnished under this Section 2.2 as “confidential,” the Contractor shall keep the information confidential and shall not disclose it to any other person. However, the Contractor may disclose “confidential” information, after seven (7) days’ notice to the Owner, where disclosure is required by law, including a subpoena or other form of compulsory legal process issued by a court or governmental entity, or by court or arbitrator(s) order. The Contractor may also disclose “confidential” information to its employees, consultants, sureties, Subcontractors and their employees, Sub-subcontractors, and others who need to know the content of such information solely and exclusively for the Project and who agree to maintain the confidentiality of such information. § 2.3 Information and Services Required of the Owner § 2.3.1 Except for permits and fees that are the responsibility of the Contractor under the Contract Documents, including those required under Section 3.7.1, the Owner shall secure and pay for necessary approvals, easements, assessments and charges required for construction, use or occupancy of permanent structures or for permanent changes in existing facilities. § 2.3.2 The Owner shall retain an architect lawfully licensed to practice architecture, or an entity lawfully practicing architecture, in the jurisdiction where the Project is located. That person or entity is identified as the Architect in the Agreement and is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number. § 2.3.3 If the employment of the Architect terminates, the Owner shall employ a successor to whom the Contractor has no reasonable objection and whose status under the Contract Documents shall be that of the Architect.


12

§ 2.3.4 The Owner shall furnish surveys describing physical characteristics, legal limitations and utility locations for the site of the Project, and a legal description of the site. The Contractor shall be entitled to rely on the accuracy of information furnished by the Owner but shall exercise proper precautions relating to the safe performance of the Work. § 2.3.5 The Owner shall furnish information or services required of the Owner by the Contract Documents with reasonable promptness. The Owner shall also furnish any other information or services under the Owner’s control and relevant to the Contractor’s performance of the Work with reasonable promptness after receiving the Contractor’s written request for such information or services. § 2.3.6 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the Owner shall furnish to the Contractor one copy of the Contract Documents for purposes of making reproductions pursuant to Section 1.5.2. § 2.4 Owner’s Right to Stop the Work If the Contractor fails to correct Work that is not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents as required by Section 12.2 or repeatedly fails to carry out Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, the Owner may issue a written order to the Contractor to stop the Work, or any portion thereof, until the cause for such order has been eliminated; however, the right of the Owner to stop the Work shall not give rise to a duty on the part of the Owner to exercise this right for the benefit of the Contractor or any other person or entity, except to the extent required by Section 6.1.3. § 2.5 Owner’s Right to Carry Out the Work If the Contractor defaults or neglects to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents and fails within a ten-day period after receipt of notice from the Owner to commence and continue correction of such default or neglect with diligence and promptness, the Owner may, without prejudice to other remedies the Owner may have, correct such default or neglect. Such action by the Owner and amounts charged to the Contractor are both subject to prior approval of the Architect and the Architect may, pursuant to Section 9.5.1, withhold or nullify a Certificate for Payment in whole or in part, to the extent reasonably necessary to reimburse the Owner for the reasonable cost of correcting such deficiencies, including Owner’s expenses and compensation for the Architect’s additional services made necessary by such default, neglect, or failure. If current and future payments are not sufficient to cover such amounts, the Contractor shall pay the difference to the Owner. If the Contractor disagrees with the actions of the Owner or the Architect, or the amounts claimed as costs to the Owner, the Contractor may file a Claim pursuant to Article 15. ARTICLE 3 CONTRACTOR § 3.1 General § 3.1.1 The Contractor is the person or entity identified as such in the Agreement and is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number. The Contractor shall be lawfully licensed, if required in the jurisdiction where the Project is located. The Contractor shall designate in writing a representative who shall have express authority to bind the Contractor with respect to all matters under this Contract. The term “Contractor” means the Contractor or the Contractor’s authorized representative. § 3.1.2 The Contractor shall perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. § 3.1.3 The Contractor shall not be relieved of its obligations to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents either by activities or duties of the Architect in the Architect’s administration of the Contract, or by tests, inspections or approvals required or performed by persons or entities other than the Contractor. § 3.2 Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions by Contractor § 3.2.1 Execution of the Contract by the Contractor is a representation that the Contractor has visited the site, become generally familiar with local conditions under which the Work is to be performed, and correlated personal observations with requirements of the Contract Documents. § 3.2.2 Because the Contract Documents are complementary, the Contractor shall, before starting each portion of the Work, carefully study and compare the various Contract Documents relative to that portion of the Work, as well as the information furnished by the Owner pursuant to Section 2.3.4, shall take field measurements of any existing conditions related to that portion of the Work, and shall observe any conditions at the site affecting it. These


13

obligations are for the purpose of facilitating coordination and construction by the Contractor and are not for the purpose of discovering errors, omissions, or inconsistencies in the Contract Documents; however, the Contractor shall promptly report to the Architect any errors, inconsistencies or omissions discovered by or made known to the Contractor as a request for information in such form as the Architect may require. It is recognized that the Contractor’s review is made in the Contractor’s capacity as a contractor and not as a licensed design professional, unless otherwise specifically provided in the Contract Documents. § 3.2.3 The Contractor is not required to ascertain that the Contract Documents are in accordance with applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, codes, rules and regulations, or lawful orders of public authorities, but the Contractor shall promptly report to the Architect any nonconformity discovered by or made known to the Contractor as a request for information in such form as the Architect may require. § 3.2.4 If the Contractor believes that additional cost or time is involved because of clarifications or instructions the Architect issues in response to the Contractor’s notices or requests for information pursuant to Sections 3.2.2 or 3.2.3, the Contractor shall submit Claims as provided in Article 15. If the Contractor fails to perform the obligations of Sections 3.2.2 or 3.2.3, the Contractor shall pay such costs and damages to the Owner, subject to Section 15.1.7, as would have been avoided if the Contractor had performed such obligations. If the Contractor performs those obligations, the Contractor shall not be liable to the Owner or Architect for damages resulting from errors, inconsistencies or omissions in the Contract Documents, for differences between field measurements or conditions and the Contract Documents, or for nonconformities of the Contract Documents to applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, codes, rules and regulations, and lawful orders of public authorities. § 3.3 Supervision and Construction Procedures § 3.3.1 The Contractor shall supervise and direct the Work, using the Contractor’s best skill and attention. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for, and have control over, construction means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures, and for coordinating all portions of the Work under the Contract. If the Contract Documents give specific instructions concerning construction means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures, the Contractor shall evaluate the jobsite safety thereof and shall be solely responsible for the jobsite safety of such means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures. If the Contractor determines that such means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures may not be safe, the Contractor shall give timely notice to the Owner and Architect, and shall propose alternative means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures. The Architect shall evaluate the proposed alternative solely for conformance with the design intent for the completed construction. Unless the Architect objects to the Contractor’s proposed alternative, the Contractor shall perform the Work using its alternative means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures. § 3.3.2 The Contractor shall be responsible to the Owner for acts and omissions of the Contractor’s employees, Subcontractors and their agents and employees, and other persons or entities performing portions of the Work for, or on behalf of, the Contractor or any of its Subcontractors. § 3.3.3 The Contractor shall be responsible for inspection of portions of Work already performed to determine that such portions are in proper condition to receive subsequent Work. § 3.4 Labor and Materials § 3.4.1 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall provide and pay for labor, materials, equipment, tools, construction equipment and machinery, water, heat, utilities, transportation, and other facilities and services necessary for proper execution and completion of the Work, whether temporary or permanent and whether or not incorporated or to be incorporated in the Work. § 3.4.2 Except in the case of minor changes in the Work approved by the Architect in accordance with Section 3.12.8 or ordered by the Architect in accordance with Section 7.4, the Contractor may make substitutions only with the consent of the Owner, after evaluation by the Architect and in accordance with a Change Order or Construction Change Directive. § 3.4.3 The Contractor shall enforce strict discipline and good order among the Contractor’s employees and other persons carrying out the Work. The Contractor shall not permit employment of unfit persons or persons not properly skilled in tasks assigned to them.


14

§ 3.5 Warranty § 3.5.1 The Contractor warrants to the Owner and Architect that materials and equipment furnished under the Contract will be of good quality and new unless the Contract Documents require or permit otherwise. The Contractor further warrants that the Work will conform to the requirements of the Contract Documents and will be free from defects, except for those inherent in the quality of the Work the Contract Documents require or permit. Work, materials, or equipment not conforming to these requirements may be considered defective. The Contractor’s warranty excludes remedy for damage or defect caused by abuse, alterations to the Work not executed by the Contractor, improper or insufficient maintenance, improper operation, or normal wear and tear and normal usage. If required by the Architect, the Contractor shall furnish satisfactory evidence as to the kind and quality of materials and equipment. § 3.5.2 All material, equipment, or other special warranties required by the Contract Documents shall be issued in the name of the Owner, or shall be transferable to the Owner, and shall commence in accordance with Section 9.8.4. § 3.6 Taxes The Contractor shall pay sales, consumer, use and similar taxes for the Work provided by the Contractor that are legally enacted when bids are received or negotiations concluded, whether or not yet effective or merely scheduled to go into effect. § 3.7 Permits, Fees, Notices and Compliance with Laws § 3.7.1 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall secure and pay for the building permit as well as for other permits, fees, licenses, and inspections by government agencies necessary for proper execution and completion of the Work that are customarily secured after execution of the Contract and legally required at the time bids are received or negotiations concluded. § 3.7.2 The Contractor shall comply with and give notices required by applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, codes, rules and regulations, and lawful orders of public authorities applicable to performance of the Work. § 3.7.3 If the Contractor performs Work knowing it to be contrary to applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, codes, rules and regulations, or lawful orders of public authorities, the Contractor shall assume appropriate responsibility for such Work and shall bear the costs attributable to correction. § 3.7.4 Concealed or Unknown Conditions If the Contractor encounters conditions at the site that are (1) subsurface or otherwise concealed physical conditions that differ materially from those indicated in the Contract Documents or (2) unknown physical conditions of an unusual nature that differ materially from those ordinarily found to exist and generally recognized as inherent in construction activities of the character provided for in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall promptly provide notice to the Owner and the Architect before conditions are disturbed and in no event later than 14 days after first observance of the conditions. The Architect will promptly investigate such conditions and, if the Architect determines that they differ materially and cause an increase or decrease in the Contractor’s cost of, or time required for, performance of any part of the Work, will recommend that an equitable adjustment be made in the Contract Sum or Contract Time, or both. If the Architect determines that the conditions at the site are not materially different from those indicated in the Contract Documents and that no change in the terms of the Contract is justified, the Architect shall promptly notify the Owner and Contractor, stating the reasons. If either party disputes the Architect’s determination or recommendation, that party may submit a Claim as provided in Article 15. § 3.7.5 If, in the course of the Work, the Contractor encounters human remains or recognizes the existence of burial markers, archaeological sites or wetlands not indicated in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall immediately suspend any operations that would affect them and shall notify the Owner and Architect. Upon receipt of such notice, the Owner shall promptly take any action necessary to obtain governmental authorization required to resume the operations. The Contractor shall continue to suspend such operations until otherwise instructed by the Owner but shall continue with all other operations that do not affect those remains or features. Requests for adjustments in the Contract Sum and Contract Time arising from the existence of such remains or features may be made as provided in Article 15. § 3.8 Allowances § 3.8.1 The Contractor shall include in the Contract Sum all allowances stated in the Contract Documents. Items covered by allowances shall be supplied for such amounts and by such persons or entities as the Owner may direct, but the Contractor shall not be required to employ persons or entities to whom the Contractor has reasonable objection.


15

§ 3.8.2 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, .1 allowances shall cover the cost to the Contractor of materials and equipment delivered at the site and all

required taxes, less applicable trade discounts; .2 Contractor’s costs for unloading and handling at the site, labor, installation costs, overhead, profit, and

other expenses contemplated for stated allowance amounts shall be included in the Contract Sum but not in the allowances; and

.3 whenever costs are more than or less than allowances, the Contract Sum shall be adjusted accordingly by Change Order. The amount of the Change Order shall reflect (1) the difference between actual costs and the allowances under Section 3.8.2.1 and (2) changes in Contractor’s costs under Section 3.8.2.2.

§ 3.8.3 Materials and equipment under an allowance shall be selected by the Owner with reasonable promptness. § 3.9 Superintendent § 3.9.1 The Contractor shall employ a competent superintendent and necessary assistants who shall be in attendance at the Project site during performance of the Work. The superintendent shall represent the Contractor, and communications given to the superintendent shall be as binding as if given to the Contractor. § 3.9.2 The Contractor, as soon as practicable after award of the Contract, shall notify the Owner and Architect of the name and qualifications of a proposed superintendent. Within 14 days of receipt of the information, the Architect may notify the Contractor, stating whether the Owner or the Architect (1) has reasonable objection to the proposed superintendent or (2) requires additional time for review. Failure of the Architect to provide notice within the 14-day period shall constitute notice of no reasonable objection. § 3.9.3 The Contractor shall not employ a proposed superintendent to whom the Owner or Architect has made reasonable and timely objection. The Contractor shall not change the superintendent without the Owner’s consent, which shall not unreasonably be withheld or delayed. § 3.10 Contractor’s Construction and Submittal Schedules § 3.10.1 The Contractor, promptly after being awarded the Contract, shall submit for the Owner’s and Architect’s information a Contractor’s construction schedule for the Work. The schedule shall contain detail appropriate for the Project, including (1) the date of commencement of the Work, interim schedule milestone dates, and the date of Substantial Completion; (2) an apportionment of the Work by construction activity; and (3) the time required for completion of each portion of the Work. The schedule shall provide for the orderly progression of the Work to completion and shall not exceed time limits current under the Contract Documents. The schedule shall be revised at appropriate intervals as required by the conditions of the Work and Project. § 3.10.2 The Contractor, promptly after being awarded the Contract and thereafter as necessary to maintain a current submittal schedule, shall submit a submittal schedule for the Architect’s approval. The Architect’s approval shall not be unreasonably delayed or withheld. The submittal schedule shall (1) be coordinated with the Contractor’s construction schedule, and (2) allow the Architect reasonable time to review submittals. If the Contractor fails to submit a submittal schedule, or fails to provide submittals in accordance with the approved submittal schedule, the Contractor shall not be entitled to any increase in Contract Sum or extension of Contract Time based on the time required for review of submittals. § 3.10.3 The Contractor shall perform the Work in general accordance with the most recent schedules submitted to the Owner and Architect. § 3.11 Documents and Samples at the Site The Contractor shall make available, at the Project site, the Contract Documents, including Change Orders, Construction Change Directives, and other Modifications, in good order and marked currently to indicate field changes and selections made during construction, and the approved Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and similar required submittals. These shall be in electronic form or paper copy, available to the Architect and Owner, and delivered to the Architect for submittal to the Owner upon completion of the Work as a record of the Work as constructed.


16

§ 3.12 Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples § 3.12.1 Shop Drawings are drawings, diagrams, schedules, and other data specially prepared for the Work by the Contractor or a Subcontractor, Sub-subcontractor, manufacturer, supplier, or distributor to illustrate some portion of the Work. § 3.12.2 Product Data are illustrations, standard schedules, performance charts, instructions, brochures, diagrams, and other information furnished by the Contractor to illustrate materials or equipment for some portion of the Work. § 3.12.3 Samples are physical examples that illustrate materials, equipment, or workmanship, and establish standards by which the Work will be judged. § 3.12.4 Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and similar submittals are not Contract Documents. Their purpose is to demonstrate how the Contractor proposes to conform to the information given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents for those portions of the Work for which the Contract Documents require submittals. Review by the Architect is subject to the limitations of Section 4.2.7. Informational submittals upon which the Architect is not expected to take responsive action may be so identified in the Contract Documents. Submittals that are not required by the Contract Documents may be returned by the Architect without action. § 3.12.5 The Contractor shall review for compliance with the Contract Documents, approve, and submit to the Architect, Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and similar submittals required by the Contract Documents, in accordance with the submittal schedule approved by the Architect or, in the absence of an approved submittal schedule, with reasonable promptness and in such sequence as to cause no delay in the Work or in the activities of the Owner or of Separate Contractors. § 3.12.6 By submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and similar submittals, the Contractor represents to the Owner and Architect that the Contractor has (1) reviewed and approved them, (2) determined and verified materials, field measurements and field construction criteria related thereto, or will do so, and (3) checked and coordinated the information contained within such submittals with the requirements of the Work and of the Contract Documents. § 3.12.7 The Contractor shall perform no portion of the Work for which the Contract Documents require submittal and review of Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, or similar submittals, until the respective submittal has been approved by the Architect. § 3.12.8 The Work shall be in accordance with approved submittals except that the Contractor shall not be relieved of responsibility for deviations from the requirements of the Contract Documents by the Architect’s approval of Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, or similar submittals, unless the Contractor has specifically notified the Architect of such deviation at the time of submittal and (1) the Architect has given written approval to the specific deviation as a minor change in the Work, or (2) a Change Order or Construction Change Directive has been issued authorizing the deviation. The Contractor shall not be relieved of responsibility for errors or omissions in Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, or similar submittals, by the Architect’s approval thereof. § 3.12.9 The Contractor shall direct specific attention, in writing or on resubmitted Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, or similar submittals, to revisions other than those requested by the Architect on previous submittals. In the absence of such notice, the Architect’s approval of a resubmission shall not apply to such revisions. § 3.12.10 The Contractor shall not be required to provide professional services that constitute the practice of architecture or engineering unless such services are specifically required by the Contract Documents for a portion of the Work or unless the Contractor needs to provide such services in order to carry out the Contractor’s responsibilities for construction means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures. The Contractor shall not be required to provide professional services in violation of applicable law. § 3.12.10.1 If professional design services or certifications by a design professional related to systems, materials, or equipment are specifically required of the Contractor by the Contract Documents, the Owner and the Architect will specify all performance and design criteria that such services must satisfy. The Contractor shall be entitled to rely upon the adequacy and accuracy of the performance and design criteria provided in the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall cause such services or certifications to be provided by an appropriately licensed design professional, whose signature and seal shall appear on all drawings, calculations, specifications, certifications, Shop Drawings, and


17

other submittals prepared by such professional. Shop Drawings, and other submittals related to the Work, designed or certified by such professional, if prepared by others, shall bear such professional’s written approval when submitted to the Architect. The Owner and the Architect shall be entitled to rely upon the adequacy and accuracy of the services, certifications, and approvals performed or provided by such design professionals, provided the Owner and Architect have specified to the Contractor the performance and design criteria that such services must satisfy. Pursuant to this Section 3.12.10, the Architect will review and approve or take other appropriate action on submittals only for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents. § 3.12.10.2 If the Contract Documents require the Contractor’s design professional to certify that the Work has been performed in accordance with the design criteria, the Contractor shall furnish such certifications to the Architect at the time and in the form specified by the Architect. § 3.13 Use of Site The Contractor shall confine operations at the site to areas permitted by applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, codes, rules and regulations, lawful orders of public authorities, and the Contract Documents and shall not unreasonably encumber the site with materials or equipment. § 3.14 Cutting and Patching § 3.14.1 The Contractor shall be responsible for cutting, fitting, or patching required to complete the Work or to make its parts fit together properly. All areas requiring cutting, fitting, or patching shall be restored to the condition existing prior to the cutting, fitting, or patching, unless otherwise required by the Contract Documents. § 3.14.2 The Contractor shall not damage or endanger a portion of the Work or fully or partially completed construction of the Owner or Separate Contractors by cutting, patching, or otherwise altering such construction, or by excavation. The Contractor shall not cut or otherwise alter construction by the Owner or a Separate Contractor except with written consent of the Owner and of the Separate Contractor. Consent shall not be unreasonably withheld. The Contractor shall not unreasonably withhold, from the Owner or a Separate Contractor, its consent to cutting or otherwise altering the Work. § 3.15 Cleaning Up § 3.15.1 The Contractor shall keep the premises and surrounding area free from accumulation of waste materials and rubbish caused by operations under the Contract. At completion of the Work, the Contractor shall remove waste materials, rubbish, the Contractor’s tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus materials from and about the Project. § 3.15.2 If the Contractor fails to clean up as provided in the Contract Documents, the Owner may do so and the Owner shall be entitled to reimbursement from the Contractor. § 3.16 Access to Work The Contractor shall provide the Owner and Architect with access to the Work in preparation and progress wherever located. § 3.17 Royalties, Patents and Copyrights The Contractor shall pay all royalties and license fees. The Contractor shall defend suits or claims for infringement of copyrights and patent rights and shall hold the Owner and Architect harmless from loss on account thereof, but shall not be responsible for defense or loss when a particular design, process, or product of a particular manufacturer or manufacturers is required by the Contract Documents, or where the copyright violations are contained in Drawings, Specifications, or other documents prepared by the Owner or Architect. However, if an infringement of a copyright or patent is discovered by, or made known to, the Contractor, the Contractor shall be responsible for the loss unless the information is promptly furnished to the Architect. § 3.18 Indemnification § 3.18.1 To the fullest extent permitted by law, the Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless the Owner, Architect, Architect’s consultants, and agents and employees of any of them from and against claims, damages, losses, and expenses, including but not limited to attorneys’ fees, arising out of or resulting from performance of the Work, provided that such claim, damage, loss, or expense is attributable to bodily injury, sickness, disease or death, or to injury to or destruction of tangible property (other than the Work itself), but only to the extent caused by the negligent


18

acts or omissions of the Contractor, a Subcontractor, anyone directly or indirectly employed by them, or anyone for whose acts they may be liable, regardless of whether or not such claim, damage, loss, or expense is caused in part by a party indemnified hereunder. Such obligation shall not be construed to negate, abridge, or reduce other rights or obligations of indemnity that would otherwise exist as to a party or person described in this Section 3.18. § 3.18.2 In claims against any person or entity indemnified under this Section 3.18 by an employee of the Contractor, a Subcontractor, anyone directly or indirectly employed by them, or anyone for whose acts they may be liable, the indemnification obligation under Section 3.18.1 shall not be limited by a limitation on amount or type of damages, compensation, or benefits payable by or for the Contractor or a Subcontractor under workers’ compensation acts, disability benefit acts, or other employee benefit acts. ARTICLE 4 ARCHITECT § 4.1 General § 4.1.1 The Architect is the person or entity retained by the Owner pursuant to Section 2.3.2 and identified as such in the Agreement. § 4.1.2 Duties, responsibilities, and limitations of authority of the Architect as set forth in the Contract Documents shall not be restricted, modified, or extended without written consent of the Owner, Contractor, and Architect. Consent shall not be unreasonably withheld. § 4.2 Administration of the Contract § 4.2.1 The Architect will provide administration of the Contract as described in the Contract Documents and will be an Owner’s representative during construction until the date the Architect issues the final Certificate for Payment. The Architect will have authority to act on behalf of the Owner only to the extent provided in the Contract Documents. § 4.2.2 The Architect will visit the site at intervals appropriate to the stage of construction, or as otherwise agreed with the Owner, to become generally familiar with the progress and quality of the portion of the Work completed, and to determine in general if the Work observed is being performed in a manner indicating that the Work, when fully completed, will be in accordance with the Contract Documents. However, the Architect will not be required to make exhaustive or continuous on-site inspections to check the quality or quantity of the Work. The Architect will not have control over, charge of, or responsibility for the construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures, or for the safety precautions and programs in connection with the Work, since these are solely the Contractor’s rights and responsibilities under the Contract Documents. § 4.2.3 On the basis of the site visits, the Architect will keep the Owner reasonably informed about the progress and quality of the portion of the Work completed, and promptly report to the Owner (1) known deviations from the Contract Documents, (2) known deviations from the most recent construction schedule submitted by the Contractor, and (3) defects and deficiencies observed in the Work. The Architect will not be responsible for the Contractor’s failure to perform the Work in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. The Architect will not have control over or charge of, and will not be responsible for acts or omissions of, the Contractor, Subcontractors, or their agents or employees, or any other persons or entities performing portions of the Work. § 4.2.4 Communications The Owner and Contractor shall include the Architect in all communications that relate to or affect the Architect’s services or professional responsibilities. The Owner shall promptly notify the Architect of the substance of any direct communications between the Owner and the Contractor otherwise relating to the Project. Communications by and with the Architect’s consultants shall be through the Architect. Communications by and with Subcontractors and suppliers shall be through the Contractor. Communications by and with Separate Contractors shall be through the Owner. The Contract Documents may specify other communication protocols. § 4.2.5 Based on the Architect’s evaluations of the Contractor’s Applications for Payment, the Architect will review and certify the amounts due the Contractor and will issue Certificates for Payment in such amounts. § 4.2.6 The Architect has authority to reject Work that does not conform to the Contract Documents. Whenever the Architect considers it necessary or advisable, the Architect will have authority to require inspection or testing of the Work in accordance with Sections 13.4.2 and 13.4.3, whether or not the Work is fabricated, installed or completed. However, neither this authority of the Architect nor a decision made in good faith either to exercise or not to exercise


19

such authority shall give rise to a duty or responsibility of the Architect to the Contractor, Subcontractors, suppliers, their agents or employees, or other persons or entities performing portions of the Work. § 4.2.7 The Architect will review and approve, or take other appropriate action upon, the Contractor’s submittals such as Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples, but only for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents. The Architect’s action will be taken in accordance with the submittal schedule approved by the Architect or, in the absence of an approved submittal schedule, with reasonable promptness while allowing sufficient time in the Architect’s professional judgment to permit adequate review. Review of such submittals is not conducted for the purpose of determining the accuracy and completeness of other details such as dimensions and quantities, or for substantiating instructions for installation or performance of equipment or systems, all of which remain the responsibility of the Contractor as required by the Contract Documents. The Architect’s review of the Contractor’s submittals shall not relieve the Contractor of the obligations under Sections 3.3, 3.5, and 3.12. The Architect’s review shall not constitute approval of safety precautions or of any construction means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures. The Architect’s approval of a specific item shall not indicate approval of an assembly of which the item is a component. § 4.2.8 The Architect will prepare Change Orders and Construction Change Directives, and may order minor changes in the Work as provided in Section 7.4. The Architect will investigate and make determinations and recommendations regarding concealed and unknown conditions as provided in Section 3.7.4. § 4.2.9 The Architect will conduct inspections to determine the date or dates of Substantial Completion and the date of final completion; issue Certificates of Substantial Completion pursuant to Section 9.8; receive and forward to the Owner, for the Owner’s review and records, written warranties and related documents required by the Contract and assembled by the Contractor pursuant to Section 9.10; and issue a final Certificate for Payment pursuant to Section 9.10. § 4.2.10 If the Owner and Architect agree, the Architect will provide one or more Project representatives to assist in carrying out the Architect’s responsibilities at the site. The Owner shall notify the Contractor of any change in the duties, responsibilities and limitations of authority of the Project representatives. § 4.2.11 The Architect will interpret and decide matters concerning performance under, and requirements of, the Contract Documents on written request of either the Owner or Contractor. The Architect’s response to such requests will be made in writing within any time limits agreed upon or otherwise with reasonable promptness. § 4.2.12 Interpretations and decisions of the Architect will be consistent with the intent of, and reasonably inferable from, the Contract Documents and will be in writing or in the form of drawings. When making such interpretations and decisions, the Architect will endeavor to secure faithful performance by both Owner and Contractor, will not show partiality to either, and will not be liable for results of interpretations or decisions rendered in good faith. § 4.2.13 The Architect’s decisions on matters relating to aesthetic effect will be final if consistent with the intent expressed in the Contract Documents. § 4.2.14 The Architect will review and respond to requests for information about the Contract Documents. The Architect’s response to such requests will be made in writing within any time limits agreed upon or otherwise with reasonable promptness. If appropriate, the Architect will prepare and issue supplemental Drawings and Specifications in response to the requests for information. ARTICLE 5 SUBCONTRACTORS § 5.1 Definitions § 5.1.1 A Subcontractor is a person or entity who has a direct contract with the Contractor to perform a portion of the Work at the site. The term “Subcontractor” is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number and means a Subcontractor or an authorized representative of the Subcontractor. The term “Subcontractor” does not include a Separate Contractor or the subcontractors of a Separate Contractor. § 5.1.2 A Sub-subcontractor is a person or entity who has a direct or indirect contract with a Subcontractor to perform a portion of the Work at the site. The term “Sub-subcontractor” is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number and means a Sub-subcontractor or an authorized representative of the Sub-subcontractor.


20

§ 5.2 Award of Subcontracts and Other Contracts for Portions of the Work § 5.2.1 Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, the Contractor, as soon as practicable after award of the Contract, shall notify the Owner and Architect of the persons or entities proposed for each principal portion of the Work, including those who are to furnish materials or equipment fabricated to a special design. Within 14 days of receipt of the information, the Architect may notify the Contractor whether the Owner or the Architect (1) has reasonable objection to any such proposed person or entity or (2) requires additional time for review. Failure of the Architect to provide notice within the 14-day period shall constitute notice of no reasonable objection. § 5.2.2 The Contractor shall not contract with a proposed person or entity to whom the Owner or Architect has made reasonable and timely objection. The Contractor shall not be required to contract with anyone to whom the Contractor has made reasonable objection. § 5.2.3 If the Owner or Architect has reasonable objection to a person or entity proposed by the Contractor, the Contractor shall propose another to whom the Owner or Architect has no reasonable objection. If the proposed but rejected Subcontractor was reasonably capable of performing the Work, the Contract Sum and Contract Time shall be increased or decreased by the difference, if any, occasioned by such change, and an appropriate Change Order shall be issued before commencement of the substitute Subcontractor’s Work. However, no increase in the Contract Sum or Contract Time shall be allowed for such change unless the Contractor has acted promptly and responsively in submitting names as required. § 5.2.4 The Contractor shall not substitute a Subcontractor, person, or entity for one previously selected if the Owner or Architect makes reasonable objection to such substitution. § 5.3 Subcontractual Relations By appropriate written agreement, the Contractor shall require each Subcontractor, to the extent of the Work to be performed by the Subcontractor, to be bound to the Contractor by terms of the Contract Documents, and to assume toward the Contractor all the obligations and responsibilities, including the responsibility for safety of the Subcontractor’s Work that the Contractor, by these Contract Documents, assumes toward the Owner and Architect. Each subcontract agreement shall preserve and protect the rights of the Owner and Architect under the Contract Documents with respect to the Work to be performed by the Subcontractor so that subcontracting thereof will not prejudice such rights, and shall allow to the Subcontractor, unless specifically provided otherwise in the subcontract agreement, the benefit of all rights, remedies, and redress against the Contractor that the Contractor, by the Contract Documents, has against the Owner. Where appropriate, the Contractor shall require each Subcontractor to enter into similar agreements with Sub-subcontractors. The Contractor shall make available to each proposed Subcontractor, prior to the execution of the subcontract agreement, copies of the Contract Documents to which the Subcontractor will be bound, and, upon written request of the Subcontractor, identify to the Subcontractor terms and conditions of the proposed subcontract agreement that may be at variance with the Contract Documents. Subcontractors will similarly make copies of applicable portions of such documents available to their respective proposed Sub-subcontractors. § 5.4 Contingent Assignment of Subcontracts § 5.4.1 Each subcontract agreement for a portion of the Work is assigned by the Contractor to the Owner, provided that

.1 assignment is effective only after termination of the Contract by the Owner for cause pursuant to Section 14.2 and only for those subcontract agreements that the Owner accepts by notifying the Subcontractor and Contractor; and

.2 assignment is subject to the prior rights of the surety, if any, obligated under bond relating to the Contract.

When the Owner accepts the assignment of a subcontract agreement, the Owner assumes the Contractor’s rights and obligations under the subcontract. § 5.4.2 Upon such assignment, if the Work has been suspended for more than 30 days, the Subcontractor’s compensation shall be equitably adjusted for increases in cost resulting from the suspension. § 5.4.3 Upon assignment to the Owner under this Section 5.4, the Owner may further assign the subcontract to a successor contractor or other entity. If the Owner assigns the subcontract to a successor contractor or other entity, the Owner shall nevertheless remain legally responsible for all of the successor contractor’s obligations under the subcontract.


21

ARTICLE 6 CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE CONTRACTORS § 6.1 Owner’s Right to Perform Construction and to Award Separate Contracts § 6.1.1 The term “Separate Contractor(s)” shall mean other contractors retained by the Owner under separate agreements. The Owner reserves the right to perform construction or operations related to the Project with the Owner’s own forces, and with Separate Contractors retained under Conditions of the Contract substantially similar to those of this Contract, including those provisions of the Conditions of the Contract related to insurance and waiver of subrogation. § 6.1.2 When separate contracts are awarded for different portions of the Project or other construction or operations on the site, the term “Contractor” in the Contract Documents in each case shall mean the Contractor who executes each separate Owner-Contractor Agreement. § 6.1.3 The Owner shall provide for coordination of the activities of the Owner’s own forces and of each Separate Contractor with the Work of the Contractor, who shall cooperate with them. The Contractor shall participate with any Separate Contractors and the Owner in reviewing their construction schedules. The Contractor shall make any revisions to its construction schedule deemed necessary after a joint review and mutual agreement. The construction schedules shall then constitute the schedules to be used by the Contractor, Separate Contractors, and the Owner until subsequently revised. § 6.1.4 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, when the Owner performs construction or operations related to the Project with the Owner’s own forces or with Separate Contractors, the Owner or its Separate Contractors shall have the same obligations and rights that the Contractor has under the Conditions of the Contract, including, without excluding others, those stated in Article 3, this Article 6, and Articles 10, 11, and 12. § 6.2 Mutual Responsibility § 6.2.1 The Contractor shall afford the Owner and Separate Contractors reasonable opportunity for introduction and storage of their materials and equipment and performance of their activities, and shall connect and coordinate the Contractor’s construction and operations with theirs as required by the Contract Documents. § 6.2.2 If part of the Contractor’s Work depends for proper execution or results upon construction or operations by the Owner or a Separate Contractor, the Contractor shall, prior to proceeding with that portion of the Work, promptly notify the Architect of apparent discrepancies or defects in the construction or operations by the Owner or Separate Contractor that would render it unsuitable for proper execution and results of the Contractor’s Work. Failure of the Contractor to notify the Architect of apparent discrepancies or defects prior to proceeding with the Work shall constitute an acknowledgment that the Owner’s or Separate Contractor’s completed or partially completed construction is fit and proper to receive the Contractor’s Work. The Contractor shall not be responsible for discrepancies or defects in the construction or operations by the Owner or Separate Contractor that are not apparent. § 6.2.3 The Contractor shall reimburse the Owner for costs the Owner incurs that are payable to a Separate Contractor because of the Contractor’s delays, improperly timed activities or defective construction. The Owner shall be responsible to the Contractor for costs the Contractor incurs because of a Separate Contractor’s delays, improperly timed activities, damage to the Work or defective construction. § 6.2.4 The Contractor shall promptly remedy damage that the Contractor wrongfully causes to completed or partially completed construction or to property of the Owner or Separate Contractor as provided in Section 10.2.5. § 6.2.5 The Owner and each Separate Contractor shall have the same responsibilities for cutting and patching as are described for the Contractor in Section 3.14. § 6.3 Owner’s Right to Clean Up If a dispute arises among the Contractor, Separate Contractors, and the Owner as to the responsibility under their respective contracts for maintaining the premises and surrounding area free from waste materials and rubbish, the Owner may clean up and the Architect will allocate the cost among those responsible.


22

ARTICLE 7 CHANGES IN THE WORK § 7.1 General § 7.1.1 Changes in the Work may be accomplished after execution of the Contract, and without invalidating the Contract, by Change Order, Construction Change Directive or order for a minor change in the Work, subject to the limitations stated in this Article 7 and elsewhere in the Contract Documents. § 7.1.2 A Change Order shall be based upon agreement among the Owner, Contractor, and Architect. A Construction Change Directive requires agreement by the Owner and Architect and may or may not be agreed to by the Contractor. An order for a minor change in the Work may be issued by the Architect alone. § 7.1.3 Changes in the Work shall be performed under applicable provisions of the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall proceed promptly with changes in the Work, unless otherwise provided in the Change Order, Construction Change Directive, or order for a minor change in the Work. § 7.2 Change Orders § 7.2.1 A Change Order is a written instrument prepared by the Architect and signed by the Owner, Contractor, and Architect stating their agreement upon all of the following:

.1 The change in the Work;

.2 The amount of the adjustment, if any, in the Contract Sum; and

.3 The extent of the adjustment, if any, in the Contract Time. § 7.3 Construction Change Directives § 7.3.1 A Construction Change Directive is a written order prepared by the Architect and signed by the Owner and Architect, directing a change in the Work prior to agreement on adjustment, if any, in the Contract Sum or Contract Time, or both. The Owner may by Construction Change Directive, without invalidating the Contract, order changes in the Work within the general scope of the Contract consisting of additions, deletions, or other revisions, the Contract Sum and Contract Time being adjusted accordingly. § 7.3.2 A Construction Change Directive shall be used in the absence of total agreement on the terms of a Change Order. § 7.3.3 If the Construction Change Directive provides for an adjustment to the Contract Sum, the adjustment shall be based on one of the following methods:

.1 Mutual acceptance of a lump sum properly itemized and supported by sufficient substantiating data to permit evaluation;

.2 Unit prices stated in the Contract Documents or subsequently agreed upon;

.3 Cost to be determined in a manner agreed upon by the parties and a mutually acceptable fixed or percentage fee; or

.4 As provided in Section 7.3.4. § 7.3.4 If the Contractor does not respond promptly or disagrees with the method for adjustment in the Contract Sum, the Architect shall determine the adjustment on the basis of reasonable expenditures and savings of those performing the Work attributable to the change, including, in case of an increase in the Contract Sum, an amount for overhead and profit as set forth in the Agreement, or if no such amount is set forth in the Agreement, a reasonable amount. In such case, and also under Section 7.3.3.3, the Contractor shall keep and present, in such form as the Architect may prescribe, an itemized accounting together with appropriate supporting data. Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, costs for the purposes of this Section 7.3.4 shall be limited to the following:

.1 Costs of labor, including applicable payroll taxes, fringe benefits required by agreement or custom, workers’ compensation insurance, and other employee costs approved by the Architect;

.2 Costs of materials, supplies, and equipment, including cost of transportation, whether incorporated or consumed;

.3 Rental costs of machinery and equipment, exclusive of hand tools, whether rented from the Contractor or others;

.4 Costs of premiums for all bonds and insurance, permit fees, and sales, use, or similar taxes, directly related to the change; and

.5 Costs of supervision and field office personnel directly attributable to the change.


23

§ 7.3.5 If the Contractor disagrees with the adjustment in the Contract Time, the Contractor may make a Claim in accordance with applicable provisions of Article 15. § 7.3.6 Upon receipt of a Construction Change Directive, the Contractor shall promptly proceed with the change in the Work involved and advise the Architect of the Contractor’s agreement or disagreement with the method, if any, provided in the Construction Change Directive for determining the proposed adjustment in the Contract Sum or Contract Time. § 7.3.7 A Construction Change Directive signed by the Contractor indicates the Contractor’s agreement therewith, including adjustment in Contract Sum and Contract Time or the method for determining them. Such agreement shall be effective immediately and shall be recorded as a Change Order. § 7.3.8 The amount of credit to be allowed by the Contractor to the Owner for a deletion or change that results in a net decrease in the Contract Sum shall be actual net cost as confirmed by the Architect. When both additions and credits covering related Work or substitutions are involved in a change, the allowance for overhead and profit shall be figured on the basis of net increase, if any, with respect to that change. § 7.3.9 Pending final determination of the total cost of a Construction Change Directive to the Owner, the Contractor may request payment for Work completed under the Construction Change Directive in Applications for Payment. The Architect will make an interim determination for purposes of monthly certification for payment for those costs and certify for payment the amount that the Architect determines, in the Architect’s professional judgment, to be reasonably justified. The Architect’s interim determination of cost shall adjust the Contract Sum on the same basis as a Change Order, subject to the right of either party to disagree and assert a Claim in accordance with Article 15. § 7.3.10 When the Owner and Contractor agree with a determination made by the Architect concerning the adjustments in the Contract Sum and Contract Time, or otherwise reach agreement upon the adjustments, such agreement shall be effective immediately and the Architect will prepare a Change Order. Change Orders may be issued for all or any part of a Construction Change Directive. § 7.4 Minor Changes in the Work The Architect may order minor changes in the Work that are consistent with the intent of the Contract Documents and do not involve an adjustment in the Contract Sum or an extension of the Contract Time. The Architect’s order for minor changes shall be in writing. If the Contractor believes that the proposed minor change in the Work will affect the Contract Sum or Contract Time, the Contractor shall notify the Architect and shall not proceed to implement the change in the Work. If the Contractor performs the Work set forth in the Architect’s order for a minor change without prior notice to the Architect that such change will affect the Contract Sum or Contract Time, the Contractor waives any adjustment to the Contract Sum or extension of the Contract Time. ARTICLE 8 TIME § 8.1 Definitions § 8.1.1 Unless otherwise provided, Contract Time is the period of time, including authorized adjustments, allotted in the Contract Documents for Substantial Completion of the Work. § 8.1.2 The date of commencement of the Work is the date established in the Agreement. § 8.1.3 The date of Substantial Completion is the date certified by the Architect in accordance with Section 9.8. § 8.1.4 The term “day” as used in the Contract Documents shall mean calendar day unless otherwise specifically defined. § 8.2 Progress and Completion § 8.2.1 Time limits stated in the Contract Documents are of the essence of the Contract. By executing the Agreement, the Contractor confirms that the Contract Time is a reasonable period for performing the Work. § 8.2.2 The Contractor shall not knowingly, except by agreement or instruction of the Owner in writing, commence the Work prior to the effective date of insurance required to be furnished by the Contractor and Owner.


24

§ 8.2.3 The Contractor shall proceed expeditiously with adequate forces and shall achieve Substantial Completion within the Contract Time. § 8.3 Delays and Extensions of Time § 8.3.1 If the Contractor is delayed at any time in the commencement or progress of the Work by (1) an act or neglect of the Owner or Architect, of an employee of either, or of a Separate Contractor; (2) by changes ordered in the Work; (3) by labor disputes, fire, unusual delay in deliveries, unavoidable casualties, adverse weather conditions documented in accordance with Section 15.1.6.2, or other causes beyond the Contractor’s control; (4) by delay authorized by the Owner pending mediation and binding dispute resolution; or (5) by other causes that the Contractor asserts, and the Architect determines, justify delay, then the Contract Time shall be extended for such reasonable time as the Architect may determine. § 8.3.2 Claims relating to time shall be made in accordance with applicable provisions of Article 15. § 8.3.3 This Section 8.3 does not preclude recovery of damages for delay by either party under other provisions of the Contract Documents. ARTICLE 9 PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION § 9.1 Contract Sum § 9.1.1 The Contract Sum is stated in the Agreement and, including authorized adjustments, is the total amount payable by the Owner to the Contractor for performance of the Work under the Contract Documents. § 9.1.2 If unit prices are stated in the Contract Documents or subsequently agreed upon, and if quantities originally contemplated are materially changed so that application of such unit prices to the actual quantities causes substantial inequity to the Owner or Contractor, the applicable unit prices shall be equitably adjusted. § 9.2 Schedule of Values Where the Contract is based on a stipulated sum or Guaranteed Maximum Price, the Contractor shall submit a schedule of values to the Architect before the first Application for Payment, allocating the entire Contract Sum to the various portions of the Work. The schedule of values shall be prepared in the form, and supported by the data to substantiate its accuracy, required by the Architect. This schedule, unless objected to by the Architect, shall be used as a basis for reviewing the Contractor’s Applications for Payment. Any changes to the schedule of values shall be submitted to the Architect and supported by such data to substantiate its accuracy as the Architect may require, and unless objected to by the Architect, shall be used as a basis for reviewing the Contractor’s subsequent Applications for Payment. § 9.3 Applications for Payment § 9.3.1 At least ten days before the date established for each progress payment, the Contractor shall submit to the Architect an itemized Application for Payment prepared in accordance with the schedule of values, if required under Section 9.2, for completed portions of the Work. The application shall be notarized, if required, and supported by all data substantiating the Contractor’s right to payment that the Owner or Architect require, such as copies of requisitions, and releases and waivers of liens from Subcontractors and suppliers, and shall reflect retainage if provided for in the Contract Documents. § 9.3.1.1 As provided in Section 7.3.9, such applications may include requests for payment on account of changes in the Work that have been properly authorized by Construction Change Directives, or by interim determinations of the Architect, but not yet included in Change Orders. § 9.3.1.2 Applications for Payment shall not include requests for payment for portions of the Work for which the Contractor does not intend to pay a Subcontractor or supplier, unless such Work has been performed by others whom the Contractor intends to pay. § 9.3.2 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, payments shall be made on account of materials and equipment delivered and suitably stored at the site for subsequent incorporation in the Work. If approved in advance by the Owner, payment may similarly be made for materials and equipment suitably stored off the site at a location agreed upon in writing. Payment for materials and equipment stored on or off the site shall be conditioned upon compliance by the Contractor with procedures satisfactory to the Owner to establish the Owner’s title to such materials


25

and equipment or otherwise protect the Owner’s interest, and shall include the costs of applicable insurance, storage, and transportation to the site, for such materials and equipment stored off the site. § 9.3.3 The Contractor warrants that title to all Work covered by an Application for Payment will pass to the Owner no later than the time of payment. The Contractor further warrants that upon submittal of an Application for Payment all Work for which Certificates for Payment have been previously issued and payments received from the Owner shall, to the best of the Contractor’s knowledge, information, and belief, be free and clear of liens, claims, security interests, or encumbrances, in favor of the Contractor, Subcontractors, suppliers, or other persons or entities that provided labor, materials, and equipment relating to the Work. § 9.4 Certificates for Payment § 9.4.1 The Architect will, within seven days after receipt of the Contractor’s Application for Payment, either (1) issue to the Owner a Certificate for Payment in the full amount of the Application for Payment, with a copy to the Contractor; or (2) issue to the Owner a Certificate for Payment for such amount as the Architect determines is properly due, and notify the Contractor and Owner of the Architect’s reasons for withholding certification in part as provided in Section 9.5.1; or (3) withhold certification of the entire Application for Payment, and notify the Contractor and Owner of the Architect’s reason for withholding certification in whole as provided in Section 9.5.1. § 9.4.2 The issuance of a Certificate for Payment will constitute a representation by the Architect to the Owner, based on the Architect’s evaluation of the Work and the data in the Application for Payment, that, to the best of the Architect’s knowledge, information, and belief, the Work has progressed to the point indicated, the quality of the Work is in accordance with the Contract Documents, and that the Contractor is entitled to payment in the amount certified. The foregoing representations are subject to an evaluation of the Work for conformance with the Contract Documents upon Substantial Completion, to results of subsequent tests and inspections, to correction of minor deviations from the Contract Documents prior to completion, and to specific qualifications expressed by the Architect. However, the issuance of a Certificate for Payment will not be a representation that the Architect has (1) made exhaustive or continuous on-site inspections to check the quality or quantity of the Work; (2) reviewed construction means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures; (3) reviewed copies of requisitions received from Subcontractors and suppliers and other data requested by the Owner to substantiate the Contractor’s right to payment; or (4) made examination to ascertain how or for what purpose the Contractor has used money previously paid on account of the Contract Sum. § 9.5 Decisions to Withhold Certification § 9.5.1 The Architect may withhold a Certificate for Payment in whole or in part, to the extent reasonably necessary to protect the Owner, if in the Architect’s opinion the representations to the Owner required by Section 9.4.2 cannot be made. If the Architect is unable to certify payment in the amount of the Application, the Architect will notify the Contractor and Owner as provided in Section 9.4.1. If the Contractor and Architect cannot agree on a revised amount, the Architect will promptly issue a Certificate for Payment for the amount for which the Architect is able to make such representations to the Owner. The Architect may also withhold a Certificate for Payment or, because of subsequently discovered evidence, may nullify the whole or a part of a Certificate for Payment previously issued, to such extent as may be necessary in the Architect’s opinion to protect the Owner from loss for which the Contractor is responsible, including loss resulting from acts and omissions described in Section 3.3.2, because of

.1 defective Work not remedied;

.2 third party claims filed or reasonable evidence indicating probable filing of such claims, unless security acceptable to the Owner is provided by the Contractor;

.3 failure of the Contractor to make payments properly to Subcontractors or suppliers for labor, materials or equipment;

.4 reasonable evidence that the Work cannot be completed for the unpaid balance of the Contract Sum;

.5 damage to the Owner or a Separate Contractor;

.6 reasonable evidence that the Work will not be completed within the Contract Time, and that the unpaid balance would not be adequate to cover actual or liquidated damages for the anticipated delay; or

.7 repeated failure to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. § 9.5.2 When either party disputes the Architect’s decision regarding a Certificate for Payment under Section 9.5.1, in whole or in part, that party may submit a Claim in accordance with Article 15. § 9.5.3 When the reasons for withholding certification are removed, certification will be made for amounts previously withheld.


26

§ 9.5.4 If the Architect withholds certification for payment under Section 9.5.1.3, the Owner may, at its sole option, issue joint checks to the Contractor and to any Subcontractor or supplier to whom the Contractor failed to make payment for Work properly performed or material or equipment suitably delivered. If the Owner makes payments by joint check, the Owner shall notify the Architect and the Contractor shall reflect such payment on its next Application for Payment. § 9.6 Progress Payments § 9.6.1 After the Architect has issued a Certificate for Payment, the Owner shall make payment in the manner and within the time provided in the Contract Documents, and shall so notify the Architect. § 9.6.2 The Contractor shall pay each Subcontractor, no later than seven days after receipt of payment from the Owner, the amount to which the Subcontractor is entitled, reflecting percentages actually retained from payments to the Contractor on account of the Subcontractor’s portion of the Work. The Contractor shall, by appropriate agreement with each Subcontractor, require each Subcontractor to make payments to Sub-subcontractors in a similar manner. § 9.6.3 The Architect will, on request, furnish to a Subcontractor, if practicable, information regarding percentages of completion or amounts applied for by the Contractor and action taken thereon by the Architect and Owner on account of portions of the Work done by such Subcontractor. § 9.6.4 The Owner has the right to request written evidence from the Contractor that the Contractor has properly paid Subcontractors and suppliers amounts paid by the Owner to the Contractor for subcontracted Work. If the Contractor fails to furnish such evidence within seven days, the Owner shall have the right to contact Subcontractors and suppliers to ascertain whether they have been properly paid. Neither the Owner nor Architect shall have an obligation to pay, or to see to the payment of money to, a Subcontractor or supplier, except as may otherwise be required by law. § 9.6.5 The Contractor’s payments to suppliers shall be treated in a manner similar to that provided in Sections 9.6.2, 9.6.3 and 9.6.4. § 9.6.6 A Certificate for Payment, a progress payment, or partial or entire use or occupancy of the Project by the Owner shall not constitute acceptance of Work not in accordance with the Contract Documents. § 9.6.7 Unless the Contractor provides the Owner with a payment bond in the full penal sum of the Contract Sum, payments received by the Contractor for Work properly performed by Subcontractors or provided by suppliers shall be held by the Contractor for those Subcontractors or suppliers who performed Work or furnished materials, or both, under contract with the Contractor for which payment was made by the Owner. Nothing contained herein shall require money to be placed in a separate account and not commingled with money of the Contractor, create any fiduciary liability or tort liability on the part of the Contractor for breach of trust, or entitle any person or entity to an award of punitive damages against the Contractor for breach of the requirements of this provision. § 9.6.8 Provided the Owner has fulfilled its payment obligations under the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall defend and indemnify the Owner from all loss, liability, damage or expense, including reasonable attorney’s fees and litigation expenses, arising out of any lien claim or other claim for payment by any Subcontractor or supplier of any tier. Upon receipt of notice of a lien claim or other claim for payment, the Owner shall notify the Contractor. If approved by the applicable court, when required, the Contractor may substitute a surety bond for the property against which the lien or other claim for payment has been asserted. § 9.7 Failure of Payment If the Architect does not issue a Certificate for Payment, through no fault of the Contractor, within seven days after receipt of the Contractor’s Application for Payment, or if the Owner does not pay the Contractor within seven days after the date established in the Contract Documents, the amount certified by the Architect or awarded by binding dispute resolution, then the Contractor may, upon seven additional days’ notice to the Owner and Architect, stop the Work until payment of the amount owing has been received. The Contract Time shall be extended appropriately and the Contract Sum shall be increased by the amount of the Contractor’s reasonable costs of shutdown, delay and start-up, plus interest as provided for in the Contract Documents.


27

§ 9.8 Substantial Completion § 9.8.1 Substantial Completion is the stage in the progress of the Work when the Work or designated portion thereof is sufficiently complete in accordance with the Contract Documents so that the Owner can occupy or utilize the Work for its intended use. § 9.8.2 When the Contractor considers that the Work, or a portion thereof which the Owner agrees to accept separately, is substantially complete, the Contractor shall prepare and submit to the Architect a comprehensive list of items to be completed or corrected prior to final payment. Failure to include an item on such list does not alter the responsibility of the Contractor to complete all Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. § 9.8.3 Upon receipt of the Contractor’s list, the Architect will make an inspection to determine whether the Work or designated portion thereof is substantially complete. If the Architect’s inspection discloses any item, whether or not included on the Contractor’s list, which is not sufficiently complete in accordance with the Contract Documents so that the Owner can occupy or utilize the Work or designated portion thereof for its intended use, the Contractor shall, before issuance of the Certificate of Substantial Completion, complete or correct such item upon notification by the Architect. In such case, the Contractor shall then submit a request for another inspection by the Architect to determine Substantial Completion. § 9.8.4 When the Work or designated portion thereof is substantially complete, the Architect will prepare a Certificate of Substantial Completion that shall establish the date of Substantial Completion; establish responsibilities of the Owner and Contractor for security, maintenance, heat, utilities, damage to the Work and insurance; and fix the time within which the Contractor shall finish all items on the list accompanying the Certificate. Warranties required by the Contract Documents shall commence on the date of Substantial Completion of the Work or designated portion thereof unless otherwise provided in the Certificate of Substantial Completion. § 9.8.5 The Certificate of Substantial Completion shall be submitted to the Owner and Contractor for their written acceptance of responsibilities assigned to them in the Certificate. Upon such acceptance, and consent of surety if any, the Owner shall make payment of retainage applying to the Work or designated portion thereof. Such payment shall be adjusted for Work that is incomplete or not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. § 9.9 Partial Occupancy or Use § 9.9.1 The Owner may occupy or use any completed or partially completed portion of the Work at any stage when such portion is designated by separate agreement with the Contractor, provided such occupancy or use is consented to by the insurer and authorized by public authorities having jurisdiction over the Project. Such partial occupancy or use may commence whether or not the portion is substantially complete, provided the Owner and Contractor have accepted in writing the responsibilities assigned to each of them for payments, retainage, if any, security, maintenance, heat, utilities, damage to the Work and insurance, and have agreed in writing concerning the period for correction of the Work and commencement of warranties required by the Contract Documents. When the Contractor considers a portion substantially complete, the Contractor shall prepare and submit a list to the Architect as provided under Section 9.8.2. Consent of the Contractor to partial occupancy or use shall not be unreasonably withheld. The stage of the progress of the Work shall be determined by written agreement between the Owner and Contractor or, if no agreement is reached, by decision of the Architect. § 9.9.2 Immediately prior to such partial occupancy or use, the Owner, Contractor, and Architect shall jointly inspect the area to be occupied or portion of the Work to be used in order to determine and record the condition of the Work. § 9.9.3 Unless otherwise agreed upon, partial occupancy or use of a portion or portions of the Work shall not constitute acceptance of Work not complying with the requirements of the Contract Documents. § 9.10 Final Completion and Final Payment § 9.10.1 Upon receipt of the Contractor’s notice that the Work is ready for final inspection and acceptance and upon receipt of a final Application for Payment, the Architect will promptly make such inspection. When the Architect finds the Work acceptable under the Contract Documents and the Contract fully performed, the Architect will promptly issue a final Certificate for Payment stating that to the best of the Architect’s knowledge, information and belief, and on the basis of the Architect’s on-site visits and inspections, the Work has been completed in accordance with the Contract Documents and that the entire balance found to be due the Contractor and noted in the final Certificate is due and payable. The Architect’s final Certificate for Payment will constitute a further representation that conditions listed in Section 9.10.2 as precedent to the Contractor’s being entitled to final payment have been fulfilled.


28

§ 9.10.2 Neither final payment nor any remaining retained percentage shall become due until the Contractor submits to the Architect (1) an affidavit that payrolls, bills for materials and equipment, and other indebtedness connected with the Work for which the Owner or the Owner’s property might be responsible or encumbered (less amounts withheld by Owner) have been paid or otherwise satisfied, (2) a certificate evidencing that insurance required by the Contract Documents to remain in force after final payment is currently in effect, (3) a written statement that the Contractor knows of no reason that the insurance will not be renewable to cover the period required by the Contract Documents, (4) consent of surety, if any, to final payment, (5) documentation of any special warranties, such as manufacturers’ warranties or specific Subcontractor warranties, and (6) if required by the Owner, other data establishing payment or satisfaction of obligations, such as receipts and releases and waivers of liens, claims, security interests, or encumbrances arising out of the Contract, to the extent and in such form as may be designated by the Owner. If a Subcontractor refuses to furnish a release or waiver required by the Owner, the Contractor may furnish a bond satisfactory to the Owner to indemnify the Owner against such lien, claim, security interest, or encumbrance. If a lien, claim, security interest, or encumbrance remains unsatisfied after payments are made, the Contractor shall refund to the Owner all money that the Owner may be compelled to pay in discharging the lien, claim, security interest, or encumbrance, including all costs and reasonable attorneys’ fees. § 9.10.3 If, after Substantial Completion of the Work, final completion thereof is materially delayed through no fault of the Contractor or by issuance of Change Orders affecting final completion, and the Architect so confirms, the Owner shall, upon application by the Contractor and certification by the Architect, and without terminating the Contract, make payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed, corrected, and accepted. If the remaining balance for Work not fully completed or corrected is less than retainage stipulated in the Contract Documents, and if bonds have been furnished, the written consent of the surety to payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and accepted shall be submitted by the Contractor to the Architect prior to certification of such payment. Such payment shall be made under terms and conditions governing final payment, except that it shall not constitute a waiver of Claims. § 9.10.4 The making of final payment shall constitute a waiver of Claims by the Owner except those arising from

.1 liens, Claims, security interests, or encumbrances arising out of the Contract and unsettled;

.2 failure of the Work to comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents;

.3 terms of special warranties required by the Contract Documents; or

.4 audits performed by the Owner, if permitted by the Contract Documents, after final payment. § 9.10.5 Acceptance of final payment by the Contractor, a Subcontractor, or a supplier, shall constitute a waiver of claims by that payee except those previously made in writing and identified by that payee as unsettled at the time of final Application for Payment. ARTICLE 10 PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY § 10.1 Safety Precautions and Programs The Contractor shall be responsible for initiating, maintaining, and supervising all safety precautions and programs in connection with the performance of the Contract. § 10.2 Safety of Persons and Property § 10.2.1 The Contractor shall take reasonable precautions for safety of, and shall provide reasonable protection to prevent damage, injury, or loss to

.1 employees on the Work and other persons who may be affected thereby;

.2 the Work and materials and equipment to be incorporated therein, whether in storage on or off the site, under care, custody, or control of the Contractor, a Subcontractor, or a Sub-subcontractor; and

.3 other property at the site or adjacent thereto, such as trees, shrubs, lawns, walks, pavements, roadways, structures, and utilities not designated for removal, relocation, or replacement in the course of construction.

§ 10.2.2 The Contractor shall comply with, and give notices required by applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, codes, rules and regulations, and lawful orders of public authorities, bearing on safety of persons or property or their protection from damage, injury, or loss. § 10.2.3 The Contractor shall implement, erect, and maintain, as required by existing conditions and performance of the Contract, reasonable safeguards for safety and protection, including posting danger signs and other warnings


29

against hazards; promulgating safety regulations; and notifying the owners and users of adjacent sites and utilities of the safeguards. § 10.2.4 When use or storage of explosives or other hazardous materials or equipment, or unusual methods are necessary for execution of the Work, the Contractor shall exercise utmost care and carry on such activities under supervision of properly qualified personnel. § 10.2.5 The Contractor shall promptly remedy damage and loss (other than damage or loss insured under property insurance required by the Contract Documents) to property referred to in Sections 10.2.1.2 and 10.2.1.3 caused in whole or in part by the Contractor, a Subcontractor, a Sub-subcontractor, or anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them, or by anyone for whose acts they may be liable and for which the Contractor is responsible under Sections 10.2.1.2 and 10.2.1.3. The Contractor may make a Claim for the cost to remedy the damage or loss to the extent such damage or loss is attributable to acts or omissions of the Owner or Architect or anyone directly or indirectly employed by either of them, or by anyone for whose acts either of them may be liable, and not attributable to the fault or negligence of the Contractor. The foregoing obligations of the Contractor are in addition to the Contractor’s obligations under Section 3.18. § 10.2.6 The Contractor shall designate a responsible member of the Contractor’s organization at the site whose duty shall be the prevention of accidents. This person shall be the Contractor’s superintendent unless otherwise designated by the Contractor in writing to the Owner and Architect. § 10.2.7 The Contractor shall not permit any part of the construction or site to be loaded so as to cause damage or create an unsafe condition. § 10.2.8 Injury or Damage to Person or Property If either party suffers injury or damage to person or property because of an act or omission of the other party, or of others for whose acts such party is legally responsible, notice of the injury or damage, whether or not insured, shall be given to the other party within a reasonable time not exceeding 21 days after discovery. The notice shall provide sufficient detail to enable the other party to investigate the matter. § 10.3 Hazardous Materials and Substances § 10.3.1 The Contractor is responsible for compliance with any requirements included in the Contract Documents regarding hazardous materials or substances. If the Contractor encounters a hazardous material or substance not addressed in the Contract Documents and if reasonable precautions will be inadequate to prevent foreseeable bodily injury or death to persons resulting from a material or substance, including but not limited to asbestos or polychlorinated biphenyl (PCB), encountered on the site by the Contractor, the Contractor shall, upon recognizing the condition, immediately stop Work in the affected area and notify the Owner and Architect of the condition. § 10.3.2 Upon receipt of the Contractor’s notice, the Owner shall obtain the services of a licensed laboratory to verify the presence or absence of the material or substance reported by the Contractor and, in the event such material or substance is found to be present, to cause it to be rendered harmless. Unless otherwise required by the Contract Documents, the Owner shall furnish in writing to the Contractor and Architect the names and qualifications of persons or entities who are to perform tests verifying the presence or absence of the material or substance or who are to perform the task of removal or safe containment of the material or substance. The Contractor and the Architect will promptly reply to the Owner in writing stating whether or not either has reasonable objection to the persons or entities proposed by the Owner. If either the Contractor or Architect has an objection to a person or entity proposed by the Owner, the Owner shall propose another to whom the Contractor and the Architect have no reasonable objection. When the material or substance has been rendered harmless, Work in the affected area shall resume upon written agreement of the Owner and Contractor. By Change Order, the Contract Time shall be extended appropriately and the Contract Sum shall be increased by the amount of the Contractor’s reasonable additional costs of shutdown, delay, and start-up. § 10.3.3 To the fullest extent permitted by law, the Owner shall indemnify and hold harmless the Contractor, Subcontractors, Architect, Architect’s consultants, and agents and employees of any of them from and against claims, damages, losses, and expenses, including but not limited to attorneys’ fees, arising out of or resulting from performance of the Work in the affected area if in fact the material or substance presents the risk of bodily injury or death as described in Section 10.3.1 and has not been rendered harmless, provided that such claim, damage, loss, or expense is attributable to bodily injury, sickness, disease or death, or to injury to or destruction of tangible property


30

(other than the Work itself), except to the extent that such damage, loss, or expense is due to the fault or negligence of the party seeking indemnity. § 10.3.4 The Owner shall not be responsible under this Section 10.3 for hazardous materials or substances the Contractor brings to the site unless such materials or substances are required by the Contract Documents. The Owner shall be responsible for hazardous materials or substances required by the Contract Documents, except to the extent of the Contractor’s fault or negligence in the use and handling of such materials or substances. § 10.3.5 The Contractor shall reimburse the Owner for the cost and expense the Owner incurs (1) for remediation of hazardous materials or substances the Contractor brings to the site and negligently handles, or (2) where the Contractor fails to perform its obligations under Section 10.3.1, except to the extent that the cost and expense are due to the Owner’s fault or negligence. § 10.3.6 If, without negligence on the part of the Contractor, the Contractor is held liable by a government agency for the cost of remediation of a hazardous material or substance solely by reason of performing Work as required by the Contract Documents, the Owner shall reimburse the Contractor for all cost and expense thereby incurred. § 10.4 Emergencies In an emergency affecting safety of persons or property, the Contractor shall act, at the Contractor’s discretion, to prevent threatened damage, injury, or loss. Additional compensation or extension of time claimed by the Contractor on account of an emergency shall be determined as provided in Article 15 and Article 7. ARTICLE 11 INSURANCE AND BONDS § 11.1 Contractor’s Insurance and Bonds § 11.1.1 The Contractor shall purchase and maintain insurance of the types and limits of liability, containing the endorsements, and subject to the terms and conditions, as described in the Agreement or elsewhere in the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall purchase and maintain the required insurance from an insurance company or insurance companies lawfully authorized to issue insurance in the jurisdiction where the Project is located. The Owner, Architect, and Architect’s consultants shall be named as additional insureds under the Contractor’s commercial general liability policy or as otherwise described in the Contract Documents. § 11.1.2 The Contractor shall provide surety bonds of the types, for such penal sums, and subject to such terms and conditions as required by the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall purchase and maintain the required bonds from a company or companies lawfully authorized to issue surety bonds in the jurisdiction where the Project is located. § 11.1.3 Upon the request of any person or entity appearing to be a potential beneficiary of bonds covering payment of obligations arising under the Contract, the Contractor shall promptly furnish a copy of the bonds or shall authorize a copy to be furnished. § 11.1.4 Notice of Cancellation or Expiration of Contractor’s Required Insurance. Within three (3) business days of the date the Contractor becomes aware of an impending or actual cancellation or expiration of any insurance required by the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall provide notice to the Owner of such impending or actual cancellation or expiration. Upon receipt of notice from the Contractor, the Owner shall, unless the lapse in coverage arises from an act or omission of the Owner, have the right to stop the Work until the lapse in coverage has been cured by the procurement of replacement coverage by the Contractor. The furnishing of notice by the Contractor shall not relieve the Contractor of any contractual obligation to provide any required coverage. § 11.2 Owner’s Insurance § 11.2.1 The Owner shall purchase and maintain insurance of the types and limits of liability, containing the endorsements, and subject to the terms and conditions, as described in the Agreement or elsewhere in the Contract Documents. The Owner shall purchase and maintain the required insurance from an insurance company or insurance companies lawfully authorized to issue insurance in the jurisdiction where the Project is located. § 11.2.2 Failure to Purchase Required Property Insurance. If the Owner fails to purchase and maintain the required property insurance, with all of the coverages and in the amounts described in the Agreement or elsewhere in the Contract Documents, the Owner shall inform the Contractor in writing prior to commencement of the Work. Upon receipt of notice from the Owner, the Contractor may delay commencement of the Work and may obtain insurance that will protect the interests of the Contractor, Subcontractors, and Sub-Subcontractors in the Work. When the failure to


31

provide coverage has been cured or resolved, the Contract Sum and Contract Time shall be equitably adjusted. In the event the Owner fails to procure coverage, the Owner waives all rights against the Contractor, Subcontractors, and Sub-subcontractors to the extent the loss to the Owner would have been covered by the insurance to have been procured by the Owner. The cost of the insurance shall be charged to the Owner by a Change Order. If the Owner does not provide written notice, and the Contractor is damaged by the failure or neglect of the Owner to purchase or maintain the required insurance, the Owner shall reimburse the Contractor for all reasonable costs and damages attributable thereto. § 11.2.3 Notice of Cancellation or Expiration of Owner’s Required Property Insurance. Within three (3) business days of the date the Owner becomes aware of an impending or actual cancellation or expiration of any property insurance required by the Contract Documents, the Owner shall provide notice to the Contractor of such impending or actual cancellation or expiration. Unless the lapse in coverage arises from an act or omission of the Contractor: (1) the Contractor, upon receipt of notice from the Owner, shall have the right to stop the Work until the lapse in coverage has been cured by the procurement of replacement coverage by either the Owner or the Contractor; (2) the Contract Time and Contract Sum shall be equitably adjusted; and (3) the Owner waives all rights against the Contractor, Subcontractors, and Sub-subcontractors to the extent any loss to the Owner would have been covered by the insurance had it not expired or been cancelled. If the Contractor purchases replacement coverage, the cost of the insurance shall be charged to the Owner by an appropriate Change Order. The furnishing of notice by the Owner shall not relieve the Owner of any contractual obligation to provide required insurance. § 11.3 Waivers of Subrogation § 11.3.1 The Owner and Contractor waive all rights against (1) each other and any of their subcontractors, sub-subcontractors, agents, and employees, each of the other; (2) the Architect and Architect’s consultants; and (3) Separate Contractors, if any, and any of their subcontractors, sub-subcontractors, agents, and employees, for damages caused by fire, or other causes of loss, to the extent those losses are covered by property insurance required by the Agreement or other property insurance applicable to the Project, except such rights as they have to proceeds of such insurance. The Owner or Contractor, as appropriate, shall require similar written waivers in favor of the individuals and entities identified above from the Architect, Architect’s consultants, Separate Contractors, subcontractors, and sub-subcontractors. The policies of insurance purchased and maintained by each person or entity agreeing to waive claims pursuant to this section 11.3.1 shall not prohibit this waiver of subrogation. This waiver of subrogation shall be effective as to a person or entity (1) even though that person or entity would otherwise have a duty of indemnification, contractual or otherwise, (2) even though that person or entity did not pay the insurance premium directly or indirectly, or (3) whether or not the person or entity had an insurable interest in the damaged property. § 11.3.2 If during the Project construction period the Owner insures properties, real or personal or both, at or adjacent to the site by property insurance under policies separate from those insuring the Project, or if after final payment property insurance is to be provided on the completed Project through a policy or policies other than those insuring the Project during the construction period, to the extent permissible by such policies, the Owner waives all rights in accordance with the terms of Section 11.3.1 for damages caused by fire or other causes of loss covered by this separate property insurance. § 11.4 Loss of Use, Business Interruption, and Delay in Completion Insurance The Owner, at the Owner’s option, may purchase and maintain insurance that will protect the Owner against loss of use of the Owner’s property, or the inability to conduct normal operations, due to fire or other causes of loss. The Owner waives all rights of action against the Contractor and Architect for loss of use of the Owner’s property, due to fire or other hazards however caused. §11.5 Adjustment and Settlement of Insured Loss § 11.5.1 A loss insured under the property insurance required by the Agreement shall be adjusted by the Owner as fiduciary and made payable to the Owner as fiduciary for the insureds, as their interests may appear, subject to requirements of any applicable mortgagee clause and of Section 11.5.2. The Owner shall pay the Architect and Contractor their just shares of insurance proceeds received by the Owner, and by appropriate agreements the Architect and Contractor shall make payments to their consultants and Subcontractors in similar manner. § 11.5.2 Prior to settlement of an insured loss, the Owner shall notify the Contractor of the terms of the proposed settlement as well as the proposed allocation of the insurance proceeds. The Contractor shall have 14 days from receipt of notice to object to the proposed settlement or allocation of the proceeds. If the Contractor does not object, the Owner shall settle the loss and the Contractor shall be bound by the settlement and allocation. Upon receipt, the Owner


32

shall deposit the insurance proceeds in a separate account and make the appropriate distributions. Thereafter, if no other agreement is made or the Owner does not terminate the Contract for convenience, the Owner and Contractor shall execute a Change Order for reconstruction of the damaged or destroyed Work in the amount allocated for that purpose. If the Contractor timely objects to either the terms of the proposed settlement or the allocation of the proceeds, the Owner may proceed to settle the insured loss, and any dispute between the Owner and Contractor arising out of the settlement or allocation of the proceeds shall be resolved pursuant to Article 15. Pending resolution of any dispute, the Owner may issue a Construction Change Directive for the reconstruction of the damaged or destroyed Work. ARTICLE 12 UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK § 12.1 Uncovering of Work § 12.1.1 If a portion of the Work is covered contrary to the Architect’s request or to requirements specifically expressed in the Contract Documents, it must, if requested in writing by the Architect, be uncovered for the Architect’s examination and be replaced at the Contractor’s expense without change in the Contract Time. § 12.1.2 If a portion of the Work has been covered that the Architect has not specifically requested to examine prior to its being covered, the Architect may request to see such Work and it shall be uncovered by the Contractor. If such Work is in accordance with the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall be entitled to an equitable adjustment to the Contract Sum and Contract Time as may be appropriate. If such Work is not in accordance with the Contract Documents, the costs of uncovering the Work, and the cost of correction, shall be at the Contractor’s expense. § 12.2 Correction of Work § 12.2.1 Before Substantial Completion The Contractor shall promptly correct Work rejected by the Architect or failing to conform to the requirements of the Contract Documents, discovered before Substantial Completion and whether or not fabricated, installed or completed. Costs of correcting such rejected Work, including additional testing and inspections, the cost of uncovering and replacement, and compensation for the Architect’s services and expenses made necessary thereby, shall be at the Contractor’s expense. § 12.2.2 After Substantial Completion § 12.2.2.1 In addition to the Contractor’s obligations under Section 3.5, if, within one year after the date of Substantial Completion of the Work or designated portion thereof or after the date for commencement of warranties established under Section 9.9.1, or by terms of any applicable special warranty required by the Contract Documents, any of the Work is found to be not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall correct it promptly after receipt of notice from the Owner to do so, unless the Owner has previously given the Contractor a written acceptance of such condition. The Owner shall give such notice promptly after discovery of the condition. During the one-year period for correction of Work, if the Owner fails to notify the Contractor and give the Contractor an opportunity to make the correction, the Owner waives the rights to require correction by the Contractor and to make a claim for breach of warranty. If the Contractor fails to correct nonconforming Work within a reasonable time during that period after receipt of notice from the Owner or Architect, the Owner may correct it in accordance with Section 2.5. § 12.2.2.2 The one-year period for correction of Work shall be extended with respect to portions of Work first performed after Substantial Completion by the period of time between Substantial Completion and the actual completion of that portion of the Work. § 12.2.2.3 The one-year period for correction of Work shall not be extended by corrective Work performed by the Contractor pursuant to this Section 12.2. § 12.2.3 The Contractor shall remove from the site portions of the Work that are not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents and are neither corrected by the Contractor nor accepted by the Owner. § 12.2.4 The Contractor shall bear the cost of correcting destroyed or damaged construction of the Owner or Separate Contractors, whether completed or partially completed, caused by the Contractor’s correction or removal of Work that is not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. § 12.2.5 Nothing contained in this Section 12.2 shall be construed to establish a period of limitation with respect to other obligations the Contractor has under the Contract Documents. Establishment of the one-year period for


33

correction of Work as described in Section 12.2.2 relates only to the specific obligation of the Contractor to correct the Work, and has no relationship to the time within which the obligation to comply with the Contract Documents may be sought to be enforced, nor to the time within which proceedings may be commenced to establish the Contractor’s liability with respect to the Contractor’s obligations other than specifically to correct the Work. § 12.3 Acceptance of Nonconforming Work If the Owner prefers to accept Work that is not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, the Owner may do so instead of requiring its removal and correction, in which case the Contract Sum will be reduced as appropriate and equitable. Such adjustment shall be effected whether or not final payment has been made. ARTICLE 13 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS § 13.1 Governing Law The Contract shall be governed by the law of the place where the Project is located, excluding that jurisdiction’s choice of law rules. If the parties have selected arbitration as the method of binding dispute resolution, the Federal Arbitration Act shall govern Section 15.4. § 13.2 Successors and Assigns § 13.2.1 The Owner and Contractor respectively bind themselves, their partners, successors, assigns, and legal representatives to covenants, agreements, and obligations contained in the Contract Documents. Except as provided in Section 13.2.2, neither party to the Contract shall assign the Contract as a whole without written consent of the other. If either party attempts to make an assignment without such consent, that party shall nevertheless remain legally responsible for all obligations under the Contract. § 13.2.2 The Owner may, without consent of the Contractor, assign the Contract to a lender providing construction financing for the Project, if the lender assumes the Owner’s rights and obligations under the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall execute all consents reasonably required to facilitate the assignment. § 13.3 Rights and Remedies § 13.3.1 Duties and obligations imposed by the Contract Documents and rights and remedies available thereunder shall be in addition to and not a limitation of duties, obligations, rights, and remedies otherwise imposed or available by law. § 13.3.2 No action or failure to act by the Owner, Architect, or Contractor shall constitute a waiver of a right or duty afforded them under the Contract, nor shall such action or failure to act constitute approval of or acquiescence in a breach thereunder, except as may be specifically agreed upon in writing. § 13.4 Tests and Inspections § 13.4.1 Tests, inspections, and approvals of portions of the Work shall be made as required by the Contract Documents and by applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, codes, rules, and regulations or lawful orders of public authorities. Unless otherwise provided, the Contractor shall make arrangements for such tests, inspections, and approvals with an independent testing laboratory or entity acceptable to the Owner, or with the appropriate public authority, and shall bear all related costs of tests, inspections, and approvals. The Contractor shall give the Architect timely notice of when and where tests and inspections are to be made so that the Architect may be present for such procedures. The Owner shall bear costs of tests, inspections, or approvals that do not become requirements until after bids are received or negotiations concluded. The Owner shall directly arrange and pay for tests, inspections, or approvals where building codes or applicable laws or regulations so require. § 13.4.2 If the Architect, Owner, or public authorities having jurisdiction determine that portions of the Work require additional testing, inspection, or approval not included under Section 13.4.1, the Architect will, upon written authorization from the Owner, instruct the Contractor to make arrangements for such additional testing, inspection, or approval, by an entity acceptable to the Owner, and the Contractor shall give timely notice to the Architect of when and where tests and inspections are to be made so that the Architect may be present for such procedures. Such costs, except as provided in Section 13.4.3, shall be at the Owner’s expense. § 13.4.3 If procedures for testing, inspection, or approval under Sections 13.4.1 and 13.4.2 reveal failure of the portions of the Work to comply with requirements established by the Contract Documents, all costs made necessary by such failure, including those of repeated procedures and compensation for the Architect’s services and expenses, shall be at the Contractor’s expense.


34

§ 13.4.4 Required certificates of testing, inspection, or approval shall, unless otherwise required by the Contract Documents, be secured by the Contractor and promptly delivered to the Architect. § 13.4.5 If the Architect is to observe tests, inspections, or approvals required by the Contract Documents, the Architect will do so promptly and, where practicable, at the normal place of testing. § 13.4.6 Tests or inspections conducted pursuant to the Contract Documents shall be made promptly to avoid unreasonable delay in the Work. § 13.5 Interest Payments due and unpaid under the Contract Documents shall bear interest from the date payment is due at the rate the parties agree upon in writing or, in the absence thereof, at the legal rate prevailing from time to time at the place where the Project is located. ARTICLE 14 TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE CONTRACT § 14.1 Termination by the Contractor § 14.1.1 The Contractor may terminate the Contract if the Work is stopped for a period of 30 consecutive days through no act or fault of the Contractor, a Subcontractor, a Sub-subcontractor, their agents or employees, or any other persons or entities performing portions of the Work, for any of the following reasons:

.1 Issuance of an order of a court or other public authority having jurisdiction that requires all Work to be stopped;

.2 An act of government, such as a declaration of national emergency, that requires all Work to be stopped;

.3 Because the Architect has not issued a Certificate for Payment and has not notified the Contractor of the reason for withholding certification as provided in Section 9.4.1, or because the Owner has not made payment on a Certificate for Payment within the time stated in the Contract Documents; or

.4 The Owner has failed to furnish to the Contractor reasonable evidence as required by Section 2.2. § 14.1.2 The Contractor may terminate the Contract if, through no act or fault of the Contractor, a Subcontractor, a Sub-subcontractor, their agents or employees, or any other persons or entities performing portions of the Work, repeated suspensions, delays, or interruptions of the entire Work by the Owner as described in Section 14.3, constitute in the aggregate more than 100 percent of the total number of days scheduled for completion, or 120 days in any 365-day period, whichever is less. § 14.1.3 If one of the reasons described in Section 14.1.1 or 14.1.2 exists, the Contractor may, upon seven days’ notice to the Owner and Architect, terminate the Contract and recover from the Owner payment for Work executed, as well as reasonable overhead and profit on Work not executed, and costs incurred by reason of such termination. § 14.1.4 If the Work is stopped for a period of 60 consecutive days through no act or fault of the Contractor, a Subcontractor, a Sub-subcontractor, or their agents or employees or any other persons or entities performing portions of the Work because the Owner has repeatedly failed to fulfill the Owner’s obligations under the Contract Documents with respect to matters important to the progress of the Work, the Contractor may, upon seven additional days’ notice to the Owner and the Architect, terminate the Contract and recover from the Owner as provided in Section 14.1.3. § 14.2 Termination by the Owner for Cause § 14.2.1 The Owner may terminate the Contract if the Contractor

.1 repeatedly refuses or fails to supply enough properly skilled workers or proper materials;

.2 fails to make payment to Subcontractors or suppliers in accordance with the respective agreements between the Contractor and the Subcontractors or suppliers;

.3 repeatedly disregards applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, codes, rules and regulations, or lawful orders of a public authority; or

.4 otherwise is guilty of substantial breach of a provision of the Contract Documents. § 14.2.2 When any of the reasons described in Section 14.2.1 exist, and upon certification by the Architect that sufficient cause exists to justify such action, the Owner may, without prejudice to any other rights or remedies of the Owner and after giving the Contractor and the Contractor’s surety, if any, seven days’ notice, terminate employment of the Contractor and may, subject to any prior rights of the surety:


35

.1 Exclude the Contractor from the site and take possession of all materials, equipment, tools, and construction equipment and machinery thereon owned by the Contractor;

.2 Accept assignment of subcontracts pursuant to Section 5.4; and

.3 Finish the Work by whatever reasonable method the Owner may deem expedient. Upon written request of the Contractor, the Owner shall furnish to the Contractor a detailed accounting of the costs incurred by the Owner in finishing the Work.

§ 14.2.3 When the Owner terminates the Contract for one of the reasons stated in Section 14.2.1, the Contractor shall not be entitled to receive further payment until the Work is finished. § 14.2.4 If the unpaid balance of the Contract Sum exceeds costs of finishing the Work, including compensation for the Architect’s services and expenses made necessary thereby, and other damages incurred by the Owner and not expressly waived, such excess shall be paid to the Contractor. If such costs and damages exceed the unpaid balance, the Contractor shall pay the difference to the Owner. The amount to be paid to the Contractor or Owner, as the case may be, shall be certified by the Initial Decision Maker, upon application, and this obligation for payment shall survive termination of the Contract. § 14.3 Suspension by the Owner for Convenience § 14.3.1 The Owner may, without cause, order the Contractor in writing to suspend, delay or interrupt the Work, in whole or in part for such period of time as the Owner may determine. § 14.3.2 The Contract Sum and Contract Time shall be adjusted for increases in the cost and time caused by suspension, delay, or interruption under Section 14.3.1. Adjustment of the Contract Sum shall include profit. No adjustment shall be made to the extent

.1 that performance is, was, or would have been, so suspended, delayed, or interrupted, by another cause for which the Contractor is responsible; or

.2 that an equitable adjustment is made or denied under another provision of the Contract. § 14.4 Termination by the Owner for Convenience § 14.4.1 The Owner may, at any time, terminate the Contract for the Owner’s convenience and without cause. § 14.4.2 Upon receipt of notice from the Owner of such termination for the Owner’s convenience, the Contractor shall

.1 cease operations as directed by the Owner in the notice;

.2 take actions necessary, or that the Owner may direct, for the protection and preservation of the Work; and

.3 except for Work directed to be performed prior to the effective date of termination stated in the notice, terminate all existing subcontracts and purchase orders and enter into no further subcontracts and purchase orders.

§ 14.4.3 In case of such termination for the Owner’s convenience, the Owner shall pay the Contractor for Work properly executed; costs incurred by reason of the termination, including costs attributable to termination of Subcontracts; and the termination fee, if any, set forth in the Agreement. ARTICLE 15 CLAIMS AND DISPUTES § 15.1 Claims § 15.1.1 Definition A Claim is a demand or assertion by one of the parties seeking, as a matter of right, payment of money, a change in the Contract Time, or other relief with respect to the terms of the Contract. The term “Claim” also includes other disputes and matters in question between the Owner and Contractor arising out of or relating to the Contract. The responsibility to substantiate Claims shall rest with the party making the Claim. This Section 15.1.1 does not require the Owner to file a Claim in order to impose liquidated damages in accordance with the Contract Documents. § 15.1.2 Time Limits on Claims The Owner and Contractor shall commence all Claims and causes of action against the other and arising out of or related to the Contract, whether in contract, tort, breach of warranty or otherwise, in accordance with the requirements of the binding dispute resolution method selected in the Agreement and within the period specified by applicable law, but in any case not more than 10 years after the date of Substantial Completion of the Work. The Owner and Contractor waive all Claims and causes of action not commenced in accordance with this Section 15.1.2.


36

§ 15.1.3 Notice of Claims § 15.1.3.1 Claims by either the Owner or Contractor, where the condition giving rise to the Claim is first discovered prior to expiration of the period for correction of the Work set forth in Section 12.2.2, shall be initiated by notice to the other party and to the Initial Decision Maker with a copy sent to the Architect, if the Architect is not serving as the Initial Decision Maker. Claims by either party under this Section 15.1.3.1 shall be initiated within 21 days after occurrence of the event giving rise to such Claim or within 21 days after the claimant first recognizes the condition giving rise to the Claim, whichever is later. § 15.1.3.2 Claims by either the Owner or Contractor, where the condition giving rise to the Claim is first discovered after expiration of the period for correction of the Work set forth in Section 12.2.2, shall be initiated by notice to the other party. In such event, no decision by the Initial Decision Maker is required. § 15.1.4 Continuing Contract Performance § 15.1.4.1 Pending final resolution of a Claim, except as otherwise agreed in writing or as provided in Section 9.7 and Article 14, the Contractor shall proceed diligently with performance of the Contract and the Owner shall continue to make payments in accordance with the Contract Documents. § 15.1.4.2 The Contract Sum and Contract Time shall be adjusted in accordance with the Initial Decision Maker’s decision, subject to the right of either party to proceed in accordance with this Article 15. The Architect will issue Certificates for Payment in accordance with the decision of the Initial Decision Maker. § 15.1.5 Claims for Additional Cost If the Contractor wishes to make a Claim for an increase in the Contract Sum, notice as provided in Section 15.1.3 shall be given before proceeding to execute the portion of the Work that is the subject of the Claim. Prior notice is not required for Claims relating to an emergency endangering life or property arising under Section 10.4. § 15.1.6 Claims for Additional Time § 15.1.6.1 If the Contractor wishes to make a Claim for an increase in the Contract Time, notice as provided in Section 15.1.3 shall be given. The Contractor’s Claim shall include an estimate of cost and of probable effect of delay on progress of the Work. In the case of a continuing delay, only one Claim is necessary. § 15.1.6.2 If adverse weather conditions are the basis for a Claim for additional time, such Claim shall be documented by data substantiating that weather conditions were abnormal for the period of time, could not have been reasonably anticipated, and had an adverse effect on the scheduled construction. § 15.1.7 Waiver of Claims for Consequential Damages The Contractor and Owner waive Claims against each other for consequential damages arising out of or relating to this Contract. This mutual waiver includes

.1 damages incurred by the Owner for rental expenses, for losses of use, income, profit, financing, business and reputation, and for loss of management or employee productivity or of the services of such persons; and

.2 damages incurred by the Contractor for principal office expenses including the compensation of personnel stationed there, for losses of financing, business and reputation, and for loss of profit, except anticipated profit arising directly from the Work.

This mutual waiver is applicable, without limitation, to all consequential damages due to either party’s termination in accordance with Article 14. Nothing contained in this Section 15.1.7 shall be deemed to preclude assessment of liquidated damages, when applicable, in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. § 15.2 Initial Decision § 15.2.1 Claims, excluding those where the condition giving rise to the Claim is first discovered after expiration of the period for correction of the Work set forth in Section 12.2.2 or arising under Sections 10.3, 10.4, and 11.5, shall be referred to the Initial Decision Maker for initial decision. The Architect will serve as the Initial Decision Maker, unless otherwise indicated in the Agreement. Except for those Claims excluded by this Section 15.2.1, an initial decision shall be required as a condition precedent to mediation of any Claim. If an initial decision has not been rendered within 30 days after the Claim has been referred to the Initial Decision Maker, the party asserting the Claim may demand mediation and binding dispute resolution without a decision having been rendered. Unless the Initial Decision Maker


37

and all affected parties agree, the Initial Decision Maker will not decide disputes between the Contractor and persons or entities other than the Owner. § 15.2.2 The Initial Decision Maker will review Claims and within ten days of the receipt of a Claim take one or more of the following actions: (1) request additional supporting data from the claimant or a response with supporting data from the other party, (2) reject the Claim in whole or in part, (3) approve the Claim, (4) suggest a compromise, or (5) advise the parties that the Initial Decision Maker is unable to resolve the Claim if the Initial Decision Maker lacks sufficient information to evaluate the merits of the Claim or if the Initial Decision Maker concludes that, in the Initial Decision Maker’s sole discretion, it would be inappropriate for the Initial Decision Maker to resolve the Claim. § 15.2.3 In evaluating Claims, the Initial Decision Maker may, but shall not be obligated to, consult with or seek information from either party or from persons with special knowledge or expertise who may assist the Initial Decision Maker in rendering a decision. The Initial Decision Maker may request the Owner to authorize retention of such persons at the Owner’s expense. § 15.2.4 If the Initial Decision Maker requests a party to provide a response to a Claim or to furnish additional supporting data, such party shall respond, within ten days after receipt of the request, and shall either (1) provide a response on the requested supporting data, (2) advise the Initial Decision Maker when the response or supporting data will be furnished, or (3) advise the Initial Decision Maker that no supporting data will be furnished. Upon receipt of the response or supporting data, if any, the Initial Decision Maker will either reject or approve the Claim in whole or in part. § 15.2.5 The Initial Decision Maker will render an initial decision approving or rejecting the Claim, or indicating that the Initial Decision Maker is unable to resolve the Claim. This initial decision shall (1) be in writing; (2) state the reasons therefor; and (3) notify the parties and the Architect, if the Architect is not serving as the Initial Decision Maker, of any change in the Contract Sum or Contract Time or both. The initial decision shall be final and binding on the parties but subject to mediation and, if the parties fail to resolve their dispute through mediation, to binding dispute resolution. § 15.2.6 Either party may file for mediation of an initial decision at any time, subject to the terms of Section 15.2.6.1. § 15.2.6.1 Either party may, within 30 days from the date of receipt of an initial decision, demand in writing that the other party file for mediation. If such a demand is made and the party receiving the demand fails to file for mediation within 30 days after receipt thereof, then both parties waive their rights to mediate or pursue binding dispute resolution proceedings with respect to the initial decision. § 15.2.7 In the event of a Claim against the Contractor, the Owner may, but is not obligated to, notify the surety, if any, of the nature and amount of the Claim. If the Claim relates to a possibility of a Contractor’s default, the Owner may, but is not obligated to, notify the surety and request the surety’s assistance in resolving the controversy. § 15.2.8 If a Claim relates to or is the subject of a mechanic’s lien, the party asserting such Claim may proceed in accordance with applicable law to comply with the lien notice or filing deadlines. § 15.3 Mediation § 15.3.1 Claims, disputes, or other matters in controversy arising out of or related to the Contract, except those waived as provided for in Sections 9.10.4, 9.10.5, and 15.1.7, shall be subject to mediation as a condition precedent to binding dispute resolution. § 15.3.2 The parties shall endeavor to resolve their Claims by mediation which, unless the parties mutually agree otherwise, shall be administered by the American Arbitration Association in accordance with its Construction Industry Mediation Procedures in effect on the date of the Agreement. A request for mediation shall be made in writing, delivered to the other party to the Contract, and filed with the person or entity administering the mediation. The request may be made concurrently with the filing of binding dispute resolution proceedings but, in such event, mediation shall proceed in advance of binding dispute resolution proceedings, which shall be stayed pending mediation for a period of 60 days from the date of filing, unless stayed for a longer period by agreement of the parties or court order. If an arbitration is stayed pursuant to this Section 15.3.2, the parties may nonetheless proceed to the selection of the arbitrator(s) and agree upon a schedule for later proceedings.


38

§ 15.3.3 Either party may, within 30 days from the date that mediation has been concluded without resolution of the dispute or 60 days after mediation has been demanded without resolution of the dispute, demand in writing that the other party file for binding dispute resolution. If such a demand is made and the party receiving the demand fails to file for binding dispute resolution within 60 days after receipt thereof, then both parties waive their rights to binding dispute resolution proceedings with respect to the initial decision. § 15.3.4 The parties shall share the mediator’s fee and any filing fees equally. The mediation shall be held in the place where the Project is located, unless another location is mutually agreed upon. Agreements reached in mediation shall be enforceable as settlement agreements in any court having jurisdiction thereof. § 15.4 Arbitration § 15.4.1 If the parties have selected arbitration as the method for binding dispute resolution in the Agreement, any Claim subject to, but not resolved by, mediation shall be subject to arbitration which, unless the parties mutually agree otherwise, shall be administered by the American Arbitration Association in accordance with its Construction Industry Arbitration Rules in effect on the date of the Agreement. The Arbitration shall be conducted in the place where the Project is located, unless another location is mutually agreed upon. A demand for arbitration shall be made in writing, delivered to the other party to the Contract, and filed with the person or entity administering the arbitration. The party filing a notice of demand for arbitration must assert in the demand all Claims then known to that party on which arbitration is permitted to be demanded. § 15.4.1.1 A demand for arbitration shall be made no earlier than concurrently with the filing of a request for mediation, but in no event shall it be made after the date when the institution of legal or equitable proceedings based on the Claim would be barred by the applicable statute of limitations. For statute of limitations purposes, receipt of a written demand for arbitration by the person or entity administering the arbitration shall constitute the institution of legal or equitable proceedings based on the Claim. § 15.4.2 The award rendered by the arbitrator or arbitrators shall be final, and judgment may be entered upon it in accordance with applicable law in any court having jurisdiction thereof. § 15.4.3 The foregoing agreement to arbitrate and other agreements to arbitrate with an additional person or entity duly consented to by parties to the Agreement, shall be specifically enforceable under applicable law in any court having jurisdiction thereof. § 15.4.4 Consolidation or Joinder § 15.4.4.1 Subject to the rules of the American Arbitration Association or other applicable arbitration rules, either party may consolidate an arbitration conducted under this Agreement with any other arbitration to which it is a party provided that (1) the arbitration agreement governing the other arbitration permits consolidation, (2) the arbitrations to be consolidated substantially involve common questions of law or fact, and (3) the arbitrations employ materially similar procedural rules and methods for selecting arbitrator(s). § 15.4.4.2 Subject to the rules of the American Arbitration Association or other applicable arbitration rules, either party may include by joinder persons or entities substantially involved in a common question of law or fact whose presence is required if complete relief is to be accorded in arbitration, provided that the party sought to be joined consents in writing to such joinder. Consent to arbitration involving an additional person or entity shall not constitute consent to arbitration of any claim, dispute or other matter in question not described in the written consent. § 15.4.4.3 The Owner and Contractor grant to any person or entity made a party to an arbitration conducted under this Section 15.4, whether by joinder or consolidation, the same rights of joinder and consolidation as those of the Owner and Contractor under this Agreement.

SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS

Emergency Communications Center Tenant Fit-Out & Renovation – SHU/Fairfield SGC-1

GENERAL CONDITIONS

The Work of this Contract shall be subject to the American Institute of Architects Document A201, "General Conditions of the Contract for Construction", herein referred to as the General Conditions.

SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS

The supplementary Conditions contain changes and additions to the General Conditions. Where any part of the General Conditions is modified or voided by the Supplementary Conditions, the remaining unaltered provisions shall remain in effect.


1.2.3 Add the following: When applied to materials and equipment required for the Work, the words "furnish", "install" and "provide" shall mean the following:

.1 The word "provide" shall mean to furnish, pay for, deliver, install, adjust, clean, and otherwise make materials and equipment fit and ready for their intended use.

.2 The word "furnish" shall mean to secure, pay for, deliver to site, unload, and uncrate materials and equipment.

.3 The word "install" shall mean to place in position, incorporate in the work, adjust, clean, make fit and ready for use and perform all services except those included under the term "furnish".

.4 The phrase "furnish and install" shall be equivalent to the word "provide". Each shall be interpreted to mean "the Contractor shall furnish all labor, material and equipment and install....".

.5 “As required" shall mean as required to produce a fully completed project or result to the satisfaction of the Architect.

.6 Where discrepancies or conflicts occur:

.1 Amendments and Addenda shall take precedence over the Specifications. .2 The Specifications shall take precedence over the Drawings. .3 Stated dimensions shall take precedence over scaled dimensions. .4 Large-scale detail drawings shall take precedence over small-scale

drawings. .5 Schedules shall take precedence over other data on the drawings.

.7 In case of a difference between Drawings or Specifications or within either document itself in describing the Work, the better quality, greater quantity, or costlier work will be assumed to be and shall be included in the Contract price. The Contractor shall not proceed with such work until the Architect has been contacted for clarification and proper direction.

.8 Instructions or specifications of a particular manufacturer as referred to herein shall be binding as a part of this Specification. Obtain such written instructions and maintain on the job with the Specification.

.9 Schedules of materials in various sections of the Specifications are furnished to assist the Contractor. Contractor shall verify the schedules with the Drawings and shall provide any additional materials indicated on the Drawings but not included in the schedules. The greater quantity or highest quality will govern.



Add the following:

1.2.4 All work shown or referred to in the Contract Documents shall be included in the Contract excepting those items which are specifically noted as being "provided under another contract" or "provided by the Owner", or "not in contract (NIC)".

1.2.5 Parties to the Contract shall not take advantage of obvious error or apparent discrepancy in Contract Documents. Notice of discovered error or discrepancy shall immediately be given in writing to the Architect to make such corrections and interpretations as he may deem necessary for completion of the work in a satisfactory and acceptable manner.


2.3.4 Delete the phrase “and utility locations”.

2.3.6 Revise to read as follows: “Contractor shall be furnished up to three (3) sets of Contract Drawings and Specifications, and two (2) copies of each drawing which is issued after the date of the Contract. The Contractor shall pay costs of reproduction for any additional copies of Drawings or Specifications he requires.”


Add the following:

3.4.4 Should the Contractor wish to substitute another product or method for products or methods specified or shown in the Contract Documents, whether specified or shown in Contract Documents, whether or not such phrases as "equal to" or "based on" are used, he shall apply in writing for approval. He shall enclose such data as Architect requires to evaluate products. The Architect's decision shall be final. Contractor is responsible for space requirements of substitutions, he shall execute necessary changes in adjacent and relocated situations, he shall execute necessary changes in adjacent and relocated work which are due to such substitutions, without additional cost and he shall be responsible for delays required for evaluation of proposed substitutions.

3.5.3 Project Warranty: Unless otherwise specified, Contractor shall warrant (guaranty) all work against defects resulting from the use of material, workmanship or equipment which is inferior, defective or not in accordance with the terms of the Contract. This warranty, unless stated otherwise in a given section of the Specifications, shall be for a period of one (1) year from the date of issuance of the Certificate of Substantial Completion for the Project.

3.5.4 Specified Product Warranty: Issued by a manufacturer or fabricator for compliance with requirements of the Contract Documents. Refer to sections of Specifications for requirements of specified warranties.

3.5.5 Coincidental Product Warranty: Available on a product incorporated into the work, by virtue of manufacturer's publication of warranty without regard for application requirement, a non-specified warranty. Contractor shall identify such warranties as they apply.



3.5.6 Warranty Obligations

.1 Contractor shall restore or remove-and-replace warranted work to its originally specified condition, at such time during warranty as it does not comply with or fulfill terms of warranty.

.2 Contractor shall restore or remove-and-replace other work which has been damaged by failure of warranted work, or which must be removed and replaced to gain access to warranted work.

.3 Cost of restoration or removal-and-replacement is Contractor's obligation, without regard to whether Owner has already benefited from use of failing work.

.4 Except as otherwise indicated or required by governing regulations, warranties do not cover consequential damage to property other than the Work of the Contract.

.5 Upon restoration or removal-and-replacement of warranted work which has failed, Contractor shall reinstate the warranty by issuing newly executed form, for at least the remaining period of time of the original warranty, but for not less than half of the original warranty period.

.6 Warranties and warranty periods shall not diminish implied warranties, and shall not deprive Owner of actions, rights, and remedies otherwise available if the Contractor fails to fulfill the requirements of the Contract Documents.

.7 Owner reserves the right to reject coincidental product warranties which conflict with or are less than the requirements of the Contract Documents.

3.5.7 Contractor shall furnish fully executed warranties to Owner in accordance with the General Conditions and Section 017700.

3.6 Add the following: No amount shall be included in the bid for State Sales Tax or for Federal Excise Tax on materials or supplies purchased for this project. The Owner will supply tax exempt number.

3.7.1 Add the following: The Contractor shall pay costs charged by utility companies for service connections, inspections and tests, and related utility company fees normally assessed as part of the construction process.


4.2.13 Add to the first sentence, after "...relating to aesthetic effect..."

"and except for claims which have been waived by making or acceptance of final payment as provided by Subparagraphs 9.10.3 and 9.10.4,"

Add the following:

4.3 The provisions of Article 15 notwithstanding, the Contractor expressly agrees to joinder in arbitration proceedings between Owner/Architect upon specific written request of the Owner. This agreement shall be valid with the Architect's acceptance of an equal provision in their respective contracts.



ARTICLE 6 Add the following:

6.3.1 In a dispute between the Owner and the Contractor concerning rubbish and orderliness on the site, the Owner may have the rubbish removed and charge the cost to the Contractor. Upon written notification from the Architect that the project requires cleaning, the Contractor shall within 24 hours remove all rubbish and hazards from the project and shall arrange his material and equipment in an orderly manner on the site. If this cleaning is not completed within 24 hours, the Owner may engage labor to clean up the projects to his satisfaction and deduct the costs from any monies due the Contractor.


7.2.2 The Contractor's proposal for changes in the Work shall be itemized completely and in detail and shall include material costs and quantities, labor wages, time, insurance, pensions and equipment rental other than small tools, and the number of additional calendar days, if any, which are required to complete the Work.

Where unit prices have been established, the proposal shall state the quantity involved and the applicable unit price.

7.5 Allowance for Overhead and Profit

7.5.1 The allowance for overhead and profit is compensation for administration, superintendence, materials for temporary structures, additional premiums on bonds and the use of small tools.

7.5.2 For additions, deletions or other changes in the Work ordered under method 7.3.3.3, the Contractor may apply an allowance of up to fifteen percent (15%) for profit and overhead to the net cost of the work actually performed by him.

7.5.3 Work to be performed by a subcontractor may include an allowance for the subcontractor's overhead and profit not to exceed fifteen percent (15%) of the net cost. The Contractor is permitted up to a ten percent (10%) allowance to be applied against the net cost to a subcontractor. In no case shall the total allowance exceed twenty-five percent (25%) of the net cost of work performed by the subcontractor.

7.5.4 The Contractor's allowance of up to ten percent (10%) on changes involving more than one (1) subcontractor shall be applied only to the combined net of cost additions and deductions of all subcontractors.

7.5.5 There shall be no allowance for overhead and profit for the Contractor or any subcontractor on changes resulting in a net deduction.

7.5.6 The provisions of this Article shall apply only to subcontractors as defined in Article 5. Allowance for overhead and profit will be accepted only for those who are direct subcontractors.




8.3.4 No extension of time will be allowed for adverse weather conditions unless the number of days of inclement weather is substantially greater or conditions substantially more severe than the average for the calendar period as recorded by a recognized weather observation agency.


9.3.1 Revise “ten days” to read “fifteen (15) days”.

Add the following:

9.3.1.3 During progress of the Work, the Owner will pay Contractor ninety-five percent (95%) of the total amount of each monthly payment due. The remaining five percent (5%) will be retained by the Owner until the Project is substantially completed. There will be no further reduction considered until final acceptance of the Project in accordance with the Contract Documents.

9.3.2 Add the following: If the Contractor does not submit evidence of payment to vendor for material and equipment stored, the Architect will recommend deduction of the amount previously allowed for the items stored from the current or subsequent Application for Payment.

Add the following:

9.3.2.1 Contractor may include in Application for Payment the delivered cost of equipment and non-perishable materials delivered and stored at the site but not incorporated in the work, under the following conditions:

.1 Items to be protected from fire, theft, vandalism, weather, and other damage. .2 Storage procedures and areas to be approved.

.3 Items to be available at all times for inspection by the Owner and Architect.

9.3.4 Contractor shall furnish with Application for Payment an invoice establishing value of material and equipment stored at the site along with a statement of amount to be paid the vendor.

.1 Such stored items are subject to inspection by Architect before payment is recommended.

.2 Contractor shall furnish Owner with Certificate of Insurance in accordance with Contract Documents for the full value of the items stored at the site.

9.6.2.1 Contractor shall furnish Architect with satisfactory evidence of payment to vendors supplying material and equipment for approved storage. This shall be done within thirty (30) days after the date of progress payment. Satisfactory evidence of payment shall be one (1) of the following:

.1 Contractor's canceled check in correct amount with identification of invoices paid.



.2 A letter or telegram from vendor with authorized signature stating amounts and invoices paid.

.3 A receipted invoice.

9.6.7.1 Payment for material and equipment delivered and stored shall not relieve Contractor of responsibility for furnishing equipment and material required for the work in the same manner as if such payment were not made.

9.10.6 A prerequisite to final payment shall be that the Contractor furnish proof that he has completed all specification requirements covering the following item as applicable:

Warranties.


10.3.4.1 The Contractor shall not bring hazardous materials onto the site nor use in the Work without compliance with the following conditions.

.2 The Contractor shall be solely responsible for the handling, storage, and use of explosive or other hazardous materials when their use is permitted. For such use, the Contractor shall obtain necessary permits form regulating agencies and submit copies of permits to the Architect for review before proceeding with use.

.3 Contractor shall obtain insurance for use of hazardous material and furnish certificates of insurance in keeping with Conditions of the Contract.


11.1.1 Revise “authorized to do business in the jurisdiction in which the Project is located” to read “licensed to do business in Connecticut”.

11.1.2 Revise “authorized to do business in the jurisdiction in which the Project is located” to read “licensed to do business in Connecticut”.

11.2.2 Revise “prior to commencement of the Work” to read “within ten (10) days of Notice of Award”.

Add the following:

11.6 Miscellaneous Insurance Requirements Insurance shall be provided as required in Town of Fairfield Instructions to Bidders Terms and Conditions of Bid. Furthermore, the Certificate must name as Additional Insured: Silver/Petrucelli + Associates, Inc. The coverage must be on a primary, non-contributory basis.


13.6 Delete in its entirety.


15.3.2 Revise to read as follows: In addition to and prior to arbitration, the parties shall endeavor to settle disputes by mediation in accordance with the Construction Industry Mediation Rules of the American Arbitration Association currently in effect unless the



parties mutually agree otherwise. Demand for mediation shall be filed in writing with the other party to this Agreement and with the American Arbitration Association. A demand for mediation shall be made within a reasonable time after the claim, dispute or other matter in w\question has arisen. In no event shall the demand for mediation be made after the date when institution of legal or equitable proceedings based on such claim, dispute or other matter in question would be barred by the applicable statute of limitations. The provisions of Article 15 notwithstanding, the Contractor expressly agrees to joinder in mediation proceedings between Owner/Architect upon specific written request of the Owner. This agreement shall be valid with the Architect's acceptance of an equal provision in their respective contracts.




END OF SECTION

AIA

®

Document

G702

TM

– 1992

Application and Certificate for Payment

AIA

Doc

umen

t G70

2™ –

199

2. C

opyr

ight

© 1

953,

196

3, 1

965,

197

1, 1

978,

198

3 an

d 19

92 b

y Th

e Am

eric

an In

stitu

te o

f Arc

hite

cts.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. W

AR

NIN

G: T

his

AIA

® D

ocum

ent i

s pr

otec

ted

by U

.S. C

opyr

ight

La

w a

nd In

tern

atio

nal T

reat

ies.

Una

utho

rized

repr

oduc

tion

or d

istr

ibut

ion

of th

is A

IA®

Doc

umen

t, or

any

por

tion

of it

, may

resu

lt in

sev

ere

civi

l and

crim

inal

pen

altie

s, a

nd w

ill b

e pr

osec

uted

to th

e m

axim

um

exte

nt p

ossi

ble

unde

r the

law

. Thi

s dr

aft w

as p

rodu

ced

by A

IA s

oftw

are

at 0

9:26

:03

ET o

n 11

/04/

2019

und

er O

rder

No.

303

8737

814

whi

ch e

xpire

s on

10/

31/2

020,

and

is n

ot fo

r res

ale.

Use

r Not

es:

(3B9

ADA5

F)

1

APPL

ICAT

ION

NO:

003

Dist

ribut

ion

to:

PERI

OD T

O:

TO O

WNE

R:

P

ROJE

CT:

GEN

ERIC

CONT

RACT

FOR

: G

ener

al C

onst

ruct

ion

CONT

RACT

DAT

E:

FROM

CO

NTRA

CTOR

:

VIA

ARCH

ITEC

T:

PROJ

ECT

NOS:

/

/

OWNE

R:

ARCH

ITEC

T:

CONT

RACT

OR:

FIEL

D:

OTHE

R :

CONT

RACT

OR'S

APP

LICA

TION

FOR

PAY

MENT

App

licat

ion

is m

ade

for p

aym

ent,

as sh

own

belo

w, i

n co

nnec

tion

with

the

Con

tract

.C

ontin

uatio

n Sh

eet,

AIA

Doc

umen

t G70

3, is

atta

ched

.

1. OR

IGIN

AL C

ONTR

ACT

SUM

........

........

........

........

........

........

........

........

........

........

.$0

.00

Th

e un

ders

igne

d C

ontra

ctor

cer

tifie

s th

at t

o th

e be

st o

f th

e C

ontra

ctor

's kn

owle

dge,

in

form

atio

n an

d be

lief

the

Wor

k co

vere

d by

thi

s A

pplic

atio

n fo

r Pa

ymen

t ha

s be

en

com

plet

ed in

acc

orda

nce

with

the

Con

tract

Doc

umen

ts, t

hat a

ll am

ount

s ha

ve b

een

paid

by

the

Con

tract

or fo

r Wor

k fo

r whi

ch p

revi

ous

Cer

tific

ates

for P

aym

ent w

ere

issu

ed a

nd

paym

ents

rece

ived

from

the

Ow

ner,

and

that

cur

rent

pay

men

t sho

wn

here

in is

now

due

.2.

NET

CHAN

GE B

Y CH

ANGE

ORD

ERS

........

........

........

........

........

........

........

........

..$0

.00

CO

NTRA

CTOR

:3.

CONT

RACT

SUM

TO

DATE

(Lin

e 1

± 2)

......

........

........

........

........

........

........

.......

$0.0

0

By:

Dat

e:

4. TO

TAL

COMP

LETE

D &

STOR

ED T

O DA

TE (C

olum

n G

on

G70

3) ..

........

........

$0.0

0

Stat

e of

:

5.

RETA

INAG

E:C

ount

y of

:

0%

of C

ompl

eted

Wor

k

a.(C

olum

n D

+ E

on

G70

3)$0

.00

Subs

crib

ed a

nd sw

orn

to b

efor

e m

e th

is

da

y of

0

% o

f Sto

red

Mat

eria

lb.

(Col

umn

F on

G70

3)$0

.00

Not

ary

Publ

ic:

Tota

l Ret

aina

ge (L

ines

5a

+ 5b

or T

otal

in C

olum

n I o

f G70

3) ..

........

........

$0.0

0

My

Com

mis

sion

exp

ires:

6. TO

TAL

EARN

ED L

ESS

RETA

INAG

E ....

........

........

........

........

........

........

........

........

$0

.00

AR

CHIT

ECT'S

CER

TIFI

CATE

FOR

PAY

MENT

(Lin

e 4

Less

Lin

e 5

Tota

l)7.

LESS

PRE

VIOU

S CE

RTIF

ICAT

ES F

OR P

AYME

NT ..

........

........

........

........

........

...$0

.00

(Lin

e 6

from

prio

r Cer

tific

ate)

8. CU

RREN

T PA

YMEN

T DU

E ....

........

........

........

........

........

........

........

........

......

$0.0

0

In a

ccor

danc

e w

ith th

e C

ontra

ct D

ocum

ents

, bas

ed o

n on

-site

obs

erva

tions

and

the

data

co

mpr

isin

g th

is a

pplic

atio

n, th

e A

rchi

tect

cer

tifie

s to

the

Ow

ner

that

to th

e be

st o

f th

e A

rchi

tect

's kn

owle

dge,

info

rmat

ion

and

belie

f the

Wor

k ha

s pr

ogre

ssed

as

indi

cate

d, th

e qu

ality

of t

he W

ork

is in

acc

orda

nce

with

the

Con

tract

Doc

umen

ts, a

nd th

e C

ontra

ctor

is

entit

led

to p

aym

ent o

f the

AM

OU

NT

CER

TIFI

ED.

9. BA

LANC

E TO

FIN

ISH,

INCL

UDIN

G RE

TAIN

AGE

AMOU

NT C

ERTI

FIED

......

........

........

........

........

........

........

........

........

........

........

$

0.00

(Lin

e 3

less

Lin

e 6)

$0.0

0

(A

ttach

exp

lana

tion

if am

ount

cer

tifie

d di

ffers

from

the

amou

nt a

pplie

d. In

itial

all

figur

es o

n th

is

Appl

icat

ion

and

on th

e C

ontin

uatio

n Sh

eet t

hat a

re c

hang

ed to

con

form

with

the

amou

nt c

ertif

ied.

)C

HA

NG

E O

RD

ER S

UM

MA

RY

AD

DIT

ION

SD

EDU

CTI

ON

SAR

CHIT

ECT:

Tota

l cha

nges

app

rove

d in

pre

viou

s mon

ths b

y O

wne

r$0

.00

$0.0

0

By:

Dat

e:

To

tal a

ppro

ved

this

Mon

th$0

.00

$0.0

0

TO

TALS

$0.0

0

$0

.00

NET

CH

AN

GES

by

Cha

nge

Ord

er$0

.00

Th

is C

ertif

icat

e is

not

neg

otia

ble.

The

AM

OU

NT

CER

TIFI

ED is

pay

able

onl

y to

the

Con

tract

or

nam

ed h

erei

n. Is

suan

ce, p

aym

ent a

nd a

ccep

tanc

e of

pay

men

t are

with

out p

reju

dice

to a

ny ri

ghts

of

the

Ow

ner o

r Con

tract

or u

nder

this

Con

tract

.

1

AB

CD

EF

HI

FRO

M

PREV

IOU

S A

PPLI

CA

TIO

N(D

+ E

)

THIS

PER

IOD

0.00

0.00

0.00

0.00

0.00

0.00

%0.

000.

000.

000.

000.

000.

000.

000.

00%

0.00

0.00

0.00

0.00

0.00

0.00

0.00

0.00

%0.

000.

000.

000.

000.

000.

000.

000.

00%

0.00

0.00

0.00

0.00

0.00

0.00

0.00

0.00

%0.

000.

000.

000.

000.

000.

000.

000.

00%

0.00

0.00

0.00

0.00

0.00

0.00

0.00

0.00

%0.

000.

000.

000.

000.

000.

000.

000.

00%

0.00

0.00

0.00

0.00

0.00

0.00

0.00

0.00

%0.

000.

000.

000.

000.

000.

000.

000.

00%

0.00

0.00

0.00

0.00

0.00

0.00

0.00

0.00

%0.

000.

000.

000.

000.

000.

000.

000.

00%

0.00

0.00

0.00

0.00

0.00

0.00

0.00

0.00

%0.

000.

000.

000.

000.

000.

000.

000.

00%

0.00

0.00

0.00

0.00

0.00

0.00

0.00

0.00

%0.

000.

000.

000.

000.

000.

000.

000.

00%

0.00

0.00

0.00

0.00

0.00

0.00

0.00

0.00

%0.

000.

000.

000.

000.

000.

000.

000.

00%

0.00

0.00

0.00

0.00

0.00

0.00

0.00

0.00

%0.

000.

00GR

AND

TOTA

L$0

.00

$0.0

0$0

.00

$0.0

0$0

.00

0.00

%$0

.00

$0.0

0

WO

RK

CO

MPL

ETED

DES

CR

IPTI

ON

OF

WO

RK

TOTA

L C

OM

PLET

ED A

ND

ST

OR

ED T

O D

ATE

(D +

E +

F)

MA

TER

IALS

PR

ESEN

TLY

ST

OR

ED(N

OT

IN D

OR

E)

G

RET

AIN

AG

E(IF

VA

RIA

BLE

R

ATE

)

BA

LAN

CE

TO

FIN

ISH

(C -

G)

%

(G ÷

C)

ARCH

ITEC

T'S P

ROJE

CT N

O:

AIA® Document G703™ – 1992

APPL

ICAT

ION

NO:

Continuation Sheet

AIA

Doc

umen

t, G

702TM

–199

2, A

pplic

atio

n an

d C

ertif

icat

ion

for P

aym

ent,

or G

736TM

–200

9,

Proj

ect A

pplic

atio

n an

d Pr

ojec

t Cer

tific

ate

for P

aym

ent,

Con

stru

ctio

n M

anag

er a

s Adv

iser

Edi

tion,

co

ntai

ning

Con

tract

or's

sign

ed c

ertif

icat

ion

is a

ttach

ed.

In ta

bula

tions

bel

ow, a

mou

nts a

re in

US

dolla

rs.

Use

Col

umn

I on

Con

tract

s whe

re v

aria

ble

reta

inag

e fo

r lin

e ite

ms m

ay a

pply

.

APPL

ICAT

ION

DATE

:

PERI

OD T

O:

ITEM

N

O.

SCH

EDU

LED

V

ALU

E

AIA Document

G703™

– 1992.

Copyright

© 1963,

1965,

1966,

1967,1970,

1978,

1983

and 1992

by The American

Institute

of Architects.

All rights

reserved.

WARNING:

This

AIA

® Document

is

protected

by U.S.

Copyright

Law and International

Treaties.

Unauthorized

reproduction

or distribution

of this

AIA

® Document,

or any portion

of it, may result

in severe

civil

and

criminal

penalties,

and will

be prosecuted

to the maximum

extent

possible

under

the law.

This

draft

was produced

by AIA software

at 11:11:24

ET on 11/01/2019

under

Order

No.3038737814

which

expires

on 10/31/2020,

and is not for resale.

User

Notes:

(3B9ADA53)

CONNECTICUT DEPARTMENT OF LABOR WAGE AND WORKPLACE STANDARDS DIVISION

CONTRACTORS WAGE CERTIFICATION FORM Construction Manager at Risk/General Contractor/Prime Contractor

I, of Officer, Owner, Authorized Rep. Company Name

do hereby certify that the Company Name

Street

City

and all of its subcontractors will pay all workers on the

Project Name and Number

Street and City

the wages as listed in the schedule of prevailing rates required for such project (a copy of which is attached hereto).

Signed

Subscribed and sworn to before me this day of , .

Notary Public

Return to: Connecticut Department of Labor

Wage & Workplace Standards Division 200 Folly Brook Blvd.

Wethersfield, CT 06109

Rate Schedule Issued (Date):

CLASSIFICATION Hourly Benefits

Renovation of the Emergency Communications Center at Sacred Heart University (Fairfield)Project:

Minimum Rates and Classifications forBuilding Construction

ID#

#2021-28

By virtue of the authority vested in the Labor Commissioner under provisions of Section 31-53 of the GeneralStatutes of Connecticut, as amended, the following are declared to be the prevailing rates and welfarepayments and will apply only where the contract is advertised for bid within 20 days of the date on which therates are established. Any contractor or subcontractor not obligated by agreement to pay

Project Number: #2021-28State#:

Project:

FAP#:Project Town:

Renovation of the Emergency Communications Center at Sacred Heart University (Fairfield)

FairfieldFairfield

Connecticut Department of Labor Wage and Workplace Standards

20-15611

1b) Asbestos/Toxic Waste Removal Laborers: Asbestos removal andencapsulation (except its removal from mechanical systems which arenot to be scrapped), toxic waste removers, blasters.**See LaborersGroup 7**

1c) Asbestos Worker/Heat and Frost Insulator 40.21 30.99

2) Boilermaker 38.34 26.01

3a) Bricklayer, Cement Mason, Concrete Finisher (including caulking),Stone Masons

35.71 33.31 + a

3b) Tile Setter 34.9 25.87

3c) Terrazzo Mechanics and Marble Setters 31.69 22.35

3d) Tile, Marble & Terrazzo Finishers 26.7 21.75

3e) Plasterer 33.48 32.06

------LABORERS------

4) Group 1: Laborers (common or general), acetylene burners,concrete specialists, wrecking laborers, fire watchers.

31.0 22.15

4a) Group 2: Mortar mixers, plaster tender, power buggy operators,powdermen, fireproofer/mixer/nozzleman (Person running mixer andspraying fireproof only).

31.25 22.15

As of: September 16, 2020


4b) Group 3: Jackhammer operators/pavement breaker, masontender (brick), mason tender (cement/concrete), forklift operatorsand forklift operators (masonry).

31.5 22.15

4c) **Group 4: Pipelayers (Installation of water, storm drainage orsewage lines outside of the building line with P6, P7 license) (thepipelayer rate shall apply only to one or two employees of the totalcrew who primary task is to actually perform the mating of pipesections) P6 and P7 rate is $26.80.

32.0 22.15

4d) Group 5: Air track operator, sand blaster and hydraulic drills. 31.75 22.15

4e) Group 6: Blasters, nuclear and toxic waste removal. 34.0 22.15

4f) Group 7: Asbestos/lead removal and encapsulation (except it'sremoval from mechanical systems which are not to be scrapped).

32.0 22.15

4g) Group 8: Bottom men on open air caisson, cylindrical work andboring crew.

29.28 22.15

4h) Group 9: Top men on open air caisson, cylindrical work andboring crew.

28.74 22.15

4i) Group 10: Traffic Control Signalman 18.0 22.15

5) Carpenter, Acoustical Ceiling Installation, Soft Floor/CarpetLaying, Metal Stud Installation, Form Work and Scaffold Building,Drywall Hanging, Modular-Furniture Systems Installers, Lathers,Piledrivers, Resilient Floor Layers.

34.53 25.64

5a) Millwrights 34.94 26.19

6) Electrical Worker (including low voltage wiring) (Trade Licenserequired: E1,2 L-5,6 C-5,6 T-1,2 L-1,2 V-1,2,7,8,9)

39.92 28.75+3% ofgross wage

7a) Elevator Mechanic (Trade License required: R-1,2,5,6) 55.12 34.765+a+b

-----LINE CONSTRUCTION----

Groundman 26.5 6.5% + 9.00

Linemen/Cable Splicer 48.19 6.5% + 22.00

8) Glazier (Trade License required: FG-1,2) 39.18 22.55 + a



9) Ironworker, Ornamental, Reinforcing, Structural, and PrecastConcrete Erection

36.67 37.62 + a

----OPERATORS----

Group 1: Crane handling or erecting structural steel or stone,hoisting engineer 2 drums or over, front end loader (7 cubic yards orover), work boat 26 ft. and over and Tunnel Boring Machines. (TradeLicense Required)

42.45 25.30 + a

Group 2: Cranes (100 ton rate capacity and over); Excavator over 2cubic yards; Piledriver ($3.00 premium when operator controlshammer); Bauer Drill/Caisson. (Trade License Required)

42.11 25.30 + a

Group 3: Excavator; Backhoe/Excavator under 2 cubic yards; Cranes(under 100 ton rated capacity), Grader/Blade; Master Mechanic;Hoisting Engineer (all types of equipment where a drum and cable areused to hoist or drag material regardless of motive power ofoperation), Rubber Tire Excavator (Drott-1085 or similar);GraderOperator; Bulldozer Fine Grade. (slopes, shaping, laser or GPS, etc.).(Trade License Required)

41.32 25.30 + a

Group 4: Trenching Machines; Lighter Derrick; Concrete FinishingMachine; CMI Machine or Similar; Koehring Loader (Skooper).

40.91 25.30 + a

Group 5: Specialty Railroad Equipment; Asphalt Paver; AsphaltReclaiming Machine; Line Grinder; Concrete Pumps; Drills with SelfContained Power Units; Boring Machine; Post Hole Digger; Auger;Pounder; Well Digger; Milling Machine (over 24

40.28 25.30 + a

Group 5 continued: Side Boom; Combination Hoe and Loader;Directional Driller; Pile Testing Machine.

40.28 25.30 + a

Group 6: Front End Loader (3 up to 7 cubic yards); Bulldozer (roughgrade dozer).

39.95 25.30 + a

Group 7: Asphalt roller, concrete saws and cutters (ride on types),vermeer concrete cutter, Stump Grinder; Scraper; Snooper; Skidder;Milling Machine (24

39.59 25.30 + a

Group 8: Mechanic, grease truck operator, hydroblaster; barriermover; power stone spreader; welding; work boat under 26 ft.;transfer machine.

39.17 25.30 + a

Group 9: Front end loader (under 3 cubic yards), skid steer loaderregardless of attachments, (Bobcat or Similar): forklift, powerchipper; landscape equipment (including Hydroseeder).

38.71 25.30 + a

Group 10: Vibratory hammer; ice machine; diesel and air, hammer,etc.

36.54 25.30 + a

Group 11: Conveyor, earth roller, power pavement breaker(whiphammer), robot demolition equipment.

36.54 25.30 + a



Group 12: Wellpoint operator. 36.48 25.30 + a

Group 13: Compressor battery operator. 35.86 25.30 + a

Group 14: Elevator operator; tow motor operator (solid tire no roughterrain).

34.66 25.30 + a

Group 15: Generator Operator; Compressor Operator; PumpOperator; Welding Machine Operator; Heater Operator.

34.23 25.30 + a

Group 16: Maintenance Engineer/Oiler. 33.54 25.30 + a

Group 17: Portable asphalt plant operator; portable crusher plantoperator; portable concrete plant operator.

38.11 25.30 + a

Group 18: Power safety boat; vacuum truck; zim mixer; sweeper;(Minimum for any job requiring a CDL license).

35.53 25.30 + a

------PAINTERS (Including Drywall Finishing)------

10a) Brush and Roller 35.62 22.55

10b) Taping Only/Drywall Finishing 36.37 22.55

10c) Paperhanger and Red Label 36.12 22.55

10e) Blast and Spray 38.62 22.55

11) Plumber (excluding HVAC pipe installation) (Trade Licenserequired: P-1,2,6,7,8,9 J-1,2,3,4 SP-1,2)

44.63 32.95

12) Well Digger, Pile Testing Machine 37.26 24.05 + a

Roofer: Cole Tar Pitch 42.0 19.55 + a

Roofer: Slate, Tile, Composition, Shingles, Singly Ply andDamp/Waterproofing

40.5 19.55 + a

15) Sheetmetal Worker (Trade License required for HVAC andDuctwork: SM-1,SM-2,SM-3,SM-4,SM-5,SM-6)

46.92 42.80

16) Pipefitter (Including HVAC work)(Trade License required: S-1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8 B-1,2,3,4 D-1,2,3,4, G-1,G-2, G-8 & G-9)

44.63 32.95



------TRUCK DRIVERS------

17a) 2 Axle 29.86 25.79 + a

17b) 3 Axle, 2 Axle Ready Mix 29.97 25.79 + a

17c) 3 Axle Ready Mix 30.03 25.79 + a

17d) 4 Axle, Heavy Duty Trailer up to 40 tons 30.08 25.79 + a

17e) 4 Axle Ready Mix 30.13 25.79 + a

17f) Heavy Duty Trailer (40 Tons and Over) 30.35 25.79 + a

17g) Specialized Earth Moving Equipment (Other Than ConventionalType on-the-Road Trucks and Semi-Trailers, Including Euclids)

30.13 25.79 + a

18) Sprinkler Fitter (Trade License required: F-1,2,3,4) 45.92 26.08 + a

19) Theatrical Stage Journeyman 25.76 7.34



ALL Cranes: When crane operator is operating equipment that requires a fully licensed craneoperator to operate he receives an extra $4.00 premium in addition to the hourly wage rate and benefitcontributions:

Welders: Rate for craft to which welding is incidental.*Note: Hazardous waste removal work receives additional $1.25 per hour for truck drivers.

Crane with 150 ft. boom (including jib) - $1.50 extra





1) Crane handling or erecting structural steel or stone; hoisting engineer (2 drums or over)2) Cranes (100 ton rate capacity and over) Bauer Drill/Caisson

All classifications that indicate a percentage of the fringe benefits must be calculated at the percentage ratetimes the "base hourly rate".

Apprentices duly registered under the Commissioner of Labor's regulations on "Work Training Standards forApprenticeship and Training Programs" Section 31-51-d-1 to 12, are allowed to be paid the appropriatepercentage of the prevailing journeymen hourly base and the full fringe benefit rate, providing the work

The Prevailing wage rates applicable to this project are subject to annual adjustmentseach July 1st for the duration of the project. Each contractor shall pay the annual adjusted prevailing wage rate that is in effect eachJuly 1st, as posted by the Department of Labor. It is the contractor's responsibility to obtain the annual adjusted prevailing wage rateincreases directly from the Department of Labor's website. The annual adjustments will be posted on the Department of Labor's Web page:www.ct.gov/dol. For those without internet access, please contact the division listedbelow. The Department of Labor will continue to issue the initial prevailing wage rate scheduleto the Contracting Agency for the project. All subsequent annual adjustments will be posted on our Web Site for contractoraccess. Contracting Agencies are under no obligation pursuant to State labor law to pay anyincrease due to the annual adjustment provision.

Effective October 1, 2005 - Public Act 05-50: any person performing the work of any mechanic, laborer,or worker shall be paid prevailing wage

All Person who perform work ON SITE must be paid prevailing wage for theappropriate mechanic, laborer, or worker classification.

All certified payrolls must list the hours worked and wages paid to All Personswho perform work ON SITE regardless of their ownership i.e.: (Owners,Corporate Officers, LLC Members, Independent Contractors, et. al)

Reporting and payment of wages is required regardless of any contractualrelationship alleged to exist between the contractor and such person.



~~Unlisted classifications needed for work not included within the scope of theclassifications listed may be added after award only as provided in the laborstandards contract clause (29 CFR 5.5 (a) (1) (ii)).

Please direct any questions which you may have pertaining to classification of work and payment ofprevailing wages to the Wage and Workplace Standards Division, telephone (860)263-6790.


Important Information: For use with Building, Heavy/Highway, and Residential

Welders: Rate for craft to which welding is incidental.

*Note: Hazardous waste removal work receives additional $1.25 per hour for truck drivers.

**Note: Hazardous waste premium $3.00 per hour over classified rate.

ALL Cranes: When crane operator is operating equipment that requires a fully licensed crane operator to operate he receives an extra $4.00 premium in addition to the hourly wage rate and benefit contributions:

1) Crane handling or erecting structural steel or stone; hoisting engineer (2 drums or over) 2) Cranes (100 ton rate capacity and over) Bauer Drill/Caisson 3) Cranes (under 100 ton rated capacity)

Crane with boom including jib, 150 feet - $1.50 extra.





All classifications that indicate a percentage of the fringe benefits must be calculated at the percentage rate

times the "base hourly rate".

Apprentices duly registered under the Commissioner of Labor's regulations on "Work Training Standards for

Apprenticeship and Training Programs" Section 31-51-d-1 to 12, are allowed to be paid the appropriate

percentage of the prevailing journeymen hourly base and the full fringe benefit rate, providing the work site

ratio shall not be less than one full-time journeyperson instructing and supervising the work of one

apprentice in a specific trade.

Connecticut General Statute Section 31-55a: Annual Adjustments to wage rates by contractors

doing state work

The Prevailing wage rates applicable to this project are subject to annual adjustments each July 1st for the

duration of the project.

Each contractor shall pay the annual adjusted prevailing wage rate that is in effect each July 1st, as posted

by the Department of Labor.

It is the contractor's responsibility to obtain the annual adjusted prevailing wage rate increases directly from

the Department of Labor's website.

The annual adjustments will be posted on the Department of Labor's Web page: www.ctdol.state.ct.us.

The Department of Labor will continue to issue the initial prevailing wage rate schedule to the Contracting

Agency for the project.

All subsequent annual adjustments will be posted on our Web Site for contractor access.

Effective October 1, 2005 - Public Act 05-50: any person performing the work of any mechanic,

laborer, or worker shall be paid prevailing wage.

All Persons who perform work ON SITE must be paid prevailing wage for the appropriate mechanic, laborer,

or worker classification.

All certified payrolls must list the hours worked and wages paid to All Persons who perform work ON SITE

regardless of their ownership i.e.: (Owners, Corporate Officers, LLC Members, Independent Contractors, et.

al)

Reporting and payment of wages is required regardless of any contractual relationship alleged to exist

between the contractor and such person.

Unlisted classifications needed for work not included within the scope of the classifications listed may be added

after award only as provided in the labor standards contract clause (29 CFR 5.5 (a) (1) (ii)).

Please direct any questions which you may have pertaining to classification of work and payment

of prevailing wages to the Wage and Workplace Standards Division, telephone (860)263-6790.

Connecticut Department of Labor

Wage and Workplace Standards Division

FOOTNOTES

Please Note: If the “Benefits” listed on the schedule for the following occupations

includes a letter(s) (+ a or + a+b for instance), refer to the information

below.

Benefits to be paid at the appropriate prevailing wage rate for the

listed occupation.

If the “Benefits” section for the occupation lists only a dollar amount,

disregard the information below.

Bricklayers, Cement Masons, Cement Finishers, Concrete Finishers, Stone Masons

(Building Construction) and

(Residential- Hartford, Middlesex, New Haven, New London and Tolland Counties)

a. Paid Holiday: Employees shall receive 4 hours for Christmas Eve holiday

provided the employee works the regularly scheduled day before and after the

holiday. Employers may schedule work on Christmas Eve and employees shall

receive pay for actual hours worked in addition to holiday pay.

Elevator Constructors: Mechanics

a. Paid Holidays: New Year’s Day, Memorial Day, Independence Day, Labor Day,

Veterans’ Day, Thanksgiving Day, Christmas Day, plus the Friday after

Thanksgiving.

b. Vacation: Employer contributes 8% of basic hourly rate for 5 years or more of

service or 6% of basic hourly rate for 6 months to 5 years of service as vacation pay

credit.

Glaziers

a. Paid Holidays: Labor Day and Christmas Day.

Power Equipment Operators (Heavy and Highway Construction & Building Construction)

a. Paid Holidays: New Year’s Day, Good Friday, Memorial day, Independence Day,

Labor Day, Thanksgiving Day and Christmas Day, provided the employee works 3

days during the week in which the holiday falls, if scheduled, and if scheduled, the

working day before and the working day after the holiday. Holidays falling on

Saturday may be observed on Saturday, or if the employer so elects, on the

preceding Friday.

Ironworkers a. Paid Holiday: Labor Day provided employee has been on the payroll for the 5

consecutive work days prior to Labor Day.

Laborers (Tunnel Construction) a. Paid Holidays: New Year’s Day, Memorial Day, Independence Day, Labor Day,

Thanksgiving Day and Christmas Day. No employee shall be eligible for holiday

pay when he fails, without cause, to work the regular work day preceding the

holiday or the regular work day following the holiday.

Roofers a. Paid Holidays: July 4

th, Labor Day, and Christmas Day provided the employee is

employed 15 days prior to the holiday.

Sprinkler Fitters a. Paid Holidays: Memorial Day, July 4th, Labor Day, Thanksgiving Day and

Christmas Day, provided the employee has been in the employment of a contractor

20 working days prior to any such paid holiday.

Truck Drivers

(Heavy and Highway Construction & Building Construction)

a. Paid Holidays: New Year’s Day, Memorial Day, Independence Day, Labor Day,

Thanksgiving Day, Christmas day, and Good Friday, provided the employee has

at least 31 calendar days of service and works the last scheduled day before and the

first scheduled day after the holiday, unless excused.

Rev. 7/1/19

STATUTE 31-55a

- SPECIAL NOTICE –

To All State and Political Subdivisions,Their Agents, and Contractors Connecticut General Statute 31-55a - Annual adjustments to wage rates by contractors doing state work. Each contractor that is awarded a contract on or after October 1, 2002, for (1) the construction of a state highway or bridge that falls under the provisions of section 31-54 of the general statutes, or (2) the construction, remodeling, refinishing, refurbishing, rehabilitation, alteration or repair of any public works project that falls under the provisions of section 31-53 of the general statutes shall contact the Labor Commissioner on or before July first of each year, for the duration of such contract, to ascertain the prevailing rate of wages on an hourly basis and the amount of payment or contributions paid or payable on behalf of each mechanic, laborer or worker employed upon the work contracted to be done, and shall make any necessary adjustments to such prevailing rate of wages and such payment or contributions paid or payable on behalf of each such employee, effective each July first.

The prevailing wage rates applicable to any contract or subcontract awarded on or after October 1, 2002 are subject to annual adjustments each July 1st for the duration of any project which was originally advertised for bids on or after October 1, 2002.

Each contractor affected by the above requirement shall pay the annual adjusted prevailing wage rate that is in effect each July 1st, as posted by the Department of Labor.

It is the contractor’s responsibility to obtain the annual adjusted prevailing wage rate increases directly from the Department of Labor’s Web Site. The annual adjustments will be posted on the Department of Labor Web page: www.ctdol.state.ct.us. For those without internet access, please contact the division listed below.

The Department of Labor will continue to issue the initial prevailing wage rate schedule to the Contracting Agency for the project. All subsequent annual adjustments will be posted on our Web Site for contractor access.

Any questions should be directed to the Contract Compliance Unit, Wage and Workplace Standards Division, Connecticut Department of Labor, 200 Folly Brook Blvd., Wethersfield, CT 06109 at (860)263-6790.

Information Bulletin Occupational Classifications

The Connecticut Department of Labor has the responsibility to properly

determine "job classification" on prevailing wage projects covered under C.G.S. Section 31-53(d).

Note: This information is intended to provide a sample of some occupational classifications for guidance purposes only. It is not an all-inclusive list of each occupation's duties. This list is being provided only to highlight some areas where a contractor may be unclear regarding the proper classification. If unsure, the employer should seek guidelines for CTDOL.

Below are additional clarifications of specific job duties performed for certain classifications:

ASBESTOS WORKERS Applies all insulating materials, protective coverings, coatings and finishes to all types of mechanical systems.

ASBESTOS INSULATOR

Handle, install apply, fabricate, distribute, prepare, alter, repair, dismantle, heat and frost insulation, including penetration and fire stopping work on all penetration fire stop systems.

BOILERMAKERS

Erects hydro plants, incomplete vessels, steel stacks, storage tanks for water, fuel, etc. Builds incomplete boilers, repairs heat exchanges and steam generators.

BRICKLAYERS, CEMENT MASONS, CEMENT FINISHERS, MARBLE MASONS, PLASTERERS, STONE MASONS, PLASTERERS. STONE MASONS, TERRAZZO WORKERS, TILE SETTERS

Lays building materials such as brick, structural tile and concrete cinder, glass, gypsum, terra cotta block. Cuts, tools and sets marble, sets stone, finishes concrete, applies decorative steel, aluminum and plastic tile, applies cements, sand, pigment and marble chips to floors, stairways, etc.

CARPENTERS, MILLWRIGHTS. PILEDRIVERMEN. LATHERS. RESILEINT FLOOR LAYERS, DOCK BUILDERS, DIKERS, DIVER TENDERS

Constructs, erects, installs and repairs structures and fixtures of wood, plywood and wallboard. Installs, assembles, dismantles, moves industrial machinery. Drives piling into ground to provide foundations for structures such as buildings and bridges, retaining walls for earth embankments, such as cofferdams. Fastens wooden, metal or rockboard lath to walls, ceilings and partitions of buildings, acoustical tile layer, concrete form builder. Applies firestopping materials on fire resistive joint systems only. Installation of curtain/window walls only where attached to wood or metal studs. Installation of insulated material of all types whether blown, nailed or attached in other ways to walls, ceilings and floors of buildings. Assembly and installation of modular furniture/furniture systems. Free-standing furniture is not covered. This includes free standing: student chairs, study top desks, book box desks, computer furniture, dictionary stand, atlas stand, wood shelving, two-position information access station, file cabinets, storage cabinets, tables, etc.

LABORER, CLEANING

• The clean up of any construction debris and the general (heavy/light) cleaning, including sweeping, wash down, mopping, wiping of the construction facility and its furniture, washing, polishing, and dusting.

DELIVERY PERSONNEL

• If delivery of supplies/building materials is to one common point and stockpiled there, prevailing wages are not required. If the delivery personnel are involved in the distribution of the material to multiple locations within the construction site then they would have to be paid prevailing wages for the type of work performed: laborer, equipment operator, electrician, ironworker, plumber, etc.

• An example of this would be where delivery of drywall is made to a building and the delivery personnel distribute the drywall from one "stockpile" location to further sub‐locations on each floor. Distribution of material around a construction site is the job of a laborer or tradesman, and not a delivery personnel.

ELECTRICIANS

Install, erect, maintenance, alteration or repair of any wire, cable, conduit, etc., which generates, transforms, transmits or uses electrical energy for light, heat, power or other purposes, including the Installation or maintenance of telecommunication, LAN wiring or computer equipment, and low voltage wiring. *License required per Connecticut General Statutes: E-1,2 L-5,6 C-5,6 T-1,2 L-1,2 V-1,2,7,8,9.

ELEVATOR CONSTRUCTORS

Install, erect, maintenance and repair of all types of elevators, escalators, dumb waiters and moving walks. *License required by Connecticut General Statutes: R-1,2,5,6.

FORK LIFT OPERATOR

Laborers Group 4) Mason Tenders - operates forklift solely to assist a mason to a maximum height of nine (9) feet only.

Power Equipment Operator Group 9 ‐ operates forklift to assist any trade, and to assist a mason to a height over nine (9) feet.

GLAZIERS

Glazing wood and metal sash, doors, partitions, and 2 story aluminum storefronts. Installs glass windows, skylights, store fronts and display cases or surfaces such as building fronts, interior walls, ceilings and table tops and metal store fronts. Installation of aluminum window walls and curtain walls is the "joint" work of glaziers and ironworkers, which require equal composite workforce.

IRONWORKERS

Erection, installation and placement of structural steel, precast concrete, miscellaneous iron, ornamental iron, metal curtain wall, rigging and reinforcing steel. Handling, sorting, and installation of reinforcing steel (rebar). Metal bridge rail (traffic), metal bridge handrail, and decorative security fence installation. Installation of aluminum window walls and curtain walls is the "joint" work of glaziers and ironworkers which require equal composite workforce.

INSULATOR

• Installing fire stopping systems/materials for "Penetration Firestop Systems": transit to cables, electrical conduits, insulated pipes, sprinkler pipe penetrations, ductwork behind radiation, electrical cable trays, fire rated pipe penetrations, natural polypropylene, HVAC ducts, plumbing bare metal, telephone and communication wires, and boiler room ceilings.

LABORERS

Acetylene burners, asphalt rakers, chain saw operators, concrete and power buggy operator, concrete saw operator, fence and guard rail erector (except metal bridge rail (traffic), decorative security fence (non-metal).

installation.), hand operated concrete vibrator operator, mason tenders, pipelayers (installation of storm drainage or sewage lines on the street only), pneumatic drill operator, pneumatic gas and electric drill operator, powermen and wagon drill operator, air track operator, block paver, curb setters, blasters, concrete spreaders.

PAINTERS

Maintenance, preparation, cleaning, blasting (water and sand, etc.), painting or application of any protective coatings of every description on all bridges and appurtenances of highways, roadways, and railroads. Painting, decorating, hardwood finishing, paper hanging, sign writing, scenic art work and drywall hhg for any and all types of building and residential work.

LEAD PAINT REMOVAL

• Painter’s Rate 1. Removal of lead paint from bridges. 2. Removal of lead paint as preparation of any surface to be repainted. 3. Where removal is on a Demolition project prior to reconstruction.

• Laborer’s Rate 1. Removal of lead paint from any surface NOT to be repainted. 2. Where removal is on a TOTAL Demolition project only.

PLUMBERS AND PIPEFITTERS

Installation, repair, replacement, alteration or maintenance of all plumbing, heating, cooling and piping. *License required per Connecticut General Statutes: P-1,2,6,7,8,9 J-1,2,3,4 SP-1,2 S-1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8 B-1,2,3,4 D-1,2,3,4.

POWER EQUIPMENT OPERATORS

Operates several types of power construction equipment such as compressors, pumps, hoists, derricks, cranes, shovels, tractors, scrapers or motor graders, etc. Repairs and maintains equipment. *License required, crane operators only, per Connecticut General Statutes.

ROOFERS

Covers roofs with composition shingles or sheets, wood shingles, slate or asphalt and gravel to waterproof roofs, including preparation of surface. (demolition or removal of any type of roofing and or clean-up of any and all areas where a roof is to be relaid.)

SHEETMETAL WORKERS

Fabricate, assembles, installs and repairs sheetmetal products and equipment in such areas as ventilation, air-conditioning, warm air heating, restaurant equipment, architectural sheet metal work, sheetmetal roofing, and aluminum gutters. Fabrication, handling, assembling, erecting, altering, repairing, etc. of coated metal material panels and composite metal material panels when used on building exteriors and interiors as soffits, facia, louvers, partitions, canopies, cornice, column covers, awnings, beam covers, cladding, sun shades, lighting troughs, spires, ornamental roofing, metal ceilings, mansards, copings, ornamental and ventilation hoods, vertical and horizontal siding panels, trim, etc. The sheet metal classification also applies to the vast variety of coated metal material panels and composite metal material panels that have evolved over the years as an alternative to conventional ferrous and non-ferrous metals like steel, iron, tin, copper, brass, bronze, aluminum, etc. Fabrication, handling, assembling, erecting, altering, repairing, etc. of architectural metal roof, standing seam roof, composite metal roof, metal and composite bathroom/toilet partitions, aluminum gutters, metal and composite lockers and shelving, kitchen equipment, and walk‐in coolers. To include testing and air –balancing ancillary to installation and construction.

SPRINKLER FITTERS

Installation, alteration, maintenance and repair of fire protection sprinkler systems. *License required per Connecticut General Statutes: F-1,2,3,4.

TILE MARBLE AND TERRAZZO FINISHERS

Assists and tends the tile setter, marble mason and terrazzo worker in the performance of their duties.

TRUCK DRIVERS

~How to pay truck drivers delivering asphalt is under REVISION~

Truck Drivers are requires to be paid prevailing wage for time spent "working" directly on the site. These drivers remain covered by the prevailing wage for any time spent transporting between the actual construction location and facilities (such as fabrication, plants, mobile factories, batch plant, borrow pits, job headquarters, tool yards, etc.) dedicated exclusively, or nearly so, to performance of the contract or project, which are so located in proximity to the actual construction location that it is reasonable to include them. *License required, drivers only, per Connecticut General Statutes.

For example:

• Material men and deliverymen are not covered under prevailing wage as long as they are not directly involved in the construction process. If, they unload the material, they would then be covered by prevailing wage for the classification they are performing work in: laborer, equipment operator, etc. • Hauling material off site is not covered provided they are not dumping it at a location outlined above. • Driving a truck on site and moving equipment or materials on site would be considered covered work, as this is part of the construction process.

Any questions regarding the proper classification should be directed to: Public Contract Compliance Unit

Wage and Workplace Standards Division Connecticut Department of Labor

200 Folly Brook Blvd, Wethersfield, CT 06109 (860) 263-6543.

Sec. 31-53b. Construction safety and health course. New miner training program.

Proof of completion required for mechanics, laborers and workers on public works

projects. Enforcement. Regulations. Exceptions. (a) Each contract for a public works

project entered into on or after July 1, 2009, by the state or any of its agents, or by any

political subdivision of the state or any of its agents, described in subsection (g) of section

31-53, shall contain a provision requiring that each contractor furnish proof with the

weekly certified payroll form for the first week each employee begins work on such project

that any person performing the work of a mechanic, laborer or worker pursuant to the

classifications of labor under section 31-53 on such public works project, pursuant to such

contract, has completed a course of at least ten hours in duration in construction safety and

health approved by the federal Occupational Safety and Health Administration or, has

completed a new miner training program approved by the Federal Mine Safety and Health

Administration in accordance with 30 CFR 48 or, in the case of telecommunications

employees, has completed at least ten hours of training in accordance with 29 CFR

1910.268.

(b) Any person required to complete a course or program under subsection (a) of this

section who has not completed the course or program shall be subject to removal from the

worksite if the person does not provide documentation of having completed such course or

program by the fifteenth day after the date the person is found to be in noncompliance. The

Labor Commissioner or said commissioner's designee shall enforce this section.

(c) Not later than January 1, 2009, the Labor Commissioner shall adopt regulations, in

accordance with the provisions of chapter 54, to implement the provisions of subsections

(a) and (b) of this section. Such regulations shall require that the ten-hour construction

safety and health courses required under subsection (a) of this section be conducted in

accordance with federal Occupational Safety and Health Administration Training Institute

standards, or in accordance with Federal Mine Safety and Health Administration Standards

or in accordance with 29 CFR 1910.268, as appropriate. The Labor Commissioner shall

accept as sufficient proof of compliance with the provisions of subsection (a) or (b) of this

section a student course completion card issued by the federal Occupational Safety and

Health Administration Training Institute, or such other proof of compliance said

commissioner deems appropriate, dated no earlier than five years before the

commencement date of such public works project.

(d) This section shall not apply to employees of public service companies, as defined in

section 16-1, or drivers of commercial motor vehicles driving the vehicle on the public

works project and delivering or picking up cargo from public works projects provided they

perform no labor relating to the project other than the loading and unloading of their cargo.

(P.A. 06-175, S. 1; P.A. 08-83, S. 1.)

History: P.A. 08-83 amended Subsec. (a) by making provisions applicable to public works project contracts entered into on or after July 1, 2009, replacing provision re total cost of work with reference to Sec. 31-53(g), requiring proof in certified payroll form that new mechanic, laborer or worker has completed a 10-hour or more construction safety course and adding provision re new miner training program, amended Subsec. (b) by substituting "person" for "employee" and adding "or program", amended Subsec. (c) by adding "or in accordance with Federal Mine Safety and Health Administration Standards" and setting new deadline of January 1, 2009,

deleted former Subsec. (d) re "public building", added new Subsec. (d) re exemptions for

public service company employees and delivery drivers who perform no labor other than

delivery and made conforming and technical changes, effective January 1, 2009.

TH

IS I

S A

PUB

LIC

WO

RK

S PR

OJE

CT

Cov

ered

by

the

PR

EVAI

LIN

G W

AGE

LAW

C

T G

ener

al S

tatu

tes

Sect

ion

31-5

3

If y

ou h

ave

QU

ESTI

ON

S re

gard

ing

your

wag

es

CALL

(86

0) 2

63-6

790

Sec

tion

31-5

5 of t

he C

T St

ate S

tatu

tes r

equi

res e

very

cont

ract

or o

r sub

cont

ract

or p

erfo

rmin

g wo

rk fo

r the

st

ate t

o po

st in

a pr

omin

ent p

lace t

he p

reva

iling

wage

s as d

eter

min

ed b

y the

Lab

or C

omm

issio

ner.

Informational Bulletin

THE 10-HOUR OSHA CONSTRUCTIONSAFETY AND HEALTH COURSE

(applicable to public building contracts entered into on or after July 1, 2007, where the total cost of all work to be performed is at least $100,000)

(1) This requirement was created by Public Act No. 06-175, which is codified in Section 31-53b of the Connecticut General Statutes (pertaining to the prevailing wage statutes);

(2) The course is required for public building construction contracts (projects funded in whole or in part by the state or any political subdivision of the state) entered into on or after July 1, 2007;

(3) It is required of private employees (not state or municipal employees) and apprentices who perform manual labor for a general contractor or subcontractor on a public building project where the total cost of all work to be performed is at least $100,000;

(4) The ten-hour construction course pertains to the ten-hour Outreach Course conducted in accordance with federal OSHA Training Institute standards, and, for telecommunications workers, a ten-hour training course conducted in accordance with federal OSHA standard, 29 CFR 1910.268;

(5) The internet website for the federal OSHA Training Institute is http://www.osha.gov/fso/ote/training/edcenters/fact_sheet.html;

(6) The statutory language leaves it to the contractor and its employees to determine who pays for the cost of the ten-hour Outreach Course;

(7) Within 30 days of receiving a contract award, a general contractor must furnish proof to the Labor Commissioner that all employees and apprentices performing manual labor on the project will have completed such a course;

(8) Proof of completion may be demonstrated through either: (a) the presentation of a bona fide student course completion card issued by the federal OSHA Training Institute; or (2) the presentation of documentation provided to an employee by a trainer certified by the Institute pending the actual issuance of the completion card;

(9) Any card with an issuance date more than 5 years prior to the commencement date of the construction project shall not constitute proof of compliance;

(10) Each employer shall affix a copy of the construction safety course completion card to the certified payroll submitted to the contracting agency in accordance with Conn. Gen. Stat. § 31-53(f) on which such employee’s name first appears;

(11) Any employee found to be in non-compliance shall be subject to removal from the worksite if such employee does not provide satisfactory proof of course completion to the Labor Commissioner by the fifteenth day after the date the employee is determined to be in noncompliance;

(12) Any such employee who is determined to be in noncompliance may continue to work on a public building construction project for a maximum of fourteen consecutive calendar days while bringing his or her status into compliance;

(13) The Labor Commissioner may make complaint to the prosecuting authorities regarding any employer or agent of the employer, or officer or agent of the corporation who files a false certified payroll with respect to the status of an employee who is performing manual labor on a public building construction project;

(14) The statute provides the minimum standards required for the completion of a safety course by manual laborers on public construction contracts; any contractor can exceed these minimum requirements; and

(15) Regulations clarifying the statute are currently in the regulatory process, and shall be posted on the CTDOL website as soon as they are adopted in final form.

(16) Any questions regarding this statute may be directed to the Wage and Workplace Standards Division of the Connecticut Labor Department via the internet website of http://www.ctdol.state.ct.us/wgwkstnd/wgemenu.htm; or by telephone at (860)263-6790.

THE ABOVE INFORMATION IS PROVIDED EXCLUSIVELY AS AN EDUCATIONAL RESOURCE, AND IS NOT INTENDED AS A SUBSTITUTE FOR LEGAL INTERPRETATIONS WHICH MAY ULTMATELY ARISE CONCERNIG THE CONSTRUCTION OF THE STATUTE OR THE REGULATIONS.

November 29, 2006

NoticeTo All Mason Contractors and Interested Parties

Regarding Construction Pursuant to Section 31-53 of theConnecticut General Statutes (Prevailing Wage)

The Connecticut Labor Department Wage and Workplace Standards Division is empowered toenforce the prevailing wage rates on projects covered by the above referenced statute.

Over the past few years the Division has withheld enforcement of the rate in effect for workerswho operate a forklift on a prevailing wage rate project due to a potential jurisdictional dispute.

The rate listed in the schedules and in our Occupational Bulletin (see enclosed) has been asfollows:

Forklift Operator:

- Laborers (Group 4) Mason Tenders - operates forklift solely to assist a mason to a maximumheight of nine feet only.

- Power Equipment Operator (Group 9) - operates forklift to assist any trade and to assist amason to a height over nine feet.

The U.S. Labor Department conducted a survey of rates in Connecticut but it has not beenpublished and the rate in effect remains as outlined in the above Occupational Bulletin.

Since this is a classification matter and not one of jurisdiction, effective January 1,2007 the Connecticut Labor Department will enforce the rate on each schedule inaccordance with our statutory authority.

Your cooperation in filing appropriate and accurate certified payrolls is appreciated.

~NOTICE~

TO ALL CONTRACTING AGENCIES

Please be advised that Connecticut General Statutes Section 31-53, requires the contracting agency tocertify to the Department of Labor, the total dollar amount of work to be done in connection with suchpublic works project, regardless of whether such project consists of one or more contracts.

Please find the attached “Contracting Agency Certification Form” to be completed and returned tothe Department of Labor, Wage and Workplace Standards Division, Public Contract Compliance Unit.

O Inquiries can be directed to (860)263-6543.

CONNECTICUT DEPARTMENT OF LABORWAGE AND WORKPLACE STANDARDS DIVISION

CONTRACT COMPLIANCE UNIT

CONTRACTING AGENCY CERTIFICATION FORM

I, , acting in my official capacity as , authorized representative title

for , located at , contracting agency address

do hereby certify that the total dollar amount of work to be done in connection with

, located at , project name and number address

shall be $ , which includes all work, regardless of whether such project

consists of one or more contracts.

CONTRACTOR INFORMATION

Name:

Address: Authorized Representative: Approximate Starting Date:

Approximate Completion Date:

Signature Date

Return To: Connecticut Department of LaborWage & Workplace Standards DivisionContract Compliance Unit200 Folly Brook Blvd.Wethersfield, CT 06109

Date Issued: ___________________________

[New

] In

acco

rdan

ce w

ith S

ectio

n 31

-53b

(a) o

f the

C.G

.S. e

ach

cont

ract

or s

hall

prov

ide

a co

py o

f the

OSH

A 1

0 H

our C

onst

ruct

ion

Safe

ty a

nd H

ealth

Car

d fo

r eac

h em

ploy

ee, t

o be

atta

ched

to th

e fi

rst

cert

ifie

d pa

yrol

l on

the

proj

ect.

In a

ccor

danc

e w

ith C

onne

ctic

ut G

ener

al S

tatu

tes,

31-

53

P

AY

RO

LL

CE

RT

IFIC

AT

ION

FO

R P

UB

LIC

WO

RK

S PR

OJE

CT

S

Con

nect

icut

Dep

artm

ent o

f Lab

orC

ertif

ied

Payr

olls

with

a st

atem

ent o

f com

plia

nce

Wag

e an

d W

orkp

lace

Sta

ndar

ds D

ivis

ion

shal

l be

subm

itted

mon

thly

to th

e co

ntra

ctin

g ag

ency

.W

EE

KL

Y P

AY

RO

LL

200

Fol

ly B

rook

Blv

d.

W

ethe

rsfie

ld, C

T 0

6109

CO

NTR

AC

TOR

NA

ME

AN

D A

DD

RES

S:SU

BC

ON

TRA

CTO

R N

AM

E &

AD

DR

ESS

WO

RK

ER'S

CO

MPE

NSA

TIO

N IN

SUR

AN

CE

CA

RR

IER

POLI

CY

#PA

YR

OLL

NU

MB

ERW

eek-

Endi

ng

PRO

JEC

T N

AM

E &

AD

DR

ESS

Dat

eEF

FEC

TIV

E D

ATE

:EX

PIR

ATI

ON

DA

TE:

PE

RSO

N/W

OR

KER

,A

PPR

MA

LE/

W

OR

K

DA

Y A

ND

DA

TETo

tal S

T B

ASE

HO

UR

LY

TYPE

OF

G

RO

SS P

AY

TO

TAL

DE

DU

CTI

ON

SG

RO

SS P

AY

FO

RA

DD

RES

S an

d SE

CTI

ON

RA

TEFE

MA

LEC

LASS

IFIC

ATI

ON

SM

TW

THF

SH

ours

RA

TE

FRIN

GE

FO

R A

LL

FED

ERA

LST

ATE

THIS

PR

EVA

ILIN

G C

HEC

K #

AN

D

%A

ND

BEN

EFIT

S

WO

RK

RA

TE JO

B

NET

PA

YR

AC

E*Tr

ade

Lice

nse

Type

TOTA

L FR

ING

E

Per H

our

PE

RFO

RM

ED L

IST

& N

umbe

r - O

SHA

Tota

l B

ENEF

IT P

LAN

1

thro

ugh

6

TH

IS W

EEK

FIC

AW

ITH

-W

ITH

-O

THER

10 C

ertif

icat

ion

Num

ber

H

OU

RS

WO

RK

ED E

AC

H D

AY

O

/T H

ours

CA

SH

(see

bac

k)H

OLD

ING

HO

LDIN

G1.

$ $

2. $

Bas

e R

ate

3. $

4. $

$5.

$C

ash

Frin

ge6.

$1.

$ $

2. $

Bas

e R

ate

3. $

4. $

$5.

$C

ash

Frin

ge6.

$1.

$ $

2. $

Bas

e R

ate

3. $

4. $

$5.

$C

ash

Frin

ge6.

$1.

$ $

2. $

Bas

e R

ate

3. $

4. $

$5.

$C

ash

Frin

ge6.

20

*IF

REQ

UIR

EDW

WS-

CP1

*SEE

REV

ERSE

SID

E

PA

GE

NU

MB

ER

O

F

OSH

A 1

0 ~A

TTA

CH

CA

RD

TO

1ST

CER

TIFI

ED P

AYR

OLL

*FRINGE BENEFITS EXPLANATION (P):

Bona fide benefits paid to approved plans, funds or programs, except those required by Federal or State Law (unemployment tax, worker’s compensation, income taxes, etc.). Please specify the type of benefits provided: 1) Medical or hospital care 4) Disability

2) Pension or retirement 5) Vacation, holiday

3) Life Insurance 6) Other (please specify)

CERTIFIED STATEMENT OF COMPLIANCE For the week ending date of , I, of , (hereafter known as

Employer) in my capacity as (title) do hereby certify and state:

Section A: 1. All persons employed on said project have been paid the full weekly wages earned by them during the week in accordance with Connecticut General Statutes, section 31-53, as amended. Further, I hereby certify and state the following: a) The records submitted are true and accurate; b) The rate of wages paid to each mechanic, laborer or workman and the amount of payment or contributions paid or payable on behalf of each such employee to any employee welfare fund, as defined in Connecticut General Statutes, section 31-53 (h), are not less than the prevailing rate of wages and the amount of payment or contributions paid or payable on behalf of each such employee to any employee welfare fund, as determined by the Labor Commissioner pursuant to subsection Connecticut General Statutes, section 31-53 (d), and said wages and benefits are not less than those which may also be required by contract; c) The Employer has complied with all of the provisions in Connecticut General Statutes, section 31-53 (and Section 31-54 if applicable for state highway construction); d) Each such employee of the Employer is covered by a worker’s compensation insurance policy for the duration of his employment which proof of coverage has been provided to the contracting agency; e) The Employer does not receive kickbacks, which means any money, fee, commission, credit, gift, gratuity, thing of value, or compensation of any kind which is provided directly or indirectly, to any prime contractor, prime contractor employee, subcontractor, or subcontractor employee for the purpose of improperly obtaining or rewarding favorable treatment in connection with a prime contract or in connection with a prime contractor in connection with a subcontractor relating to a prime contractor; and f) The Employer is aware that filing a certified payroll which he knows to be false is a class D felony for which the employer may be fined up to five thousand dollars, imprisoned for up to five years or both. 2. OSHA~The employer shall affix a copy of the construction safety course, program or training completion document to the certified payroll required to be submitted to the contracting agency for this project on which such employee’s name first appears. (Signature) (Title) Submitted on (Date) Section B: Applies to CONNDOT Projects ONLY That pursuant to CONNDOT contract requirements for reporting purposes only, all employees listed under Section B who performed work on this project are not covered under the prevailing wage requirements defined in Connecticut General Statutes Section 31-53.

(Signature) (Title) Submitted on (Date) Note: CTDOL will assume all hours worked were performed under Section A unless clearly delineated as Section B WWS-CP1 as such. Should an employee perform work under both Section A and Section B, the hours worked and wages paid must be segregated for reporting purposes.

***THIS IS A PUBLIC DOCUMENT*** ***DO NOT INCLUDE SOCIAL SECURITY NUMBERS***

Wee

kly

Payr

oll C

ertif

icat

ion

For

PAY

RO

LL

CE

RT

IFIC

AT

ION

FO

R P

UB

LIC

WO

RK

S PR

OJE

CT

SW

eek-

End

ing

Dat

e:Pu

blic

Wor

ks P

roje

cts (

Con

tinue

d)C

ontr

acto

r or

Sub

cont

ract

or B

usin

ess N

ame:

WE

EK

LY

PA

YR

OL

L

PER

SON

/WO

RK

ER,

APP

RM

ALE

/

WO

RK

D

AY

AN

D D

ATE

Tota

l ST

BA

SE H

OU

RLY

TY

PE O

F

GR

OSS

PA

Y

TO

TAL

DED

UC

TIO

NS

GR

OSS

PA

Y F

OR

AD

DR

ESS

and

SEC

TIO

NR

ATE

FEM

ALE

CLA

SSIF

ICA

TIO

NS

MT

WTH

FS

Hou

rs

R

ATE

FR

ING

EFO

R A

LL W

OR

KFE

DER

AL

STA

TETH

IS P

REV

AIL

ING

CH

ECK

# A

ND

%A

ND

B

ENEF

ITS

PE

RFO

RM

ED

RA

TE JO

B

NET

PA

YR

AC

E*Tr

ade

Lice

nse

Type

TOTA

L FR

ING

E

Per H

our

T

HIS

WEE

K

& N

umbe

r -O

SHA

Tota

lB

ENEF

IT P

LAN

1

thro

ugh

6FI

CA

WIT

H-

WIT

H-

OTH

ER10

Cer

tific

atio

n N

umbe

r

HO

UR

S W

OR

KED

EA

CH

DA

Y

O/T

Hou

rs

CA

SH

(see

bac

k)H

OLD

ING

HO

LDIN

G1.

$ $

2. $

Bas

e R

ate

3. $

4. $

$5.

$C

ash

Frin

ge6.

$1.

$ $

2. $

Bas

e R

ate

3. $

4. $

$5.

$C

ash

Frin

ge6.

$1.

$ $

2. $

Bas

e R

ate

3. $

4. $

$5.

$C

ash

Frin

ge6.

$1.

$ $

2. $

Bas

e R

ate

3. $

4. $

$5.

$C

ash

Frin

ge6.

$1.

$ $

2. $

Bas

e R

ate

3. $

4. $

$5.

$C

ash

Frin

ge6.

$

*IF

REQ

UIR

ED

WW

S-C

P2

N

OT

ICE

: T

HIS

PA

GE

MU

ST B

E A

CC

OM

PAN

IED

BY

A C

OV

ER

PA

GE

(FO

RM

# W

WS-

CP1

)

P

AG

E N

UM

BER

OF

LIST

DRAWING LIST

Emergency Communications Center Tenant Fit-Out & Renovation – SHU/Fairfield Drawing List-1

TENANT FIT-OUT & RENOVATION

EMERGENCY COMMUNICATIONS CENTER SACRED HEART UNIVERSITY 5151 PARK AVENUE FAIRFIELD, CT 06825 BID #2021-28

S/P+A PROJECT NO. 19.373

Drawing Number Drawing Name

COVER

INFORMATION AND CODE DRAWINGS G100 GENERAL INFORMATION & SYMBOL LEGEND G101 PARTIAL PLAN: LOWER LEVEL CODE PLAN

ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS A100 PARTIAL PLAN: LOWER LEVEL DEMOLITION PLAN & RCP

DEMOLITION A101-A199 NOT USED A200 PARTIAL PLAN: LOWER LEVEL FLOOR PLAN A201 PARTIAL PLANS: LOWER LEVEL RCP & FINISH PLAN A202-A299 NOT USED A300 EXTERIOR & INTERIOR ELEVATIONS A301-A399 NOT USED A400 WALL SECTIONS, FENCE SECTIONS & DETAILS A401 WINDOW TYPES, ELEVATIONS & DETAILS A402 PARTITION TYPES, ENLARGED CASEWORK ELEVATIONS,

SECTIONS & DETAILS A403-A499 NOT USED A500 DOOR TYPES, FRAME TYPES, SCHEDULE & DETAILS A501-A599 NOT USED A600 FINISH LEGEND, SCHEDULE, ACCESSORIES, MOUNTING HEIGHTS

& MISCELLANEOUS DETAILS

FIRE PROTECTION DRAWINGS F001 FIRE PROTECTION COVER SHEET F002-F100 NOT USED F101 PARTIAL PLAN: FIRE PROTECTION DEMOLITION F102-F200 NOT USED F201 PARTIAL PLAN: FIRE PROTECTION F202-F800 NOT USED F801 FIRE PROTECTION DETAILS

PLUMBING DRAWINGS P001 PLUMBING COVER SHEET P002-P100 NOT USED P101 PARTIAL PLAN: PLUMBING DEMOLITION

DRAWING LIST

Emergency Communications Center Tenant Fit-Out & Renovation – SHU/Fairfield Drawing List-2

P102-P200 NOT USED P201 PARTIAL PLAN: PLUMBING P202-P800 NOT USED P801 PLUMBING DETAILS P802-P900 NOT USED P901 PLUMBING SCHEDULES

MECHANICAL DRAWINGS M000 MECHANICAL NOTES, LEGEND & ABBREVIATIONS M001-M099 NOT USED M100 PARTIAL PLAN: LOWER LEVEL DEMOLITION PLAN M101-M199 NOT USED M200 PARTIAL PLAN: LOWER LEVEL HVAC PLAN M201M799 NOT USED M800 MECHANICAL DETAILS & SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS M801-M899 NOT USED M900 MECHANICAL SCHEDULES

ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS ED101 LOWER LEVEL ELECTRICAL LIGHTING DEMOLITION PART PLAN ED102 LOWER LEVEL ELECTRICAL POWER DEMOLITION PART PLAN E101 LOWER LEVEL ELECTRICAL LIGHTING PARTIAL FLOOR PLAN E102-E200 NOT USED E201 LOWER LEVEL ELECTRICAL POWER PARTIAL FLOOR PLAN E202 LOWER LEVEL MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT PARTIAL FLOOR PLAN E203-E299 NOT USED E300 ELECTRICAL SYMBOLS, NOTES & SCHEDULES E301 ELECTRICAL ONE-LINE POWER RISER DIAGRAM & PANEL

SCHEDULES E302 ELECTRICAL DETAILS

END OF DRAWING LIST

SUMMARY OF WORK

Emergency Communications Center Tenant Fit-Out & Renovation – SHU/Fairfield 011000-1

SECTION 011000 - SUMMARY OF WORK

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 PROJECT INFORMATION

A. Project Owner: Town of Fairfield.

B. Property Owner: Sacred Heart University.

1. Property Owner’s Representative: Carmelo Cicero, Director of Capital Projects. Phone: 203.396.6892; e-mail: [email protected]

1.3 PROJECT DESCRIPTION

A. The Work of the Project is defined by the Contract Documents and consists of mostly interior renovations to an existing space within a building.

B. The Work generally includes, but is not necessarily limited to the following major elements:

1. Removal of building materials and components, including selected existing plumbing, mechanical and electrical systems.

2. Offsite disposal of all removed materials. 3. Removal of existing partition walls, doors, frames, ceilings, flooring, plumbing fixtures

and accessories, exterior window systems, and all associated components. 4. Removal of existing retaining wall including excavation and temporary shoring. 5. Construction of new interior partitions, including but not limiting to doors, frames,

hardware, ballistic-rated panels. 6. Provision and installation of exterior ballistic-rated window system including glazing and

sealants. 7. Provision and installation of plastic-laminate casework and lockers, wood trim, acoustical

ceilings, floor finishes, painting, visual display boards, toilet accessories, signage, and appliances.

8. Provision and installation of new concrete retaining wall and fence assembly including gate.

9. Provide cutting/boring and patching/firesafing for any new penetrations of any diameter. 10. Trenching and backfill for new conduit including seeding and patching to match existing

asphalt and concrete curb. 11. Demolition and new work to revise existing wet-pipe sprinkler systems to suit tenant

layout and provision and installation of clean agent fire suppression system for Server Room.

12. Plumbing:

SUMMARY OF WORK


a. Demolition and new work to revise existing plumbing systems to suit tenant layout, including but not limited to piping systems, fixtures and accessories, instantaneous water heaters, pumps, drainage items and accessories.

b. Provision and installation of drip containment and leak monitoring/alarm systems for existing fluid handling piping routing in ceiling space of Server Room and drain-off piping for drip containment systems.

c. Provision and installation of gravity drainage (with backwater protection) for removal of standing water in Server Room.

d. Provision and installation of natural-gas piping system to serve tenant‘s gas-fired equipment.

e. Work also includes the disconnection, removal, storage, cleaning, reinstallation and reconnection of Property Owner’s fixtures, equipment, etc. as required to accomplish tenant area work scope.

13. Mechanical: Demolition, relocation, and new work to suit the tenant layout. Work includes but not limited to the following:

a. Modification of existing VRF system.

1) Relocation of the existing VRF outdoor unit, providing new refrigeration piping from existing HRU to the outdoor unit.

2) One (1) indoor unit to remain in place. Extension of ductwork as required with provision and installation of new supply diffusers and return grilles.

3) Relocation of one (1) VRF indoor unit, providing new ductwork and associated supply diffusers and return grilles.

4) Provision and installation of new equipment and controllers to serve office spaces with new equipment to tie-in to existing system.

5) Provision and installation of refrigeration piping, insulation, and refrigerant. 6) Provision and installation of OA ductwork from ERV to new and relocated

equipment. 7) Provision and installation of OA and EA ductwork from ERV to new louver. 8) Recommissioning of existing system.

b. Provision and installation of redundant VRF system and energy recovery ventilator and all associated refrigeration piping, refrigerant, and controls serving the Dispatch Room only.

c. Provision and installation of exhaust fans and associated ductwork serving toilet rooms, custodial, and lounge.

d. Rerouting of ductwork and/or provision and installation of new, as required, serving the existing library to clear new work in the renovated area.

e. Relocation of VAV boxes and associated ductwork serving the Library. f. Provision and installation of new fire dampers at all existing, rerouted, and new

ductwork penetrating fire rated wall. g. Provision and installation of a ducted Computer Room Air-Conditioning unit and

all associated ductwork, refrigeration piping, diffusers and grilles, and controls, for the server room.

h. Provision and installation of a standalone wall mounted humidifier in the dispatch room.

i. Delegated seismic design for all equipment seismic restraint/bracing/support.

SUMMARY OF WORK


14. Provision and installation of lighting and power for new tenant space, standby generator for emergency power, power for all new mechanical, plumbing and fire protection equipment, and provisions for security and camera systems.

1.4 CONTRACTOR USE OF PREMISES

A. General: Limit use of the premises to construction activities in areas indicated; allow for Property’s Owner occupancy and use by the public of the adjacent spaces.

B. Confine operations to as small work areas and accessways as possible. As much as possible and without damage to the finishes, doors, and related building systems, access the project area via the service doors designated by the Property Owner.

C. Keep driveways and entrances serving the premises clear and available to the Property Owner and its employees at all times. Do not use these areas for parking or storage of materials. Schedule deliveries to minimize space and time requirements for storage of materials and equipment on site.

D. Maintain existing egress patterns, exit doors and means of egress during construction, which will include the provision of temporary walkways, sidewalks or other means necessary to provide adequate life safety for the building occupants, particularly at exitways which must continue to be open and serviceable while adjacent construction activity occurs.

E. Use of the Existing Building: Maintain the existing building in a weathertight condition throughout the construction period. Repair damage caused by construction operations. Take all precautions necessary to protect the building and its occupants during the construction period.

1. Contractor is responsible to secure project area/site from intrusions during unoccupied (after hours) period of time. Any temporary doors and /or window coverings that may be necessary to complete repairs are the Contractors responsibility to furnish and install as part of the project scope.

1.5 OWNER OCCUPANCY

A. Full Owner Occupancy: The Property Owner will occupy the existing building during the entire construction period. Cooperate with the Property Owner during construction operations to minimize conflicts and facilitate usage. Perform the Work so as not to interfere with the Property Owner's operations. Pre-schedule construction operations with the Property Owner for areas that must be evacuated for extended periods, giving the Property Owner the opportunity to relocate operations to non-affected areas.

1. Maintain access to existing walkways, corridors, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities. Do not close or obstruct walkways, corridors, or other occupied or used facilities without written permission from Property Owner and approval of authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Notify Property Owner not less than 72 hours in advance of activities that will affect Property Owner's operations.

SUMMARY OF WORK


1.6 SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS

A. The Contractor shall insure that all work performed is done so in a safe manner and that all his/her employees shall adhere to all applicable safety procedures and practices at all times. There may be children and staff in the vicinity of the work area during normal working hours. The Contractor shall be aware at all times that additional safety considerations should be taken. Particular care shall be taken by the Contractor, Subcontractors and all those in their employ, that all tools, equipment, ladders, etc. are never left unsupervised.

B. Under no circumstances shall the buildings' occupants be subjected to excessive construction noise or vibrations, nor shall they be subject to fumes, odors, or other deleterious effects of the operation. Should material delivery, demolition or construction operations, inclement weather or related schedule conditions produce this situation (as determined by the Property Owner), the Contractor shall be required to suspend operations that produce the offending effects until such time as the building is not occupied, or as approved by the Property Owner.

C. Smoking will not be permitted inside the building or on the grounds. Strict adherence to the smoking regulations will be enforced for the entire duration of the construction.

D. There will be absolutely no fraternizing with the students by construction personnel. Anyone caught doing so will be required to leave the jobsite and will not be permitted to return. Such dismissal shall not give the contractor grounds for default on any other contract requirements, including the construction schedule.

E. Site Security – Identification Badges

1. The Contractor shall provide a list of all contact persons. The list shall include each trade, name of Contractor, contact person(s), phone numbers, fax numbers, Federal Employer Identification Number (FEIN), social security number if FEIN is not available, and Connecticut Tax Registration number.

2. Prior to the start of work all Contractor and Sub-Contactor personnel assigned to perform work shall be required to fill out and submit to a background check at a cost provided by the Contractor. All information shall be submitted to the Town of Fairfield and Sacred Heart University. Information for background check includes the following:

a. Identity Verification b. Criminal Background c. Additional checks as deemed warranted

3. Security badges will be worn by all project personnel during construction activities. The Contractor will provide badges at no cost to the Owner. The Contractor will be responsible for monitoring the display of badges, including those of the personnel of all subcontractors and visitors to the project site.

F. Public Health Emergency:

1. The Contractor shall anticipate and incorporate in their Bids all potential costs related to a public health emergency such as the COVID-19/Coronavirus Pandemic, including rules, regulations, and recommendations issued by public authorities. The potential costs may include, but are not limited to, costs related to social distancing, manpower levels, project scheduling, construction coordination, material/product supplies and delivery delays,

SUMMARY OF WORK


material escalation costs, increased subcontractor/supplier costs, loss of productivity and inefficiency costs, extended general conditions costs, and any other potential costs.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)

PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)

END OF SECTION 011000

ALLOWANCES


SECTION 012100 - ALLOWANCES

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements governing allowances.

1. Certain items are specified in the Contract Documents by allowances. Allowances have been established in lieu of additional requirements and to defer selection of actual materials and equipment to a later date when direction will be provided to the Contractor. If necessary, additional requirements will be issued by Change Order.

B. Types of allowances include the following:

1. Lump-sum allowances.

C. Related Sections:

1. Section 012200 "Unit Prices" for procedures for using unit prices. 2. Divisions 02 through 49 Sections for items of Work covered by allowances.

1.3 SELECTION AND PURCHASE

A. At the earliest practical date after award of the Contract, advise Architect of the date when final selection and purchase of each product or system described by an allowance must be completed to avoid delaying the Work.

B. At Architect's request, obtain proposals for each allowance for use in making final selections. Include recommendations that are relevant to performing the Work.

C. Purchase products and systems selected by Architect from the designated supplier.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit proposals for purchase of products or systems included in allowances, in the form specified for Change Orders.

B. Submit invoices or delivery slips to show actual quantities of materials delivered to the site for use in fulfillment of each allowance.

C. Submit time sheets and other documentation to show labor time and cost for installation of allowance items that include installation as part of the allowance.

ALLOWANCES


D. Coordinate and process submittals for allowance items in same manner as for other portions of the Work.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate allowance items with other portions of the Work. Furnish templates as required to coordinate installation.

1.6 QUANTITY/LUMP-SUM ALLOWANCES

A. Allowance shall include cost to Contractor of specific products and materials ordered by Owner or selected by Architect under allowance and shall include freight and delivery to Project site.

B. Unless otherwise indicated, Contractor's costs for receiving and handling at Project site, labor, installation, overhead and profit, and similar costs related to products and materials ordered by Owner under allowance shall be included as part of the Contract Sum and not part of the allowance.

C. Unused Materials: Return unused materials purchased under an allowance to manufacturer or supplier for credit to Owner, after installation has been completed and accepted.

1. If requested by Architect, retain and prepare unused material for storage by Owner. Deliver unused material to Owner's storage space as directed.

1.7 ADJUSTMENT OF ALLOWANCES

A. Allowance Adjustment: To adjust allowance amounts, prepare a Change Order proposal based on the difference between purchase amount and the allowance, multiplied by final measurement of work-in-place where applicable. If applicable, include reasonable allowances for cutting losses, tolerances, mixing wastes, normal product imperfections, and similar margins.

1. Include installation costs in purchase amount only where indicated as part of the allowance.

2. If requested, prepare explanation and documentation to substantiate distribution of overhead costs and other margins claimed.

3. Submit substantiation of a change in scope of work, if any, claimed in Change Orders related to unit-cost allowances.

4. Owner reserves the right to establish the quantity of work-in-place by independent quantity survey, measure, or count.

B. Submit claims for increased costs because of a change in scope or nature of the allowance described in the Contract Documents, whether for the purchase order amount or Contractor's handling, labor, installation, overhead, and profit.

1. Do not include Contractor's or subcontractor's indirect expense in the Change Order cost amount unless it is clearly shown that the nature or extent of work has changed from what could have been foreseen from information in the Contract Documents.

2. No change to Contractor's indirect expense is permitted for selection of higher- or lower-priced materials or systems of the same scope and nature as originally indicated.

ALLOWANCES



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine products covered by an allowance promptly on delivery for damage or defects. Return damaged or defective products to manufacturer for replacement.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Coordinate materials and their installation for each allowance with related materials and installations to ensure that each allowance item is completely integrated and interfaced with related work.

3.3 SCHEDULE OF ALLOWANCES

A. Allowance No. 1: Gas Utility Service Charges: Include in the Base Bid an allowance of five thousand dollars ($5,000) for Southern Connecticut Gas Company’s charges for gas service modifications and the installation and connection of ECC tenant gas meter/regulator. This allowance includes material cost, receiving, handling, and installation, and Contractor overhead and profit.


ALTERNATES


SECTION 012300 - ALTERNATES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for alternates.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Alternate: An amount proposed by bidders and stated on the Bid Form for certain work defined in the Bidding Requirements that may be added to or deducted from the base bid amount if Owner decides to accept a corresponding change either in the amount of construction to be completed or in the products, materials, equipment, systems, or installation methods described in the Contract Documents.

1. Alternates described in this Section are part of the Work only if enumerated in the Agreement.

2. The cost or credit for each alternate is the net addition to or deduction from the Contract Sum to incorporate alternate into the Work. No other adjustments are made to the Contract Sum.

1.4 PROCEDURES

A. Coordination: Modify or adjust affected adjacent work as necessary to completely integrate work of the alternate into Project.

1. Include as part of each alternate, miscellaneous devices, accessory objects, and similar items incidental to or required for a complete installation whether or not indicated as part of alternate.

B. Notification: Immediately following award of the Contract, notify each party involved, in writing, of the status of each alternate. Indicate if alternates have been accepted, rejected, or deferred for later consideration. Include a complete description of negotiated modifications to alternates.

C. Execute accepted alternates under the same conditions as other work of the Contract. No extensions of time shall be granted for accepted alternates.

D. Schedule: A schedule of alternates is included at the end of this Section. Specification Sections referenced in schedule contain requirements for materials necessary to achieve the work described under each alternate.

ALTERNATES



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SCHEDULE OF ALTERNATES

A. DEDUCT ALTERNATE NO. 1: Generator: Deduct from the Base Bid the provision of the generator. Installation is still provided as part of the Base Bid however the generator will be Owner-provided.

B. DEDUCT ALTERNATE NO. 2: UPS: Deduct from the Base Bid the provision of the UPS. Installation is still provided as part of the Base Bid however the UPS will be Owner-provided.


SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES


SECTION 012500 - SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for substitutions.

B. Related Sections:

1. Section 016000 "Product Requirements" for requirements for submitting comparable product submittals for products by listed manufacturers.

2. Divisions 02 through 49 Sections for specific requirements and limitations for substitutions.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction from those required by the Contract Documents and proposed by Contractor.

1. Substitutions for Cause: Changes proposed by Contractor that are required due to changed Project conditions, such as unavailability of product, regulatory changes, or unavailability of required warranty terms.

2. Substitutions for Convenience: Changes proposed by Contractor or Owner that are not required in order to meet other Project requirements but may offer advantage to Contractor or Owner.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Substitution Requests: Submit three (3) copies of each request for consideration. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles.

1. Substitution Request Form: Use CSI Form 1.5C, 13.1A or comparable form. 2. Documentation: Show compliance with requirements for substitutions and the following,

as applicable:

a. Statement indicating why specified product or fabrication or installation cannot be provided, if applicable.

b. Coordination information, including a list of changes or modifications needed to other parts of the Work and to construction performed by Owner and separate contractors, that will be necessary to accommodate proposed substitution.

c. Detailed, SIDE-BY-SIDE comparison of significant qualities of proposed substitution with those of the Work specified. Include annotated copy of applicable specification section. Significant qualities may include attributes such



as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, sustainable design characteristics, warranties, and specific features and requirements indicated. Indicate deviations, if any, from the Work specified.

d. Product Data, including drawings and descriptions of products and fabrication and installation procedures.

e. Samples, where applicable or requested. f. Certificates and qualification data, where applicable or requested. g. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and

addresses and names and addresses of Architects and Owners. h. Material test reports from a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test

results for compliance with requirements indicated. i. Research reports evidencing compliance with building code in effect for Project,

from ICC-ES. j. Detailed comparison of Contractor's construction schedule using proposed

substitution with products specified for the Work, including effect on the overall Contract Time. If specified product or method of construction cannot be provided within the Contract Time, include letter from manufacturer, on manufacturer's letterhead, stating date of receipt of purchase order, lack of availability, or delays in delivery.

k. Cost information, including a proposal of change, if any, in the Contract Sum. l. Contractor's certification that proposed substitution complies with requirements in

the Contract Documents except as indicated in substitution request, is compatible with related materials, and is appropriate for applications indicated.

m. Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may subsequently become necessary because of failure of proposed substitution to produce indicated results.

3. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or documentation for evaluation within seven (7) days of receipt of a request for substitution. Architect will notify Contractor of acceptance or rejection of proposed substitution within fifteen (15) days of receipt of request, or seven (7) days of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later.

a. Forms of Acceptance: Change Order, Construction Change Directive, or Architect's Supplemental Instructions for minor changes in the Work.

b. Use product specified if Architect does not issue a decision on use of a proposed substitution within time allocated.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Compatibility of Substitutions: Investigate and document compatibility of proposed substitution with related products and materials. Engage qualified testing agency to perform compatibility tests recommended by manufacturers.

1.6 PROCEDURES

A. Coordination: Modify or adjust affected work as necessary to integrate work of the approved substitutions.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SUBSTITUTIONS

A. Procurement Substitution Request: Submit to Architect seven (7) days prior to date of bid opening.

B. Substitutions for Cause: Submit requests for substitution immediately upon discovery of need for change, but not later than fifteen (15) days prior to time required for preparation and review of related submittals.

1. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements:

a. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce indicated results.

b. Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted. c. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's construction schedule. d. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having

jurisdiction. e. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work. f. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work. g. Requested substitution provides specified warranty. h. If requested substitution involves more than one (1) contractor, requested

substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is compatible with other products, and is acceptable to all contractors involved.

C. Substitutions for Convenience: Architect will consider requests for substitution if received within sixty (60) days after the Notice to Proceed. Requests received after that time may be considered or rejected at discretion of Architect.

1. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements:

a. Requested substitution offers Owner a substantial advantage in cost, time, energy conservation, or other considerations, after deducting additional responsibilities Owner must assume. Owner's additional responsibilities may include compensation to Architect for redesign and evaluation services, increased cost of other construction by Owner, and similar considerations.

b. Requested substitution does not require extensive revisions to the Contract Documents.

c. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce indicated results.

d. Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted. e. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's construction schedule.



f. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having jurisdiction.

g. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work. h. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work. i. Requested substitution provides specified warranty. j. If requested substitution involves more than one (1) contractor, requested

substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is compatible with other products, and is acceptable to all contractors involved.



CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES


SECTION 012600 - CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for handling and processing Contract modifications.


1. Section 016000 "Product Requirements" for administrative procedures for handling requests for substitutions made after Contract award.

1.3 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK

A. Architect will issue supplemental instructions authorizing minor changes in the Work, not involving adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time, on AIA Document G710, "Architect's Supplemental Instructions."

1.4 PROPOSAL REQUESTS

A. Owner-Initiated Proposal Requests: Architect will issue a detailed description of proposed changes in the Work that may require adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. If necessary, the description will include supplemental or revised Drawings and Specifications.

1. Proposal Requests issued by Architect are not instructions either to stop work in progress or to execute the proposed change.

2. Within time specified in Proposal Request or twenty (20) days, when not otherwise specified, after receipt of Proposal Request, submit a quotation estimating cost adjustments to the Contract Sum and the Contract Time necessary to execute the change.

a. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities.

b. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts.

c. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change. d. Include an updated Contractor's construction schedule that indicates the effect of

the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time.

e. Quotation Form: Use forms acceptable to Architect.

CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES


B. Contractor-Initiated Proposals: If latent or changed conditions require modifications to the Contract, Contractor may initiate a claim by submitting a request for a change to the Architect.

1. Include a statement outlining reasons for the change and the effect of the change on the Work. Provide a complete description of the proposed change. Indicate the effect of the proposed change on the Contract Sum and the Contract Time.

2. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities.

3. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts.

4. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change. 5. Include an updated Contractor's construction schedule that indicates the effect of the

change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time.

6. Comply with requirements in Section 012500 "Substitution Procedures" if the proposed change requires substitution of one (1) product or system for product or system specified.

7. Proposal Request Form: Use form acceptable to Architect.

1.5 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES

A. On Owner's approval of a Proposal Request, Architect will issue a Change Order for signatures of Owner and Contractor on AIA Document G701.

1.6 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVE

A. Construction Change Directive: Architect may issue a Construction Change Directive on AIA Document G714. Construction Change Directive instructs Contractor to proceed with a change in the Work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order.

1. Construction Change Directive contains a complete description of change in the Work. It also designates method to be followed to determine change in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time.

B. Documentation: Maintain detailed records on a time and material basis of work required by the Construction Change Directive.

1. After completion of change, submit an itemized account and supporting data necessary to substantiate cost and time adjustments to the Contract.




PAYMENT PROCEDURES


SECTION 012900 - PAYMENT PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements necessary to prepare and process Applications for Payment.


1. Section 012600 "Contract Modification Procedures" for administrative procedures for handling changes to the Contract.

2. Section 013200 "Construction Progress Documentation" for administrative requirements governing the preparation and submittal of the Contractor's construction schedule.

3. Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures" for administrative requirements governing the preparation and submittal of the submittal schedule.

1.3 SCHEDULE OF VALUES

A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation of the schedule of values with preparation of Contractor's construction schedule.

1. Correlate line items in the schedule of values with other required administrative forms and schedules, including the following:

a. Application for Payment forms with continuation sheets. b. Submittal schedule. c. Items required to be indicated as separate activities in Contractor's construction

schedule.

2. Submit the schedule of values to Architect at earliest possible date but no later than seven (7) days before the date scheduled for submittal of initial Applications for Payment.

B. Format and Content: Use the Project Manual table of contents as a guide to establish line items for the schedule of values. Provide at least one (1) line item for each Specification Section.

1. Identification: Include the following Project identification on the schedule of values:

a. Project name and location. b. Name of Architect. c. Architect's project number. d. Contractor's name and address. e. Date of submittal.

PAYMENT PROCEDURES


2. Arrange schedule of values consistent with format of AIA Document G703. 3. Provide a breakdown of the Contract Sum in enough detail to facilitate continued

evaluation of Applications for Payment and progress reports. Coordinate with the Project Manual table of contents. Provide multiple line items for principal subcontract amounts in excess of five percent (5%) of Contract Sum.

4. Round amounts to nearest whole dollar; total shall equal the Contract Sum. 5. Provide a separate line item in the schedule of values for each part of the Work where

Applications for Payment may include materials or equipment purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed.

a. Differentiate between items stored on-site and items stored off-site. If required, include evidence of insurance.

6. Provide separate line items in the schedule of values for initial cost of materials, for each subsequent stage of completion, and for total installed value of that part of the Work.

7. Each item in the schedule of values and Applications for Payment shall be complete. Include total cost and proportionate share of general overhead and profit for each item.

a. Temporary facilities and other major cost items that are not direct cost of actual work-in-place may be shown either as separate line items in the schedule of values or distributed as general overhead expense, at Contractor's option.

8. Schedule Updating: Update and resubmit the schedule of values before the next Applications for Payment when Change Orders or Construction Change Directives result in a change in the Contract Sum.

1.4 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT

A. Each Application for Payment shall be consistent with previous applications and payments as certified by Architect and paid for by Owner.

1. Initial Application for Payment, Application for Payment at time of Substantial Completion, and final Application for Payment involve additional requirements.

B. Payment Application Times: The date for each progress payment is indicated in the Agreement between Owner and Contractor. The period of construction work covered by each Application for Payment is the period indicated in the Agreement.

C. Application for Payment Forms: Use AIA Document G702 and AIA Document G703 as form for Applications for Payment.

D. Application Preparation: Complete every entry on form. Notarize and execute by a person authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of Contractor. Architect will return incomplete applications without action.

1. Entries shall match data on the schedule of values and Contractor's construction schedule. Use updated schedules if revisions were made.

2. Include amounts for work completed following previous Application for Payment, whether or not payment has been received. Include only amounts for work completed at time of Application for Payment.

PAYMENT PROCEDURES


3. Include amounts of Change Orders and Construction Change Directives issued before last day of construction period covered by application.

4. Indicate separate amounts for work being carried out under Owner-requested project acceleration.

5. Include updated and approved Contractor’s construction schedule, potential Change Order Log and Product Submittal Log.

E. Stored Materials: Include in Application for Payment amounts applied for materials or equipment purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed. Differentiate between items stored on-site and items stored off-site.

1. Provide certificate of insurance, evidence of transfer of title to Owner, and consent of surety to payment, for stored materials.

2. Provide supporting documentation that verifies amount requested, such as paid invoices. Match amount requested with amounts indicated on documentation; do not include overhead and profit on stored materials.

3. Provide summary documentation for stored materials indicating the following:

a. Materials previously stored and included in previous Applications for Payment. b. Work completed for this Application utilizing previously stored materials. c. Additional materials stored with this Application. d. Total materials remaining stored, including materials with this Application.

F. Transmittal: Submit three (3) signed and notarized original copies of each Application for Payment to Architect by a method ensuring receipt within 24 hours. One (1) copy shall include waivers of lien and similar attachments if required.

1. Transmit each copy with a transmittal form listing attachments and recording appropriate information about application.

G. Waivers of Mechanic's Lien: With each Application for Payment, submit waivers of mechanic's liens from subcontractors, sub-subcontractors, and suppliers for construction period covered by the previous application.

1. Submit partial waivers on each item for amount requested in previous application, after deduction for retainage, on each item.

2. When an application shows completion of an item, submit conditional final or full waivers.

3. Owner reserves the right to designate which entities involved in the Work must submit waivers.

4. Submit final Application for Payment with or preceded by conditional final waivers from every entity involved with performance of the Work covered by the application who is lawfully entitled to a lien.

5. Waiver Forms: Submit waivers of lien on forms, executed in a manner acceptable to Owner.

H. Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or coincide with submittal of first Application for Payment include the following:

1. List of subcontractors. 2. Schedule of values.

PAYMENT PROCEDURES


3. Contractor's construction schedule (preliminary if not final). 4. Products list (preliminary if not final). 5. Schedule of unit prices. 6. Submittal schedule (preliminary if not final). 7. List of Contractor's staff assignments. 8. List of Contractor's principal consultants. 9. Copies of building permits. 10. Copies of authorizations and licenses from authorities having jurisdiction for

performance of the Work. 11. Initial progress report. 12. Report of preconstruction conference. 13. Certificates of insurance and insurance policies. 14. Performance and payment bonds. 15. Data needed to acquire Owner's insurance.

I. Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: After issuing the Certificate of Substantial Completion, submit an Application for Payment showing one hundred percent (100%) completion for portion of the Work claimed as substantially complete.

1. Include documentation supporting claim that the Work is substantially complete and a statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum.

2. This application shall reflect Certificates of Partial Substantial Completion issued previously for Owner occupancy of designated portions of the Work.

J. Final Payment Application: Submit final Application for Payment with releases and supporting documentation not previously submitted and accepted, including, but not limited, to the following:

1. Evidence of completion of Project closeout requirements. 2. Insurance certificates for products and completed operations where required and proof

that taxes, fees, and similar obligations were paid. 3. Updated final statement, accounting for final changes to the Contract Sum. 4. AIA Document G706, "Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims." 5. AIA Document G706A, "Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens." 6. AIA Document G707, "Consent of Surety to Final Payment." 7. Evidence that claims have been settled. 8. Final meter readings for utilities, a measured record of stored fuel, and similar data as of

date of Substantial Completion or when Owner took possession of and assumed responsibility for corresponding elements of the Work.

9. Final liquidated damages settlement statement.




PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION


SECTION 013100 - PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on Project including, but not limited to, the following:

1. General project coordination procedures. 2. Administrative and supervisory personnel. 3. Coordination drawings. 4. Requests for Information (RFIs). 5. Project meetings.

B. Each contractor shall participate in coordination requirements. Certain areas of responsibility are assigned to a specific contractor.


1. Section 013200 "Construction Progress Documentation" for preparing and submitting Contractor's construction schedule.

2. Section 017300 "Execution" for procedures for coordinating general installation and field-engineering services, including establishment of benchmarks and control points.

3. Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures" for coordinating closeout of the Contract.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. RFI: Request from Owner, Architect, or Contractor seeking information from each other during construction.

1.4 COORDINATION

A. Coordination: Coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate construction operations, included in different Sections, that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation.

1. Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results where installation of one (1) part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before or after its own installation.

2. Coordinate installation of different components to ensure maximum performance and accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair.

3. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation.



B. Prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special procedures required for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and list of attendees at meetings.

1. Prepare similar memoranda for Owner and separate Contractors if coordination of their Work is required.

C. Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative procedures with other construction activities to avoid conflicts and to ensure orderly progress of the Work. Such administrative activities include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Preparation of Contractor's construction schedule. 2. Preparation of the schedule of values. 3. Installation and removal of temporary facilities and controls. 4. Delivery and processing of submittals. 5. Progress meetings. 6. Pre-installation conferences. 7. Startup and adjustment of systems. 8. Project closeout activities.

D. Conservation: Coordinate construction activities to ensure that operations are carried out with consideration given to conservation of energy, water, and materials. Coordinate use of temporary utilities to minimize waste.

1. Salvage materials and equipment involved in performance of, but not actually incorporated into, the Work. Refer to other Sections for disposition of salvaged materials that are designated as Owner's property.

1.5 COORDINATION DRAWINGS

A. Coordination Drawings, General: Prepare coordination drawings in accordance with requirements in individual Sections, where installation is not completely shown on Shop Drawings, where limited space availability necessitates coordination, or if coordination is required to facilitate integration of products and materials fabricated or installed by more than one (1) entity.

1. Content: Project-specific information, drawn accurately to a scale large enough to indicate and resolve conflicts. Do not base coordination drawings on standard printed data. Include the following information, as applicable:

a. Use applicable Drawings as a basis for preparation of coordination drawings. Prepare sections, elevations, and details as needed to describe relationship of various systems and components.

b. Coordinate the addition of trade-specific information to the coordination drawings by multiple Contractors in a sequence that best provides for coordination of the information and resolution of conflicts between installed components before submitting for review.

c. Indicate functional and spatial relationships of components of architectural, mechanical, and electrical systems.

d. Indicate space requirements for routine maintenance and for anticipated replacement of components during the life of the installation.



e. Show location and size of access doors required for access to concealed dampers, valves, and other controls.

f. Indicate required installation sequences. g. Indicate dimensions shown on the Drawings. Specifically note dimensions that

appear to be in conflict with submitted equipment and minimum clearance requirements. Provide alternate sketches to Architect indicating proposed resolution of such conflicts. Minor dimension changes and difficult installations will not be considered changes to the Contract.

B. Coordination Drawing Organization: Organize coordination drawings as follows:

1. Floor Plans and Reflected Ceiling Plans: Show architectural and structural elements, and mechanical, plumbing, fire protection, fire alarm, and electrical Work. Show locations of visible ceiling-mounted devices relative to acoustical ceiling grid. Supplement plan drawings with section drawings where required to adequately represent the Work.

2. Plenum Space: Indicate subframing for support of ceiling and wall systems, mechanical and electrical equipment, and related Work. Locate components within ceiling plenum to accommodate layout of light fixtures indicated on Drawings. Indicate areas of conflict between light fixtures and other components.

3. Mechanical Rooms: Provide coordination drawings for mechanical rooms showing plans and elevations of mechanical, plumbing, fire protection, fire alarm, and electrical equipment.

4. Structural Penetrations: Indicate penetrations and openings required for all disciplines. 5. Mechanical and Plumbing Work: Show the following:

a. Sizes and bottom elevations of ductwork, piping, and conduit runs, including insulation, bracing, flanges, and support systems.

b. Dimensions of major components, such as dampers, valves, diffusers, access doors, cleanouts, and electrical distribution equipment.

c. Fire-rated enclosures around ductwork.

6. Electrical Work: Show the following:

a. Runs of vertical and horizontal conduit 1¼-inch-diameter and larger. b. Light fixture, exit light, emergency battery pack, smoke detector, and other fire

alarm locations. c. Panel board, switch board, switchgear, transformer, busway, generator, and motor

control center locations. d. Location of pull boxes and junction boxes, dimensioned from column center lines.

7. Fire Protection System: Show the following:

a. Locations of standpipes, mains piping, branch lines, pipe drops, and sprinkler heads.

8. Review: Architect will review coordination drawings to confirm that the Work is being coordinated, but not for the details of the coordination, which are the Contractor's responsibility. If the Architect determines that the coordination drawings are not being prepared in sufficient scope or detail, or are otherwise deficient, the Architect will so inform the Contractor, who shall make changes as directed and resubmit.



9. Coordination Drawing Prints: Prepare coordination drawing prints in accordance with requirements of Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures."

1.6 KEY PERSONNEL

A. Key Personnel Names: Within fifteen (15) days of starting construction operations, submit a list of key personnel assignments, including superintendent and other personnel in attendance at Project site. Identify individuals and their duties and responsibilities; list addresses and telephone numbers, including home, office, and cellular telephone numbers and email addresses. Provide names, addresses, and telephone numbers of individuals assigned as standbys in the absence of individuals assigned to Project.

1. Post copies of list in project meeting room, in temporary field office, and by each temporary telephone. Keep list current at all times.

1.7 REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION (RFIs)

A. General: Immediately on discovery of the need for additional information or interpretation of the Contract Documents, Contractor shall prepare and submit an RFI in the form specified.

1. Architect will return RFIs submitted to Architect by other entities controlled by Contractor with no response.

2. Coordinate and submit RFIs in a prompt manner so as to avoid delays in Contractor's work or work of subcontractors.

B. Content of the RFI: Include a detailed, legible description of item needing information or interpretation and the following:

1. Project name. 2. Project number. 3. Date. 4. Name of Contractor. 5. Name of Architect. 6. RFI number, numbered sequentially. 7. RFI subject. 8. Specification Section number and title and related paragraphs, as appropriate. 9. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. 10. Field dimensions and conditions, as appropriate. 11. Contractor's suggested resolution. If Contractor's solution(s) impacts the Contract Time

or the Contract Sum, Contractor shall state impact in the RFI. 12. Contractor's signature. 13. Attachments: Include sketches, descriptions, measurements, photos, Product Data, Shop

Drawings, coordination drawings, and other information necessary to fully describe items needing interpretation.

a. Include dimensions, thicknesses, structural grid references, and details of affected materials, assemblies, and attachments on attached sketches.

C. RFI Forms: AIA Document G716 or comparable form.



D. Architect's Action: Architect will review each RFI, determine action required, and respond. Allow seven (7) working days for Architect's response for each RFI. RFIs received by Architect after 1:00 p.m. will be considered as received the following working day.

1. The following RFIs will be returned without action:

a. Requests for approval of submittals. b. Requests for approval of substitutions. c. Requests for coordination information already indicated in the Contract

Documents. d. Requests for adjustments in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum. e. Requests for interpretation of Architect's actions on submittals. f. Incomplete RFIs or inaccurately prepared RFIs.

2. Architect's action may include a request for additional information, in which case Architect's time for response will date from time of receipt of additional information.

3. Architect's action on RFIs that may result in a change to the Contract Time or the Contract Sum may be eligible for Contractor to submit Change Proposal according to Section 012600 "Contract Modification Procedures."

a. If Contractor believes the RFI response warrants change in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum, notify Architect in writing within ten (10) days of receipt of the RFI response.

E. On receipt of Architect's action, update the RFI log and immediately distribute the RFI response to affected parties. Review response and notify Architect within seven (7) days if Contractor disagrees with response.

F. RFI Log: Prepare, maintain, and submit a tabular log of RFIs organized by the RFI number. Submit log weekly. Include the following:

1. Project name. 2. Name and address of Contractor. 3. Name and address of Architect. 4. RFI number including RFIs that were dropped and not submitted. 5. RFI description. 6. Date the RFI was submitted. 7. Date Architect's response was received. 8. Identification of related Minor Change in the Work, Construction Change Directive, and

Proposal Request, as appropriate.

1.8 PROJECT MEETINGS

A. General: Schedule and conduct meetings and conferences at Project site, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Attendees: Inform participants and others involved, and individuals whose presence is required, of date and time of each meeting. Notify Owner and Architect of scheduled meeting dates and times.

2. Agenda: Prepare the meeting agenda. Distribute the agenda to all invited attendees.



3. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting meeting will record significant discussions and agreements achieved. Distribute the meeting minutes to everyone concerned, including Owner, and Architect, within three (3) days of the meeting.

B. Preconstruction Conference: Schedule and conduct a preconstruction conference before starting construction, at a time convenient to Owner and Architect, but no later than fifteen (15) days after execution of the Agreement.

1. Conduct the conference to review responsibilities and personnel assignments. 2. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Construction Administrator, Architect,

and their consultants; Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; suppliers; and other concerned parties shall attend the conference. Participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.

3. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress, including the following:

a. Tentative construction schedule. b. Phasing. c. Critical work sequencing and long-lead items. d. Designation of key personnel and their duties. e. Lines of communications. f. Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Orders. g. Procedures for RFIs. h. Procedures for testing and inspecting. i. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment. j. Distribution of the Contract Documents. k. Submittal procedures. l. Preparation of record documents. m. Work restrictions. n. Working hours. o. Owner's occupancy requirements. p. Responsibility for temporary facilities and controls. q. Procedures for moisture and mold control. r. Procedures for disruptions and shutdowns. s. Parking availability. t. Office, work, and storage areas. u. Equipment deliveries and priorities. v. First aid. w. Security. x. Progress cleaning.

4. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting meeting will record and distribute meeting minutes.

C. Preinstallation Conferences: Conduct a preinstallation conference at Project site before each construction activity that requires coordination with other construction.

1. Attendees: Installer and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators involved in or affected by the installation and its coordination or integration with other materials and installations that have preceded or will follow, shall attend the meeting. Advise Architect of scheduled meeting dates.



2. Agenda: Review progress of other construction activities and preparations for the particular activity under consideration, including requirements for the following:

a. Contract Documents. b. Options. c. Related RFIs. d. Related Change Orders. e. Purchases. f. Deliveries. g. Submittals. h. Review of mockups. i. Possible conflicts. j. Compatibility problems. k. Time schedules. l. Weather limitations. m. Manufacturer's written recommendations. n. Warranty requirements. o. Compatibility of materials. p. Acceptability of substrates. q. Temporary facilities and controls. r. Space and access limitations. s. Regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. t. Testing and inspecting requirements. u. Installation procedures. v. Coordination with other work. w. Required performance results. x. Protection of adjacent work. y. Protection of construction and personnel.

3. Record significant conference discussions, agreements, and disagreements, including required corrective measures and actions.

4. Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to other parties requiring information.

5. Do not proceed with installation if the conference cannot be successfully concluded. Initiate whatever actions are necessary to resolve impediments to performance of the Work and reconvene the conference at earliest feasible date.

D. Project Closeout Conference: Schedule and conduct a Project closeout conference, at a time convenient to Owner and Architect, but no later than thirty (30) days prior to the scheduled date of Substantial Completion.

1. Conduct the conference to review requirements and responsibilities related to Project closeout.

2. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Architect, and their consultants; Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; suppliers; and other concerned parties shall attend the meeting. Participants at the meeting shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.

3. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect or delay Project closeout, including the following:

a. Preparation of record documents.



b. Procedures required prior to inspection for Substantial Completion and for final inspection for acceptance.

c. Submittal of written warranties. d. Requirements for preparing operations and maintenance data. e. Requirements for demonstration and training. f. Preparation of Contractor's punch list. g. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment at Substantial Completion and

for final payment. h. Submittal procedures. i. Installation of Owner's furniture, fixtures, and equipment. j. Responsibility for removing temporary facilities and controls.

4. Minutes: Entity conducting meeting will record and distribute meeting minutes.

E. Progress Meetings: Conduct progress meetings at biweekly intervals.

1. Coordinate dates of meetings with preparation of payment requests. 2. Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner and Architect, each Contractor,

subcontractor, supplier, and other entity concerned with current progress or involved in planning, coordination, or performance of future activities shall be represented at these meetings. All participants at the meeting shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.

3. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of previous progress meeting. Review other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as appropriate to status of Project.

a. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting. Determine whether each activity is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind schedule, in relation to Contractor's construction schedule. Determine how construction behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that current and subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time.

1) Review schedule for next period.

b. Review present and future needs of each entity present, including the following:

1) Interface requirements. 2) Sequence of operations. 3) Status of submittals. 4) Deliveries. 5) Off-site fabrication. 6) Access. 7) Site utilization. 8) Temporary facilities and controls. 9) Progress cleaning. 10) Quality and work standards. 11) Status of correction of deficient items. 12) Field observations. 13) Status of RFIs. 14) Status of proposal requests.



15) Pending changes. 16) Status of Change Orders. 17) Pending claims and disputes. 18) Documentation of information for payment requests.

4. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting the meeting will record and distribute the meeting minutes to each party present and to parties requiring information.

a. Schedule Updating: Revise Contractor's construction schedule after each progress meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue revised schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting.

F. Coordination Meetings: Conduct Project coordination meetings at required intervals. Project coordination meetings are in addition to specific meetings held for other purposes, such as progress meetings and preinstallation conferences.

1. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of the previous coordination meeting. Review other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as appropriate to status of Project.

a. Combined Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last coordination meeting. Determine whether each contract is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind schedule, in relation to combined Contractor's construction schedule. Determine how construction behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that current and subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time.

b. Schedule Updating: Revise combined Contractor's construction schedule after each coordination meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue revised schedule concurrently with report of each meeting.

c. Review present and future needs of each contractor present, including the following:

1) Interface requirements. 2) Sequence of operations. 3) Status of submittals. 4) Deliveries. 5) Off-site fabrication. 6) Access. 7) Site utilization. 8) Temporary facilities and controls. 9) Work hours. 10) Hazards and risks. 11) Progress cleaning. 12) Quality and work standards. 13) Change Orders.

2. Reporting: Record meeting results and distribute copies to everyone in attendance and to others affected by decisions or actions resulting from each meeting.






CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION


SECTION 013200 - CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for documenting the progress of construction during performance of the Work, including the following:

1. Contractor's construction schedule. 2. Daily construction reports. 3. Material location reports. 4. Field condition reports. 5. Special reports.


1. Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures" for submitting schedules and reports. 2. Section 014000 "Quality Requirements" for submitting a schedule of tests and

inspections.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Activity: A discrete part of a project that can be identified for planning, scheduling, monitoring, and controlling the construction project. Activities included in a construction schedule consume time and resources.

1. Critical Activity: An activity on the critical path that must start and finish on the planned early start and finish times.

2. Predecessor Activity: An activity that precedes another activity in the network. 3. Successor Activity: An activity that follows another activity in the network.

B. Cost Loading: The allocation of the schedule of values for the completion of an activity as scheduled. The sum of costs for all activities must equal the total Contract Sum, unless otherwise approved by Architect.

C. Critical Path: The longest connected chain of interdependent activities through the network schedule that establishes the minimum overall Project duration and contains no float.

D. Event: The starting or ending point of an activity.

E. Float: The measure of leeway in starting and completing an activity.



1. Float time is not for the exclusive use or benefit of either Owner or Contractor, but is a jointly owned, expiring Project resource available to both parties as needed to meet schedule milestones and Contract completion date.

2. Free float is the amount of time an activity can be delayed without adversely affecting the early start of the successor activity.

3. Total float is the measure of leeway in starting or completing an activity without adversely affecting the planned Project completion date.

F. Resource Loading: The allocation of manpower and equipment necessary for the completion of an activity as scheduled.

1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Format for Submittals: Submit required submittals in the following format:

1. PDF electronic file.

B. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Initial schedule, of size required to display entire schedule for entire construction period.

1. Submit a working electronic copy of schedule, using software indicated, and labeled to comply with requirements for submittals. Include type of schedule (initial or updated) and date on label.

C. Daily Construction Reports: Submit at weekly intervals.

D. Material Location Reports: Submit at weekly intervals.

E. Field Condition Reports: Submit at time of discovery of differing conditions.

F. Special Reports: Submit at time of unusual event.


A. Prescheduling Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Section 013100 "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures related to the Contractor's construction schedule, including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Review software limitations and content and format for reports. 2. Discuss constraints, including phasing, work stages and area separations. 3. Review delivery dates for Owner-furnished products. 4. Review schedule for work of Owner's separate contracts. 5. Review time required for review of submittals and resubmittals. 6. Review requirements for tests and inspections by independent testing and inspecting

agencies. 7. Review time required for completion and startup procedures. 8. Review and finalize list of construction activities to be included in schedule. 9. Review submittal requirements and procedures. 10. Review procedures for updating schedule.



1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate preparation and processing of schedules and reports with performance of construction activities and with scheduling and reporting of separate contractors.

B. Coordinate Contractor's construction schedule with the schedule of values, list of subcontracts, submittal schedule, progress reports, payment requests, and other required schedules and reports.

1. Secure time commitments for performing critical elements of the Work from entities involved.

2. Coordinate each construction activity in the network with other activities and schedule them in proper sequence.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE, GENERAL

A. Time Frame: Extend schedule from date established for the Notice to Proceed to date of Substantial Completion.

1. Contract completion date shall not be changed by submission of a schedule that shows an early completion date, unless specifically authorized by Change Order.

B. Activities: Treat each story or separate area as a separate numbered activity for each principal element of the Work. Comply with the following:

1. Activity Duration: Define activities so no activity is longer than twenty (20) days, unless specifically allowed by Architect.

2. Procurement Activities: Include procurement process activities for the following long lead items and major items, requiring a cycle of more than sixty (60) days, as separate activities in schedule. Procurement cycle activities include, but are not limited to, submittals, approvals, purchasing, fabrication, and delivery.

3. Submittal Review Time: Include review and resubmittal times indicated in Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures" in schedule. Coordinate submittal review times in Contractor's construction schedule with submittal schedule.

4. Startup and Testing Time: Include not less than fifteen (15) days for startup and testing. 5. Substantial Completion: Indicate completion in advance of date established for

Substantial Completion and allow time for Architect's administrative procedures necessary for certification of Substantial Completion.

6. Punch List and Final Completion: Include not more than thirty (30) days for punch list and final completion.

C. Constraints: Include constraints and work restrictions indicated in the Contract Documents and as follows in schedule and show how the sequence of the Work is affected.

1. Phasing: Arrange list of activities on schedule by phase. 2. Work Restrictions: Show the effect of the following items on the schedule:

a. Coordination with existing construction.



b. Uninterruptible services. c. Use of premises restrictions. d. Provisions for future construction. e. Seasonal variations. f. Environmental control.

3. Work Stages: Indicate important stages of construction for each major portion of the Work, including, but not limited to, the following:

a. Subcontract awards. b. Submittals. c. Purchases. d. Mockups. e. Fabrication. f. Sample testing. g. Deliveries. h. Installation. i. Tests and inspections. j. Adjusting. k. Curing. l. Startup and placement into final use and operation.

4. Construction Areas: Identify each major area of construction for each major portion of the Work. Indicate where each construction activity within a major area must be sequenced or integrated with other construction activities to provide for the following:

a. Completion of mechanical installation. b. Completion of electrical installation. c. Substantial Completion.

D. Milestones: Include milestones indicated in the Contract Documents in schedule, including, but not limited to, the Notice to Proceed, Substantial Completion, and final completion.

E. Cost Correlation: At the head of schedule, provide a cost correlation line, indicating planned and actual costs. On the line, show dollar volume of the Work performed as of dates used for preparation of payment requests.

1. Refer to Section 012900 "Payment Procedures" for cost reporting and payment procedures.

F. Upcoming Work Summary: Prepare summary report indicating activities scheduled to occur or commence prior to submittal of next schedule update. Summarize the following issues:

1. Unresolved issues. 2. Unanswered RFIs. 3. Rejected or unreturned submittals. 4. Notations on returned submittals.

G. Recovery Schedule: When periodic update indicates the Work is fourteen (14) or more calendar days behind the current approved schedule, submit a separate recovery schedule indicating means by which Contractor intends to regain compliance with the schedule. Indicate changes to



working hours, working days, crew sizes, and equipment required to achieve compliance, and date by which recovery will be accomplished.

H. Computer Scheduling Software: Prepare schedules using current version of a program that has been developed specifically to manage construction schedules.

2.2 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE (GANTT CHART)

A. Gantt-Chart Schedule: Submit a comprehensive, fully developed, horizontal Gantt-chart-type, Contractor's construction schedule within seven (7) days of date established for the Notice to Proceed.

B. Preparation: Indicate each significant construction activity separately. Identify first workday of each week with a continuous vertical line.

1. For construction activities that require three months or longer to complete, indicate an estimated completion percentage in ten percent (10%) increments within time bar.

2.3 REPORTS

A. Daily Construction Reports: Prepare a daily construction report recording the following information concerning events at Project site:

1. List of subcontractors at Project site. 2. List of separate contractors at Project site. 3. Approximate count of personnel at Project site. 4. Equipment at Project site. 5. Material deliveries. 6. High and low temperatures and general weather conditions, including presence of rain or

snow. 7. Accidents. 8. Meetings and significant decisions. 9. Unusual events (refer to special reports). 10. Stoppages, delays, shortages, and losses. 11. Meter readings and similar recordings. 12. Emergency procedures. 13. Orders and requests of authorities having jurisdiction. 14. Change Orders received and implemented. 15. Construction Change Directives received and implemented. 16. Services connected and disconnected. 17. Equipment or system tests and startups. 18. Partial completions and occupancies. 19. Substantial Completions authorized.

B. Material Location Reports: At weekly intervals, prepare and submit a comprehensive list of materials delivered to and stored at Project site. List shall be cumulative, showing materials previously reported plus items recently delivered. Include with list a statement of progress on and delivery dates for materials or items of equipment fabricated or stored away from Project site.



C. Field Condition Reports: Immediately on discovery of a difference between field conditions and the Contract Documents, prepare and submit a detailed report. Submit with a Request for Information. Include a detailed description of the differing conditions, together with recommendations for changing the Contract Documents.

2.4 SPECIAL REPORTS

A. General: Submit special reports directly to Owner within one (1) day of an occurrence. Distribute copies of report to parties affected by the occurrence.

B. Reporting Unusual Events: When an event of an unusual and significant nature occurs at Project site, whether or not related directly to the Work, prepare and submit a special report. List chain of events, persons participating, response by Contractor's personnel, evaluation of results or effects, and similar pertinent information. Advise Owner in advance when these events are known or predictable.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE

A. Contractor's Construction Schedule Updating: At monthly intervals, update schedule to reflect actual construction progress and activities. Issue schedule one (1) week before each regularly scheduled progress meeting.

1. Revise schedule immediately after each meeting or other activity where revisions have been recognized or made. Issue updated schedule concurrently with the report of each such meeting.

2. Include a report with updated schedule that indicates every change, including, but not limited to, changes in logic, durations, actual starts and finishes, and activity durations.

3. As the Work progresses, indicate final completion percentage for each activity.

B. Distribution: Distribute copies of approved schedule to Architect, Construction Administrator, Owner, separate contractors, testing and inspecting agencies, and other parties identified by Contractor with a need-to-know schedule responsibility.

1. Post copies in Project meeting rooms and temporary field offices. 2. When revisions are made, distribute updated schedules to the same parties and post in the

same locations. Delete parties from distribution when they have completed their assigned portion of the Work and are no longer involved in performance of construction activities.


PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION


SECTION 013233 - PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for the following:

1. Periodic construction photographs.


1. Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures" for submitting photographic documentation. 2. Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures" for submitting photographic documentation as

project record documents at Project closeout.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PHOTOGRAPHIC MEDIA

A. Digital Images: Provide images in JPG format, produced by a digital camera with minimum sensor size of eight (8) megapixels, and at an image resolution of not less than 1600 by 1200 pixels and 400 dpi.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS

A. General: Take photographs using the maximum range of depth of field, and that are in focus, to clearly show the Work. Photographs with blurry or out-of-focus areas will not be accepted.

1. Maintain key plan with each set of construction photographs that identifies each photographic location.

B. Digital Images: Submit digital images exactly as originally recorded in the digital camera, without alteration, manipulation, editing, or modifications using image-editing software.

1. Date and Time: Include date and time in file name for each image. 2. Field Office Images: Maintain one set of images accessible in the field office at Project

site, available at all times for reference. Identify images in the same manner as those submitted to Architect.

PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION


C. Periodic Construction Photographs: Take eighteen to twenty (18-20) photographs weekly, with timing each month adjusted to coincide with the cutoff date associated with each Application for Payment. Select vantage points to show status of construction and progress since last photographs were taken.

D. Additional Photographs: Architect may request photographs in addition to periodic photographs specified.

1. In emergency situations, take additional photographs within twenty-four (24) hours of request.

2. Circumstances that could require additional photographs include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Immediate follow-up when on-site events result in construction damage or losses. b. Substantial Completion of a major phase or component of the Work.


SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES


SECTION 013300 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes requirements for the submittal schedule and administrative and procedural requirements for submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and other submittals.


1. Section 012900 "Payment Procedures" for submitting Applications for Payment and the schedule of values.

2. Section 013200 "Construction Progress Documentation" for submitting schedules and reports, including Contractor's construction schedule.

3. Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data" for submitting operation and maintenance manuals.

4. Section 017839 "Project Record Documents" for submitting record Drawings, record Specifications, and record Product Data.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Action Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that require Architect's responsive action. Action submittals are those submittals indicated in individual Specification Sections as action submittals.

B. Informational Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that do not require Architect's responsive action. Submittals may be rejected for not complying with requirements. Informational submittals are those submittals indicated in individual Specification Sections as informational submittals.

C. File Transfer Protocol (FTP): Communications protocol that enables transfer of files to and from another computer over a network and that serves as the basis for standard Internet protocols. An FTP site is a portion of a network located outside of network firewalls within which internal and external users are able to access files.

D. Portable Document Format (PDF): An open standard file format licensed by Adobe Systems used for representing documents in a device-independent and display resolution-independent fixed-layout document format.

1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Submittal Schedule: Submit a schedule of submittals, arranged in chronological order by dates required by construction schedule. Include time required for review, ordering, manufacturing, fabrication, and delivery when establishing dates. Include additional time required for making



corrections or modifications to submittals noted by the Architect and additional time for handling and reviewing submittals required by those corrections.

1. Coordinate submittal schedule with list of subcontracts, the schedule of values, and Contractor's construction schedule.

2. Submit concurrently with Contractor’s construction schedule. Include submittals required during the first sixty (60) days of construction. List those submittals required to maintain orderly progress of the Work and those required early because of long lead time for manufacture or fabrication.

3. Format: Arrange the following information in a tabular format:

a. Scheduled date for first submittal. b. Specification Section number and title. c. Submittal Category: Action, informational. d. Name of subcontractor. e. Description of the Work covered. f. Scheduled date for Architect's final release or approval. g. Scheduled dates for purchasing. h. Scheduled dates for installation.

1.5 SUBMITTAL ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

A. Architect's Digital Data Files: Electronic copies of CAD Drawings of the Contract Drawings will not be provided by Architect for Contractor's use in preparing submittals unless requested and Architect’s user agreement properly completed.

B. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction activities.

1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals, and related activities that require sequential activity.

2. Submit all submittal items required for each Specification Section concurrently unless partial submittals for portions of the Work are indicated on approved submittal schedule.

3. Submit action submittals and informational submittals required by the same Specification Section as separate packages under separate transmittals.

4. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for coordination.

a. Architect reserve the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received.

C. Processing Time: Allow time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as follows. Time for review shall commence on Architect's receipt of submittal. No extension of the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in advance of the Work to permit processing, including resubmittals.

1. Initial Review: Allow ten (10) days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional time if coordination with subsequent submittals is required. Architect will advise Contractor when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination.

2. Resubmittal Review: Allow ten (10) days for review of each resubmittal.



3. Sequential Review: Where sequential review of submittals by Architect's consultants, Owner, or other parties is indicated, allow fifteen (15) days for initial review of each submittal.

D. Identification and Information: Place a permanent label or title block on each paper copy submittal item for identification.

1. Indicate name of firm or entity that prepared each submittal on label or title block. 2. Provide a space on label or beside title block to record Contractor's review and approval

markings and action taken by Architect. 3. Include the following information for processing and recording action taken:

a. Project name. b. Date. c. Name of Architect. d. Name of Contractor. e. Name of subcontractor. f. Name of supplier. g. Name of manufacturer. h. Submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier.

1) Submittal number shall use Specification Section number followed by a decimal point and then a sequential number (e.g., 061000.01). Resubmittals shall include an alphabetic suffix after another decimal point (e.g., 061000.01.A).

i. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section. j. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. k. Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate. l. Other necessary identification.

E. Identification and Information: Identify and incorporate information in each electronic submittal file as follows:

1. Assemble complete submittal package into a single indexed file with links enabling navigation to each item.

2. Name file with submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier.

a. File name shall use project identifier and Specification Section number followed by a decimal point and then a sequential number (e.g., LNHS-061000.01). Resubmittals shall include an alphabetic suffix after another decimal point (e.g., LNHS-061000.01.A).

3. Provide means for insertion to permanently record Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by Architect.

4. Include the following information on an inserted cover sheet:

a. Project name. b. Date. c. Name and address of Architect. d. Name of Contractor.



e. Name of firm or entity that prepared submittal. f. Name of subcontractor. g. Name of supplier. h. Name of manufacturer. i. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section. j. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. k. Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate. l. Related physical samples submitted directly. m. Other necessary identification.

5. Include the following information as keywords in the electronic file metadata:

a. Project name. b. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section. c. Manufacturer name. d. Product name.

F. Options: Identify options requiring selection by the Architect.

G. Deviations: Identify deviations from the Contract Documents on submittals.

H. Additional Paper Copies: Unless additional copies are required for final submittal, and unless Architect observes noncompliance with provisions in the Contract Documents, initial submittal may serve as final submittal.

I. Transmittal: Assemble each submittal individually and appropriately for transmittal and handling. Transmit each submittal using a transmittal form. Architect will return submittals, without review received from sources other than Contractor.

1. Transmittal Form: Provide locations on form for the following information:

a. Project name. b. Date. c. Destination (To:). d. Source (From:). e. Names of subcontractor, manufacturer, and supplier. f. Category and type of submittal. g. Submittal purpose and description. h. Specification Section number and title. i. Indication of full or partial submittal. j. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. k. Transmittal number, numbered consecutively. l. Submittal and transmittal distribution record. m. Remarks. n. Signature of transmitter.

2. On an attached separate sheet, prepared on Contractor's letterhead, record relevant information, requests for data, revisions other than those requested by Architect on previous submittals, and deviations from requirements in the Contract Documents, including minor variations and limitations. Include same identification information as related submittal.



J. Resubmittals: Make resubmittals in same form and number of copies as initial submittal.

1. Note date and content of previous submittal. 2. Note date and content of revision in label or title block and clearly indicate extent of

revision. 3. Resubmit submittals until they are marked with approval notation from Architect's action

stamp.

K. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers, fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms.

L. Use for Construction: Use only final submittals that are marked with approval notation from Architect's action stamp.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

A. General Submittal Procedure Requirements: Prepare and submit submittals required by individual Specification Sections. Types of submittals are indicated in individual Specification Sections.

1. Submit electronic submittals via email as PDF electronic files.

a. Architect will return annotated file. Annotate and retain one (1) copy of file as an electronic Project record document file.

2. Closeout Submittals and Maintenance Material Submittals: Comply with requirements specified in Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures."

3. Certificates and Certifications Submittals: Provide a statement that includes signature of entity responsible for preparing certification. Certificates and certifications shall be signed by an officer or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that entity.

a. Provide a digital signature with digital certificate on electronically submitted certificates and certifications where indicated.

b. Provide a notarized statement on original paper copy certificates and certifications where indicated.

4. Test and Inspection Reports Submittals: Comply with requirements specified in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements."

B. Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and type of product or equipment.

1. If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard published data are not suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data.

2. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable. 3. Include the following information, as applicable:



a. Manufacturer's catalog cuts. b. Manufacturer's product specifications. c. Standard color charts. d. Statement of compliance with specified referenced standards. e. Testing by recognized testing agency. f. Application of testing agency labels and seals. g. Notation of coordination requirements. h. Availability and delivery time information.

4. For equipment, include the following in addition to the above, as applicable:

a. Wiring diagrams showing factory-installed wiring. b. Printed performance curves. c. Operational range diagrams. d. Clearances required to other construction, if not indicated on accompanying Shop

Drawings.

5. Submit Product Data before or concurrent with Samples.

C. Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data.

1. Preparation: Fully illustrate requirements in the Contract Documents. Include the following information, as applicable:

a. Identification of products. b. Schedules. c. Compliance with specified standards. d. Notation of coordination requirements. e. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement. f. Relationship and attachment to adjoining construction clearly indicated. g. Seal and signature of professional engineer if specified.

2. Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size drawings, submit Shop Drawings on sheets at least 8½ by 11 inches but no larger than 30 by 42 inches.

D. Samples: Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a check of these characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics between submittal and actual component as delivered and installed.

1. Transmit Samples that contain multiple, related components such as accessories together in one (1) submittal package.

2. Identification: Attach label on unexposed side of Samples that includes the following:

a. Generic description of Sample. b. Product name and name of manufacturer. c. Sample source. d. Number and title of applicable Specification Section.



3. Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for quality-control comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be used to determine final acceptance of construction associated with each set.

a. Samples that may be incorporated into the Work are indicated in individual Specification Sections. Such Samples must be in an undamaged condition at time of use.

b. Samples not incorporated into the Work, or otherwise designated as Owner's property, are the property of Contractor.

E. Product Schedule: As required in individual Specification Sections, prepare a written summary indicating types of products required for the Work and their intended location. Include the following information in tabular form:

1. Type of product. Include unique identifier for each product indicated in the Contract Documents.

2. Manufacturer and product name, and model number if applicable. 3. Number and name of room or space. 4. Location within room or space.

F. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Comply with requirements specified in Section 013200 "Construction Progress Documentation."

G. Application for Payment: Comply with requirements specified in Section 012900 "Payment Procedures."

H. Schedule of Values: Comply with requirements specified in Section 012900 "Payment Procedures."

I. Subcontract List: Prepare a written summary identifying individuals or firms proposed for each portion of the Work, including those who are to furnish products or equipment fabricated to a special design. Include the following information in tabular form:

1. Name, address, and telephone number of entity performing subcontract or supplying products.

2. Number and title of related Specification Section(s) covered by subcontract. 3. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate, covered by subcontract.

J. Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities and experience of firm or person. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, contact information of Architects and Owners, and other information specified.

K. Welding Certificates: Prepare written certification that welding procedures and personnel comply with requirements in the Contract Documents. Submit record of Welding Procedure Specification and Procedure Qualification Record on American Welding Society (AWS) forms. Include names of firms and personnel certified.

L. Installer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that Installer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents and, where required, is authorized by manufacturer for this specific Project.



M. Manufacturer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Include evidence of manufacturing experience where required.

N. Product Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that product complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.

O. Material Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that material complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.

P. Material Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents.

Q. Product Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating current product produced by manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Base reports on evaluation of tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, or on comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency.

R. Research Reports: Submit written evidence, from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, that product complies with building code in effect for Project. Include the following information:

1. Name of evaluation organization. 2. Date of evaluation. 3. Time period when report is in effect. 4. Product and manufacturers' names. 5. Description of product. 6. Test procedures and results. 7. Limitations of use.

S. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Comply with requirements specified in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements."

T. Preconstruction Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of tests performed before installation of product, for compliance with performance requirements in the Contract Documents.

U. Compatibility Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of compatibility tests performed before installation of product. Include written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion.

V. Field Test Reports: Submit reports indicating and interpreting results of field tests performed either during installation of product or after product is installed in its final location, for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents.

W. Maintenance Data: Comply with requirements specified in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data."



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW

A. Action and Informational Submittals: Review each submittal and check for coordination with other Work of the Contract and for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to Architect.

B. Project Closeout and Maintenance/Material Submittals: Refer to requirements in Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures."

C. Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include Project name and location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name of reviewer, date of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked, and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents.

3.2 ARCHITECT'S ACTION

A. General: Architect will not review submittals that do not bear Contractor's approval stamp and will return them without action.

B. Action Submittals: Architect will review each submittal, make marks to indicate corrections or modifications required, and return it. Architect will stamp each submittal with an action stamp and will mark stamp appropriately to indicate action.

C. Informational Submittals: Architect will review each submittal and will not return it or will return it if it does not comply with requirements. Architect will forward each submittal to appropriate party.

D. Partial submittals prepared for a portion of the Work will be reviewed when use of partial submittals has received prior approval from Architect.

E. Incomplete submittals are not acceptable, will be considered nonresponsive, and will be returned without review.

F. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents may not be reviewed and may be discarded.


QUALITY REQUIREMENTS


SECTION 014000 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and quality control.

B. Testing and inspecting services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the Contract Document requirements.

1. Specific quality-assurance and -control requirements for individual work results are specified in their respective Specification Sections. Requirements in individual Sections may also cover production of standard products.

2. Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's other quality-assurance and quality-control procedures that facilitate compliance with the Contract Document requirements.

3. Requirements for Contractor to provide quality-assurance and quality-control services required by Architect, Owner, or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions of this Section.


1. Divisions 02 through 49 Sections for specific test and inspection requirements.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Quality-Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during execution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and substantiate that proposed construction will comply with requirements.

B. Quality-Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after execution of the Work to evaluate that actual products incorporated into the Work and completed construction comply with requirements. Contractor’s quality-control services do not include contract enforcement activities performed by Architect.

C. Mockups: Full-size physical assemblies that are constructed on-site either as freestanding temporary built elements or as part of permanent construction. Mockups are constructed to verify selections made under sample submittals; to demonstrate aesthetic effects and qualities of materials and execution; to review coordination, testing, or operation; to show interface between dissimilar materials; and to demonstrate compliance with specified installation tolerances.



Mockups are not Samples. Unless otherwise indicated, approved mockups establish the standard by which the Work will be judged.

D. Preconstruction Testing: Tests and inspections performed specifically for the Project before products and materials are incorporated into the Work, to verify performance or compliance with specified criteria.

E. Product Tests: Tests and inspections that are performed by a nationally recognized testing laboratory (NRTL) according to 29 CFR 1910.7, by a testing agency accredited according to NIST's National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program (NVLAP), or by a testing agency qualified to conduct product testing and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, to establish product performance and compliance with specified requirements.

F. Source Quality-Control Tests: Tests and inspections that are performed at the source; for example, plant, mill, factory, or shop.

G. Field Quality-Control Tests: Tests and inspections that are performed on-site for installation of the Work and for completed Work.

H. Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. Testing laboratory shall mean the same as testing agency.

I. Installer/Applicator/Erector: Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an employee, Subcontractor, or Sub-subcontractor, to perform a particular construction operation, including installation, erection, application, and similar operations.

1. Use of trade-specific terminology in referring to a trade or entity does not require that certain construction activities be performed by accredited or unionized individuals, or that requirements specified apply exclusively to specific trade or trades.

J. Experienced: When used with an entity or individual, "experienced" unless otherwise further described means having successfully completed a minimum of five (5) previous projects similar in nature, size, and extent to this Project; being familiar with special requirements indicated; and having complied with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

1.4 DELEGATED-DESIGN SERVICES

A. Performance and Design Criteria: Where professional design services or certifications by a design professional are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents, provide products and systems complying with specific performance and design criteria indicated.

1. If criteria indicated are not sufficient to perform services or certification required, submit a written request for additional information to Architect.

1.5 CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS

A. Conflicting Standards and Other Requirements: If compliance with two (2) or more standards or requirements are specified and the standards or requirements establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, comply with the most stringent requirement. Refer conflicting requirements that are different, but apparently equal, to Architect for direction before proceeding.



B. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits. To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as appropriate, for the context of requirements. Refer uncertainties to Architect for a decision before proceeding.


A. Shop Drawings: For mockups.

1. Include plans, sections, and elevations, indicating materials and size of mockup construction.

2. Indicate manufacturer and model number of individual components. 3. Provide axonometric drawings for conditions difficult to illustrate in two (2) dimensions.

B. Delegated-Design Services Submittal: In addition to Shop Drawings, Product Data, and other required submittals, submit a statement signed and sealed by the responsible design professional, for each product and system specifically assigned to Contractor to be designed or certified by a design professional, indicating that the products and systems are in compliance with performance and design criteria indicated. Include list of codes, loads, and other factors used in performing these services.


A. Contractor's Quality-Control Plan: For quality-assurance and quality-control activities and responsibilities.

B. Qualification Data: For Contractor's quality-control personnel.

C. Contractor's Statement of Responsibility: When required by authorities having jurisdiction, submit copy of written statement of responsibility submitted to authorities having jurisdiction before starting work on the following systems.

1. Seismic-force-resisting system, designated seismic system, or component listed in the Statement of Special Inspections.

2. Main wind-force-resisting system or a wind-resisting component listed in the Statement of Special Inspections.

D. Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agencies specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include proof of qualifications in the form of a recent report on the inspection of the testing agency by a recognized authority.

E. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare in tabular form and include the following:

1. Specification Section number and title. 2. Entity responsible for performing tests and inspections. 3. Description of test and inspection. 4. Identification of applicable standards. 5. Identification of test and inspection methods. 6. Number of tests and inspections required.



7. Time schedule or time span for tests and inspections. 8. Requirements for obtaining samples. 9. Unique characteristics of each quality-control service.

F. Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports and documents as specified.

G. Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Owner's record, submit copies of permits, licenses, certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee payments, judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents established for compliance with standards and regulations bearing on performance of the Work.

1.8 CONTRACTOR'S QUALITY-CONTROL PLAN

A. Quality-Control Plan, General: Submit quality-control plan within ten (10) days of Notice to Proceed, and not less than five (5) days prior to preconstruction conference. Submit in format acceptable to Architect. Identify personnel, procedures, controls, instructions, tests, records, and forms to be used to carry out Contractor's quality-assurance and quality-control responsibilities. Coordinate with Contractor's construction schedule.

B. Quality-Control Personnel Qualifications: Engage qualified personnel trained and experienced in managing and executing quality-assurance and quality-control procedures similar in nature and extent to those required for Project.

C. Submittal Procedure: Describe procedures for ensuring compliance with requirements through review and management of submittal process. Indicate qualifications of personnel responsible for submittal review.

D. Testing and Inspection: Include in quality-control plan a comprehensive schedule of Work requiring testing or inspection, including the following:

1. Contractor-performed tests and inspections including subcontractor-performed tests and inspections. Include required tests and inspections and Contractor-elected tests and inspections. Distinguish source quality-control tests and inspections from field quality-control tests and inspections.

2. Special inspections required by authorities having jurisdiction and indicated on the "Statement of Special Inspections."

3. Owner-performed tests and inspections indicated in the Contract Documents.

E. Continuous Inspection of Workmanship: Describe process for continuous inspection during construction to identify and correct deficiencies in workmanship in addition to testing and inspection specified. Indicate types of corrective actions to be required to bring work into compliance with standards of workmanship established by Contract requirements and approved mockups.

F. Monitoring and Documentation: Maintain testing and inspection reports including log of approved and rejected results. Include work Architect has indicated as nonconforming or defective. Indicate corrective actions taken to bring nonconforming work into compliance with requirements. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.



1.9 REPORTS AND DOCUMENTS

A. Test and Inspection Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports specified in other Sections. Include the following:

1. Date of issue. 2. Project title and number. 3. Name, address, and telephone number of testing agency. 4. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections. 5. Names of individuals making tests and inspections. 6. Description of the Work and test and inspection method. 7. Identification of product and Specification Section. 8. Complete test or inspection data. 9. Test and inspection results and an interpretation of test results. 10. Record of temperature and weather conditions at time of sample taking and testing and

inspecting. 11. Comments or professional opinion on whether tested or inspected Work complies with

the Contract Document requirements. 12. Name and signature of laboratory inspector. 13. Recommendations on retesting and reinspecting.

B. Manufacturer's Technical Representative's Field Reports: Prepare written information documenting manufacturer's technical representative's tests and inspections specified in other Sections. Include the following:

1. Name, address, and telephone number of technical representative making report. 2. Statement on condition of substrates and their acceptability for installation of product. 3. Statement that products at Project site comply with requirements. 4. Summary of installation procedures being followed, whether they comply with

requirements and, if not, what corrective action was taken. 5. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance

complies with requirements. 6. Statement whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty. 7. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections.

C. Factory-Authorized Service Representative's Reports: Prepare written information documenting manufacturer's factory-authorized service representative's tests and inspections specified in other Sections. Include the following:

1. Name, address, and telephone number of factory-authorized service representative making report.

2. Statement that equipment complies with requirements. 3. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance

complies with requirements. 4. Statement whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty. 5. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections.


A. General: Qualifications paragraphs in this article establish the minimum qualification levels required; individual Specification Sections specify additional requirements.



B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units. As applicable, procure products from manufacturers able to meet qualification requirements, warranty requirements, and technical or factory-authorized service representative requirements.

C. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units.

D. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, applying, or assembling work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.

E. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of the system, assembly, or product that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project.

F. Specialists: Certain Specification Sections require that specific construction activities shall be performed by entities who are recognized experts in those operations. Specialists shall satisfy qualification requirements indicated and shall be engaged for the activities indicated.

1. Requirements of authorities having jurisdiction shall supersede requirements for specialists.

G. Testing Agency Qualifications: An NRTL, an NVLAP, or an independent agency with the experience and capability to conduct testing and inspecting indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 329; and with additional qualifications specified in individual Sections; and where required by authorities having jurisdiction, that is acceptable to authorities.

H. Manufacturer's Technical Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to observe and inspect installation of manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project.

I. Factory-Authorized Service Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to inspect installation of manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project.

J. Mockups: Before installing portions of the Work requiring mockups, build mockups for each form of construction and finish required to comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for the completed Work:

1. Build mockups in location and of size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect.

2. Notify Architect seven (7) days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be constructed.



3. Employ supervisory personnel who will oversee mockup construction. Employ workers that will be employed during the construction at the Project.

4. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship. 5. Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before starting work, fabrication, or construction.

a. Allow seven (7) days for initial review and each re-review of each mockup.

6. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the completed Work.

7. Demolish and remove mockups when directed, unless otherwise indicated.

1.11 QUALITY CONTROL

A. Owner Responsibilities: Where quality-control services are indicated as Owner's responsibility, Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform these services.

1. Owner will furnish Contractor with names, addresses, and telephone numbers of testing agencies engaged and a description of types of testing and inspecting they are engaged to perform.

2. Costs for retesting and reinspecting construction that replaces or is necessitated by work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents will be charged to Contractor, and the Contract Sum will be adjusted by Change Order.

3. Costs for testing that is cancelled will be charged to the Contractor, and the Contract Sum will be adjusted by Change Order.

B. Contractor Responsibilities: Tests and inspections not explicitly assigned to Owner are Contractor's responsibility. Perform additional quality-control activities, whether specified or not, to verify that the Work complies with requirements.

1. Unless otherwise indicated, provide quality-control services specified and those required by authorities having jurisdiction. Perform quality-control services required of Contractor by authorities having jurisdiction, whether specified or not.

2. Engage a qualified testing agency to perform these quality-control services.

a. Contractor shall not employ same entity engaged by Owner, unless agreed to in writing by Owner.

3. Notify testing agencies at least 24 hours in advance of time when Work that requires testing or inspecting will be performed.

4. Where quality-control services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each quality-control service.

5. Testing and inspecting requested by Contractor and not required by the Contract Documents are Contractor's responsibility.

6. Submit additional copies of each written report directly to authorities having jurisdiction, when they so direct.

C. Manufacturer's Field Services: Where indicated, engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, including service connections. Report results in writing as specified in Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures."



D. Manufacturer's Technical Services: Where indicated, engage a manufacturer's technical representative to observe and inspect the Work. Manufacturer's technical representative's services include participation in preinstallation conferences, examination of substrates and conditions, verification of materials, observation of Installer activities, inspection of completed portions of the Work, and submittal of written reports.

E. Retesting/Reinspecting: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections were Contractor's responsibility, provide quality-control services, including retesting and reinspecting, for construction that replaced Work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents.

F. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Cooperate with Architect and Contractor in performance of duties. Provide qualified personnel to perform required tests and inspections.

1. Notify Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities or deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services.

2. Determine the location from which test samples will be taken and in which in-situ tests are conducted.

3. Conduct and interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from requirements.

4. Submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each test, inspection, and similar quality-control service through Contractor.

5. Do not release, revoke, alter, or increase the Contract Document requirements or approve or accept any portion of the Work.

6. Do not perform any duties of Contractor.

G. Associated Contractor Services: Cooperate with agencies and representatives performing required tests, inspections, and similar quality-control services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Provide the following:

1. Access to the Work. 2. Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections. 3. Adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing and

inspection. Assist agency in obtaining samples. 4. Facilities for storage and field curing of test samples. 5. Delivery of samples to testing agencies. 6. Preliminary design mix proposed for use for material mixes that require control by testing

agency. 7. Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspecting equipment at Project

site.

H. Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality-assurance and quality-control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing and replacing construction to accommodate testing and inspecting.

1. Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities.

I. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare a schedule of tests, inspections, and similar quality-control services required by the Contract Documents Coordinate and submit concurrently with Contractor's construction schedule. Update as the Work progresses.



1. Distribution: Distribute schedule to Owner, Architect, testing agencies, and each party involved in performance of portions of the Work where tests and inspections are required.

1.12 SPECIAL TESTS AND INSPECTIONS

A. Special Tests and Inspections: Conducted by a qualified testing agency as required by authorities having jurisdiction, as indicated in individual Specification Sections, and as follows:

1. Verifying that manufacturer maintains detailed fabrication and quality-control procedures and reviewing the completeness and adequacy of those procedures to perform the Work.

2. Notifying Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities and deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services.

3. Submitting a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar quality-control service to Architect, Contractor and to authorities having jurisdiction.

4. Submitting a final report of special tests and inspections at Substantial Completion, which includes a list of unresolved deficiencies.

5. Interpreting tests and inspections and stating in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents.

6. Retesting and reinspecting corrected work.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 TEST AND INSPECTION LOG

A. Prepare a record of tests and inspections. Include the following:

1. Date test or inspection was conducted. 2. Description of the Work tested or inspected. 3. Date test or inspection results were transmitted to Architect. 4. Identification of testing agency or special inspector conducting test or inspection.

B. Maintain log at Project site. Post changes and modifications as they occur. Provide access to test and inspection log for Architect's reference during normal working hours.

1. Submit log at Project closeout as part of Project Record Documents.

3.2 REPAIR AND PROTECTION

A. General: On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar services, repair damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes.

1. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Specification Sections or matching existing substrates and finishes. Restore patched areas and extend restoration into adjoining areas with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Comply with the Contract Document requirements for cutting and patching in Section 017300 "Execution."

B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality-control service activities.



C. Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of responsibility for quality-control services.


REFERENCES


SECTION 014200 - REFERENCES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. General: Basic Contract definitions are included in the Conditions of the Contract.

B. "Approved": When used to convey Architect's action on Contractor's submittals, applications, and requests, "approved" is limited to Architect's duties and responsibilities as stated in the Conditions of the Contract.

C. "Directed": A command or instruction by Architect. Other terms including "requested," "authorized," "selected," "required," and "permitted" have the same meaning as "directed."

D. "Indicated": Requirements expressed by graphic representations or in written form on Drawings, in Specifications, and in other Contract Documents. Other terms including "shown," "noted," "scheduled," and "specified" have the same meaning as "indicated."

E. "Regulations": Laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by authorities having jurisdiction, and rules, conventions, and agreements within the construction industry that control performance of the Work.

F. "Furnish": Supply and deliver to Project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation, and similar operations.

G. "Install": Operations at Project site including unloading, temporarily storing, unpacking, assembling, erecting, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing, protecting, cleaning, and similar operations.

H. "Provide": Furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use.

I. "Project Site": Space available for performing construction activities. The extent of Project site is shown on Drawings and may or may not be identical with the description of the land on which Project is to be built.

1.3 INDUSTRY STANDARDS

A. Applicability of Standards: Unless the Contract Documents include more stringent requirements, applicable construction industry standards have the same force and effect as if bound or copied directly into the Contract Documents to the extent referenced. Such standards are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference.

B. Publication Dates: Comply with standards in effect as of date of the Contract Documents unless otherwise indicated.

REFERENCES


C. Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged in construction on Project should be familiar with industry standards applicable to its construction activity. Copies of applicable standards are not bound with the Contract Documents.

1. Where copies of standards are needed to perform a required construction activity, obtain copies directly from publication source.

1.4 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS

A. Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents.

AA Aluminum Association, Inc. (The) (703) 358-2960 www.aluminum.org AABC Associated Air Balance Council (202) 737-0202 www.aabchq.com AAMA American Architectural Manufacturers Association (847) 303-5664 www.aamanet.org AASHTO American Association of State Highway and

Transportation Officials (202) 624-5800

www.transportation.org ACI American Concrete Institute (248) 848-3700 www.concrete.org AGA American Gas Association (202) 824-7000 www.aga.org AHA American Hardboard Association (Now part of CPA) AI Asphalt Institute (859) 288-4960 www.asphaltinstitute.org AIA American Institute of Architects (The) (800) 242-3837 www.aia.org (202) 626-7300 AISC American Institute of Steel Construction (800) 644-2400 www.aisc.org (312) 670-2400 AISI American Iron and Steel Institute (202) 452-7100 www.steel.org ALSC American Lumber Standard Committee, Incorporated (301) 972-1700 www.alsc.org

REFERENCES


AMCA Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc. (847) 394-0150 www.amca.org ANSI American National Standards Institute (202) 293-8020 www.ansi.org APA APA - The Engineered Wood Association (253) 565-6600 www.apawood.org ARI Air-Conditioning & Refrigeration Institute (703) 524-8800 www.ari.org ARMA Asphalt Roofing Manufacturers Association (202) 207-0917 www.asphaltroofing.org ASCE American Society of Civil Engineers (800) 548-2723 www.asce.org (703) 295-6300 ASCE/SEI American Society of Civil Engineers/Structural

Engineering Institute

(See ASCE) ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-

Conditioning Engineers (800) 527-4723

www.ashrae.org (404) 636-8400 ASME ASME International (800) 843-2763 (American Society of Mechanical Engineers International) (973) 882-1170 www.asme.org ASSE American Society of Sanitary Engineering (440) 835-3040 www.asse-plumbing.org ASTM ASTM International (610) 832-9500 (American Society for Testing and Materials International) www.astm.org AWI Architectural Woodwork Institute (571) 323-3636 www.awinet.org AWPA American Wood Protection Association (205) 733-4077 (Formerly: American Wood Preservers' Association) www.awpa.com AWS American Welding Society (800) 443-9353 www.aws.org (305) 443-9353 AWWA American Water Works Association (800) 926-7337 www.awwa.org (303) 794-7711 BHMA Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association (212) 297-2122 www.buildershardware.com

REFERENCES


BICSI BICSI, Inc. (800) 242-7405 www.bicsi.org (813) 979-1991 CDA Copper Development Association (800) 232-3282 www.copper.org (212) 251-7200 CGA Compressed Gas Association (703) 788-2700 www.cganet.com CISCA Ceilings & Interior Systems Construction Association (630) 584-1919 www.cisca.org CISPI Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute (423) 892-0137 www.cispi.org CPPA Corrugated Polyethylene Pipe Association (800) 510-2772 www.cppa-info.org (202) 462-9607 CRI Carpet and Rug Institute (The) (800) 882-8846 www.carpet-rug.com (706) 278-3176 CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (847) 517-1200 www.crsi.org CSA CSA International (866) 797-4272 (Formerly: IAS - International Approval Services) (416) 747-4000 www.csa-international.org CSI Construction Specifications Institute (The) (800) 689-2900 www.csinet.org (703) 684-0300 DHI Door and Hardware Institute (703) 222-2010 www.dhi.org EIA Electronic Industries Alliance (703) 907-7500 www.eia.org EJMA Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association, Inc. (914) 332-0040 www.ejma.org ESD ESD Association (315) 339-6937 (Electrostatic Discharge Association) www.esda.org FM Approvals FM Approvals LLC (781) 762-4300 www.fmglobal.com FM Global FM Global (401) 275-3000 (Formerly: FMG - FM Global) www.fmglobal.com

REFERENCES


FSA Fluid Sealing Association (610) 971-4850 www.fluidsealing.com FSC Forest Stewardship Council 49 228 367 66 0 www.fsc.org GA Gypsum Association (202) 289-5440 www.gypsum.org GANA Glass Association of North America (785) 271-0208 www.glasswebsite.com HI Hydraulic Institute (973) 267-9700 www.pumps.org HMMA Hollow Metal Manufacturers Association (Part of NAAMM) HPVA Hardwood Plywood & Veneer Association (703) 435-2900 www.hpva.org ICEA Insulated Cable Engineers Association, Inc. (770) 830-0369 www.icea.net IEC International Electrotechnical Commission 41 22 919 02 11 www.iec.ch IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (The) (212) 419-7900 www.ieee.org IESNA Illuminating Engineering Society of North America (212) 248-5000 www.iesna.org IGCC Insulating Glass Certification Council (315) 646-2234 www.igcc.org IGMA Insulating Glass Manufacturers Alliance (613) 233-1510 www.igmaonline.org ISO International Organization for Standardization 41 22 749 01 11 www.iso.ch Available from ANSI (202) 293-8020 www.ansi.org MFMA Metal Framing Manufacturers Association, Inc. (312) 644-6610 www.metalframingmfg.org MPI Master Painters Institute (888) 674-8937 www.paintinfo.com (604) 298-7578

REFERENCES


MSS Manufacturers Standardization Society of The Valve and Fittings Industry Inc.

(703) 281-6613

www.mss-hq.com NAAMM National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers (630) 942-6591 www.naamm.org NACE NACE International (800) 797-6623 (National Association of Corrosion Engineers

International) (281) 228-6200

www.nace.org NADCA National Air Duct Cleaners Association (202) 737-2926 www.nadca.com NAIMA North American Insulation Manufacturers Association (703) 684-0084 www.naima.org NCMA National Concrete Masonry Association (703) 713-1900 www.ncma.org NEBB National Environmental Balancing Bureau (301) 977-3698 www.nebb.org NECA National Electrical Contractors Association (301) 657-3110 www.necanet.org NeLMA Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers' Association (207) 829-6901 www.nelma.org NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association (703) 841-3200 www.nema.org NETA InterNational Electrical Testing Association (888) 300-6382 www.netaworld.org (269) 488-6382 NFPA NFPA (800) 344-3555 (National Fire Protection Association) (617) 770-3000 www.nfpa.org NFRC National Fenestration Rating Council (301) 589-1776 www.nfrc.org NHLA National Hardwood Lumber Association (800) 933-0318 www.natlhardwood.org (901) 377-1818 NLGA National Lumber Grades Authority (604) 524-2393 www.nlga.org NRCA National Roofing Contractors Association (800) 323-9545 www.nrca.net (847) 299-9070

REFERENCES


NRMCA National Ready Mixed Concrete Association (888) 846-7622 www.nrmca.org (301) 587-1400 NSF NSF International (800) 673-6275 (National Sanitation Foundation International) (734) 769-8010 www.nsf.org NWWDA National Wood Window and Door Association (Now WDMA) PDI Plumbing & Drainage Institute (800) 589-8956 www.pdionline.org (978) 557-0720 PGI PVC Geomembrane Institute (217) 333-3929 http://pgi-tp.ce.uiuc.edu RCSC Research Council on Structural Connections www.boltcouncil.org RFCI Resilient Floor Covering Institute (301) 340-8580 www.rfci.com RIS Redwood Inspection Service (888) 225-7339 www.redwoodinspection.com (415) 382-0662 SDI Steel Door Institute (440) 899-0010 www.steeldoor.org SEI/ASCE Structural Engineering Institute/American Society of Civil

Engineers

(See ASCE) SIGMA Sealed Insulating Glass Manufacturers Association (Now IGMA) SMA Screen Manufacturers Association (561) 533-0991 www.smacentral.org SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' (703) 803-2980 National Association www.smacna.org SPIB Southern Pine Inspection Bureau (The) (850) 434-2611 www.spib.org SSINA Specialty Steel Industry of North America (800) 982-0355 www.ssina.com (202) 342-8630 SSPC SSPC: The Society for Protective Coatings (877) 281-7772 www.sspc.org (412) 281-2331

REFERENCES


STI Steel Tank Institute (847) 438-8265 www.steeltank.com TCA Tile Council of America, Inc. (Now TCNA) TIA/EIA Telecommunications Industry Association/Electronic

Industries Alliance (703) 907-7700

www.tiaonline.org TMS The Masonry Society (303) 939-9700 www.masonrysociety.org TPI Truss Plate Institute, Inc. (703) 683-1010 www.tpinst.org UL Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (877) 854-3577 www.ul.com (847) 272-8800 UNI Uni-Bell PVC Pipe Association (972) 243-3902 www.uni-bell.org USGBC U.S. Green Building Council (800) 795-1747 www.usgbc.org WCLIB West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau (800) 283-1486 www.wclib.org (503) 639-0651 WCMA Window Covering Manufacturers Association (212) 297-2122 www.wcmanet.org WDMA Window & Door Manufacturers Association (800) 223-2301 (Formerly: NWWDA - National Wood Window and Door

Association) (847) 299-5200

www.wdma.com WWPA Western Wood Products Association (503) 224-3930 www.wwpa.org

B. Code Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents.

IAPMO International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical

Officials (909) 472-4100

www.iapmo.org ICC International Code Council (888) 422-7233 www.iccsafe.org

REFERENCES


ICC-ES ICC Evaluation Service, Inc. (800) 423-6587 www.icc-es.org (562) 699-0543 UBC Uniform Building Code (See ICC)

C. Federal Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents.

CE Army Corps of Engineers (202) 761-0011 www.usace.army.mil DOC Department of Commerce (202) 482-2000 www.commerce.gov DOE Department of Energy (202) 586-9220 www.energy.gov EPA Environmental Protection Agency (202) 272-0167 www.epa.gov FDA Food and Drug Administration (888) 463-6332 www.fda.gov GSA General Services Administration (800) 488-3111 www.gsa.gov LBL Lawrence Berkeley National Laboratory (510) 486-4000 www.lbl.gov NIST National Institute of Standards and Technology (301) 975-6478 www.nist.gov OSHA Occupational Safety & Health Administration (800) 321-6742 www.osha.gov (202) 693-1999 SD State Department (202) 647-4000 www.state.gov USDA Department of Agriculture (202) 720-2791 www.usda.gov

D. Standards and Regulations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the standards and regulations in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents.

REFERENCES


ADAAG Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) (800) 872-2253 Architectural Barriers Act (ABA) (202) 272-0080 Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities Available from U.S. Access Board www.access-board.gov CFR Code of Federal Regulations (866) 512-1800 Available from Government Printing Office (202) 512-1800 www.gpoaccess.gov/cfr/index.html FED-STD Federal Standard (See FS) FS Federal Specification (215) 697-2664 Available from Department of Defense Single Stock

Point

http://dodssp.daps.dla.mil Available from Defense Standardization Program www.dps.dla.mil Available from General Services Administration (202) 619-8925 www.gsa.gov Available from National Institute of Building

Sciences (202) 289-7800

www.wbdg.org/ccb FTMS Federal Test Method Standard (See FS) MIL (See MILSPEC) MIL-STD (See MILSPEC) MILSPEC Military Specification and Standards (215) 697-2664 Available from Department of Defense Single Stock

Point

http://dodssp.daps.dla.mil UFAS Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards (800) 872-2253 Available from Access Board (202) 272-0080 www.access-board.gov




TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS


SECTION 015000 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes requirements for temporary support, security, and protection facilities.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 011000 "Summary of Work" for work restrictions and limitations on utility interruptions.

1.3 USE CHARGES

A. General: Installation and removal of and use charges for temporary facilities shall be included in the Contract Sum unless otherwise indicated. Allow other entities to use temporary services and facilities without cost, including, but not limited to, Architect, testing agencies, and authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Water and Sewer Service from Existing System: Water from Property Owner's existing water system is available for use without metering and without payment of use charges. Provide connections and extensions of services as required for construction operations.

C. Electric Power Service from Existing System: Electric power from Property Owner's existing system is available for use without metering and without payment of use charges. Provide connections and extensions of services as required for construction operations.


A. Site Plan: Show temporary facilities, utility hookups, staging areas, and parking areas for construction personnel.

B. Project Identification and Temporary Signs: Show fabrication and installation details, including plans, elevations, details, layouts, typestyles, graphic elements, and message content.


A. Electric Service: Comply with NECA, NEMA, and UL standards and regulations for temporary electric service. Install service to comply with NFPA 70.

B. Accessible Temporary Egress: Comply with applicable provisions in the United States Access Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines and ICC/ANSI A117.1.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Polyethylene Sheet: Reinforced, fire-resistive sheet, 10-mil minimum thickness, with flame-spread rating of 15 or less per ASTM E 84 and passing NFPA 701 Test Method 2.

B. Dust-Control Adhesive-Surface Walk-Off Mats: Provide mats minimum 36 by 60 inches.

C. Insulation: Unfaced mineral-fiber blanket, manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively.

2.2 TEMPORARY FACILITIES

A. Field Offices, General: Prefabricated or mobile units with serviceable finishes, temperature controls, and foundations adequate for normal loading., if required. Unit must be large enough for regular job meetings, plan review areas, submittal storage and other job file and administrative functions.

B. Storage and Fabrication Sheds: Provide sheds sized, furnished, and equipped to accommodate materials and equipment for construction operations.

1. Sheds to be metal box storage units or have wood floors raised above the ground. 2. Store combustible materials apart from building.

2.3 EQUIPMENT

A. Fire Extinguishers: Portable, UL rated; with class and extinguishing agent as required by locations and classes of fire exposures.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Locate facilities where they will serve Project adequately and result in minimum interference with performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required by progress of the Work.

B. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Do not remove until facilities are no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of completed permanent facilities.

3.2 TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION

A. General: Install temporary service or connect to existing service.

1. Arrange with utility company, Property Owner, and existing users for time when service can be interrupted, if necessary, to make connections for temporary services.

B. Water Service: Connect to Property Owner's existing water service facilities. Clean and maintain water service facilities in a condition acceptable to Property Owner. At Substantial Completion, restore these facilities to condition existing before initial use.



C. Sanitary Facilities: Provide temporary toilets, wash facilities, and drinking water for use of construction personnel. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for type, number, location, operation, and maintenance of fixtures and facilities.

D. Electric Power Service: Connect to Property Owner's existing electric power service. Maintain equipment in a condition acceptable to Property Owner.

E. Telephone Service: The Contractor shall maintain at his expense a job telephone, not a "Pay Telephone". The job telephone shall be available to the Architect, the Owner's staff, Municipal Officials or Inspectors and all subcontractors. All calls shall be paid for by the Contractor.

3.3 SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION

A. General: Comply with the following:

1. Provide construction for temporary sheds located within construction area or within 30 feet of building lines that is noncombustible according to ASTM E 136. Comply with NFPA 241.

2. Maintain support facilities until Architect schedules Substantial Completion inspection. Remove before Substantial Completion. Personnel remaining after Substantial Completion will be permitted to use permanent facilities, under conditions acceptable to Owner.

B. Traffic Controls: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Protect existing site improvements to remain including curbs, pavement, and utilities. 2. Maintain access for fire-fighting equipment and access to fire hydrants.

C. Parking: Provide temporary parking areas for construction personnel.

D. Project Signs: Provide Project signs as required by Owner and Property. Unauthorized signs are not permitted.

1. Identification Signs: Provide Project identification signs. 2. Temporary Signs: Provide other signs as indicated and as required to inform public and

individuals seeking entrance to Project.

a. Provide temporary, directional signs for construction personnel and visitors.

3. Maintain and touch up signs so they are legible at all times.

E. Waste Disposal Facilities: Provide waste-collection containers in sizes adequate to handle waste from construction operations. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Comply with progress cleaning requirements in Section 017300 "Execution."

F. Existing Elevator Use: Use of elevators for construction activities is not permitted.

G. Existing Stair Usage: Use of Property Owner's existing stairs will be permitted, provided stairs are cleaned and maintained in a condition acceptable to Property Owner. At Substantial Completion, restore stairs to condition existing before initial use.



1. Provide protective coverings, barriers, devices, signs, or other procedures to protect stairs and to maintain means of egress. If stairs become damaged, restore damaged areas so no evidence remains of correction work.

3.4 SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION

A. Protection of Existing Facilities: Protect existing vegetation, equipment, structures, utilities, and other improvements at Project site and on adjacent properties, except those indicated to be removed or altered. Repair damage to existing facilities.

B. Environmental Protection: Provide protection, operate temporary facilities, and conduct construction as required to comply with environmental regulations and that minimize possible air, waterway, and subsoil contamination or pollution or other undesirable effects.

C. Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for erecting structurally adequate barricades, including warning signs and lighting.

D. Temporary Egress: Maintain temporary egress from existing occupied facilities as indicated and as required by authorities having jurisdiction.

E. Temporary Enclosures: Provide temporary enclosures for protection of construction, in progress and completed, from exposure, foul weather, other construction operations, and similar activities. Provide temporary weathertight enclosure for building exterior.

F. Temporary Partitions: Provide floor-to-ceiling dustproof partitions to limit dust and dirt migration and to separate areas occupied by Property Owner from fumes and noise.

1. Construct dustproof partitions with gypsum wallboard with joints taped on occupied side, and fire-retardant-treated plywood on construction operations side.

2. Where fire-resistance-rated temporary partitions are indicated or are required by authorities having jurisdiction, construct partitions according to the rated assemblies.

3. Insulate partitions to control noise transmission to occupied areas. 4. Seal joints and perimeter. Equip partitions with gasketed dustproof doors and security

locks where openings are required. 5. Protect air-handling equipment. 6. Provide walk-off mats at each entrance through temporary partition.

3.5 OPERATION, TERMINATION, AND REMOVAL

A. Temporary Facility Changeover: Do not change over from using temporary security and protection facilities to permanent facilities until Substantial Completion.

B. Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when need for its service has ended, when it has been replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than Substantial Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction that may have been delayed because of interference with temporary facility. Repair damaged Work, clean exposed surfaces, and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired.

1. Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are property of Contractor. Owner and Property Owner reserve right to take possession of Project identification signs.



2. At Substantial Completion, repair, renovate, and clean permanent facilities used during construction period. Comply with final cleaning requirements specified in Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures."


PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS


SECTION 016000 - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for selection of products for use in Project; product delivery, storage, and handling; manufacturers' standard warranties on products; special warranties; and comparable products.


1. Section 012500 "Substitution Procedures" for requests for substitutions. 2. Section 014200 "References" for applicable industry standards for products specified.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Products: Items obtained for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for Project or taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material," "equipment," "system," and terms of similar intent.

1. Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's product name, including make or model number or other designation shown or listed in manufacturer's published product literature, that is current as of date of the Contract Documents.

2. New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into another project or facility. Products salvaged or recycled from other projects are not considered new products.

3. Comparable Product: Product that is demonstrated and approved through submittal process to have the indicated qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics that equal or exceed those of specified product.

B. Basis-of-Design Product Specification: A specification in which a specific manufacturer's product is named and accompanied by the words "basis-of-design product," including make or model number or other designation, to establish the significant qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics for purposes of evaluating comparable products of additional manufacturers named in the specification.


A. Comparable Product Requests: Submit request for consideration of each comparable product. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles.



1. Include data to indicate compliance with the requirements specified in "Comparable Products" Article.

2. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or documentation for evaluation within one (1) week of receipt of a comparable product request. Architect will notify Contractor of approval or rejection of proposed comparable product request within fifteen (15) days of receipt of request, or seven (7) days of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later.

a. Form of Approval: As specified in Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures." b. Use product specified if Architect does not issue a decision on use of a comparable

product request within time allocated.

B. Basis-of-Design Product Specification Submittal: Comply with requirements in Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures." Show compliance with requirements.


A. Compatibility of Options: If Contractor is given option of selecting between two (2) or more products for use on Project, select product compatible with products previously selected, even if previously selected products were also options.

1. Each contractor is responsible for providing products and construction methods compatible with products and construction methods of other contractors.

2. If a dispute arises between contractors over concurrently selectable but incompatible products, Architect will determine which products shall be used.

1.6 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver, store, and handle products using means and methods that will prevent damage, deterioration, and loss, including theft and vandalism. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Delivery and Handling:

1. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at Project site and to prevent overcrowding of construction spaces.

2. Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other losses.

3. Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing.

4. Inspect products on delivery to determine compliance with the Contract Documents and to determine that products are undamaged and properly protected.

C. Storage:

1. Store products to allow for inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units. 2. Store materials in a manner that will not endanger Project structure. 3. Store products that are subject to damage by the elements, under cover in a weathertight

enclosure above ground, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation.



4. Comply with product manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, humidity, ventilation, and weather-protection requirements for storage.

5. Protect stored products from damage and liquids from freezing. 6. Provide a secure location and enclosure at Project site for storage of materials and

equipment by Owner's construction forces. Coordinate location with Owner.

1.7 PRODUCT WARRANTIES

A. Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve Contractor of obligations under requirements of the Contract Documents.

1. Manufacturer's Warranty: Written warranty furnished by individual manufacturer for a particular product and specifically endorsed by manufacturer to Owner.

2. Special Warranty: Written warranty required by the Contract Documents to provide specific rights for Owner.

B. Special Warranties: Prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and identification, ready for execution.

1. Manufacturer's Standard Form: Modified to include Project-specific information and properly executed.

2. Specified Form: When specified forms are included with the Specifications, prepare a written document using indicated form properly executed.

3. Refer to Divisions 02 through 49. Sections for specific content requirements and particular requirements for submitting special warranties.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PRODUCT SELECTION PROCEDURES

A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents, are undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, are new at time of installation.

1. Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, and other items needed for a complete installation and indicated use and effect.

2. Standard Products: If available, and unless custom products or nonstandard options are specified, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used successfully in similar situations on other projects.

3. Owner reserves the right to limit selection to products with warranties not in conflict with requirements of the Contract Documents.

4. Where products are accompanied by the term "as selected," Architect will make selection.

5. Descriptive, performance, and reference standard requirements in the Specifications establish salient characteristics of products.

6. Or Equal: For products specified by name and accompanied by the term "or equal," or "or approved equal," or "or approved," comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article to obtain approval for use of an unnamed product.



B. Product Selection Procedures:

1. Product: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer and product, provide the named product that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be considered.

2. Manufacturer/Source: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer or source, provide a product by the named manufacturer or source that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be considered.

3. Products:

a. Restricted List: Where Specifications include a list of names of both manufacturers and products, provide one (1) of the products listed that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will be considered, unless otherwise indicated.

b. Non-Restricted List: Where Specifications include a list of names of both available manufacturers and products, provide one (1) of the products listed, or an unnamed product, that complies with requirements. Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product.

4. Manufacturers:

a. Restricted List: Where Specifications include a list of manufacturers' names, provide a product by one (1) of the manufacturers listed that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will be considered, unless otherwise indicated.

b. Non-Restricted List: Where Specifications include a list of available manufacturers, provide a product by one (1) of the manufacturers listed, or a product by an unnamed manufacturer, that complies with requirements. Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed manufacturer's product.

5. Basis-of-Design Product: Where Specifications name a product, or refer to a product indicated on Drawings, and include a list of manufacturers, provide the specified or indicated product or a comparable product by one (1) of the other named manufacturers. Drawings and Specifications indicate sizes, profiles, dimensions, and other characteristics that are based on the product named. Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product by one (1) of the other named manufacturers.

C. Visual Matching Specification: Where Specifications require "match Architect's sample", provide a product that complies with requirements and matches Architect's sample. Architect's decision will be final on whether a proposed product matches.

1. If no product available within specified category matches and complies with other specified requirements, comply with requirements in Section 012500 "Substitution Procedures" for proposal of product.

D. Visual Selection Specification: Where Specifications include the phrase "as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range" or similar phrase, select a product that complies with



requirements. Architect will select color, gloss, pattern, density, or texture from manufacturer's product line that includes both standard and premium items.

2.2 COMPARABLE PRODUCTS

A. Conditions for Consideration: Architect will consider Contractor's request for comparable product when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect may return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements:

1. Evidence that the proposed product does not require revisions to the Contract Documents, that it is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce the indicated results, and that it is compatible with other portions of the Work.

2. Detailed, SIDE-BY-SIDE comparison of significant qualities of proposed product with those named in the Specifications. Significant qualities include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, and specific features and requirements indicated.

3. Evidence that proposed product provides specified warranty. 4. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and

names and addresses of architects and owners, if requested. 5. Samples, if requested.



EXECUTION


SECTION 017300 - EXECUTION

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes general administrative and procedural requirements governing execution of the Work including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Installation of the Work. 2. Cutting and patching. 3. Progress cleaning. 4. Starting and adjusting. 5. Protection of installed construction. 6. Correction of the Work.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Cutting: Removal of in-place construction necessary to permit installation or performance of other work.

B. Patching: Fitting and repair work required to restore construction to original conditions after installation of other work.


A. Landfill Receipts: Submit copy of receipts issued by a landfill facility, licensed to accept hazardous materials, for hazardous waste disposal.


A. Cutting and Patching: Comply with requirements for and limitations on cutting and patching of construction elements.

1. Structural Elements: When cutting and patching structural elements, notify Architect of locations and details of cutting and await directions from the Architect before proceeding. Shore, brace, and support structural element during cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity or increase deflection

2. Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch operating elements and related components in a manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety.

3. Other Construction Elements: Do not cut and patch other construction elements or components in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity, that results in

EXECUTION


reducing their capacity to perform as intended, or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety

4. Visual Elements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in visual evidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch exposed construction in a manner that would, in Architect's opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic qualities. Remove and replace construction that has been cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner.

B. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Obtain and maintain on-site manufacturer's written recommendations and instructions for installation of products and equipment.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections.

B. In-Place Materials: Use materials for patching identical to in-place materials. For exposed surfaces, use materials that visually match in-place adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible.

1. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when installed, will provide a match acceptable to the Architect for the visual and functional performance of in-place materials.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Existing Conditions: The existence and location of underground and other utilities and construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning sitework, investigate and verify the existence and location of underground utilities, mechanical and electrical systems, and other construction affecting the Work.

1. Furnish location data for work related to Project that must be performed by public utilities serving Project site.

B. Examination and Acceptance of Conditions: Before proceeding with each component of the Work, examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer or Applicator present where indicated, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Record observations.

1. Written Report: Where a written report listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work is required by other Sections, include the following:

a. Description of the Work. b. List of detrimental conditions, including substrates. c. List of unacceptable installation tolerances. d. Recommended corrections.

EXECUTION


2. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing finishes or primers.

3. Examine roughing-in for mechanical and electrical systems to verify actual locations of connections before equipment and fixture installation.

4. Examine walls, floors, and roofs for suitable conditions where products and systems are to be installed.

5. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Proceeding with the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Recheck measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.

B. Space Requirements: Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown diagrammatically on Drawings.

C. Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of the need for clarification of the Contract Documents caused by differing field conditions outside the control of the Contractor, submit a request for information to Architect according to requirements in Section 013100 "Project Management and Coordination."

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment and elevation, as indicated.

1. Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level. 2. Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for maintenance

and ease of removal for replacement. 3. Conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in finished areas, unless otherwise indicated. 4. Maintain minimum headroom clearance of 96 inches in occupied spaces and 90 inches in

unoccupied spaces.

B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing products in applications indicated.

C. Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible results. Maintain conditions required for product performance until Substantial Completion.

D. Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations or loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy.

E. Tools and Equipment: Do not use tools or equipment that produce harmful noise levels.

F. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for work specified to be factory prepared and field installed. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that

EXECUTION


adequate provisions are made for locating and installing products to comply with indicated requirements.

G. Attachment: Provide blocking and attachment plates and anchors and fasteners of adequate size and number to securely anchor each component in place, accurately located and aligned with other portions of the Work. Where size and type of attachments are not indicated, verify size and type required for load conditions.

1. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components at heights directed by Architect.

2. Allow for building movement, including thermal expansion and contraction. 3. Coordinate installation of anchorages. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and

directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.

H. Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not indicated, arrange joints for the best visual effect. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints.

I. Hazardous Materials: Use products, cleaners, and installation materials that are not considered hazardous.

3.4 CUTTING AND PATCHING

A. Cutting and Patching, General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete without delay.

1. Cut in-place construction to provide for installation of other components or performance of other construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore surfaces to their original condition.

B. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of work to be cut.

C. Protection: Protect in-place construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage. Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be exposed during cutting and patching operations.

D. Adjacent Occupied Areas: Where interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage to adjoining areas is unavoidable, coordinate cutting and patching.

E. Existing Utility Services: Where existing services are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, bypass such systems before cutting to minimize interruption to occupied areas.

F. Cutting: Cut in-place construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and similar operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements retained or adjoining construction. If possible, review proposed procedures with original Installer; comply with original Installer's written recommendations.

1. In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots neatly to minimum size required, and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use.

EXECUTION


2. Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces. 3. Concrete and Masonry: Cut using a cutting machine, such as an abrasive saw or a

diamond-core drill. 4. Mechanical and Electrical Services: Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be

removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit to prevent entrance of moisture or other foreign matter after cutting.

5. Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cutting are complete.

G. Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar operations following performance of other work. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as practicable. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Sections, where applicable.

1. Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to demonstrate physical integrity of installation.

2. Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will minimize evidence of patching and refinishing.

a. Clean piping, conduit, and similar features before applying paint or other finishing materials.

b. Restore damaged pipe covering to its original condition.

3. Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are removed extend one finished area into another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even surface of uniform finish, color, texture, and appearance. Remove in-place floor and wall coverings and replace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and appearance.

a. Where patching occurs in a painted surface, prepare substrate and apply primer and intermediate paint coats appropriate for substrate over the patch, and apply final paint coat over entire unbroken surface containing the patch. Provide additional coats until patch blends with adjacent surfaces.

4. Ceilings: Patch, repair, or rehang in-place ceilings as necessary to provide an even-plane surface of uniform appearance.

5. Exterior Building Enclosure: Patch components in a manner that restores enclosure to a weathertight condition.

H. Cleaning: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Remove paint, mortar, oils, putty, and similar materials from adjacent finished surfaces.

3.5 PROGRESS CLEANING

A. General: Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas. Enforce requirements strictly. Dispose of materials lawfully.

1. Comply with requirements in NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste materials and debris.

2. Do not hold waste materials more than seven (7) days during normal weather or three (3) days if the temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg F (27 deg C).

EXECUTION


3. Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste. Mark containers appropriately and dispose of legally, according to regulations.

a. Utilize containers intended for holding waste materials of type to be stored.

4. Coordinate progress cleaning for joint-use areas where more than one installer has worked.

B. Site: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris.

C. Work Areas: Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness necessary for proper execution of the Work.

1. Remove liquid spills promptly. 2. Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom-clean or vacuum the

entire work area, as appropriate.

D. Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written instructions of manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using only cleaning materials specifically recommended. If specific cleaning materials are not recommended, use cleaning materials that are not hazardous to health or property and that will not damage exposed surfaces.

E. Concealed Spaces: Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space.

F. Exposed Surfaces in Finished Areas: Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

G. Waste Disposal: Do not bury or burn waste materials on-site. Do not wash waste materials down sewers or into waterways. Comply with waste disposal requirements in Section 015000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls."

H. During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining materials already in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion.

I. Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure operability without damaging effects.

J. Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to assure that no part of the construction, completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise deleterious exposure during the construction period.

3.6 STARTING AND ADJUSTING

A. Start equipment and operating components to confirm proper operation. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest.

B. Adjust equipment for proper operation. Adjust operating components for proper operation without binding.

EXECUTION


C. Test each piece of equipment to verify proper operation. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

D. Manufacturer's Field Service: Comply with qualification requirements in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements."

3.7 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION

A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature and relative humidity.

3.8 CORRECTION OF THE WORK

A. Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Restore damaged substrates and finishes.

1. Repairing includes replacing defective parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up with matching materials, and properly adjusting operating equipment.

B. Restore permanent facilities used during construction to their specified condition.

C. Remove and replace damaged surfaces that are exposed to view if surfaces cannot be repaired without visible evidence of repair.

D. Repair components that do not operate properly. Remove and replace operating components that cannot be repaired.

E. Remove and replace chipped, scratched, and broken glass or reflective surfaces.


CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES


SECTION 017700 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout, including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Substantial Completion procedures. 2. Final completion procedures. 3. Warranties.


1. Section 017300 "Execution" for progress cleaning of Project site. 2. Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance

manual requirements. 3. Section 017839 "Project Record Documents" for submitting Record Drawings, Record

Specifications, and Record Product Data. 4. Section 017900 "Demonstration and Training" for requirements for instructing Owner's

personnel. 5. Divisions 02 through 49 Sections for specific closeout and special cleaning requirements

for the Work in those Sections.

1.3 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION

A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion, complete the following. List items below that are incomplete with request.

1. Prepare a list of items to be completed and corrected (punch list), the value of items on the list, and reasons why the Work is not complete.

2. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements. 3. Submit specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final

certifications, and similar documents. 4. Obtain and submit releases permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to

services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar releases.

5. Prepare and submit Project Record Documents, operation and maintenance manuals, final completion construction photographic documentation, damage or settlement surveys, property surveys, and similar final record information.

6. Deliver tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items to location designated by Owner. Label with manufacturer's name and model number where applicable.

CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES


7. Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. Advise Owner's personnel of changeover in security provisions.

8. Complete startup testing of systems. 9. Submit test/adjust/balance records. 10. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups,

construction tools, and similar elements. 11. Advise Owner of changeover in heat and other utilities. 12. Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and

maintenance. 13. Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting. 14. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual

defects.

B. Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection for Substantial Completion. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after inspection or will notify Contractor of items, either on Contractor's list or additional items identified by Architect, that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued.

1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected.

2. Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for final completion.

1.4 FINAL COMPLETION

A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting final inspection for determining final completion, complete the following:

1. Submit a final Application for Payment according to Section 012900 "Payment Procedures".

2. Submit certified copy of Architect's Substantial Completion inspection list of items to be completed or corrected (punch list), endorsed and dated by Architect. The certified copy of the list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance.

3. Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance requirements.

4. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products, equipment, and systems.

5. Secure and provide both temporary and final Certificate of Occupancy from the Building Official, meeting all local and state permit closeout requirements.

B. Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection for acceptance. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare a final Certificate for Payment after inspection or will notify Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued.

1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected.

CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES


1.5 LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST)

A. Organization of List: Include name and identification of each space and area affected by construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction including, if necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction. Use CSI Form 14.1A or comparable form.

1. Organize list of spaces in sequential order, starting with exterior areas first and proceeding from lowest floor to highest floor.

2. Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for ceiling, individual walls, floors, equipment, and building systems.

3. Include the following information at the top of each page:

a. Project name. b. Date. c. Name of Architect. d. Name of Contractor. e. Page number.

4. Submit list of incomplete items in the following format:

a. PDF electronic file. Architect will return annotated file.

1.6 WARRANTIES

A. Submittal Time: Submit written warranties on request of Architect for designated portions of the Work where commencement of warranties other than date of Substantial Completion is indicated.

B. Partial Occupancy: Submit properly executed warranties within fifteen (15) days of completion of designated portions of the Work that are completed and occupied or used by Owner during construction period by separate agreement with Contractor.

C. Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of the Project Manual.

1. Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, three-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8½-by-11-inch paper.

2. Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or installation, including the name of the product and the name, address, and telephone number of Installer.

3. Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title "WARRANTIES," Project name, and name of Contractor.

4. Scan warranties and bonds and assemble complete warranty and bond submittal package into a single indexed electronic PDF file with links enabling navigation to each item. Provide table of contents at beginning of document.

D. Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance manuals.

CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces.



OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA


SECTION 017823 - OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for preparing operation and maintenance manuals, including the following:

1. Operation and maintenance documentation directory. 2. Emergency manuals. 3. Operation manuals for systems, subsystems, and equipment. 4. Product maintenance manuals. 5. Systems and equipment maintenance manuals.


1. Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures" for submitting copies of submittals for operation and maintenance manuals.

2. Divisions 02 through 49 Sections for specific operation and maintenance manual requirements for the Work in those Sections.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. System: An organized collection of parts, equipment, or subsystems united by regular interaction.

B. Subsystem: A portion of a system with characteristics similar to a system.

1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Manual Content: Operations and maintenance manual content is specified in individual specification sections to be reviewed at the time of Section submittals. Submit reviewed manual content formatted and organized as required by this Section.

1. Where applicable, clarify and update reviewed manual content to correspond to modifications and field conditions.

B. Format: Submit operations and maintenance manuals in the following format:

1. Three (3) paper copies. Include a complete operation and maintenance directory. Enclose title pages and directories in clear plastic sleeves. Architect will return two (2) copies.



C. Initial Manual Submittal: Submit draft copy of each manual at least thirty (30) days before commencing demonstration and training. Architect will comment on whether general scope and content of manual are acceptable.

D. Final Manual Submittal: Submit each manual in final form prior to requesting inspection for Substantial Completion and at least fifteen (15) days before commencing demonstration and training. Architect will return copy with comments.

1. Correct or modify each manual to comply with Architect's comments. Submit copies of each corrected manual within fifteen (15) days of receipt of Architect's comments and prior to commencing demonstration and training.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DOCUMENTATION DIRECTORY

A. Organization: Include a section in the directory for each of the following:

1. List of documents. 2. List of systems. 3. List of equipment. 4. Table of contents.

B. List of Systems and Subsystems: List systems alphabetically. Include references to operation and maintenance manuals that contain information about each system.

C. List of Equipment: List equipment for each system, organized alphabetically by system. For pieces of equipment not part of system, list alphabetically in separate list.

D. Tables of Contents: Include a table of contents for each emergency, operation, and maintenance manual.

E. Identification: In the documentation directory and in each operation and maintenance manual, identify each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment with same designation used in the Contract Documents. If no designation exists, assign a designation according to ASHRAE Guideline 4, "Preparation of Operating and Maintenance Documentation for Building Systems."

2.2 REQUIREMENTS FOR EMERGENCY, OPERATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A. Organization: Unless otherwise indicated, organize each manual into a separate section for each system and subsystem, and a separate section for each piece of equipment not part of a system. Each manual shall contain the following materials, in the order listed:

1. Title page. 2. Table of contents. 3. Manual contents.

B. Title Page: Include the following information:

1. Subject matter included in manual.



2. Name and address of Project. 3. Name and address of Owner. 4. Date of submittal. 5. Name and contact information for Contractor. 6. Name and contact information for Architect. 7. Names and contact information for major consultants to the Architect that designed the

systems contained in the manuals. 8. Cross-reference to related systems in other operation and maintenance manuals.

C. Table of Contents: List each product included in manual, identified by product name, indexed to the content of the volume, and cross-referenced to Specification Section number in Project Manual.

1. If operation or maintenance documentation requires more than one (1) volume to accommodate data, include comprehensive table of contents for all volumes in each volume of the set.

D. Manual Contents: Organize into sets of manageable size. Arrange contents alphabetically by system, subsystem, and equipment. If possible, assemble instructions for subsystems, equipment, and components of one (1) system into a single binder.

E. Manuals, Paper Copy: Submit manuals in the form of hard copy, bound and labeled volumes.

1. Binders: Heavy-duty, three-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, in thickness necessary to accommodate contents, sized to hold 8½-by-11-inch paper; with clear plastic sleeve on spine to hold label describing contents and with pockets inside covers to hold folded oversize sheets.

a. If two (2) or more binders are necessary to accommodate data of a system, organize data in each binder into groupings by subsystem and related components. Cross-reference other binders if necessary, to provide essential information for proper operation or maintenance of equipment or system.

b. Identify each binder on front and spine, with printed title "OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL," Project title or name, and subject matter of contents. Indicate volume number for multiple-volume sets.

2. Dividers: Heavy-paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each section of the manual. Mark each tab to indicate contents. Include typed list of products and major components of equipment included in the section on each divider, cross-referenced to Specification Section number and title of Project Manual.

3. Protective Plastic Sleeves: Transparent plastic sleeves designed to enclose diagnostic software storage media for computerized electronic equipment.

4. Supplementary Text: Prepared on 8½-by-11-inch white bond paper. 5. Drawings: Attach reinforced, punched binder tabs on drawings and bind with text.

a. If oversize drawings are necessary, fold drawings to same size as text pages and use as foldouts.

b. If drawings are too large to be used as foldouts, fold and place drawings in labeled envelopes and bind envelopes in rear of manual. At appropriate locations in manual, insert typewritten pages indicating drawing titles, descriptions of contents, and drawing locations.



2.3 EMERGENCY MANUALS

A. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each of the following:

1. Type of emergency. 2. Emergency instructions. 3. Emergency procedures.

B. Type of Emergency: Where applicable for each type of emergency indicated below, include instructions and procedures for each system, subsystem, piece of equipment, and component:

1. Fire. 2. Flood. 3. Gas leak. 4. Water leak. 5. Power failure. 6. Water outage. 7. System, subsystem, or equipment failure. 8. Chemical release or spill.

C. Emergency Instructions: Describe and explain warnings, trouble indications, error messages, and similar codes and signals. Include responsibilities of Owner's operating personnel for notification of Installer, supplier, and manufacturer to maintain warranties.

D. Emergency Procedures: Include the following, as applicable:

1. Instructions on stopping. 2. Shutdown instructions for each type of emergency. 3. Operating instructions for conditions outside normal operating limits. 4. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems. 5. Special operating instructions and procedures.

2.4 OPERATION MANUALS

A. Content: In addition to requirements in this Section, include operation data required in individual Specification Sections and the following information:

1. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions. Use designations for systems and equipment indicated on Contract Documents.

2. Performance and design criteria if Contractor is delegated design responsibility. 3. Operating standards. 4. Operating procedures. 5. Operating logs. 6. Wiring diagrams. 7. Control diagrams. 8. Piped system diagrams. 9. Precautions against improper use. 10. License requirements including inspection and renewal dates.

B. Descriptions: Include the following:



1. Product name and model number. Use designations for products indicated on Contract Documents.

2. Manufacturer's name. 3. Equipment identification with serial number of each component. 4. Equipment function. 5. Operating characteristics. 6. Limiting conditions. 7. Performance curves. 8. Engineering data and tests. 9. Complete nomenclature and number of replacement parts.

C. Operating Procedures: Include the following, as applicable:

1. Startup procedures. 2. Equipment or system break-in procedures. 3. Routine and normal operating instructions. 4. Regulation and control procedures. 5. Instructions on stopping. 6. Normal shutdown instructions. 7. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions. 8. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems. 9. Special operating instructions and procedures.

D. Systems and Equipment Controls: Describe the sequence of operation, and diagram controls as installed.

E. Piped Systems: Diagram piping as installed and identify color-coding where required for identification.

2.5 PRODUCT MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each product, material, and finish. Include source information, product information, maintenance procedures, repair materials and sources, and warranties and bonds, as described below.

B. Source Information: List each product included in manual, identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual and drawing or schedule designation or identifier where applicable.

C. Product Information: Include the following, as applicable:

1. Product name and model number. 2. Manufacturer's name. 3. Color, pattern, and texture. 4. Material and chemical composition. 5. Reordering information for specially manufactured products.

D. Maintenance Procedures: Include manufacturer's written recommendations and the following:



1. Inspection procedures. 2. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning. 3. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product. 4. Schedule for routine cleaning and maintenance. 5. Repair instructions.

E. Repair Materials and Sources: Include lists of materials and local sources of materials and related services.

F. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.

1. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims.

2.6 SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A. Content: For each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system, include source information, manufacturers' maintenance documentation, maintenance procedures, maintenance and service schedules, spare parts list and source information, maintenance service contracts, and warranty and bond information, as described below.

B. Source Information: List each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment included in manual, identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual and drawing or schedule designation or identifier where applicable.

C. Manufacturers' Maintenance Documentation: Manufacturers' maintenance documentation including the following information for each component part or piece of equipment:

1. Standard maintenance instructions and bulletins. 2. Drawings, diagrams, and instructions required for maintenance, including disassembly

and component removal, replacement, and assembly. 3. Identification and nomenclature of parts and components. 4. List of items recommended to be stocked as spare parts.

D. Maintenance Procedures: Include the following information and items that detail essential maintenance procedures:

1. Test and inspection instructions. 2. Troubleshooting guide. 3. Precautions against improper maintenance. 4. Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and reassembly instructions. 5. Aligning, adjusting, and checking instructions. 6. Demonstration and training video recording, if available.

E. Maintenance and Service Schedules: Include service and lubrication requirements, list of required lubricants for equipment, and separate schedules for preventive and routine maintenance and service with standard time allotment.



1. Scheduled Maintenance and Service: Tabulate actions for daily, weekly, monthly, quarterly, semiannual, and annual frequencies.

2. Maintenance and Service Record: Include manufacturers' forms for recording maintenance.

F. Spare Parts List and Source Information: Include lists of replacement and repair parts, with parts identified and cross-referenced to manufacturers' maintenance documentation and local sources of maintenance materials and related services.

G. Maintenance Service Contracts: Include copies of maintenance agreements with name and telephone number of service agent.

H. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.

1. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 MANUAL PREPARATION

A. Emergency Manual: Assemble a complete set of emergency information indicating procedures for use by emergency personnel and by Owner's operating personnel for types of emergencies indicated.

B. Product Maintenance Manual: Assemble a complete set of maintenance data indicating care and maintenance of each product, material, and finish incorporated into the Work.

C. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Assemble a complete set of operation and maintenance data indicating operation and maintenance of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system.

1. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to assemble and prepare information for each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system.

2. Prepare a separate manual for each system and subsystem, in the form of an instructional manual for use by Owner's operating personnel.

D. Manufacturers' Data: Where manuals contain manufacturers' standard printed data, include only sheets pertinent to product or component installed. Mark each sheet to identify each product or component incorporated into the Work. If data include more than one (1) item in a tabular format, identify each item using appropriate references from the Contract Documents. Identify data applicable to the Work and delete references to information not applicable.

1. Prepare supplementary text if manufacturers' standard printed data are not available and where the information is necessary for proper operation and maintenance of equipment or systems.

E. Drawings: Prepare drawings supplementing manufacturers' printed data to illustrate the relationship of component parts of equipment and systems and to illustrate control sequence and



flow diagrams. Coordinate these drawings with information contained in record Drawings to ensure correct illustration of completed installation.

1. Do not use original project record documents as part of operation and maintenance manuals.

2. Comply with requirements of newly prepared record Drawings in Section 017839 "Project Record Documents."

F. Comply with Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures" for schedule for submitting operation and maintenance documentation.


PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS


SECTION 017839 - PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for project record documents, including the following:

1. Record Drawings. 2. Record Specifications. 3. Record Product Data. 4. Miscellaneous record submittals.


1. Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures" for general closeout procedures. 2. Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance

manual requirements. 3. Divisions 02 through 49 Sections for specific requirements for project record documents

of the Work in those Sections.


A. Record Drawings: Comply with the following:

1. Number of Copies: Submit one (1) set(s) of marked-up record prints.

B. Record Specifications: Submit one (1) paper copy of Project's Specifications, including addenda and contract modifications.

C. Record Product Data: Submit one (1) paper copy of each submittal.

1. Where record Product Data are required as part of operation and maintenance manuals, submit duplicate marked-up Product Data as a component of manual.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 RECORD DRAWINGS

A. Record Prints: Maintain one (1) set of marked-up paper copies of the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings.



1. Preparation: Mark record prints to show the actual installation where installation varies from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data, whether individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to provide information for preparation of corresponding marked-up record prints.

a. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that would be difficult to identify or measure and record later.

b. Accurately record information in an acceptable drawing technique. c. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it. d. Record and check the markup before enclosing concealed installations. e. Cross-reference record prints to corresponding archive photographic

documentation.

2. Content: Types of items requiring marking include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Dimensional changes to Drawings. b. Revisions to details shown on Drawings. c. Revisions to routing of piping and conduits. d. Revisions to electrical circuitry. e. Actual equipment locations. f. Duct size and routing. g. Locations of concealed internal utilities. h. Changes made by Change Order or Construction Change Directive. i. Changes made following Architect's written orders. j. Details not on the original Contract Drawings. k. Field records for variable and concealed conditions. l. Record information on the Work that is shown only schematically.

3. Mark the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings completely and accurately. Utilize personnel proficient at recording graphic information in production of marked-up record prints.

4. Mark record sets with erasable, red-colored pencil. Use other colors to distinguish between changes for different categories of the Work at same location.

5. Mark important additional information that was either shown schematically or omitted from original Drawings.

6. Note Construction Change Directive numbers, alternate numbers, Change Order numbers, and similar identification, where applicable.

B. Format: Identify and date each record Drawing; include the designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWING" in a prominent location.

1. Record Prints: Organize record prints and newly prepared record Drawings into manageable sets. Bind each set with durable paper cover sheets. Include identification on cover sheets.

2. Format: Paper copy. 3. Identification: As follows:

a. Project name. b. Date. c. Designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS." d. Name of Architect.



e. Name of Contractor.

2.2 RECORD SPECIFICATIONS

A. Preparation: Mark Specifications to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies from that indicated in Specifications, addenda, and contract modifications.

1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later.

2. Mark copy with the proprietary name and model number of products, materials, and equipment furnished, including substitutions and product options selected.

3. Record the name of manufacturer, supplier, Installer, and other information necessary to provide a record of selections made.

4. For each principal product, indicate whether record Product Data has been submitted in operation and maintenance manuals instead of submitted as record Product Data.

5. Note related Change Orders, record Product Data, and record Drawings where applicable.

B. Format: Submit record Specifications as paper copy.

2.3 RECORD PRODUCT DATA

A. Preparation: Mark Product Data to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies substantially from that indicated in Product Data submittal.

1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later.

2. Include significant changes in the product delivered to Project site and changes in manufacturer's written instructions for installation.

3. Note related Change Orders, record Specifications, and record Drawings where applicable.

B. Format: Submit record Product Data as paper copy.

1. Include record Product Data directory organized by specification section number and title, electronically linked to each item of record Product Data.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 RECORDING AND MAINTENANCE

A. Recording: Maintain one (1) copy of each submittal during the construction period for project record document purposes. Post changes and modifications to project record documents as they occur; do not wait until the end of Project.

B. Maintenance of Record Documents and Samples: Store record documents and Samples in the field office apart from the Contract Documents used for construction. Do not use project record documents for construction purposes. Maintain record documents in good order and in a clean, dry, legible condition, protected from deterioration and loss. Provide access to project record documents for Architect's reference during normal working hours.




DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING


SECTION 017900 - DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for instructing Owner's personnel, including the following:

1. Demonstration of operation of systems, subsystems, and equipment. 2. Training in operation and maintenance of systems, subsystems, and equipment.


1. Divisions 02 through 49 Sections for specific requirements for demonstration and training for products in those Sections.


A. Instruction Program: Submit outline of instructional program for demonstration and training, including a list of training modules and a schedule of proposed dates, times, length of instruction time, and instructors' names for each training module. Include learning objective and outline for each training module.

B. Attendance Record: For each training module, submit list of participants and length of instruction time.

C. Evaluations: For each participant and for each training module, submit results and documentation of performance-based test.


A. Facilitator Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in training or educating maintenance personnel in a training program similar in content and extent to that indicated for this Project, and whose work has resulted in training or education with a record of successful learning performance.

B. Instructor Qualifications: A factory-authorized service representative, complying with requirements in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements," experienced in operation and maintenance procedures and training.

C. Preinstruction Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Section 011000 "Summary of Work". Review methods and procedures related to demonstration and training including, but not limited to, the following:



1. Inspect and discuss locations and other facilities required for instruction. 2. Review and finalize instruction schedule and verify availability of educational materials,

instructors' personnel, audiovisual equipment, and facilities needed to avoid delays. 3. Review required content of instruction. 4. For instruction that must occur outside, review weather and forecasted weather conditions

and procedures to follow if conditions are unfavorable.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate instruction schedule with Owner's operations. Adjust schedule as required to minimize disrupting Owner's operations.

B. Coordinate instructors, including providing notification of dates, times, length of instruction time, and course content.

C. Coordinate content of training modules with content of approved emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. Do not submit instruction program until operation and maintenance data has been reviewed and approved by Architect.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 INSTRUCTION PROGRAM

A. Program Structure: Develop an instruction program that includes individual training modules for each system and for equipment not part of a system, as required by individual Specification Sections.

B. Training Modules: Develop a learning objective and teaching outline for each module. Include a description of specific skills and knowledge that participant is expected to master. For each module, include instruction for the following as applicable to the system, equipment, or component:

1. Basis of System Design, Operational Requirements, and Criteria: Include the following:

a. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions. b. Performance and design criteria if Contractor is delegated design responsibility. c. Operating standards. d. Regulatory requirements. e. Equipment function. f. Operating characteristics. g. Limiting conditions. h. Performance curves.

2. Documentation: Review the following items in detail:

a. Emergency manuals. b. Operations manuals. c. Maintenance manuals. d. Project record documents. e. Identification systems.



f. Warranties and bonds. g. Maintenance service agreements and similar continuing commitments.

3. Emergencies: Include the following, as applicable:

a. Instructions on meaning of warnings, trouble indications, and error messages. b. Instructions on stopping. c. Shutdown instructions for each type of emergency. d. Operating instructions for conditions outside of normal operating limits. e. Sequences for electric or electronic systems. f. Special operating instructions and procedures.

4. Operations: Include the following, as applicable:

a. Startup procedures. b. Equipment or system break-in procedures. c. Routine and normal operating instructions. d. Regulation and control procedures. e. Control sequences. f. Safety procedures. g. Instructions on stopping. h. Normal shutdown instructions. i. Operating procedures for emergencies. j. Operating procedures for system, subsystem, or equipment failure. k. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions. l. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems. m. Special operating instructions and procedures.

5. Adjustments: Include the following:

a. Alignments. b. Checking adjustments. c. Noise and vibration adjustments. d. Economy and efficiency adjustments.

6. Troubleshooting: Include the following:

a. Diagnostic instructions. b. Test and inspection procedures.

7. Maintenance: Include the following:

a. Inspection procedures. b. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning. c. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product. d. Procedures for routine cleaning e. Procedures for preventive maintenance. f. Procedures for routine maintenance. g. Instruction on use of special tools.

8. Repairs: Include the following:



a. Diagnosis instructions. b. Repair instructions. c. Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and reassembly

instructions. d. Instructions for identifying parts and components. e. Review of spare parts needed for operation and maintenance.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Assemble educational materials necessary for instruction, including documentation and training module. Assemble training modules into a training manual organized in coordination with requirements in Section 017823 "Operations and Maintenance Data."

B. Set up instructional equipment at instruction location.

3.2 INSTRUCTION

A. Facilitator: Engage a qualified facilitator to prepare instruction program and training modules, to coordinate instructors, and to coordinate between Contractor and Owner for number of participants, instruction times, and location.

B. Engage qualified instructors to instruct Owner's personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain systems, subsystems, and equipment not part of a system.

1. Architect will furnish an instructor to describe basis of system design, operational requirements, criteria, and regulatory requirements.

2. Owner will furnish Contractor with names and positions of participants.

C. Scheduling: Provide instruction at mutually agreed on times. For equipment that requires seasonal operation, provide similar instruction at start of each season.

1. Schedule training with Owner, with at least seven (7) days advance notice.

D. Evaluation: At conclusion of each training module, assess and document each participant's mastery of module by use of a demonstration performance-based test.

E. Cleanup: Collect used and leftover educational materials and give to Owner. Remove instructional equipment. Restore systems and equipment to condition existing before initial training use.


SELECTIVE DEMOLITION


SECTION 024119 - SELECTIVE DEMOLITION

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Demolition and removal of selected portions of building or structure. 2. Salvage of existing items to be reused or recycled.


1. Section 011000 "Summary of Work" for restrictions on use of the premises, Owner-occupancy requirements, and phasing requirements.

2. Section 017300 "Execution" for cutting and patching procedures.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Remove: Detach items from existing construction and dispose of them off-site unless indicated to be salvaged or reinstalled.

B. Remove and Salvage: Detach items from existing construction, in a manner to prevent damage, and deliver to Owner ready for reuse.

C. Remove and Reinstall: Detach items from existing construction, in a manner to prevent damage, prepare for reuse, and reinstall where indicated.

D. Remove and Replace: Detach items from existing construction and dispose of them off-site unless indicated to be salvaged or reinstalled. Provide and install new items as specified.

E. Existing to Remain: Leave existing items that are not to be removed and that are not otherwise indicated to be salvaged or reinstalled.

F. Dismantle: To remove by disassembling or detaching an item from a surface, using gentle methods and equipment to prevent damage to the item and surfaces; disposing of items unless indicated to be salvaged or reinstalled.

1.4 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP

A. Unless otherwise indicated, demolition waste becomes property of Contractor.

B. Historic items, relics, antiques, and similar objects including, but not limited to, cornerstones and their contents, commemorative plaques and tablets, and other items of interest or value to Owner that may be uncovered during demolition remain the property of Owner.



1. Carefully salvage in a manner to prevent damage and promptly return to Owner.

1.5 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS

A. Predemolition Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1. Inspect and discuss condition of construction to be selectively demolished. 2. Review structural load limitations of existing structure. 3. Review and finalize selective demolition schedule and verify availability of materials,

demolition personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.

4. Review requirements of work performed by other trades that rely on substrates exposed by selective demolition operations.

5. Review areas where existing construction is to remain and requires protection.


A. Qualification Data: For refrigerant recovery technician.

B. Proposed Protection Measures: Submit report, including Drawings, that indicates the measures proposed for protecting individuals and property, for environmental protection, for dust control and for noise control. Indicate proposed locations and construction of barriers.

C. Schedule of Selective Demolition Activities: Indicate the following:

1. Detailed sequence of selective demolition and removal work, with starting and ending dates for each activity. Ensure Owner's on-site operations are uninterrupted.

2. Interruption of utility services. Indicate how long utility services will be interrupted. 3. Coordination for shutoff, capping, and continuation of utility services. 4. Use of elevator and stairs. 5. Coordination of Owner's continuing occupancy of portions of existing building and of

Owner's partial occupancy of completed Work.

D. Predemolition Photographs: Show existing conditions of adjoining construction, including finish surfaces, that might be misconstrued as damage caused by demolition operations. Comply with Section 013233 "Photographic Documentation." Submit before Work begins.

E. Statement of Refrigerant Recovery: Signed by refrigerant recovery technician responsible for recovering refrigerant, stating that all refrigerant that was present was recovered and that recovery was performed according to EPA regulations. Include name and address of technician and date refrigerant was recovered.


A. Inventory: Submit a list of items that have been removed and salvaged.

B. Landfill Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of hazardous wastes by a landfill facility licensed to accept hazardous wastes.




A. Refrigerant Recovery Technician Qualifications: Certified by an EPA-approved certification program.

1.9 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Owner and other tenants will occupy portions of building immediately adjacent to selective demolition area. Conduct selective demolition so Owner's operations will not be disrupted.

B. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner as far as practical.

C. Notify Architect of discrepancies between existing conditions and Drawings before proceeding with selective demolition.

D. Hazardous Materials: It is not expected that hazardous materials will be encountered in the Work.

1. If suspected hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb; immediately notify Architect and Owner. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner under a separate contract. Contractor will be required to coordinate with Owner’s vendor.

E. Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site is not permitted.

F. Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them against damage during selective demolition operations.

1. Maintain fire-protection facilities in service during selective demolition operations.

1.10 COORDINATION

A. Arrange selective demolition schedule so as not to interfere with Owner's operations.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before beginning selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Standards: Comply with ASSE A10.6 and NFPA 241.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped before starting selective demolition operations.



B. Review Project Record Documents of existing construction or other existing condition and hazardous material information provided by Owner. Owner does not guarantee that existing conditions are same as those indicated in Project Record Documents.

C. Perform an engineering survey of condition of building to determine whether removing any element might result in structural deficiency or unplanned collapse of any portion of structure or adjacent structures during selective building demolition operations.

1. Perform surveys as the Work progresses to detect hazards resulting from selective demolition activities.

D. Survey of Existing Conditions: Record existing conditions by use of measured drawings and preconstruction photographs.

1. Comply with requirements specified in Section 013233 "Photographic Documentation." 2. Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and salvaged. Provide

photographs of conditions that might be misconstrued as damage caused by salvage operations.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Refrigerant: Before starting demolition, remove refrigerant from mechanical equipment according to 40 CFR 82 and regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.

3.3 UTILITY SERVICES AND MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

A. Existing Services/Systems to Remain: Maintain services/systems indicated to remain and protect them against damage.

B. Existing Services/Systems to Be Removed, Relocated, or Abandoned: Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off utility services and mechanical/electrical systems serving areas to be selectively demolished.

1. Owner will arrange to shut off indicated services/systems when requested by Contractor. 2. If services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, provide

temporary services/systems that bypass area of selective demolition and that maintain continuity of services/systems to other parts of building.

3. Disconnect, demolish, and remove fire-suppression systems, plumbing, and HVAC systems, equipment, and components indicated on Drawings to be removed.

a. Piping to Be Removed: Remove portion of piping indicated to be removed and cap or plug remaining piping with same or compatible piping material.

b. Piping to Be Abandoned in Place: Drain piping and cap or plug piping with same or compatible piping material and leave in place.

c. Equipment to Be Removed: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment. d. Equipment to Be Removed and Reinstalled: Disconnect and cap services and

remove, clean, and store equipment; when appropriate, reinstall, reconnect, and make equipment operational.

e. Equipment to Be Removed and Salvaged: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment and deliver to Owner.



f. Ducts to Be Removed: Remove portion of ducts indicated to be removed and plug remaining ducts with same or compatible ductwork material.

g. Ducts to Be Abandoned in Place: Cap or plug ducts with same or compatible ductwork material and leave in place.

3.4 PROTECTION

A. Temporary Protection: Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain.

1. Provide protection to ensure safe passage of people around selective demolition area and to and from occupied portions of building.

2. Provide temporary weather protection, during interval between selective demolition of existing construction on exterior surfaces and new construction, to prevent water leakage and damage to structure and interior areas.

3. Protect walls, ceilings, floors, and other existing finish work that are to remain or that are exposed during selective demolition operations.

4. Cover and protect furniture, furnishings, and equipment that have not been removed. 5. Comply with requirements for temporary enclosures, dust control, heating, and cooling

specified in Section 015000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls."

B. Remove temporary barricades and protections where hazards no longer exist.

3.5 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION, GENERAL

A. General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of governing regulations and as follows:

1. Proceed with selective demolition systematically, from higher to lower level. Complete selective demolition operations above each floor or tier before disturbing supporting members on the next lower level.

2. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction. Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping. Temporarily cover openings to remain.

3. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring existing finished surfaces.

4. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At concealed spaces, such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents of hidden space before starting flame-cutting operations. Maintain portable fire-suppression devices during flame-cutting operations.

5. Maintain adequate ventilation when using cutting torches. 6. Remove decayed, vermin-infested, or otherwise dangerous or unsuitable materials and

promptly dispose of off-site. 7. Remove structural framing members and lower to ground by method suitable to avoid

free fall and to prevent ground impact or dust generation. 8. Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to

impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing.



9. All removed materials and rubbish shall be constantly sprinkled with water or other dusting agent to mitigate dust. Provide drop cloths or other type of coverings to prevent infiltration of dust to other parts of the existing building.

10. Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly.

B. Removed and Salvaged Items:

1. Clean salvaged items. 2. Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers. 3. Store items in a secure area until delivery to Owner. 4. Transport items to Owner's storage area designated by Owner. 5. Protect items from damage during transport and storage.

C. Removed and Reinstalled Items:

1. Clean and repair items to functional condition adequate for intended reuse. 2. Pack or crate items after cleaning and repairing. Identify contents of containers. 3. Protect items from damage during transport and storage. 4. Reinstall items in locations indicated. Comply with installation requirements for new

materials and equipment. Provide connections, supports, and miscellaneous materials necessary to make item functional for use indicated.

D. Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling during selective demolition. When permitted by Architect, items may be removed to a suitable, protected storage location during selective demolition and cleaned and reinstalled in their original locations after selective demolition operations are complete.

3.6 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PROCEDURES FOR SPECIFIC MATERIALS

A. Resilient Floor Coverings: Remove floor coverings and adhesive according to recommendations in RFCI's "Recommended Work Practices for the Removal of Resilient Floor Coverings."

3.7 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS

A. Remove demolition waste materials from Project site and dispose of them in an EPA-approved construction and demolition waste landfill acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site. 2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces

and areas. 3. Remove debris from elevated portions of building by chute, hoist, or other device that

will convey debris to grade level in a controlled descent.

B. Burning: Do not burn demolished materials.

3.8 CLEANING

A. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demolition operations began.




CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE


SECTION 033000 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes cast-in-place concrete, including reinforcement, concrete materials, mixture design, placement procedures, and finishes.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with one (1) or more of the following: blended hydraulic cement, fly ash, slag cement, other pozzolans, and silica fume; materials subject to compliance with requirements.

B. W/C Ratio: The ratio by weight of water to cementitious materials.


A. Product Data: For each type of product.

B. Design Mixtures: For each concrete mixture. Submit alternate design mixtures when characteristics of materials, Project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant adjustments.

1. Indicate amounts of mixing water to be withheld for later addition at Project site.

C. Steel Reinforcement Shop Drawings: Placing Drawings that detail fabrication, bending, and placement. Include bar sizes, lengths, material, grade, bar schedules, stirrup spacing, bent bar diagrams, bar arrangement, splices and laps, mechanical connections, tie spacing, hoop spacing, and supports for concrete reinforcement.


A. Qualification Data: For Installer, manufacturer, and testing agency.

B. Material Certificates: For each of the following, signed by manufacturers:

1. Cementitious materials. 2. Admixtures. 3. Steel reinforcement and accessories. 4. Curing compounds. 5. Bonding agents. 6. Adhesives. 7. Semi-rigid joint filler.



8. Joint-filler strips. 9. Repair materials.

C. Material Test Reports: For the following, from a qualified testing agency:

1. Aggregates: Include service record data indicating absence of deleterious expansion of concrete due to alkali aggregate reactivity.

D. Field quality-control reports.


A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs on Project personnel qualified as ACI-certified Flatwork Technician and Finisher and a supervisor who is an ACI-certified Concrete Flatwork Technician.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed concrete products and that complies with ASTM C 94 requirements for production facilities and equipment.

1. Manufacturer certified according to NRMCA's "Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete Production Facilities."

C. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, qualified according to ASTM C 1077 and ASTM E 329 for testing indicated.

1. Personnel conducting field tests shall be qualified as ACI Concrete Field-Testing Technician, Grade 1, according to ACI CP-1 or an equivalent certification program.

2. Personnel performing laboratory tests shall be ACI-certified Concrete Strength Testing Technician and Concrete Laboratory Testing Technician, Grade I. Testing agency laboratory supervisor shall be an ACI-certified Concrete Laboratory Testing Technician, Grade II.

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Steel Reinforcement: Deliver, store, and handle steel reinforcement to prevent bending and damage.


A. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1 and as follows. Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures.

1. When average high and low temperature is expected to fall below 40 deg F (4.4 deg C) for three (3) successive days, maintain delivered concrete mixture temperature within the temperature range required by ACI 301.

2. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials.

3. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or chemical accelerators unless otherwise specified and approved in mixture designs.



B. Hot-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301 and as follows:

1. Maintain concrete temperature below 90 deg F (32 deg C) at time of placement. Chilled mixing water or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option.

2. Fog-spray forms, steel reinforcement, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep subgrade uniformly moist without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CONCRETE, GENERAL

A. ACI Publications: Comply with the following unless modified by requirements in the Contract Documents:

1. ACI 301, “Specifications for Structural Concrete,” Sections 1 through 5. 2. ACI 117, “Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials.”

2.2 STEEL REINFORCEMENT

A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615, Grade 60, deformed.

2.3 REINFORCEMENT ACCESSORIES

A. Joint Dowel Bars: ASTM A 615, Grade 60, plain-steel bars, cut true to length with ends square and free of burrs.

B. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars and welded-wire reinforcement in place. Manufacture bar supports from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice," of greater compressive strength than concrete and as follows:

1. For concrete surfaces exposed to view, where legs of wire bar supports contact forms, use CRSI Class 1 plastic-protected steel wire or CRSI Class 2 stainless-steel bar supports.

2.4 CONCRETE MATERIALS

A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type or class of cementitious material of the same brand from the same manufacturer's plant, obtain aggregate from single source, and obtain admixtures from single source from single manufacturer.

B. Cementitious Materials:

1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I/II, gray. 2. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class F.

C. Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33, Class 3S coarse aggregate or better, graded. Provide aggregates from a single source with documented service record data of at least ten (10) years' satisfactory service in similar applications and service conditions using similar aggregates and cementitious materials.



1. Maximum Coarse-Aggregate Size: ¾-inch nominal. 2. Fine Aggregate: Free of materials with deleterious reactivity to alkali in cement.

D. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260.

E. Chemical Admixtures: Certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures and that do not contribute water-soluble chloride ions exceeding those permitted in hardened concrete. Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium chloride.

1. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type A. 2. Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type B. 3. Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type D. 4. High-Range, Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type F. 5. High-Range, Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type G. 6. Plasticizing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 1017, Type II.

F. Water: ASTM C 94 and potable.

2.5 CURING MATERIALS

A. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing approximately 9 oz./sq. yd. when dry.

B. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene sheet.

C. Water: Potable.

D. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B, non-dissipating.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. BASF Construction Chemicals - Building Systems; Kure-N-Seal WB b. ChemMasters; Safe-Cure & Seal 20 c. Dayton Superior Corporation; Safe Cure and Seal (J-18) d. Euclid Chemical Company (The), an RPM company; Aqua Cure VOX;

Clearseal WB 150 e. Meadows, W. R., Inc.; Vocomp-20 f. Vexcon Chemicals, Inc.; Starseal 309 g. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 012500 “Substitution Procedures”.

2.6 RELATED MATERIALS

A. Bonding Agent: ASTM C 1059, Type II, non-redispersible, acrylic emulsion or styrene butadiene.

B. Dovetail Anchor Slots: Hot-dip galvanized-steel sheet, not less than 0.034-inch-thick, with bent tab anchors. Temporarily fill or cover face opening of slots to prevent intrusion of concrete or debris.



2.7 CONCRETE MIXTURES, GENERAL

A. Prepare design mixtures for each type and strength of concrete, proportioned on the basis of laboratory trial mixture or field test data, or both, according to ACI 301.

1. Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed mixture designs based on laboratory trial mixtures.

B. Cementitious Materials: Limit percentage, by weight, of cementitious materials other than portland cement in concrete as follows:

1. Fly Ash: Twenty-five percent (25%).

C. Limit water-soluble, chloride-ion content in hardened concrete to 0.30 percent by weight of cement.

D. Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Use high-range water-reducing admixture in concrete, as required, for placement and workability.

2. Use water-reducing and -retarding admixture when required by high temperatures, low humidity, or other adverse placement conditions.

3. Use water-reducing admixture in pumped concrete, concrete required to be watertight, and concrete with a w/c ratio below 0.50.

2.8 CONCRETE MIXTURES FOR BUILDING ELEMENTS

A. Footings and Foundation Walls: Proportion normal-weight concrete mixture as follows:

1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 4000 psi at twenty-eight (28) days. 2. Slump Limit: 4 inches for concrete with verified slump of 2 to 4 inches before adding

high-range water-reducing admixture or plasticizing admixture, plus or minus 1-inch. 3. Air Content: Six percent (6%), plus or minus one and one-half percent (+/-1.5%) at point

of delivery for ¾-inch nominal maximum aggregate size.

2.9 FABRICATING REINFORCEMENT

A. Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice."

2.10 CONCRETE MIXING

A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to ASTM C 94, and furnish batch ticket information.

1. When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F (30 and 32 deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time from 1½ hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F (32 deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EMBEDDED ITEM INSTALLATION

A. Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining work that is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.

1. Install anchor rods, accurately located, to elevations required and complying with tolerances in Section 7.5 of AISC 303.

2. Install dovetail anchor slots in concrete structures as indicated.

3.2 STEEL REINFORCEMENT INSTALLATION

A. General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for fabricating, placing, and supporting reinforcement.

B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other foreign materials that reduce bond to concrete.

C. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. Locate and support reinforcement with bar supports to maintain minimum concrete cover. Do not tack weld crossing reinforcing bars.

1. Weld reinforcing bars according to AWS D1.4, where indicated.

D. Set wire ties with ends directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces.

3.3 JOINTS

A. General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete.

B. Construction Joints: Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at locations indicated or as approved by Architect.

1. Place joints perpendicular to main reinforcement. Continue reinforcement across construction joints unless otherwise indicated.

2. Form keyed joints as indicated. Embed keys at least 1½ inches into concrete. 3. Space vertical joints in walls 50 feet o.c. Locate joints beside piers integral with walls,

near corners, and in concealed locations where possible. 4. Use a bonding agent at locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened or

partially hardened concrete surfaces.

C. Doweled Joints: Install dowel bars and support assemblies at joints where indicated. Lubricate or asphalt coat one-half of dowel length to prevent concrete bonding to one (1) side of joint.

3.4 CONCRETE PLACEMENT

A. Before placing concrete, verify that installation of formwork, reinforcement, and embedded items is complete and that required inspections are completed.



B. Do not add water to concrete during delivery, at Project site, or during placement unless approved by Architect.

C. Before test sampling and placing concrete, water may be added at Project site, subject to limitations of ACI 301.

1. Do not add water to concrete after adding high-range water-reducing admixtures to mixture.

D. Deposit concrete continuously in one (1) layer or in horizontal layers of such thickness that no new concrete is placed on concrete that has hardened enough to cause seams or planes of weakness. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as indicated. Deposit concrete to avoid segregation.

1. Deposit concrete in horizontal layers of depth not to exceed formwork design pressures and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints.

2. Consolidate placed concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment according to ACI 301. 3. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators

vertically at uniformly spaced locations to rapidly penetrate placed layer and at least 6 inches into preceding layer. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have begun to lose plasticity. At each insertion, limit duration of vibration to time necessary to consolidate concrete and complete embedment of reinforcement and other embedded items without causing mixture constituents to segregate.

3.5 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEM INSTALLATION

A. Filling In: Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures after work of other trades is in place unless otherwise indicated. Mix, place, and cure concrete, as specified, to blend with in-place construction. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling indicated or required to complete the Work.

3.6 CONCRETE PROTECTING AND CURING

A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection and ACI 301 for hot-weather protection during curing.

B. Unformed Surfaces: Begin curing immediately after finishing concrete.

C. Cure concrete according to ACI 308.1, by one (1) or a combination of the following methods:

1. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven (7) days with the following materials:

a. Water. b. Continuous water-fog spray. c. Absorptive cover, water saturated, and kept continuously wet. Cover concrete

surfaces and edges with 12-inch lap over adjacent absorptive covers.

2. Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at



least 12 inches, and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Cure for not less than seven (7) days. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period, using cover material and waterproof tape.

3. Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within 3 hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period.

a. Removal: After curing period has elapsed, remove curing compound without damaging concrete surfaces by method recommended by curing compound manufacturer.

3.7 JOINT FILLING

A. Prepare, clean, and install joint filler according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Defer joint filling until concrete has aged at least 6 months. Do not fill joints until construction traffic has permanently ceased.

B. Remove dirt, debris, saw cuttings, curing compounds, and sealers from joints; leave contact faces of joints clean and dry.

C. Install semi-rigid joint filler full depth in saw-cut joints and at least 2 inches deep in formed joints. Overfill joint and trim joint filler flush with top of joint after hardening.

3.8 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS

A. Defective Concrete: Repair and patch defective areas when approved by Architect. Remove and replace concrete that cannot be repaired and patched to Architect's approval.

B. Patching Mortar: Mix dry-pack patching mortar, consisting of one (1) part Portland cement to two and one-half (2½) parts fine aggregate passing a No. 16 sieve, using only enough water for handling and placing.

C. Repairing Unformed Surfaces: Test unformed surfaces for finish and verify surface tolerances specified for each surface. Correct low and high areas. Test surfaces sloped to drain for trueness of slope and smoothness; use a sloped template.

1. Repair finished surfaces containing defects. Surface defects include spalls, popouts, honeycombs, rock pockets, crazing and cracks in excess of 0.01-inch-wide or that penetrate to reinforcement or completely through unreinforced sections regardless of width, and other objectionable conditions.

2. After concrete has cured at least fourteen (14) days, correct high areas by grinding. 3. Correct localized low areas during or immediately after completing surface finishing

operations by cutting out low areas and replacing with patching mortar. Finish repaired areas to blend into adjacent concrete.

4. Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes 1-inch or less in diameter, by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove defective areas with clean, square cuts and expose steel reinforcement with at least a ¾-inch clearance all around. Dampen concrete surfaces in contact with patching concrete and apply bonding agent. Mix patching concrete of same materials and mixture as original concrete, except without



coarse aggregate. Place, compact, and finish to blend with adjacent finished concrete. Cure in same manner as adjacent concrete.

5. Repair random cracks and single holes 1-inch or less in diameter with patching mortar. Groove top of cracks and cut out holes to sound concrete and clean off dust, dirt, and loose particles. Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces and apply bonding agent. Place patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. Compact patching mortar and finish to match adjacent concrete. Keep patched area continuously moist for at least 72 hours.

D. Repair materials and installation not specified above may be used, subject to Architect's approval.

3.9 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Special Inspections: Owner will engage a special inspector and qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

B. Inspections:

1. Headed bolts and studs. 2. Verification of use of required design mixture. 3. Concrete placement, including conveying and depositing. 4. Curing procedures and maintenance of curing temperature.

C. Concrete Tests: Testing of composite samples of fresh concrete obtained according to ASTM C 172 shall be performed according to the following requirements:

1. Testing Frequency: Obtain at least one (1) composite sample for each 100-cu. yd. or fraction thereof of each concrete mixture placed each day.

a. When frequency of testing provides fewer than five (5) compressive-strength tests for each concrete mixture, testing shall be conducted from at least five (5) randomly selected batches or from each batch if fewer than five (5) are used.

2. Slump: ASTM C 143; one (1) test at point of placement for each composite sample, but not less than one (1) test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture. Perform additional tests when concrete consistency appears to change.

3. Air Content: ASTM C 231, pressure method, for normal-weight concrete; one (1) test for each composite sample, but not less than one (1) test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture.

4. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064; one (1) test hourly when air temperature is 40 deg F (4.4 deg C) and below or 80 deg F (27 deg C) and above, and one (1) test for each composite sample.

5. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C 31.

a. Cast and field cure four (4) sets of two (2) standard cylinder specimens for each composite sample.

6. Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C 39.

a. Test one (1) set of two (2) field-cured specimens at seven (7) days and one (1) set of two (2) specimens at twenty-eight (28) days.



b. A compressive-strength test shall be the average compressive strength from a set of two (2) specimens obtained from same composite sample and tested at age indicated.

7. When strength of field-cured cylinders is less than eighty-five percent (85%) of companion laboratory-cured cylinders, Contractor shall evaluate operations and provide corrective procedures for protecting and curing in-place concrete.

8. Strength of each concrete mixture will be satisfactory if every average of any three (3) consecutive compressive-strength tests equals or exceeds specified compressive strength and no compressive-strength test value falls below specified compressive strength by more than 500 psi.

9. Test results shall be reported in writing to Architect, concrete manufacturer, and Contractor within 48 hours of testing. Reports of compressive-strength tests shall contain Project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing and inspecting agency, location of concrete batch in Work, design compressive strength at twenty-eight (28) days, concrete mixture proportions and materials, compressive breaking strength, and type of break for both 7- and 28-day tests.

10. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may be permitted by Architect but will not be used as sole basis for approval or rejection of concrete.

11. Additional Tests: Testing and inspecting agency shall make additional tests of concrete when test results indicate that slump, air entrainment, compressive strengths, or other requirements have not been met, as directed by Architect. Testing and inspecting agency may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42 or by other methods as directed by Architect.

12. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.

13. Correct deficiencies in the Work that test reports and inspections indicate do not comply with the Contract Documents.


HYDRAULIC CEMENT UNDERLAYMENT


SECTION 035416 - HYDRAULIC CEMENT UNDERLAYMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes polymer-modified, self-leveling, hydraulic cement underlayment.



B. Shop Drawings: Include plans indicating substrates, locations, and average depths of underlayment based on survey of substrate conditions.


A. Qualification Data: For Installer.


A. Installer Qualifications: Installer who is approved by manufacturer for application of underlayment products required for this Project.


A. Store materials to comply with manufacturer's written instructions to prevent deterioration from moisture or other detrimental effects.


A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for substrate temperature, ventilation, ambient temperature and humidity, and other conditions affecting underlayment performance.

1. Place hydraulic cement underlayments only when ambient temperature and temperature of substrates are between 50 and 80 deg F (10 and 27 deg C).

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Comply with ASTM E 119; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.



1. Indicate design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" or from the listings of another qualified testing agency.

2.2 HYDRAULIC CEMENT UNDERLAYMENTS

A. Hydraulic Cement Underlayment: Polymer-modified, self-leveling, hydraulic cement product that can be applied in minimum uniform thickness of ¼-inch and that can be feathered at edges to match adjacent floor elevations.

1. Basis-of-Design:

a. Ardex Americas; Ardex K 520

2. Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Euclid Chemical Company (The) b. Maxxon Corporation c. USG Corporation d. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 012500 “Substitution Procedures”.

3. Cement Binder: ASTM C 150, Portland cement, or hydraulic or blended hydraulic cement as defined by ASTM C 219.

4. Compressive Strength: Not less than 6000 psi at twenty-eight (28) days when tested according to ASTM C 109.

B. Aggregate: Well-graded, washed gravel, 1/8- to ¼-inch; or coarse sand as recommended by underlayment manufacturer.

1. Provide aggregate when recommended in writing by underlayment manufacturer for underlayment thickness required.

C. Water: Potable and at a temperature of not more than 70 deg F (21 deg C).

D. Primer: Product of underlayment manufacturer recommended in writing for substrate, conditions, and application indicated.

E. Surface Sealer: Designed to reduce porosity as recommended by manufacturer for type of floor covering to be applied to underlayment.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Proceed with application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. General: Prepare and clean substrate according to manufacturer's written instructions.



1. Treat nonmoving substrate cracks according to manufacturer's written instructions to prevent cracks from telegraphing (reflecting) through underlayment.

2. Fill substrate voids to prevent underlayment from leaking.

B. Concrete Substrates: Mechanically remove, according to manufacturer's written instructions, laitance, glaze, efflorescence, curing compounds, form-release agents, dust, dirt, grease, oil, and other contaminants that might impair underlayment bond.

1. Moisture Testing: Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test, ASTM F 1869. Proceed with installation only after substrates do not exceed a maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate of 3 lb. of water/1000 sq. ft. in 24 hours.

C. Adhesion Tests: After substrate preparation, test substrate for adhesion with underlayment according to manufacturer's written instructions.

3.3 APPLICATION

A. General: Mix and apply underlayment components according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Close areas to traffic during underlayment application and for time period after application recommended in writing by manufacturer.

2. Coordinate application of components to provide optimum adhesion to substrate and between coats.

3. At substrate expansion, isolation, and other moving joints, allow joint of same width to continue through underlayment.

B. Apply primer over prepared substrate at manufacturer's recommended spreading rate.

C. Apply underlayment to produce uniform, level surface.

1. Apply a final layer without aggregate to product surface. 2. Feather edges to match adjacent floor elevations.

D. Cure underlayment according to manufacturer's written instructions. Prevent contamination during application and curing processes.

E. Do not install floor coverings over underlayment until after time period recommended in writing by underlayment manufacturer.

F. Apply surface sealer at rate recommended by manufacturer.

G. Remove and replace underlayment areas that evidence lack of bond with substrate, including areas that emit a "hollow" sound when tapped.

3.4 PROTECTION

A. Protect underlayment from concentrated and rolling loads for remainder of construction period.


METAL FABRICATIONS


SECTION 055000 - METAL FABRICATIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Steel framing and supports for mechanical and electrical equipment. 2. Steel framing and supports for applications where framing and supports are not specified

in other Sections.


A. Product Data: For the following:

1. Fasteners.

B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details. Include plans, elevations, sections, and details of metal fabrications and their connection. Show anchorage and accessory items.

C. Provide Shop Drawings for the following:

1. Steel framing and supports for mechanical and electrical equipment. 2. Steel framing and supports for applications where framing and supports are not specified

in other Sections.


A. Welding certificates.

B. Research Reports: For post-installed anchors.


A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel in accordance with the following:

1. AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."


A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls, floor slabs, decks, and other construction contiguous with metal fabrications by field measurements before fabrication.

METAL FABRICATIONS


PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes acting on exterior metal fabrications by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects.

1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.

2.2 METALS

A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces unless otherwise indicated. For metal fabrications exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or blemishes.

B. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36.

2.3 FASTENERS

A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Type 304 stainless-steel fasteners for exterior use and zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B633 or ASTM F 1941, Class Fe/Zn 5, at exterior walls. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required.

B. Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, ASTM A 307, Grade A; with hex nuts, ASTM A 563; and, where indicated, flat washers.

C. Stainless-Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head annealed stainless steel bolts, ASTM F 593; with hex nuts, ASTM F 594; and, where indicated, flat washers; Alloy Group 1.

D. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F1554, Grade 36, of dimensions indicated; with nuts, ASTM A 563; and, where indicated, flat washers.

1. Hot-dip galvanize or provide mechanically deposited, zinc coating where item being fastened is indicated to be galvanized.

E. Anchors, General: Capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to six (6) times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and four (4) times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing in accordance with ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.

F. Post-Installed Anchors: Torque-controlled expansion anchors.

1. Material for Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941, Class Fe/Zn 5, unless otherwise indicated.

2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint complying with SSPC-Paint 20 and compatible with paints specified to be used over it.

METAL FABRICATIONS


2.5 FABRICATION, GENERAL

A. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in the shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation.

B. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of approximately 1/32-inch unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces.

C. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing work.

D. Form exposed work with accurate angles and surfaces and straight edges.

E. Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with the following:

1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals.

2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no

roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface.

F. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners or welds where possible. Where exposed fasteners are required, use Phillips flat-head (countersunk) fasteners unless otherwise indicated. Locate joints where least conspicuous.

G. Fabricate seams and other connections that are exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate.

H. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap metal fabrications as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar items.

I. Provide for anchorage of type indicated; coordinate with supporting structure. Space anchoring devices to secure metal fabrications rigidly in place and to support indicated loads.

J. Where units are indicated to be cast into concrete or built into masonry, equip with integrally welded steel strap anchors, 1/8 by 1½ inches, with a minimum 6-inch embedment and 2-inch hook, not less than 8 inches from ends and corners of units and 24 inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated.

2.6 MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS

A. General: Provide steel framing and supports not specified in other Sections as needed to complete the Work.

B. Fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of welded construction unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and as necessary to receive adjacent construction.

METAL FABRICATIONS


C. Galvanize miscellaneous framing and supports where indicated.

2.7 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS

A. Finish metal fabrications after assembly.

B. Finish exposed surfaces to remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, and to blend into surrounding surface.

2.8 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES

A. Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with ASTM A 153 for steel and iron hardware and with ASTM A 123 for other steel and iron products.

1. Do not quench or apply post galvanizing treatments that might interfere with paint adhesion.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; with edges and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and measured from established lines and levels.

B. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections.

C. Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements:


2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no

roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface.

D. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where metal fabrications are required to be fastened to in-place construction. Provide threaded fasteners for use with concrete and masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through bolts, lag screws, wood screws, and other connectors.

E. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete, masonry, or similar construction.

METAL FABRICATIONS


3.2 INSTALLATION OF MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS

A. General: Install framing and supports to comply with requirements of items being supported, including manufacturers' written instructions and requirements indicated on Shop Drawings.

3.3 REPAIRS

A. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780.


ROUGH CARPENTRY


SECTION 061000 - ROUGH CARPENTRY

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Wood blocking and nailers. 2. Plywood backing panels.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Boards or Strips: Lumber of less than 2 inches nominal size in least dimension.

B. Exposed Framing: Framing not concealed by other construction.

C. Dimension Lumber: Lumber of 2 inches nominal or greater but less than 5 inches nominal in least dimension.

D. Lumber grading agencies, and the abbreviations used to reference them, include the following:

1. NeLMA: Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers' Association. 2. NLGA: National Lumber Grades Authority. 3. WCLIB: West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau. 4. WWPA: Western Wood Products Association.


A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component materials and dimensions and include construction and application details.

1. Include data for wood-preservative treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Indicate type of preservative used and net amount of preservative retained.

2. Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Include physical properties of treated materials based on testing by a qualified independent testing agency.

3. For fire-retardant treatments, include physical properties of treated lumber both before and after exposure to elevated temperatures, based on testing by a qualified independent testing agency according to ASTM D 5664.

4. Include copies of warranties from chemical treatment manufacturers for each type of treatment.

ROUGH CARPENTRY



A. Evaluation Reports: For the following, from ICC-ES:

1. Wood-preservative-treated wood. 2. Fire-retardant-treated wood. 3. Power-driven fasteners. 4. Post-installed anchors.


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agency providing classification marking for fire-retardant treated material, an inspection agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that periodically performs inspections to verify that the material bearing the classification marking is representative of the material tested.


A. Stack wood products flat with spacers beneath and between each bundle to provide air circulation. Protect lumber from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting, securely anchored. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL

A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading agency is indicated, provide lumber that complies with the applicable rules of any rules-writing agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review. Provide lumber graded by an agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated.

1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency. 2. Where nominal sizes are indicated, provide actual sizes required by DOC PS 20 for

moisture content specified. Where actual sizes are indicated, they are minimum dressed sizes for dry lumber.

B. Maximum Moisture Content of Lumber: Fifteen percent (15%) unless otherwise indicated.

2.2 WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED LUMBER

A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA U1; Use Category UC2 for interior construction not in contact with the ground, Use Category UC3b for exterior construction not in contact with the ground, and Use Category UC4a for items in contact with the ground.

1. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and containing no arsenic or chromium.

B. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of fifteen percent (15%). Do not use material that is warped or that does not comply with requirements for untreated material.

ROUGH CARPENTRY


C. Mark lumber with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the ALSC Board of Review.

D. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following:

1. Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, furring, stripping, and similar concealed members in contact with masonry or concrete.

2. Wood framing and furring attached directly to the interior of below-grade exterior masonry or concrete walls.

2.3 FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED MATERIALS

A. General: Where fire-retardant-treated materials are indicated, materials shall comply with requirements in this article, that are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and with fire-test-response characteristics specified as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated by a qualified testing agency.

B. Fire-Retardant-Treated Lumber and Plywood by Pressure Process: Products with a flame spread index of 25 or less when tested according to ASTM E 84, and with no evidence of significant progressive combustion when the test is extended an additional 20 minutes, and with the flame front not extending more than 10.5 feet beyond the centerline of the burners at any time during the test.

1. Treatment shall not promote corrosion of metal fasteners. 2. Treated materials shall comply with requirements specified above for fire-retardant-

treated lumber and plywood by pressure process after being subjected to accelerated weathering according to ASTM D 2898. Use for all locations and where indicated.

3. Design Value Adjustment Factors: Treated lumber shall be tested according ASTM D 5664 and design value adjustment factors shall be calculated according to ASTM D 6841. For enclosed roof framing, framing in attic spaces, and where high temperature fire-retardant treatment is indicated, provide material with adjustment factors of not less than 0.85 modulus of elasticity and 0.75 for extreme fiber in bending for Project's climatological zone.

C. Kiln-dry lumber and plywood after treatment to a maximum moisture content of fifteen percent (15%).

D. Identify fire-retardant-treated wood with appropriate classification marking of qualified testing agency.

E. Application: Treat all rough carpentry unless otherwise indicated.

2.4 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER

A. General: Provide miscellaneous lumber indicated and lumber for support or attachment of other construction, including the following:

1. Blocking. 2. Nailers. 3. Grounds.

ROUGH CARPENTRY


B. Dimension Lumber Items: Standard, Stud, or No. 3 grade lumber of any of the following species:

1. Hem-fir (north); NLGA. 2. Hem-fir; WCLIB or WWPA. 3. Spruce-pine-fir (south); NeLMA, WCLIB, or WWPA.

C. For blocking not used for attachment of other construction, Utility, Stud, or No. 3 grade lumber of any species may be used provided that it is cut and selected to eliminate defects that will interfere with its attachment and purpose.

D. For blocking and nailers used for attachment of other construction, select and cut lumber to eliminate knots and other defects that will interfere with attachment of other work.

2.5 PLYWOOD BACKING PANELS

A. Equipment Backing Panels: DOC PS 1, Exposure 1, C-D Plugged, fire-retardant treated, in thickness indicated or, if not indicated, not less than ¾-inch nominal thickness.

2.6 FASTENERS

A. General: Fasteners shall be of size and type indicated and shall comply with requirements specified in this article for material and manufacture.

1. Where rough carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, pressure-preservative treated, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners of Type 304 stainless-steel.

B. Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F 1667.

C. Power-Driven Fasteners: Fastener systems with an evaluation report acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, based on ICC-ES AC70.

D. Wood Screws: ASME B18.6.1.

E. Lag Bolts: ASME B18.2.1

F. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A; with ASTM A 563 hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers.

G. Post-Installed Anchors: Fastener systems with an evaluation report acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, based on ICC-ES AC01 or ICC-ES AC193 as appropriate for the substrate.

1. Material: Stainless-steel with bolts and nuts complying with ASTM F 593 and ASTM F 594, Alloy Group 1 or 2.

H. Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly of material indicated below with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to six (6) times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry assemblies and equal to four (4) times the load imposed when installed in concrete as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency.

ROUGH CARPENTRY


1. Material: Carbon-steel components, zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Framing Standard: Comply with AF&PA's WCD 1, "Details for Conventional Wood Frame Construction," unless otherwise indicated.

B. Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. Fit rough carpentry accurately to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit. Locate nailers, blocking, and similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching other construction.

C. Install plywood backing panels by fastening to studs; coordinate locations with utilities requiring backing panels. Install fire-retardant treated plywood backing panels with classification marking of testing agency exposed to view.

D. Do not splice structural members between supports unless otherwise indicated.

E. Provide blocking and framing as indicated and as required to support facing materials, fixtures, specialty items, and trim.

F. Sort and select lumber so that natural characteristics will not interfere with installation or with fastening other materials to lumber. Do not use materials with defects that interfere with function of member or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement.

G. Comply with AWPA M4 for applying field treatment to cut surfaces of preservative-treated lumber.

1. Use copper naphthenate for items not continuously protected from liquid water.

H. Securely attach rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated, complying with the following:

1. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's International Building Code (IBC). 2. ICC-ES evaluation report for fastener.

I. Use steel common nails unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that will not fully penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood. Drive nails snug but do not countersink nail heads unless otherwise indicated.

3.2 WOOD BLOCKING AND NAILER INSTALLATION

A. Install where indicated and where required for attaching other work. Form to shapes indicated and cut as required for true line and level of attached work. Coordinate locations with other work involved.

ROUGH CARPENTRY


B. Attach items to substrates to support applied loading. Recess bolts and nuts flush with surfaces unless otherwise indicated.


INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY


SECTION 062023 - INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Interior trim, etc.


1. Section 061000 "Rough Carpentry" for furring, blocking, and other carpentry work not exposed to view.

2. Section 099123 "Interior Painting" for priming and backpriming of interior finish carpentry.

1.3 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related units of Work specified in other Sections to ensure that interior architectural woodwork can be supported and installed as indicated.


A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component materials, dimensions, profiles, textures, and colors and include construction and application details.

B. Shop Drawings: For interior architectural woodwork.

1. Include dimensions, plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details. 2. Show large-scale fabrication details. 3. Show locations and sizes of furring, blocking, and hanging strips, including blocking and

reinforcement concealed by construction and specified in other Sections. 4. Show locations and sizes of cutouts and holes for items installed in architectural

woodwork.

C. Samples: For each type of product involving selection of colors, profiles, or textures and the following:

1. For each species and cut of lumber with non-factory-applied finish, with ½ of exposed surface finished, 50 sq. in.




A. Qualification Data: For fabricator.


A. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom fabricate products similar to those required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in-service performance.


A. Stack lumber, plywood, and other panels flat with spacers between each bundle to provide air circulation.

1. Protect materials from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting, securely anchored. 2. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings.

B. Deliver interior finish carpentry materials only when environmental conditions meet requirements specified for installation areas. If interior finish carpentry materials must be stored in other than installation areas, store only where environmental conditions comply with requirements specified for installation areas.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install interior finish carpentry materials until building is enclosed and weatherproof, wet work in space is completed and nominally dry, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.

B. Do not install finish carpentry materials that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged.

1. Indications that materials are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.

2. Indications that materials are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK, GENERAL

A. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with the "Architectural Woodwork Standards" for grades of interior architectural woodwork indicated for construction, finishes, installation, and other requirements.

2.2 MATERIALS, GENERAL

A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading agency is indicated, comply with the applicable rules of any rules-writing agency certified by the American Lumber Standard Committee's (ALSC) Board of Review. Grade lumber by an agency certified by the ALSC's Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated.



1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency. 2. For exposed lumber, mark grade stamp on end or back of each piece or omit grade stamp

and provide certificates of grade compliance issued by inspection agency.

2.3 INTERIOR WOODWORK

A. Lumber for Opaque Finish (Painted Finish):

1. Species and Grade: Alder, aspen, basswood, cottonwood, gum, magnolia, soft maple, sycamore, tupelo, or yellow poplar; B Finish; NHLA.

2. Maximum Moisture Content: Ten percent (10%). 3. Finger Jointing: Not allowed. 4. Face Surface: Surfaced (smooth).


A. Fasteners for Interior Finish Carpentry: Nails, screws, and other anchoring devices of type, size, material, and finish required for application indicated to provide secure attachment, concealed where possible.

B. Adhesives: Do not use adhesives that contain urea formaldehyde.

1. Multipurpose Construction Adhesive: Formulation complying with ASTM D 3498 that is recommended for indicated use by adhesive manufacturer.

a. Adhesive shall have a VOC content of 70 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

2.5 FABRICATION

A. Back out or kerf backs of the following members except those with ends exposed in finished work:

1. Interior standing and running trim.

B. Ease edges of lumber less than 1-inch in nominal thickness to 1/16-inch radius and edges of lumber 1-inch or more in nominal thickness to 1/8-inch radius.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.

B. Examine finish carpentry materials before installation. Reject materials that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.



3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean substrates of projections and substances detrimental to application.

B. Before installing interior finish carpentry, condition materials to average prevailing humidity in installation areas for a minimum of 24 hours.

C. Prime to be painted, including both faces and edges, unless factory primed. Cut to required lengths and prime ends. Comply with requirements in Section 099123 "Interior Painting."


A. Do not use materials that are unsound, warped, improperly treated or finished, inadequately seasoned, too small to fabricate with proper jointing arrangements, or with defective surfaces, sizes, or patterns.

B. Install interior finish carpentry level, plumb, true, and aligned with adjacent materials.

1. Use concealed shims where necessary for alignment. 2. Scribe and cut interior finish carpentry to fit adjoining work. Refinish and seal cuts as

recommended by manufacturer. 3. Where face fastening is unavoidable, countersink fasteners, fill surface flush, and sand

unless otherwise indicated. 4. Install to tolerance of 1/8-inch in 96 inches for level and plumb. Install adjoining interior

finish carpentry with 1/32-inch maximum offset for flush installation and 1/16-inch maximum offset for reveal installation.

5. Coordinate interior finish carpentry with materials and systems in or adjacent to it. Provide cutouts for mechanical and electrical items that penetrate interior finish carpentry.

3.4 STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM INSTALLATION

A. Install with minimum number of joints practical, using full-length pieces from maximum lengths of lumber available.

1. Do not use pieces less than 24 inches long, except where necessary. 2. Stagger joints in adjacent and related standing and running trim. 3. Miter at returns, miter at outside corners, and cope at inside corners to produce tight-

fitting joints with full-surface contact throughout length of joint. 4. Use scarf joints for end-to-end joints. 5. Plane backs of casings to provide uniform thickness across joints where necessary for

alignment. 6. Install trim after gypsum-board joint finishing operations are completed. 7. Install without splitting; drill pilot holes before fastening where necessary to prevent

splitting. 8. Fasten to prevent movement or warping. 9. Countersink fastener heads on exposed carpentry work and fill holes.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Replace interior finish carpentry that is damaged or does not comply with requirements.



1. Interior finish carpentry may be repaired or refinished if work complies with requirements and shows no evidence of repair or refinishing.

B. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance.

3.6 CLEANING

A. Clean interior finish carpentry on exposed and semi-exposed surfaces.

B. Restore damaged or soiled areas and touch up factory-applied finishes, if any.

3.7 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed products from damage from weather and other causes during construction.

B. Remove and replace finish carpentry materials that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.

1. Indications that materials are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.

2. Indications that materials are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.


PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS


SECTION 064116 - PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Plastic-laminate-clad architectural cabinets and panels. 2. Wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips for installing plastic-laminate-faced

architectural cabinets unless concealed within other construction before cabinet installation.

3. Cabinetry and casework hardware and accessories.


1. Section 061000 "Rough Carpentry" for wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips required for installing cabinets and concealed within other construction before cabinet installation.

1.3 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related units of Work specified in other Sections to support loads imposed by installed and fully loaded cabinets.


A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.



1. Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical-treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details. 2. Show details full size. 3. Show locations and sizes of furring, blocking, and hanging strips, including concealed

blocking and reinforcement specified in other Sections. 4. Show locations and sizes of cutouts and holes for items installed in plastic-laminate

architectural cabinets.



C. Samples:

1. Plastic laminates, 12 by 12 inches, for each type, color, pattern, and surface finish required.

a. Provide one (1) sample applied to core material with specified edge material applied to one (1) edge.

2. Corner pieces as follows:

a. Cabinet-front frame joints between stiles and rails, as well as exposed end pieces, 18 inches high by 18 inches wide by 6 inches deep.

b. Miter joints for standing trim.

3. Exposed cabinet hardware and accessories, one (1) unit for each type and finish.



B. Product Certificates: For the following:

1. Composite wood products. 2. High-pressure decorative laminate. 3. Adhesives.


A. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom fabricate products similar to those required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in-service performance.

B. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of products.


A. Do not deliver cabinets until painting and similar finish operations that might damage architectural cabinets have been completed in installation areas. Store cabinets in installation areas or in areas where environmental conditions comply with requirements specified in "Field Conditions" Article.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install cabinets until building is enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at levels planned for building occupants during the remainder of the construction period.

B. Field Measurements: Where cabinets are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.



1. Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support cabinets by field measurements before being enclosed/concealed by construction, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS

A. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with the "Architectural Woodwork Standards" for grades of cabinets indicated for construction, finishes, installation, and other requirements.

B. Grade: Custom.

C. Type of Construction: Frameless.

D. Door and Drawer Front Interface Style: Reveal overlay.

1. Reveal Dimension: ½-inch.

E. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3, grades as indicated or if not indicated, as required by woodwork quality standard.

1. Basis-of-Design:

a. Arborite

2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Abet Laminati, Inc. b. Formica Corporation c. Lab Designs d. Lamin-Art, Inc. e. Wilsonart International; Div. of Premark International, Inc.

3. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 012500 “Substitution Procedures”.

F. Laminate Cladding for Exposed Surfaces:

1. Horizontal Surfaces: Grade HGS. 2. Vertical Surfaces: Grade HGS. 3. Edges: PVC edge banding, 0.12-inch-thick, matching laminate in color, pattern, and

finish. 4. Pattern Direction: Vertically for drawer fronts, doors, and fixed panels.

G. Materials for Semi-Exposed Surfaces:

1. Surfaces Other Than Drawer Bodies: High-pressure decorative laminate, NEMA LD 3, Grade VGS.



a. Edges of Plastic-Laminate Shelves: PVC edge banding, 0.12-inch-thick, matching laminate in color, pattern, and finish.

b. For semi-exposed backs of panels with exposed plastic-laminate surfaces, provide surface of high-pressure decorative laminate, NEMA LD 3, Grade VGS.

2. Drawer Sides and Backs: Solid-hardwood lumber. 3. Drawer Bottoms: Hardwood plywood.

H. Concealed Backs of Panels with Exposed Plastic-Laminate Surfaces: High-pressure decorative laminate, NEMA LD 3, Grade BKL.

I. Drawer Construction: Fabricate with exposed fronts fastened to subfront with mounting screws from interior of body.

1. Join subfronts, backs, and sides with glued dovetail joints.

J. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors and textures of exposed laminate surfaces complying with the following requirements:

1. PL-1, as selected by Architect and Owner from manufacturer’s entire range.

2.2 WOOD MATERIALS

A. Wood Products: Provide materials that comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for each type of woodwork and quality grade specified unless otherwise indicated.

1. Wood Moisture Content: Five to ten percent (5-10%).

B. Composite Wood Products: Provide materials that comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for each type of architectural cabinet and quality grade specified unless otherwise indicated.

1. Medium-Density Fiberboard (MDF): ANSI A208.2, Grade 130. 2. Veneer-Faced Panel Products (Hardwood Plywood): HPVA HP-1, made with adhesive

containing no urea formaldehyde.

2.3 CABINET HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES

A. Frameless Concealed Hinges (European Type): ANSI/BHMA A156.9, B01602, 170 degrees of opening, self-closing.

B. Wire Pulls: Back mounted, solid metal, 4 inches long, 5/16-inch in diameter.

C. Catches:Roller catches, BHMA A156.9, B03071.

D. Shelf Rests (Pins): BHMA A156.9, B04013; metal.

E. Drawer Slides: BHMA A156.9.

1. Grade 1HD-100 and Grade 1HD-200: Side mounted; full-overtravel-extension type; zinc-plated-steel ball-bearing slides.



2. For drawers more than 3 inches high but not more than 6 inches high and not more than 24 inches wide, provide Grade 1HD-100.

3. For drawers more than 6 inches high or more than 24 inches wide, provide Grade 1HD-200.

F. Door Locks: BHMA A156.11, E07121.

1. Sized for cabinet thickness on the active leaf as indicated in the documents, with two (2) keys master keyed alike, with manufacturer's standard finger operated sash lock on the adjacent inactive leaf (in double door applications). For bidding purposes, the Contractor shall assume that one hundred percent (100%) of all cabinet operating door leaves or pairs of doors shall be locked.

G. Drawer Locks: BHMA A156.11, E07041.

1. Sized for drawer thickness, with two (2) keys master keyed alike. For bidding purposes, the Contractor shall assume that one hundred percent (100%) of all drawers shall be locked.

H. Door and Drawer Silencers: BHMA A156.16, L03011.

I. Exposed Hardware Finishes: For exposed hardware, provide finish that complies with BHMA A156.18 for BHMA finish number indicated.

1. Satin Chromium Plated: BHMA 626 for brass or bronze base; BHMA 652 for steel base. 2. Satin Stainless-Steel: BHMA 630.

J. For concealed hardware, provide manufacturer's standard finish that complies with product class requirements in BHMA A156.9.


A. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Softwood or hardwood lumber, kiln dried to less than fifteen percent (15%) moisture content.

B. Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure anchorage. Provide metal expansion sleeves or expansion bolts for post-installed anchors. Use nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts at inside face of exterior walls and at floors.

C. Adhesives: Do not use adhesives that contain urea formaldehyde.

1. Adhesive for Bonding Plastic Laminate: Contact cement, water based.

a. Adhesive for Bonding Edges: Polyurethane hot-melt adhesive.

2.5 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate cabinets to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated.

B. Complete fabrication, including assembly and hardware application, to maximum extent possible before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for



shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting.

1. Trial fit assemblies at fabrication shop that cannot be shipped completely assembled. Install dowels, screws, bolted connectors, and other fastening devices that can be removed after trial fitting. Verify that various parts fit as intended and check measurements of assemblies against field measurements before disassembling for shipment.

C. Shop-cut openings to maximum extent possible to receive hardware, appliances, electrical work, and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or roughing-in diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Sand edges of cutouts to remove splinters and burrs.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Before installation, condition cabinets to average humidity conditions in installation areas for not less than 72 hours.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Grade: Install cabinets to comply with quality standard grade of items to be installed.

B. Assemble cabinets and complete fabrication at Project site to the extent that it was not completed in the shop.

C. Anchor cabinets to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure with wafer-head cabinet installation screws.

1. Use filler matching finish of items being installed.

D. Install cabinets level, plumb, and true in line to a tolerance of 1/8-inch in 96 inches using concealed shims.

1. Scribe and cut cabinets to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged finish at cuts.

2. Install without distortion so doors and drawers fit openings properly and are accurately aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide unencumbered operation. Complete installation of hardware and accessory items as indicated.

3. Fasten wall cabinets through back, near top and bottom, and at ends not more than 16 inches o.c. with No. 10 wafer-head screws sized for not less than 1½-inch penetration into wood framing, blocking, or hanging strips or No. 10 wafer-head sheet metal screws through metal backing or metal framing behind wall finish.



3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Repair damaged and defective cabinets, where possible, to eliminate functional and visual defects. Where not possible to repair, replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance.

B. Clean, lubricate, and adjust hardware.

C. Clean cabinets on exposed and semi-exposed surfaces.


INSULATED METAL WALL PANELS

Emergency Communications Center Tenant Fit-Out & Renovation – SHU/Fairfield 074213.19-1

SECTION 074213.19 - INSULATED METAL WALL PANELS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Foamed-insulation-core metal wall panels.



1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each type of panel and accessory.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Include fabrication and installation layouts of metal panels; panel profiles, corners, and accessories; and special details.

C. Samples: For each type of exposed finish, prepared on Samples of size indicated below.

1. Metal Panels: 12 inches long by actual panel width. Include metal panel accessories.



B. Product Test Reports: For each product, tests performed by a qualified testing agency.

C. Sample Warranties: For special warranties.


A. Maintenance Data: For metal panels to include in maintenance manuals.


A. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and approved by manufacturer.

B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel in accordance with the following:



1. AWS D1.2, "Structural Welding Code - Aluminum."


A. Deliver components, metal panels, and other manufactured items so as not to be damaged or deformed. Package metal panels for protection during transportation and handling.

B. Unload, store, and erect metal panels in a manner to prevent bending, warping, twisting, and surface damage.

C. Stack metal panels horizontally on platforms or pallets, covered with suitable weathertight and ventilated covering. Store metal panels to ensure dryness, with positive slope for drainage of water. Do not store metal panels in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting, or other surface damage.

D. Retain strippable protective covering on metal panels during installation.


A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit assembly of metal panels to be performed according to manufacturers' written instructions and warranty requirements.

1.9 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate metal panel installation with flashing, trim, and other adjoining work to provide a leakproof, secure, and noncorrosive installation.

1.10 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of metal panel systems that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Structural failures including rupturing, cracking, or puncturing. b. Deterioration of metals and other materials beyond normal weathering.

2. Warranty Period: Five (5) years from date of Substantial Completion.

B. Special Warranty on Panel Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair finish or replace metal panels that show evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period.

1. Exposed Panel Finish: Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following:

a. Color fading more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to ASTM D 2244. b. Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D 4214. c. Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal.

2. Finish Warranty Period: Twenty (20) years from date of Substantial Completion.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Structural Performance: Provide metal panel systems capable of withstanding the effects of the following loads, based on testing according to ASTM E 72:

1. Wind and Other Design Loads: As indicated on Drawings, as required by Building Code and per authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Deflection Limits: For wind loads, no greater than 1/180 of the span.

B. Air Infiltration: Air leakage of not more than 0.06 cfm/sq. ft. when tested according to ASTM E 283 at the following test-pressure difference:

1. Test-Pressure Difference: 1.57 lbf/sq. ft.

C. Water Penetration under Static Pressure: No water penetration when tested according to ASTM E 331 at the following test-pressure difference:

1. Test-Pressure Difference: 6.24 lbf/sq. ft.

D. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of joint sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base calculations on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.

1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C), material surfaces.

E. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide metal wall panels and system components with the following fire-test-response characteristics, as determined by testing identical panels and system components per test method indicated below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

1. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Provide wall panels with a flame-spread index of 25 or less and a smoke-developed index of 450 or less, per ASTM E 84.

2.2 FOAMED-INSULATION-CORE METAL WALL PANELS

A. General: Provide factory-formed and -assembled metal wall panels fabricated from two (2) metal facing sheets over corrugated polyallomer (CPA) stabilizers on both faces and insulation core foamed in place during fabrication. Include accessories required for weathertight installation.

1. Basis-of-Design Product:

a. Laminators, Inc.; Thermolite Panel b. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 012500 “Substitution Procedures”.

2. Overall Panel Thickness: 1-inch. 3. Exterior Skin: Aluminum, ASTM B 209.



a. Thickness: Manufacturer's standard for finish and texture indicated. b. Finish: Match system in which being installed. c. Texture: Smooth. d. Backing Sheet: 0.125-inch-thick, corrugated, high-density polyethylene.

4. Interior Skin: Aluminum.

a. Thickness: Manufacturer's standard for finish and texture indicated. b. Finish: Match system in which being installed. c. Texture: Smooth. d. Backing Sheet: 0.125-inch-thick, corrugated, high-density polyethylene.

5. Insulation Core: Manufacturer’s standard modified polyisocyanurate or polyurethane foam using a non-CFC blowing agent, with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 450, respectively.

a. Closed-Cell Content: Ninety percent (90%) when tested according to ASTM D 6226.

b. Density: 2.0 to 2.6 lb/cu. ft. when tested according to ASTM D 1622. c. Compressive Strength: Minimum 20 psi when tested according to ASTM D 1621. d. Shear Strength: 26 psi when tested according to ASTM C 273.

6. Thermal-Resistance Value (R-Value): 7 according to ASTM C 1363.


A. Panel Sealants: Provide sealant type recommended by manufacturer that are compatible with panel materials, are non-staining, and do not damage panel finish.

1. Sealant Tape: Pressure-sensitive, one hundred percent (100%) solids, gray polyisobutylene compound sealant tape with release-paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, non-sag, nontoxic, non-staining tape ½ inch wide and 1/8 inch thick.

2. Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920; elastomeric polyurethane or silicone sealant; of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in metal panels and remain weathertight; and as recommended in writing by metal panel manufacturer.

3. Butyl-Rubber-Based, Solvent-Release Sealant: ASTM C 1311.

B. Angle Supports: Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063-T6.

C. Stainless-Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head annealed stainless-steel bolts, ASTM F 593; with hex nuts, ASTM F 594; and, where indicated, flat washers; Alloy Group 1.

2.4 FABRICATION

A. General: Fabricate and finish metal panels and accessories at the factory, by manufacturer's standard procedures and processes, as necessary to fulfill indicated performance requirements demonstrated by laboratory testing. Comply with indicated profiles and with dimensional and structural requirements.



2.5 FINISHES

A. Protect mechanical and painted finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.

B. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.

C. Aluminum Panels and Accessories:

1. Two-Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 620. Fluoropolymer finish containing not less than seventy percent (70%) PVDF resin by weight in color coat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, metal panel supports, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Examine roughing-in for components and systems penetrating metal panels to verify actual locations of penetrations relative to seam locations of metal panels before installation.


3.2 METAL PANEL INSTALLATION

A. General: Install metal panels according to manufacturer's written instructions in orientation, sizes, and locations indicated. Install panels perpendicular to supports unless otherwise indicated. Anchor metal panels and other components of the Work securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement.

1. Shim or otherwise plumb substrates receiving metal panels. 2. Provide weathertight escutcheons for pipe- and conduit-penetrating panels. 3. Apply a continuous ribbon of sealant tape to panel side laps and elsewhere as needed to

make panels weathertight.

B. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals contact each other or corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action as recommended in writing by metal panel manufacturer.

1. Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of aluminum that come into contact with grout, concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals with the following:

a. Extruded Aluminum: Two (2) coats of clear lacquer.



C. Joint Sealers: Install gaskets, joint fillers, and sealants where indicated and where required for weathertight performance of metal wall panel assemblies. Provide types of gaskets, fillers, and sealants indicated by metal panel manufacturer; or, if not indicated, provide types recommended by metal wall panel manufacturer.

1. Seal metal wall panel end laps with double beads of tape or sealant, full width of panel. Seal side joints where recommended by metal wall panel manufacturer.

2. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."

3.3 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as metal panels are installed, unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. On completion of metal panel installation, clean finished surfaces as recommended by metal panel manufacturer. Maintain in a clean condition during construction.

B. Replace metal panels that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.

END OF SECTION 074213.19

SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM


SECTION 076200 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Formed brake metal.


1. Section 061000 "Rough Carpentry" for wood nailers, curbs, and blocking.



1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each manufactured product and accessory.

B. Shop Drawings: For sheet metal flashing and trim.

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details. 2. Detail fabrication and installation layouts, expansion-joint locations, and keyed details.

Distinguish between shop- and field-assembled work. 3. Include identification of material, thickness, weight, and finish for each item and location

in Project. 4. Include details for forming, including profiles, shapes, seams, and dimensions. 5. Include details for joining, supporting, and securing, including layout and spacing of

fasteners, cleats, clips, and other attachments. Include pattern of seams. 6. Include details of termination points and assemblies. 7. Include details of special conditions. 8. Include details of connections to adjoining work. 9. Detail formed flashing and trim at scale of not less than 3 inches per 12 inches (1:5).

C. Samples: For each type of sheet metal and accessory indicated with factory-applied finishes.



B. Product Test Reports: For each product, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency.

C. Sample Warranty: For special warranty.




A. Maintenance Data: For sheet metal flashing and trim, and its accessories, to include in maintenance manuals.


A. Fabricator Qualifications: Employs skilled workers who custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim similar to that required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in-service performance.


A. Do not store sheet metal flashing and trim materials in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting, or other surface damage. Store sheet metal flashing and trim materials away from uncured concrete and masonry.

B. Protect strippable protective covering on sheet metal flashing and trim from exposure to sunlight and high humidity, except to extent necessary for period of sheet metal flashing and trim installation.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty on Finishes: Manufacturer agrees to repair finish or replace sheet metal flashing and trim that shows evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period.

1. Exposed Panel Finish: Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following:

a. Color fading more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to ASTM D 2244. b. Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D 4214. c. Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal.

2. Finish Warranty Period: Twenty (20) years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. General: Sheet metal flashing and trim assemblies shall withstand wind loads, structural movement, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. Completed sheet metal flashing and trim shall not rattle, leak, or loosen, and shall remain watertight.

B. Sheet Metal Standard for Flashing and Trim: Comply with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" requirements for dimensions and profiles shown unless more stringent requirements are indicated.

C. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes to prevent buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of joint



sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base calculations on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.

1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C), material surfaces.

2.2 SHEET METALS

A. General: Protect mechanical and other finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying strippable, temporary protective film before shipping.

B. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209, alloy as standard with manufacturer for finish required, with temper as required to suit forming operations and performance required; with smooth, flat surface.

1. Exposed Coil-Coated Finish:

a. Two-Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 620. Fluoropolymer finish containing not less than seventy percent (70%) PVDF resin by weight in color coat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions.

2. Color: As selected by Architect and Owner from manufacturer's full range, to match existing adjacent framing.


A. General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, protective coatings, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required for complete sheet metal flashing and trim installation and as recommended by manufacturer of primary sheet metal unless otherwise indicated.

B. Fasteners: Wood screws, annular threaded nails, self-tapping screws, self-locking rivets and bolts, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads and recommended by manufacturer of primary sheet metal.

1. General: Blind fasteners or self-drilling screws, gasketed, with hex-washer head.

a. Exposed Fasteners: Heads matching color of sheet metal using plastic caps or factory-applied coating. Provide metal-backed EPDM or PVC sealing washers under heads of exposed fasteners bearing on weather side of metal.

b. Blind Fasteners: High-strength aluminum or stainless-steel rivets suitable for metal being fastened.

2. Fasteners for Aluminum Sheet: Aluminum or Series 300 stainless-steel.

D. Sealant Tape: Pressure-sensitive, one hundred percent (100%) solids, polyisobutylene compound sealant tape with release-paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, non-sag, nontoxic, non-staining tape ½-inch-wide and 1/8-inch-thick.



E. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric polysulfide polymer sealant; of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal flashing and trim and remain watertight.

F. Butyl Sealant: ASTM C 1311, single-component, solvent-release butyl rubber sealant; polyisobutylene plasticized; heavy bodied for hooked-type expansion joints with limited movement.

G. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion according to ASTM D 1187.


A. General: Custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with details shown and recommendations in cited sheet metal standard that apply to design, dimensions, geometry, metal thickness, and other characteristics of item required. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim in shop to greatest extent possible.

1. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim in thickness or weight needed to comply with performance requirements, but not less than that specified for each application and metal.

2. Obtain field measurements for accurate fit before shop fabrication. 3. Form sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates without excessive oil canning,

buckling, and tool marks; true to line, levels, and slopes; and with exposed edges folded back to form hems.

4. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Do not use exposed fasteners on faces exposed to view.

B. Fabrication Tolerances: Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim that is capable of installation to a tolerance of ¼-inch in 20 feet on slope and location lines indicated on Drawings and within 1/8-inch offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles.

C. Expansion Provisions: Form metal for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim.

1. Form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1-inch-deep, filled with butyl sealant concealed within joints.

D. Sealant Joints: Where movable, nonexpansion-type joints are required, form metal to provide for proper installation of elastomeric sealant according to cited sheet metal standard.

E. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being anchored or from compatible, noncorrosive metal.

F. Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Form seams and seal with elastomeric sealant unless otherwise recommended by sealant manufacturer for intended use.

G. Do not use graphite pencils to mark metal surfaces.

2.5 MISCELLANEOUS SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS

A. Sill Flashing, Closure Panels, Column Wraps, Etc.: Fabricate from the following materials:

1. Aluminum: 0.063-inch-thick, hemmed where indicated.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, substrate, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

1. Verify compliance with requirements for installation tolerances of substrates. 2. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and securely

anchored.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.


A. General: Anchor sheet metal flashing and trim and other components of the Work securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. Use fasteners, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required to complete sheet metal flashing and trim system.

1. Install sheet metal flashing and trim true to line, levels, and slopes. Provide uniform, neat seams with minimum exposure of solder, welds, and sealant.

2. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in watertight performance. Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before fabricating sheet metal.

3. Install exposed sheet metal flashing and trim with limited oil canning, and free of buckling and tool marks.

4. Torch cutting of sheet metal flashing and trim is not permitted. 5. Do not use graphite pencils to mark metal surfaces.

B. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals contact each other, or where metal contacts pressure-treated wood or other corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action or corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by sheet metal manufacturer or cited sheet metal standard.

1. Coat concealed side of sheet metal flashing and trim with bituminous coating where flashing and trim contact wood, ferrous metal, or cementitious construction.

C. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. Space movement joints at maximum of 10 feet with no joints within 24 inches of corner or intersection.

D. Fasteners: Use fastener sizes that penetrate wood blocking or sheathing not less than 1¼ inches for nails and not less than ¾ inch for wood screws.

E. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible in exposed work and locate to minimize possibility of leakage. Cover and seal fasteners and anchors as required for a tight installation.

F. Seal joints as required for watertight construction.



1. Use sealant-filled joints unless otherwise indicated. Embed hooked flanges of joint members not less than 1-inch into sealant. Form joints to completely conceal sealant. When ambient temperature at time of installation is between 40 and 70 deg F (4 and 21 deg C), set joint members for fifty percent (50%) movement each way. Adjust setting proportionately for installation at higher ambient temperatures. Do not install sealant-type joints at temperatures below 40 deg F (4 deg C).

2. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."

3.3 ERECTION TOLERANCES

A. Installation Tolerances: Shim and align sheet metal flashing and trim within installed tolerance of ¼-inch in 20 feet on slope and location lines indicated on Drawings and within 1/8-inch offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles.


A. Clean exposed metal surfaces of substances that interfere with uniform oxidation and weathering.

B. Clean off excess sealants.

C. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as sheet metal flashing and trim are installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. On completion of sheet metal flashing and trim installation, remove unused materials and clean finished surfaces as recommended by sheet metal flashing and trim manufacturer. Maintain sheet metal flashing and trim in clean condition during construction.

D. Replace sheet metal flashing and trim that have been damaged or that have deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.


PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING


SECTION 078413 - PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Fireproof firestopping and firesafing materials and accessories.


A. Fireproofing Materials: ASTM E 119 and ASTM E 814 to achieve a fire rating as noted on Drawings.

B. Surface Burning: ASTM E 84 with a flame spread/fuel contributed/smoke developed rating of 5/0/0.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated provide characteristics, performance, and limitation criteria.

B. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate preparation and installation instructions.

C. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.

1.5 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this Section with minimum three (3) years documented experience.

B. Applicator: Company specializing in performing the work of this Section with minimum five (5) years documented experience.

1.6 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

A. Conform to applicable State Building code for fire resistance ratings and surface burning characteristics.

B. UL Classifications for these systems shall be (all two (2) hours or more):

1. Duct Penetrations: C-AJ-7027 2. Pipe Penetrations: C-AJ-1079 3. Cable Penetrations: C-AJ-1079



4. Conduit Penetrations: C-AJ-1079

1.7 MOCK-UP

A. Provide mock-up of applied firestopping material.

B. Apply 1 lineal ft to a representative substrate surface.

C. If accepted, mock-up will demonstrate minimum standard for the Work.

1.8 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Do not apply materials when temperature of substrate material and ambient air is below 60 degrees F.

B. Maintain this minimum temperature before, during and for three (3) days after installation of materials.

C. Provide ventilation in areas to receive solvent cured materials.

1.9 SEQUENCING

A. Sequence Work to permit firestopping materials to be installed after adjacent and surrounding work is complete.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Thermal Ceramics; Firemaster Putty, Bulk and Blankets

B. Tremco Incorporated; Fyre-shield and Cerablanket FS Hilti, Inc.

C. United States Gypsum; Thermafiber Safing Insulation and FIRECODE compound

D. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 016310 “Equals and Substitutions”.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Firestopping Material: Single component silicone elastomeric compounds; conforming to the following:

1. Elongation & Shrinkage: Five percent (5%). 2. Tensile Strength: 300 psi. 3. Density: 8 lb/cu ft. 4. Surface Durability: 35 (Shore Hardness). 5. Durability and Longevity: Permanent. 6. Side Effects during Installation: Non-toxic. 7. Long Term Side Effects: None.

B. Primer: Type recommended by firestopping manufacturer for specific substrate surfaces.



C. Firesafing Blankets: ASTM C 665; 4 psf nominal density firesafing insulation.

D. Putty Pads: UL CLIV; acoustic, intumescent pad; 3.2mm thickness.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Dam Material: Mineral fiber matting, permanent.

B. Retainers: Stainless clips to support mineral fiber matting

2.4 FINISHES

A. Color: Dark gray or manufacturer’s standard color.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for opening configurations, penetrating items, substrates, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface Cleaning: Clean out openings immediately before installing penetration firestopping to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and with the following requirements:

1. Remove from surfaces of opening substrates and from penetrating items foreign materials that could interfere with adhesion of penetration firestopping.

2. Clean opening substrates and penetrating items to produce clean, sound surfaces capable of developing optimum bond with penetration firestopping. Remove loose particles remaining from cleaning operation.

3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.

B. Install backing materials to arrest liquid material leakage.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install penetration firestopping to comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions and published drawings for products and applications indicated.

B. Apply firestopping material to all wall and floor penetrations through rated assemblies. These penetrations include electrical conduit and raceways, plumbing and heating system penetrations, ducts and other system chases.

C. Apply primer and materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

D. Apply firestopping material in sufficient thickness to achieve rating to a density of fifty percent (50%) to uniform density and texture.



E. Install material at walls or partition openings which contain penetrating sleeves, piping, ductwork, conduit, and other items requiring firestopping.

F. Remove dam material after firestopping material has cured.


A. Clean off excess materials adjacent to openings as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials that are approved in writing by penetration firestopping manufacturers and that do not damage materials in which openings occur.

B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions during and after installation that ensure that penetration firestopping is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, immediately cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated penetration firestopping and install new materials to produce systems complying with specified requirements.

3.5 SCHEDULE

A. See Construction Documents for rating information and construction details and conditions.

B. Firesafe all penetrations through new and existing masonry and gypsum board construction in the project work areas, equal to the one (1) or two (2) hour rating of the appropriate spaces.


JOINT SEALANTS


SECTION 079200 - JOINT SEALANTS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Silicone joint sealants. 2. Latex joint sealants.


A. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product indicated.

B. Samples: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of strips of cured sealants showing the full range of colors available for each product exposed to view.

C. Joint-Sealant Schedule: Include the following information:

1. Joint-sealant application, joint location, and designation. 2. Joint-sealant manufacturer and product name. 3. Joint-sealant formulation. 4. Joint-sealant color.


A. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.

B. Product Certificates: For each kind of joint sealant and accessory, from manufacturer.

C. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, indicating that sealants comply with requirements.

D. Warranties: Sample of special warranties.


A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for installation of units required for this Project.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain each kind of joint sealant from single source from single manufacturer.

C. Product Testing: Test joint sealants using a qualified testing agency.

JOINT SEALANTS


1. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified according to ASTM C 1021 to conduct the testing indicated.

1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions:

1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint-sealant manufacturer or are below 40 deg F (5 deg C).

2. When joint substrates are wet. 3. Where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint-sealant manufacturer for

applications indicated. 4. Where contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion have not yet been removed

from joint substrates.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Special Installer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which Installer agrees to repair or replace joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Two (2) years from date of Substantial Completion.

B. Special warranties specified in this article exclude deterioration or failure of joint sealants from the following:

1. Movement of the structure caused by structural settlement or errors attributable to design or construction resulting in stresses on the sealant exceeding sealant manufacturer's written specifications for sealant elongation and compression.

2. Disintegration of joint substrates from natural causes exceeding design specifications. 3. Mechanical damage caused by individuals, tools, or other outside agents. 4. Changes in sealant appearance caused by accumulation of dirt or other atmospheric

contaminants.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by joint-sealant manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.

B. VOC Content of Interior Sealants: Sealants and sealant primers used inside the weatherproofing system shall comply with the following:

1. Architectural sealants shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less.

C. Liquid-Applied Joint Sealants: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated for each liquid-applied joint sealant specified, including those referencing ASTM C 920 classifications for type, grade, class, and uses related to exposure and joint substrates.

JOINT SEALANTS


D. Stain-Test-Response Characteristics: Where sealants are specified to be non-staining to porous substrates, provide products that have undergone testing according to ASTM C 1248 and have not stained porous joint substrates indicated for Project.

E. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by Architect and Owner from manufacturer's full range, to match adjacent where required.

2.2 SILICONE JOINT SEALANTS

A. Silicone, Non-Staining: Non-Staining, single-component, non-sag, plus fifty percent (+50%) and minus fifty percent (-50%) movement capability, non-traffic-use, neutral-curing silicone joint sealant; ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 50, Use NT.

1. Products:

a. Dow Corning Corporation b. Master Bond, Inc. c. Pecora Corporation d. Tremco Incorporated e. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 012500 “Substitution Procedures”.

B. Mildew-Resistant, Single-Component, Non-sag, Neutral-Curing Silicone Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, for Use NT.

1. Products:

a. BASF Building Systems; Omniplus b. Dow Corning Corporation; 786 Mildew Resistant c. Tremco Incorporated; Tremsil 200 Sanitary d. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 012500 “Substitution Procedures”.

2.3 LATEX JOINT SEALANTS

A. Latex Joint Sealant: Acrylic latex or siliconized acrylic latex, ASTM C 834, Type OP, Grade NF.


a. BASF Building Systems; Sonolac b. Bostik, Inc.; Chem-Calk 600 c. Pecora Corporation; AC-20+ d. Tremco Incorporated; Tremflex 834 e. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 012500 “Substitution Procedures”.

2.4 JOINT SEALANT BACKING

A. General: Provide sealant backings of material that are non-staining; are compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing.

JOINT SEALANTS


B. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, Type B (bi-cellular material with a surface skin), and of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance.

C. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint-filler materials or joint surfaces at back of joint. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable.


A. Primer: Material recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests and field tests.

B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants to joint substrates.

C. Masking Tape: Non-staining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces adjacent to joints.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting joint-sealant performance.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements:

1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of joint sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested and approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents, water, surface dirt, and frost.

2. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, mechanical abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining after cleaning operations above by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free compressed air. Porous joint substrates include the following:

a. Concrete. b. Masonry.

JOINT SEALANTS


3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete. 4. Clean nonporous joint substrate surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do

not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants. Nonporous joint substrates include the following:

a. Metal. b. Glass. c. Porcelain enamel. d. Glazed surfaces of ceramic tile.

B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint-sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.

C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant or primer with adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS

A. General: Comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products and applications indicated unless more stringent requirements apply.

B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.

C. Install sealant backings of kind indicated to support sealants during application and at position required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.

1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings. 2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings. 3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application and

replace them with dry materials.

D. Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants and backs of joints.

E. Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time backings are installed:

1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates. 2. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration. 3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow

optimum sealant movement capability.

F. Tooling of Non-Sag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified in subparagraphs below to form

JOINT SEALANTS


smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint.

1. Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints. 2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not

discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces. 3. Provide concave joint profile per Figure 8A in ASTM C 1193, unless otherwise

indicated. 4. Provide flush joint profile where indicated per Figure 8B in ASTM C 1193. 5. Provide recessed joint configuration of recess depth and at locations indicated per

Figure 8C in ASTM C 1193.

a. Use masking tape to protect surfaces adjacent to recessed tooled joints.

3.4 CLEANING

A. Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur.

3.5 PROTECTION

A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from original work.

3.6 JOINT-SEALANT SCHEDULE

A. Joint-Sealant Application: Exterior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal non-traffic surfaces.

1. Joint Locations:

a. Control and expansion joints in unit masonry. b. Joints between metal panels. c. Joints between different materials listed above. d. Perimeter joints between materials listed above and frames of doors, windows, and

louvers. e. Other joints as indicated.

2. Joint Sealant: Silicone, non-staining, S, NS, 50, NT.

B. Joint-Sealant Application: Interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal non-traffic surfaces.

1. Joint Locations:

a. Control and expansion joints on exposed interior surfaces of exterior walls. b. Perimeter joints of exterior openings where indicated. c. Vertical joints on exposed surfaces of interior unit masonry and concrete walls and

partitions.

JOINT SEALANTS


d. Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors, windows, and elevator entrances.

e. Other joints as indicated.

2. Joint Sealant: Latex.

C. Joint-Sealant Application: Mildew-resistant interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal non-traffic surfaces.

1. Joint Sealant Location:

a. Joints between plumbing fixtures and adjoining walls, floors, and counters. b. Tile control and expansion joints where indicated. c. Other joints as indicated.

2. Joint Sealant: Mildew resistant, single component, non-sag, neutral curing, silicone.


HOLLOW METAL FRAMES


SECTION 081213 - HOLLOW METAL FRAMES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes hollow-metal frames.


1. Section 081416 "Flush Wood Doors" for wood doors installed in hollow-metal frames. 2. Section 087100 "Door Hardware" for door hardware for hollow-metal doors.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Minimum Thickness: Minimum thickness of base metal without coatings according to NAAMM-HMMA 803 or SDI A250.8.

1.4 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate requirements for installation of door hardware, electrified door hardware, and access control and security systems.





1. Include construction details, material descriptions, and finishes.

B. Shop Drawings: Include the following:

1. Elevations of each frame type. 2. Frame details for each frame type, including dimensioned profiles and metal thicknesses. 3. Locations of reinforcement and preparations for hardware. 4. Details of each different wall opening condition. 5. Details of electrical raceway and preparation for electrified hardware, access control

systems, and security systems. 6. Details of anchorages, joints, field splices, and connections. 7. Details of accessories.

HOLLOW METAL FRAMES


C. Samples: Prepare Samples approximated 12 by 12 inches to demonstrate compliance with requirements for quality of materials and construction. Show profile, corner joint, floor and wall anchors, and silencers. Include separate section showing fixed hollow-metal panels and glazing if applicable.

D. Product Schedule: For hollow-metal frames, prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, using same reference numbers for details and openings as those on Drawings. Coordinate with final Door Hardware Schedule.


A. Deliver hollow-metal work palletized, packaged, or crated to provide protection during transit and Project-site storage. Do not use non-vented plastic.

1. Provide additional protection to prevent damage to factory-finished units.

B. Deliver welded frames with two (2) removable spreader bars across bottom of frames, tack welded to jambs and mullions.

C. Store hollow-metal frames vertically under cover at Project site with head up. Place on minimum 4-inch-high wood blocking. Provide minimum ¼-inch space between each unit to permit air circulation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Basis of Design:

1. Steelcraft; an Allegion company

B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Ceco Door Products; an Assa Abloy Group company 2. Curries Company; an Assa Abloy Group company 3. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 012500 “Substitution Procedures”.

C. Source Limitations: Obtain hollow-metal frames from single source from single manufacturer.

2.2 STANDARD STEEL FRAMES

A. Construct interior frames to comply with the standards indicated for materials, fabrication, hardware locations, hardware reinforcement, tolerances, and clearances, and as specified.

B. Interior Frames: SDI A250.8, Level 3.

1. Physical Performance: Level A according to SDI A250.4. 2. Materials: Uncoated steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.053-inch. 3. Construction: Full profile welded. 4. Exposed Finish: Prime.

HOLLOW METAL FRAMES


2.3 FRAME ANCHORS

A. Jamb Anchors:

1. Type: Anchors of minimum size and type required by applicable door and frame standard, and suitable for performance level indicated.

2. Quantity: Minimum of three (3) anchors per jamb, with one (1) additional anchor for frames with no floor anchor. Provide one (1) additional anchor for each 24 inches of frame height above 7 feet.

B. Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to floor:

C. Floor Anchors for Concrete Slabs with Underlayment: Adjustable-type anchors with extension clips, allowing not less than 2-inch height adjustment. Terminate bottom of frames at top of underlayment.

2.4 MATERIALS

A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; suitable for exposed applications.

B. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B.

C. Frame Anchors: ASTM A 879, Commercial Steel (CS), 04Z coating designation; mill phosphatized.

D. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153.

E. Power-Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with clips or other accessory devices for attaching hollow-metal frames of type indicated.

F. Mineral-Fiber Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing); consisting of fibers manufactured from slag or rock wool with 6- to 12-lb/cu. ft. density; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics.

2.5 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate hollow-metal frames to be rigid and free of defects, warp, or buckle. Accurately form metal to required sizes and profiles, with minimum radius for metal thickness. Where practical, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. To ensure proper assembly at Project site, clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory assembled before shipment.

B. Hollow-Metal Frames: Fabricate in one (1) piece except where handling and shipping limitations require multiple sections. Where frames are fabricated in sections, provide alignment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated of metal of same or greater thickness as frames.

1. Provide countersunk, flat- or oval-head exposed screws and bolts for exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated.

HOLLOW METAL FRAMES


2. Floor Anchors: Weld anchors to bottoms of jambs with at least four (4) spot welds per anchor; however, for slip-on drywall frames, provide anchor clips or countersunk holes at bottoms of jambs.

3. Door Silencers: Except on weather-stripped frames, drill stops to receive door silencers as follows. Keep holes clear during construction.

a. Single-Door Frames: Drill stop in strike jamb to receive three (3) door silencers.

C. Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare hollow-metal frames to receive templated mortised hardware, and electrical wiring; include cutouts, reinforcement, mortising, drilling, and tapping according to SDI A250.6, the Door Hardware Schedule, and templates.

1. Reinforce frames to receive non-templated, mortised, and surface-mounted hardware. 2. Comply with BHMA A156.115 for preparation of hollow-metal frames for hardware.

2.6 STEEL FINISHES

A. Prime Finish: Clean, pretreat, and apply manufacturer's standard primer.

1. Shop Primer: Manufacturer's standard, fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free primer complying with SDI A250.10; recommended by primer manufacturer for substrate; compatible with substrate and field-applied coatings despite prolonged exposure.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Remove welded-in shipping spreaders installed at factory. Restore exposed finish by grinding, filling, and dressing, as required to make repaired area smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces.

B. Drill and tap frames to receive non-templated, mortised, and surface-mounted hardware.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install hollow-metal frames plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and securely fastened in place. Comply with approved Shop Drawings and with manufacturer's written instructions. Comply with SDI A250.11.

HOLLOW METAL FRAMES


B. Set frames accurately in position; plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary braces without damage to completed Work.

1. Where frames are fabricated in sections, field splice at approved locations by welding face joint continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make splice smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. Touch-up finishes.

2. Remove temporary braces necessary for installation only after frames have been properly set and secured.

C. Fire-Rated Openings: Install frames according to NFPA 80.

D. Floor Anchors: Secure with postinstalled expansion anchors.

1. Floor anchors may be set with power-actuated fasteners instead of postinstalled expansion anchors if so indicated and approved on Shop Drawings.

E. Solidly pack mineral-fiber insulation inside frames.

F. Installation Tolerances: Adjust hollow-metal frames to the following tolerances:

1. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16-inch, measured at door rabbet on a line 90 degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head.

2. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16-inch, measured at jambs on a horizontal line parallel to plane of wall.

3. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16-inch, measured at opposite face corners of jambs on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall.

4. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16-inch, measured at jambs at floor.

3.4 CLEANING AND TOUCH-UP

A. Prime-Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air-drying, rust-inhibitive primer.


ALUMINUM DOORS AND FRAMES


SECTION 081216 - ALUMINUM DOORS AND FRAMES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Interior aluminum frames for doors installed in gypsum board partitions. 2. Interior aluminum frames for glazing installed in gypsum board partitions. 3. Interior aluminum doors.





1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes.

B. Shop Drawings: For aluminum doors and frames:

1. Include elevations, sections, and installation details for each wall-opening condition. 2. Include details for each door and frame type, including dimensioned profiles and metal

thicknesses. 3. Include locations of reinforcements and preparations for hardware. 4. Include details of anchorages, joints, field splices, connections, and accessories. 5. Include details of moldings, removable stops, and glazing.

C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified, in manufacturer's standard sizes.

D. Product Schedule: For aluminum doors and frames. Use same designations indicated on Drawings. Coordinate with door hardware schedule and glazing.


A. Maintenance Data: For aluminum doors and frames to include in maintenance manuals.




A. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and to set quality standards for fabrication and installation.

1. Build mockup of each type of aluminum frame and door in typical wall area as shown on Drawings.

2. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing.

3. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of aluminum doors and frames that do not comply with requirements or that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.


B. Special Finish Warranty, Anodized Finishes: Standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair finishes or replace aluminum that shows evidence of deterioration of anodized finishes within specified warranty period.

1. Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following:

a. Color fading more than 5 Delta E units when tested according to ASTM D 2244. b. Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D 4214. c. Cracking, peeling, or chipping.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Basis-of-Design Product:

1. Kawneer North America; Trifab 400 Framing Systems, 350 Standard Entrances


1. C.R. Laurence Co. Architectural Products 2. EFCO Corporation 3. Oldcastle BuildingEnvelope 4. TRACO 5. YKK AP America Inc. 6. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 012500 “Substitution Procedures”.



C. Source Limitations: Obtain aluminum doors and frames from single source from single manufacturer.

2.2 COMPONENTS

A. Aluminum Framing: ASTM B 221, with alloy and temper required to suit structural and finish requirements, and not less than 0.070-inch thick.

B. Door Frames: Extruded aluminum, reinforced for hinges, strikes, and closers.

C. Glazing Frames: Extruded aluminum, for indicated glass thickness.

D. Trim: Extruded aluminum, not less than 0.062-inch thick; removable, square, snap-on glazing and door stops, without exposed fasteners.

E. Doors: Manufacturer's standard, factory-assembled, 1¾-inch-thick, aluminum-framed door construction.

1. Door Operation: Swinging. 2. Stiles: Medium. 3. Rails: As indicated on Drawings.

F. Door Finish: Match frame and trim finish.

G. Frame and Trim Finish: Color-anodized aluminum.

1. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's entire range.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Fasteners: Aluminum, nonmagnetic, stainless-steel, or other noncorrosive metal fasteners compatible with frames, stops, panels, reinforcement plates, hardware, anchors, and other items being fastened.

B. Door Silencers: Manufacturer's standard continuous mohair, wool pile, or vinyl seals in color to match frame.

C. Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard extruded or molded rubber or plastic, to accommodate glazing thickness indicated; in black.

D. Glass: As specified in Section 088000 "Glazing".

E. Door Hardware: As specified in Section 087100 "Door Hardware".

2.4 FABRICATION

A. Provide concealed corner reinforcements and alignment clips for accurately fitted hairline joints at butted and mitered connections.

B. Factory prepare aluminum doors and frames to receive templated mortised hardware; include cutouts, reinforcements, mortising, drilling, and tapping, according to the Door Hardware Schedule and templates furnished as specified in Section 087100 "Door Hardware".



C. Fabricate doors and frames for glazing with removable stops to allow glazing replacement without dismantling.

1. Locate removable stops on the inside of spaces accessed by keyed doors.

D. Fabricate components to allow secure installation without exposed fasteners.


A. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.

2.6 ALUMINUM FINISHES

A. Color Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A32/A34, Class II, 0.010 mm or thicker.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION


B. Verify that wall thickness does not exceed standard tolerances allowed by throat size of indicated aluminum frame.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install aluminum doors and frames plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and securely fastened in place; according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Install frame components in the longest possible lengths with no piece less than 48 inches; components 96 inches or shorter shall be one (1) piece.

1. Use concealed installation clips to produce tightly fitted and aligned splices and connections.

2. Secure clips to extruded main-frame components and not to snap-in or trim members. 3. Do not leave screws or other fasteners exposed to view when installation is complete.

C. Glass: Install glass according to Section 088000 "Glazing" and aluminum manufacturer's written instructions.

D. Doors: Install doors aligned with frames and fitted with required hardware.

E. Door Hardware: Install according to Section 087100 "Door Hardware" and aluminum manufacturer's written instructions.



3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Inspect installation, correct misalignments, and tighten loose connections.

B. Doors: Adjust doors to operate smoothly and easily, without binding or warping. Adjust hardware to function smoothly and lubricate as recommended by manufacturer.

C. Clean exposed door and frame surfaces promptly after installation, using cleaning methods recommended in writing by door and frame manufacturer and according to AAMA 609 & 610.


FLUSH WOOD DOORS


SECTION 081416 - FLUSH WOOD DOORS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Solid-core doors with wood-veneer faces. 2. Factory priming flush wood doors. 3. Factory fitting flush wood doors to frames and factory machining for hardware.


1. Section 099123 "Interior Painting" for field finishing doors.


A. Product Data: For each type of door. Include details of core and edge construction and trim for openings. Include factory-finishing specifications.

B. Shop Drawings: Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each kind of door; construction details not covered in Product Data; and the following:

1. Dimensions and locations of blocking for hardware attachment. 2. Dimensions and locations of mortises and holes for hardware. 3. Dimensions and locations of cutouts. 4. Clearances and undercuts.


A. Sample Warranty: For special warranty.


A. Comply with requirements of referenced standard and manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Package doors individually in plastic bags or cardboard cartons.

C. Mark each door on top and bottom rail with opening number used on Shop Drawings.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install doors until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and HVAC system is operating and

FLUSH WOOD DOORS


maintaining temperature and relative humidity at levels designed for building occupants for the remainder of construction period.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace doors that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.


a. Delamination of veneer. b. Warping (bow, cup, or twist) more than ¼-inch in a 42-by-84-inch section. c. Telegraphing of core construction in face veneers exceeding 0.01-inch in a 3-inch

span.

2. Warranty shall also include installation and finishing that may be required due to repair or replacement of defective doors.

3. Warranty Period for Solid-Core Interior Doors: Life of installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Manhattan Door Corp. 2. Masonite Architectural Company 3. VT Industries, Inc. 4. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 012500 “Substitution Procedures”.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain flush wood doors and transom panels from single manufacturer.

2.2 FLUSH WOOD DOORS, GENERAL

A. Quality Standard: In addition to requirements specified, comply with AWI's "Architectural Woodwork Standards."

B. Low-Emitting Materials: Fabricate doors with adhesives and composite wood products that do not contain urea formaldehyde.

2.3 DOORS FOR OPAQUE FINISH

A. Interior Solid-Core Doors:

1. AWI Grade: Custom. 2. Faces: Any closed-grain hardwood of mill option. 3. Exposed Vertical and Top Edges: Any closed-grain hardwood. 4. Core for Non-Fire-Rated Doors:

a. ANSI A208.1, Grade LD-2 particleboard.

FLUSH WOOD DOORS


1) Blocking: Provide wood blocking in particleboard-core doors as follows:

a) 5-inch top-rail blocking, in doors indicated to have closers. b) 5-inch bottom-rail blocking, in exterior doors and doors indicated to

have kick, mop, or armor plates.

5. Construction: Five (5) plies. Stiles and rails are bonded to core, then entire unit is abrasive planed before veneering.

2.4 FABRICATION

A. Factory fit doors to suit frame-opening sizes indicated.

1. Comply with clearance requirements of referenced quality standard for fitting unless otherwise indicated.

B. Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied.

1. Locate hardware to comply with DHI-WDHS-3. 2. Comply with final hardware schedules, door frame Shop Drawings, ANSI/BHMA-

156.115-W, and hardware templates. 3. Coordinate with hardware mortises in metal frames to verify dimensions and alignment

before factory machining.

2.5 FACTORY PRIMING

A. Doors for Opaque Finish: Factory prime faces, all four (4) edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises with one (1) coat of wood primer specified in Section 099123" Interior Painting."

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine doors and installed door frames, with Installer present, before hanging doors.

1. Verify that installed frames comply with indicated requirements for type, size, location, and swing characteristics and have been installed with level heads and plumb jambs.

2. Reject doors with defects.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Hardware: For installation, see Section 087100 "Door Hardware."

B. Install doors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and referenced quality standard, and as indicated.

C. Factory-Fitted Doors: Align in frames for uniform clearance at each edge.

FLUSH WOOD DOORS


3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Operation: Rehang or replace doors that do not swing or operate freely.

B. Finished Doors: Replace doors that are damaged or that do not comply with requirements. Doors may be repaired or refinished if Work complies with requirements and shows no evidence of repair or refinishing.


ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES


SECTION 083113 - ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Access doors and frames for walls .



1. Include construction details, materials, individual components and profiles, and finishes.

B. Samples: For each type of access door and frame and for each finish specified, complete assembly minimum 6 by 6 inches in size.

C. Product Schedule: For access door and frame schedule.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES


1. J. L. Industries, Inc.; Div. of Activar Construction Products Group

B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following

1. Babcock-Davis 2. Larsen's Manufacturing Company 3. Milcor Inc. 4. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 012500 “Substitution Procedures”.

C. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of access door and frame from single source from single manufacturer.

D. Flush Access Doors with Exposed Flanges:

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Model TM 2. Description: Face of door flush with frame, with exposed flange and concealed hinge.



3. Locations: Wall. 4. Uncoated Steel Sheet for Door: Nominal 0.060-inch, 16-gauge.

a. Finish: Factory prime.

5. Frame Material: Same material, thickness, and finish as door. 6. Latch and Lock: Cam latch, key operated.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36.

B. Steel Sheet: Uncoated or electrolytic zinc coated, ASTM A 879, with cold-rolled steel sheet substrate complying with ASTM A 1008, Commercial Steel (CS), exposed.

C. Frame Anchors: Same type as door face.

D. Inserts, Bolts, and Anchor Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized steel according to ASTM A 153 or ASTM F 2329.

2.3 FABRICATION

A. General: Provide access door and frame assemblies manufactured as integral units ready for installation.

B. Metal Surfaces: For metal surfaces exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces without blemishes. Do not use materials with exposed pitting, seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or roughness.

C. Doors and Frames: Grind exposed welds smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces. Furnish mounting holes, attachment devices and fasteners of type required to secure access doors to types of supports indicated.

D. Latching and Lock Hardware:

1. Quantity: Furnish number of latches and locks required to hold doors tightly closed. 2. Keys: Furnish two (2) keys per lock and key all locks alike.

2.4 FINISHES

A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.

B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.

C. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.

D. Painted Finishes: Comply with coating manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning, conversion coating, and applying and baking finish.



1. Factory Primed: Apply manufacturer's standard, lead- and chromate-free, universal primer immediately after surface preparation and pretreatment.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing access doors and frames.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust doors and hardware, after installation, for proper operation.


BULLET-RESISTANT DOOR AND FRAMES


SECTION 083400 - BULLET-RESISTANT DOOR AND FRAMES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Bullet-resistant hollow metal door and frame assemblies tested in accordance with UL752 and in compliance with the following:

a. Level 4: .30 Caliber Rifle Lead Core Soft Point, one (1) shot.


1. Section 088000 "Glazing" for glass view panels in bullet-resistant doors. 2. Section 087100 "Door Hardware" for door hardware for bullet-resistant doors and

frames. 3. Section 099123 "Interior Painting" for field painting bullet-resistant doors and frames. 4. Division 26 "Electrical" Sections for electrical connections including conduit and wiring

for door controls and operators installed on frames with factory installed electrical knock out boxes.

5. Division 28 Section "Access Control" for access control devices installed at door openings and provided as part of a security access system.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Minimum Thickness: Minimum thickness of base metal without coatings according to NAAMM-HMMA 803 or ANSI/SDI A250.8.

1.4 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate requirements for installation of door hardware, electrified door hardware, and access control and security systems.


A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference in compliance with requirements in Section 013100, "Project Management and Coordination" with attendance by representatives of Supplier, Installer, and Contractor to review proper methods and procedures for installing bullet-resistant doors and frames and to verify installation of electrical knockout boxes and conduit at frames with electrified or access control hardware.





1. Include construction details, material descriptions, core descriptions, hardware reinforcements, profiles, anchors, fire-resistance rating, and finishes.

B. Door hardware supplier is to furnish templates, template reference number and/or physical hardware to the steel door and frame supplier in order to prepare the doors and frames to receive the finish hardware items.

C. Shop Drawings: Include the following:

1. Elevations of each door design. 2. Details of doors, including vertical and horizontal edge details and metal thicknesses. 3. Frame details for each frame type, including dimensioned profiles and metal thicknesses. 4. Locations of reinforcement and preparations for hardware. 5. Details of each different wall opening condition. 6. Details of anchorages, joints, field splices, and connections. 7. Details of accessories. 8. Details of moldings, removable stops, and glazing. 9. Details of preparations for power, signal, and control systems.

D. Product Schedule: For hollow-metal doors and frames, prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, using same reference numbers for details and openings as those on Drawings. Coordinate with final door hardware schedule.


A. Qualification Data: For Manufacturer and Installer.

B. Certificates of Compliance: Submit any information necessary to indicate compliance with this specification section.


A. Record Documents: For bullet-resistant fire-rated doors, list of door numbers and applicable room name and number to which door accesses.


A. Manufacturers Qualifications: Obtain bullet-resistant door and frame assemblies through one (1) source from a single manufacturer with a minimum five (5) years of documented experience producing bullet-resistant door and frame type work similar to that indicated for this Project and that have a proven record of successful in-service performance.

B. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and approved by manufacturer.



1.10 MOCKUPS

A. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for fabrication and installation.

1. Build mockup of typical wall area as shown on Drawings. 2. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract

Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing.

3. Accepted mockup may remain as portion of final work.


A. Deliver bullet-resistant hollow metal work palletized and crated to provide protection during transit and Project-site storage. Do not use non-vented plastic.

B. Deliver welded frames with two (2) removable spreader bars across bottom of frames, tack welded to jambs and mullions.

C. Store bullet-resistant hollow metal work under cover at Project site. Place in stacks of five (5) units maximum in a vertical position with heads up, spaced by blocking, on minimum 4-inch-high wood blocking. Do not store in a manner that traps excess humidity.

1. Provide minimum ¼-inch space between each stacked door to permit air circulation. Door and frames to be stacked in a vertical upright position.


A. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of openings by field measurements before fabrication.

1.13 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of bullet-resistant door and frames that do not comply with requirements or that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one (1) of the following:

1. Ambico, Ltd. 2. Armortex, Inc. 3. Chicago Bullet Proof Systems 4. Krieger Specialty Products 5. Security Metal Products



B. Substitutions: In accordance with Section 012500 “Substitution Procedures”.


A. Bullet-resistant door and frame assemblies to be certified by an independent laboratory to applicable UL standards.

1. Provide bullet resistant assemblies with minimum UL752, Level 4 rating.

B. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing at positive pressure according to NFPA 252 (neutral pressure at 40" above sill) or UL 10C.

1. Oversize Fire-Rated Door Assemblies Construction: For units exceeding sizes of tested assemblies provide certification by a qualified testing agency that doors comply with standard construction requirements for tested and labeled fire-rated door assemblies except for size.

2.3 BULLET-RESISTANT HOLLOW METAL DOORS

A. General: Provide 1¾-inch doors of type and design indicated, not less than thickness indicated; fabricated with smooth surfaces, without visible joints or seams on exposed faces unless otherwise indicated. Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8.

1. Design: Flush panel. 2. Core Construction: Manufacturer's standard bullet-resistant door core construction

designed and tested for the specified UL752 standard Level rating.

a. Fire Door Core: As required to provide fire-protection level specified.

3. Level/Model: Level 3 and Physical Performance Level A (Extra Heavy Duty), minimum 14-gauge-thick steel, Model 2 (fully welded, seamless face and edges).

4. Vertical Edges: Vertical edges to have the face sheets joined by a continuous weld extending the full height of the door. Welds are to be ground, filled and dressed smooth. Beveled edge, 1/8-inch in 2 inches.

5. Top and Bottom Edges: Reinforce tops and bottoms of doors with a continuous steel channel not less than 12-gauge, extending the full width of the door and welded to the face sheet. Finish top and bottom to provide a smooth flush condition.

6. Surface Applied Hardware Reinforcements: Fabricate according to ANSI/SDI A250.6 with reinforcing plates from same material as door face sheets

2.4 BULLET-RESISTANT HOLLOW METAL FRAMES

A. General: Provide frames of the type and profile indicated, not less than thickness indicated; to comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8.

1. Fabricate frames with mitered corners. 2. Fabricate frames with "closed and tight" mitered, full depth continuously welded seams,

finished smooth with no visible seam unless otherwise indicated. Knock down type frames are not permitted.

3. Minimum 14-gauge-thick steel sheet.



B. Fire Rated Frames: Fabricate frames in accordance with NFPA 80, listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated.

C. Surface Applied Hardware Reinforcements: Fabricate according to ANSI/SDI A250.6 Table 4 with reinforcement plates from same material as frames.

2.5 FRAME ANCHORS

A. Jamb Anchors:

1. Type: Anchors of minimum size and type required by applicable door and frame standard, and suitable for performance level indicated.

2. Quantity: Minimum of three (3) anchors per jamb, with one (1) additional anchor for frames with no floor anchor. Provide one (1) additional anchor for each 24 inches of frame height above 7 feet.

B. Floor Anchors: Floor anchors to be provided at each jamb. Formed from same material as frames, not less than 14-gauge-thick.

2.6 MATERIALS

A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; suitable for exposed applications.

B. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; with minimum G60 (Z180) or A60 (ZF180) metallic coating.

C. Frame Anchors: ASTM A 653, Commercial Steel (CS), Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; with minimum G60 (Z180) or A60 (ZF180) metallic coating.

D. Glazing: Comply with requirements in Section 088000 "Glazing."

2.7 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate bullet-resistant hollow metal work to be rigid and free of defects, warp, or buckle. Accurately form metal to required sizes and profiles, with minimum radius for thickness of metal. Where practical, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. When shipping limitations so dictate, frames for large openings are to be fabricated in sections for splicing or splining in the field by others.

B. Tolerances: Fabricate bullet-resistant hollow metal work to tolerances indicated in ANSI/SDI A250.8.

C. Bullet-Resistant Hollow Metal Frames: Fabricate in one (1) piece except where handling and shipping limitations require multiple sections. Where frames are fabricated in sections, provide alignment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated of same or greater thickness metal as frames.

1. Electrical Knock Out Boxes: Factory weld 18-gauge electrical knock out boxes to frame for electrical hardware preps; this includes but not limited to electric through wire transfer hardware, electrical raceways and wiring harnesses, door position switches,



electric strikes, magnetic locks, and jamb mounted card readers as noted in door hardware sets in Section 087100, "Door Hardware".

a. Provide electrical knock out boxes as required for Project. b. Conduit to be coordinated and installed in the field (Division 26) from middle

hinge box and strike box to door position box. c. Electrical knock out boxes to comply with NFPA requirements and fit electrical

door hardware. d. Electrical knock out boxes for continuous hinges should be located in the center of

the vertical dimension on the hinge jamb.

2. Floor Anchors: Weld anchors to bottom of jambs and mullions with at least four (4) spot welds per anchor.

3. Door Silencers: Except on weather-stripped frames, drill stops to receive door silencers as follows. Keep holes clear during construction.

a. Single-Door Frames: Drill stop in strike jamb to receive three (3) door silencers.

D. Surface Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare bullet-resistant hollow metal work to receive template mortised hardware; include cutouts, reinforcement, mortising, drilling, and tapping according to the Door Hardware Schedule and templates.

1. Locate hardware as indicated, or if not indicated, according to ANSI/SDI A250.8. 2. Reinforce doors and frames to receive non-template, mortised and surface-mounted door

hardware.

a. Continuous Hinge Reinforcement: Provide welded continuous 12-gauge straps for continuous hinges.

3. Comply with applicable requirements in ANSI/SDI A250.6 and ANSI/DHI A115 Series specifications for preparation of bullet-resistant hollow metal work for hardware.

4. Coordinate locations of conduit and wiring boxes for electrical connections with Division 26 Sections.

E. Glazed Lites: Provide stops and moldings around glazed lites where indicated. Form corners of stops and moldings with mitered hairline joints.

1. Provide stops and moldings flush with face of door, and with beveled stops unless otherwise indicated.

2. Provide fixed frame moldings on outside of exterior and on secure side of interior doors and frames. Provide loose stops and moldings on inside of hollow-metal doors and frames.

3. Coordinate rabbet width between fixed and removable stops with glazing and installation types indicated.

4. Provide stops for installation with countersunk flat- or oval-head machine screws spaced uniformly not more than 9 inches o.c. and not more than 2 inches o.c. from each corner.



2.8 STEEL FINISHES

A. Prime Finish: Doors and frames to be cleaned and chemically treated to insure maximum finish paint adhesion. Surfaces of the door and frame exposed to view to receive a factory applied coat of rust inhibiting shop primer.

1. Shop Primer: Manufacturer's standard, fast-curing, lead and chromate free primer complying with ANSI/SDI A250.10 acceptance criteria; recommended by primer manufacturer for substrate; compatible with substrate and field-applied coatings despite prolonged exposure.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION



3.2 PREPARATION

A. Remove welded-in shipping spreaders installed at factory. Restore exposed finish as required to make repaired area smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. Touch up factory-applied finishes where spreaders are removed.

B. Prior to installation, adjust and securely brace welded bullet-resistant hollow metal frames for squareness, alignment, twist, and plumbness.

C. Tolerances shall comply with SDI-117 "Manufacturing Tolerances Standard Steel Doors and Frames."

D. Drill and tap doors and frames to receive non-template, mortised, and surface-mounted door hardware.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install bullet-resistant hollow metal work plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and securely fastened in place. Comply with approved Shop Drawings and manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Bullet-Resistant Hollow Metal Frames: Install bullet-resistant hollow metal frames of size and profile indicated. Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.11.

1. Set frames accurately in position, plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary braces, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged. Shim as necessary to comply with installation tolerances.

a. At fire-protection-rated openings, install frames according to NFPA 80. b. Where frames are fabricated in sections, field splice at approved locations by

welding face joint continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make splice smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces.



c. Install frames with removable stops located on secure side of opening.

2. Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to floor, and secure with post-installed expansion anchors.

C. Bullet-Resistant Hollow Metal Doors: Fit bullet-resistant hollow metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified below. Shim as necessary.

1. Fire-Rated Doors: Install doors with clearances according to NFPA 80.

D. Glazing: Comply with installation requirements in Section 088000 "Glazing" and with bullet-resistant door and frame manufacturer's written instructions.


A. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items immediately before final inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replace defective work, including bullet-resistant hollow metal work that is warped, bowed, or otherwise unacceptable.

B. Prime-Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air-drying, rust-inhibitive primer.


SECURITY STOREFRONTS


SECTION 084333.23 - SECURITY STOREFRONTS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Security storefront framing.






B. Shop Drawings: For security storefronts. Include plans, elevations, sections, full-size details, and attachments to other work.

1. Include details of provisions for assembly expansion and contraction. 2. Include full-size isometric details of each vertical-to-horizontal intersection of security

storefronts, showing the following:

a. Joinery, including concealed welds. b. Anchorage. c. Expansion provisions. d. Glazing.

3. Show connection to and continuity with adjacent thermal, weather, air, and vapor barriers.

C. Samples: For units with factory-applied color finishes.

D. Delegated-Design Submittal: For security storefronts indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.





B. Energy Performance Certificates: For security storefronts, accessories, and components, from manufacturer.

1. Basis for Certification: NFRC-certified energy performance values for each security storefront.

C. Product Test Reports: For security storefronts, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency.

D. Sample Warranties: For special warranties.


A. Maintenance Data: For security storefronts to include in maintenance manuals.


A. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and approved by manufacturer.

B. Product Options: Information on Drawings and in Specifications establishes requirements for aesthetic effects and performance characteristics of assemblies. Aesthetic effects are indicated by dimensions, arrangements, alignment, and profiles of components and assemblies as they relate to sightlines, to one another, and to adjoining construction.

1. Do not change intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with Architect's approval. If changes are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to Architect for review.

1.8 MOCKUPS

A. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for fabrication and installation.

1. Build mockup of typical wall area as shown on Drawings. 2. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract


3. Accepted mockup may remain as portion of final work.

1.9 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of security storefronts that do not comply with requirements or that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.


a. Structural failures including, but not limited to, excessive deflection. b. Noise or vibration created by wind and thermal and structural movements. c. Deterioration of metals and other materials beyond normal weathering.




B. Special Finish Warranty, Anodized Finishes: Standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair finishes or replace aluminum that shows evidence of deterioration of anodized finishes within specified warranty period.

1. Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following:

a. Color fading more than 5 Delta E units when tested according to ASTM D 2244. b. Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D 4214. c. Cracking, peeling, or chipping.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements," to design security storefronts.

B. General Performance: Comply with performance requirements specified, as determined by testing of security storefronts representing those indicated for this Project without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction.

1. Security storefronts shall withstand movements of supporting structure including, but not limited to, story drift, twist, column shortening, long-term creep, and deflection from uniformly distributed and concentrated live loads.

2. Failure also includes the following:

a. Thermal stresses transferring to building structure. b. Glass breakage. c. Noise or vibration created by wind and thermal and structural movements. d. Loosening or weakening of fasteners, attachments, and other components.

C. Structural Loads:

1. Wind and other Design Loads: As indicated on Drawings, per Building Code or as required by authorities having jurisdiction.

D. Deflection of Framing Members: At design wind pressure, as follows:

1. Deflection Normal to Wall Plane: Limited to edge of glass in a direction perpendicular to glass plane not exceeding 1/175 of the glass edge length for each individual glazing lite or an amount that restricts edge deflection of individual glazing lites to ¾-inch, whichever is less.

2. Deflection Parallel to Glazing Plane: Limited to 1/360 of clear span or 1/8-inch, whichever is smaller.

E. Structural: Test according to ASTM E 330 as follows:

1. When tested at positive and negative wind-load design pressures, assemblies do not evidence deflection exceeding specified limits.



2. When tested at one hundred fifty percent (150%) of positive and negative wind-load design pressures, assemblies, including anchorage, do not evidence material failures, structural distress, or permanent deformation of main framing members exceeding 0.2 percent of span.

3. Test Durations: As required by design wind velocity, but not less than 10 seconds.

F. Air Infiltration: Test according to ASTM E 283 for infiltration as follows:

1. Fixed Framing and Glass Area:

a. Maximum air leakage of 0.06 cfm/sq. ft. at a static-air-pressure differential of 6.24 lbf/sq. ft.

G. Energy Performance: Certify and label energy performance according to NFRC as follows:

1. Thermal Transmittance (U-factor): Fixed glazing and framing areas shall have U-factor of not more than 0.33 Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F as determined according to NFRC 100.

2. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: Fixed glazing and framing areas shall have a solar heat gain coefficient of no greater than 0.34 as determined according to NFRC 200.

H. Ballistics Resistance, UL 752: Listed and labeled as Level 4 when tested according to UL 752.

I. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements resulting from ambient and surface temperature changes:


2.2 MANUFACTURERS


1. Insulgard Security Products; Series TH600 Framing System


1. Action Bullet Resistant Corporation 2. Total Security Solutions 3. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 012500 “Substitution Procedures”.

C. Source Limitations: Obtain all components of security storefront system, including framing and accessories, from single manufacturer.

2.3 FRAMING

A. Framing Members: Manufacturer's extruded- or formed-aluminum framing members of thickness required and reinforced as required to support imposed loads.

1. Glazing System: Retained mechanically with gaskets on four (4) sides. 2. Glazing Plane: Center. 3. Finish: Clear anodic finish.



4. Fabrication Method: Field-fabricated stick system.

B. Backer Plates: Manufacturer's standard, continuous backer plates for framing members, if not integral, where framing abuts adjacent construction.

C. Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's standard high-strength aluminum with non-staining, nonferrous shims for aligning system components.

1. Provide internal steel reinforcement where required to meet code.

D. Materials:

1. Aluminum: 6061-T6 alloy and temper.

a. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209. b. Extruded Bars, Rods, Profiles, and Tubes: ASTM B 221.

2.4 GLAZING

A. Glazing: Comply with Section 088000 "Glazing."

2.5 ACCESSORIES

A. Fasteners and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, non-staining, nonbleeding fasteners and accessories compatible with adjacent materials.

1. Use self-locking devices where fasteners are subject to loosening or turning out from thermal and structural movements, wind loads, or vibration.

2. Reinforce members as required to receive fastener threads.

B. Anchors: Three-way adjustable anchors with minimum adjustment of 1-inch that accommodate fabrication and installation tolerances in material and finish compatible with adjoining materials and recommended by manufacturer.

1. Concrete and Masonry Inserts: Hot-dip galvanized cast-iron, malleable-iron, or steel inserts complying with ASTM A 123 or ASTM A 153 requirements.

C. Concealed Flashing: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, non-staining, nonbleeding flashing compatible with adjacent materials.

D. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt-mastic paint complying with SSPC-Paint 12 requirements except containing no asbestos, formulated for 30-mil thickness per coat.

2.6 FABRICATION

A. Form or extrude aluminum shapes before finishing.

B. Weld in concealed locations to greatest extent possible to minimize distortion or discoloration of finish. Remove weld spatter and welding oxides from exposed surfaces by descaling or grinding.

C. Fabricate components that, when assembled, have the following characteristics:



1. Profiles that are sharp, straight, and free of defects or deformations. 2. Accurately fitted joints with ends coped or mitered. 3. Physical and thermal isolation of glazing from framing members. 4. Accommodations for thermal and mechanical movements of glazing and framing to

maintain required glazing edge clearances. 5. Provisions for field replacement of glazing from interior for vision glass and exterior for

spandrel glazing or metal panels. 6. Fasteners, anchors, and connection devices that are concealed from view to greatest

extent possible.

D. Mechanically Glazed Framing Members: Fabricate for flush glazing without projecting stops.

E. After fabrication, clearly mark components to identify their locations in Project according to Shop Drawings.


A. Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A41, Class I, 0.018 mm or thicker.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. General:

1. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Do not install damaged components. 3. Fit joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion. 4. Rigidly secure non-movement joints. 5. Install anchors with separators and isolators to prevent metal corrosion and electrolytic

deterioration and to prevent impeding movement of moving joints. 6. Seal perimeter and other joints watertight unless otherwise indicated.

B. Metal Protection:

1. Where aluminum is in contact with dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with materials recommended by manufacturer for this purpose or by installing nonconductive spacers.

2. Where aluminum is in contact with concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous paint.

C. Set continuous sill members and flashing in full sealant bed as specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants" to produce weathertight installation.



D. Install components plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades.

E. Install glazing as specified in Section 088000 "Glazing."

3.3 ERECTION TOLERANCES

A. Erection Tolerances: Install security storefronts to comply with the following maximum tolerances:

1. Plumb: 1/8-inch in 10 feet; ¼-inch in 40 feet. 2. Level: 1/8-inch in 20 feet; ¼-inch in 40 feet. 3. Alignment:

a. Where surfaces abut in line or are separated by reveal or protruding element up to ½ inch wide, limit offset from true alignment to 1/16-inch.

b. Where surfaces are separated by reveal or protruding element from ½- to 1-inch-wide, limit offset from true alignment to 1/8-inch.

c. Where surfaces are separated by reveal or protruding element of 1-inch-wide or more, limit offset from true alignment to ¼-inch.

4. Location: Limit variation from plane to 1/8- inch in 12 feet; ½-inch over total length.


DOOR HARDWARE


SECTION 087100 - DOOR HARDWARE

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes:

1. Mechanical door hardware for the following:

a. Swinging doors.

2. Electrified door hardware.


1. Section 064116 "Plastic-Laminate-Faced Architectural Cabinets" for cabinet door hardware provided with cabinets.

2. Section 081213 “Hollow Metal Frames” for door silencers provided as part of hollow-metal frames.

3. Section 081216 “Aluminum Doors and Frames” for door silencers provided as part of aluminum frames.

1.3 COORDINATION

A. Installation Templates: Distribute for doors, frames, and other work specified to be factory prepared. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing door hardware to comply with indicated requirements.

B. Electrical System Roughing-In: Coordinate layout and installation of electrified door hardware with connections to power supplies and building safety and security systems.



1. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials, Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.

2. Inspect and discuss preparatory work performed by other trades. 3. Inspect and discuss electrical roughing-in for electrified door hardware. 4. Review sequence of operation for each type of electrified door hardware. 5. Review required testing, inspecting, and certifying procedures.

DOOR HARDWARE





B. Shop Drawings: Details of electrified door hardware, indicating the following:

1. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring. 2. Include details of interface of electrified door hardware and building safety and security

systems.

C. Samples: For each exposed product in each finish specified, in manufacturer's standard size.

1. Tag Samples with full product description to coordinate Samples with door hardware schedule.

D. Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of Installer. Coordinate door hardware schedule with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of door hardware.

1. Submittal Sequence: Submit door hardware schedule concurrent with submissions of Product Data, Shop Drawings, and Samples. Coordinate submission of door hardware schedule with scheduling requirements of other work to facilitate the fabrication of other work that is critical in Project construction schedule.

2. Format: Use same scheduling sequence and format and use same door numbers as in the door hardware schedule in the Contract Documents.

3. Content: Include the following information:

a. Identification number, location, hand, fire rating, size, and material of each door and frame.

b. Locations of each door hardware set, cross-referenced to Drawings on floor plans and to door and frame schedule.

c. Complete designations, including name and manufacturer, type, style, function, size, quantity, function, and finish of each door hardware product.

d. Description of electrified door hardware sequences of operation and interfaces with other building control systems.

e. Fastenings and other pertinent information. f. Explanation of abbreviations, symbols, and designations contained in door

hardware schedule. g. Mounting locations for door hardware. h. List of related door devices specified in other Sections for each door and frame.

E. Keying Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of Installer, detailing Owner's final keying instructions for locks. Include schematic keying diagram and index each key set to unique door designations that are coordinated with the Contract Documents.



DOOR HARDWARE


B. Product Certificates: For each type of electrified door hardware.

1. Certify that door hardware for use on each type and size of labeled fire-rated doors complies with listed fire-rated door assemblies.

C. Product Test Reports: For compliance with accessibility requirements, for tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, for door hardware on doors located in accessible routes.

D. Sample Warranty: For special warranty.


A. Maintenance Data: For each type of door hardware to include in maintenance manuals.

B. Schedules: Final door hardware and keying schedule.


A. Installer Qualifications: Supplier of products and an employer of workers trained and approved by product manufacturers who is available during the course of the Work to consult with Contractor, Architect, and Owner about door hardware and keying.

1. Warehousing Facilities: In Project's vicinity. 2. Scheduling Responsibility: Preparation of door hardware and keying schedules. 3. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of data for electrified door hardware, including

Shop Drawings, based on testing and engineering analysis of manufacturer's standard units in assemblies similar to those indicated for this Project.


A. Inventory door hardware on receipt and provide secure lock-up for door hardware delivered to Project site.

B. Tag each item or package separately with identification coordinated with the final door hardware schedule, and include installation instructions, templates, and necessary fasteners with each item or package.

C. Deliver keys to Owner by registered mail or overnight package service.

1.10 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's agrees to repair or replace components of door hardware that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.


a. Structural failures including excessive deflection, cracking, or breakage. b. Faulty operation of doors and door hardware. c. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal

weathering and use.

DOOR HARDWARE


2. Warranty Period: Three (3) years from date of Substantial Completion, unless otherwise indicated.

a. Manual Closers: Ten (10) years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of door hardware from single manufacturer.

1. Provide electrified door hardware from same manufacturer as mechanical door hardware, unless otherwise indicated. Manufacturers that perform electrical modifications and that are listed by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction are acceptable.


A. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Where fire-rated doors are indicated, provide door hardware complying with NFPA 80 that is listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing at positive pressure according to NFPA 252 or UL 10C.

B. Smoke- and Draft-Control Door Assemblies: Where smoke- and draft-control door assemblies are required, provide door hardware that complies with requirements of assemblies tested according to UL 1784 and installed in compliance with NFPA 105.

1. Air Leakage Rate: Maximum air leakage of 0.3 cfm/sq. ft. at the tested pressure differential of 0.3-inch wg of water.

C. Electrified Door Hardware: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

D. Means of Egress Doors: Latches do not require more than 15 lbf to release the latch. Locks do not require use of a key, tool, or special knowledge for operation.

E. Accessibility Requirements: For door hardware on doors in an accessible route, comply with ICC/ANSI A117.1.

1. Provide operating devices that do not require tight grasping, pinching, or twisting of the wrist and that operate with a force of not more than 5 lbf.

2. Comply with the following maximum opening-force requirements:

a. Interior, Non-Fire-Rated Hinged Doors: 5 lbf applied perpendicular to door. b. Fire Doors: Minimum opening force allowable by authorities having jurisdiction.

3. Adjust door closer sweep periods so that, from an open position of 90 degrees, the door will take at least 5 seconds to move to a point 3 inches (12 degrees) from the latch.

DOOR HARDWARE


2.3 SCHEDULED DOOR HARDWARE

A. Provide door hardware for each door as scheduled in Part 3 "Door Hardware Schedule" Article to comply with requirements in this Section.

1. Door Hardware Sets: Provide quantity, item, size, finish, or color indicated, and products equivalent in function and comparable in quality to named products, where allowed.

B. Designations: Requirements for design, grade, function, finish, size, and other distinctive qualities of each type of door hardware are indicated in Part 3 "Door Hardware Schedule" Article. Products are identified by using door hardware designations, as follows:

1. Named Manufacturers' Products: Manufacturer and product designation are listed for each door hardware type required for the purpose of establishing minimum requirements. Manufacturers' names are abbreviated in Part 3 "Door Hardware Schedule" Article.

2.4 HINGES

A. Hinges: BHMA A156.1. Provide template-produced hinges for hinges installed on hollow-metal doors and hollow-metal frames

1. Basis of Design:

a. Stanley Commercial Hardware; a division of Stanley Security Solutions; CB179


a. Hager Companies b. McKinney Products Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company c. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 012500 “Substitution Procedures”.

2.5 CONTINUOUS HINGES

A. Continuous Hinges: BHMA A156.26; minimum 0.120-inch-thick, hinge leaves with minimum overall width of 4 inches; fabricated to full height of door and frame and to template screw locations; with components finished after milling and drilling are complete.

B. Continuous, Gear-Type Hinges: Extruded-aluminum, pinless, geared hinge leaves joined by a continuous extruded-aluminum channel cap; with concealed, self-lubricating thrust bearings.

1. Basis-of-Design:

a. Markar Architectural Products, Inc.; a subsidiary of Adams Rite Manufacturing Co.


a. Hager Companies

DOOR HARDWARE


b. McKinney Products Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company c. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 012500 “Substitution Procedures”.

2.6 MECHANICAL LOCKS AND LATCHES

A. Lock Functions: As indicated in Part 3 “Door Hardware Schedule”.

B. Lock Throw: Comply with testing requirements for length of bolts required for labeled fire doors, and as follows:

1. Bored Locks: Minimum ½-inch latchbolt throw.

C. Lock Backset: 2¾ inches, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Lock Trim:

1. Levers: Cast. 2. Escutcheons (Roses): Wrought. 3. Dummy Trim: Match lever lock trim and escutcheons. 4. Operating Device: Lever with escutcheons (roses).

E. Strikes: Provide manufacturer's standard strike for each lock bolt or latchbolt complying with requirements indicated for applicable lock or latch and with strike box and curved lip extended to protect frame; finished to match lock or latch.

1. Flat-Lip Strikes: For locks with three-piece antifriction latchbolts, as recommended by manufacturer. Extra-Long-Lip Strikes: For locks used on frames with applied wood casing trim.

2. Aluminum-Frame Strike Box: Manufacturer's special strike box fabricated for aluminum framing.

F. Bored Locks: BHMA A156.2; Grade 1; Series 4000.

1. Basis of Design:

a. Schlage Commercial Lock Division; an Allegion company; ND Series – Rhodes, Vandlgard functions


a. Corbin Russwin Architectural Hardware; n ASSA ABLOY Group Company b. Medeco Security Locks, Inc.; an ASSA ABLOY Group company c. SARGENT Manufacturing Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company d. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 012500 “Substitution Procedures”.

2.7 AUXILIARY LOCKS

A. Mortise Auxiliary Locks: BHMA A156.36; Grade 1; with strike that suits frame.

1. Backset: 2¾ inches.

DOOR HARDWARE


2. Deadlocks: Deadbolt operated by key outside and turn inside. 3. Deadlocks to be products of the same source manufacturer and keyway as other locksets.

2.8 ELECTRIC STRIKES

A. Electric Strikes: BHMA A156.31; Grade 1; solenoid powered, DC units, 24 volts DC for doors, with faceplate to suit lock and frame. Provide compatible power supply and coordinate installation with electrical work.


a. Adams Rite Manufacturing Co.; an ASSA ABLOY Group company; Series 7000


a. Folger Adam Electric Door Controls; an ASSA ABLOY Group company b. HES, an ASSA ABLOY Group company c. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 012500 “Substitution Procedures”.

2.9 ELECTROMECHANICAL LOCKS

A. Electromechanical Locks: BHMA A156.25; Grade 1; motor or solenoid driven; with strike that suits frame and paddle handle that retracts latchbolt.


a. Adams Rite Manufacturing Co.; an ASSA ABLOY Group company; Series 4300 Deadlatch, Series 4591 Paddle


a. Folger Adam Electric Door Controls; an ASSA ABLOY Group company b. HES, an ASSA ABLOY Group company c. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 012500 “Substitution Procedures”.

3. Type: Mortise deadlocking latchbolt. 4. Lettering: Engrave with the words "Push."

2.10 LOCK CYLINDERS

A. Lock Cylinders: Tumbler type, constructed from brass or bronze, stainless-steel, or nickel silver.

1. Manufacturer: Same manufacturer as for locking devices.

B. Standard Lock Cylinders: BHMA A156.5; Grade 1; permanent cores that are removable; face finished to match lockset.

DOOR HARDWARE


C. Construction Cores: Provide construction cores that are replaceable by permanent cores. Provide ten (10) construction master keys.

2.11 KEYING

A. Keying System: Factory registered, complying with guidelines in BHMA A156.28, appendix. Incorporate decisions made in keying conference.

1. Great-Grand Master Key System: Change keys, a master key, a grand master key, and a great-grand master key operate cylinders to match existing keying system.

B. Keys: Brass.

1. Stamping: Permanently inscribe each key with a visual key control number and include the following notation:

a. Notation: "DO NOT DUPLICATE."

2. Quantity: In addition to one (1) extra key blank for each lock, provide the following:

a. Great-Grand Master Keys: Five (5).

2.12 OPERATING TRIM

A. Operating Trim: BHMA A156.6; brass or bronze, unless otherwise indicated.


a. Rockwood Manufacturing Company

1) Push/Pull Sets: RM271


a. Burns Manufacturing Incorporated b. IVES Hardware; an Ingersoll-Rand company c. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 012500 “Substitution Procedures”.

2.13 SURFACE CLOSERS

A. Surface Closers: BHMA A156.4; rack-and-pinion hydraulic type with adjustable sweep and latch speeds controlled by key-operated valves and forged-steel main arm. Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations for size of door closers depending on size of door, exposure to weather, and anticipated frequency of use. Provide factory-sized closers, adjustable to meet field conditions and requirements for opening force.


a. LCN; an Allegion company; 4040XP Series

DOOR HARDWARE



a. SARGENT Manufacturing Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company b. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 012500 “Substitution Procedures”.

B. Door closers to have delayed action cylinder, sized to the door leaf size.

1. Marked closer, shall be Smoothee series.

C. Door closers are to be mounted on the least conspicuous side of the door. The hardware supplier shall consult with the Architect to verify applications and note mounting locations on the hardware schedule.

2.14 CONCEALED CLOSERS

A. Concealed Closers: BHMA A156.4; rack-and-pinion hydraulic type with adjustable sweep and latch speeds controlled by key-operated valves. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for size of door closers depending on size of door, exposure to weather, and anticipated frequency of use. Provide factory-sized closers, adjustable to meet field conditions and requirements for opening force.


a. LCN; an Allegion company; 5010 Series


a. Dorma USA, Inc. b. SARGENT Manufacturing Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company c. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 012500 “Substitution Procedures”.

2.15 MECHANICAL STOPS AND HOLDERS

A. Wall- and Floor-Mounted Stops: BHMA A156.16; polished cast brass, bronze, or aluminum base metal.


a. IVES Hardware; an Allegion company; 407 and 436 or 438

1) Provide wall bumpers wherever possible. Provide floor stops where the use of wall bumpers is not feasible, provided the location of the stop is not a stumbling hazard or would cause the door to rack at the hinges.


DOOR HARDWARE


a. Glynn-Johnson; an Allegion company b. Door Controls International, Inc. c. Substitutions: In accordance with Section 012500 “Substitution Procedures”.

2.16 OVERHEAD STOPS AND HOLDERS

A. Overhead Stops and Holders: BHMA A156.8.


a. Glynn-Johnson; an Allegion company; 90S


a. Architectural Builders Hardware Mfg., Inc. b. Rockwood Manufacturing Company c. SARGENT Manufacturing Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company d. Substitutions: In accordance with Section 012500 “Substitution Procedures”.

2.17 SMOKE SEALS

A. Smoke Labeled Gasketing: Assemblies complying with NFPA 105 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for smoke ratings indicated, based on testing according to UL 1784.

1. Basis-of-Design Products:

a. Pemko Manufacturing Co.; an ASSA ABLOY Group company

1) Smoke Rated Doors:

a) Head and Jamb: S88C, compression bulb. b) Sill: 411APKL, automatic door bottom.

2) Fire Rated Doors: Provided by the door manufacturer.


a. Reese Enterprises, Inc. b. Zero International c. Substitutions: In accordance with Section 012500 “Substitution Procedures”.

2.18 DOOR GASKETING

A. Door Gasketing: BHMA A156.22; with resilient or flexible seal strips that are easily replaceable and readily available from stocks maintained by manufacturer.

1. Basis-of-Design:

DOOR HARDWARE


b. Pemko Manufacturing Co.; an ASSA ABLOY Group company


a. National Guard Products b. Zero International c. Substitutions: In accordance with Section 012500 “Substitution Procedures”.

B. Adhesive-Backed Perimeter Gasketing: Silicone bulb gasket material applied to frame rabbet with self-adhesive.

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Pemko S88C

C. Door Shoes: Vinyl gasket material held in place by housing; mounted to bottom edge of door with screws.

1. Housing Material: Aluminum. 2. Mounting: Surface mounted on bottom edge of door. 3. Basis-of-Design Product: Pemko 209AV

2.19 METAL PROTECTIVE TRIM UNITS

A. Metal Protective Trim Units: BHMA A156.6; fabricated from 0.050-inch-thick brass or bronze; with manufacturer's standard machine or self-tapping screw fasteners.


a. Burns Manufacturing Incorporated


a. IVES Hardware; an Ingersoll-Rand company. b. Rockwood Manufacturing Company. c. Substitutions: In accordance with Section 012500 “Substitution Procedures”.

B. All plates are 2 inches less width of door on single doors, 1-inch less width of door on pairs.

1. Kick Plates: 16 inches high.

2.20 AUXILIARY DOOR HARDWARE

A. Auxiliary Hardware: BHMA A156.16.


a. Hager Companies

DOOR HARDWARE


b. Rockwood Manufacturing Company c. Stanley Commercial Hardware; Div. of The Stanley Works d. Substitutions: In accordance with Section 012500 “Substitution Procedures”.

2.21 AUXILIARY ELECTRIFIED DOOR HARDWARE

A. Auxiliary Electrified Door Hardware:


a. GE Security, Inc. b. SARGENT Manufacturing Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. c. Schlage Commercial Lock Division; an Allegion company. d. Security Door Controls. e. Substitutions: In accordance with Section 012500 “Substitution Procedures”.

2.22 FABRICATION

A. Base Metals: Produce door hardware units of base metal indicated, fabricated by forming method indicated, using manufacturer's standard metal alloy, composition, temper, and hardness. Furnish metals of a quality equal to or greater than that of specified door hardware units and BHMA A156.18.

B. Fasteners: Provide door hardware manufactured to comply with published templates prepared for machine, wood, and sheet metal screws. Provide screws that comply with commercially recognized industry standards for application intended, except aluminum fasteners are not permitted. Provide Phillips flat-head screws with finished heads to match surface of door hardware, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Concealed Fasteners: For door hardware units that are exposed when door is closed, except for units already specified with concealed fasteners. Do not use through bolts for installation where bolt head or nut on opposite face is exposed unless it is the only means of securely attaching the door hardware. Where through bolts are used on hollow door and frame construction, provide sleeves for each through bolt.

2. Fire-Rated Applications:

a. Wood or Machine Screws: For the following:

1) Hinges mortised to doors or frames. 2) Strike plates to frames. 3) Closers to doors and frames.

b. Steel Through Bolts: For the following unless door blocking is provided:

1) Surface hinges to doors. 2) Closers to doors and frames. 3) Surface-mounted exit devices.

3. Spacers or Sex Bolts: For through bolting of hollow-metal doors.

DOOR HARDWARE


a. All closers to be installed using through bolting.

2.23 FINISHES

A. Provide finishes complying with BHMA A156.18. Unless otherwise specified in the hardware sets or specification, materials and finishes for the buildings shall be as follows:

1. BHMA 626 or 630.


C. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine doors and frames, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, labeled fire-rated door assembly construction, wall and floor construction, and other conditions affecting performance.

B. Examine roughing-in for electrical power systems to verify actual locations of wiring connections before electrified door hardware installation.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Steel Doors and Frames: For surface-applied door hardware, drill and tap doors and frames according to ANSI/SDI A250.6.

B. Wood Doors: Comply with door and hardware manufacturers' written instructions.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Mounting Heights: Mount door hardware units at heights to comply with the following unless otherwise indicated or required to comply with governing regulations.

1. Standard Steel Doors and Frames: ANSI/SDI A250.8. 2. Wood Doors: DHI's "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Wood

Flush Doors."

B. Install each door hardware item to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Where cutting and fitting are required to install door hardware onto or into surfaces that are later to be painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage, and reinstallation of surface

DOOR HARDWARE


protective trim units with finishing work. Do not install surface-mounted items until finishes have been completed on substrates involved.

1. Set units level, plumb, and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce attachment substrates as necessary for proper installation and operation.

2. Drill and countersink units that are not factory prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space fasteners and anchors according to industry standards.

C. Hinges: Install types and in quantities indicated in door hardware schedule but not fewer than the number recommended by manufacturer for application indicated or one (1) hinge for every 30 inches of door height, whichever is more stringent, unless other equivalent means of support for door, such as spring hinges or pivots, are provided.

D. Lock Cylinders: Install construction cores to secure building and areas during construction period.

1. Replace construction cores with permanent cores as indicated in keying schedule.

E. Stops: Provide wall or floor stops for doors unless other type stops are indicated in door hardware schedule. Do not mount floor stops where they will impede traffic.

3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Initial Adjustment: Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate as intended. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment and to comply with referenced accessibility requirements.

1. Door Closers: Adjust sweep period to comply with accessibility requirements and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Electric Strikes: Adjust horizontal and vertical alignment of keeper to properly engage lock bolt.


A. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by door hardware installation.

B. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish.

C. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure that door hardware is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

3.6 MAINTENANCE SERVICE

A. Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and maintenance instructions for Owner's continued adjustment, maintenance, and removal and replacement of door hardware.

B. Maintenance Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, provide 6 months' full maintenance by skilled employees of door hardware Installer. Include quarterly preventive maintenance, repair, or replacement of worn or defective components, lubrication, cleaning, and adjusting as

DOOR HARDWARE


required for proper door and door hardware operation. Provide parts and supplies that are the same as those used in the manufacture and installation of original products.

3.7 DOOR HARDWARE SCHEDULE

A. Provide hardware as specified in the previous articles in sets according to the following schedule and as indicated in the Door Schedule on the Drawings.

B. The hardware supplier shall meet with the Architect and/or Owner to determine lock functions and keying requirements.

HW-1 HW-2

EACH TO HAVE: EACH TO HAVE: BUTTS BUTTS 1 CLASSROOM LOCKSET 1 PUSHBAR/PULL 1 ELECTRIC STRIKE 1 MORTISE CYLINDER W/THUMBTURN ACCESS CONTROLS 1 CONCEALED CLOSER/HOLD 1 CONCEALED CLOSER/HOLD 1 STOP 1 STOP 1 DOOR GASKETING 1 DOOR GASKETING (SHOE ONLY) SILENCERS SILENCERS

DOORS: 011, 012 DOORS: 021

HW-3 HW-4

EACH TO HAVE: EACH TO HAVE: BUTTS BUTTS 1 PRIVACY LOCKSET 1 PASSAGE LOCKSET 1 STOP 1 OH STOP 1 KICK PLATE 1 KICK PLATE SILENCERS SILENCERS

DOORS: 013, 015 DOORS: 019

HW-5 HW-6

EACH TO HAVE: EACH TO HAVE: CONTINUOUS HINGES CONTINUOUS 1 CLASSROOM LOCKSET 1 CLASSROOM LOCKSET 1 ELECTRIC STRIKE 1 ELECTRIC STRIKE ACCESS CONTROLS ACCESS CONTROLS 1 CLOSER 1 CLOSER 1 OH STOP 1 STOP 1 KICK PLATE 1 KICK PLATE SMOKE SEALS SMOKE SEALS

DOORS: 016 DOORS: 018

DOOR HARDWARE


HW-7 HW-8

EACH TO HAVE: EACH TO HAVE: BUTTS BUTTS 1 STOREROOM LOCKSET 1 STOREROOM LOCKSET 1 OH STOP 1 STOP 1 KICK PLATE 1 KICK PLATE SILENCERS SILENCERS


HW-9 HW-10

EACH TO HAVE: EACH TO HAVE: BUTTS BUTTS 1 PUSHBAR/PULL 1 CLASSROOM LOCKSET 1 MORTISE CYLINDER 1 ELECTRIC STRIKE 1 ELECTRIC LATCH ACCESS CONTROLS 1 RELEASE PADDLE 1 CONCEALED CLOSER/HOLD ACCESS CONTROLS 1 STOP 1 CONCEALED CLOSER 1 DOOR GASKETING 1 OH STOP SILENCERS 1 DOOR GASKETING SILENCERS



GLAZING


SECTION 088000 - GLAZING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes:

1. Glass for doors, interior borrowed lights, bullet-resistant framing, and storefront framing. 2. Glazing sealants and accessories.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Glass Manufacturers: Firms that produce primary glass, fabricated glass, or both, as defined in referenced glazing publications.

B. Glass Thicknesses: Indicated by thickness designations according to ASTM C 1036.

C. IBC: International Building Code.

D. Interspace: Space between lites of an insulating-glass unit.

1.4 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate glazing channel dimensions to provide necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances.



B. Glass Samples: For each type of glass product other than clear monolithic vision glass; 12 inches square.

C. Glazing Accessory Samples: For gaskets and sealants, in 12-inch lengths. Install sealant Samples between two (2) strips of material representative in color of the adjoining framing system.

D. Glazing Schedule: List glass types and thicknesses for each size opening and location. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.


A. Qualification Data: For installers, glass testing agency and sealant testing agency.

GLAZING


B. Product Test Reports: For tinted glass, coated glass, insulating glass, glazing sealants, and glazing gaskets.

1. For glazing sealants, provide test reports based on testing current sealant formulations within previous 36-month period.

C. Preconstruction adhesion and compatibility test report.

D. Sample Warranties: For special warranties.


A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs glass installers for this Project who are certified under the National Glass Association's Certified Glass Installer Program.

B. Glass Testing Agency Qualifications: A qualified independent testing agency accredited according to the NFRC CAP 1 Certification Agency Program.

C. Sealant Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified according to ASTM C 1021 to conduct the testing indicated.

D. Mockups: Build mockups to demonstrate aesthetic effects and to set quality standards for materials and execution.

1. Install glazing in mockups specified in Sections 081216 “Aluminum Doors and Windows”, 083400 “Bullet-Resistant Doors and Frames”, and 084333.13 “Security Entrances and Storefronts” to match glazing systems required for Project, including glazing methods.

1.8 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING

A. Preconstruction Adhesion and Compatibility Testing: Test each glass product, tape sealant, gasket, glazing accessory, and glass-framing member for adhesion to and compatibility with elastomeric glazing sealants.

1. Testing is not required if data are submitted based on previous testing of current sealant products and glazing materials matching those submitted.

2. Use ASTM C 1087 to determine whether priming and other specific joint-preparation techniques are required to obtain rapid, optimum adhesion of glazing sealants to glass, tape sealants, gaskets, and glazing channel substrates.

3. Test no fewer than eight (8) Samples of each type of material, including joint substrates, shims, sealant backings, secondary seals, and miscellaneous materials.

4. Schedule sufficient time for testing and analyzing results to prevent delaying the Work. 5. For materials failing tests, submit sealant manufacturer's written instructions for

corrective measures including the use of specially formulated primers.


A. Protect glazing materials according to manufacturer's written instructions. Prevent damage to glass and glazing materials from condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure to sun, or other causes.

GLAZING


B. Comply with insulating-glass manufacturer's written recommendations for venting and sealing units to avoid hermetic seal ruptures due to altitude change.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by glazing material manufacturers and when glazing channel substrates are wet from rain, frost, condensation, or other causes.

1. Do not install glazing sealants when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by sealant manufacturer or below 40 deg F (4.4 deg C).

1.11 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Coated-Glass Products: Manufacturer agrees to replace coated-glass units that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of coated glass is defined as defects developed from normal use that are not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning coated glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include peeling, cracking, and other indications of deterioration in coating.

1. Warranty Period: Ten (10) years from date of Substantial Completion.

B. Manufacturer's Special Warranty on Laminated Glass: Manufacturer agrees to replace laminated-glass units that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of laminated glass is defined as defects developed from normal use that are not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning laminated glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include edge separation, delamination materially obstructing vision through glass, and blemishes exceeding those allowed by referenced laminated-glass standard.


C. Manufacturer's Special Warranty on Insulating Glass: Manufacturer agrees to replace insulating-glass units that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of insulating glass is defined as failure of hermetic seal under normal use that is not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning insulating glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Evidence of failure is the obstruction of vision by dust, moisture, or film on interior surfaces of glass.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


1. Cardinal Glass Industries 2. DuPont™ Building Innovations 3. Oldcastle BuildingEnvelope

GLAZING


4. PPG Industries, Inc. 5. Viracon, Inc. 6. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 012500 “Substitution Procedures”.

B. Source Limitations for Glass: Obtain from single source from single manufacturer for each glass type.

1. Obtain tinted glass from single source from single manufacturer.

C. Source Limitations for Glazing Accessories: Obtain from single source from single manufacturer for each product and installation method.


A. General: Installed glazing systems shall withstand normal thermal movement and wind and impact loads (where applicable) without failure, including loss or glass breakage attributable to the following: defective manufacture, fabrication, or installation; failure of sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and airtight; deterioration of glazing materials; or other defects in construction.

B. Structural Performance: Glazing shall withstand the following design loads within limits and under conditions indicated determined according to the IBC and ASTM E 1300.

1. Design Wind Pressures: As indicated on Drawings, required by Building Code or per authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Maximum Lateral Deflection: For glass supported on all four (4) edges, limit center-of-glass deflection at design wind pressure to not more than 1/50 times the short-side length or 1-inch, whichever is less.

3. Differential Shading: Design glass to resist thermal stresses induced by differential shading within individual glass lites.

C. Safety Glazing: Where safety glazing is indicated, provide glazing that complies with 16 CFR 1201, Category II.

D. Thermal and Optical Performance Properties: Provide glass with performance properties specified, as indicated in manufacturer's published test data, based on procedures indicated below:

1. For monolithic-glass lites, properties are based on units with lites of thickness indicated. 2. For laminated-glass lites, properties are based on products of construction indicated. 3. For insulating-glass units, properties are based on units of thickness indicated for overall

unit and for each lite. 4. U-Factors: Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC 100 and based on LBL's

WINDOW 5.2 computer program, expressed as Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F. 5. Solar Heat-Gain Coefficient and Visible Transmittance: Center-of-glazing values,

according to NFRC 200 and based on LBL's WINDOW 5.2 computer program. 6. Visible Reflectance: Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC 300.

GLAZING


2.3 GLASS PRODUCTS, GENERAL

A. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers and organizations below unless more stringent requirements are indicated. Refer to these publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards.

1. GANA Publications: GANA's "Laminated Glazing Reference Manual" and GANA’s "Glazing Manual."

2. IGMA Publication for Insulating Glass: SIGMA TM-3000, "North American Glazing Guidelines for Sealed Insulating Glass Units for Commercial and Residential Use."

B. Safety Glazing Labeling: Where safety glazing is indicated, permanently mark glazing with certification label of the SGCC or another certification agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Label shall indicate manufacturer's name, type of glass, thickness, and safety glazing standard with which glass complies.

C. Insulating-Glass Certification Program: Permanently marked either on spacers or on at least one (1) component lite of units with appropriate certification label of IGCC.

D. Thickness: Where glass thickness is indicated, it is a minimum. Provide glass that complies with performance requirements and is not less than the thickness indicated.

E. Strength: Where float glass is indicated, provide annealed float glass, Kind HS heat-treated float glass, or Kind FT heat-treated float glass. Where heat-strengthened glass is indicated, provide Kind HS heat-treated float glass or Kind FT heat-treated float glass. Where fully tempered glass is indicated, provide Kind FT heat-treated float glass.

2.4 GLASS PRODUCTS

A. Clear Annealed Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Class 1 (clear), Quality-Q3.

B. Tinted Annealed Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Class 2 (tinted), Quality-Q3.

1. Color: As selected by Architect and Owner from manufacturer’s entire range, to match existing.

C. Fully Tempered Float Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT (fully tempered), Condition A (uncoated) unless otherwise indicated, Type I, Class 1 (clear) or Class 2 (tinted) as indicated, Quality-Q3.

1. Fabrication Process: By horizontal (roller-hearth) process with roll-wave distortion parallel to bottom edge of glass as installed unless otherwise indicated.

D. Heat-Strengthened Float Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind HS (heat strengthened), Type I, Condition A (uncoated) unless otherwise indicated, Type I, Class 1 (clear) or Class 2 (tinted) as indicated, Quality-Q3.

1. Fabrication Process: By horizontal (roller-hearth) process with roll-wave distortion parallel to bottom edge of glass as installed unless otherwise indicated.

2. For uncoated glass, comply with requirements for Condition A. 3. For coated vision glass, comply with requirements for Condition C (other coated glass).

GLAZING


E. Ceramic-Coated Spandrel Glass: ASTM C 1048, Condition B, Type I, Quality-Q3..

1. Glass: Tinted float. 2. Ceramic Coating Color: As selected by Architect and Owner from manufacturer's full

range.

2.5 LAMINATED GLASS

A. Laminated Glass: ASTM C 1172. Use materials that have a proven record of no tendency to bubble, discolor, or lose physical and mechanical properties after fabrication and installation.

1. Construction: Laminate glass with polyvinyl butyl interlayer to comply with interlayer manufacturer's written recommendations.

2. Interlayer Thickness: Provide thickness not less than that indicated and as needed to comply with requirements.

3. Interlayer Color: Clear unless otherwise indicated.

2.6 INSULATING GLASS

A. Insulating-Glass Units: Factory-assembled units consisting of sealed lites of glass separated by a dehydrated interspace, qualified according to ASTM E 2190.

1. Sealing System: Dual seal, with polyisobutylene and silicone primary and secondary. 2. Perimeter Spacer: Manufacturer's standard spacer material and construction.

2.7 FIRE-RESISTANCE-RATED GLAZING

A. Fire-Resistance-Rated Glazing: Listed and labeled by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire-resistance ratings indicated, based on testing according to ASTM E 119 or UL 263.

B. Fire-Resistance-Rated Glazing Labeling: Permanently mark fire-protection-rated glazing with certification label of a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Label shall indicate manufacturer's name, test standard, that the glazing is approved for use in walls, and the fire-resistance rating in minutes.

C. Laminated Glass with Intumescent Interlayers: Laminated glass made from multiple plies of uncoated, clear float glass; with intumescent interlayers; complying with testing requirements in 16 CFR 1201 for Category II materials.


a. InterEdge, Inc., a subsidiary of AFG Industries, Inc.; Pyrobel b. Pilkington Group Limited (distributed by Technical Glass Products); PyroStop c. Vetrotech Saint-Gobain; SGG Swissflam N2 d. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 012500 “Substitution Procedures”.

GLAZING


2.8 GLAZING GASKETS

A. Dense Compression Gaskets: Molded or extruded gaskets of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal, made from one (1) of the following:

1. EPDM complying with ASTM C 864. 2. Silicone complying with ASTM C 1115. 3. Thermoplastic polyolefin rubber complying with ASTM C 1115.

B. Soft Compression Gaskets: Extruded or molded, closed-cell, integral-skinned EPDM, silicone or thermoplastic polyolefin rubber gaskets complying with ASTM C 509, Type II, black; of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal.

1. Application: Use where soft compression gaskets will be compressed by inserting dense compression gaskets on opposite side of glazing or pressure applied by means of pressure-glazing stops on opposite side of glazing.

C. Lock-Strip Gaskets: Neoprene extrusions in size and shape indicated, fabricated into frames with molded corner units and zipper lock-strips, complying with ASTM C 542, black.

2.9 GLAZING SEALANTS

A. General:

1. Compatibility: Compatible with one another and with other materials they will contact, including glass products, seals of insulating-glass units, and glazing channel substrates, under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience.

2. Suitability: Comply with sealant and glass manufacturers' written instructions for selecting glazing sealants suitable for applications indicated and for conditions existing at time of installation.

3. Sealants used inside the weatherproofing system, shall have a VOC content of not more than 250 g/L when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

4. Colors of Exposed Glazing Sealants: As selected by Architect and Owner from manufacturer's full range, to match adjacent.

B. Glazing Sealant: Neutral-curing silicone glazing sealant complying with ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 100/50, Use NT.


a. Dow Corning Corporation; 790 b. Pecora Corporation; 890 c. Tremco Incorporated; Spectrem 1 d. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 012500 “Substitution Procedures”.

C. Glazing Sealants for Fire-Rated Glazing Products: Products that are approved by testing agencies that listed and labeled fire-resistant glazing products with which they are used for applications and fire-protection ratings indicated.

GLAZING


2.10 GLAZING TAPES

A. Back-Bedding Mastic Glazing Tapes: Preformed, butyl-based, one hundred percent (100%) solids elastomeric tape; non-staining and non-migrating in contact with nonporous surfaces; with or without spacer rod as recommended in writing by tape and glass manufacturers for application indicated; and complying with ASTM C 1281 and AAMA 800 for products indicated below:

1. AAMA 806.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is subject to continuous pressure.

2.11 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS

A. General: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced glazing standard, with requirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials for application indicated, and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation.

B. Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer.

C. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness of 85, plus or minus 5.

D. Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions of hardness required by glass manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation indicated.

E. Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement (side walking).

F. Cylindrical Glazing Sealant Backing: ASTM C 1330, Type O (open-cell material), of size and density to control glazing sealant depth and otherwise produce optimum glazing sealant performance.

G. Perimeter Insulation for Fire-Resistive Glazing: Product that is approved by testing agency that listed and labeled fire-resistant glazing product with which it is used for application and fire-protection rating indicated.

2.12 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate glazing units in sizes required to fit openings indicated for Project, with edge and face clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with written instructions of product manufacturer and referenced glazing publications, to comply with system performance requirements.

1. Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes acting on glass framing members and glazing components.

a. Temperature Change: 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C), material surfaces.

GLAZING


B. Clean-cut or flat-grind vertical edges of butt-glazed monolithic lites to produce square edges with slight chamfers at junctions of edges and faces.

C. Grind smooth and polish exposed glass edges and corners.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine framing, glazing channels, and stops, with Installer present, for compliance with the following:

1. Manufacturing and installation tolerances, including those for size, squareness, and offsets at corners.

2. Presence and functioning of weep systems. 3. Minimum required face and edge clearances. 4. Effective sealing between joints of glass-framing members.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean glazing channels and other framing members receiving glass immediately before glazing. Remove coatings not firmly bonded to substrates.

B. Examine glazing units to locate exterior and interior surfaces. Label or mark units as needed so that exterior and interior surfaces are readily identifiable. Do not use materials that leave visible marks in the completed work.

3.3 GLAZING, GENERAL

A. Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in referenced glazing publications.

B. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged glass from Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass includes glass with edge damage or other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass, impair performance, or impair appearance.

C. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by preconstruction testing.

D. Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of compatible sealant suitable for heel bead.

E. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites.

F. Provide spacers for glass lites where length plus width is larger than 50 inches.

GLAZING


1. Locate spacers directly opposite each other on both inside and outside faces of glass. Install correct size and spacing to preserve required face clearances, unless gaskets and glazing tapes are used that have demonstrated ability to maintain required face clearances and to comply with system performance requirements.

2. Provide 1/8-inch minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to sealant width. With glazing tape, use thickness slightly less than final compressed thickness of tape.

G. Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving sideways in glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and according to requirements in referenced glazing publications.

H. Set glass lites in each series with uniform pattern, draw, bow, and similar characteristics.

I. Set glass lites with proper orientation so that coatings face exterior or interior as specified.

J. Where wedge-shaped gaskets are driven into one side of channel to pressurize sealant or gasket on opposite side, provide adequate anchorage so gasket cannot walk out when installation is subjected to movement.

K. Square cut wedge-shaped gaskets at corners and install gaskets in a manner recommended by gasket manufacturer to prevent corners from pulling away; seal corner joints and butt joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.

3.4 TAPE GLAZING

A. Position tapes on fixed stops so that, when compressed by glass, their exposed edges are flush with or protrude slightly above sightline of stops.

B. Install tapes continuously, but not necessarily in one (1) continuous length. Do not stretch tapes to make them fit opening.

C. Cover vertical framing joints by applying tapes to heads and sills first and then to jambs. Cover horizontal framing joints by applying tapes to jambs and then to heads and sills.

D. Place joints in tapes at corners of opening with adjoining lengths butted together, not lapped. Seal joints in tapes with compatible sealant approved by tape manufacturer.

E. Do not remove release paper from tape until right before each glazing unit is installed.

F. Apply heel bead of elastomeric sealant.

G. Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against tape by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings.

H. Apply cap bead of elastomeric sealant over exposed edge of tape.

3.5 GASKET GLAZING (DRY)

A. Cut compression gaskets to lengths recommended by gasket manufacturer to fit openings exactly, with allowance for stretch during installation.

GLAZING


B. Insert soft compression gasket between glass and frame or fixed stop so it is securely in place with joints miter cut and bonded together at corners.

C. Installation with Drive-in Wedge Gaskets: Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against soft compression gasket by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings. Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.

D. Installation with Pressure-Glazing Stops: Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against soft compression gasket. Install dense compression gaskets and pressure-glazing stops, applying pressure uniformly to compression gaskets. Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.

E. Install gaskets so they protrude past face of glazing stops.

3.6 SEALANT GLAZING (WET)

A. Install continuous spacers, or spacers combined with cylindrical sealant backing, between glass lites and glazing stops to maintain glass face clearances and to prevent sealant from extruding into glass channel and blocking weep systems until sealants cure. Secure spacers or spacers and backings in place and in position to control depth of installed sealant relative to edge clearance for optimum sealant performance.

B. Force sealants into glazing channels to eliminate voids and to ensure complete wetting or bond of sealant to glass and channel surfaces.

C. Tool exposed surfaces of sealants to provide a substantial wash away from glass.


A. Immediately after installation remove nonpermanent labels and clean surfaces.

B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a month, for buildup of dirt, scum, alkaline deposits, or stains.

1. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with glass, remove substances immediately as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer. Remove and replace glass that cannot be cleaned without damage to coatings.

C. Remove and replace glass that is damaged during construction period.

D. Wash glass on both exposed surfaces not more than four (4) days before date scheduled for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Wash glass as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer.

GLAZING


3.8 FILM SCHEDULE

A. Glazing Type GL-0: Not used.

3.9 MONOLITHIC-GLASS SCHEDULE

A. Glass Type GL-1: Not used.

B. Glass Type GL-2: Clear fully tempered float glass.

1. Thickness: ¼-inch. 2. Safety glazing required.

C. Glass Type GL-3: Not used.

D. Glass Type GL-4: Not used.

E. Glass Type GL-38: Tinted, fully tempered float glass.

1. Thickness: ¼-inch. 2. Safety glazing required.

3.10 LAMINATED GLASS SCHEDULE


B. Glass Type GL-7: Not used.


3.11 INSULATING-GLASS SCHEDULE





E. Glass Type GL-13: Not used.

F. Glass Type GL-14: Not used.

G. Glass Type GL-15: Not used.

H. Glass Type GL-16: Not used.

I. Glass Type GL-18: Not used.

J. Glass Type GL-20: Not used.

GLAZING


K. Glass Type GL-25: Not used.

L. Glass Type GL-26: Not used.

M. Glass Type GL-32: Not used.

3.12 INSULATING-LAMINATED-GLASS TYPES





E. Glass Type GL-27: Not used.

F. Glass Type GL-28: Low-e-coated, tinted, insulating laminated glass.

1. Ballistic Resistance: Level 4 according to UL 752. 2. Interspace Content: Argon. 3. Tinted Glass Location: Outer ply of outdoor lite. 4. Low-E Coating: Pyrolytic on second surface. 5. Provide safety glazing labeling.

G. Glass Type GL-29: Not used.

H. Glass Type GL-30: Not used.

I. Glass Type GL-31: Not used.

J. Glass Type GL-37: Ceramic-coated, tinted, insulating laminated spandrel glass.

1. Ballistic Resistance: Level 4 according to UL 752. 2. Interspace Content: Argon. 3. Tinted Glass Location: Outer ply of outdoor lite. 4. Low-E Coating: Pyrolytic on second surface. 5. Coating Location: Fourth surface. 6. Safety glazing required.

3.13 FIRE-RESISTANCE-RATED GLAZING TYPES





GLAZING


E. Glass Type GL-39: Fire-rated glazing with 450 deg F (250 deg C) temperature rise limitation; tinted, laminated glass with intumescent interlayers.

1. Ballistic Resistance: Level 4 according to UL 752.


LOUVERS AND VENTS


SECTION 089000 - LOUVERS AND VENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Fixed, extruded-aluminum louvers.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Louver Terminology: Definitions of terms for metal louvers contained in AMCA 501 apply to this Section unless otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards.

B. Horizontal Louver: Louver with horizontal blades; i.e., the axes of the blades are horizontal.

C. Drainable-Blade Louver: Louver with blades having gutters that collect water and drain it to channels in jambs and mullions, which carry it to bottom of unit and away from opening.


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

1. For louvers specified to bear AMCA seal, include printed catalog pages showing specified models with appropriate AMCA Certified Ratings Seals.

B. Shop Drawings: For louvers and accessories. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. Show frame profiles and blade profiles, angles, and spacing.

1. Show weep paths, gaskets, flashing, sealant, and other means of preventing water intrusion.

2. Show mullion profiles and locations.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory-applied color finishes.


A. Evaluation Reports: For flood vents, from ICC-ES.


A. Source Limitations: Obtain louvers and vents from single source from a single manufacturer where indicated to be of same type, design, or factory-applied color finish.

LOUVERS AND VENTS


B. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:

1. AWS D1.2, "Structural Welding Code - Aluminum."

C. SMACNA Standard: Comply with recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" for fabrication, construction details, and installation procedures.


A. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of openings by field measurements before fabrication.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Source Limitations: Obtain vents from single source from single manufacturer.

2.2 FIXED, EXTRUDED-ALUMINUM LOUVERS

A. Horizontal, Drainable-Blade Louver:


a. Airolite Company, LLC (The) b. Arrow United Industries; a division of Mestek, Inc. c. Greenheck Fan Corporation d. Ruskin Company e. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 012500 “Substitution Procedures”.

2. Louver Depth: 4 inches. 3. Frame and Blade Nominal Thickness: Not less than 0.081-inch. 4. Blade Angle: 45 degrees. 5. Mullion Type: Fully recessed. 6. Louver Performance Ratings: To match existing. 7. AMCA Seal: Mark units with AMCA Certified Ratings Seal.

2.3 LOUVER SCREENS

A. General: Provide screen at each exterior louver.

1. Screen Location for Fixed Louvers: Interior face. 2. Screening Type: Bird screening.

B. Secure screen frames to louver frames with stainless-steel machine screws, spaced a maximum of 6 inches from each corner and at 12 inches o.c.

C. Louver Screen Frames: Fabricate with mitered corners to louver sizes indicated.

LOUVERS AND VENTS


1. Metal: Same kind and form of metal as indicated for louver to which screens are attached. Reinforce extruded-aluminum screen frames at corners with clips.

2. Finish: Same finish as louver frames to which louver screens are attached. 3. Type: Rewirable frames with a driven spline or insert.

D. Louver Screening for Aluminum Louvers:

1. Bird Screening: Aluminum, 5/8-inch square mesh, 0.040-inch wire.

2.4 MATERIALS

A. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063-T5.

B. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003 or 5005 with temper as required for forming, or as otherwise recommended by metal producer for required finish.

C. Aluminum Castings: ASTM B 26, Alloy 319.

D. Fasteners: Use types and sizes to suit unit installation conditions.

1. Use Phillips flat-head tamper-resistant screws for exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated.

2. For fastening aluminum, use aluminum or 300 series stainless-steel fasteners. 3. For color-finished louvers, use fasteners with heads that match color of louvers.

E. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.


A. Assemble louvers in factory to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation.

B. Vertical Assemblies: Where height of louver units exceeds fabrication and handling limitations, fabricate units to permit field-bolted assembly with close-fitting joints in jambs and mullions, reinforced with splice plates.

1. Continuous Vertical Assemblies: Fabricate units without interrupting blade-spacing pattern unless horizontal mullions are indicated.

C. Maintain equal louver blade spacing to produce uniform appearance.

D. Fabricate frames, including integral sills, to fit in openings of sizes indicated, with allowances made for fabrication and installation tolerances, adjoining material tolerances, and perimeter sealant joints.

1. Frame Type: Channel or flange unless otherwise indicated.

E. Include supports, anchorages, and accessories required for complete assembly.

F. Provide vertical mullions of type and at spacings indicated, but not more than recommended by manufacturer, or 72 inches o.c., whichever is less.

LOUVERS AND VENTS


1. Fully Recessed Mullions: Where indicated, provide mullions fully recessed behind louver blades. Where length of louver exceeds fabrication and handling limitations, fabricate with close-fitting blade splices designed to permit expansion and contraction.

2. Exterior Corners: Prefabricated corner units with mitered and welded blades and with semi-recessed mullions at corners.

G. Provide subsills made of same material as louvers for recessed louvers.

H. Join frame members to each other and to fixed louver blades with fillet welds, threaded fasteners, or both, as standard with louver manufacturer unless otherwise indicated or size of louver assembly makes bolted connections between frame members necessary.

2.6 FINISHES, GENERAL



A. High-Performance Organic Finish: 2-coat fluoropolymer finish complying with AAMA 2605 and containing not less than seventy percent (70%) PVDF resin by weight in color coat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions.

1. Color and Gloss: To match adjacent, as selected by Architect and Owner from manufacturer's entire range, including custom colors.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and openings, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Coordinate setting drawings, diagrams, templates, instructions, and directions for installation of anchorages that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry construction. Coordinate delivery of such items to Project site.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Locate and place louvers and vents level, plumb, and at indicated alignment with adjacent work.

C. Attach louvers and vents securely in place using fasteners supplied or approved by manufacturer.

LOUVERS AND VENTS


D. Use concealed anchorages where possible. Provide brass or lead washers fitted to screws where required to protect metal surfaces and to make a weathertight connection.

E. Form closely fitted joints with exposed connections accurately located and secured.

F. Provide perimeter reveals and openings of uniform width for sealants and joint fillers, as indicated.

G. Repair finishes damaged by cutting, welding, soldering, and grinding. Restore finishes so no evidence remains of corrective work. Return items that cannot be refinished in the field to the factory, make required alterations, and refinish entire unit or provide new units.

H. Protect unpainted galvanized and nonferrous-metal surfaces that will be in contact with concrete, masonry, or dissimilar metals from corrosion and galvanic action by applying a heavy coating of bituminous paint or by separating surfaces with waterproof gaskets or nonmetallic flashing.

I. Install concealed gaskets, flashings, joint fillers, and insulation as louver installation progresses, where weathertight louver joints are required. Comply with Section 079200 "Joint Sealants" for sealants applied during louver installation.


A. Test operation of adjustable louvers and vents and adjust as needed to produce fully functioning units that comply with requirements.

B. Clean exposed surfaces of louvers and vents that are not protected by temporary covering, to remove fingerprints and soil during construction period. Do not let soil accumulate during construction period.

C. Before final inspection, clean exposed surfaces with water and a mild soap or detergent not harmful to finishes. Thoroughly rinse surfaces and dry.

D. Restore louvers and vents damaged during installation and construction so no evidence remains of corrective work. If results of restoration are unsuccessful, as determined by Architect, remove damaged units and replace with new units.

1. Touch up minor abrasions in finishes with air-dried coating that matches color and gloss of, and is compatible with, factory-applied finish coating.


NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING


SECTION 092216 - NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Non-load-bearing steel framing for interior partitions.




A. Evaluation Reports: For firestop tracks, from ICC-ES or other qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies that incorporate non-load-bearing steel framing, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated, according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency.

B. STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated, according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency.

2.2 FRAMING SYSTEMS

A. Framing Members, General: Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated.

1. Steel Sheet Components: Comply with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal unless otherwise indicated.

2. Protective Coating: ASTM A 653, G60, hot-dip galvanized unless otherwise indicated.

B. Studs and Tracks: ASTM C 645.

1. Steel Studs and Tracks:

a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 20-gauge.



b. Depth: As indicated on Drawings.

C. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where indicated, provide the following:

1. Deflection Track: Steel sheet top track manufactured to prevent cracking of finishes applied to interior partition framing resulting from deflection of structure above; in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs.

a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1) Dietrich Metal Framing; SLP-TRK Slotted Deflection Track 2) MBA Building Supplies; Slotted Deflecto Track 3) Superior Metal Trim; Superior Flex Track System (SFT) 4) Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 012500 “Substitution

Procedures”.

D. Firestop Tracks: Top track manufactured to allow partition heads to expand and contract with movement of structure while maintaining continuity of fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated; in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs.


a. Fire Trak Corp.; Fire Trak System b. Grace Construction Products; FlameSafe FlowTrak System c. Metal-Lite, Inc.; The System d. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 012500 “Substitution Procedures”.

E. Flat Strap and Backing Plate: Steel sheet for blocking and bracing in length and width indicated.

1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.018-inch.

2.3 AUXILIARY MATERIALS

A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards.

1. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates.

B. Isolation Strip at Exterior Walls: Provide one (1) of the following:

1. Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt: ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt), nonperforated.

2. Foam Gasket: Adhesive-backed, closed-cell vinyl foam strips that allow fastener penetration without foam displacement, 1/8-inch-thick, in width to suit steel stud size.

C. Rigid Connections: Universal framing clip to attach and support rigid framing conditions including shear, tension, and two-axis loading.




a. Dietrich Metal Framing; Uni-Clip. b. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 012500 “Substitution Procedures”.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow-metal frames, cast-in anchors, and structural framing, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.



A. Installation Standard: ASTM C 754.

1. Gypsum Board Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 840 that apply to framing installation.

B. Install framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, with connections securely fastened.

C. Install supplementary framing, and blocking to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar construction.

D. Install bracing at terminations in assemblies.

E. Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with non-load-bearing steel framing members. Frame both sides of joints independently.

3.3 INSTALLING FRAMED ASSEMBLIES

A. Install framing system components according to spacings indicated, but not greater than spacings required by referenced installation standards for assembly types.

B. Where studs are installed directly against exterior masonry walls or dissimilar metals at exterior walls, install isolation strip between studs and exterior wall.

C. Install studs so flanges within framing system point in same direction.

D. Install tracks at floors and overhead supports. Extend framing full height to structural supports or substrates above suspended ceilings except where partitions are indicated to terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing around ducts penetrating partitions above ceiling.

1. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where framing extends to overhead structural supports, install to produce joints at tops of framing systems that prevent axial loading of finished assemblies.

2. Door Openings: Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb anchor clips on door frames.

a. Install two (2) studs at each jamb unless otherwise indicated.



b. Extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of overhead structure.

3. Other Framed Openings: Frame openings other than door openings the same as required for door openings unless otherwise indicated. Install framing below sills of openings to match framing required above door heads.

4. Fire-Resistance-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated and support closures and to make partitions continuous from floor to underside of solid structure.

a. Firestop Track: Where indicated, install to maintain continuity of fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated.

E. Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces vary not more than 1/8-inch from the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing.


GYPSUM BOARD


SECTION 092900 - GYPSUM BOARD

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Interior gypsum board.


1. Section 092216 "Non-Structural Metal Framing" for non-structural framing and suspension systems that support gypsum board panels.

2. Section 093000 "Tiling" for cementitious backer units installed as substrates for ceramic tile.



B. Samples: For the following products:

1. Trim Accessories: Full-size Sample in 12-inch-long length for each trim accessory indicated.

1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction traffic, and other potential causes of damage. Stack panels flat and supported on risers on a flat platform to prevent sagging.


A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board manufacturer's written recommendations, whichever are more stringent.

B. Do not install paper-faced gypsum panels until installation areas are enclosed and conditioned.

C. Do not install panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.

1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.

2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.

GYPSUM BOARD


PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency.

B. STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency.

2.2 GYPSUM BOARD, GENERAL

A. Size: Provide maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area and that correspond with support system indicated.

2.3 INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD


1. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC 2. National Gypsum Company 3. USG Corporation 4. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 012500 “Substitution Procedures”.

B. Abuse-Resistant Gypsum Board: ASTM C 1629.

1. Core: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Surface Abrasion: Meets or exceeds Level 3 requirements. 3. Surface Indentation: Meets or exceeds Level 1 requirements. 4. Single-Drop Soft-Body Impact: Meets or exceeds Level 1 requirements. 5. Long Edges: Tapered. 6. Mold Resistance: ASTM D 3273, score of 10 as rated according to ASTM D 3274.

C. Mold (Moisture)-Resistant Gypsum Board: ASTM C 1396. With moisture- and mold-resistant core and paper surfaces.

1. Core: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Long Edges: Tapered. 3. Mold Resistance: ASTM D 3273, score of 10 as rated according to ASTM D 3274.

2.4 TRIM ACCESSORIES

A. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047.

1. Material: Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet or rolled zinc. 2. Shapes:

a. Cornerbead. b. Bullnose bead.

GYPSUM BOARD


c. LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. d. L-Bead: L-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. e. U-Bead: J-shaped; exposed short flange does not receive joint compound. f. Expansion (control) joint.

2.5 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS

A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475.

B. Joint Tape:

1. Interior Gypsum Board: Paper.

C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Board: For each coat use formulation that is compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats.

1. Prefilling: At open joints, rounded or beveled panel edges, and damaged surface areas, use setting-type taping compound.

2. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners, and trim flanges, use drying-type, all-purpose compound.

3. Fill Coat: For second coat, use drying-type, all-purpose compound. 4. Finish Coat: For third coat, use drying-type, all-purpose compound. 5. Skim Coat: For final coat of Level 5 finish, use drying-type, all-purpose compound.

2.6 AUXILIARY MATERIALS

A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and manufacturer's written recommendations.

B. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel members from 0.033- to 0.112-inch-thick.

C. Sound Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing) produced by combining thermosetting resins with mineral fibers manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool.

D. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Comply with mineral-fiber requirements of assembly.

E. Acoustical Joint Sealant: Manufacturer's standard non-sag, paintable, non-staining latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834. Product effectively reduces airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90.


a. Pecora Corporation; AC-20 FTR b. Specified Technologies, Inc.; Smoke N Sound Acoustical Sealant c. USG Corporation; SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant

GYPSUM BOARD


d. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 012500 “Substitution Procedures”.

2. Acoustical joint sealant shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and substrates including welded hollow-metal frames and framing, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance.

B. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.


3.2 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL

A. Comply with ASTM C 840.

B. Install ceiling panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to avoid abutting end joints in central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent panels not less than one (1) framing member.

C. Install panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1/16-inch of open space between panels. Do not force into place.

D. Locate edge and end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where intermediate supports or gypsum board back-blocking is provided behind end joints. Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. Do not make joints other than control joints at corners of framed openings.

E. Form control and expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining gypsum panels.

F. Cover both faces of support framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces (above ceilings, etc.), except in chases braced internally.

1. Unless concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air, or smoke ratings, coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 sq. ft. in area.

2. Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits. 3. Where partitions intersect structural members projecting below underside of floor/roof

slabs and decks, cut gypsum panels to fit profile formed by structural members; allow ¼-to 3/8-inch-wide joints to install sealant.

G. Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non-load-bearing partitions at structural abutments, except floors. Provide ¼- to ½-inch-wide spaces at these locations and trim edges with edge trim where edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant.

GYPSUM BOARD


H. Attachment to Steel Framing: Attach panels so leading edge or end of each panel is attached to open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first.

I. STC-Rated Assemblies: Seal construction at perimeters, behind control joints, and at openings and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant. Install acoustical sealant at both faces of partitions at perimeters and through penetrations. Comply with ASTM C 919 and with manufacturer's written instructions for locating edge trim and closing off sound-flanking paths around or through assemblies, including sealing partitions above acoustical ceilings.

J. Install sound attenuation blankets before installing gypsum panels unless blankets are readily installed after panels have been installed on one side.

3.3 APPLYING INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD

A. Install interior gypsum board where indicated on Drawings.

B. Single-Layer Application:

1. On ceilings, apply gypsum panels before wall/partition board application to greatest extent possible and at right angles to framing unless otherwise indicated.

2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels in most economical direction, with ends and edges occurring over firm bearing unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly, and minimize end joints.

a. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one (1) framing member in alternate courses of panels.

3. Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill screws.

3.4 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES

A. General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Control Joints: Install control joints according to ASTM C 840 and in specific locations approved by Architect for visual effect.

C. Interior Trim: Install in the following locations:

1. Cornerbead: Use at outside corners, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Bullnose Bead: Use at outside corners. 3. LC-Bead: Use at exposed panel edges. 4. L-Bead: Use where indicated. 5. U-Bead: Use at exposed panel edges.

3.5 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD

A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces.

GYPSUM BOARD


B. Prefill open joints, rounded or beveled edges, and damaged surface areas.

C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except for trim products specifically indicated as not intended to receive tape.

D. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below and according to ASTM C 840:

1. Level 4: At panel surfaces that will be exposed to view, receiving flat paints.

a. Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in Section 099123 "Interior Painting."

2. Level 5: At panel surfaces that will be exposed to view, receiving eggshell, satin, semi-gloss, and gloss enamels.

a. Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in Section 099123 "Interior Painting."

3.6 PROTECTION

A. Protect adjacent surfaces from drywall compound and promptly remove from floors and other non-drywall surfaces. Repair surfaces stained, marred, or otherwise damaged during drywall application.

B. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period.

C. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.

1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.

2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.


TILING


SECTION 093000 - TILING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Porcelain tile. 2. Glazed wall tile. 3. Stone thresholds. 4. Tile backing panels. 5. Crack isolation membrane. 6. Metal edge strips.


1. Section 079200 "Joint Sealants" for sealing of expansion, contraction, control, and isolation joints in tile surfaces.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. General: Definitions in the ANSI A108 series of tile installation standards and in ANSI A137.1 apply to Work of this Section unless otherwise specified.

B. ANSI A108 Series: ANSI A108.01, ANSI A108.02, ANSI A108.1A, ANSI A108.1B, ANSI A108.1C, ANSI A108.4, ANSI A108.5, ANSI A108.6, ANSI A108.8, ANSI A108.9, ANSI A108.10, ANSI A108.11, ANSI A108.12, ANSI A108.13, ANSI A108.14, ANSI A108.15, ANSI A108.16, and ANSI A108.17, which are contained in its "Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile."



1. Review requirements in ANSI A108.01 for substrates and for preparation by other trades.



B. Shop Drawings: Show locations of each type of tile and tile pattern. Show widths, details, and locations of expansion, contraction, control, and isolation joints in tile substrates and finished tile surfaces.

TILING


C. Samples:

1. Full-size units of each type and composition of tile and for each color and finish required. For ceramic mosaic tile in color blend patterns, provide full sheets of each color blend.

2. Full-size units of each type of trim and accessory for each color and finish required. 3. Stone thresholds in 6-inch lengths. 4. Metal edge strips in 6-inch lengths.



B. Product Test Reports: For tile-setting and -grouting products.

1.7 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS

A. Furnish extra materials that match and are from same production runs as products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Tile and Trim Units: Furnish quantity of full-size units equal to three percent (3%) of amount installed for each type, composition, color, pattern, and size indicated.

2. Grout: Furnish quantity of grout equal to three percent (3%) of amount installed for each type, composition, and color indicated.


A. Installer Qualifications:

1. Installer employs installers recognized by the U.S. Department of Labor as Journeyman Tile Layers.


A. Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers with seals unbroken and labels intact until time of use. Comply with requirements in ANSI A137.1 for labeling tile packages.

B. Store tile and cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location.

C. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained, and contamination can be avoided.

D. Store liquid materials in unopened containers and protected from freezing.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install tile until construction in spaces is complete and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated in referenced standards and manufacturer's written instructions.

TILING


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Source Limitations for Tile: Obtain tile of each type and color or finish from single source or producer.

1. Obtain tile of each type and color or finish from same production run and of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties for each contiguous area.

B. Source Limitations for Setting and Grouting Materials: Obtain ingredients of a uniform quality for each mortar, adhesive, and grout component from single manufacturer and each aggregate from single source or producer.

1. Obtain setting and grouting materials, except for unmodified Portland cement and aggregate, from single manufacturer.

2. Obtain crack isolation membrane, except for sheet products, from manufacturer of setting and grouting materials.

C. Source Limitations for Other Products: Obtain each of the following products specified in this Section from a single manufacturer for each product:

1. Stone thresholds. 2. Crack isolation membrane. 3. Metal edge strips.

2.2 PRODUCTS, GENERAL

A. ANSI Tile Standard: Provide tile that complies with Standard grade requirements for types, compositions, and other characteristics indicated.

1. Ceramic: ANSI A137.1.

B. ANSI Standards for Tile Installation Materials: Provide materials complying with ANSI A108.02, ANSI standards referenced in other Part 2 articles, ANSI standards referenced by TCNA installation methods specified in tile installation schedules, and other requirements specified.

C. Factory Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations within ranges, blend tile in factory and package so tile units taken from one (1) package show same range in colors as those taken from other packages and match approved Samples.

D. Mounting: For factory-mounted tile, provide back- or edge-mounted tile assemblies as standard with manufacturer unless otherwise indicated.

2.3 TILE PRODUCTS


1. American Olean; Division of Dal-Tile International Inc. 2. Creative Materials Corporation

TILING


3. Crossville, Inc. 4. Daltile; Division of Dal-Tile International Inc. 5. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 012500 “Substitution Procedures”.

B. Tile Type (PFT-1): Glazed porcelain floor tile.


a. Daltile; Division of Dal-Tile International Inc; Linden Point, Chord

2. Certification: Porcelain tile certified by the Porcelain Tile Certification Agency. 3. Face: Plain with square or cushion edges. 4. Dynamic Coefficient of Friction: ASTM C 1028.

a. Wet: Not less than 0.42.

5. Face Size: 12 by 24 inches. 6. Thickness: 3/8-inch. 7. Tile Color and Pattern: As selected by Architect and Owner from manufacturer’s entire

range.

C. Tile Type: Glazed wall tile.


a. Dal-Tile Corporation; Color Wheel – Linear

2. Face Size:

a. CWT-1: 4 by 12 inches. b. CWT-2: 6 by 18 inches.

3. Thickness:

a. CWT-1: 5/16-inch. b. CWT-2: 3/8-inch.

4. Face: Plain with cushion edges. 5. Tile Color and Pattern: As selected by Architect and Owner from manufacturer’s entire

range.

2.4 THRESHOLDS

A. General: Fabricate to sizes and profiles indicated or required to provide transition between adjacent floor finishes.

1. Bevel edges at 1:2 slope, with lower edge of bevel aligned with or up to 1/16-inch above adjacent floor surface. Finish bevel to match top surface of threshold. Limit height of threshold to ½-inch or less above adjacent floor surface.

B. Marble Thresholds (FTS-1): ASTM C 503, with a minimum abrasion resistance of 10 per ASTM C 1353 or ASTM C 241 and with honed finish.

TILING


1. Description: Uniform, fine- to medium-grained stone in color as selected by Architect and Owner.

2.5 TILE BACKING PANELS

A. Cementitious Backer Units: ANSI A118.9 or ASTM C 1325, Type A, in maximum lengths available to minimize end-to-end butt joints.


a. Custom Building Products; Wonderboard Lite b. James Hardie Industries; HardieBacker c. USG Corporation; DUROCK Cement Board d. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 012500 “Substitution Procedures”.

2. Thickness: To match adjacent gypsum board.

2.6 CRACK ISOLATION MEMBRANE

A. General: Manufacturer's standard product that complies with ANSI A118.12 for standard performance and is recommended by the manufacturer for the application indicated. Include reinforcement and accessories recommended by manufacturer.

B. Chlorinated Polyethylene Sheet: Non-plasticized, chlorinated polyethylene faced on both sides with nonwoven polyester fabric; 0.030-inch nominal thickness.


a. Noble Company (The); Nobleseal CIS b. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 012500 “Substitution Procedures”.

2.7 SETTING MATERIALS

A. Latex-Portland Cement Mortar (Thin Set): ANSI A118.4; white unless otherwise indicated.


a. Bostik, Inc. b. Custom Building Products c. Laticrete International, Inc. d. MAPEI Corporation e. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 012500 “Substitution Procedures”.

2. Provide prepackaged, dry-mortar mix containing dry, redispersible, vinyl acetate or acrylic additive to which only water must be added at Project site.

3. For wall applications, provide mortar that complies with requirements for non-sagging mortar in addition to the other requirements in ANSI A118.4.

TILING


2.8 GROUT MATERIALS


1. Bostik, Inc. 2. Custom Building Products 3. Laticrete International, Inc. 4. MAPEI Corporation 5. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 012500 “Substitution Procedures”.

C. Water-Cleanable Epoxy Grout: ANSI A118.3.

1. Provide product capable of withstanding continuous and intermittent exposure to temperatures of up to 140 deg F (60 deg C) and 212 deg F (100 deg C), respectively, and certified by manufacturer for intended use.

2. Colors: As selected by Architect and Owner from manufacturer’s entire range.


A. Trowelable Underlayments and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, Portland cement-based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer of tile-setting materials for installations indicated.

B. Metal Edge Strips: Angle or L-shaped, height to match tile and setting-bed thickness, metallic or combination of metal and PVC or neoprene base, designed specifically for wall applications; anodized aluminum, satin finish, exposed-edge material.


a. Schluter Systems L.P.


a. Blanke Corporation b. Ceramic Tool Company, Inc. c. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 012500 “Substitution Procedures”.

C. Tile Cleaner: A neutral cleaner capable of removing soil and residue without harming tile and grout surfaces, specifically approved for materials and installations indicated by tile and grout manufacturers.

D. Grout Sealer: Manufacturer's standard silicone product for sealing grout joints and that does not change color or appearance of grout.


a. Bostik, Inc.; CeramaSeal Grout & Tile Sealer

TILING


b. Custom Building Products; Surfaceguard Sealer c. MAPEI Corporation; KER003, Silicone Spray Sealer for Cementitious Tile

Grout d. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 012500 “Substitution Procedures”.

2.10 MIXING MORTARS AND GROUT

A. Mix mortars and grouts to comply with referenced standards and mortar and grout manufacturers' written instructions.

B. Add materials, water, and additives in accurate proportions.

C. Obtain and use type of mixing equipment, mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other procedures to produce mortars and grouts of uniform quality with optimum performance characteristics for installations indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions where tile will be installed, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of installed tile.

1. Verify that substrates for setting tile are firm, dry, clean, free of coatings that are incompatible with tile-setting materials including curing compounds and other substances that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone; and comply with flatness tolerances required by ANSI A108.01 for installations indicated.

2. Verify that concrete substrates for tile floors installed with thin-set mortar comply with surface finish requirements in ANSI A108.01 for installations indicated.

a. Verify that surfaces that received a steel trowel finish have been mechanically scarified.

b. Verify that protrusions, bumps, and ridges have been removed by sanding or grinding.

3. Verify that installation of grounds, anchors, recessed frames, electrical and mechanical units of work, and similar items located in or behind tile has been completed.

4. Verify that joints and cracks in tile substrates are coordinated with tile joint locations; if not coordinated, adjust joint locations in consultation with Architect.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in concrete substrates for tile floors installed with thin-set mortar with trowelable leveling and patching compound specifically recommended by tile-setting material manufacturer. Expect and include in the Base Bid the requirement to apply and machine level at least three (3) coats of leveler in all spaces.

TILING


B. Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations, verify that tile has been factory blended and packaged so tile units taken from one (1) package show same range of colors as those taken from other packages and match approved Samples. If not factory blended, either return to manufacturer or blend tiles at Project site before installing.

3.3 TILE INSTALLATION

A. Comply with TCNA's "Handbook for Ceramic, Glass, and Stone Tile Installation" for TCNA installation methods specified in tile installation schedules. Comply with parts of the ANSI A108 Series "Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile" that are referenced in TCNA installation methods, specified in tile installation schedules, and apply to types of setting and grouting materials used.

B. Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form complete covering without interruptions unless otherwise indicated. Terminate work neatly at obstructions, edges, and corners without disrupting pattern or joint alignments.

C. Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without marring visible surfaces. Carefully grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish, or built-in items for straight aligned joints. Fit tile closely to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures, and other penetrations so plates, collars, or covers overlap tile.

D. Provide manufacturer's standard trim shapes where necessary to eliminate exposed tile edges.

E. Where accent tile differs in thickness from field tile, vary setting-bed thickness so that tiles are flush.

F. Jointing Pattern: Lay tile in grid pattern unless otherwise indicated. Lay out tile work and center tile fields in both directions in each space or on each wall area. Lay out tile work to minimize the use of pieces that are less than half of a tile. Provide uniform joint widths unless otherwise indicated.

1. Where adjoining tiles on floor, base, walls, or trim are specified or indicated to be same size, align joints.

2. Where tiles are specified or indicated to be whole integer multiples of adjoining tiles on floor, base, walls, or trim, align joints unless otherwise indicated.

G. Joint Widths: Unless otherwise indicated, install tile with the following joint widths:

1. Floor Tile: 1/8-inch. 2. Glazed Wall Tile: 1/16-inch.

H. Expansion Joints: Provide expansion joints and other sealant-filled joints, including control, contraction, and isolation joints, where indicated. Form joints during installation of setting materials, mortar beds, and tile. Do not saw-cut joints after installing tiles.

1. Where joints occur in concrete substrates, locate joints in tile surfaces directly above them.

I. Stone Thresholds: Install stone thresholds in same type of setting bed as adjacent floor unless otherwise indicated.

TILING


1. Do not extend crack isolation membrane under thresholds set in latex-Portland cement mortar. Fill joints between such thresholds and adjoining tile set on crack isolation membrane with elastomeric sealant.

J. Metal Edge Strips: Install at edges of floor tile where meeting with another flooring material and locations indicated.

K. Grout Sealer: Apply grout sealer to grout joints according to grout-sealer manufacturer's written instructions. As soon as grout sealer has penetrated grout joints, remove excess sealer and sealer from tile faces by wiping with soft cloth.

3.4 TILE BACKING PANEL INSTALLATION

A. Install panels and treat joints according to ANSI A108.11 and manufacturer's written instructions for type of application indicated. Use latex-Portland cement mortar for bonding material unless otherwise directed in manufacturer's written instructions.

3.5 CRACK ISOLATION MEMBRANE INSTALLATION

A. Install crack isolation membrane to comply with ANSI A108.17 and manufacturer's written instructions to produce membrane of uniform thickness and bonded securely to substrate.

B. Allow crack isolation membrane to cure before installing tile or setting materials over it.

3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTING

A. Remove and replace tile that is damaged or that does not match adjoining tile. Provide new matching units, installed as specified and in a manner to eliminate evidence of replacement.

B. Cleaning: On completion of placement and grouting, clean all tile surfaces so they are free of foreign matter.

1. Remove grout residue from tile as soon as possible. 2. Clean grout smears and haze from tile according to tile and grout manufacturer's written

instructions but no sooner than ten (10) days after installation. Use only cleaners recommended by tile and grout manufacturers and only after determining that cleaners are safe to use by testing on samples of tile and other surfaces to be cleaned. Protect metal surfaces and plumbing fixtures from effects of cleaning. Flush surfaces with clean water before and after cleaning.

C. Protect installed tile work with Kraft paper or other heavy covering during construction period to prevent staining, damage, and wear. If recommended by tile manufacturer, apply coat of neutral protective cleaner to completed tile walls and floors.

D. Prohibit foot and wheel traffic from tiled floors for at least seven (7) days after grouting is completed.

E. Before final inspection, remove protective coverings and rinse neutral protective cleaner from tile surfaces.

TILING


3.7 INTERIOR CERAMIC TILE INSTALLATION SCHEDULE

A. Interior Floor Installations, Concrete Subfloor:

1. Ceramic Tile Installation (PFT): TCNA F125A; thin-set mortar on crack isolation membrane.

a. Thin-Set Mortar: Latex-Portland cement mortar. b. Grout: Water-cleanable epoxy grout.

B. Interior Wall Installations, Wood or Metal Studs or Furring:

1. Ceramic Tile Installation (CWT): TCNA W244C or TCNA W244F; thin-set mortar on cementitious backer units or fiber-cement backer board.

a. Thin-Set Mortar: Latex-Portland cement mortar. b. Grout: Water-cleanable epoxy grout.


ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS


SECTION 095113 - ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes acoustical panels and exposed suspension systems for ceilings.

B. Products furnished, but not installed under this Section, include anchors, clips, and other ceiling attachment devices to be cast in concrete.



B. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified, 6 inches in size.


A. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved:

1. Suspended ceiling components. 2. Structural members to which suspension systems will be attached. 3. Size and location of initial access modules for acoustical panels. 4. Items penetrating finished ceiling including the following:

a. Lighting fixtures. b. Air outlets and inlets. c. Speakers. d. Sprinklers. e. Access panels.

5. Perimeter moldings.

B. Product Test Reports: For each acoustical panel ceiling, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency.

C. Evaluation Reports: For each acoustical panel ceiling suspension system and anchor and fastener type, from ICC-ES.


A. Maintenance Data: For finishes to include in maintenance manuals.




A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Acoustical Ceiling Panels: Full-size panels equal to two percent (2%) of each type of quantity installed.

2. Suspension-System Components: Quantity of each exposed component equal to two percent (2%) of quantity installed.

3. Hold-Down Clips: Equal to two percent (2%) of quantity installed.


A. Deliver acoustical panels, suspension-system components, and accessories to Project site in original, unopened packages and store them in a fully enclosed, conditioned space where they will be protected against damage from moisture, humidity, temperature extremes, direct sunlight, surface contamination, and other causes.

B. Before installing acoustical panels, permit them to reach room temperature and a stabilized moisture content.

C. Handle acoustical panels carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaging units in any way.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install acoustical panel ceilings until spaces are enclosed and weatherproof, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above ceilings is complete, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use.

1. Pressurized Plenums: Operate ventilation system for not less than forty-eight (48) hours before beginning acoustical panel ceiling installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Seismic Performance: Acoustical ceiling shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.

B. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

1. Flame-Spread Index: Comply with ASTM E 1264 for Class A materials. 2. Smoke-Developed Index: 50 or less.

C. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Comply with ASTM E 119; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

1. Indicate design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" or from the listings of another qualified testing agency.



2.2 ACOUSTICAL PANELS, GENERAL

A. Source Limitations:

1. Acoustical Ceiling Panel: Obtain each type from single source from single manufacturer. 2. Suspension System: Obtain each type from single source from single manufacturer.

B. Acoustical Panel Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard panels of configuration indicated that comply with ASTM E 1264 classifications as designated by types, patterns, acoustical ratings, and light reflectances unless otherwise indicated.

1. Mounting Method for Measuring NRC: Type E-400; plenum mounting in which face of test specimen is 15¾ inches away from test surface according to ASTM E 795.

C. Acoustical Panel Colors and Patterns: Match appearance characteristics indicated for each product type.

1. Where appearance characteristics of acoustical panels are indicated by referencing pattern designations in ASTM E 1264 and not manufacturers' proprietary product designations, provide products selected by Architect from each manufacturer's full range that comply with requirements indicated for type, pattern, color, light reflectance, acoustical performance, edge detail, and size.

2.3 ACOUSTICAL PANEL MANUFACTURERS


1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. 2. CertainTeed Corp. 3. USG Interiors, Inc.; Subsidiary of USG Corporation 4. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 012500 “Substitution Procedures”.

2.4 ACOUSTICAL PANELS

A. Basis-of-Design Product (ACT-1):

1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.; Ultima High NRC 2. Classification: Provide panels complying with ASTM E 1264 for type, form, and pattern

as follows:

a. Type and Form: Type IV, mineral base with membrane-faced overlay; Form 2, water felted; with vinyl overlay on face, back, and sealed edges.

b. Pattern: E (lightly textured).

3. Color: White. 4. LR: Not less than 0.87. 5. NRC: Not less than 0.80. 6. Edge/Joint Detail: Beveled tegular. 7. Thickness: 7/8-inch. 8. Modular Size: 24 by 24 inches.



B. Basis-of-Design Product (ACT-2):

1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.; Ultima 2. Classification: Provide panels complying with ASTM E 1264 for type, form, and pattern

as follows:

a. Type and Form: Type IV, mineral base with membrane-faced overlay; Form 2, water felted; with vinyl overlay on face, back, and sealed edges.

b. Pattern: E (lightly textured).

3. Color: White. 4. LR: Not less than 0.87. 5. NRC: Not less than 0.75. 6. Edge/Joint Detail: Beveled tegular. 7. Thickness: ¾-inch. 8. Modular Size: 24 by 24 inches.

C. Broad Spectrum Antimicrobial Fungicide and Bactericide Treatment: Provide acoustical panels treated with manufacturer's standard antimicrobial formulation that inhibits fungus, mold, mildew, and gram-positive and gram-negative bacteria and showing no mold, mildew, or bacterial growth when tested according to ASTM D 3273 and evaluated according to ASTM D 3274 or ASTM G 21.

2.5 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEM


1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. 2. CertainTeed Corp. 3. USG Interiors, Inc.; Subsidiary of USG Corporation 4. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 012500 “Substitution Procedures”.

B. Metal Suspension-System Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard direct-hung metal suspension systems of types, structural classifications, and finishes indicated that comply with applicable requirements in ASTM C 635.

1. High-Humidity Finish: Comply with ASTM C 635 requirements for "Coating Classification for Severe Environment Performance" where high-humidity finishes are indicated.

C. Wide-Face, Double-Web, Hot-Dip Galvanized, Steel Suspension System: Main and cross runners roll formed from cold-rolled steel sheet; hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 653; with prefinished, cold-rolled, 15/16-inch-wide flanges.


a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.; Prelude XL 15/16-Inch Exposed Tee System

2. Structural Classification: Heavy-duty system. 3. Face Design: Flat, flush.



4. Finish: Painted white.

2.6 ACCESSORIES

A. Attachment Devices: Size for five (5) times the design load indicated in ASTM C 635, Table 1, "Direct Hung," unless otherwise indicated. Comply with seismic design requirements.

B. Wire Hangers, Braces, and Ties: Provide wires as follows:

1. Zinc-Coated, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 641, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper. 2. Size: Select wire diameter so its stress at three (3) times hanger design load

(ASTM C 635, Table 1, "Direct Hung") will be less than yield stress of wire, but provide not less than 0.106-inch-diameter wire.

C. Hold-Down Clips: Manufacturer's standard hold-down.

D. Seismic Clips: Manufacturer's standard seismic clips designed and spaced to secure acoustical panels in place.

E. Seismic Stabilizer Bars: Manufacturer's standard perimeter stabilizers designed to accommodate seismic forces.

F. Seismic Struts: Manufacturer's standard compression struts designed to accommodate seismic forces.

2.7 METAL EDGE MOLDINGS AND TRIM


1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. 2. CertainTeed Corp. 3. USG Interiors, Inc.; Subsidiary of USG Corporation 4. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 01 Section “Substitution Procedures”.

B. Roll-Formed, Sheet-Metal Edge Moldings: Type and profile indicated or, if not indicated, manufacturer's standard moldings for edges and penetrations that comply with seismic design requirements; formed from sheet metal of same material, finish, and color as that used for exposed flanges of suspension-system runners.

1. Provide manufacturer's standard edge moldings that fit acoustical panel edge details and suspension systems indicated and that match width and configuration of exposed runners unless otherwise indicated.

2. For circular penetrations of ceiling, provide edge moldings fabricated to diameter required to fit penetration exactly.

2.8 ACOUSTICAL SEALANT

A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints:



a. Pecora Corporation; AC-20 FTR Acoustical and Insulation Sealant b. USG Corporation; SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant c. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 012500 “Substitution Procedures”.

B. Acoustical Sealant: Manufacturer's standard sealant complying with ASTM C 834 and effective in reducing airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90.

1. Exposed and Concealed Joints: Non-sag, paintable, non-staining latex sealant. 2. Acoustical sealant shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated

according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, including structural framing to which acoustical panel ceilings attach or abut, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements specified in this and other Sections that affect ceiling installation and anchorage and with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of acoustical panel ceilings.

B. Examine acoustical panels before installation. Reject acoustical panels that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical panels to balance border widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less-than-half-width panels at borders and comply with layout shown on reflected ceiling plans.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install acoustical panel ceilings to comply with ASTM C 636 and seismic design requirements indicated, according to manufacturer's written instructions and CISCA's "Ceiling Systems Handbook."

1. Fire-Rated Assembly: Install fire-rated ceiling systems according to tested fire-rated design.

B. Suspend ceiling hangers from building's structural members and as follows:

1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structure or of ceiling suspension system.

2. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions; offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means.

3. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with location of hangers at spacings required to support standard



suspension-system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in form of trapezes or equivalent devices.

4. Secure wire hangers to ceiling-suspension members and to supports above with a minimum of three (3) tight turns. Connect hangers directly either to structures or to inserts, eye screws, or other devices that are secure and appropriate for substrate and that will not deteriorate or otherwise fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures.

5. When steel framing does not permit installation of hanger wires at spacing required, install carrying channels or other supplemental support for attachment of hanger wires.

6. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. Attach hangers to structural members. 7. Space hangers not more than 48 inches o.c. along each member supported directly from

hangers unless otherwise indicated; provide hangers not more than 8 inches from ends of each member.

8. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced standards and publications.

C. Secure bracing wires to ceiling suspension members and to supports with a minimum of four (4) tight turns. Suspend bracing from building's structural members as required for hangers, without attaching to permanent metal forms, steel deck, or steel deck tabs. Fasten bracing wires into concrete with cast-in-place or postinstalled anchors.

D. Install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area and where necessary to conceal edges of acoustical panels.

1. Apply acoustical sealant in a continuous ribbon concealed on back of vertical legs of moldings before they are installed.

2. Screw attach moldings to substrate at intervals not more than 16 inches o.c. and not more than 3 inches from ends, leveling with ceiling suspension system to a tolerance of 1/8-inch in 12 feet. Miter corners accurately and connect securely.

3. Do not use exposed fasteners, including pop rivets, on moldings and trim.

E. Install suspension-system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with one another. Remove and replace dented, bent, or kinked members.

F. Install acoustical panels with undamaged edges and fit accurately into suspension-system runners and edge moldings. Scribe and cut panels at borders and penetrations to provide precise fit.

1. For square-edged panels, install panels with edges fully hidden from view by flanges of suspension-system runners and moldings.

2. Paint cut edges of panel remaining exposed after installation; match color of exposed panel surfaces using coating recommended in writing for this purpose by acoustical panel manufacturer.

3. Install hold-down and seismic clips in areas indicated; space according to panel manufacturer's written instructions unless otherwise indicated.

a. Hold-Down Clips: Space 24 inches o.c. on all cross runners.

4. Protect lighting fixtures and air ducts to comply with requirements indicated for fire-resistance-rated assembly.



3.4 CLEANING

A. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical panel ceilings, including trim, edge moldings, and suspension-system members. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and touchup of minor finish damage. Remove and replace ceiling components that cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage.


RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES


SECTION 096513 - RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Resilient base. 2. Resilient molding accessories.



B. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified, not less than 12 inches long.

C. Product Schedule: For resilient base and accessory products. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.



1. Furnish not less than 10 linear feet for every 500 linear feet or fraction thereof, of each type, color, pattern, and size of resilient product installed.


A. Store resilient products and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 50 deg F or more than 90 deg F.


A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 70 deg F or more than 95 deg F, in spaces to receive resilient products during the following time periods:

1. 48 hours before installation. 2. During installation. 3. 48 hours after installation.



B. After installation and until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 55 deg F or more than 95 deg F.

C. Install resilient products after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Provide manufacturer's written limited warranties against defects in materials and against premature wear prior to warranty expiration for the materials as follows:

1. Resilient Base: Two (2) years.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Conform to Class I rating with a flame spread of 0 to 25 in accordance with the requirements of Class A material in accordance with ASTM E 84. Rubber products shall be Class I, 0.45 watts/sq. cm in accordance with ASTM E 648 and NFPA 255.

2.2 THERMOPLASTIC-RUBBER BASE

A. Basis of Design:

1. Johnsonite; A Tarkett Company; Duracove


1. Burke Mercer Flooring Products, Division of Burke Industries Inc. 2. Flexco, Corporation 3. Mannington Mills, Inc. 4. Roppe Corporation, USA 5. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 012500 “Substitution Procedures”.

C. Product Standard: ASTM F 1861, Type TP (rubber, thermoplastic).

1. Group: I (solid, homogeneous). 2. Style:

a. B, Cove.

D. Thickness: 0.125-inch.

E. Height: 6 inches however 4 inches at casework.

F. Lengths: Cut lengths 48 inches long or coils in manufacturer's standard length.

G. Outside and Inside Corners: Preformed.



H. Colors: RB-, as selected by Architect and Owner from manufacturer’s entire range.

2.3 RUBBER MOLDING ACCESSORY

A. Basis of Design:

1. Johnsonite; A Tarkett Company; SLT-XX-C, CTA-XX-M, SLT-XX-A


1. Burke Mercer Flooring Products, Division of Burke Industries Inc. 2. Roppe Corporation, USA. 3. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 012500 “Substitution Procedures”.

C. Description: Rubber transitions strips, moldings, edge guards and reducers.

D. Profile and Dimensions: As required for installation.

E. Locations: Provide rubber molding accessories where required.

F. Colors and Patterns: FTS-, as selected by Architect and Owner from manufacturer’s entire range.

2.4 INSTALLATION MATERIALS

A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, Portland cement based or blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by resilient-product manufacturer for applications indicated.

B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by resilient-product manufacturer for resilient products and substrate conditions indicated.

1. Adhesives shall have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

1. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of resilient products.


1. Installation of resilient products indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.



3.2 PREPARATION

A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of resilient products.

B. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching compound; remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate.

C. Do not install resilient products until they are the same temperature as the space where they are to be installed.

1. At least 48 hours in advance of installation, move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed.

D. Immediately before installation, sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products.

3.3 RESILIENT BASE INSTALLATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient base.

B. Apply resilient base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces, and other permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required.

C. Install resilient base in lengths as long as practical without gaps at seams and with tops of adjacent pieces aligned.

D. Tightly adhere resilient base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates.

E. Do not stretch resilient base during installation.

F. Preformed Corners: Install preformed corners before installing straight pieces.

3.4 RESILIENT ACCESSORY INSTALLATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient accessories.

B. Resilient Molding Accessories: Butt to adjacent materials and tightly adhere to substrates throughout length of each piece. Install reducer strips at edges of floor covering that would otherwise be exposed.


A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protecting resilient products.

B. Perform the following operations immediately after completing resilient-product installation:

1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces.

C. Protect resilient products from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period.



D. Cover resilient products subject to wear and foot traffic until Substantial Completion.


RESILIENT TILE FLOORING


SECTION 096519 - RESILIENT TILE FLOORING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Solid vinyl floor tile. 2. Vinyl composition floor tile.



B. Shop Drawings: For each type of floor tile.

1. Include floor tile layouts, edges, columns, doorways, enclosing partitions, built-in furniture, cabinets, and cutouts.

2. Show details of special patterns.

C. Samples: Full-size units of each color and pattern of floor tile required.

D. Product Schedule: For floor tile. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.




A. Maintenance Data: For each type of floor tile to include in maintenance manuals.


A. Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Floor Tile: Furnish one (1) box for every fifty (50) boxes or fraction thereof, of each type, color, and pattern of floor tile installed.


A. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are competent in techniques required by manufacturer for floor tile installation and seaming method indicated.



1. Engage an installer who employs workers for this Project who are trained or certified by floor tile manufacturer for installation techniques required.


A. Store floor tile and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 50 deg F (10 deg C) or more than 90 deg F (32 deg C). Store floor tiles on flat surfaces.


A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 70 deg F (21 deg C) or more than 95 deg F (35 deg C), in spaces to receive floor tile during the following time periods:


B. After installation and until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 55 deg F (13 deg C) or more than 95 deg F (35 deg C).

C. Close spaces to traffic during floor tile installation.

D. Close spaces to traffic for 48 hours after floor tile installation.

E. Install floor tile after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For resilient floor tile, as determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency.

1. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm.

2.2 SOLID VINYL FLOOR TILE

A. Basis of Design:

1. Interface, Inc.; Studio Set, Level Set

B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Armstrong Flooring, Inc. 2. Congoleum 3. Burker Flooring, a division of Burke Industries 4. Mannington Mills, Inc



5. Mohawk Group 6. Patcraft 7. Shaw Industries, Inc., a Berkshire Hathaway company 8. To Market 9. Substitutions: Under provision of Section 012500 “Substitution Procedures”.

C. Tile Standard: ASTM F 1700.

1. Class: Class III, printed film vinyl tile. 2. Type: B, embossed surface.

a. Slip resistant with a Coefficient of Friction of 0.6 on level surface (dry).

D. Thickness: 0.177-inch with 22-mil wear layer.

E. Size: 9.845 inches by 39.38 inches.

F. Colors and Patterns: LVT-1, as selected by Architect and Owner from manufacturer’s entire range.

2.3 VINYL COMPOSITION FLOOR TILE

A. Basis of Design:

1. Armstrong Flooring, Inc.; Standard EXCELON Imperial Texture Diamond 10 Tech

B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Mannington Mills, Inc 2. Tarkett, Inc. 3. Substitutions: Under provision of Section 012500 “Substitution Procedures”.

C. Tile Standard: ASTM F 1066, Class 2, through pattern.

D. Wearing Surface: Smooth.

1. Slip resistant with a Coefficient of Friction of 0.6 on level surface (dry).

E. Thickness: 0.125-inch.

F. Size: 12 by 12 inches.

G. Colors and Patterns: VCT-1, Sterling


A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, Portland cement based, or blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by floor tile manufacturer for applications indicated.



B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by floor tile and adhesive manufacturers to suit floor tile and substrate conditions indicated.

C. Floor Polish: Provide protective, liquid floor-polish products recommended by floor tile manufacturer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION


1. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of floor tile.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Prepare substrates according to floor tile manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of resilient products.

B. Concrete Substrates: Prepare according to ASTM F 710.

1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners. 2. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and

that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by floor tile manufacturer. Do not use solvents.

3. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by floor tile manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrate alkalinity falls within range on pH scale recommended by manufacturer in writing, but not less than 7 or more than 10 pH.

4. Moisture Testing: Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing according to floor tile manufacturer's written recommendations, but not less stringent than the following:

a. Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test according to ASTM F 1869. Proceed with installation only after substrates have maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate of 3 lb of water/1000 sq. ft. in 24 hours.

b. Perform relative humidity test using in situ probes according to ASTM F 2170. Proceed with installation only after substrates have a maximum seventy-five percent (75%) relative humidity level.

C. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching compound; remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate. Expect and include in the Base Bid the requirement to apply and machine level at least three (3) coats of leveler in all spaces.



D. Do not install floor tiles until they are the same temperature as the space where they are to be installed.

1. At least 48 hours in advance of installation, move resilient floor tile and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed.

E. Immediately before installation, sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient floor tile.

3.3 FLOOR TILE INSTALLATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing floor tile.

B. Lay out floor tiles from center marks established with principal walls, discounting minor offsets, so tiles at opposite edges of room are of equal width. Adjust as necessary to avoid using cut widths that equal less than one-half tile at perimeter.

1. Lay tiles square with room axis.

C. Match floor tiles for color and pattern by selecting tiles from cartons in the same sequence as manufactured and packaged, if so numbered. Discard broken, cracked, chipped, or deformed tiles.

1. Lay tiles with grain running in one (1) direction.

D. Scribe, cut, and fit floor tiles to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces and permanent fixtures including built-in furniture, cabinets, pipes, outlets, and door frames.

E. Extend floor tiles into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings. Extend floor tiles to center of door openings.

F. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on floor tiles as marked on substrates. Use chalk or other nonpermanent marking device.

G. Adhere floor tiles to flooring substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to substrate to produce a completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints, telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, and other surface imperfections.


A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protecting floor tile.

B. Perform the following operations immediately after completing floor tile installation:

1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces. 2. Sweep and vacuum surfaces thoroughly. 3. Damp-mop surfaces to remove marks and soil.

C. Protect floor tile from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period.



D. Floor Polish: Remove soil, adhesive, and blemishes from polyester resin composition floor tile surfaces before applying liquid floor polish.

1. Apply number of coats recommended by the manufacturer.

E. Cover floor tile until Substantial Completion.


STATIC-CONTROL RESILIENT FLOORING


SECTION 096536 - STATIC-CONTROL RESILIENT FLOORING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Static-dissipative, solid vinyl floor tile.


1. Section 096513 "Resilient Base and Accessories" for resilient base, reducer strips, and other accessories installed with static-control resilient flooring.



B. Shop Drawings: For each type of static-control resilient flooring. Include floor-covering layouts, edges, columns, doorways, enclosing partitions, built-in furniture, cabinets, and cutouts.

1. Show details of special patterns. 2. Show locations of inscribed maintenance tiles. 3. Submit grounding diagram showing location of grounding strips and connections.

C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified in manufacturer's standard size, but not less than 6-by-9-inch sections.

D. Product Schedule: For static-control resilient flooring. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.



B. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for static-control resilient flooring.


A. Maintenance Data: For each type of static-control resilient flooring to include in maintenance manuals.





1. Floor Tile: Furnish one (1) box for every fifty (50) boxes or fraction thereof, of each type, color, and pattern of floor tile installed.


A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs workers for this Project who are competent in techniques required by manufacturer for static-control resilient flooring and seaming method.

1. Engage an installer who employs workers for this Project who are trained or certified by manufacturer for installation techniques required.


A. Store static-control resilient flooring and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer but not less than 50 deg F (10 deg C) or more than 90 deg F (32 deg C).

1. Floor Tile: Store on flat surfaces.


A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 70 deg F (21 deg C) or more than 85 deg F (29 deg C), in spaces to receive static-control resilient flooring during the following time periods:


B. Until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 55 deg F (13 deg C) or more than 95 deg F (35 deg C).

C. Close spaces to traffic during static-control resilient flooring installation.

D. Close spaces to traffic for 48 hours after static-control resilient flooring installation.

E. Install static-control resilient flooring after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Static-Dissipative Properties: Provide static-control resilient flooring with static-control properties indicated as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated by an independent testing and inspecting agency.

1. Electrical Resistance: Test per ASTM F 150 with 100-V applied voltage.

a. Average greater than 1 megohm and less than or equal to 1000 megohms when test specimens are tested surface to ground.

b. Average greater than 1 megohm and less than or equal to 1000 megohms when installed floor coverings are tested surface to ground.

B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency.

1. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm.

2.2 STATIC-DISSIPATIVE RESILIENT FLOOR COVERINGS

A. Static-Dissipative, Solid Vinyl Floor Covering: ASTM F 1700, Class I (monolithic), Type A (smooth surface).

1. Basis of Design:

a. Johnsonite; a Tarkett company; iQ Granit SD

2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirement, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Altro USA b. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. c. Forbo Industries, Inc. d. Mannington Mills, Inc. e. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 012500 “Substitution Procedures”.

3. Thickness: 0.080-inch. 4. Size: 24 by 24 inches. 5. Slip resistant with a Coefficient of Friction of not less than 0.5 on level surface (dry) in

accordance with ASTM D 2047. 6. Colors and Patterns: SDF-1, as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.


A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified Portland cement or blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer for applications indicated.

B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by flooring and adhesive manufacturers to suit resilient sheet flooring and substrate conditions indicated.



1. Adhesives shall have a VOC content of 60 g/L or less.

C. Grounding Strips: Provided or approved by manufacturer; type and size that maintains electrical continuity of floor-covering system to ground connection.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION


B. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion or static-control characteristics of floor coverings.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of static-control resilient flooring and electrical continuity of floor-covering systems.

B. Concrete Substrates: Prepare according to ASTM F 710.

1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners. 2. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with floor-covering

adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by manufacturer. Do not use solvents.

3. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing.

4. Moisture Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer and as follows. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing.

a. Perform relative humidity test using in situ probes according to ASTM F 2170. Proceed with installation only after substrates have a maximum eighty-five percent (85%) relative humidity level.

C. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching compound and remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate. Expect and include in the Base Bid the requirement to apply and machine level at least three (3) coats of leveler in all spaces.

D. Do not install static-control resilient flooring until it is same temperature as space where it is to be installed.

1. Move static-control resilient flooring and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed at least 48 hours in advance of installation.

E. Sweep and vacuum substrates to be covered by static-control resilient flooring immediately before installation.




A. Install static-control resilient flooring according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Embed grounding strips in static-control adhesive. Extend grounding strips beyond perimeter of static-control resilient floor-covering surfaces to ground connections.

C. Scribe, cut, and fit static-control resilient flooring to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces and permanent fixtures including built-in furniture, cabinets, pipes, outlets, and door frames.

D. Extend static-control resilient flooring into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings. Extend static-control resilient flooring to center of door openings.

E. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on static-control resilient flooring as marked on substrates. Use chalk or other nonpermanent, non-staining marking device.

F. Adhere static-control resilient flooring to substrates using a full spread of static-control adhesive applied to substrate to produce a completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints, telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, and other surface imperfections.

3.4 FLOOR-TILE INSTALLATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing floor tile.

B. Lay out floor tiles from center marks established with principal walls, discounting minor offsets, so floor tiles at opposite edges of room are of equal width. Adjust as necessary to avoid using cut widths that equal less than one-half floor tile at perimeter.

1. Lay floor tiles square with room axis.

C. Match floor tiles for color and pattern by selecting floor tiles from cartons in same sequence as manufactured and packaged if so numbered. Discard broken, cracked, chipped, or deformed floor tiles.


A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protection of static-control resilient flooring.

B. Perform the following operations immediately after completing static-control resilient flooring:

1. Remove static-control adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces. 2. Sweep and vacuum surfaces thoroughly. 3. Damp-mop surfaces to remove marks and soil.

C. Protect static-control resilient flooring from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period.

1. Do not wax static-control resilient flooring.



D. Cover static-control resilient flooring until Substantial Completion.


TILE CARPETING


SECTION 096813 - TILE CARPETING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes modular carpet tile.


1. Section 096513 "Resilient Base and Accessories" for resilient wall base and accessories installed with carpet tile.



1. Review methods and procedures related to carpet tile installation including, but not limited to, the following:

a. Review delivery, storage, and handling procedures. b. Review ambient conditions and ventilation procedures. c. Review subfloor preparation procedures.



1. Include manufacturer's written data on physical characteristics, durability, and fade resistance.

2. Include installation recommendations for each type of substrate.

B. Shop Drawings: For carpet tile installation, plans showing the following:

1. Columns, doorways, enclosing walls or partitions, built-in cabinets, and locations where cutouts are required in carpet tiles.

2. Carpet tile type, color, and dye lot. 3. Type of subfloor. 4. Type of installation. 5. Pattern of installation. 6. Pattern type, location, and direction. 7. Pile direction. 8. Type, color, and location of insets and borders. 9. Type, color, and location of edge, transition, and other accessory strips. 10. Transition details to other flooring materials.

TILE CARPETING


C. Samples: For each of the following products and for each color and texture required. Label each Sample with manufacturer's name, material description, color, pattern, and designation indicated on Drawings and in schedules.

1. Carpet Tile: Full-size Sample. 2. Exposed Edge, Transition, and Other Accessory Stripping: 12-inch-long Samples.

D. Product Schedule: For carpet tile. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.



B. Product Test Reports: For carpet tile, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency.

C. Sample Warranty: For special warranty.


A. Maintenance Data: For carpet tiles to include in maintenance manuals. Include the following:

1. Methods for maintaining carpet tile, including cleaning and stain-removal products and procedures and manufacturer's recommended maintenance schedule.

2. Precautions for cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to carpet tile.



1. Carpet Tile: Full-size units equal to five percent (5%) of amount installed for each type indicated, but not less than 10 sq. yd.


A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who is certified by the International Certified Floorcovering Installers Association at the Commercial II certification level.


A. Comply with CRI's "CRI Carpet Installation Standard."


A. Comply with CRI's "CRI Carpet Installation Standard" for temperature, humidity, and ventilation limitations.

B. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install carpet tiles until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.

TILE CARPETING


1.11 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty for Carpet Tiles: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of carpet tile installation that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty does not include deterioration or failure of carpet tile due to unusual traffic, failure of substrate, vandalism, or abuse.

2. Failures include, but are not limited to, more than ten percent (10%) edge raveling, snags, runs, dimensional stability, excess static discharge, loss of tuft bind strength, loss of face fiber, and delamination.

3. Warranty Period: Twenty (20) years.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CARPET TILE MANUFACTURERS


1. Forbo Flooring Systems 2. Interface, Inc. 3. J+J Invision 4. Patcraft 5. Shaw Contract Group 6. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 012500 “Substitution Procedures”.

2.2 CARPET TILE


1. Forbo; Flotex Penang 2. Material Characteristics:

a. Color and Pattern: CPT-1, as selected by Architect and Owner from manufacturer's entire range.

b. Fiber Content: One hundred percent (100%) nylon 6. c. Fiber Type: Eco solution q nylon. d. Pile Characteristic: Flocked. e. Gauge: 0.21 inches. f. Backing System: Vinyl. g. Size: 19.69 by 19.69 inches.

3. Applied Treatments:

a. Soil-Resistance Treatment: Manufacturer's standard treatment. b. Antimicrobial Treatment: Manufacturer's standard treatment that protects carpet

tiles as follows:

TILE CARPETING


1) Antimicrobial Activity: Not less than 2-mm halo of inhibition for gram-positive bacteria, not less than 1-mm halo of inhibition for gram-negative bacteria, and no fungal growth, according to AATCC 174.

4. Performance Characteristics:

a. Electrostatic Propensity: Less than 3.5 kV according to AATCC 134.

2.3 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES

A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or recommended by carpet tile manufacturer.

B. Adhesives: Water-resistant, mildew-resistant, non-staining, pressure-sensitive type to suit products and subfloor conditions indicated, that complies with flammability requirements for installed carpet tile and is recommended by carpet tile manufacturer for releasable installation.

1. Adhesives shall have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content, alkalinity range, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting carpet tile performance.

B. Examine carpet tile for type, color, pattern, and potential defects.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. General: Comply with CRI's "Carpet Installation Standards" and with carpet tile manufacturer's written installation instructions for preparing substrates indicated to receive carpet tile.

B. Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds, according to manufacturer's written instructions, to fill cracks, holes, depressions, and protrusions in substrates. Fill or level cracks, holes, and depressions 1/8-inch-wide or wider, and protrusions more than 1/32-inch unless more stringent requirements are required by manufacturer's written instructions. Expect and include in the Base Bid the requirement to apply and machine level at least three (3) coats of leveler in all spaces.

C. Substrates: Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, without using solvents. Use mechanical methods recommended in writing by adhesive and carpet tile manufacturers.

D. Broom and vacuum clean substrates to be covered immediately before installing carpet tile.

TILE CARPETING


3.3 INSTALLATION

A. General: Comply with CRI's "CRI Carpet Installation Standard," Section 18, "Modular Carpet" and with carpet tile manufacturer's written installation instructions.

B. Installation Method: As recommended in writing by carpet tile manufacturer.

C. Maintain dye lot integrity. Do not mix dye lots in same area.

D. Maintain pile-direction patterns recommended in writing by carpet tile manufacturer.

E. Cut and fit carpet tile to butt tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and built-in furniture including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings. Bind or seal cut edges as recommended by carpet tile manufacturer.

F. Extend carpet tile into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, open-bottomed obstructions, removable flanges, alcoves, and similar openings.

G. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on finish flooring as marked on subfloor. Use nonpermanent, non-staining marking device.

H. Install pattern parallel to walls and borders.


A. Perform the following operations immediately after installing carpet tile:

1. Remove excess adhesive, seam sealer, and other surface blemishes using cleaner recommended by carpet tile manufacturer.

2. Remove yarns that protrude from carpet tile surface. 3. Vacuum carpet tile using commercial machine with face-beater element.

B. Protect installed carpet tile to comply with CRI's "Carpet Installation Standard," Section 20, "Protecting Indoor Installations."

C. Protect carpet tile against damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during the remainder of construction period. Use protection methods indicated or recommended in writing by carpet tile manufacturer.


SOUND-ABSORBING WALL UNITS


SECTION 098433 - SOUND-ABSORBING WALL UNITS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes shop-fabricated panel units tested for acoustical performance, including:

1. Sound-absorbing wall panels.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. NRC: Noise Reduction Coefficient.




A. Product Data: For each type of panel edge, core material, and mounting indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: For sound-absorbing units. Include mounting devices and details; details at panel head, base, joints, and corners; and details at ceiling, floor base, and wall intersections. Indicate panel edge and core materials.

1. Include elevations showing panel sizes.


A. Coordination Drawings: Elevations and other details, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved:

1. Electrical outlets, switches, and thermostats. 2. Items penetrating or covered by sound-absorbing units including the following:

a. Lighting fixtures. b. Air outlets and inlets. c. Speakers. d. Alarms. e. Sprinklers. f. Access panels.



3. Show operation of hinged and sliding components covered by or adjacent to sound-absorbing wall units.

B. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.


A. Maintenance Data: For sound-absorbing units to include in maintenance manuals. Include manufacturers' written cleaning and stain-removal recommendations.


A. Furnish extra materials from same production run that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Sound-Absorbing Wall Units: Full-size units equal to five percent (5%) of amount installed, but no fewer than five (5) units.


A. Comply with sound-absorbing unit manufacturers' written instructions for minimum and maximum temperature and humidity requirements for shipment, storage, and handling.

B. Deliver materials and units in unopened bundles and store in a temperature-controlled dry place with adequate air circulation.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install sound-absorbing units until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work at and above ceilings is complete, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use.

B. Lighting: Do not install sound-absorbing units until a permanent level of lighting is provided on surfaces to receive the units.

C. Air-Quality Limitations: Protect sound-absorbing units from exposure to airborne odors, such as tobacco smoke, and install units under conditions free from odor contamination of ambient air.

D. Field Measurements: Verify locations of sound-absorbing wall units and actual dimensions of openings and penetrations by field measurements before fabrication.

1.11 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of sound-absorbing units that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Failures include, but are not limited to the following:

a. Acoustical performance. b. Sagging and warping.



2. Warranty Period: Manufacturer’s standard, but minimum of one (1) year from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


1. Acoustical Panel Systems (APS, Inc.). 2. Acoustical Solutions, Inc. 3. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. 4. Conwed, a division of Owens Corning 5. Decoustics Limited; a CertainTeed Ceilings company. 6. Sound Management Group LLC. 7. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 012500 “Substitution Procedures”.


A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Units shall comply with "Surface-Burning Characteristics" or "Fire Growth Contribution" Subparagraph below, or both, as determined by testing identical products by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction:

1. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84 or UL 723; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

a. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less. b. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less.

2. Fire Growth Contribution: Comply with acceptance criteria of local code and authorities having jurisdiction when tested according to NFPA 265 Method B Protocol or NFPA 286.

2.3 SOUND-ABSORBING WALL UNITS

A. Sound-Absorbing Wall Panel (AWP): Manufacturer's standard panel construction consisting of facing material stretched over front face of edge-framed core and bonded or attached to edges and back of frame.


a. Armstrong World Industries; Soundsoak 85 Custom

2. Mounting: Back mounted with manufacturer's standard metal clips or bar hangers, secured to substrate.

3. Core: Glass-fiber board. 4. Edge Construction: Manufacturer's standard chemically hardened core with no frame.



5. Edge Profile: Chamfered (half beveled). 6. Corner Detail in Elevation: Square with continuous edge profile indicated. 7. Facing Material: Manufacturer’s standard fabric. 8. Acoustical Performance: Sound absorption NRC of not less than 0.80 according to

ASTM C 423 for Type D-20 mounting according to ASTM E 795. 9. Nominal Thickness: 1-inch. 10. Panel Height and Width: As indicated on Drawings.

2.4 MATERIALS

A. Core Materials:

1. Glass-Fiber Board: ASTM C 612; of type standard with manufacturer; nominal density of 6 to 7 lb/cu. ft., unfaced, and dimensionally stable, molded rigid board; and with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively.

B. Facing Material: Fabric from same dye lot; color and pattern as selected by Architect from manufacturer's entire range.

C. Mounting Devices: Concealed on back of unit, recommended by manufacturer to support weight of unit, and as follows:

1. Metal Clips or Bar Hangers: Manufacturer's standard two-part metal "Z" clips, with one (1) part of each clip mechanically attached to back of unit and the other part to substrate, designed to permit unit removal.

2.5 FABRICATION

A. Standard Construction: Use manufacturer's standard construction unless otherwise indicated; with facing material applied to face, edges, and back border of dimensionally stable core; and with rigid edges to reinforce panel perimeter against warpage and damage.

B. Edge Hardening: For glass-fiber board cores, chemically harden core edges and areas of core where mounting devices are attached.

C. Facing Material: Apply fabric facing fully covering visible surfaces of unit; with material stretched straight, on the grain, tight, square, and free from puckers, ripples, wrinkles, sags, blisters, seams, adhesive, or other visible distortions or foreign matter.

1. Square Corners: Tailor corners.

D. Dimensional Tolerances of Finished Units: Plus or minus 1/16-inch for the following:

1. Thickness. 2. Edge straightness. 3. Overall length and width. 4. Squareness from corner to corner.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine fabric, fabricated units, substrates, areas, and conditions, for compliance with requirements, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting unit performance.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install units in locations indicated on Drawings. Unless otherwise indicated, install units with vertical surfaces and edges plumb, top edges level and in alignment with other units, faces flush, and scribed to fit adjoining work accurately at borders and at penetrations.

B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installation of units using type of mounting devices indicated. Mount units securely to supporting substrate.

C. Align and level fabric pattern and grain among adjacent units.

3.3 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES

A. Variation from Plumb and Level: Plus or minus 1/16-inch in 48 inches, noncumulative.

B. Variation of Joints Width: Not more than 1/16-inch variation from hairline in 48 inches, noncumulative.

3.4 CLEANING

A. Clip loose threads; remove pills and extraneous materials.

B. Clean panels on completion of installation to remove dust and other foreign materials according to manufacturer's written instructions.


EXTERIOR PAINTING


SECTION 099113 - EXTERIOR PAINTING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on the following exterior substrates:

1. Galvanized metal.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Gloss Level 5: 35 to 70 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.


A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include preparation requirements and application instructions.

1. Include printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category specified, with the proposed product highlighted.

2. Indicate VOC content.

B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of topcoat product.

C. Samples for Verification: For each type of paint system and each color and gloss of topcoat.

1. Submit Samples on rigid backing, 8 inches square. 2. Apply coats on Samples in steps to show each coat required for system. 3. Label each coat of each Sample. 4. Label each Sample for location and application area.

D. Product List: Cross-reference to paint system and locations of application areas. Use same designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules. Include color designations.



1. Paint: Five percent (5%), but not less than 1 gallon of each material and color applied.

EXTERIOR PAINTING



A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg. F (7 deg. C).

1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily.


A. Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures are between 50 and 95 deg. F (10 and 35 deg. C).

B. Do not apply paints in snow, rain, fog, or mist; when relative humidity exceeds eighty-five percent (85%); at temperatures less than 5 deg. F (3 deg. C) above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


1. Behr Process Corporation. 2. Benjamin Moore & Co. 3. Duron, Inc. 4. ICI Paints. 5. PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc. 6. Sherwin-Williams Company (The). 7. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 012500 “Substitution Procedures”.

2.2 PAINT, GENERAL

A. MPI Standards: Products shall comply with MPI standards indicated and shall be listed in its "MPI Approved Products Lists."

B. Material Compatibility:

1. Materials for use within each paint system shall be compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.

2. For each coat in a paint system, products shall be recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturers for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.

C. VOC Content: Products shall comply with VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction.

D. Colors: As selected by Architect and Owner from manufacturer’s entire range, to match existing.

EXTERIOR PAINTING


2.3 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing of Paint Materials: Owner reserves the right to invoke the following procedure:

1. Owner will engage the services of a qualified testing agency to sample paint materials. Contractor will be notified in advance and may be present when samples are taken. If paint materials have already been delivered to Project site, samples may be taken at Project site. Samples will be identified, sealed, and certified by testing agency.

2. Testing agency will perform tests for compliance with product requirements. 3. Owner may direct Contractor to stop applying paints if test results show materials being

used do not comply with product requirements. Contractor shall remove noncomplying paint materials from Project site, pay for testing, and repaint surfaces painted with rejected materials. Contractor will be required to remove rejected materials from previously painted surfaces if, on repainting with complying materials, the two (2) paints are incompatible.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility, with existing finishes and primers.

C. Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

1. Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates and paint systems indicated.

B. Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are removable and are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting.

1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection.

C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dust, dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants.

1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers or apply tie coat as required to produce paint systems indicated.

D. Galvanized-Metal Substrates: Remove grease and oil residue from galvanized sheet metal by mechanical methods to produce clean, lightly etched surfaces that promote adhesion of subsequently applied paints.

EXTERIOR PAINTING


3.3 APPLICATION

A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual."

1. Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated. 2. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name,

identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates. 3. Primers specified in painting schedules may be omitted on items that are factory primed

or factory finished if acceptable to topcoat manufacturers.

B. Tint undercoats same color as topcoat, but tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats of same material are to be applied. Provide sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat.

C. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance.

D. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks.

E. Painting Fire Suppression, Plumbing, HVAC, Electrical, Communication, and Electronic Safety and Security Work:

1. Paint the following work where exposed to view, unless factory-finished:

a. Equipment, including panelboards and switch gear. b. Uninsulated metal piping. c. Uninsulated plastic piping. d. Pipe hangers and supports. e. Metal conduit. f. Plastic conduit. g. Tanks that do not have factory-applied final finishes.


A. Dry Film Thickness Testing: Owner may engage the services of a qualified testing and inspecting agency to inspect and test paint for dry film thickness.

1. Contractor shall touch up and restore painted surfaces damaged by testing. 2. If test results show that dry film thickness of applied paint does not comply with paint

manufacturer's written recommendations, Contractor shall pay for testing and apply additional coats as needed to provide dry film thickness that complies with paint manufacturer's written recommendations.


A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from Project site.

EXTERIOR PAINTING


B. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces.

C. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition.

D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces.

3.6 EXTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE

A. Galvanized-Metal Substrates:

1. Water-Based Light Industrial Coating System:

a. Prime Coat: Primer, galvanized, water based, MPI #134. b. Intermediate Coat: Light industrial coating, exterior, water based, matching

topcoat. c. Topcoat: Light industrial coating, exterior, water based, semi-gloss (Gloss

Level 5), MPI #163.


INTERIOR PAINTING


SECTION 099123 - INTERIOR PAINTING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on the following interior substrates:

1. Steel and iron. 2. Wood. 3. Gypsum board.


1. Section 099113 "Exterior Painting" for surface preparation and the application of paint systems on exterior substrates.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Gloss Level 1: Not more than 5 units at 60 degrees and 10 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

B. Gloss Level 3: 10 to 25 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

C. Gloss Level 5: 35 to 70 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.


A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include preparation requirements and application instructions.

1. Include Printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category specified, with the proposed product highlighted.

2. Indicate VOC content.

B. Samples: For each type of paint system and in each color and gloss of topcoat.

1. Submit Samples on rigid backing, 8 inches square. 2. Apply coats on Samples to show each coat required for system. 3. Label each coat of each Sample. 4. Label each Sample for location and application area.

INTERIOR PAINTING


C. Product List: Cross-reference to paint system and locations of application areas. Use same designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules. Include color designations.



1. Paint: Five percent (5%), but not less than 1 gal. of each material and color applied.


A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F (7 deg C).

1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily.


A. Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures are between 50 and 95 deg F (10 and 35 deg C).

B. Do not apply paints when relative humidity exceeds eighty-five percent (85%); at temperatures less than 5 deg F (3 deg C) above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Basis-of-Design:

1. Sherwin-Williams Company (The)


1. Benjamin Moore & Co. 2. ICI Paints 3. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 012500 “Substitution Procedures”.

2.2 PAINT, GENERAL

A. MPI Standards: Provide products that comply with MPI standards indicated and that are listed in its "MPI Approved Products List."

B. Material Compatibility:

1. Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.

INTERIOR PAINTING


2. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.

C. VOC Content: Products shall comply with VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction and, for interior paints and coatings applied at Project site, the following VOC limits, exclusive of colorants added to a tint base, when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

1. Flat Paints and Coatings: 50 g/L. 2. Non-Flat Paints and Coatings: 150 g/L. 3. Primers, Sealers, and Undercoaters: 200 g/L. 4. Anticorrosive and Antirust Paints Applied to Ferrous Metals: 250 g/L. 5. Zinc-Rich Industrial Maintenance Primers: 340 g/L. 6. Pretreatment Wash Primers: 420 g/L.

D. Color and Sheen: PT-, as selected by Architect and Owner from manufacturer’s entire range.


A. Testing of Paint Materials: Owner reserves the right to invoke the following procedure:

1. Owner will engage the services of a qualified testing agency to sample paint materials. Contractor will be notified in advance and may be present when samples are taken. If paint materials have already been delivered to Project site, samples may be taken at Project site. Samples will be identified, sealed, and certified by testing agency.

2. Testing agency will perform tests for compliance with product requirements. 3. Owner may direct Contractor to stop applying coatings if test results show materials

being used do not comply with product requirements. Contractor shall remove noncomplying paint materials from Project site, pay for testing, and repaint surfaces painted with rejected materials. Contractor will be required to remove rejected materials from previously painted surfaces if, on repainting with complying materials, the two (2) paints are incompatible.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter as follows:

1. Wood: Fifteen percent (15%). 2. Gypsum Board: Twelve percent (12%).

C. Gypsum Board Substrates: Verify that finishing compound is sanded smooth.

D. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing finishes and primers.

INTERIOR PAINTING


E. Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

1. Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Manual" applicable to substrates indicated.

B. Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are removable and are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting.

1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any.

C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dust, dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants.

1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers or apply tie coat as required to produce paint systems indicated.

D. Steel Substrates: Remove rust, loose mill scale, and shop primer, if any. Clean using methods recommended in writing by paint manufacturer but not less than the following:

1. SSPC-SP 2, "Hand Tool Cleaning." 2. SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning."

E. Shop-Primed Steel Substrates: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop priming to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-primed surfaces.

F. Wood Substrates:

1. Sand surfaces that will be exposed to view and dust off. 2. Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides, and backsides of wood.

3.3 APPLICATION

A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions and to recommendations in "MPI Manual."

1. Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated. 2. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed surfaces.

Before final installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only.

3. Paint front and backsides of access panels, removable or hinged covers, and similar hinged items to match exposed surfaces.

4. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates.

INTERIOR PAINTING


5. Primers specified in painting schedules may be omitted on items that are factory primed or factory finished if acceptable to topcoat manufacturers.

B. Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats of same material are to be applied. Tint undercoats to match color of topcoat, but provide sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat.

C. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance.

D. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks.

E. Painting Fire Suppression, Plumbing, HVAC, Electrical, Communication, and Electronic Safety and Security Work:

1. Paint the following work where exposed in equipment rooms, unless factory-finished:

a. Equipment, including panelboards. b. Uninsulated metal piping. c. Uninsulated plastic piping. d. Pipe hangers and supports. e. Metal conduit. f. Plastic conduit. g. Duct, equipment, and pipe insulation having cotton or canvas insulation covering

or other paintable jacket material.

2. Paint the following work where exposed in occupied spaces, unless factory-finished:

a. Equipment, including panelboards. b. Uninsulated metal piping. c. Uninsulated plastic piping. d. Pipe hangers and supports. e. Metal conduit. f. Plastic conduit. g. Duct, equipment, and pipe insulation having cotton or canvas insulation covering

or other paintable jacket material. h. Other items as directed by Architect.

3. Paint portions of internal surfaces of metal ducts, without liner, behind air inlets and outlets that are visible from occupied spaces.


A. Dry Film Thickness Testing: Owner may engage the services of a qualified testing and inspecting agency to inspect and test paint for dry film thickness.

1. Contractor shall touch up and restore painted surfaces damaged by testing. 2. If test results show that dry film thickness of applied paint does not comply with paint

manufacturer's written recommendations, Contractor shall pay for testing and apply

INTERIOR PAINTING


additional coats as needed to provide dry film thickness that complies with paint manufacturer's written recommendations.


A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from Project site.

B. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces.

C. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition.

D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces.

3.6 INTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE

A. Steel Substrates:

1. Quick-Dry Enamel System:

a. Prime Coat: Primer, alkyd, quick dry, for metal, MPI #76. b. Topcoat: Alkyd, quick dry, semi-gloss (Gloss Level 5), MPI #81.

B. Wood Substrates:

1. Latex over Latex Primer System:

a. Prime Coat: Primer, latex, for interior wood, MPI #39. b. Topcoat: Latex, interior, flat (Gloss Level 1), MPI #53, at panelboards. c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, semi-gloss (Gloss Level 5), MPI #54.

C. Gypsum Board Substrates:

1. Latex System:

a. Prime Coat: Primer sealer, latex, interior, MPI #50. b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, flat, (Gloss Level 1), MPI #53, at ceilings. d. Topcoat: Latex, interior, eggshell, (Gloss Level 3), MPI #52.


VISUAL DISPLAY UNITS


SECTION 101100 - VISUAL DISPLAY UNITS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Markerboards. 2. Tackboards. 3. Support systems for visual display boards.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Tackboard: Framed or unframed, tackable, visual display board assembly.

B. Visual Display Board Assembly: Visual display surface that is factory fabricated into composite panel form, either with or without a perimeter frame; includes chalkboards, markerboards, and tackboards.

C. Visual Display Surface: Surfaces that are used to convey information visually, including surfaces of chalkboards, markerboards, tackboards, and surfacing materials that are not fabricated into composite panel form but are applied directly to walls.



1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, finishes, and accessories for visual display units.

B. Shop Drawings: For visual display surfaces.

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 2. Show locations of panel joints. 3. Show locations and layout of special-purpose graphics. 4. Include sections of typical trim members.

C. Samples: For each type of visual display unit indicated, for units with factory-applied color finishes, and as follows:

1. Actual sections of porcelain-enamel face sheet and tackboard assembly. 2. Include accessory Samples to verify color selected.

D. Product Schedule: For visual display units. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.




A. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for surface-burning characteristics of fabrics.

B. Sample Warranties: For special warranties.


A. Maintenance Data: For visual display units to include in maintenance manuals.


A. Deliver factory-fabricated visual display units completely assembled in one (1) piece. If dimensions exceed maximum manufactured unit size, or if unit size is impracticable to ship in one (1) piece, provide two (2) or more pieces with joints in locations indicated on approved Shop Drawings.

B. Store visual display surfaces vertically with packing materials between each unit.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install visual display surfaces until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above ceilings is complete, and temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.

1.9 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty for Porcelain-Enamel Face Sheets: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace porcelain-enamel face sheets that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.


a. Surfaces lose original writing and erasing qualities. b. Surfaces exhibit crazing, cracking, or flaking.

2. Warranty Period: Life of the building.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of visual display unit from single source from single manufacturer.


A. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.



1. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less. 2. Smoke-Developed Index: 50 or less.

2.3 MARKERBOARD ASSEMBLIES

A. Porcelain-Enamel Markerboards: Balanced, high-pressure, factory-laminated markerboard assembly of three-ply construction consisting of backing sheet, core material, and 0.021-inch-thick, porcelain-enamel face sheet with high or low-gloss finish.

1. Basis of Design:

a. Claridge Products and Equipment, Inc.; LCS Deluxe


a. AARCO Products, Inc. b. ADP Lemco, Inc. c. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 012500 “Substitution Procedures”.

3. Hardboard Core: ¼-inch-thick; with 0.005-inch-thick, aluminum foil backing. 4. Laminating Adhesive: Manufacturer's standard, moisture-resistant thermoplastic type.

2.4 TACKBOARD ASSEMBLIES/TACK SURFACES

A. Basis of Design:

1. Forbo Flooring Systems; Bulletin Board


1. AARCO Products, Inc. 2. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 012500 “Substitution Procedures”.

C. Plastic-Impregnated-Cork Tackboard: ¼-inch-thick, plastic-impregnated cork factory laminated to ¼-inch-thick hardboard backing.

2.5 MARKERBOARD AND TACKBOARD ACCESSORIES

A. Aluminum Frames and Trim: Fabricated from not less than 0.062-inch-thick, extruded aluminum; of size and shape indicated on Drawings.

1. Factory-Applied Trim: Manufacturer's standard.

B. Chalktray: Manufacturer's standard, continuous.

1. Box Type: Extruded aluminum with slanted front, grooved tray, and cast-aluminum end closures.




A. Porcelain-Enamel Face Sheet: Manufacturer's standard steel sheet with porcelain-enamel coating fused to steel; uncoated thickness indicated.

1. Matte Finish: Low reflective; chalk wipes clean with dry cloth or standard eraser.

B. Plastic-Impregnated-Cork Sheet: Seamless, homogeneous, self-sealing sheet consisting of granulated cork, linseed oil, resin binders, and dry pigments that are mixed and calendared onto fabric backing; with washable vinyl finish and integral color throughout with surface-burning characteristics indicated.

C. Hardboard: ANSI A135.4, tempered.

D. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063.

2.7 FABRICATION

A. Porcelain-Enamel Visual Display Assemblies: Laminate porcelain-enamel face sheet and backing sheet to core material under heat and pressure with manufacturer's standard flexible, waterproof adhesive.

B. Visual Display Boards: Factory assemble visual display boards unless otherwise indicated.

1. Where factory-applied trim is indicated, trim shall be assembled and attached to visual display boards at manufacturer's factory before shipment.

C. Factory-Assembled Visual Display Units: Coordinate factory-assembled units with trim and accessories indicated. Join parts with a neat, precision fit.

1. Make joints only where total length exceeds maximum manufactured length. Fabricate with minimum number of joints, balanced around center of board, as acceptable to Architect.

2. Provide manufacturer's standard vertical-joint spline system between abutting sections of markerboards.

3. Where size of visual display boards or other conditions require support in addition to normal trim, provide structural supports or modify trim as indicated or as selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard structural support accessories to suit conditions indicated.

D. Aluminum Frames and Trim: Fabricate units straight and of single lengths, keeping joints to a minimum. Miter corners to a neat, hairline closure.

1. Where factory-applied trim is indicated, trim shall be assembled and attached to visual display units at manufacturer's factory before shipment.






C. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.


A. Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A31, Class II, 0.010 mm or thicker.

2.10 VISUAL DISPLAY SURFACE SCHEDULE

A. Visual Display Board: Factory assembled.

1. Markerboard: Porcelain-enamel markerboard assembly.

a. Color: White.

2. Corners: Square. 3. Size and Mounting Height: As indicated on Drawings. 4. Mounting: Wall. 5. Factory-Applied Aluminum Trim: Manufacturer's standard with clear anodic finish. 6. Accessories:

a. Chalktray: Box type.

B. Tackboard: Factory assembled.

1. Tack Surface: Plastic-impregnated-cork tackboard assembly.

a. Color: As selected by Architect and Owner from manufacturer’s entire range.

2. Corners: Square. 3. Size and Mounting Height: As indicated on Drawings. 4. Mounting: Wall. 5. Edges: Concealed by trim.

a. Factory-Applied Aluminum Trim: Manufacturer's standard, with clear anodic finish.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, surface conditions of wall, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Examine walls and partitions for proper preparation and backing for visual display surfaces.




3.2 PREPARATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation.

B. Clean substrates of substances that could impair the performance of and affect the smooth, finished surfaces of visual display boards, including dirt, mold, and mildew.

C. Prepare surfaces to achieve a smooth, dry, clean surface free of flaking, unsound coatings, cracks, defects, projections, depressions, and substances that will impair bond between visual display surfaces and wall surfaces.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install visual display surfaces in locations and at mounting heights indicated on Drawings. Keep perimeter lines straight, level, and plumb. Provide grounds, clips, backing materials, adhesives, brackets, anchors, trim, and accessories necessary for complete installation.

B. Factory-Fabricated Visual Display Board Assemblies: Attach concealed clips, hangers, and grounds to wall surfaces and to visual display boards with fasteners at not more than 16 inches o.c. Secure both top and bottom of boards to walls.


A. Clean visual display surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions. Attach one (1) cleaning label to visual display surface in each room.

B. Touch up factory-applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas.

C. Cover and protect visual display surfaces after installation and cleaning.


SIGNAGE


SECTION 101400 - SIGNAGE

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Panel signs.

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Section 015000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for temporary information and directional signs.

2. Section 220553 "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment" for labels, tags, and nameplates for plumbing systems and equipment.

3. Section 230553 "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment" for labels, tags, and nameplates for HVAC systems and equipment.

4. Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems" for labels, tags, and nameplates for electrical equipment.



B. Shop Drawings: For panel signs.

1. Include fabrication and installation details and attachments to other work. 2. Show sign mounting heights, locations of supplementary supports to be provided by other

installers, and accessories. 3. Provide message list, typestyles, graphic elements, including tactile characters and

Braille, and layout for each sign at least half-size.

C. Samples: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of actual units or sections of units showing the full range of colors available for the following:

1. Acrylic Sheet: Full-size Sample for each color required.

D. Sign Schedule: Use same designations indicated on Drawings or as listed in special schedule.



B. Sample Warranty: For special warranty.

SIGNAGE



A. Maintenance Data: For signs to include in maintenance manuals.


A. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom-fabricate products similar to those required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in-service performance.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of signs that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.


a. Deterioration of finishes beyond normal weathering. b. Deterioration of embedded graphic image. c. Separation or delamination of sheet materials and components.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Thermal Movements: For exterior signs, allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes.


B. Accessibility Standard: Comply with applicable provisions in the ABA standards of the Federal agency having jurisdiction and ICC A117.1.

2.2 PANEL SIGNS


1. Best Sign Systems, Inc. 2. Bayuk Graphic Systems, Inc. 3. Intelligent Signage, Inc. 4. Seton Identification Products 5. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 012500 “Substitution Procedures”.

B. Source Limitations for Signs: Obtain each sign type indicated from one (1) source from a single manufacturer.

SIGNAGE


C. Panel Signs: Sign with smooth, uniform surfaces constructed to remain flat under installed conditions within a tolerance of plus or minus 1/16-inch measured diagonally from corner to corner.

D. Provide matte finish plaques in sizes to accommodate the message indicated in the Signage Schedule on the Door Schedule and the Signage Details drawing in the Construction Documents. Fabricate of acrylic plastic conforming to ASTM D 709, Type NDP minimum 3/16-inch for non-slotted and 1/8-inch for slotted signs. Provide with square corners.

1. Graphics Application:

a. Raised Letters: Chemically weld l/l6-inch-thick acrylic message letters to front surface of plaque prior to application of background color to rear of sheet. These shall comply with Section 703.2.3 (not italic, oblique, script or decorative) and 703.2.4 (1-inch character height) of the ICC/ANSI A117.1 Code. Pictogram: Each sign shall be provided with an international symbol of accessibility per Section 4.30.7 (Figure 43 a and b) of the Americans with Disabilities Act. The raised image pictogram shall be placed within the limits of the sign panel insert and to the right of the text.

b. Messages:

1) Typeface: Helvetica Medium, with accompanying Grade 2 Braille message. 2) Type Size: 1-inch large and small case, with width, height and stroke

complying with the requirements of Section 703.2.5 (maximum stroke width fifteen percent (15%) of the height of each letter at the top surface of the character and thirty percent (30%) maximum of the height of each letter at the base; character spacing 1/8-inch minimum and four (4) times the tactile character stroke width maximum and spacing between lines shall be between one hundred thirty-five percent (135%) and one hundred seventy percent (170%) of the tactile character height) of the ICC/ANSI A117.1 Code.

3) Background Color: In color selected by Architect and Owner from manufacturer's full range, except for accessibility pictogram background, which will be blue. Message Color: White or black.

2.3 MATERIALS

A. Acrylic Sheet: ASTM D 4802, Category A-1 (cell-cast sheet), Type UVA (UV absorbing).

2.4 ACCESSORIES

A. Adhesive: As recommended by sign manufacturer.

2.5 FABRICATION

A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard signs of configurations indicated.

1. Mill joints to tight, hairline fit. Form joints exposed to weather to exclude water penetration and retention.

SIGNAGE


2. Preassemble signs in the shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble signs only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and installation, in location not exposed to view after final assembly.


A. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.

2.7 ACRYLIC SHEET FINISHES

A. Colored Coatings for Acrylic Sheet: For copy and background colors, provide colored coatings, including inks, dyes, and paints, that are recommended by acrylic manufacturers for optimum adherence to acrylic surface and that are UV and water resistant for five (5) years for application intended.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work.

B. Verify that sign-support surfaces are within tolerances to accommodate signs without gaps or irregularities between backs of signs and support surfaces unless otherwise indicated.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install signs using mounting methods of types described and complying with manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Install signs level, plumb, true to line, and at locations and heights indicated, with sign surfaces free of distortion and other defects in appearance.

2. Install signs so they do not protrude or obstruct according to the accessibility standard. 3. Before installation, verify that sign surfaces are clean and free of materials or debris that

would impair installation.

B. Interior Wall Signs: Install signs on walls adjacent to latch side of door where applicable. Where not indicated or possible, such as double doors, install signs on nearest adjacent walls. Locate to allow approach within 3 inches of sign without encountering protruding objects or standing within swing of door.

C. Mounting Methods:

1. Adhesive: Clean bond-breaking materials from substrate surface and remove loose debris. Apply linear beads or spots of adhesive symmetrically to back of sign and of suitable quantity to support weight of sign after cure without slippage. Keep adhesive away from edges to prevent adhesive extrusion as sign is applied and to prevent visibility

SIGNAGE


of cured adhesive at sign edges. Place sign in position and push to engage adhesive. Temporarily support sign in position until adhesive fully sets.


A. Remove and replace damaged or deformed signs and signs that do not comply with specified requirements. Replace signs with damaged or deteriorated finishes or components that cannot be successfully repaired by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.

B. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as signs are installed.

C. On completion of installation, clean exposed surfaces of signs according to manufacturer's written instructions and touch up minor nicks and abrasions in finish. Maintain signs in a clean condition during construction and protect from damage until acceptance by Owner.


BULLET-RESISTANT PANELS


SECTION 102641 - BULLET-RESISTANT PANELS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Bullet resistant fiberglass panels.


1. Section 092216 “Non-Structural Metal Framing” for non-structural framing that support bullet-resistant panels.




A. Product Data: For each product.

1. Include preparation instructions and recommendations. 2. Include fire ratings of units recessed in fire-rated walls.

B. Shop Drawings: Details of installation of bulled-resistant fiberglass panels.

C. Samples: Two (2) samples, minimum size 6 inches square, representing actual product.


A. Qualifications: For Manufacturer and Installer.

B. Product Certificates: Provide to indicate compliance with the following:

1. UL Listing Verification and UL752 Current Test Results as provided by Underwriters Laboratories.

2. ASTM E 119 One-Hour Fire Rating of Building Construction and Materials. 3. ASTM F 1233 Standard Test Method for Forced Entry Testing of Materials/Assemblies. 4. Manufacturer’s third-party certificate of registration with ISO 9001:2008.

C. Sample Warranties: For special warranties.




A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Minimum five (5) years experience manufacturing similar products.

B. Installer Qualifications: Minimum two (2) years experience installing similar products.

1.7 MOCKUPS

A. Mockups: Build mockup for evaluation of surface preparation techniques and application workmanship.

1. Finish areas designated by Architect. 2. Do not proceed with remaining work until workmanship is approved by Architect. 3. Refinish mock-up area as required to produce acceptable work. 4. Accepted mockup may remain as portion of final work.

1.8 DELIVERY, HANDLING, AND STORAGE

A. Deliver and store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging bearing the brand name and manufacturer's identification until ready for installation.

B. Deliver materials to project with manufacturer’s UL-Listed labels intact and legible.

C. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction traffic, and other potential causes of damage. Stack panels flat and supported on risers on a flat platform to prevent sagging.


A. Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within limits recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products under environmental conditions outside manufacturer's recommended limits.

1.10 SEQUENCING

A. Ensure that products of this section are supplied to affected trades in time to prevent interruption of construction progress.

1.11 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components that do not comply with requirements or that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Basis-of-Design:



1. Waco Composites; ArmorCore

B. Manufacturers:

1. Armortex 2. Insulgard Security Products 3. Substitutions: In accordance with Section 012500 “Substitution Procedures”.


A. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency.

B. Bullet Resistant Fiberglass Panels shall be “non-ricochet type” to permit the encapture and retention of an attacking projectile lessening the potential of a random injury or lateral penetration.

1. Panel Rating: UL752 Level 4. 2. Bullet Resistance of Joints: Equal to that of the panel.

2.3 BULLET-RESISTANT PANELS

A. Panels: Multiple layers of woven roving ballistic-grade fiberglass cloth impregnated with a thermoset polyester resin and compressed into flat rigid sheets.

1. Thickness: Minimum 1-3/16-inch nominal thickness. 2. Size: Provide maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each

area and that correspond with support system indicated.

2.4 ACCESSORIES

A. Adhesives and Fasteners: Type recommended by bullet-resistant panel manufacturer for specific application.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared.

C. Verify work of related trades required in contract documents and architectural drawings is complete to the point where work of this Section may properly commence.

D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.



3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation.

B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install panels in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations and in proper relationship with adjacent construction.

B. Reinforce joints with a back-up layer of bullet-resistive material. Minimum width of reinforcing layer at joint shall be 4 inches, centered on panel joints.

C. Secure panels using screws, bolts, or an industrial adhesive.

1. Cut panels to fit at perimeter and around penetrations. 2. Method of application shall install panels minimizing vulnerabilities by fitting tightly to

adjacent surfaces including but not limiting to floor substrates, roof deck, door and window frames, and the like.

3.4 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed products until completion of project.

B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion.


TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES


SECTION 102800 - TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Public-use washroom accessories. 2. Private-use bathroom accessories.


1. Section 061000 “Rough Carpentry” for blocking coordination.

1.3 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate accessory locations with other work to prevent interference with clearances required for access by people with disabilities, and for proper installation, adjustment, operation, cleaning, and servicing of accessories.

B. Deliver inserts and anchoring devices set into concrete or masonry as required to prevent delaying the Work.




2. Include anchoring and mounting requirements, including requirements for cutouts in other work and substrate preparation.

B. Samples: Full size, for each exposed product and for each finish specified.

1. Approved full-size Samples will be returned and may be used in the Work.

C. Product Schedule: Indicating types, quantities, sizes, and installation locations by room of each accessory required.

1. Identify locations using room designations indicated.


A. Sample Warranty: For manufacturer’s special warranty.




A. Maintenance Data: For accessories to include in maintenance manuals.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer’s Special Warranty for Mirrors: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace mirrors that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Failures include, but are not limited to, visible silver spoilage defects. 2. Warranty Period: Fifteen (15) years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


1. A & J Washroom Accessories, Inc. 2. American Specialties, Inc. 3. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. 4. Bradley Corporation 5. Georgia-Pacific Consumer Products 6. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 012500 “Substitution Procedures”.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain accessories from single source from single manufacturer.

2.2 PUBLIC-USE WASHROOM ACCESSORIES

A. Toilet Tissue (Roll) Dispenser:

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Bobrick #B-25883 2. Description: Double roll dispenser. 3. Mounting: Recessed. . 4. Operation: Non-control delivery with theft-resistant spindle. 5. Capacity: Designed for 5¼-inch-diameter tissue rolls. 6. Material and Finish: Stainless-steel, No. 4 finish (satin) with plastic spindle. 7. Lockset: Tumbler type.

B. Combination Towel (Folded) Dispenser/Waste Receptacle:

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Bobrick #B-38034 2. Description: Combination unit for dispensing C-fold or multifold towels, with removable

waste receptacle. 3. Mounting: Recessed. 4. Minimum Towel-Dispenser Capacity: 600 C-fold or 800 multifold paper towels. 5. Minimum Waste-Receptacle Capacity: 3-gallon. 6. Material and Finish: Stainless-steel, No. 4 finish (satin).



7. Lockset: Tumbler type for towel-dispenser compartment and waste receptacle, keyed alike.

C. Liquid-Soap Dispenser:

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Bobrick #B-2111 2. Description: Designed for dispensing soap in liquid or lotion form. 3. Mounting: Surface mounted. 4. Capacity: 40 oz. 5. Materials: Stainless-steel, No. 4 finish (satin) container and black molded plastic push

button and spout. 6. Lockset: Special key provided. 7. Refill Indicator: Window type.

D. Grab Bar:

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Bobrick #B-6806.99x18, x36 and x42 2. Mounting: Flanges with concealed fasteners. 3. Material: Stainless-steel, 0.05-inch-thick.

a. Finish: Smooth, No. 4 finish (satin) on ends and slip-resistant texture in grip area.

4. Outside Diameter: 1½ inches. 5. Configuration and Length: As indicated in the Drawings.

E. Mirror Unit:

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Bobrick #B-290-1830 2. Frame: Stainless-steel angle, 0.05-inch-thick.

a. Corners: Manufacturer's standard.

3. Hangers: Produce rigid, tamper- and theft-resistant installation, using one (1) of the methods indicated below.

a. One-piece, galvanized-steel, wall-hanger device with spring-action locking mechanism to hold mirror unit in position with no exposed screws or bolts.

b. Wall bracket of galvanized steel, equipped with concealed locking devices requiring a special tool to remove.

4. Size: 18x30.

2.3 PRIVATE-USE BATHROOM ACCESSORIES

A. Robe Hook:

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Bobrick #B-6827 2. Description: Single-prong unit. 3. Material and Finish: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin). 4. Location: On back of single use restroom doors.



2.4 MATERIALS

A. Stainless-Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 304, 0.031-inch minimum nominal thickness unless otherwise indicated.

B. Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008, Designation CS (cold rolled, commercial steel), 0.036-inch-inimum nominal thickness.

C. Galvanized-Steel Mounting Devices: ASTM A 153, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication.

D. Fasteners: Screws, bolts, and other devices of same material as accessory unit and tamper-and-theft resistant where exposed, and of galvanized steel where concealed.

E. Mirrors: ASTM C 1503, Mirror Glazing Quality, clear-glass mirrors, nominal ¼-inch-thick.

F. ABS Plastic: Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene resin formulation.

2.5 FABRICATION

A. General: Fabricate units with tight seams and joints, and exposed edges rolled. Hang doors and access panels with full-length, continuous hinges. Equip units for concealed anchorage and with corrosion-resistant backing plates.

B. Keys: Provide universal keys for internal access to accessories for servicing and resupplying. Provide minimum of six (6) keys to Owner's representative.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install accessories according to manufacturers' written instructions, using fasteners appropriate to substrate indicated and recommended by unit manufacturer. Install units level, plumb, and firmly anchored in locations and at heights indicated.

1. Remove temporary labels and protective coatings.

B. Grab Bars: Install to withstand a downward load of at least 250 lbf, when tested according to ASTM F 446.


A. Adjust accessories for unencumbered, smooth operation. Replace damaged or defective items.

B. Clean and polish exposed surfaces according to manufacturer's written recommendations.


FIRE PROTECTION CABINETS


SECTION 104413 - FIRE PROTECTION CABINETS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Fire-protection cabinets for the following:

a. Portable fire extinguishers.


1. Section 104416 "Fire Extinguishers."



1. Show door hardware, cabinet type, trim style, and panel style. Include roughing-in dimensions and details showing recessed-, semi-recessed-, or surface-mounting method and relationships of box and trim to surrounding construction.

B. Shop Drawings: For fire-protection cabinets.

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

C. Samples: For each type of exposed finish required.

D. Product Schedule: For fire-protection cabinets. Indicate whether recessed, semi-recessed, or surface mounted. Coordinate final fire-protection cabinet schedule with fire-extinguisher schedule to ensure proper fit and function. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.


A. Maintenance Data: For fire-protection cabinets to include in maintenance manuals.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size of fire-protection cabinets to ensure that type and capacity of fire extinguishers indicated are accommodated.

B. Coordinate sizes and locations of fire-protection cabinets with wall depths.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Source Limitations: Obtain fire-protection cabinets, accessories, and fire extinguishers from single source from single manufacturer.

2.2 FIRE-PROTECTION CABINET

A. Cabinet Type: Suitable for fire extinguisher.


a. J. L. Industries, Inc., a division of Activar Construction Products Group; Ambassador 1016

b. Larsen's Manufacturing Company; 2409-R7 c. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 012500 “Substitution Procedures”.

B. Cabinet Construction: Nonrated.

C. Cabinet Material: Cold-rolled steel sheet.

D. Semi-Recessed Cabinet: One-piece combination trim and perimeter door frame overlapping surrounding wall surface with exposed trim face and wall return at outer edge (backbend).

1. Square-Edge Trim: 1¼- to 1½-inch backbend depth.

E. Cabinet Trim Material: Same material and finish as door.

F. Door Material: Steel sheet.

G. Door Style: Solid opaque panel with frame.

H. Door Hardware: Manufacturer's standard door-operating hardware of proper type for cabinet type, trim style, and door material and style indicated.

1. Provide projecting door pull and friction latch. 2. Provide continuous hinge, of same material and finish as trim, permitting door to open

180 degrees.

I. Accessories:

1. Mounting Bracket: Manufacturer's standard steel, designed to secure fire extinguisher to fire-protection cabinet, of sizes required for types and capacities of fire extinguishers indicated, with plated or baked-enamel finish.

2. Identification: Lettering complying with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style, size, spacing, and location. Locate as directed by Architect.

a. Identify fire extinguisher in fire-protection cabinet with the words "FIRE EXTINGUISHER."



1) Location: Applied to cabinet door. 2) Application Process: Pressure-sensitive vinyl letters. 3) Lettering Color: Black. 4) Orientation: Vertical.

3. Alarm: Manufacturer's standard alarm that actuates when fire-protection cabinet door is opened and that is powered by batteries.

J. Materials:

1. Cold-Rolled Steel: ASTM A 1008, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B.

a. Finish: Baked enamel or powder coat. b. Color: As selected by Architect and Owner from manufacturer’s entire range.

2.3 FABRICATION

A. Fire-Protection Cabinets: Provide manufacturer's standard box (tub) with trim, frame, door, and hardware to suit cabinet type, trim style, and door style indicated.

1. Weld joints and grind smooth. 2. Provide factory-drilled mounting holes. 3. Prepare doors and frames to receive locks.

B. Cabinet Doors: Fabricate doors according to manufacturer's standards, from materials indicated and coordinated with cabinet types and trim styles.

1. Fabricate door frames with tubular stiles and rails and hollow-metal design, minimum ½-inch thick.

2. Miter and weld perimeter door frames and grind smooth.

C. Cabinet Trim: Fabricate cabinet trim in one (1) piece with corners mitered, welded, and ground smooth.


A. Comply with NAAMM's AMP 500, "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products," for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.

B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces of fire-protection cabinets from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.

C. Finish fire-protection cabinets after assembly.

D. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are unacceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine walls and partitions for suitable framing depth and blocking where semi-recessed cabinets will be installed.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Prepare recesses for semi-recessed fire-protection cabinets as required by type and size of cabinet and trim style.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install fire-protection cabinets in locations and at mounting heights indicated or, if not indicated, at heights acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Fire-Protection Cabinets: Fasten cabinets to structure, square and plumb.

1. Fasten mounting brackets to inside surface of fire-protection cabinets, square and plumb.

C. Identification:

1. Apply vinyl lettering at locations indicated. 2. Apply vinyl lettering on field-painted fire-protection cabinets after painting is complete.


A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as fire-protection cabinets are installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions.

B. Adjust fire-protection cabinet doors to operate easily without binding. Verify that integral locking devices operate properly.

C. On completion of fire-protection cabinet installation, clean interior and exterior surfaces as recommended by manufacturer.

D. Touch up marred finishes or replace fire-protection cabinets that cannot be restored to factory-finished appearance. Use only materials and procedures recommended or furnished by fire-protection cabinet and mounting bracket manufacturers.

E. Replace fire-protection cabinets that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.


FIRE EXTINGUISHERS


SECTION 104416 - FIRE EXTINGUISHERS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes portable, hand-carried fire extinguishers.


1. Section 104413 "Fire Protection Cabinets."


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rating and classification, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for fire extinguisher.


A. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fire extinguishers to include in maintenance manuals.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate type and capacity of fire extinguishers with fire-protection cabinets to ensure fit and function.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace fire extinguishers that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.


a. Failure of hydrostatic test according to NFPA 10. b. Faulty operation of valves or release levers.

2. Warranty Period: Six (6) years from date of Substantial Completion.

FIRE EXTINGUISHERS


PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. NFPA Compliance: Fabricate and label fire extinguishers to comply with NFPA 10, "Portable Fire Extinguishers."

B. Fire Extinguishers: Listed and labeled for type, rating, and classification by an independent testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Provide fire extinguishers approved, listed, and labeled by FMG.

2.2 PORTABLE, HAND-CARRIED FIRE EXTINGUISHERS

A. Fire Extinguishers: Type, size, and capacity for each fire-protection cabinet indicated.


a. J. L. Industries, Inc.; a division of Activar Construction Products Group; Cosmic 10E

b. Larsen's Manufacturing Company; MP10 c. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 012500 “Substitution Procedures”.

2. Source Limitations: Obtain fire extinguishers, fire-protection cabinets, and accessories, from single source from single manufacturer.

3. Valves: Manufacturer's standard. 4. Handles and Levers: Manufacturer's standard. 5. Instruction Labels: Include pictorial marking system complying with NFPA 10,

Appendix B.

B. Multipurpose Dry-Chemical Type in Steel Container: UL-rated 4-A:80-B:C, 10-lb nominal capacity, with monoammonium phosphate-based dry chemical in enameled-steel container.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine fire extinguishers for proper charging and tagging.

1. Remove and replace damaged, defective, or undercharged fire extinguishers.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install fire extinguishers in locations indicated and in compliance with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

FIRE EXTINGUISHERS



RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES


SECTION 113100 - RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Refrigeration appliances. 2. Cleaning appliances.





1. Include installation details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components, and finishes for each appliance.

2. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished accessories.

B. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified, in manufacturer's standard size.

C. Product Schedule: For appliances. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.


A. Product Certificates: For each type of appliance.

B. Field quality-control reports.

C. Sample Warranties: For manufacturers' special warranties.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For each residential appliance to include in operation and maintenance manuals.



1.7 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranties: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace residential appliances or components that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period except as qualified below:

1. Warranty Period: One (1) year from date of Substantial Completion. 2. Refrigerator/Freezer, Sealed System: Limited warranty, including parts and labor for first

year, and parts thereafter, for on-site service on the product.

a. Warranty Period for Compressor: Ten (10) years, parts only, from date of Substantial Completion.

3. Dishwasher: Limited warranty, including parts and labor for first year, for on-site service on the product.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Source Limitations: Obtain residential appliances from single source and each type of residential appliance from single manufacturer where available.


1. Bosch (B) 2. Broan-NuTone, LLC (BN) 3. Electrolux Home Products (E) 4. Follett (F) 5. General Electric Company (GE) 6. LG Electronics (LG) 7. Maytag; a division of Whirlpool Corporation (M) 8. Sears Brands LLC (Kenmore) 9. Summit Appliance Division (S) 10. U-Line (U) 11. Whirlpool Corporation (W) 12. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 012500 “Substitution Procedures”.


A. Electrical Appliances: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

B. Accessibility: Where residential appliances are indicated to comply with accessibility requirements, comply with applicable provisions in the ABA standards of the Federal agency having jurisdiction and ICC A117.1.



2.3 REFRIGERATOR/FREEZERS

A. Refrigerator/Freezer: Two-door refrigerator/freezer with freezer on bottom and complying with AHAM HRF-1.

1. Basis-of-Design Product: GE #PFE28KYNFS 2. Type: Freestanding. 3. Dimensions:

a. Width: 35¾ inches. b. Depth: 36¼ inches. c. Height: 69-7/8 inches.

4. Storage Capacity:

a. Refrigeration Compartment Volume: 18.5 cu. ft. b. Freezer Volume: 9.17 cu. ft. c. Shelf Area: Four (4) split adjustable, one (1) full width glass shelves, five (5) total.

5. General Features:

a. Door Configuration: Overlay. b. Dispenser in door for ice and cold water. c. Built-in water-filtration system. d. Separate touch-pad temperature controls for each compartment.

6. Refrigerator Features:

a. Interior light in refrigeration compartment. b. Compartment Storage: Three (3) drawers. c. Door Storage: Modular compartments with gallon-milk-container storage. d. Temperature-controlled meat/deli bin.

7. Freezer Features: One (1) freezer compartment configured as pull-out drawer.

a. Automatic defrost. b. Interior light in freezer compartment. c. Automatic icemaker and storage bin.

8. Appliance Color/Finish: Stainless-steel.

2.4 DISHWASHERS

A. Dishwasher: Complying with AHAM DW-1.

1. Basis-of-Design Product: GE #GDT226SSLSS 2. Type: Built-in undercounter. 3. Dimensions:

a. Width: 23¾ inches. b. Depth: 23½ inches. c. Height: 32¼ inches.



4. Capacity:

a. International Place Settings of China: Twelve (12). b. Water Consumption for Full Load: 3.0 gal. per cycle.

5. Sound Level: Maximum 51 dBA. 6. Tub and Door Liner: Stainless-steel with sealed detergent and automatic rinsing-aid

dispensers. 7. Rack System: Nylon-coated sliding dish racks, with removable cutlery backet. 8. Controls: Touch-pad controls with three (3) wash cycles and hot-air/heat-off drying cycle

options. 9. Features:

a. Waste food disposer. b. Self-cleaning food-filter system. c. Hot-water booster heater for 140 deg F wash water with incoming water at 100

deg F. d. Lock-out feature. e. Delay-wash option. f. Digital display panel. g. Water softener. h. Soil-sensing water use control system.

10. Appliance Color/Finish: Stainless-steel.


A. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.

B. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, power connections, and other conditions affecting installation and performance of residential appliances.

B. Examine roughing-in for piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections before appliance installation.

C. Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work.




3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install appliances according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Built-in Equipment: Securely anchor units to supporting cabinets or countertops with concealed fasteners. Verify that clearances are adequate for proper functioning and that rough openings are completely concealed.

C. Freestanding Equipment: Place units in final locations after finishes have been completed in each area. Verify that clearances are adequate to properly operate equipment.


A. Perform the following tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized service representative:

1. Perform visual, mechanical, and electrical inspection and testing for each appliance according to manufacturers' written recommendations. Certify compliance with each manufacturer's appliance-performance parameters.

2. Leak Test: After installation, test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist. 3. Operational Test: After installation, start units to confirm proper operation. 4. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and

components.

B. An appliance will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

C. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.4 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain residential appliances.


SOLID SURFACING COUNTERTOPS


SECTION 123661.16 - SOLID SURFACING COUNTERTOPS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Solid surface material countertops. 2. Solid surface material backsplashes. 3. Solid surface material end splashes.


1. Section 224216.16 "Commercial Sinks" for sinks and plumbing fittings.


A. Product Data: For solid surfacing materials.

B. Shop Drawings: For countertops. Show materials, finishes, edge and backsplash profiles, methods of joining, and cutouts for plumbing fixtures.

1. Show locations and details of joints. 2. Show direction of directional pattern, if any.

C. Samples: For the following products:

1. Solid surfacing material, 6 inches square.




A. Maintenance Data: For solid surface materials to include in maintenance manuals. Include Product Data for care products used or recommended by Installer and names, addresses, and telephone numbers of local sources for products.


A. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom-fabricate countertops similar to that required for this Project, and whose products have a record of successful in-service performance.



B. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of countertops.


A. Field Measurements: Verify dimensions of countertops by field measurements after base cabinets and substrates are installed but before countertop fabrication is complete.

1.8 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate locations of utilities that will penetrate countertops or backsplashes materials.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SOLID SURFACE COUNTERTOP MATERIALS

A. Solid Surface Material: Homogeneous-filled plastic resin complying with ICPA SS-1.


a. E. I. du Pont de Nemours and Company; Corian Solid Surface


a. Avonite Surfaces by Aristech Acrylics LLC b. Formica Corporation c. LG Chemical, Ltd. d. Wilsonart International e. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 012500 “Substitution Procedures”.

3. Type: Provide Standard type unless Special Purpose type is indicated. 4. Colors and Patterns: SS-1, as selected by Architect and Owner from manufacturer’s

entire range, Price Category 6, minimum.

B. Medium-Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, Grade 130, made for wet environments.

2.2 COUNTERTOP FABRICATION

A. Fabricate countertops according to solid surface material manufacturer's written instructions and to the AWI/AWMAC/WI's "Architectural Woodwork Standards."

1. Grade: Custom.

B. Configuration:

1. Front: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Backsplash: Straight, slightly eased at corner. 3. End Splash: Matching backsplash.

C. Countertops: ½-inch-thick, solid surface material with front edge built up with same material.



D. Backsplashes: ½-inch-thick, solid surface material.

E. Fabricate tops with shop-applied edges unless otherwise indicated. Comply with solid surface material manufacturer's written instructions for adhesives, sealers, fabrication, and finishing.

1. Fabricate with loose backsplashes for field assembly.

F. Joints: Fabricate countertops without joints.

G. Cutouts and Holes:

1. Counter-Mounted Plumbing Fixtures: Prepare countertops in shop for field cutting openings for counter-mounted fixtures. Mark tops for cutouts and drill holes at corners of cutout locations. Make corner holes of largest radius practical.

2. Fittings: Drill countertops in shop for plumbing fittings and similar items.


A. Adhesive: Product recommended by solid surface material manufacturer. Adhesives shall not contain urea formaldehyde.

B. Sealant for Countertops: Comply with applicable requirements in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates to receive solid surface material countertops and conditions under which countertops material will be installed, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of countertops.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install countertops level to a tolerance of 1/8-inch in 8 feet, ¼-inch maximum. Do not exceed 1/64-inch difference between planes of adjacent units.

B. Fasten subtops to base units by screwing through subtops into cornerblocks of base units. Shim as needed to align subtops in a level plane.

C. Secure countertops to subtops or substrates with adhesive according to solid surface material manufacturer's written instructions. Align adjacent surfaces and, using adhesive in color to match countertop solid surface, form seams to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Carefully dress joints smooth, remove surface scratches, and clean entire surface.

D. Install backsplashes by adhering to wall and countertops with adhesive. Mask areas of countertops and splashes adjacent to joints to prevent adhesive smears.



E. Complete cutouts not finished in shop. Mask areas of countertops adjacent to cutouts to prevent damage while cutting. Make cutouts to accurately fit items to be installed, and at right angles to finished surfaces unless beveling is required for clearance. Ease edges slightly to prevent snipping.

1. Seal edges of cutouts in subtops by saturating with varnish.

F. Apply sealant to gaps at walls; comply with Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."


SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING


SECTION 210517 - SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL



B. Sleeves shall be in accordance with NFPA 13

1.2 SUMMARY


1. Sleeves. 2. Stack-sleeve fittings. 3. Sleeve-seal systems. 4. Sleeve-seal fittings. 5. Grout.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SLEEVES

A. Cast-Iron Wall Pipes: Cast or fabricated of cast or ductile iron and equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop unless otherwise indicated.

B. Galvanized-Steel Wall Pipes: ASTM A 53, Schedule 40, with plain ends and welded steel collar; zinc coated.

C. Galvanized-Steel-Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, zinc coated, with plain ends.

D. Galvanized-Steel-Sheet Sleeves: 0.0239-inch minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded longitudinal joint.

2.2 STACK-SLEEVE FITTINGS


1. Jay R. Smith Mfg. Co. 2. Zurn Industries, LLC



B. Description: Manufactured, cast-iron sleeve with integral clamping flange. Include clamping ring, bolts, and nuts for membrane flashing.

1. Underdeck Clamp: Clamping ring with setscrews.

2.3 SLEEVE-SEAL SYSTEMS


1. Advance Products & Systems, Inc. 2. CALPICO, Inc. 3. GPT; an EnPro Industries company 4. Metraflex Company (The) 5. Proco Products, Inc.

B. Description: Modular sealing-element unit, designed for field assembly, for filling annular space between piping and sleeve.

1. Sealing Elements: EPDM-rubber interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe.

2. Pressure Plates: Stainless-steel. 3. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Stainless-steel of length required to secure pressure plates to

sealing elements.

2.4 SLEEVE-SEAL FITTINGS



B. Description: Manufactured plastic, sleeve-type, waterstop assembly made for imbedding in concrete slab or wall. Unit has plastic or rubber waterstop collar with center opening to match piping OD.

2.5 GROUT

A. Standard: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, post-hardening and volume-adjusting, dry, hydraulic-cement grout.

B. Characteristics: Non-shrink; recommended for interior and exterior applications.

C. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength.

D. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SLEEVE INSTALLATION

A. Install sleeves for piping passing through penetrations in floors, partitions, roofs, and walls.

B. For sleeves that will have sleeve-seal system installed, select sleeves of size large enough to provide 1-inch annular clear space between piping and concrete slabs and walls.

1. Sleeves are not required for core-drilled holes.

C. Install sleeves in concrete floors, concrete roof slabs, and concrete walls as new slabs and walls are constructed.

1. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces.

a. Exception: Extend sleeves installed in floors of mechanical equipment areas or other wet areas 2 inches above finished floor level.

2. Using grout, seal the space outside of sleeves in slabs and walls without sleeve-seal system.

D. Install sleeves for pipes passing through interior partitions.

1. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces. 2. Install sleeves that are large enough to provide ¼-inch annular clear space between sleeve

and pipe or pipe insulation. 3. Seal annular space between sleeve and piping or piping insulation; use joint sealants

appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Comply with requirements for sealants specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."

E. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials. Comply with requirements for firestopping specified in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping." Fire Seal shall be UL listed, approved, and tested fire and/or smoke sealing material installed in all fire and/or smoke rated floor and partitions in accordance with NFPA, local code and manufacturers recommendations.

3.2 STACK-SLEEVE-FITTING INSTALLATION

A. Install stack-sleeve fittings in new slabs as slabs are constructed.

1. Install fittings that are large enough to provide ¼-inch annular clear space between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation.

2. Secure flashing between clamping flanges for pipes penetrating floors with membrane waterproofing. Comply with requirements for flashing specified in Section 076200 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim."

3. Install section of cast-iron soil pipe to extend sleeve to 2 inches above finished floor level.

4. Extend cast-iron sleeve fittings below floor slab as required to secure clamping ring if ring is specified.



5. Using grout, seal the space around outside of stack-sleeve fittings.

B. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of floors at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials. Comply with requirements for firestopping specified in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping."

3.3 SLEEVE-SEAL-SYSTEM INSTALLATION

A. Install sleeve-seal systems in sleeves in exterior concrete walls and slabs-on-grade at service piping entries into building.

B. Select type, size, and number of sealing elements required for piping material and size and for sleeve ID or hole size. Position piping in center of sleeve. Center piping in penetration, assemble sleeve-seal system components, and install in annular space between piping and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make a watertight seal.

3.4 SLEEVE-SEAL-FITTING INSTALLATION

A. Install sleeve-seal fittings in new walls and slabs as they are constructed.

B. Assemble fitting components of length to be flush with both surfaces of concrete slabs and walls. Position waterstop flange to be centered in concrete slab or wall.

C. Secure nailing flanges to concrete forms.

D. Using grout, seal the space around outside of sleeve-seal fittings.

3.5 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL SCHEDULE

A. Use sleeves and sleeve seals for the following piping-penetration applications:

1. Exterior Concrete Walls above Grade:

a. Piping Smaller Than NPS 6: Galvanized-steel wall sleeves with sleeve-seal fittings.

b. Piping NPS 6 and Larger: Galvanized-steel wall sleeves with sleeve-seal fittings.

2. Exterior Concrete Walls below Grade:

a. Piping Smaller Than NPS 6: Galvanized-steel wall sleeves with sleeve-seal system.

1) Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between piping and sleeve for installing sleeve-seal system.

b. Piping NPS 6 and Larger: Galvanized-steel wall sleeves with sleeve-seal system.


3. Concrete Slabs-on-Grade:







4. Concrete Slabs above Grade:

a. Piping Smaller Than NPS 6: Galvanized-steel-pipe sleeves or sleeve-seal fittings. b. Piping NPS 6 and Larger: Galvanized-steel-pipe sleeves or sleeve-seal fittings.

5. Interior Partitions:

a. Piping Smaller Than NPS 6: Galvanized-steel-pipe sleeves. b. Piping NPS 6 and Larger: Galvanized-steel-sheet sleeves.


ESCUTCHEONS FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING


SECTION 210518 - ESCUTCHEONS FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Escutcheons. 2. Floor plates.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ESCUTCHEONS

A. One-Piece, Cast-Brass Type: With polished, chrome-plated, and rough-brass finish and setscrew fastener.

B. One-Piece, Deep-Pattern Type: Deep-drawn, box-shaped brass with chrome-plated finish and spring-clip fasteners.

C. One-Piece, Stamped-Steel Type: With chrome-plated finish and spring-clip fasteners.

D. Split-Casting Brass Type: With polished, chrome-plated, and rough-brass finish and with concealed hinge and setscrew.

E. Split-Plate, Stamped-Steel Type: With chrome-plated finish, concealed hinge, and spring-clip fasteners.

2.2 FLOOR PLATES

A. One-Piece Floor Plates: Cast-iron flange with holes for fasteners.

B. Split-Casting Floor Plates: Cast brass with concealed hinge.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and finished floors.

B. Install escutcheons with ID to closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of piping and with OD that completely covers opening.

1. Escutcheons for New Piping:

a. Piping with Fitting or Sleeve Protruding from Wall: One-piece, deep-pattern type. b. Chrome-Plated Piping: One-piece, cast-brass type with polished, chrome-plated

finish. c. Insulated Piping: One-piece, brass type with polished, chrome plated finish. d. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, cast-

brass type with polished, chrome-plated finish. e. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, cast-brass type

with polished, chrome-plated finish. f. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: One-piece, cast-brass type with rough-

brass finish. g. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, cast-brass type with rough-brass

finish.

2. Escutcheons for Existing Piping:

a. Chrome-Plated Piping: Split-casting brass type with polished, chrome-plated finish.

b. Insulated Piping: Split-plate, brass type with concealed hinge and polished, chrome-plated finish.

c. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: Split-casting brass type with polished, chrome-plated finish.

d. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: Split-casting brass type with polished, chrome-plated finish.

e. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: Split-casting brass type with rough-brass finish.

f. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: Split-casting brass type with rough-brass finish.

3. Provide for pipe penetrations where exposed to view, including both sides of wall separating tenant space from rest of building.

C. Install floor plates for piping penetrations of equipment-room floors.

D. Install floor plates with ID to closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of piping and with OD that completely covers opening.

1. New Piping: One-piece, floor-plate type. 2. Existing Piping: Split-casting, floor-plate type.




A. Replace broken and damaged escutcheons and floor plates using new materials.


GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR WATER-BASED FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING


SECTION 210523 - GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR WATER-BASED FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Iron butterfly valves with indicators. 2. Check valves. 3. Iron OS&Y gate valves. 4. Trim and drain valves.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene, Buna-N, or nitrile rubber.

B. NRS: Non-rising stem.

C. OS&Y: Outside screw and yoke.

D. SBR: Styrene-butadiene rubber.


A. Product Data: For each type of valve.


A. Prepare valves for shipping as follows:

1. Protect internal parts against rust and corrosion. 2. Protect threads, flange faces, and weld ends. 3. Set valves open to minimize exposure of functional surfaces.

B. Use the following precautions during storage:

1. Maintain valve end protection. 2. Store valves indoors and maintain at higher than ambient dew point temperature. If

outdoor storage is necessary, store valves off the ground in watertight enclosures.

C. Use sling to handle large valves; rig sling to avoid damage to exposed parts. Do not use operating handles or stems as lifting or rigging points.



D. Protect flanges and specialties from moisture and dirt.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVES

A. UL Listed: Valves shall be listed in UL's "Online Certifications Directory" under the headings listed below and shall bear UL mark:

1. Main Level: HAMV - Fire Main Equipment.

a. Level 1: HCBZ - Indicator Posts, Gate Valve. b. Level 1: HLOT - Valves.

1) Level 3: HLUG - Ball Valves, System Control. 2) Level 3: HLXS - Butterfly Valves. 3) Level 3: HMER - Check Valves. 4) Level 3: HMRZ - Gate Valves.

2. Main Level: VDGT - Sprinkler System & Water Spray System Devices.

a. Level 1: VQGU - Valves, Trim and Drain.

B. FM Global Approved: Valves shall be listed in its "Approval Guide," under the headings listed below:

1. Automated Sprinkler Systems:

a. Indicator posts. b. Valves.

1) Gate valves. 2) Check valves.

a) Single check valves.

3) Miscellaneous valves.

C. Source Limitations for Valves: Obtain valves for each valve type from single manufacturer.

D. ASME Compliance:

1. ASME B16.1 for flanges on iron valves. 2. ASME B1.20.1 for threads for threaded-end valves. 3. ASME B31.9 for building services piping valves.

E. AWWA Compliance: Comply with AWWA C606 for grooved-end connections.

F. NFPA Compliance: Comply with NFPA 24 for valves.



G. Valve Pressure Ratings: Not less than the minimum pressure rating indicated or higher as required by system pressures.

H. Valve Sizes: Same as upstream piping unless otherwise indicated.

I. Valve Actuator Types:

1. Worm-gear actuator with handwheel for quarter-turn valves, except for trim and drain valves.

2. Handwheel: For other than quarter-turn trim and drain valves. 3. Handlever: For quarter-turn trim and drain valves NPS 2 and smaller.

2.2 IRON BUTTERFLY VALVES WITH INDICATORS


1. Anvil International 2. NIBCO INC. 3. Tyco Fire Products LP 4. Victaulic Company 5. Zurn Industries, LLC

B. Description:

1. Standard: UL 1091 and FM Global standard for indicating valves, (butterfly or ball type), Class Number 112.

2. Minimum Pressure Rating: 175 psig. 3. Body Material: Cast or ductile iron with nylon, EPDM, epoxy, or polyamide coating. 4. Seat Material: EPDM. 5. Stem: Stainless-steel. 6. Disc: Ductile iron, and EPDM or SBR coated. 7. Actuator: Worm gear or traveling nut. 8. Supervisory Switch: Internal or external. 9. Body Design: Grooved-end connections.

2.3 CHECK VALVES


1. Anvil International 2. NIBCO INC. 3. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc. (The) 4. Tyco Fire Products LP 5. Victaulic Company

B. Description:

1. Standard: UL 312 and FM Global standard for swing check valves, Class Number 1210. 2. Minimum Pressure Rating: 175 psig.



3. Type: Single swing check. 4. Body Material: Cast iron, ductile iron, or bronze. 5. Clapper: Bronze, ductile iron, or stainless-steel with elastomeric seal. 6. Clapper Seat: Brass, bronze, or stainless-steel. 7. Hinge Shaft: Bronze or stainless-steel. 8. Hinge Spring: Stainless-steel. 9. End Connections: Flanged, grooved, or threaded.

2.4 IRON OS&Y GATE VALVES


1. Hammond Valve 2. NIBCO INC. 3. Victaulic Company 4. Watts; a Watts Water Technologies company 5. Zurn Industries, LLC

B. Description:

1. Standard: UL 262 and FM Global standard for fire-service water control valves (OS&Y- and NRS-type gate valves).

2. Minimum Pressure Rating: 175 psig. 3. Body and Bonnet Material: Cast or ductile iron. 4. Wedge: Cast or ductile iron, or bronze with elastomeric coating. 5. Wedge Seat: Cast or ductile iron, or bronze with elastomeric coating. 6. Stem: Brass or bronze. 7. Packing: Non-asbestos PTFE. 8. Supervisory Switch: External. 9. End Connections: Grooved.

2.5 TRIM AND DRAIN VALVES

A. Ball Valves:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one (1) of the following:

a. Apollo Valves; Conbraco Industries, Inc. b. Milwaukee Valve Company c. NIBCO INC. d. Potter Roemer LLC e. Tyco Fire Products LP

2. Description:

a. Pressure Rating: 175 psig. b. Body Design: Two-piece. c. Body Material: Forged brass or bronze. d. Port size: Full or standard.



e. Seats: PTFE. f. Stem: Bronze or stainless-steel. g. Ball: Chrome-plated brass. h. Actuator: Handlever. i. End Connections for Valves NPS 1 through NPS 2: Threaded ends. j. End Connections for Valves NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Grooved ends.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine valve interior for cleanliness, freedom from foreign matter, and corrosion. Remove special packing materials, such as blocks, used to prevent disc movement during shipping and handling.

B. Operate valves in positions from fully open to fully closed. Examine guides and seats made accessible by such operations.

C. Examine threads on valve and mating pipe for form and cleanliness.

D. Examine mating flange faces for conditions that might cause leakage. Check bolting for proper size, length, and material. Verify that gasket is of proper size, that its material composition is suitable for service, and that it is free from defects and damage.

E. Do not attempt to repair defective valves; replace with new valves.

3.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVE INSTALLATION

A. Install listed fire-protection shutoff valves supervised-open, located to control sources of water supply except from fire-department connections. Install permanent identification signs indicating portion of system controlled by each valve.

B. Install check valve in each water-supply connection. Install backflow preventers instead of check valves in potable-water-supply sources.

C. Install valves having threaded connections with unions at each piece of equipment arranged to allow easy access, service, maintenance, and equipment removal without system shutdown. Provide separate support where necessary.

D. Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above the pipe center.

E. Install valves in position to allow full stem movement.

F. Install listed fire-protection shutoff valves supervised-open, located to control sources of water supply except from fire-department connections.


VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT


SECTION 210548 - VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Elastomeric isolation pads. 2. Elastomeric isolation mounts. 3. Restrained elastomeric isolation mounts. 4. Pipe-riser resilient supports. 5. Resilient pipe guides. 6. Elastomeric hangers. 7. Snubbers. 8. Restraint channel bracings. 9. Seismic-restraint accessories. 10. Mechanical anchor bolts.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. IBC: International Building Code.

B. ICC-ES: ICC-Evaluation Service.

C. OSHPD: Office of Statewide Health Planning & Development (for the State of California).



1. Include rated load, rated deflection, and overload capacity for each vibration isolation device.

2. Illustrate and indicate style, material, strength, fastening provision, and finish for each type and size of vibration isolation device and seismic-restraint component required.

a. Tabulate types and sizes of seismic restraints, complete with report numbers and rated strength in tension and shear as evaluated by an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

b. Annotate to indicate application of each product submitted and compliance with requirements.

3. Interlocking Snubbers: Include ratings for horizontal, vertical, and combined loads.



B. Delegated-Design Submittal: For each vibration isolation and seismic-restraint device.

1. Include design calculations and details for selecting vibration isolators and seismic restraints complying with performance requirements, design criteria, and analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

2. Design Calculations: Calculate static and dynamic loading due to equipment weight and operation, due to seismic forces required to select vibration isolators, and due to seismic restraints.

3. Riser Supports: Include riser diagrams and calculations showing anticipated expansion and contraction at each support point, initial and final loads on building structure, spring deflection changes, and seismic loads. Include certification that riser system was examined for excessive stress and that none exists.

4. Seismic-Restraint Details:

a. Design Analysis: To support selection and arrangement of seismic restraints. Include calculations of combined tensile and shear loads.

b. Details: Indicate fabrication and arrangement. Detail attachments of restraints to the restrained items and to the structure. Show attachment locations, methods, and spacings. Identify components, list their strengths, and indicate directions and values of forces transmitted to the structure during seismic events. Indicate association with vibration isolation devices.

c. Coordinate seismic-restraint and vibration isolation details with wind-restraint details required for equipment mounted outdoors. Comply with requirements in other Sections for equipment mounted outdoors.

d. Preapproval and Evaluation Documentation: By an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, showing maximum ratings of restraint items and the basis for approval (tests or calculations).


A. Coordination Drawings: Show coordination of vibration isolation device installation and seismic bracing for fire-suppression piping and equipment with other systems and equipment in the vicinity, including other supports and restraints, if any.

B. Qualification Data: For professional engineer and testing agency.

C. Welding certificates.



A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, that is an NRTL as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7 and that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Comply with seismic-restraint requirements of the State of Connecticut Building Code unless requirements in this Section are more stringent.

C. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."



D. Seismic-restraint devices shall have horizontal and vertical load testing and analysis and shall bear anchorage preapproval OPA number from OSHPD, preapproval by ICC-ES, or preapproval by another agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, showing maximum seismic-restraint ratings. Ratings based on independent testing are preferred to ratings based on calculations. If preapproved ratings are unavailable, submittals based on independent testing are preferred. Calculations (including combining shear and tensile loads) to support seismic-restraint designs must be signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer licensed in the state where the project is located.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements," to design seismic and wind load control system in accordance with the State of Connecticut Building Code.

1. Seismic and Wind-Load Performance: Equipment shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions and high wind events in accordance with the State of Connecticut Building Code.

2.2 ELASTOMERIC ISOLATION PADS

A. Elastomeric Isolation Pads:


a. Ace Mountings Co., Inc. b. California Dynamics Corporation c. Isolation Technology, Inc. d. Kinetics Noise Control, Inc. e. Mason Industries, Inc. f. Novia; A Division of C&P g. Vibration Eliminator Co., Inc. h. Vibration Isolation i. Vibration Mountings & Controls, Inc.

2. Fabrication: Single or multiple layers of sufficient durometer stiffness for uniform loading over pad area.

3. Size: Factory or field cut to match requirements of supported equipment. 4. Pad Material: Oil and water resistant with elastomeric properties. 5. Load-bearing metal plates adhered to pads. 6. Sandwich-Core Material: Resilient and/or elastomeric.

a. Surface Pattern: Ribbed and/or waffle pattern. b. Infused nonwoven cotton or synthetic fibers.



2.3 ELASTOMERIC ISOLATION MOUNTS

A. Double-Deflection, Elastomeric Isolation Mounts:



2. Mounting Plates:

a. Top Plate: Encapsulated steel load transfer top plates, factory drilled and threaded. b. Baseplate: Encapsulated steel bottom plates with holes provided for anchoring to

support structure.

3. Elastomeric Material: Molded, oil-resistant rubber, neoprene, or other elastomeric material.

2.4 RESTRAINED ELASTOMERIC ISOLATION MOUNTS

A. Restrained Elastomeric Isolation Mounts:



2. Description: All-directional isolator with seismic restraints containing two (2) separate and opposing elastomeric elements that prevent central threaded element and attachment hardware from contacting the housing during normal operation.

a. Housing: Cast-ductile iron or welded steel. b. Elastomeric Material: Molded, oil-resistant rubber, neoprene, or other elastomeric

material.



2.5 PIPE-RISER RESILIENT SUPPORT

A. Description: All-directional, acoustical pipe anchor consisting of two (2) steel tubes separated by a minimum ½-inch-thick neoprene.

1. Vertical-Limit Stops: Steel and neoprene vertical-limit stops arranged to prevent vertical travel in both directions.

2. Maximum Load Per Support: 500 psig on isolation material providing equal isolation in all directions.

2.6 RESILIENT PIPE GUIDES

A. Description: Telescopic arrangement of two (2) steel tubes or post-and-sleeve arrangement separated by a minimum ½-inch-thick neoprene.

1. Factory-Set Height Guide with Shear Pin: Shear pin shall be removable and reinsertable to allow for selection of pipe movement. Guides shall be capable of motion to meet location requirements.

2.7 ELASTOMERIC HANGERS

A. Elastomeric Mount in a Steel Frame with Upper and Lower Steel Hanger Rods:


a. Ace Mountings Co., Inc. b. California Dynamics Corporation c. Isolation Technology, Inc. d. Kinetics Noise Control, Inc. e. Mason Industries, Inc. f. Vibration Eliminator Co., Inc. g. Vibration Mountings & Controls, Inc.

2. Frame: Steel, fabricated with a connection for an upper threaded hanger rod and an opening on the underside to allow for a maximum of 30 degrees of angular lower hanger-rod misalignment without binding or reducing isolation efficiency.

3. Dampening Element: Molded, oil-resistant rubber, neoprene, or other elastomeric material with a projecting bushing for the underside opening preventing steel to steel contact.

2.8 SNUBBERS


1. Kinetics Noise Control, Inc. 2. Mason Industries, Inc. 3. Vibration Mountings & Controls, Inc.



B. Description: Factory fabricated using welded structural-steel shapes and plates, anchor bolts, and replaceable resilient isolation washers and bushings.

1. Anchor bolts for attaching to concrete shall be seismic-rated, drill-in, and stud-wedge or female-wedge type.

2. Resilient Isolation Washers and Bushings: Oil- and water-resistant neoprene. 3. Maximum ¼-inch air gap, and minimum ¼-inch-thick resilient cushion.

2.9 RESTRAINT CHANNEL BRACINGS


1. B-line, an Eaton business 2. Hilti, Inc. 3. Mason Industries, Inc. 4. Unistrut; Part of Atkore International

B. Description: MFMA-4, shop- or field-fabricated bracing assembly made of slotted steel channels with accessories for attachment to braced component at one (1) end and to building structure at the other end and other matching components and with corrosion-resistant coating; rated in tension, compression, and torsion forces.

2.10 SEISMIC-RESTRAINT ACCESSORIES


1. B-line, an Eaton business 2. Kinetics Noise Control, Inc. 3. Mason Industries, Inc. 4. TOLCO 5. Vibration & Seismic Technologies, LLC

B. Hanger-Rod Stiffener: Steel tube or steel slotted-support-system sleeve with internally bolted connections to hanger rod.

C. Hinged and Swivel Brace Attachments: Multifunctional steel connectors for attaching hangers to rigid channel bracings.

D. Bushings for Floor-Mounted Equipment Anchor Bolts: Neoprene bushings designed for rigid equipment mountings and matched to type and size of anchor bolts and studs.

E. Bushing Assemblies for Wall-Mounted Equipment Anchorage: Assemblies of neoprene elements and steel sleeves designed for rigid equipment mountings and matched to type and size of attachment devices used.

F. Resilient Isolation Washers and Bushings: One-piece, molded, oil- and water-resistant neoprene, with a flat washer face.



2.11 MECHANICAL ANCHOR BOLTS


1. B-line, an Eaton business 2. Hilti, Inc. 3. Kinetics Noise Control, Inc. 4. Mason Industries, Inc.

B. Mechanical Anchor Bolts: Drilled-in and stud-wedge or female-wedge type in zinc-coated steel for interior applications and stainless-steel for exterior applications. Select anchor bolts with strength required for anchor and as tested according to ASTM E 488.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and equipment to receive vibration isolation and seismic-control devices for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Examine roughing-in of reinforcement and cast-in-place anchors to verify actual locations before installation.


3.2 APPLICATIONS

A. Multiple Pipe Supports: Secure pipes to trapeze member with clamps approved for application by an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Hanger-Rod Stiffeners: Install hanger-rod stiffeners where indicated or scheduled on Drawings to receive them and where required to prevent buckling of hanger rods due to seismic forces.

C. Strength of Support and Seismic-Restraint Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength is adequate to carry present and future static and seismic loads within specified loading limits.

3.3 VIBRATION CONTROL AND SEISMIC-RESTRAINT DEVICE INSTALLATION

A. Coordinate the location of embedded connection hardware with supported equipment attachment and mounting points and with requirements for concrete reinforcement and formwork specified in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete."

B. Installation of vibration isolators must not cause any change of position of equipment, piping, or ductwork resulting in stresses or misalignment.

C. Equipment Restraints:



1. Install seismic snubbers on fire-suppression equipment mounted on vibration isolators. Locate snubbers as close as possible to vibration isolators and bolt to equipment base and supporting structure.

2. Install resilient bolt isolation washers on equipment anchor bolts where clearance between anchor and adjacent surface exceeds 0.125-inch.

3. Install seismic-restraint devices using methods approved by an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that provides required submittals for component.

D. Piping Restraints:

1. Comply with requirements in MSS SP-127. 2. Space lateral supports a maximum of 40 feet o.c., and longitudinal supports a maximum

of 80 feet o.c. 3. Brace a change of direction longer than 12 feet.

E. Install seismic-restraint devices using methods approved by an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that provides required submittals for component.

F. Install bushing assemblies for anchor bolts for floor-mounted equipment, arranged to provide resilient media between anchor bolt and mounting hole in concrete base.

G. Install bushing assemblies for mounting bolts for wall-mounted equipment, arranged to provide resilient media where equipment or equipment-mounting channels are attached to wall.

H. Attachment to Structure: If specific attachment is not indicated, anchor bracing to structure at flanges of beams, at upper truss chords of bar joists, or at concrete members.

I. Drilled-in Anchors:

1. Identify position of reinforcing steel and other embedded items prior to drilling holes for anchors. Do not damage existing reinforcing or embedded items during coring or drilling. Notify the Structural Engineer if reinforcing steel or other embedded items are encountered during drilling. Locate and avoid prestressed tendons, electrical and telecommunications conduit, and gas lines.

2. Do not drill holes in concrete or masonry until concrete, mortar, or grout has achieved full design strength.

3. Wedge Anchors: Protect threads from damage during anchor installation. Heavy-duty sleeve anchors shall be installed with sleeve fully engaged in the structural element to which anchor is to be fastened.

4. Set anchors to manufacturer's recommended torque, using a torque wrench. 5. Install zinc-coated steel anchors for interior and stainless-steel anchors for exterior

applications.

3.4 ACCOMMODATION OF DIFFERENTIAL SEISMIC MOTION

A. Install flexible connections in piping where they cross seismic joints, where adjacent sections or branches are supported by different structural elements, and where the connections terminate with connection to equipment that is anchored to a different structural element from the one supporting the connections as they approach equipment. Comply with requirements in Section 211313 "Wet-Pipe Sprinkler Systems" and Section 212200 "Clean-Agent Fire- Extinguishing Systems" for piping flexible connections.




A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

B. Tests and Inspections:

1. Provide evidence of recent calibration of test equipment by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Schedule test with Owner, through Architect, before connecting anchorage device to restrained component (unless postconnection testing has been approved), and with at least seven (7) days' advance notice.

3. Obtain Architect's approval before transmitting test loads to structure. Provide temporary load-spreading members.

4. Test at least four (4) of each type and size of installed anchors and fasteners selected by Architect.

5. Test to ninety percent (90%) of rated proof load of device. 6. Measure isolator restraint clearance. 7. Measure isolator deflection. 8. Verify snubber minimum clearances.

C. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.

D. Prepare test and inspection reports.


IDENTIFICATION FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT


SECTION 210553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Equipment labels. 2. Warning signs and labels. 3. Pipe labels. 4. Valve tags. 5. Warning tags.



B. Samples: For color, letter style, and graphic representation required for each identification material and device.

C. Equipment-Label Schedule: Include a listing of all equipment to be labeled and the proposed content for each label.

D. Valve Schedules: Valve numbering scheme.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 EQUIPMENT LABELS

A. Metal Labels for Equipment:


a. Brady Corporation b. Brimar Industries, Inc. c. Carlton Industries, LP d. Champion America e. Craftmark Pipe Markers f. Kolbi Pipe Marker Co. g. LEM Products Inc. h. Marking Services, Inc. i. Seton Identification Products



2. Material and Thickness: Brass, 0.032-inch-thick, with predrilled holes for attachment hardware.

3. Letter Color: Red. 4. Background Color: White. 5. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than

2½-by-¾-inch. 6. Minimum Letter Size: ¼-inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches,

½-inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering.

7. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets or self-tapping screws. 8. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.

B. Plastic Labels for Equipment:


a. Brady Corporation b. Brimar Industries, Inc. c. Carlton Industries, LP d. Champion America e. Craftmark Pipe Markers f. Kolbi Pipe Marker Co. g. LEM Products Inc. h. Marking Services, Inc. i. Seton Identification Products

2. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving, 1/8-inch-thick, with predrilled holes for attachment hardware.

3. Letter Color: White. 4. Background Color: Red. 5. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F. 6. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than


½-inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering.


C. Label Content: Include equipment's Drawing designation or unique equipment number, Drawing numbers where equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules), and the Specification Section number and title where equipment is specified.

D. Equipment-Label Schedule: For each item of equipment to be labeled, on 8½-by-11-inch bond paper. Tabulate equipment identification number and identify Drawing numbers where equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules) and the Specification Section number and title where equipment is specified. Equipment schedule shall be included in operation and maintenance data.



2.2 WARNING SIGNS AND LABELS


1. Brady Corporation 2. Brimar Industries, Inc. 3. Carlton Industries, LP 4. Champion America 5. Craftmark Pipe Markers 6. LEM Products Inc. 7. Marking Sevices Inc. 8. National Marker Company 9. Seton Identification Products 10. Stranco, Inc.

B. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving, 1/8-inch-thick, with predrilled holes for attachment hardware.

C. Letter Color: White.

D. Background Color: Red.

E. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F.

F. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2½-by-¾-inch.

G. Minimum Letter Size: ¼-inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches, ½-inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering.

H. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets or self-tapping screws.

I. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.

J. Label Content: Include caution and warning information, plus emergency notification instructions.

2.3 PIPE LABELS


1. Actioncraft Products, Inc.; a division of Industrial Test Equipment Co., Inc. 2. Brady Corporation 3. Brimar Industries, Inc. 4. Carlton Industries, LP 5. Champion America 6. Craftmark Pipe Markers



7. Kolbi Pipe Marker Co. 8. LEM Products Inc. 9. Marking Sevices Inc. 10. Seton Identification Products

B. General Requirements for Manufactured Pipe Labels: Preprinted, color-coded, with lettering indicating service and showing flow direction according to ASME A13.1.

C. Pretensioned Pipe Labels: Precoiled, semirigid plastic formed to cover full circumference of pipe and to attach to pipe without fasteners or adhesive.

D. Self-adhesive Pipe Labels: Printed plastic with contact-type, permanent-adhesive backing.

E. Pipe-Label Contents: Include identification of piping service using same designations or abbreviations as used on Drawings, pipe size, and an arrow indicating flow direction.

1. Flow-Direction Arrows: Integral with piping-system service lettering to accommodate both directions or as separate unit on each pipe label to indicate flow direction.

2. Lettering Size: Size letters according to ASME A13.1 for piping, at least ½-inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances.

F. Pipe-Label Colors:

1. Background Color: Safety Red. 2. Letter Color: White.

2.4 VALVE TAGS


1. Actioncraft Products, Inc.; a division of Industrial Test Equipment Co., Inc. 2. Brady Corporation 3. Brimar Industries, Inc. 4. Carlton Industries, LP 5. Champion America 6. Craftmark Pipe Markers 7. Kolbi Pipe Marker Co. 8. LEM Products Inc. 9. Marking Sevices Inc. 10. Seton Identification Products

B. Description: Stamped or engraved with ¼-inch letters for piping-system abbreviation and ½-inch numbers.

1. Tag Material: Brass, 0.032-inch-thick, with predrilled holes for attachment hardware. 2. Fasteners: Brass wire-link chain or S-hook. 3. Valve-Tag Color: Safety Red. 4. Letter Color: White.



C. Valve Schedules: For each piping system, on 8½-by-11-inch bond paper. Tabulate valve number, piping system, system abbreviation (as shown on valve tag), location of valve (room or space), normal-operating position (open, closed, or modulating), and variations for identification. Mark valves for emergency shutoff and similar special uses.

1. Valve-tag schedule shall be included in operation and maintenance data.

2.5 WARNING TAGS


1. Brady Corporation 2. Brimar Industries, Inc. 3. Carlton Industries, LP 4. Champion America 5. Craftmark Pipe Markers 6. Kolbi Pipe Marker Co. 7. LEM Products Inc. 8. Marking Sevices Inc. 9. Seton Identification Products

B. Description: Preprinted or partially preprinted, accident-prevention tags, of plasticized card stock with matte finish suitable for writing.

1. Size: 3 by 5¼ inches minimum. 2. Fasteners: Reinforced grommet and wire or string. 3. Nomenclature: Large-size primary caption such as "DANGER," "CAUTION," or "DO

NOT OPERATE." 4. Color: Safety Yellow background with black lettering.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Clean piping and equipment surfaces of incompatible primers, paints, and encapsulants, as well as dirt, oil, grease, release agents, and other substances that could impair bond of identification devices.

3.2 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

A. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of surfaces where devices are to be installed.

B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with locations of access panels and doors.

C. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.

3.3 EQUIPMENT LABEL INSTALLATION

A. Install or permanently fasten labels on each major item of mechanical equipment.



B. Locate equipment labels where accessible and visible.

3.4 PIPE LABEL INSTALLATION

A. Piping: Painting of piping is specified in Section 099123 "Interior Painting."

B. Pipe-Label Locations: Locate pipe labels where piping is exposed or above accessible ceilings in finished spaces; machine rooms; accessible maintenance spaces such as shafts, tunnels, and plenums; and exterior exposed locations as follows:

1. Near each valve and control device. 2. Near each branch connection excluding short takeoffs. Where flow pattern is not obvious,

mark each pipe at branch. 3. Near penetrations and on both sides of through walls, floors, ceilings, and inaccessible

enclosures. 4. At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit a view of concealed

piping. 5. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination. 6. Spaced at maximum intervals of 50 feet along each run. Reduce intervals to 25 feet in

areas of congested piping and equipment. 7. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings. Omit intermediately spaced labels.

C. Directional Flow Arrows: Arrows shall be used to indicate direction of flow in pipes including pipes where flow is allowed in both directions.

3.5 VALVE-TAG INSTALLATION

A. Install tags on valves and control devices in fire-suppression piping systems. List tagged valves in a valve-tag schedule.

B. Valve-Tag Application Schedule: Tag valves according to size, shape, and with captions similar to those indicated in "Valve-Tag Size and Shape" Subparagraph below:

1. Valve-Tag Size and Shape:

a. Fire-Suppression Standpipe: 2 inches, round. b. Wet-Pipe Sprinkler System: 2 inches, round. c. Dry-Pipe Sprinkler System: 2 inches, round. d. Foam-Water System: 2 inches, round. e. Clean-Agent Fire-Extinguishing System: 2 inches, round.

3.6 WARNING-TAG INSTALLATION

A. Write required message on, and attach warning tags to, equipment and other items where required.


WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS


SECTION 211313 - WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Pipes, fittings, and specialties. 2. Specialty valves. 3. Sprinklers. 4. Alarm devices. 5. Pressure gages.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Standard-Pressure Sprinkler Piping: Wet-pipe sprinkler system piping designed to operate at working pressure of 175-psig maximum.



1. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories.

B. Shop Drawings: For wet-pipe sprinkler systems.

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details. 2. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.

C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For wet-pipe sprinkler systems indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.


A. Coordination Drawings: Sprinkler systems, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved:

1. Domestic water piping. 2. Drainage and vent piping. 3. HVAC equipment, piping, and ductwork. 4. Electrical panels, equipment, devices, conduit, and wiring. 5. Items penetrating finished ceiling include the following:



a. Lighting fixtures. b. Air outlets and inlets.

B. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer and professional engineer.

C. Approved Sprinkler Piping Drawings: Working plans, prepared according to NFPA 13, that have been approved by authorities having jurisdiction, including hydraulic calculations if applicable.

D. Fire-hydrant flow test report.

E. Field Test Reports and Certificates: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance requirements and as described in NFPA 13. Include "Contractor's Material and Test Certificate for Aboveground Piping."

F. Field quality-control reports.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For wet-pipe sprinkler systems and specialties to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.



1. Sprinkler Cabinet and Contents: Verify spare head cabinet currently exists in Sprinkler Room, suitable for storing at least six (6) spare heads. Verify quantities and styles of spare sprinklers and sprinkler wrenches stored therein: There must be six (6) sprinklers, representing all sprinkler types encountered in the building, with corresponding sprinkler wrench for each sprinkler type. If deficiencies in quantity and or type are found, provide sprinkler and or wrench stock to conform to the above requirements.


A. Installer Qualifications:

1. Installer's responsibilities include designing, fabricating, and installing sprinkler systems and providing professional engineering services needed to assume engineering responsibility. Base calculations on results of fire-hydrant flow test.

a. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of working plans, calculations, and field test reports by a qualified professional engineer.


A. Interruption of Existing Sprinkler Service: Do not interrupt sprinkler service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary sprinkler service according to requirements indicated:



1. Notify Owner and Construction Manager no fewer than two (2) days in advance of proposed interruption of sprinkler service.

2. Do not proceed with interruption of sprinkler service without Owner's written permission.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Sprinkler system equipment, specialties, accessories, installation, and testing shall comply with the following:

1. NFPA 13.

B. Standard-Pressure Piping System Component: Listed for 175-psig minimum working pressure.

C. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements," to design wet-pipe sprinkler systems.

1. Available information at building wet-pipe sprinkler riser:

a. Date of Original Building Shop Drawing/Calculation: June 7, 2011. b. Original Building Sprinkler System Installer: Sheehy Plumbing. c. Static Pressure at Alarm Check Valve (7/2020): 100 psi.

2. Sprinkler system revisions shall be approved by authority having jurisdiction (AHJ) and Building Owner. Confirm prior to Bid if AHJ and/or Building Owner will require shop drawings and calculations for the system revisions, and if so, include all necessary field verifications, flow tests, shop drawing generation and hydraulic calculations in the Bid.

3. Sprinkler Occupancy Hazard Classifications:

1) Building Service Areas: Ordinary Hazard, Group 1. 2) Electrical Equipment Rooms: Ordinary Hazard, Group 1. 3) General Storage Areas: Ordinary Hazard, Group 1. 4) Mechanical Equipment Rooms: Ordinary Hazard, Group 1. 5) Offices, Dispatch, Toilet Rooms and Public Areas: Light Hazard. 6) Server Room: To be protected by clean-agent fire extinguishing system.

Refer to Section 212200, “Clean-Agent Fire-Extinguishing Systems”.

4. Minimum Density for Automatic-Sprinkler Piping Design:

a. Light-Hazard Occupancy: 0.10 gpm over 1500-sq. ft. area. b. Ordinary-Hazard, Group 1 Occupancy: 0.15 gpm over 1500-sq. ft. area. c. Ordinary-Hazard, Group 2 Occupancy: 0.20 gpm over 1500-sq. ft. area.

5. Maximum Protection Area per Sprinkler: According to UL listing. 6. Maximum Protection Area per Sprinkler:

a. Light Hazard, Smooth Ceilings: 225 sq. ft. maximum, reduced per NFPA 13 for ceiling features and obstructions encountered.

b. Storage Areas: 130 sq. ft.



c. Mechanical Equipment Rooms: 130 sq. ft. d. Electrical Equipment Rooms: 130 sq. ft. e. Other Areas: According to NFPA 13 recommendations unless otherwise indicated.

D. Seismic Performance: Sprinkler piping shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to NFPA 13 and the State of Connecticut Building Code.

2.2 STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Standard-Weight, Galvanized- and Black-Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E, Grade B. Pipe ends may be factory or field formed to match joining method.

B. Schedule 40, Galvanized and Black-Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53; Schedule 40 in 2-inch and smaller.

C. Schedule 10, Black-Steel Pipe: ASTM A 135 or ASTM A 795, Schedule 10 in NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 5, plain end.

D. Galvanized- and Black-Steel Pipe Nipples: ASTM A 733, made of ASTM A 53, standard-weight, seamless steel pipe with threaded ends.

E. Galvanized- and Uncoated-Steel Couplings: ASTM A 865, threaded.

F. Galvanized and Uncoated, Gray-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.4, Class 125, standard pattern.

G. Galvanized and Uncoated, Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.3, Class 150, standard pattern.

H. Grooved-Joint, Steel-Pipe Appurtenances:


a. Anvil International b. Tyco Fire Products LP c. Victaulic Company

2. Pressure Rating: 175-psig minimum. 3. Painted Grooved-End Fittings for Steel Piping: ASTM A 47, malleable-iron casting or

ASTM A 536, ductile-iron casting, with dimensions matching steel pipe. 4. Grooved-End-Pipe Couplings for Steel Piping: AWWA C606 and UL 213 rigid pattern,

unless otherwise indicated, for steel-pipe dimensions. Include ferrous housing sections, EPDM-rubber gasket, and bolts and nuts.

2.3 SPRINKLER PIPING SPECIALTIES

A. Branch Outlet Fittings:


a. Anvil International



b. Tyco Fire Products LP c. Victaulic Company

2. Standard: UL 213. 3. Pressure Rating: 175-psig minimum. 4. Body Material: Ductile-iron housing with EPDM seals and bolts and nuts. 5. Type: Mechanical-tee and -cross fittings. 6. Configurations: Snap-on and strapless, ductile-iron housing with branch outlets. 7. Size: Of dimension to fit onto sprinkler main and with outlet connections as required to

match connected branch piping. 8. Branch Outlets: Grooved, plain-end pipe, or threaded.

B. Flow Detection and Test Assemblies:


a. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc. (The) b. Tyco Fire Products LP c. Victaulic Company

2. Standard: UL's "Fire Protection Equipment Directory" or FM Global's "Approval Guide." 3. Pressure Rating: 175-psig minimum. 4. Body Material: Cast- or ductile-iron housing with orifice, sight glass, and integral test

valve. 5. Size: Same as connected piping. 6. Inlet and Outlet: Threaded or grooved.

C. Flexible Sprinkler Hose Fittings:


a. FlexHead Industries, Inc. b. Gateway Tubing, Inc. c. Victaulic Company

2. Standard: UL 1474. 3. Type: Flexible hose for connection to sprinkler, and with bracket for connection to

ceiling grid. 4. Pressure Rating: 175-psig minimum. 5. Size: Same as connected piping, for sprinkler. 6. Maximum Length: 6 feet. 7. Include flexible sprinkler hose pressure drop in hydraulic calculations.

2.4 SPRINKLERS


1. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc. (The)



2. Tyco Fire Products LP 3. Victaulic Company

B. Listed in UL's "Fire Protection Equipment Directory" or FM Global's "Approval Guide."

C. Pressure Rating for Automatic Sprinklers: 175-psig minimum.

D. Automatic Sprinklers with Heat-Responsive Element:

1. Nonresidential Applications: UL 199. 2. Characteristics: Nominal ½-inch orifice with Discharge Coefficient K of 5.6, and for

"Ordinary" temperature classification rating unless otherwise indicated or required by application.

E. Sprinkler Finishes: Chrome plated, bronze, and painted.

F. Special Coatings: Wax.

G. Sprinkler Escutcheons: Materials, types, and finishes for the following sprinkler mounting applications. Escutcheons for concealed, flush, and recessed-type sprinklers are specified with sprinklers.

1. Ceiling Mounting: Chrome-plated steel, one-piece, flat. 2. Sidewall Mounting: Chrome-plated steel, one-piece, flat.

H. Sprinkler Guards:


a. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc. (The) b. Tyco Fire Products LP c. Victaulic Company

2. Standard: UL 199. 3. Type: Wire cage with fastening device for attaching to sprinkler.

2.5 ALARM DEVICES

A. Alarm-device types shall match piping and equipment connections.

B. Water-Flow Indicators:


a. Potter Electric Signal Company, LLC b. System Sensor c. Watts; a Watts Water Technologies company

2. Standard: UL 346. 3. Water-Flow Detector: Electrically supervised.



4. Components: Two (2) single-pole, double-throw circuit switches for isolated alarm and auxiliary contacts, 7 A, 125-V ac and 0.25 A, 24-V dc; complete with factory-set, field-adjustable retard element to prevent false signals and tamperproof cover that sends signal if removed.

5. Type: Paddle operated. 6. Pressure Rating: 250 psig. 7. Design Installation: Horizontal or vertical.

C. Valve Supervisory Switches:


a. Fire-Lite Alarms, Inc.; a Honeywell International company b. Kennedy Valve Company; a division of McWane, Inc. c. Potter Electric Signal Company, LLC d. System Sensor

2. Standard: UL 346. 3. Type: Electrically supervised. 4. Components: Single-pole, double-throw switch with normally closed contacts. 5. Design: Signals that controlled valve is in other than fully open position. 6. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in

NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

2.6 PRESSURE GAGES


1. AGF Manufacturing Inc. 2. AMETEK, Inc. 3. Ashcroft Inc. 4. Brecco Corporation 5. WIKA Instrument Corporation

B. Standard: UL 393.

C. Dial Size: 3½- to 4½-inch diameter.

D. Pressure Gage Range: 0- to 250-psig minimum.

E. Label: Include "WATER" label on dial face.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. AHJ and or Building Owner-required shop drawings and hydraulic calculations:



1. Arrange and pay for a new fire-hydrant flow test according to NFPA 13 and NFPA 291. Use results for system design calculations required in "Quality Assurance" Article. Report test results promptly and in writing.

2. Perform all field verifications required to generate accurate sprinkler shop drawings. 3. Generate accurate sprinkler shop drawings and perform hydraulic calculations based on

same.

a) Shop drawings and hydraulic calculations shall be fully coordinated, with remote calculation areas and nodes accurately cross-referenced on both documents.

4. Submit shop drawings and calculations to the Engineer and to the AHJ for approval. Do not proceed with installation before approved shop drawings and calculations have been returned from Engineer and AHJ.

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Coordinate building sprinkler system shutdowns with Building Owner and Construction Manager. Provide fire watch if required by Owner and or Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ), at no additional cost.

B. If AHJ allows, temporary isolation valves may be installed to isolate project area sprinkler systems to allow remainder of building sprinkler systems to remain in service. Upon completion of work, remove temporary isolation valves.

3.3 PIPING INSTALLATION

A. Locations and Arrangements: Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping. Install piping as indicated on approved working plans.

1. Deviations from approved working plans for piping require written approval from authorities having jurisdiction. File written approval with Architect before deviating from approved working plans.

2. Coordinate layout and installation of sprinklers with other construction that penetrates ceilings, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, and partition assemblies.

B. Piping Standard: Comply with NFPA 13 requirements for installation of sprinkler piping.

C. Install seismic restraints on piping per requirements of the Connecticut State Building Code and NFPA 13. Refer to Section 210548 “Vibration and Seismic Controls for Fire-Suppression Piping and Equipment”.

D. Use listed fittings to make changes in direction, branch takeoffs from mains, and reductions in pipe sizes.

E. Install unions adjacent to each valve in pipes NPS 2 and smaller.

F. Install flanges, flange adapters, or couplings for grooved-end piping on valves, apparatus, and equipment having NPS 2-1/2 and larger end connections.

G. Install sprinkler piping with drain provisions for complete system drainage.



H. Install alarm devices in piping systems, where indicated.

I. Install hangers and supports for sprinkler system piping according to NFPA 13. Comply with requirements for hanger materials in NFPA 13. Also refer to Section 210548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Fire-Suppression Piping and Equipment."

J. Install pressure gages on riser or feed main, at each sprinkler test connection, and at top of each standpipe. Include pressure gages with connection not less than NPS 1/4 and with soft-metal seated globe valve, arranged for draining pipe between gage and valve. Install gages to permit removal and install where they are not subject to freezing.

K. Fill sprinkler system piping with water.

L. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for sleeves specified in Section 210517 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Fire-Suppression Piping."

M. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs. Comply with requirements for sleeve seals specified in Section 210517 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Fire-Suppression Piping."

N. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for escutcheons specified in Section 210518 "Escutcheons for Fire-Suppression Piping."

3.4 JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Install couplings, flanges, flanged fittings, unions, nipples, and transition and special fittings that have finish and pressure ratings same as or higher than system's pressure rating for aboveground applications unless otherwise indicated.

B. Install unions adjacent to each valve in pipes NPS 2 and smaller.

C. Install flanges, flange adapters, or couplings for grooved-end piping on valves, apparatus, and equipment having NPS 2-1/2 and larger end connections.

D. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.

E. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipes, tubes, and fittings before assembly.

F. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material in size, type, and thickness suitable for water service. Join flanges with gasket and bolts according to ASME B31.9.

G. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:

1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads. 2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or

damaged.



H. Steel-Piping, Roll-Grooved Joints: Roll rounded-edge groove in end of pipe according to AWWA C606. Assemble coupling with housing, gasket, lubricant, and bolts. Join steel pipe and grooved-end fittings according to AWWA C606 for steel-pipe grooved joints.

I. Dissimilar-Material Piping Joints: Make joints using adapters compatible with materials of both piping systems.

J. Repair damage to galvanized finish with CRC Zinc-It (ninety-three percent (93%) zinc) cold galvanize coating or approved equal.

3.5 VALVE AND SPECIALTIES INSTALLATION

A. Install listed fire-protection valves, trim and drain valves, controls, and specialties according to NFPA 13 and authorities having jurisdiction.

3.6 SPRINKLER INSTALLATION

A. Unless specifically noted or dimensioned otherwise, install sprinklers in suspended ceilings in center of acoustical ceiling panels; quarter-points of 2 x 4 ceiling panels are also allowed, refer to details.

B. Install sprinklers into flexible, sprinkler hose fittings, and install hose into bracket on ceiling grid.

3.7 IDENTIFICATION

A. Install labeling and pipe markers on equipment and piping according to requirements in NFPA 13.

B. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."


A. Perform the following tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized service representative:

1. Leak Test: After installation, charge systems and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist.

2. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

3. Flush, test, and inspect sprinkler systems according to NFPA 13, "Systems Acceptance" Chapter.

4. Energize circuits to electrical equipment and devices. 5. Coordinate with fire-alarm tests. Operate as required.

B. Sprinkler piping system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.




3.9 CLEANING

A. Clean dirt and debris from sprinklers.

B. Only sprinklers with their original factory finish are acceptable. Remove and replace any sprinklers that are painted or have any other finish than their original factory finish.

3.10 PIPING SCHEDULE

A. Piping which is normally dry (test piping downstream of inspector’s test valve, drain piping, etc.): Galvanized, standard-weight steel pipe with threaded or grooved joints. Repair damage to galvanized finish with CRC Zinc-It (ninety-three percent (93%) zinc) cold galvanize coating or approved equal.

B. Sprinkler specialty fittings may be used, downstream of control valves, instead of specified fittings.

C. Standard-pressure, wet-pipe sprinkler system, NPS 2 and smaller, shall be one (1) of the following:

1. Standard-weight, black-steel pipe with threaded ends; uncoated, gray-iron threaded fittings; and threaded joints.

2. Standard-weight, galvanized-steel pipe with threaded ends; galvanized, gray-iron threaded fittings; and threaded joints.

D. Standard-pressure, wet-pipe sprinkler system, NPS 2-1/2 and larger, shall be one (1) of the following:

1. Standard-weight, black-steel pipe with threaded ends; uncoated, gray-iron threaded fittings; and threaded joints.

2. Standard-weight, galvanized-steel pipe with threaded ends; galvanized, gray-iron threaded fittings; and threaded joints.

3. Standard-weight, black-steel pipe with roll-grooved ends; uncoated, grooved-end fittings for steel piping; grooved-end-pipe couplings for steel piping; and grooved joints.

4. Schedule 10 black-steel pipe with roll-grooved ends; uncoated, grooved-end fittings for steel piping; grooved-end-pipe couplings for steel piping; and grooved joints.

3.11 SPRINKLER SCHEDULE

A. Use sprinkler types in subparagraphs below for the following applications:

1. Rooms without Ceilings: Upright sprinklers. 2. Rooms with Suspended Ceilings: Concealed-type pendent sprinklers. 3. Wall Mounting: Sidewall sprinklers. 4. Spaces Subject to Freezing: Upright, pendent, dry sprinklers; and sidewall, dry sprinklers

as indicated.

B. Provide sprinkler types in subparagraphs below with finishes indicated.

1. Concealed Sprinklers: Rough brass, with factory-painted white cover plate.



2. Upright, Pendent and Sidewall Sprinklers: Chrome plated in finished spaces exposed to view; rough bronze in unfinished spaces not exposed to view; wax coated where exposed to acids, chemicals, or other corrosive fumes.


CLEAN-AGENT FIRE-EXTINGUISHING SYSTEMS


SECTION 212200 - CLEAN-AGENT FIRE-EXTINGUISHING SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Piping and piping specialties. 2. Extinguishing-agent containers. 3. Extinguishing agent. 4. Detection and alarm devices. 5. Control and alarm panels. 6. Accessories. 7. Connection devices for and wiring between system components. 8. Connection devices for power and integration into building's fire-alarm system.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. ATS: Acceptance Testing Specifications.

B. EPO: Emergency Power Off.



B. Shop Drawings: For clean-agent fire-extinguishing system signed and sealed by a qualified NICET Level IV and State of CT Automatic Layout Design engineer.

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 2. Include design calculations. 3. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required

clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.

4. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.

C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For clean-agent fire-extinguishing system signed and sealed by a State of Connecticut Layout Design Engineer.

1. Indicate compliance with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data.

2. Include design calculations for weight, volume, and concentration of extinguishing agent required for each hazard area.



3. Indicate the Following on Ceiling Plans:

a. Extinguishing-agent containers, piping and discharge nozzles, detectors, and accessories.

b. Method of supporting piping.

D. Permit Approved Drawings: Working plans, prepared according to NFPA 2001, that have been approved by authorities having jurisdiction. Include design calculations.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For special agent system to include in emergency, operation, sequence of events and maintenance manuals.


A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

B. FM Global Compliance: Provide components that are FM Approved and that are listed in FM Global's "Approval Guide."

C. UL Compliance: Provide equipment listed in UL's "Fire Protection Equipment Directory."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CLEAN-AGENT SYSTEMS

A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide clean-agent fire-extinguishing system by one (1) of the following:

1. Kidde Fire Systems 2. Ansul Fire Systems 3. Janus Fire Systems

B. Clean-agent fire-extinguishing system shall be an engineered system for total flooding of the ECC Server Room hazard area.

C. Delegated Design: Design clean-agent fire-extinguishing system and obtain approval from authorities having jurisdiction (AHJ). Design system for Class A, B, and C fires as appropriate for areas being protected, and include safety factor. Use clean agent indicated and in concentration suitable for normally occupied areas.

D. Performance Requirements: Discharge Novec FK-5-1-12 within 10 seconds and maintain four and one-half percent (4½%) concentration by volume at 70 deg F for 10-minute holding time in hazard areas.

1. FK-5-1-12 concentration in hazard areas greater than nine percent (9%) immediately after discharge or less than four and one-half percent (<4½%) throughout holding time will not be accepted without written authorization from Owner and AHJ.



2. System Capabilities: Minimum 620-psig calculated working pressure and 500-psig initial charging pressure.

E. Cross-Zoned Detection: Devices located in two (2) separate zones. Sound alarm on activating single-detection device, and discharge extinguishing agent on actuating single-detection device in other zone.

F. System Operating Sequence:

1. Actuating First Detector: Visual indication on control panel. Energize audible and visual alarms (slow pulse), shut down air-conditioning and ventilating systems serving protected area, and send signal to fire-alarm system.

2. Actuating Second Detector: Visual indication on control panel. Energize audible and visual alarms (fast pulse), activate discharge delay for extinguishing-agent discharge for 20 seconds, and discharge extinguishing agent

3. Extinguishing-agent discharge will operate audible alarms and strobe lights inside and outside the protected area (steady).

G. Manual stations shall immediately discharge extinguishing agent when activated.

H. Operating abort switches will delay extinguishing-agent discharge while being activated, and switches must be reset to prevent agent discharge. Release of hand pressure on the switch will cause agent discharge if the time delay has expired.

I. Power Transfer Switch: Transfer from normal to stand-by power source.

J. Seismic Performance: Fire-suppression piping and containers shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to the Connecticut State Building Code.

1. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the unit will be fully operational after the seismic event."

2.2 PIPING MATERIALS

A. See "FK-5-1-12 Agent Piping Applications" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting, and joining materials.

B. Piping, Valves, and Discharge Nozzles: Comply with types and standards listed in NFPA 2001, Section "Distribution," for charging pressure of system.

2.3 PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type S, Grade B or ASTM A 106, Grade A, Schedule 40.

1. Threaded Fittings:

a. Malleable-Iron Fittings: ASME B16.3, Class 300. b. Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5, Class 300. c. Fittings Working Pressure: 620 psig minimum. d. Flanged Joints: Class 300 minimum.



B. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for chemical and thermal conditions of piping system contents.

1. ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos-free, 1/8-inch maximum thickness unless thickness or specific material is indicated.

C. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel.

D. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12 for welding materials appropriate for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.

E. Steel, Keyed Couplings: UL 213, AWWA C606, approved or listed for clean-agent service, and matching steel-pipe dimensions. Include ASTM A 536, ductile-iron housing, rubber gasket, and steel bolts and nuts.

2.4 VALVES

A. General Valve Requirements:

1. UL listed or FM Approved for use in fire-protection systems. 2. Compatible with type of clean agent used.

B. Container Valves: Solenoid and manual-release lever, capable of immediate and total agent discharge and suitable for intended flow capacity.

2.5 EXTINGUISHING-AGENT CONTAINERS

A. Description: Steel tanks complying with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, for unfired pressure vessels. Include minimum working-pressure rating that matches system charging pressure, valve, pressure switch, and pressure gauge.

1. Finish: Manufacturer's standard color enamel or epoxy paint. 2. Storage-Tank Brackets: Factory- or field-fabricated retaining brackets consisting of steel

straps and channels; suitable for container support, maintenance, and tank refilling or replacement.

2.6 FIRE-EXTINGUISHING CLEAN AGENT

A. FK-5-1-12 Clean Agent: Dodecaflouro-2-methylpentan-3-one.

1. Manufacturer: 3M

2.7 DISCHARGE NOZZLES

A. Equipment manufacturer's standard one-piece brass or stainless-steel of type, size, discharge pattern, and capacity required for application.

2.8 CONTROL PANELS

A. Description: FM Approved or NRTL listed, including equipment and features required for testing, supervising, and operating fire-extinguishing system.



B. Power Requirements: 120/240-V ac; with electrical contacts for connection to system components and fire-alarm system, and transformer or rectifier as needed to produce power at voltage required for accessories and alarm devices.

C. Enclosure: NEMA ICS 6, Type 1, enameled-steel cabinet.

1. Mounting: Recessed.

D. Supervised Circuits: Separate circuits for each independent hazard area.

1. Detection circuits equal to the required number of zones. 2. Manual pull-station circuit. 3. Alarm circuit. 4. Release circuit. 5. Abort circuit. 6. EPO circuit.

E. Control-Panel Features:

1. Electrical contacts for shutting down fans, activating dampers, and operating system electrical devices.

2. Automatic switchover to standby power at loss of primary power. 3. Storage container, low-pressure indicator. 4. Service disconnect to interrupt system operation for maintenance with visual status

indication on the annunciator panel.

F. Standby Power: Sealed lead calcium batteries with capacity to operate system for 24 hours and alarm for minimum of 15 minutes. Include automatic battery charger that has a varying charging rate between trickle and high depending on battery voltage, and that is capable of maintaining batteries fully charged.

2.9 DETECTION DEVICES

A. General Requirements for Detection Devices:

1. Comply with NFPA 2001, NFPA 72, and UL 268. 2. 24-V dc, nominal.

B. Photoelectric Detectors: LED light source and silicon photodiode receiving element.

C. Signals to the Building Fire Alarm Control Panel: Any type of local system trouble is reported to the central fire alarm control panel as a composite "Trouble" signal. Alarms are individually reported to the central fire alarm control panel as “Alarm” signal.

2.10 MANUAL STATIONS

A. General Description: Recessed FM Approved or NRTL, low voltage compatible with controls. Include contacts for connection to control panel.

B. Manual Release: "MANUAL RELEASE" caption, and red finish. Unit can manually discharge extinguishing agent with operating device that remains engaged until unlocked.



C. Abort Switch: "ABORT" caption, momentary contact.

2.11 ALARM DEVICES

A. Description: Listed and labeled by an NRTL or FM Approved, low voltage, and recessed or surface mounted.

B. “Agent” Horn /Strobes 90 to 94 dBA.

C. Strobe Lights: Translucent lens, with "Agent" caption.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with hazard-area leakage requirements, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting work performance.


C. Provide concealed piping and recessed component installations.

3.2 FK-5-1-12 AGENT PIPING APPLICATIONS

A. Flanged pipe and fittings and flanged joints may be used to connect to specialties and accessories and where required for maintenance.

B. NPS 2 and Smaller: Schedule 40, steel pipe; malleable-iron threaded fittings; and threaded joints.

3.3 CLEAN-AGENT PIPING INSTALLATION

A. Install clean-agent extinguishing piping and other components level and plumb, according to manufacturers' written instructions.

B. Grooved Piping Joints: Groove pipe ends according to AWWA C606 dimensions. Assemble grooved-end steel pipe and steel, grooved-end fittings with steel, keyed couplings and lubricant according to manufacturer's written instructions.

C. Install extinguishing-agent containers anchored to substrate.

D. Install pipe and fittings, valves, and discharge nozzles according to requirements listed in NFPA 2001, Section "Distribution."

3.4 CONNECTIONS

A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Where installing piping adjacent to equipment, allow space for service and maintenance.

C. Connect electrical devices to control panel and to building's fire-alarm system.



3.5 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components and equipment.

B. Identify piping, extinguishing-agent containers, other equipment, and panels according to NFPA 2001.

C. Install signs at entry doors for protected areas to warn occupants that they are entering a room protected with a clean-agent fire-extinguishing system.

D. Install signs at entry doors to advise persons outside the room the meaning of the horn(s), and strobe light(s) outside the protected space.


A. Perform tests and inspections.

1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing.


1. After installing clean-agent extinguishing piping system and after electrical circuitry has been energized, test for compliance with requirements.

C. Units will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

3.7 CLEANING

A. Each pipe section shall be cleaned internally after preparation and before assembly by means of swabbing, using a suitable nonflammable cleaner. Pipe network shall be free of particulate matter and oil residue before installing nozzles or discharge devices.

3.8 TESTING

A. Provide and perform Door Fan Room Integrity Test in accordance with NFPA 2001.

3.9 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain clean-agent fire-extinguishing systems.


COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR PLUMBING EQUIPMENT

Emergency Communications Center Tenant Fit-Out and Renovation – SHU/Fairfield 220513-1

SECTION 220513 - COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR PLUMBING EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes general requirements for single-phase and polyphase, general-purpose, horizontal, small and medium, squirrel-cage induction motors for use on ac power systems up to 600 V and installed at equipment manufacturer's factory or shipped separately by equipment manufacturer for field installation.

1.3 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate features of motors, installed units, and accessory devices to be compatible with the following:

1. Motor controllers. 2. Torque, speed, and horsepower requirements of the load. 3. Ratings and characteristics of supply circuit and required control sequence. 4. Ambient and environmental conditions of installation location.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL MOTOR REQUIREMENTS

A. Comply with NEMA MG 1 unless otherwise indicated.

B. Comply with IEEE 841 for severe-duty motors.

2.2 MOTOR CHARACTERISTICS

A. Duty: Continuous duty at ambient temperature of 100 deg F and at altitude of 3300 feet above sea level.

B. Capacity and Torque Characteristics: Sufficient to start, accelerate, and operate connected loads at designated speeds, at installed altitude and environment, with indicated operating sequence, and without exceeding nameplate ratings or considering service factor.

2.3 SINGLE-PHASE MOTORS

A. Motors larger than 1/20 hp shall be one of the following, to suit starting torque and requirements of specific motor application:

1. Permanent-split capacitor.

COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR PLUMBING EQUIPMENT


2. Split phase. 3. Capacitor start, inductor run. 4. Capacitor start, capacitor run.

B. Multispeed Motors: Variable-torque, permanent-split-capacitor type.

C. Bearings: Prelubricated, antifriction ball bearings or sleeve bearings suitable for radial and thrust loading.

D. Motors 1/20 HP and Smaller: Shaded-pole type.

E. Thermal Protection: Internal protection to automatically open power supply circuit to motor when winding temperature exceeds a safe value calibrated to temperature rating of motor insulation. Thermal-protection device shall automatically reset when motor temperature returns to normal range.



SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR PLUMBING PIPING


SECTION 220517 - SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR PLUMBING PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Sleeves. 2. Stack-sleeve fittings. 3. Sleeve-seal systems. 4. Sleeve-seal fittings. 5. Grout.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SLEEVES

A. Cast-Iron Wall Pipes: Cast or fabricated of cast or ductile iron and equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop unless otherwise indicated.

B. Galvanized-Steel Wall Pipes: ASTM A 53, Schedule 40, with plain ends and welded steel collar; zinc coated.

C. Galvanized-Steel-Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, zinc coated, with plain ends.

2.2 STACK-SLEEVE FITTINGS


1. Jay R. Smith Mfg. Co. 2. Zurn Industries, LLC

B. Description: Manufactured, cast-iron sleeve with integral clamping flange. Include clamping ring, bolts, and nuts for membrane flashing.

1. Underdeck Clamp: Clamping ring with setscrews.







1. Sealing Elements: EPDM-rubber interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe.

2. Pressure Plates: Plastic or stainless-steel. 3. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Stainless-steel of length required to secure pressure plates to

sealing elements.




B. Description: Manufactured plastic, sleeve-type, waterstop assembly made for imbedding in concrete slab or wall. Unit has plastic or rubber waterstop collar with center opening to match piping OD.

2.5 GROUT





PART 3 - EXECUTION









2. Using grout, seal the space outside of sleeves in slabs and walls without sleeve-seal system.



and pipe or pipe insulation. 3. Seal annular space between sleeve and piping or piping insulation; use joint sealants

appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Comply with requirements for sealants specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."

E. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials. Comply with requirements for firestopping specified in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping."

3.2 STACK-SLEEVE-FITTING INSTALLATION

A. Install stack-sleeve fittings in new slabs as slabs are constructed.

1. Install fittings that are large enough to provide ¼-inch annular clear space between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation.

2. Secure flashing between clamping flanges for pipes penetrating floors with membrane waterproofing. Comply with requirements for flashing specified in Section 076200 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim."

3. Install section of cast-iron soil pipe to extend sleeve to 2 inches above finished floor level.

4. Extend cast-iron sleeve fittings below floor slab as required to secure clamping ring if ring is specified.

5. Using grout, seal the space around outside of stack-sleeve fittings.

B. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of floors at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials. Comply with requirements for firestopping specified in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping."


A. Install sleeve-seal systems in sleeves in exterior concrete walls and slabs-on-grade at service piping entries into building.



B. Select type, size, and number of sealing elements required for piping material and size and for sleeve ID or hole size. Position piping in center of sleeve. Center piping in penetration, assemble sleeve-seal system components, and install in annular space between piping and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make a watertight seal.


A. Install sleeve-seal fittings in new walls and slabs as they are constructed.



D. Using grout, seal the space around outside of sleeve-seal fittings.



1. Exterior Concrete Walls above Grade:

a. Piping Smaller Than NPS 6: Galvanized-steel wall sleeves. b. Piping NPS 6 and Larger: Galvanized-steel wall sleeves.

2. Exterior Concrete Walls below Grade:













a. Ferrous Piping (All Sizes): Galvanized-steel-pipe sleeves.


ESCUTCHEONS FOR PLUMBING PIPING


SECTION 220518 - ESCUTCHEONS FOR PLUMBING PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Escutcheons. 2. Floor plates.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ESCUTCHEONS

A. One-Piece, Cast-Brass Type: With polished, chrome-plated, and rough-brass finish and setscrew fastener.

B. One-Piece, Deep-Pattern Type: Deep-drawn, box-shaped brass with chrome-plated finish and spring-clip fasteners.

C. One-Piece, Stamped-Steel Type: With chrome-plated finish and spring-clip fasteners.

D. Split-Casting Brass Type: With polished, chrome-plated, and rough-brass finish and with concealed hinge and setscrew.

E. Split-Plate, Stamped-Steel Type: With chrome-plated finish, concealed hinge, and spring-clip fasteners.

2.2 FLOOR PLATES

A. One-Piece Floor Plates: Cast-iron flange with holes for fasteners.

B. Split-Casting Floor Plates: Cast brass with concealed hinge.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and finished floors.

B. Install escutcheons with ID to closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of insulated piping and with OD that completely covers opening.

1. Escutcheons for New Piping:

a. Piping with Fitting or Sleeve Protruding from Wall: One-piece, deep-pattern type. b. Chrome-Plated Piping: One-piece, cast-brass type with polished, chrome-plated

finish. c. Insulated Piping: One-piece, stamped-steel type. d. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, cast-

brass type with polished, chrome-plated finish. e. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece,

stamped-steel type. f. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, cast-brass type

with polished, chrome-plated finish. g. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, stamped-steel

type. h. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: One-piece, cast-brass type with rough-

brass finish. i. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: One-piece, stamped-steel type. j. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, cast-brass type with rough-brass

finish. k. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, stamped-steel type.

2. Escutcheons for Existing Piping:

a. Chrome-Plated Piping: Split-casting brass type with polished, chrome-plated finish.

b. Insulated Piping: Split-plate, stamped-steel type with concealed hinge. c. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: Split-casting brass

type with polished, chrome-plated finish. d. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: Split-plate,

stamped-steel type with concealed hinge. e. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: Split-casting brass type

with polished, chrome-plated finish. f. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: Split-plate, stamped-steel

type with concealed hinge. g. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: Split-casting brass type with rough-

brass finish. h. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: Split-plate, stamped-steel type with

concealed hinge. i. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: Split-casting brass type with rough-brass finish. j. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: Split-plate, stamped-steel type with concealed

hinge.



C. Install floor plates for piping penetrations of equipment-room floors.

D. Install floor plates with ID to closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of piping and with OD that completely covers opening.

1. New Piping: One-piece, floor-plate type. 2. Existing Piping: Split-casting, floor-plate type.


A. Replace broken and damaged escutcheons and floor plates using new materials.


METERS AND GAGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING


SECTION 220519 - METERS AND GAGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Bimetallic-actuated thermometers. 2. Thermowells.




A. Product Certificates: For each type of gage.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For gages to include in operation and maintenance manuals.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 BIMETALLIC-ACTUATED THERMOMETERS


1. Ashcroft Inc. 2. Ernst Flow Industries 3. Marsh Bellofram 4. Miljoco Corporation 5. Nanmac Corporation 6. Noshok 7. Palmer Wahl Instrumentation Group 8. REOTEMP Instrument Corporation 9. Tel-Tru Manufacturing Company 10. Trerice, H. O. Co. 11. Watts; a Watts Water Technologies company 12. Weiss Instruments, Inc. 13. Weksler Glass Thermometer Corp. 14. WIKA Instrument Corporation



15. Winters Instruments - U.S.

B. Standard: ASME B40.200.

C. Case: Liquid-filled and sealed type(s); stainless-steel with 3-inch nominal diameter.

D. Dial: Nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings and scales in deg F.

E. Connector Type(s): Union joint, adjustable angle and rigid, bottom, with unified-inch screw threads.

F. Connector Size: ½-inch, with ASME B1.1 screw threads.

G. Stem: 0.25- or 0.375-inch in diameter; stainless-steel.

H. Window: Plain glass.

I. Ring: Stainless-steel.

J. Element: Bimetal coil.

K. Pointer: Dark-colored metal.

L. Accuracy: Plus or minus one percent (+/-1%) of scale range.

2.2 THERMOWELLS

A. Thermowells:

1. Standard: ASME B40.200. 2. Description: Pressure-tight, socket-type fitting made for insertion into piping tee fitting. 3. Material for Use with Copper Tubing: CNR or CUNI. 4. Material for Use with Steel Piping: CRES. 5. Type: Stepped shank unless straight or tapered shank is indicated. 6. External Threads: NPS 1/2, NPS 3/4, or NPS 1, ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads. 7. Internal Threads: ½-, ¾-, and 1-inch, with ASME B1.1 screw threads. 8. Bore: Diameter required to match thermometer bulb or stem. 9. Insertion Length: Length required to match thermometer bulb or stem. 10. Lagging Extension: Include on thermowells for insulated piping and tubing. 11. Bushings: For converting size of thermowell's internal screw thread to size of

thermometer connection.

B. Heat-Transfer Medium: Mixture of graphite and glycerin.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install thermowells with socket extending to center of pipe and in vertical position in piping tees.



B. Install thermowells of sizes required to match thermometer connectors. Include bushings if required to match sizes.

C. Install thermowells with extension on insulated piping.

D. Fill thermowells with heat-transfer medium.

E. Install direct-mounted thermometers in thermowells and adjust vertical and tilted positions.

F. Install thermometers in the following locations:

1. Inlet and outlet of each water heater.

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Install gages adjacent to machines and equipment to allow service and maintenance of gages, machines, and equipment.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust faces of gages to proper angle for best visibility.

3.4 THERMOMETER SCHEDULE

A. Thermometers at inlet and outlet of each domestic water heater shall be the following:

1. Liquid-filled Sealed, bimetallic-actuated type.

B. Thermometer stems shall be of length to match thermowell insertion length.

3.5 THERMOMETER SCALE-RANGE SCHEDULE

A. Scale Range for Domestic Cold-Water Piping: 0 to 100 deg F.

B. Scale Range for Domestic Hot-Water Piping: 0 to 250 deg F.


BALL VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING

Emergency Communications Center Tenant Fit-Out and Renovation – SHU/Fairfield 220523.12-1

SECTION 220523.12 - BALL VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Bronze ball valves.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. CWP: Cold working pressure.


A. Product Data: For each type of valve.

1. Certification that products comply with NSF 61 Annex G and NSF 372.


A. Prepare valves for shipping as follows:

1. Protect internal parts against rust and corrosion. 2. Protect threads, flange faces, and soldered ends. 3. Set ball valves open to minimize exposure of functional surfaces.

B. Use the following precautions during storage:

1. Maintain valve end protection. 2. Store valves indoors and maintain at higher-than-ambient-dew-point temperature. If

outdoor storage is necessary, store valves off the ground in watertight enclosures.

C. Use sling to handle large valves; rig sling to avoid damage to exposed parts. Do not use operating handles or stems as lifting or rigging points.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVES

A. Source Limitations for Valves: Obtain each type of valve from single source from single manufacturer.



B. ASME Compliance:

1. ASME B1.20.1 for threads for threaded end valves. 2. ASME B16.1 for flanges on iron valves. 3. ASME B16.5 for flanges on steel valves. 4. ASME B16.10 and ASME B16.34 for ferrous valve dimensions and design criteria. 5. ASME B16.18 for solder-joint connections. 6. ASME B31.9 for building services piping valves.

C. NSF Compliance: NSF 61 Annex G and NSF 372 for valve materials for potable-water service.

D. Bronze valves shall be made with dezincification-resistant materials. Bronze valves made with copper alloy (brass) containing more than fifteen percent (>15%) zinc are not permitted.

E. Valve Pressure-Temperature Ratings: Not less than indicated and as required for system pressures and temperatures.

F. Valve Sizes: Same as upstream piping unless otherwise indicated.

G. Valve Actuator Types:

1. Gear Actuator: For quarter-turn valves NPS 4 and larger. 2. Handlever: For quarter-turn valves smaller than NPS 4.

H. Valves in Insulated Piping:

1. Include 2-inch stem extensions. 2. Extended operating handles of nonthermal-conductive material and protective sleeves

that allow operation of valves without breaking vapor seals or disturbing insulation. 3. Memory stops that are fully adjustable after insulation is applied.

2.2 BRONZE BALL VALVES

A. Bronze Ball Valves, Two-Piece with Full Port and Stainless-Steel Trim:


a. Apollo Valves; Conbraco Industries, Inc. b. Crane; Crane Energy Flow Solutions c. Hammond Valve d. Lance Valves e. Milwaukee Valve Company f. NIBCO INC. g. Watts; a Watts Water Technologies company

2. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-110. b. CWP Rating: 600 psig. c. Body Design: Two-piece.



d. Body Material: Bronze. e. Ends: Threaded or soldered. f. Seats: PTFE. g. Stem: Stainless-steel. h. Ball: Stainless-steel, vented. i. Port: Full.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine valve interior for cleanliness, freedom from foreign matter, and corrosion. Remove special packing materials, such as blocks, used to prevent disc movement during shipping and handling.

B. Operate valves in positions from fully open to fully closed. Examine guides and seats made accessible by such operations.

C. Examine threads on valve and mating pipe for form and cleanliness.

D. Examine mating flange faces for conditions that might cause leakage. Check bolting for proper size, length, and material. Verify that gasket is of proper size, that its material composition is suitable for service, and that it is free from defects and damage.

E. Do not attempt to repair defective valves; replace with new valves.

3.2 VALVE INSTALLATION

A. Install valves with unions or flanges at each piece of equipment arranged to allow service, maintenance, and equipment removal without system shutdown.

B. Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary.

C. Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above center of pipe.

D. Install valves in position to allow full stem movement.

E. Install valve tags. Comply with requirements in Section 220553 "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment" for valve tags and schedules.

3.3 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVE APPLICATIONS

A. If valves with specified CWP ratings are unavailable, the same types of valves with higher CWP ratings may be substituted.

B. Select valves with the following end connections:

1. For Copper Tubing, NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded ends except where solder-joint valve-end option is indicated in valve schedules.



3.4 VALVE SCHEDULE (150 PSIG OR LESS)

A. Pipe NPS 2 and Smaller:

1. Refer to Valve Schedule on Drawings.


HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT


SECTION 220529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Metal pipe hangers and supports. 2. Trapeze pipe hangers. 3. Fiberglass pipe hangers. 4. Metal framing systems. 5. Fiberglass strut systems. 6. Thermal-hanger shield inserts. 7. Fastener systems. 8. Pipe stands. 9. Pipe positioning systems. 10. Equipment supports.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. MSS: Manufacturers Standardization Society of The Valve and Fittings Industry Inc.


A. Delegated Design: Design trapeze pipe hangers and equipment supports, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated.

B. Structural Performance: Hangers and supports for plumbing piping and equipment shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated according to ASCE/SEI 7.

1. Design supports for multiple pipes, including pipe stands, capable of supporting combined weight of supported systems, system contents, and test water.

2. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported equipment and connected systems and components.

3. Design seismic-restraint hangers and supports for piping and equipment and obtain approval from authorities having jurisdiction.





B. Shop Drawings: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer. Show fabrication and installation details and include calculations for the following; include Product Data for components:

1. Trapeze pipe hangers. 2. Metal framing systems. 3. Fiberglass strut systems. 4. Pipe stands. 5. Equipment supports.

C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For trapeze hangers indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

1. Detail fabrication and assembly of trapeze hangers. 2. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for designing trapeze hangers.




A. Structural Steel Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."

B. Pipe Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 METAL PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Carbon-Steel Pipe Hangers and Supports:

1. Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, factory-fabricated components. 2. Galvanized Metallic Coatings: Pregalvanized or hot dipped. 3. Nonmetallic Coatings: Plastic coating, jacket, or liner. 4. Padded Hangers: Hanger with fiberglass or other pipe insulation pad or cushion to

support bearing surface of piping. 5. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of stainless-steel.

B. Stainless-Steel Pipe Hangers and Supports:

1. Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, factory-fabricated components. 2. Padded Hangers: Hanger with fiberglass or other pipe insulation pad or cushion to


C. Copper Pipe Hangers:



1. Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, copper-coated-steel, factory-fabricated components.

2. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of stainless-steel.

2.2 TRAPEZE PIPE HANGERS

A. Description: MSS SP-69, Type 59, shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly made from structural carbon-steel shapes with MSS SP-58 carbon-steel hanger rods, nuts, saddles, and U-bolts.

2.3 FIBERGLASS PIPE HANGERS

A. Clevis-Type, Fiberglass Pipe Hangers:

1. Description: Similar to MSS SP-58, Type 1, steel pipe hanger except hanger is made of fiberglass or fiberglass-reinforced resin.

2. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, washer, and nuts made of stainless-steel.

B. Strap-Type, Fiberglass Pipe Hangers:

1. Description: Similar to MSS SP-58, Type 9 or Type 10, steel pipe hanger except hanger is made of fiberglass-reinforced resin.

2. Hanger Rod and Fittings: Continuous-thread rod, washer, and nuts made of stainless-steel.

2.4 METAL FRAMING SYSTEMS

A. MFMA Manufacturer Metal Framing Systems:


a. Allied Tube & Conduit; a part of Atkore International b. B-line, an Eaton business c. Flex-Strut Inc. d. Thomas & Betts Corporation; A Member of the ABB Group e. Unistrut; Part of Atkore International f. Wesanco, Inc.

2. Description: Shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly for supporting multiple parallel pipes.

3. Standard: MFMA-4. 4. Channels: Continuous slotted steel channel with inturned lips. 5. Channel Nuts: Formed or stamped steel nuts or other devices designed to fit into channel

slot and, when tightened, prevent slipping along channel. 6. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of stainless-steel. 7. Metallic Coating: Hot-dipped galvanized. 8. Paint Coating: Epoxy. 9. Plastic Coating: Epoxy.



2.5 THERMAL-HANGER SHIELD INSERTS


1. Carpenter & Paterson, Inc. 2. Clement Support Services 3. ERICO International Corporation 4. National Pipe Hanger Corporation 5. PHS Industries, Inc. 6. Pipe Shields Inc. 7. Piping Technology & Products, Inc. 8. Rilco Manufacturing Co., Inc. 9. Value Engineered Products, Inc.

B. Insulation-Insert Material for Cold Piping: ASTM C 591, Type VI, Grade 1 polyisocyanurate with 125-psig minimum compressive strength and vapor barrier.

C. Insulation-Insert Material for Hot Piping: ASTM C 591, Type VI, Grade 1 polyisocyanurate with 125-psig minimum compressive strength.

D. For Trapeze or Clamped Systems: Insert and shield shall cover entire circumference of pipe.

E. For Clevis or Band Hangers: Insert and shield shall cover lower 180 degrees of pipe.

F. Insert Length: Extend 2 inches beyond sheet metal shield for piping operating below ambient air temperature.

2.6 FASTENER SYSTEMS

A. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, stainless-steel anchors, for use in hardened Portland cement concrete; with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.

2.7 PIPE STANDS

A. General Requirements for Pipe Stands: Shop- or field-fabricated assemblies made of manufactured corrosion-resistant components to support roof-mounted piping.

B. Compact Pipe Stand: One-piece plastic unit with integral-rod roller, pipe clamps, or V-shaped cradle to support pipe, for roof installation without membrane penetration.

C. Low-Type, Single-Pipe Stand: One-piece stainless-steel base unit with plastic roller, for roof installation without membrane penetration.

D. High-Type, Single-Pipe Stand:

1. Description: Assembly of base, vertical and horizontal members, and pipe support, for roof installation without membrane penetration.

2. Base: Stainless-steel.



3. Vertical Members: Two (2) or more cadmium-plated-steel or stainless-steel, continuous-thread rods.

4. Horizontal Member: Cadmium-plated-steel or stainless-steel rod with plastic or stainless-steel, roller-type pipe support.

E. High-Type, Multiple-Pipe Stand:

1. Description: Assembly of bases, vertical and horizontal members, and pipe supports, for roof installation without membrane penetration.

2. Bases: One (1) or more; plastic. 3. Vertical Members: Two (2) or more protective-coated-steel channels. 4. Horizontal Member: Protective-coated-steel channel. 5. Pipe Supports: Galvanized-steel, clevis-type pipe hangers.

F. Curb-Mounting-Type Pipe Stands: Shop- or field-fabricated pipe supports made from structural-steel shapes, continuous-thread rods, and rollers, for mounting on permanent stationary roof curb.

2.8 PIPE POSITIONING SYSTEMS

A. Description: IAPMO PS 42, positioning system of metal brackets, clips, and straps for positioning piping in pipe spaces; for plumbing fixtures in commercial applications.

2.9 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS

A. Description: Welded, shop- or field-fabricated equipment support made from structural carbon-steel shapes.


A. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36, carbon-steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.

B. Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-mixed and -packaged, dry, hydraulic-cement, non-shrink and nonmetallic grout; suitable for interior and exterior applications.

1. Properties: Non-staining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous. 2. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION

A. Metal Pipe-Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Install hangers, supports, clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping from the building structure.

B. Metal Trapeze Pipe-Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping, and support together on field-fabricated trapeze pipe hangers.



1. Pipes of Various Sizes: Support together and space trapezes for smallest pipe size or install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipes as specified for individual pipe hangers.

2. Field fabricate from ASTM A 36, carbon-steel shapes selected for loads being supported. Weld steel according to AWS D1.1.

C. Fiberglass Pipe-Hanger Installation: Comply with applicable portions of MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Install hangers and attachments as required to properly support piping from building structure.

D. Metal Framing System Installation: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of piping, and support together on field-assembled metal framing systems.

E. Fiberglass Strut System Installation: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of piping, and support together on field-assembled fiberglass struts.

F. Thermal-Hanger Shield Installation: Install in pipe hanger or shield for insulated piping.

G. Fastener System Installation:

1. Install mechanical-expansion anchors in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured. Install fasteners according to manufacturer's written instructions.

H. Pipe Stand Installation:

1. Pipe Stand Types except Curb-Mounted Type: Assemble components and mount on smooth roof surface. Do not penetrate roof membrane.

2. Curb-Mounted-Type Pipe Stands: Assemble components or fabricate pipe stand and mount on permanent, stationary roof curb.

I. Pipe Positioning-System Installation: Install support devices to make rigid supply and waste piping connections to each plumbing fixture.

J. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary attachments, inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers, and other accessories.

K. Equipment Support Installation: Fabricate from welded-structural-steel shapes.

L. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and seismic movement of piping systems, to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units.

M. Install lateral bracing with pipe hangers and supports to prevent swaying.

N. Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel. Install additional attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, and strainers, NPS 2-1/2 and larger and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before concrete is placed; fasten inserts to forms and install reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts.

O. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so that piping live and dead loads and stresses from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment.



P. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and to not exceed maximum pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.9 for building services piping.

Q. Insulated Piping:

1. Attach clamps and spacers to piping.

a. Piping Operating above Ambient Air Temperature: Clamp may project through insulation.

b. Piping Operating below Ambient Air Temperature: Use thermal-hanger shield insert with clamp sized to match OD of insert.

c. Do not exceed pipe stress limits allowed by ASME B31.9 for building services piping.

2. Install MSS SP-58, Type 39, protection saddles if insulation without vapor barrier is indicated. Fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation.

a. Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weight-distribution plate for pipe NPS 4 and larger if pipe is installed on rollers.

3. Install MSS SP-58, Type 40, protective shields on cold piping with vapor barrier. Shields shall span an arc of 180 degrees.


4. Shield Dimensions for Pipe: Not less than the following:

a. NPS 1/4 to NPS 3-1/2: 12 inches long and 0.048-inch-thick. b. NPS 4: 12 inches long and 0.06-inch-thick. c. NPS 5 and NPS 6: 18 inches long and 0.06-inch-thick. d. NPS 8 to NPS 14: 24 inches long and 0.075-inch-thick. e. NPS 16 to NPS 24: 24 inches long and 0.105-inch-thick.

5. Pipes NPS 8 and Larger: Include wood or reinforced calcium-silicate-insulation inserts of length at least as long as protective shield.

6. Thermal-Hanger Shields: Install with insulation same thickness as piping insulation.


A. Fabricate structural-steel stands to suspend equipment from structure overhead or to support equipment above floor.

B. Grouting: Place grout under supports for equipment and make bearing surface smooth.

C. Provide lateral bracing, to prevent swaying, for equipment supports.

3.3 METAL FABRICATIONS

A. Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for trapeze pipe hangers and equipment supports.



B. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field weld connections that cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations.

C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1 procedures for shielded, metal arc welding; appearance and quality of welds; and methods used in correcting welding work; and with the following:


2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. Finish welds at exposed connections so no roughness shows after finishing and so

contours of welded surfaces match adjacent contours.

3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Hanger Adjustments: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve indicated slope of pipe.

B. Trim excess length of continuous-thread hanger and support rods to 1½ inches.

3.5 PAINTING

A. Touchup: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces.

1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils.

B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.

3.6 HANGER AND SUPPORT SCHEDULE

A. Specific hanger and support requirements are in Sections specifying piping systems and equipment.

B. Comply with MSS SP-69 for pipe-hanger selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections.

C. Use hangers and supports with galvanized metallic coatings for piping and equipment that will not have field-applied finish.

D. Use nonmetallic coatings on attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments are in direct contact with copper tubing.

E. Use carbon-steel pipe hangers and supports, metal trapeze pipe hangers and metal framing systems and attachments for general service applications.

F. Use stainless-steel pipe hangers and fiberglass pipe hangers and fiberglass strut systems and stainless-steel attachments for hostile environment applications.

G. Use copper-plated pipe hangers and stainless-steel attachments for copper piping and tubing.



H. Use padded hangers for piping that is subject to scratching.

I. Use thermal-hanger shield inserts for insulated piping and tubing.

J. Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Adjustable, Steel Clevis Hangers (MSS Type 1): For suspension of non-insulated or insulated, stationary pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 30.

2. Yoke-Type Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 2): For suspension of up to 1050 deg F, pipes NPS 4 to NPS 24, requiring up to 4 inches of insulation.

3. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel, Double-Bolt Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 3): For suspension of pipes NPS 3/4 to NPS 36, requiring clamp flexibility and up to 4 inches of insulation.

4. Steel Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 4): For suspension of cold and hot pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 24 if little or no insulation is required.

5. Pipe Hangers (MSS Type 5): For suspension of pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 4, to allow off-center closure for hanger installation before pipe erection.

6. Adjustable, Swivel Split- or Solid-Ring Hangers (MSS Type 6): For suspension of non-insulated, stationary pipes NPS 3/4 to NPS 8.

7. Adjustable, Steel Band Hangers (MSS Type 7): For suspension of non-insulated, stationary pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 8.

8. Adjustable Band Hangers (MSS Type 9): For suspension of non-insulated, stationary pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 8.

9. Adjustable, Swivel-Ring Band Hangers (MSS Type 10): For suspension of non-insulated, stationary pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 8.

10. Split Pipe Ring with or without Turnbuckle Hangers (MSS Type 11): For suspension of non-insulated, stationary pipes NPS 3/8 to NPS 8.

11. Extension Hinged or Two-Bolt Split Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 12): For suspension of non-insulated, stationary pipes NPS 3/8 to NPS 3.

12. U-Bolts (MSS Type 24): For support of heavy pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 30. 13. Clips (MSS Type 26): For support of insulated pipes not subject to expansion or

contraction. 14. Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 36): For support of pipes NPS 4 to NPS 36, with steel-

pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange or carbon-steel plate. 15. Pipe Stanchion Saddles (MSS Type 37): For support of pipes NPS 4 to NPS 36, with

steel-pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange or carbon-steel plate, and with U-bolt to retain pipe.

16. Adjustable Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 38): For stanchion-type support for pipes NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 36 if vertical adjustment is required, with steel-pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange.

17. Single-Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 41): For suspension of pipes NPS 1 to NPS 30, from two (2) rods if longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur.

18. Adjustable Roller Hangers (MSS Type 43): For suspension of pipes NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 24, from single rod if horizontal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur.

19. Complete Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 44): For support of pipes NPS 2 to NPS 42 if longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur but vertical adjustment is not necessary.

20. Pipe Roll and Plate Units (MSS Type 45): For support of pipes NPS 2 to NPS 24 if small horizontal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur and vertical adjustment is not necessary.



21. Adjustable Pipe Roll and Base Units (MSS Type 46): For support of pipes NPS 2 to NPS 30 if vertical and lateral adjustment during installation might be required in addition to expansion and contraction.

K. Vertical-Piping Clamps: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Extension Pipe or Riser Clamps (MSS Type 8): For support of pipe risers NPS 3/4 to NPS 24.

2. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel Riser Clamps (MSS Type 42): For support of pipe risers NPS 3/4 to NPS 24 if longer ends are required for riser clamps.

L. Hanger-Rod Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Steel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 13): For adjustment up to 6 inches for heavy loads. 2. Steel Clevises (MSS Type 14): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations. 3. Swivel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 15): For use with MSS Type 11, split pipe rings. 4. Malleable-Iron Sockets (MSS Type 16): For attaching hanger rods to various types of

building attachments. 5. Steel Weldless Eye Nuts (MSS Type 17): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations.

M. Building Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Steel or Malleable Concrete Inserts (MSS Type 18): For upper attachment to suspend pipe hangers from concrete ceiling.

2. Top-Beam C-Clamps (MSS Type 19): For use under roof installations with bar-joist construction, to attach to top flange of structural shape.

3. Side-Beam or Channel Clamps (MSS Type 20): For attaching to bottom flange of beams, channels, or angles.

4. Center-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 21): For attaching to center of bottom flange of beams. 5. Welded Beam Attachments (MSS Type 22): For attaching to bottom of beams if loads are

considerable and rod sizes are large. 6. C-Clamps (MSS Type 23): For structural shapes. 7. Top-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 25): For top of beams if hanger rod is required tangent to

flange edge. 8. Side-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 27): For bottom of steel I-beams. 9. Steel-Beam Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 28): For attaching to bottom of steel I-

beams for heavy loads. 10. Linked-Steel Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 29): For attaching to bottom of steel I-

beams for heavy loads, with link extensions. 11. Malleable-Beam Clamps with Extension Pieces (MSS Type 30): For attaching to

structural steel. 12. Welded-Steel Brackets: For support of pipes from below or for suspending from above

by using clip and rod. Use one of the following for indicated loads:

a. Light (MSS Type 31): 750 lb. b. Medium (MSS Type 32): 1500 lb. c. Heavy (MSS Type 33): 3000 lb.



13. Side-Beam Brackets (MSS Type 34): For sides of steel or wooden beams. 14. Plate Lugs (MSS Type 57): For attaching to steel beams if flexibility at beam is required. 15. Horizontal Travelers (MSS Type 58): For supporting piping systems subject to linear

horizontal movement where headroom is limited.

N. Saddles and Shields: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Steel-Pipe-Covering Protection Saddles (MSS Type 39): To fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation.

2. Protection Shields (MSS Type 40): Of length recommended in writing by manufacturer to prevent crushing insulation.

3. Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts: For supporting insulated pipe.

O. Spring Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Restraint-Control Devices (MSS Type 47): Where indicated to control piping movement. 2. Spring Cushions (MSS Type 48): For light loads if vertical movement does not exceed

1¼ inches. 3. Spring-Cushion Roll Hangers (MSS Type 49): For equipping Type 41, roll hanger with

springs. 4. Spring Sway Braces (MSS Type 50): To retard sway, shock, vibration, or thermal

expansion in piping systems. 5. Variable-Spring Hangers (MSS Type 51): Preset to indicated load and limit variability

factor to twenty-five percent (25%) to allow expansion and contraction of piping system from hanger.

6. Variable-Spring Base Supports (MSS Type 52): Preset to indicated load and limit variability factor to twenty-five percent (25%) to allow expansion and contraction of piping system from base support.

7. Variable-Spring Trapeze Hangers (MSS Type 53): Preset to indicated load and limit variability factor to twenty-five percent (25%) to allow expansion and contraction of piping system from trapeze support.

8. Constant Supports: For critical piping stress and if necessary to avoid transfer of stress from one (1) support to another support, critical terminal, or connected equipment. Include auxiliary stops for erection, hydrostatic test, and load-adjustment capability. These supports include the following types:

a. Horizontal (MSS Type 54): Mounted horizontally. b. Vertical (MSS Type 55): Mounted vertically. c. Trapeze (MSS Type 56): Two (2) vertical-type supports and one (1) trapeze

member.

P. Comply with MSS SP-69 for trapeze pipe-hanger selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections.

Q. Comply with MFMA-103 for metal framing system selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections.

R. Use mechanical-expansion anchors instead of building attachments where required in concrete construction.



S. Use pipe positioning systems in pipe spaces behind plumbing fixtures to support supply and waste piping for plumbing fixtures.


VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT


SECTION 220548 - VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Elastomeric isolation pads. 2. Elastomeric isolation mounts. 3. Restrained elastomeric isolation mounts. 4. Open-spring isolators. 5. Housed-spring isolators. 6. Restrained-spring isolators. 7. Housed-restrained-spring isolators. 8. Pipe-riser resilient supports. 9. Resilient pipe guides. 10. Elastomeric hangers. 11. Spring hangers. 12. Snubbers. 13. Restraint channel bracings. 14. Restraint cables. 15. Seismic-restraint accessories. 16. Mechanical anchor bolts. 17. Adhesive anchor bolts.

1.3 DEFINITIONS






2. Illustrate and indicate style, material, strength, fastening provision, and finish for each type and size of vibration isolation device and seismic-restraint component required.



a. Tabulate types and sizes of seismic restraints, complete with report numbers and rated strength in tension and shear as evaluated by an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

b. Annotate to indicate application of each product submitted and compliance with requirements.


B. Delegated-Design Submittal: For each vibration isolation and seismic-restraint device.

1. Include design calculations and details for selecting vibration isolators and seismic restraints complying with performance requirements, design criteria, and analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

2. Design Calculations: Calculate static and dynamic loading due to equipment weight and operation, due to seismic forces required to select vibration isolators, and due to seismic restraints.

3. Riser Supports: Include riser diagrams and calculations showing anticipated expansion and contraction at each support point, initial and final loads on building structure, spring deflection changes, and seismic loads. Include certification that riser system was examined for excessive stress and that none exists.

4. Seismic-Restraint Details:

a. Design Analysis: To support selection and arrangement of seismic restraints. Include calculations of combined tensile and shear loads.

b. Details: Indicate fabrication and arrangement. Detail attachments of restraints to the restrained items and to the structure. Show attachment locations, methods, and spacings. Identify components, list their strengths, and indicate directions and values of forces transmitted to the structure during seismic events. Indicate association with vibration isolation devices.

c. Coordinate seismic-restraint and vibration isolation details with wind-restraint details required for equipment mounted outdoors. Comply with requirements in other Sections for equipment mounted outdoors.

d. Preapproval and Evaluation Documentation: By an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, showing maximum ratings of restraint items and the basis for approval (tests or calculations).


A. Coordination Drawings: Show coordination of vibration isolation device installation and seismic bracing for plumbing piping and equipment with other systems and equipment in the vicinity, including other supports and restraints, if any.







A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, that is an NRTL as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7 and that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Comply with seismic-restraint requirements in the State of Connecticut Building Code requirements in this Section are more stringent.

C. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."

D. Seismic-restraint devices shall have horizontal and vertical load testing and analysis and shall bear anchorage preapproval OPA number from OSHPD, preapproval by ICC-ES, or preapproval by another agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, showing maximum seismic-restraint ratings. Ratings based on independent testing are preferred to ratings based on calculations. If preapproved ratings are unavailable, submittals based on independent testing are preferred. Calculations (including combining shear and tensile loads) to support seismic-restraint designs must be signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer licensed in the state where the project is located.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Seismic-Restraint Requirements:

1. Seismic restraint systems SHALL be provided for this critical operations space.

B. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements," to design seismic and wind load control system in accordance with the State of Connecticut Building Code.

1. Seismic and Wind-Load Performance: Equipment shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions and high wind events in accordance with the State of Connecticut Building Code.

2.2 ELASTOMERIC ISOLATION PADS

A. Elastomeric Isolation Pads:


a. Ace Mountings Co., Inc. b. California Dynamics Corporation c. Isolation Technology, Inc. d. Kinetics Noise Control, Inc. e. Mason Industries, Inc. f. Novia; A Division of C&P



g. Vibration Eliminator Co., Inc. h. Vibration Isolation i. Vibration Mountings & Controls, Inc.

2. Fabrication: Single or multiple layers of sufficient durometer stiffness for uniform loading over pad area.

3. Size: Factory or field cut to match requirements of supported equipment. 4. Pad Material: Oil and water resistant with elastomeric properties. 5. Load-bearing metal plates adhered to pads. 6. Sandwich-Core Material: Resilient and/or elastomeric.

a. Surface Pattern: Ribbed and/or waffle pattern. b. Infused nonwoven cotton or synthetic fibers.

2.3 ELASTOMERIC ISOLATION MOUNTS

A. Double-Deflection, Elastomeric Isolation Mounts:



2. Mounting Plates:

a. Top Plate: Encapsulated steel load transfer top plates, factory drilled and threaded with threaded studs or bolts.

b. Baseplate: Encapsulated steel bottom plates with holes provided for anchoring to support structure.

3. Elastomeric Material: Molded, oil-resistant rubber, neoprene, or other elastomeric material.


A. Restrained Elastomeric Isolation Mounts:


a. Ace Mountings Co., Inc. b. California Dynamics Corporation c. Isolation Technology, Inc.



d. Kinetics Noise Control, Inc. e. Mason Industries, Inc. f. Novia; A Division of C&P g. Vibration Eliminator Co., Inc. h. Vibration Isolation i. Vibration Mountings & Controls, Inc.

2. Description: All-directional isolator with seismic restraints containing two (2) separate and opposing elastomeric elements that prevent central threaded element and attachment hardware from contacting the housing during normal operation.

a. Housing: Cast-ductile iron or welded steel. b. Elastomeric Material: Molded, oil-resistant rubber, neoprene, or other elastomeric

material.

2.5 OPEN-SPRING ISOLATORS

A. Freestanding, Laterally Stable, Open-Spring Isolators:



2. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than eighty percent (80%) of the compressed height of the spring at rated load.

3. Minimum Additional Travel: Fifty percent (50%) of the required deflection at rated load. 4. Lateral Stiffness: More than eighty percent (80%) of rated vertical stiffness. 5. Overload Capacity: Support two hundred percent (200%) of rated load, fully compressed,

without deformation or failure. 6. Baseplates: Factory-drilled steel plate for bolting to structure with an elastomeric isolator

pad attached to the underside. Baseplates shall limit floor load to 500 psig. 7. Top Plate and Adjustment Bolt: Threaded top plate with adjustment bolt and cap screw to

fasten and level equipment.

2.6 HOUSED-SPRING ISOLATORS

A. Freestanding, Laterally Stable, Open-Spring Isolators in Two-Part Telescoping Housing:


a. Ace Mountings Co., Inc.



b. California Dynamics Corporation c. Isolation Technology, Inc. d. Kinetics Noise Control, Inc. e. Mason Industries, Inc. f. Vibration Eliminator Co., Inc. g. Vibration Isolation h. Vibration Mountings & Controls, Inc.



without deformation or failure. 6. Two-Part Telescoping Housing: A steel top and bottom frame separated by an

elastomeric material and enclosing the spring isolators.

a. Drilled base housing for bolting to structure with an elastomeric isolator pad attached to the underside. Bases shall limit floor load to 500 psig.

b. Top housing with attachment and leveling bolt.

2.7 RESTRAINED-SPRING ISOLATORS

A. Freestanding, Laterally Stable, Open-Spring Isolators with Vertical-Limit Stop Restraint:



2. Housing: Steel housing with vertical-limit stops to prevent spring extension due to weight being removed.

a. Base with holes for bolting to structure with an elastomeric isolator pad attached to the underside. Bases shall limit floor load to 500 psig.

b. Top plate with threaded mounting holes. c. Internal leveling bolt that acts as blocking during installation.

3. Restraint: Limit stop as required for equipment and authorities having jurisdiction. 4. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than eighty percent (80%) of the compressed height of

the spring at rated load. 5. Minimum Additional Travel: Fifty percent (50%) of the required deflection at rated load. 6. Lateral Stiffness: More than eighty percent (80%) of rated vertical stiffness.



7. Overload Capacity: Support two hundred percent (200%) of rated load, fully compressed, without deformation or failure.

2.8 HOUSED-RESTRAINED-SPRING ISOLATORS

A. Freestanding, Steel, Open-Spring Isolators with Vertical-Limit Stop Restraint in Two-Part Telescoping Housing:


a. Ace Mountings Co., Inc. b. California Dynamics Corporation c. Isolation Technology, Inc. d. Kinetics Noise Control, Inc. e. Mason Industries, Inc. f. Vibration Eliminator Co., Inc. g. Vibration Isolation h. Vibration Mountings & Controls, Inc.

2. Two-Part Telescoping Housing: A steel top and bottom frame separated by an elastomeric material and enclosing the spring isolators. Housings are equipped with adjustable snubbers to limit vertical movement.


b. Threaded top housing with adjustment bolt and cap screw to fasten and level equipment.



without deformation or failure.


A. Description: All-directional, acoustical pipe anchor consisting of two (2) steel tubes separated by a minimum ½-inch-thick neoprene.

1. Vertical-Limit Stops: Steel and neoprene vertical-limit stops arranged to prevent vertical travel in both directions.

2. Maximum Load Per Support: 500 psig on isolation material providing equal isolation in all directions.


A. Description: Telescopic arrangement of two (2) steel tubes or post and sleeve arrangement separated by a minimum ½-inch-thick neoprene.



1. Factory-Set Height Guide with Shear Pin: Shear pin shall be removable and reinsertable to allow for selection of pipe movement. Guides shall be capable of motion to meet location requirements.


A. Elastomeric Mount in a Steel Frame with Upper and Lower Steel Hanger Rods:


a. Ace Mountings Co., Inc. b. California Dynamics Corporation c. Isolation Technology, Inc. d. Kinetics Noise Control, Inc. e. Mason Industries, Inc. f. Novia; A Division of C&P g. Vibration Eliminator Co., Inc. h. Vibration Mountings & Controls, Inc.



2.12 SPRING HANGERS

A. Combination Coil-Spring and Elastomeric-Insert Hanger with Spring and Insert in Compression:


a. Ace Mountings Co., Inc. b. California Dynamics Corporation c. Kinetics Noise Control, Inc. d. Mason Industries, Inc. e. Novia; A Division of C&P f. Vibration Eliminator Co., Inc. g. Vibration Isolation h. Vibration Mountings & Controls, Inc.

2. Frame: Steel, fabricated for connection to threaded hanger rods and to allow for a maximum of 30 degrees of angular hanger-rod misalignment without binding or reducing isolation efficiency.


4. Minimum Additional Travel: Fifty percent (50%) of the required deflection at rated load. 5. Lateral Stiffness: More than eighty percent (80%) of rated vertical stiffness.



6. Overload Capacity: Support two hundred percent (200%) of rated load, fully compressed, without deformation or failure.

7. Elastomeric Element: Molded, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene. Steel-washer-reinforced cup to support spring and bushing projecting through bottom of frame.

8. Adjustable Vertical Stop: Steel washer with neoprene washer "up-stop" on lower threaded rod.

9. Self-centering hanger-rod cap to ensure concentricity between hanger rod and support spring coil.

2.13 SNUBBERS


1. Kinetics Noise Control, Inc. 2. Mason Industries, Inc. 3. Novia; A Division of C&P 4. Vibration Mountings & Controls, Inc.






1. B-line, an Eaton business 2. Hilti, Inc. 3. Mason Industries, Inc. 4. Unistrut; Part of Atkore International

B. Description: MFMA-4, shop- or field-fabricated bracing assembly made of slotted steel channels with accessories for attachment to braced component at one (1) end and to building structure at the other end and other matching components and with corrosion-resistant coating; rated in tension, compression, and torsion forces.

2.15 RESTRAINT CABLES


1. Kinetics Noise Control, Inc. 2. Mason Industries, Inc. 3. Novia; A Division of C&P 4. Vibration & Seismic Technologies, LLC



5. Vibration Mountings & Controls, Inc.

B. Restraint Cables: ASTM A 492 stainless-steel cables. End connections made of steel assemblies with thimbles, brackets, swivel, and bolts designed for restraining cable service; with a minimum of two (2) clamping bolts for cable engagement.



1. B-line, an Eaton business 2. Kinetics Noise Control, Inc. 3. Mason Industries, Inc. 4. Novia; A Division of C&P 5. TOLCO 6. Vibration & Seismic Technologies, LLC

B. Hanger-Rod Stiffener: Steel tube or steel slotted-support-system sleeve with internally bolted connections to hanger rod.

C. Hinged and Swivel Brace Attachments: Multifunctional steel connectors for attaching hangers to rigid channel bracings and restraint cables.






1. B-line, an Eaton business 2. Hilti, Inc. 3. Kinetics Noise Control, Inc. 4. Mason Industries, Inc.

B. Mechanical Anchor Bolts: Drilled-in and stud-wedge or female-wedge type in zinc-coated steel for interior applications and stainless-steel for exterior applications. Select anchor bolts with strength required for anchor and as tested according to ASTM E 488.



2.18 ADHESIVE ANCHOR BOLTS


1. Hilti, Inc. 2. Kinetics Noise Control, Inc. 3. Mason Industries, Inc.

B. Adhesive Anchor Bolts: Drilled-in and capsule anchor system containing PVC or urethane methacrylate-based resin and accelerator, or injected polymer or hybrid mortar adhesive. Provide anchor bolts and hardware with zinc-coated steel for interior applications and stainless-steel for exterior applications. Select anchor bolts with strength required for anchor and as tested according to ASTM E 488.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and equipment to receive vibration isolation and seismic-control devices for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.



3.2 APPLICATIONS


B. Hanger-Rod Stiffeners: Install hanger-rod stiffeners where indicated or scheduled on Drawings to receive them and where required to prevent buckling of hanger rods due to seismic forces.


3.3 VIBRATION CONTROL AND SEISMIC-RESTRAINT DEVICE INSTALLATION

A. Coordinate the location of embedded connection hardware with supported equipment attachment and mounting points and with requirements for concrete reinforcement and formwork specified in Division 03.

B. Installation of vibration isolators must not cause any change of position of equipment, piping, or ductwork resulting in stresses or misalignment.

C. Equipment Restraints:



1. Install seismic snubbers on plumbing equipment mounted on vibration isolators. Locate snubbers as close as possible to vibration isolators and bolt to equipment base and supporting structure.



D. Piping Restraints:



E. Install cables so they do not bend across edges of adjacent equipment or building structure.

F. Install seismic-restraint devices using methods approved by an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that provides required submittals for component.

G. Install bushing assemblies for anchor bolts for floor-mounted equipment, arranged to provide resilient media between anchor bolt and mounting hole in concrete base.

H. Install bushing assemblies for mounting bolts for wall-mounted equipment, arranged to provide resilient media where equipment or equipment-mounting channels are attached to wall.

I. Attachment to Structure: If specific attachment is not indicated, anchor bracing to structure at flanges of beams, at upper truss chords of bar joists, or at concrete members.

J. Drilled-in Anchors:

1. Identify position of reinforcing steel and other embedded items prior to drilling holes for anchors. Do not damage existing reinforcing or embedded items during coring or drilling. Notify the Structural Engineer if reinforcing steel or other embedded items are encountered during drilling. Locate and avoid pre-stressed tendons, electrical and telecommunications conduit, and gas lines.



4. Adhesive Anchors: Clean holes to remove loose material and drilling dust prior to installation of adhesive. Place adhesive in holes proceeding from the bottom of the hole and progressing toward the surface in such a manner as to avoid introduction of air pockets in the adhesive.


applications.




A. Install flexible connections in piping where they cross seismic joints, where adjacent sections or branches are supported by different structural elements, and where the connections terminate with connection to equipment that is anchored to a different structural element from the one supporting the connections as they approach equipment. Comply with requirements in Section 221116 "Domestic Water Piping" for piping flexible connections.





2. Schedule test with Owner, through Architect, before connecting anchorage device to restrained component (unless post-connection testing has been approved), and with at least seven (7) days' advance notice.






3.6 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust isolators after piping system is at operating weight.

B. Adjust limit stops on restrained-spring isolators to mount equipment at normal operating height. After equipment installation is complete, adjust limit stops so they are out of contact during normal operation.


IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT


SECTION 220553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Equipment labels. 2. Warning signs and labels. 3. Pipe labels. 4. Valve tags. 5. Warning tags.




C. Equipment Label Schedule: Include a listing of all equipment to be labeled with the proposed content for each label.

D. Valve numbering scheme.

E. Valve Schedules: For each piping system to include in maintenance manuals.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS




a. Brady Corporation b. Brimar Industries, Inc. c. Carlton Industries, LP d. Champion America e. Craftmark Pipe Markers f. emedco g. Kolbi Pipe Marker Co.



h. LEM Products Inc. i. Marking Services, Inc. j. Seton Identification Products

2. Material and Thickness: Brass, 0.032-inch minimum thickness, and having predrilled or stamped holes for attachment hardware.

3. Letter Color: White. 4. Background Color: Black. 5. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than


½-inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-quarters the size of principal lettering.


B. Plastic Labels for Equipment:


a. Brady Corporation b. Brimar Industries, Inc. c. Carlton Industries, LP d. Champion America e. Craftmark Pipe Markers f. emedco g. Kolbi Pipe Marker Co. h. LEM Products Inc. i. Marking Services, Inc. j. Seton Identification Products

2. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving, 1/8-inch-thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware.

3. Letter Color: White. 4. Background Color: Black. 5. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F. 6. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than




C. Label Content: Include equipment's Drawing designation or unique equipment number, Drawing numbers where equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules), and the Specification Section number and title where equipment is specified.



D. Equipment Label Schedule: For each item of equipment to be labeled, on 8½-by-11-inch bond paper. Tabulate equipment identification number and identify Drawing numbers where equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules) and the Specification Section number and title where equipment is specified. Equipment schedule shall be included in operation and maintenance data.



1. Brady Corporation 2. Brimar Industries, Inc. 3. Carlton Industries, LP 4. Champion America 5. Craftmark Pipe Markers 6. emedco 7. LEM Products Inc. 8. Marking Sevices Inc. 9. National Marker Company 10. Seton Identification Products 11. Stranco, Inc.

B. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving, 1/8-inch-thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware.

C. Letter Color: Black.

D. Background Color: Yellow.

E. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F.


G. Minimum Letter Size: ¼-inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches, ½-inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-quarters the size of principal lettering.



J. Label Content: Include caution and warning information plus emergency notification instructions.

2.3 PIPE LABELS




1. Actioncraft Products, Inc.; a division of Industrial Test Equipment Co., Inc. 2. Brady Corporation 3. Brimar Industries, Inc. 4. Carlton Industries, LP 5. Champion America 6. Craftmark Pipe Markers 7. emedco 8. Kolbi Pipe Marker Co. 9. LEM Products Inc. 10. Marking Sevices Inc. 11. Seton Identification Products

B. General Requirements for Manufactured Pipe Labels: Preprinted, color-coded, with lettering indicating service, and showing flow direction.


D. Self-Adhesive Pipe Labels: Printed plastic with contact-type, permanent-adhesive backing.

E. Pipe Label Contents: Include identification of piping service using same designations or abbreviations as used on Drawings; also include pipe size and an arrow indicating flow direction.

1. Flow-Direction Arrows: Integral with piping-system service lettering to accommodate both directions or as separate unit on each pipe label to indicate flow direction.

2. Lettering Size: Size letters according to ASME A13.1 for piping.

2.4 VALVE TAGS


1. Actioncraft Products, Inc.; a division of Industrial Test Equipment Co., Inc. 2. Brady Corporation 3. Brimar Industries, Inc. 4. Carlton Industries, LP 5. Champion America 6. Craftmark Pipe Markers 7. emedco 8. Kolbi Pipe Marker Co. 9. LEM Products Inc. 10. Marking Sevices Inc. 11. Seton Identification Products

B. Valve Tags: Stamped or engraved with ¼-inch letters for piping system abbreviation and ½-inch numbers.

1. Tag Material: Brass, 0.032-inch minimum thickness, and having predrilled or stamped holes for attachment hardware.

2. Fasteners: Brass wire-link chain or S-hook.



C. Valve Schedules: For each piping system, on 8½-by-11-inch bond paper. Tabulate valve number, piping system, system abbreviation (as shown on valve tag), location of valve (room or space), normal-operating position (open, closed, or modulating), and variations for identification. Mark valves for emergency shutoff and similar special uses.

1. Valve-tag schedule shall be included in operation and maintenance data.

2.5 WARNING TAGS


1. Brady Corporation 2. Brimar Industries, Inc. 3. Carlton Industries, LP 4. Champion America 5. Craftmark Pipe Markers 6. emedco 7. Kolbi Pipe Marker Co. 8. LEM Products Inc. 9. Marking Sevices Inc. 10. Seton Identification Products

B. Description: Preprinted or partially preprinted accident-prevention tags of plasticized card stock with matte finish suitable for writing.

1. Size: 3 by 5¼ inches minimum. 2. Fasteners: Brass grommet and wire. 3. Nomenclature: Large-size primary caption such as "DANGER," "CAUTION," or "DO

NOT OPERATE." 4. Color: Safety yellow background with black lettering.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Clean piping and equipment surfaces of substances that could impair bond of identification devices, including dirt, oil, grease, release agents, and incompatible primers, paints, and encapsulants.


A. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of surfaces where devices are to be applied.









A. Piping Color Coding: Painting of piping is specified in Division 9.

B. Pipe Label Locations: Locate pipe labels where piping is exposed or above accessible ceilings in finished spaces; machine rooms; accessible maintenance spaces such as shafts, tunnels, and plenums; and exterior exposed locations as follows:

1. Near each valve and control device. 2. Near each branch connection, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and terminal units.

Where flow pattern is not obvious, mark each pipe at branch. 3. Near penetrations through walls, floors, ceilings, and inaccessible enclosures. 4. At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view of concealed



C. Directional Flow Arrows: Arrows shall be used to indicate direction of flow in pipes, including pipes where flow is allowed in both directions.

D. Pipe Label Color Schedule:

1. Domestic Water Piping

a. Background: Safety green. b. Letter Colors: White.

2. Sanitary Waste and Storm Drainage Piping:

a. Background Color: Safety gray. b. Letter Color: White.


A. Install tags on valves and control devices in piping systems, except check valves, valves within factory-fabricated equipment units, shutoff valves, faucets, convenience and lawn-watering hose connections, and similar roughing-in connections of end-use fixtures and units. List tagged valves in a valve schedule.

B. Valve-Tag Application Schedule: Tag valves according to size, shape, and color scheme and with captions similar to those indicated in the following subparagraphs:




a. Cold Water: 2 inches, round. b. Hot Water: 2 inches, round.

2. Valve-Tag Colors:

a. Cold Water: Safety green. b. Hot Water: Safety green.

3. Letter Colors:

a. Cold Water: White. b. Hot Water: White.

3.6 WARNING-TAG INSTALLATION



PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION


SECTION 220719 - PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes insulating the following plumbing piping services:

1. Domestic cold-water piping. 2. Domestic hot-water piping. 3. Domestic recirculating hot-water piping. 4. Supplies and drains for handicap-accessible lavatories and sinks.


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include thermal conductivity, water-vapor permeance thickness, and jackets (both factory- and field-applied, if any).

B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

1. Detail application of protective shields, saddles, and inserts at hangers for each type of insulation and hanger.

2. Detail insulation application at pipe expansion joints for each type of insulation. 3. Detail insulation application at elbows, fittings, flanges, valves, and specialties for each

type of insulation.

C. Samples: For each type of insulation and jacket indicated. Identify each Sample, describing product and intended use. Sample sizes are as follows:

1. Preformed Pipe Insulation Materials: 12 inches long by NPS 2. 2. Manufacturer's Color Charts: For products where color is specified, show the full range

of colors available for each type of finish material.



B. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction indicating, interpreting, and certifying test results for compliance of insulation materials, sealers, attachments, cements, and jackets, with requirements indicated. Include dates of tests and test methods employed.

C. Field quality-control reports.




A. Installer Qualifications: Skilled mechanics who have successfully completed an apprenticeship program or another craft training program certified by the Department of Labor, Bureau of Apprenticeship and Training.

B. Surface-Burning Characteristics: For insulation and related materials, as determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 84 by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and adhesive, mastic, tapes, and cement material containers, with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

1. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread index of 25 or less, and smoke-developed index of 50 or less.

2. Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame-spread index of 75 or less, and smoke-developed index of 150 or less.

C. Mockups: Before installing insulation, build mockups for each type of insulation and finish listed below to demonstrate quality of insulation application and finishes. Build mockups in the location indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect. Use materials indicated for the completed Work.

1. Piping Mockups:

a. One (1) 10-foot section of NPS 1 to 1-1/2 straight pipe. b. One (1) each of a 90-degree (copper) threaded and soldered, and PEX elbow. c. One (1) each of a (copper) threaded and soldered, and PEX fitting. d. One (1) NPS 2 or smaller valve. e. One (1) support hanger including hanger shield and insert. f. One (1) threaded reducer.

2. For each mockup, fabricate cutaway sections to allow observation of application details for insulation materials, adhesives, mastics, attachments, and jackets.

3. Notify Architect seven (7) days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be constructed.

4. Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before starting insulation application. 5. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract


6. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the completed Work.

7. Demolish and remove mockups when directed.

D. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for miscellaneous components:

1. Supply and Drain Protective Shielding Guards: ICC A117.1 and ASTM E84.


A. Packaging: Insulation material containers shall be marked by manufacturer with appropriate ASTM standard designation, type and grade, and maximum use temperature.



1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate sizes and locations of supports, hangers, and insulation shields specified in Section 220529 "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."

B. Coordinate clearance requirements with piping Installer for piping insulation application. Before preparing piping Shop Drawings, establish and maintain clearance requirements for installation of insulation and field-applied jackets and finishes and for space required for maintenance.

1.8 SCHEDULING

A. Schedule insulation application after pressure testing systems and, where required, after installing and testing heat tracing. Insulation application may begin on segments that have satisfactory test results.

B. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each area of construction.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 INSULATION MATERIALS

A. Comply with requirements in "Piping Insulation Schedule, General," and "Indoor Piping Insulation Schedule," articles for where insulating materials shall be applied.

B. Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds.

C. Products that come in contact with stainless-steel shall have a leachable chloride content of less than 50 ppm when tested according to ASTM C 871.

D. Insulation materials for use on austenitic stainless-steel shall be qualified as acceptable according to ASTM C 795.

E. Foam insulation materials shall not use CFC or HCFC blowing agents in the manufacturing process.

F. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation:


a. Johns Manville; a Berkshire Hathaway company b. Knauf Insulation c. Manson Insulation Inc. d. Owens Corning

2. Type I, 850 Deg F Materials: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 547, Type I, Grade A, with factory-applied ASJ-SSL. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.



2.2 INSULATING CEMENTS

A. Mineral-Fiber Insulating Cement: Comply with ASTM C 195.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:

a. Ramco Insulation, Inc.

B. Expanded or Exfoliated Vermiculite Insulating Cement: Comply with ASTM C 196.



C. Mineral-Fiber, Hydraulic-Setting Insulating and Finishing Cement: Comply with ASTM C 449.



2.3 ADHESIVES

A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates and for bonding insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Mineral-Fiber Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A.


a. Childers Brand; H. B. Fuller Construction Products b. Eagle Bridges - Marathon Industries c. Foster Brand; H. B. Fuller Construction Products d. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.

2. For indoor applications, adhesive shall have a VOC content of 80 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

C. ASJ Adhesive, and FSK Jacket Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A for bonding insulation jacket lap seams and joints.


a. Childers Brand; H. B. Fuller Construction Products b. Eagle Bridges - Marathon Industries



c. Foster Brand; H. B. Fuller Construction Products d. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.


2.4 MASTICS

A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates; comply with MIL-PRF-19565C, Type II.

1. For indoor applications, use mastics that have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

B. Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor use on below-ambient services.


a. Foster Brand; H. B. Fuller Construction Products b. Knauf Insulation c. Vimasco Corporation

2. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM E 96, Procedure B, 0.013 perm at 43-mil dry film thickness.

3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 180 deg F. 4. Solids Content: ASTM D 1644, fifty-eight percent (58%) by volume and seventy percent

(70%) by weight. 5. Color: White.

C. Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Solvent based; suitable for outdoor use on below-ambient services.


a. Childers Brand; H. B. Fuller Construction Products b. Eagle Bridges - Marathon Industries c. Foster Brand; H. B. Fuller Construction Products

2. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM F 1249, 0.05 perm at 30-mil dry film thickness. 3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 50 to plus 220 deg F. 4. Solids Content: ASTM D 1644, thirty-three percent (33%) by volume and forty-six

percent (46%) by weight. 5. Color: White.

D. Breather Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor and outdoor use on above-ambient services.


a. Childers Brand; H. B. Fuller Construction Products



b. Eagle Bridges - Marathon Industries c. Foster Brand; H. B. Fuller Construction Products d. Knauf Insulation e. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc. f. Vimasco Corporation

2. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM F 1249, 1.8 perms at 0.0625-inch dry film thickness. 3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 180 deg F. 4. Solids Content: Sixty percent (60%) by volume and sixty-six percent (66%) by weight. 5. Color: White.

2.5 LAGGING ADHESIVES

A. Description: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class I, Grade A, and shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.

1. For indoor applications, use lagging adhesives that have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).


a. Childers Brand; H. B. Fuller Construction Products b. Foster Brand; H. B. Fuller Construction Products c. Vimasco Corporation

3. Fire-resistant, water-based lagging adhesive and coating for use indoors to adhere fire-resistant lagging cloths over pipe insulation.

4. Service Temperature Range: 0 to plus 180 deg F. 5. Color: White.

2.6 SEALANTS

A. Joint Sealants:


a. Childers Brand; H. B. Fuller Construction Products b. Eagle Bridges - Marathon Industries c. Foster Brand; H. B. Fuller Construction Products d. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc. e. Pittsburgh Corning Corporation

2. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates. 3. Permanently flexible, elastomeric sealant. 4. Service Temperature Range: Minus 100 to plus 300 deg F. 5. Color: White or gray. 6. For indoor applications, sealants shall have a VOC content of 420 g/L or less when

calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

B. FSK and Metal Jacket Flashing Sealants:




a. Childers Brand; H. B. Fuller Construction Products b. Eagle Bridges - Marathon Industries c. Foster Brand; H. B. Fuller Construction Products d. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.

2. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates. 3. Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant. 4. Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 250 deg F. 5. Color: Aluminum. 6. For indoor applications, sealants shall have a VOC content of 420 g/L or less when


C. ASJ Flashing Sealants, and Vinyl, PVDC, and PVC Jacket Flashing Sealants:


a. Childers Brand; H. B. Fuller Construction Products

2. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates. 3. Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant. 4. Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 250 deg F. 5. Color: White. 6. For indoor applications, sealants shall have a VOC content of 420 g/L or less when


2.7 FACTORY-APPLIED JACKETS

A. Insulation system schedules indicate factory-applied jackets on various applications. When factory-applied jackets are indicated, comply with the following:

1. ASJ: White, Kraft-paper, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with aluminum-foil backing; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I.

2. ASJ-SSL: ASJ with self-sealing, pressure-sensitive, acrylic-based adhesive covered by a removable protective strip; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I.

3. FSK Jacket: Aluminum-foil, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with Kraft-paper backing; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type II.

2.8 TAPES

A. ASJ Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive, complying with ASTM C 1136.


a. Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division



b. Compac Corporation c. Ideal Tape Co., Inc., an American Biltrite Company d. Knauf Insulation e. Venture Tape

2. Width: 3 inches. 3. Thickness: 11.5 mils. 4. Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch in width. 5. Elongation: Two percent (2%). 6. Tensile Strength: 40 lbf/inch in width. 7. ASJ Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of ASJ tape.

B. FSK Tape: Foil-face, vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive; complying with ASTM C 1136.


a. Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division b. Compac Corporation c. Ideal Tape Co., Inc., an American Biltrite Company d. Knauf Insulation e. Venture Tape

2. Width: 3 inches. 3. Thickness: 6.5 mils. 4. Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch in width. 5. Elongation: Two percent (2%). 6. Tensile Strength: 40 lbf/inch in width. 7. FSK Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of FSK tape.

C. PVC Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching field-applied PVC jacket with acrylic adhesive; suitable for indoor and outdoor applications.


a. Compac Corporation b. Ideal Tape Co., Inc., an American Biltrite Company c. Venture Tape

2. Width: 2 inches. 3. Thickness: 6 mils. 4. Adhesion: 64 ounces force/inch in width. 5. Elongation: Five hundred percent (500%). 6. Tensile Strength: 18 lbf/inch in width.

D. Aluminum-Foil Tape: Vapor-retarder tape with acrylic adhesive.




a. Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division b. Compac Corporation c. Ideal Tape Co., Inc., an American Biltrite Company d. Knauf Insulation e. Venture Tape

2. Width: 2 inches. 3. Thickness: 3.7 mils. 4. Adhesion: 100 ounces force/inch in width. 5. Elongation: Five percent (5%). 6. Tensile Strength: 34 lbf/inch in width.

2.9 SECUREMENTS

A. Bands:


a. ITW Insulation Systems; Illinois Tool Works, Inc. b. RPR Products, Inc.

2. Stainless-Steel: ASTM A 167 or ASTM A 240, Type 316; 0.015-inch-thick, ¾-inch-wide with wing seal or closed seal.

3. Aluminum: ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105, or 5005; Temper H-14, 0.020-inch-thick, ¾-inch-wide with wing seal or closed seal.

B. Staples: Outward-clinching insulation staples, nominal ¾-inch-wide, stainless-steel or Monel.

C. Wire: 0.062-inch soft-annealed, stainless-steel.


a. C & F Wire

2.10 PROTECTIVE SHIELDING PIPING ENCLOSURES

A. Protective Shielding Piping Enclosures:


a. Truebro b. Zurn Industries, LLC

2. Description: Manufactured plastic enclosure for covering plumbing fixture hot- and cold-water supplies and trap and drain piping.



a. Comply with ADA requirements. b. Provide manufacturer’s fixture-specific enclosure, if available.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of insulation application.

1. Verify that systems to be insulated have been tested and are free of defects. 2. Verify that surfaces to be insulated are clean and dry.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will adversely affect insulation application.

B. Coordinate insulation installation with the trade installing heat tracing. Comply with requirements for heat tracing that apply to insulation.

C. Mix insulating cements with clean potable water; if insulating cements are to be in contact with stainless-steel surfaces, use demineralized water.


A. Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; free of voids throughout the length of piping including fittings, valves, and specialties.

B. Install insulation materials, forms, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and thicknesses required for each item of pipe system as specified in insulation system schedules.

C. Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Install accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or dry state.

D. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal runs.

E. Install multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered.

F. Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to piping, fittings, and specialties.

G. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.

H. Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with adhesive recommended by insulation material manufacturer.

I. Install insulation with least number of joints practical.



J. Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in insulation at hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-barrier mastic.

1. Install insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments. 2. For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated, extend insulation on anchor

legs from point of attachment to supported item to point of attachment to structure. Taper and seal ends at attachment to structure with vapor-barrier mastic.

3. Install insert materials and install insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by insulation material manufacturer.

4. Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation. Install shields over jacket, arranged to protect jacket from tear or puncture by hanger, support, and shield.

K. Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate and wet and dry film thicknesses.

L. Install insulation with factory-applied jackets as follows:

1. Draw jacket tight and smooth. 2. Cover circumferential joints with 3-inch-wide strips, of same material as insulation

jacket. Secure strips with adhesive and outward clinching staples along both edges of strip, spaced 4 inches o.c.

3. Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1½ inches. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at bottom of pipe. Clean and dry surface to receive self-sealing lap. Staple laps with outward clinching staples along edge at 2 inches o.c.

a. For below-ambient services, apply vapor-barrier mastic over staples.

4. Cover joints and seams with tape, according to insulation material manufacturer's written instructions, to maintain vapor seal.

5. Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply vapor-barrier mastic on seams and joints and at ends adjacent to pipe flanges and fittings.

M. Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than seventy-five percent (75%) of its nominal thickness.

N. Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and cracking due to thermal movement.

O. Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas. Extend patches at least 4 inches beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal patches similar to butt joints.

P. For above-ambient services, do not install insulation to the following:

1. Vibration-control devices. 2. Testing agency labels and stamps. 3. Nameplates and data plates. 4. Cleanouts.



3.4 PENETRATIONS

A. Insulation Installation at Roof Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through roof penetrations.

1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant. 2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation above roof surface

and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation, install insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal joint with joint sealant.

3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside roof flashing at least 2 inches below top of roof flashing.

4. Seal jacket to roof flashing with flashing sealant.

B. Insulation Installation at Underground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Terminate insulation flush with sleeve seal. Seal terminations with flashing sealant.

C. Insulation Installation at Aboveground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through wall penetrations.

1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant. 2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation inside wall surface


3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside wall flashing and overlap wall flashing at least 2 inches.

4. Seal jacket to wall flashing with flashing sealant.

D. Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (That Are Not Fire Rated): Install insulation continuously through walls and partitions.

E. Insulation Installation at Fire-Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through penetrations of fire-rated walls and partitions.

1. Comply with requirements in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping" for firestopping and fire-resistive joint sealers.

F. Insulation Installation at Floor Penetrations:

1. Pipe: Install insulation continuously through floor penetrations. 2. Seal penetrations through fire-rated assemblies. Comply with requirements in

Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping."

3.5 GENERAL PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION

A. Requirements in this article generally apply to all insulation materials except where more specific requirements are specified in various pipe insulation material installation articles.

B. Insulation Installation on Fittings, Valves, Strainers, Flanges, and Unions:



1. Install insulation over fittings, valves, strainers, flanges, unions, and other specialties with continuous thermal and vapor-retarder integrity unless otherwise indicated.

2. Insulate pipe elbows using preformed fitting insulation or mitered fittings made from same material and density as adjacent pipe insulation. Each piece shall be butted tightly against adjoining piece and bonded with adhesive. Fill joints, seams, voids, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement finished to a smooth, hard, and uniform contour that is uniform with adjoining pipe insulation.

3. Insulate tee fittings with preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Cut sectional pipe insulation to fit. Butt each section closely to the next and hold in place with tie wire. Bond pieces with adhesive.

4. Insulate valves using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two (2) times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one (1) pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. For valves, insulate up to and including the bonnets, valve stuffing-box studs, bolts, and nuts. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement.

5. Insulate strainers using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two (2) times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one (1) pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement. Insulate strainers so strainer basket flange or plug can be easily removed and replaced without damaging the insulation and jacket. Provide a removable reusable insulation cover. For below-ambient services, provide a design that maintains vapor barrier.

6. Insulate flanges and unions using a section of oversized preformed pipe insulation. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two (2) times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one (1) pipe diameter, whichever is thicker.

7. Cover segmented insulated surfaces with a layer of finishing cement and coat with a mastic. Install vapor-barrier mastic for below-ambient services and a breather mastic for above-ambient services. Reinforce the mastic with fabric-reinforcing mesh. Trowel the mastic to a smooth and well-shaped contour.

8. For services not specified to receive a field-applied jacket except for flexible elastomeric and polyolefin, install fitted PVC cover over elbows, tees, strainers, valves, flanges, and unions. Terminate ends with PVC end caps. Tape PVC covers to adjoining insulation facing using PVC tape.

9. Stencil or label the outside insulation jacket of each union with the word "union." Match size and color of pipe labels.

C. Insulate instrument connections for thermometers, pressure gages, pressure temperature taps, test connections, flow meters, sensors, switches, and transmitters on insulated pipes. Shape insulation at these connections by tapering it to and around the connection with insulating cement and finish with finishing cement, mastic, and flashing sealant.

D. Install removable insulation covers at locations indicated. Installation shall conform to the following:

1. Make removable flange and union insulation from sectional pipe insulation of same thickness as that on adjoining pipe. Install same insulation jacket as adjoining pipe insulation.



2. When flange and union covers are made from sectional pipe insulation, extend insulation from flanges or union long at least two (2) times the insulation thickness over adjacent pipe insulation on each side of flange or union. Secure flange cover in place with stainless-steel or aluminum bands. Select band material compatible with insulation and jacket.

3. Construct removable valve insulation covers in same manner as for flanges, except divide the two-part section on the vertical center line of valve body.

4. When covers are made from block insulation, make two (2) halves, each consisting of mitered blocks wired to stainless-steel fabric. Secure this wire frame, with its attached insulation, to flanges with tie wire. Extend insulation at least 2 inches over adjacent pipe insulation on each side of valve. Fill space between flange or union cover and pipe insulation with insulating cement. Finish cover assembly with insulating cement applied in two (2) coats. After first coat is dry, apply and trowel second coat to a smooth finish.

5. Finish exposed surfaces with a PVC jacket.

3.6 INSTALLATION OF MINERAL-FIBER INSULATION

A. Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes:

1. Secure each layer of preformed pipe insulation to pipe with wire or bands and tighten bands without deforming insulation materials.

2. Where vapor barriers are indicated, seal longitudinal seams, end joints, and protrusions with vapor-barrier mastic and joint sealant.

3. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on above-ambient surfaces, secure laps with outward clinched staples at 6 inches o.c.

4. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on below-ambient surfaces, do not staple longitudinal tabs. Instead, secure tabs with additional adhesive as recommended by insulation material manufacturer and seal with vapor-barrier mastic and flashing sealant.

B. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges:

1. Install preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange. 2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the

thickness of pipe insulation. 3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of

adjacent straight pipe segments with mineral-fiber blanket insulation. 4. Install jacket material with manufacturer's recommended adhesive, overlap seams at least

1-inch, and seal joints with flashing sealant.

C. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows:

1. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when available.

2. When preformed insulation elbows and fittings are not available, install mitered sections of pipe insulation, to a thickness equal to adjoining pipe insulation. Secure insulation materials with wire or bands.

D. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties:

1. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when available.



2. When preformed sections are not available, install mitered sections of pipe insulation to valve body.

3. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation.

4. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application.

3.7 FIELD-APPLIED JACKET INSTALLATION

A. Where FSK jackets are indicated, install as follows:

1. Draw jacket material smooth and tight. 2. Install lap or joint strips with same material as jacket. 3. Secure jacket to insulation with manufacturer's recommended adhesive. 4. Install jacket with 1½-inch laps at longitudinal seams and 3-inch-wide joint strips at end

joints. 5. Seal openings, punctures, and breaks in vapor-retarder jackets and exposed insulation

with vapor-barrier mastic.

B. Where PVC jackets are indicated, install with 1-inch overlap at longitudinal seams and end joints. Seal with manufacturer's recommended adhesive.

1. Apply two (2) continuous beads of adhesive to seams and joints, one (1) bead under lap and the finish bead along seam and joint edge.

3.8 FINISHES

A. Insulation with ASJ or Other Paintable Jacket Material: Paint jacket with paint system identified below.

1. Flat Acrylic Finish: Two (2) finish coats over a primer that is compatible with jacket material and finish coat paint. Add fungicidal agent to render fabric mildew proof.

a. Finish Coat Material: Interior, flat, latex-emulsion size.

B. Color: Final color as selected by Architect and Owner from manufacturer’s entire range. Vary first and second coats to allow visual inspection of the completed Work.




1. Inspect pipe, fittings, strainers, and valves, randomly selected by Architect, by removing field-applied jacket and insulation in layers in reverse order of their installation. Extent of inspection shall be limited to three (3) locations of straight pipe, three (3) locations of threaded fittings, three (3) locations of welded fittings, three (3) locations of threaded valves for each pipe service defined in the Pipe Insulation Schedule on the Drawings.

2. If fewer than the specified quantity of test locations exist for any particular installation, all locations of that particular installation shall be tested.



C. All insulation applications will be considered defective Work if sample inspection reveals noncompliance with requirements.

3.10 PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL

A. Acceptable preformed pipe and tubular insulation materials and thicknesses are identified for each piping system and pipe size range. If more than one (1) material is listed for a piping system, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option.

B. Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated, do not install insulation on the following:

1. Drainage piping located in crawl spaces. 2. Underground piping. 3. Chrome-plated pipes and fittings unless there is a potential for personnel injury.

3.11 PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE

A. Refer to Schedule on Drawings.

B. Exposed Piping Below Accessible Lavatories:

1. Protective Shielding Piping Enclosure; refer to Fixture Schedule on Drawings for Basis-of-Design.

3.12 INDOOR, FIELD-APPLIED JACKET SCHEDULE

A. Install jacket over insulation material. For insulation with factory-applied jacket, install the field-applied jacket over the factory-applied jacket. If more than one (1) material is listed, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option.

B. Piping, Concealed:

1. None. 2. PVC: 20 mils thick.

C. Piping, Exposed:

1. Straight Lengths of Pipe:

a. None. b. PVC, 30 mils thick.

2. Fittings, Unions, End Caps, Traps, Valves, Etc.:

a. Factory-fabricated (if available; if not field-fabricated) Shaped PVC Fitting Covers: 30 mils thick.

3. Exposed Piping Below Accessible Lavatories:

a. None. b. PVC, 30 mils thick.




DOMESTIC WATER PIPING


SECTION 221116 - DOMESTIC WATER PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Under-building-slab and aboveground domestic water pipes, tubes, and fittings inside the building.


A. Product Data: For pipe; standard, transition and dielectric fittings; and joining materials.


A. System purging and disinfecting activities report.



A. Interruption of Existing Water Service: Do not interrupt water service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary water service according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Water Authority, Construction Manager and Owner’s Director of Construction and Security no fewer than five (5) days in advance of proposed interruption of water service.

2. Do not interrupt water service without Water Authority’s and Owner’s Director of Construction and Security’s written permission.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Comply with requirements in "Piping Schedule" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting materials, and joining methods for specific services, service locations, and pipe sizes.

B. Potable-water piping and components shall comply with NSF 14 and NSF 61 Annex G. Plastic piping components shall be marked with "NSF-pw."



2.2 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS

A. Hard Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type Lwater tube, drawn temper.

B. Cast-Copper, Solder-Joint Fittings: ASME B16.18, pressure fittings.

C. Wrought-Copper, Solder-Joint Fittings: ASME B16.22, wrought-copper pressure fittings.

D. Bronze Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 150, with solder-joint ends.

E. Copper Unions:

1. MSS SP-123. 2. Cast-copper-alloy, hexagonal-stock body. 3. Ball-and-socket, metal-to-metal seating surfaces. 4. Solder-joint or threaded ends.

F. Copper Pressure-Seal-Joint Fittings:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one (1) of the followings:

a. Apollo Valves b. Elkhart Products Corporation c. NIBCO Inc. d. Viega

2. Fittings for NPS 2and Smaller: Wrought-copper fitting with EPDM-rubber, O-ring seal in

each end. 3. Fittings for NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Cast-bronze or wrought-copper fitting with EPDM-

rubber, O-ring seal in each end. 4. Fittings: Bronze or copper shall conform to the material requirements of ASME B16.18

or ASME B16.22, and the performance requirements of IAPMO PS117, and ICC LC1002. Fittings shall have an EPDM sealing element and Smart Connect (SC) feature. 2½-inch thru 4-inch shall have a 420-stainless-steel grip ring, PBT separator ring, EPDM sealing element and Smart Connect (SC) feature. Fittings with EPDM sealing element shall conform to NSF 61-pw-G when installed in a potable water system.

G. Appurtenances for Grooved-End Copper Tubing:


a. Anvil International b. Shurjoint Piping Products c. Victaulic Company

2. Bronze Fittings for Grooved-End, Copper Tubing: ASTM B 75 copper tube or ASTM B 584 bronze castings.

3. Mechanical Couplings for Grooved-End Copper Tubing:



a. Copper-tube dimensions and design similar to AWWA C606. b. Ferrous housing sections. c. EPDM-rubber gaskets suitable for hot and cold water. d. Bolts and nuts. e. Minimum Pressure Rating: 300 psig.

2.3 PIPING JOINING MATERIALS

A. Metal, Pipe-Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel unless otherwise indicated.

B. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys.

C. Flux: ASTM B 813, water flushable.

D. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for general-duty brazing unless otherwise indicated.

2.4 TRANSITION FITTINGS

A. General Requirements:

1. Same size as pipes to be joined. 2. Pressure rating at least equal to pipes to be joined. 3. End connections compatible with pipes to be joined.

B. Fitting-Type Transition Couplings: Manufactured piping coupling or specified piping system fitting.

C. Sleeve-Type Transition Coupling: AWWA C219.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one (1) of the followings:

a. Cascade Waterworks Manufacturing b. Dresser, Inc.; Dresser Piping Specialties c. Hays Fluid Controls; a division of ROMAC Industries Inc. d. JCM Industries e. Smith-Blair, Inc. f. Viking Johnson

2.5 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS

A. General Requirements: Assembly of copper alloy and ferrous materials with separating nonconductive insulating material. Include end connections compatible with pipes to be joined.

B. Dielectric Unions:


a. Capitol Manufacturing Company; member of the Phoenix Forge Group b. Central Plastics Company



c. Hart Industries International, Inc. d. Jomar International e. Matco-Norca f. McDonald, A. Y. Mfg. Co. g. Watts; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. h. Wilkins; a Zurn company

2. Standard: ASSE 1079. 3. Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum at 180 deg F. 4. End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous.

C. Dielectric Flanges:


a. Capitol Manufacturing Company; member of the Phoenix Forge Group b. Central Plastics Company c. Matco-Norca d. Watts; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. e. Wilkins; a Zurn company

2. Standard: ASSE 1079. 3. Factory-fabricated, bolted, companion-flange assembly. 4. Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum at 180 deg F 5. End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous; threaded solder-joint

copper alloy and threaded ferrous.

D. Dielectric-Flange Insulating Kits:


a. Advance Products & Systems, Inc. b. Calpico, Inc. c. Central Plastics Company d. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.

2. Nonconducting materials for field assembly of companion flanges. 3. Pressure Rating: 150 psig. 4. Gasket: Neoprene or phenolic. 5. Bolt Sleeves: Phenolic or polyethylene. 6. Washers: Phenolic with steel backing washers.

E. Dielectric Nipples:


a. Elster Perfection Corporation b. Grinnell Mechanical Products; Tyco Fire Products LP



c. Matco-Norca d. Precision Plumbing Products, Inc. e. Victaulic Company

2. Standard: IAPMO PS 66. 3. Electroplated steel nipple complying with ASTM F 1545. 4. Pressure Rating and Temperature: 300 psig at 225 deg F. 5. End Connections: Male threaded or grooved. 6. Lining: Inert and noncorrosive, propylene.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of domestic water piping. Indicated locations and arrangements are used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on coordination drawings.

B. Install copper tubing under building slab according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook."

C. Install underground copper tube in PE encasement according to ASTM A 674 or AWWA C105/A21.5.

D. Install shutoff valve immediately upstream of each dielectric fitting.

E. Install domestic water piping level without pitch and plumb.

F. Rough-in domestic water piping for water-meter installation according to utility company's requirements.

G. Install seismic restraints on piping. Comply with requirements for seismic-restraint devices in Section 220548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."

H. Install piping concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building occupants unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas.

I. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise.

J. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal, and coordinate with other services occupying that space.

K. Install piping to permit valve servicing.

L. Install nipples, unions, special fittings, and valves with pressure ratings the same as or higher than the system pressure rating used in applications below unless otherwise indicated.

M. Install piping free of sags and bends.



N. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

O. Install unions in copper tubing at final connection to each piece of equipment, machine, and specialty.

P. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for sleeves specified in Section 220517 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Plumbing Piping."

Q. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs. Comply with requirements for sleeve seals specified in Section 220517 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Plumbing Piping."

R. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for escutcheons specified in Section 220518 "Escutcheons for Plumbing Piping."


A. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.

B. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipes, tubes, and fittings before assembly.

C. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:

1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads. 2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or

damaged.

D. Brazed Joints for Copper Tubing: Comply with CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," "Brazed Joints" chapter.

E. Soldered Joints for Copper Tubing: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux to end of tube. Join copper tube and fittings according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook."

F. Pressure-Sealed Joints for Copper Tubing: Join copper tube and pressure-seal fittings with tools recommended by fitting manufacturer.

G. Joint Construction for Grooved-End Copper Tubing: Make joints according to AWWA C606. Roll groove ends of tubes. Lubricate and install gasket over ends of tubes or tube and fitting. Install coupling housing sections over gasket with keys seated in tubing grooves. Install and tighten housing bolts.

H. Joints for Dissimilar-Material Piping: Make joints using adapters compatible with materials of both piping systems.

3.3 TRANSITION FITTING INSTALLATION

A. Install transition couplings at joints of dissimilar piping.

B. Transition Fittings in Underground Domestic Water Piping:



1. Fittings for NPS 1-1/2 and Smaller: Fitting-type coupling. 2. Fittings for NPS 2 and Larger: Sleeve-type coupling.

3.4 DIELECTRIC FITTING INSTALLATION

A. Install dielectric fittings in piping at connections of dissimilar metal piping and tubing.

B. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 2 and Smaller: Use dielectric couplings or nipples.


A. Comply with requirements for seismic-restraint devices in Section 220548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."

B. Comply with requirements for pipe hanger, support products, and installation in Section 220529 "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."

1. Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or 42, clamps. 2. Individual, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs:

a. 100 Feetand Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers. b. Longer Than 100 Feet: MSS Type 43, adjustable roller hangers. c. Longer Than 100 Feet if Indicated: MSS Type 49, spring cushion rolls.

3. Multiple, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs 100 Feet or Longer: MSS Type 44, pipe rolls. Support pipe rolls on trapeze.

4. Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers.

C. Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor.

D. Rod diameter may be reduced one size for double-rod hangers, to a minimum of 3/8-inch.

E. Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters:

1. NPS 3/4and Smaller: 60 inches with 3/8-inch rod. 2. NPS 1 and NPS 1-1/4: 72 inches with 3/8-inch rod. 3. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2: 96 inches with 3/8-inchrod. 4. NPS 2-1/2: 108 inches with ½-inchrod. 5. NPS 3 to NPS 5: 10 feet with ½-inch rod. 6. NPS 6: 10 feet with 5/8-inch rod. 7. NPS 8: 10 feet with ¾-inch rod.

F. Install supports for vertical copper tubing every 10 feet.

G. Support piping and tubing not listed in this article according to MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's written instructions.

3.6 CONNECTIONS




B. Connect domestic water piping to existing building domestic water piping with shutoff valve; extend and connect to the following:

1. Plumbing Fixtures: Cold- and hot-water-supply piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than that required by plumbing code.

3.7 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components. Comply with requirements for identification materials and installation in Section 220553 "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."

B. Label pressure piping with system operating pressure.


A. Perform the following tests and inspections:

1. Piping Inspections:

a. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it has been inspected and approved by authorities having jurisdiction.

b. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least one (1) day before inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction:

1) Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or closing in after roughing in and before setting fixtures.

2) Final Inspection: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to observe tests specified in "Piping Tests" Subparagraph below and to ensure compliance with requirements.

c. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass tests or inspections, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection.

d. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Piping Tests:

a. Fill domestic water piping. Check components to determine that they are not air bound and that piping is full of water.

b. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit a separate report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested.

c. Leave new, altered, extended, or replaced domestic water piping uncovered and unconcealed until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or concealed before it was tested.

d. Cap and subject piping to static water pressure of 50 psig above operating pressure, without exceeding pressure rating of piping system materials. Isolate test source and allow it to stand for 4 hours. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects that must be repaired.



e. Repair leaks and defects with new materials, and retest piping or portion thereof until satisfactory results are obtained.

f. Prepare reports for tests and for corrective action required.

B. Domestic water piping will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.


3.9 ADJUSTING

A. Perform the following adjustments before operation:

1. Close drain valves, hydrants, and hose bibbs. 2. Open shutoff valves to fully open position. 3. Open throttling valves to proper setting. 4. Remove plugs used during testing of piping and for temporary sealing of piping during

installation. 5. Remove and clean strainer screens. Close drain valves and replace drain plugs. 6. Remove filter cartridges from housings and verify that cartridges are as specified for

application where used and are clean and ready for use. 7. Check plumbing specialties and verify proper settings, adjustments, and operation.

3.10 CLEANING

A. Clean and disinfect potable domestic water piping as follows:

1. Purge new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired before using.

2. Use purging and disinfecting procedures prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction; if methods are not prescribed, use procedures described in either AWWA C651 or AWWA C652 or follow procedures described below:

a. Flush piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water does not appear at outlets.

b. Fill and isolate system according to either of the following:

1) Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least 50 ppm of chlorine. Isolate with valves and allow to stand for 24 hours.

2) Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least 200 ppm of chlorine. Isolate and allow to stand for 3 hours.

c. Flush system with clean, potable water until no chlorine is in water coming from system after the standing time.

d. Repeat procedures if biological examination shows contamination. e. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Clean non-potable domestic water piping as follows:

1. Purge new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired before using.



2. Use purging procedures prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction or; if methods are not prescribed, follow procedures described below:

a. Flush piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water does not appear at outlets.

b. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authorities having jurisdiction. Repeat procedures if biological examination shows contamination.

C. Prepare and submit reports of purging and disinfecting activities. Include copies of water-sample approvals from authorities having jurisdiction.

D. Clean interior of domestic water piping system. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.


A. Refer to Pipe and Fitting Schedules on Plumbing Drawings. Drawings indicate what types to use.

B. Transition and special fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping rating may be used in applications below unless otherwise indicated.

C. Flanges and unions may be used for aboveground piping joints unless otherwise indicated.

3.12 VALVE SCHEDULE

A. Refer to Valve Schedule on plumbing drawings. Drawings indicate valve types to be used. Where specific valve types are not indicated, the following requirements apply:

1. Shutoff Duty: Use ball or gate valves for piping NPS 2and smaller. 2. Throttling Duty: Use ball or globe valves for piping NPS 2 and smaller. 3. Drain Duty: Hose-end drain valves.


DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES


SECTION 221119 - DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Vacuum breakers. 2. Temperature-limiting devices for individual fixtures. 3. Drain valves. 4. Water-hammer arresters. 5. Trap-seal protection devices. 6. Flexible connectors.



B. Shop Drawings: For domestic water piping specialties.

1. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.


A. Field quality-control reports.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For domestic water piping specialties to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR PIPING SPECIALTIES

A. Potable-water piping and components shall comply with NSF 61 Annex G and NSF 14. Mark "NSF-pw" on plastic piping components.


A. Minimum Working Pressure for Domestic Water Piping Specialties: 125 psig unless otherwise indicated.



2.3 VACUUM BREAKERS

A. Pipe-Applied, Atmospheric-Type Vacuum Breakers:


a. Ames Co. b. Ames Fire & Waterworks c. Apollo Valves; Conbraco Industries, Inc. d. Cash Acme e. FEBCO f. Rain Bird Corporation g. Toro Company (The) h. Watts; a Watts Water Technologies company i. Zurn Industries, LLC

2. Standard: ASSE 1001. 3. Size: NPS 1/4 to NPS 3, as required to match connected piping. 4. Body: Bronze. 5. Inlet and Outlet Connections: Threaded. 6. Finish: Chrome plated.

B. Hose-Connection Vacuum Breakers:


a. Apollo Valves; Conbraco Industries, Inc. b. Arrowhead Brass Products c. Cash Acme d. Legend Valve & Fitting, Inc. e. MIFAB, Inc. f. Prier Products, Inc. g. Watts; a Watts Water Technologies company h. Woodford Manufacturing Company i. Zurn Industries, LLC

2. Standard: ASSE 1011. 3. Body: Bronze, nonremovable, with manual drain. 4. Outlet Connection: Garden-hose threaded complying with ASME B1.20.7. 5. Finish: Rough bronze.

C. Pressure Vacuum Breakers:


a. Ames Co. b. Ames Fire & Waterworks c. Apollo Valves; Conbraco Industries, Inc.



d. FEBCO e. Flomatic Corporation f. Toro Company (The) g. Watts; a Watts Water Technologies company h. Zurn Industries, LLC

2. Standard: ASSE 1020. 3. Operation: Continuous-pressure applications. 4. Pressure Loss: 5 psig maximum, through middle third of flow range. 5. Accessories:

a. Valves: Ball type, on inlet and outlet.

2.4 TEMPERATURE-LIMITING DEVICES FOR INDIVIDUAL FIXTURES

A. Individual-Fixture, Temperature-Limiting Devices:


a. Acorn Engineering Company b. Apollo Valves; Conbraco Industries, Inc. c. Cash Acme d. Honeywell Water Controls e. Lawler Manufacturing Company, Inc. f. Leonard Valve Company g. Powers h. Watts; a Watts Water Technologies company i. Zurn Industries, LLC

2. Standards: ASSE 1070, water-temperature-limiting devices; NSF 61-9, lead-free. 3. Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum unless otherwise indicated. 4. Body: Cast bronze body with brass interior components. 5. Temperature Control: Adjustable. 6. Inlets and Outlet: Threaded. 7. Finish: Rough or chrome-plated bronze. 8. Tempered-Water Setting: 105 deg F. 9. Tempered-Water Design Flow Rate: 0.5 gpm.

2.5 DRAIN VALVES

A. Ball-Valve-Type, Hose-End Drain Valves:

1. Standard: MSS SP-110 for standard-port, two-piece ball valves. 2. Pressure Rating: 400-psig minimum CWP. 3. Size: NPS 3/4. 4. Body: Copper alloy. 5. Ball: Chrome-plated brass. 6. Seats and Seals: Replaceable. 7. Handle: Vinyl-covered steel. 8. Inlet: Threaded or solder joint.



9. Outlet: Threaded, short nipple with garden-hose thread complying with ASME B1.20.7 and cap with brass chain.

B. Gate-Valve-Type, Hose-End Drain Valves:

1. Standard: MSS SP-80 for gate valves. 2. Pressure Rating: Class 125. 3. Size: NPS 3/4. 4. Body: ASTM B 62 bronze. 5. Inlet: NPS 3/4 threaded or solder joint. 6. Outlet: Garden-hose thread complying with ASME B1.20.7 and cap with brass chain.

2.6 WATER-HAMMER ARRESTERS

A. Water-Hammer Arresters:


a. AMTROL, Inc. b. Jay R. Smith Mfg. Co. c. Josam Company d. MIFAB, Inc. e. Precision Plumbing Products f. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Company, Inc. g. Tyler Pipe; a subsidiary of McWane Inc. h. Watts; a Watts Water Technologies company i. Zurn Industries, LLC

2. Standard: ASSE 1010 or PDI-WH 201. 3. Type: Copper tube with piston. 4. Size: ASSE 1010, Sizes AA and A through F, or PDI-WH 201, Sizes A through F.

2.7 TRAP SEAL PROTECTION DEVICES

A. Barrier Type Trap Seal Protection Devices:


a. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc. b. SureSeal Manufacturing c. Zurn Industries, LLC d. IPS Corporation (Trap-Tite)

2. Standard: ASSE 1072-2007. 3. Body: ABS or HDPE plastic. 4. Diaphragm and Sealing Gasket: Neoprene or EPDM rubber. 5. Size: 2-, 3-, or 4-inch, to match floor drain outlet. 6. Gravity Drain Outlet Connection: Compression fit sealing gasket 80 durometer.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install individual-fixture water-temperature limiting devices with check stops and according to manufacturer’s instructions and requirements.

1. Install lavatory water-temperature limiting devices within under-lavatory enclosures.

B. Install water-hammer arresters in water piping according to PDI-WH 201, sized and located per manufacturer’s instructions and best recommendations for fixture types and quantities served.

C. Install barrier-type trap seal protection devices in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and requirements. Confirm/provide water trap seal prior to trap seal protection device installation.



1. Test domestic water piping specialties according to authorities having jurisdiction and the device's reference standard.

B. Domestic water piping specialties will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.


3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Set field-adjustable temperature set points of water-temperature limiting devices.


SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING


SECTION 221316 - SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes Sanitary, Waste, Vent piping and shall also apply to project’s Storm piping work scope:

1. Pipe, tube, and fittings. 2. Specialty pipe fittings. 3. Encasement for underground metal piping.




A. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For waste and vent piping, accessories, and components, from manufacturer.

1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of assembled components or on calculation.

2. Detailed description of piping anchorage devices on which the certification is based and their installation requirements.



A. Interruption of Existing Sanitary Waste and Storm Service: Do not interrupt service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary service according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Architect, Construction Manager and Owner’s Director of Construction and Security no fewer than five (5) days in advance of proposed interruption of sanitary waste and or storm service.

2. Do not proceed with interruption of sanitary waste and or storm service without Owner's Director of Construction and Security’s written permission.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Components and installation shall be capable of withstanding the following minimum working pressure unless otherwise indicated:

1. Soil, Waste, Vent and Storm Piping: 10-foot head of water. 2. Gravity and Pumped Condensate Piping: 10-foot head of water.

B. Seismic Performance: Soil, waste, vent and storm piping and support and installation shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.


A. Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.

B. Comply with requirements in "Piping Schedule" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting materials, and joining methods for specific services, service locations, and pipe sizes.

2.3 HUB-AND-SPIGOT, CAST-IRON SOIL PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A 74, Service and Extra Heavy class(es).

B. Gaskets: ASTM C 564, rubber.

C. Caulking Materials: ASTM B 29, pure lead and oakum or hemp fiber.

2.4 HUBLESS, CAST-IRON SOIL PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A 888 or CISPI 301.

B. Heavy-Duty, Hubless-Piping Couplings:


a. ANACO-Husky b. Charlotte Pipe and Foundry Company c. Clamp-All Corp. d. Mission Rubber Company, LLC; a division of MCP Industries e. Tyler Pipe; a subsidiary of McWane Inc.

2. Standards: ASTM C 1277 and ASTM C 1540. 3. Description: Stainless-steel shield with stainless-steel bands and tightening devices; and

ASTM C 564, rubber sleeve with integral, center pipe stop.

2.5 PVC PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Comply with NSF 14, "Plastics Piping Systems Components and Related Materials," for plastic piping components. Include marking with "NSF-dwv" for plastic drain, waste, and vent piping and "NSF-sewer" for plastic sewer piping.



B. Solid-Wall PVC Pipe: ASTM D 2665, drain, waste, and vent.

C. PVC Socket Fittings: ASTM D 2665, made to ASTM D 3311, drain, waste, and vent patterns and to fit Schedule 40 pipe.

D. Adhesive Primer: ASTM F 656.

E. Solvent Cement: ASTM D 2564.

2.6 SPECIALTY PIPE FITTINGS

A. Transition Couplings:

1. Fitting-Type Transition Couplings: Manufactured piping coupling or specified piping system fitting.

2. Shielded, Non-Pressure Transition Couplings:

a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:

1) Cascade Waterworks Mfg. Co. 2) Mission Rubber Company, LLC; a division of MCP Industries

b. Standard: ASTM C 1460. c. Description: Elastomeric or rubber sleeve with full-length, corrosion-resistant

outer shield and corrosion-resistant-metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each end.

d. End Connections: Same size as and compatible with pipes to be joined.

B. Dielectric Fittings:

1. Dielectric Unions:

a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one (1) of the following:

1) A.Y. McDonald Mfg. Co. 2) Capitol Manufacturing Company 3) Central Plastics Company 4) HART Industrial Unions, LLC 5) Jomar Valve 6) Matco-Norca 7) Watts; a Watts Water Technologies company 8) Wilkins 9) Zurn Industries, LLC

b. Description:

1) Standard: ASSE 1079. 2) Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum at 180 deg F.



3) End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous.

2. Dielectric Flanges:


1) Capitol Manufacturing Company 2) Central Plastics Company 3) Matco-Norca 4) Watts; a Watts Water Technologies company 5) Wilkins 6) Zurn Industries, LLC

b. Description:

1) Standard: ASSE 1079. 2) Factory-fabricated, bolted, companion-flange assembly. 3) Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum at 180 deg F. 4) End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous; threaded

solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous.

3. Dielectric-Flange Insulating Kits:


1) Advance Products & Systems, Inc. 2) Calpico, Inc. 3) Central Plastics Company 4) Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.

b. Description:

1) Nonconducting materials for field assembly of companion flanges. 2) Pressure Rating: 150 psig. 3) Gasket: Neoprene or phenolic. 4) Bolt Sleeves: Phenolic or polyethylene. 5) Washers: Phenolic with steel backing washers.

4. Dielectric Nipples:


1) Elster Perfection Corporation 2) Grinnell Mechanical Products 3) Matco-Norca 4) Precision Plumbing Products 5) Victaulic Company



b. Description:

1) Standard: IAPMO PS 66. 2) Electroplated steel nipple. 3) Pressure Rating: 300 psig at 225 deg F. 4) End Connections: Male threaded or grooved. 5) Lining: Inert and noncorrosive, propylene.

2.7 ENCASEMENT FOR UNDERGROUND METAL PIPING

A. Standard: ASTM A 674 or AWWA C105/A 21.5.

B. Material: Linear low-density polyethylene film of 0.008-inch or high-density, cross-laminated polyethylene film of 0.004-inch minimum thickness.

C. Form: Sheet or tube.

D. Color: Black or natural.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems.

1. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations.

2. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on coordination drawings.

B. Install piping in concealed locations unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas.

C. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise.

D. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.

E. Install piping to permit valve servicing.

F. Install piping at indicated slopes.

G. Install piping free of sags and bends.

H. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

I. Install piping to allow application of insulation.



J. Install seismic restraints on piping per the requirements of the Connecticut State Building Code. Comply with requirements for seismic-restraint devices specified in Section 220548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."

K. Make changes in direction for soil and waste drainage and vent, and storm piping using appropriate branches, bends, and long-sweep bends.

1. Sanitary tees and short-sweep ¼-bends may be used on vertical stacks if change in direction of flow is from horizontal to vertical.

2. Use long-turn, double Y-branch and 1/8-bend fittings if two (2) fixtures are installed back to back or side by side with common drain pipe.

a. Straight tees, elbows, and crosses may be used on vent lines.

3. Do not change direction of flow more than 90 degrees. 4. Use proper size of standard increasers and reducers if pipes of different sizes are

connected.

a. Reducing size of waste piping in direction of flow is prohibited.

L. Lay buried building waste piping beginning at low point of each system.

1. Install true to grades and alignment indicated, with unbroken continuity of invert. Place hub ends of piping upstream.

2. Install required gaskets according to manufacturer's written instructions for use of lubricants, cements, and other installation requirements.

3. Maintain swab in piping and pull past each joint as completed.

M. Install gravity soil and waste and vent and storm piping at the following minimum slopes unless otherwise indicated:

1. Building Sanitary Waste and Storm: Two percent (2%) downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 3 and smaller; two percent (2%) downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 4 and larger.

2. Horizontal Sanitary Waste and Storm Piping: Two percent (2%) downward in direction of flow.

3. Vent Piping: One percent (1%) down toward vertical fixture vent or toward vent stack.

N. Install cast-iron soil piping according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook," Chapter IV, "Installation of Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings."

1. Install encasement on underground piping according to ASTM A 674 or AWWA C105/A 21.5.

O. Install aboveground PVC piping according to ASTM D 2665.

P. Install underground PVC piping according to ASTM D 2321.

Q. Plumbing Specialties:



1. Install backwater valves in pumped condensate branch connections to storm gravity-flow piping.

a. Comply with requirements for backwater valves specified in Section 221319 "Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties."

b. Comply with requirements for cleanouts specified in Section 221319 "Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties."

R. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is inspected and approved by authorities having jurisdiction.

S. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors.

1. Comply with requirements for sleeves specified in Section 220517 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Plumbing Piping."

T. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs.

1. Comply with requirements for sleeve seals specified in Section 220517 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Plumbing Piping."

U. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors.

1. Comply with requirements for escutcheons specified in Section 220518 "Escutcheons for Plumbing Piping."


A. Join hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil piping with gasket joints according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook" for compression joints.

B. Join hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil piping with calked joints according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook" for lead-and-oakum calked joints.

C. Join hubless, cast-iron soil piping according to CISPI 310 and CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook" for hubless-piping coupling joints.

D. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1.

1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. 2. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves

as follows:

a. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry seal threading is specified.

b. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged.

c. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.

E. Plastic, Non-Pressure-Piping, Solvent-Cement Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe and fittings according to the following:



1. Comply with ASTM F 402 for safe-handling practice of cleaners, primers, and solvent cements.

2. PVC Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2855 and ASTM D 2665 appendixes.

3.3 SPECIALTY PIPE FITTING INSTALLATION

A. Transition Couplings:

1. Install transition couplings at joints of piping with small differences in ODs. 2. In Waste Drainage Piping: Shielded, non-pressure transition couplings. 3. In Aboveground Force Main Piping: Fitting-type transition couplings.

B. Dielectric Fittings:

1. Install dielectric fittings in piping at connections of dissimilar metal piping and tubing. 2. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 2 and Smaller: Use dielectric unions. 3. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Use dielectric flanges. 4. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 5 and Larger: Use dielectric flange kits.

3.4 VALVE INSTALLATION

A. Backwater Valves: Install backwater valves in pumped condensate branch connection to gravity storm piping systems.

1. Horizontal Piping: Horizontal backwater valves. Use normally closed type unless otherwise indicated.

2. Install backwater valves in accessible locations. 3. Comply with requirements for backwater valve specified in Section 221319 "Sanitary

Waste Piping Specialties."


A. Comply with requirements for seismic-restraint devices specified in Section 220548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."

B. Comply with requirements for pipe hanger and support devices and installation specified in Section 220529 "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."

1. Install carbon-steel pipe hangers for horizontal piping in noncorrosive environments. 2. Install stainless-steel or fiberglass pipe hangers for horizontal piping in corrosive

environments. 3. Install carbon-steel pipe support clamps for vertical piping in noncorrosive environments. 4. Install stainless-steel pipe support clamps for vertical piping in corrosive environments. 5. Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or Type 42, clamps. 6. Install individual, straight, horizontal piping runs:

a. 100 Feet and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers. b. Longer Than 100 Feet: MSS Type 43, adjustable roller hangers. c. Longer Than 100 Feet if Indicated: MSS Type 49, spring cushion rolls.



7. Multiple, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs 100 Feet or Longer: MSS Type 44, pipe rolls. Support pipe rolls on trapeze.

8. Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers.

C. Support horizontal piping and tubing within 12 inches of each fitting, valve, and coupling.

D. Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor.

E. Rod diameter may be reduced one (1) size for double-rod hangers, with 3/8-inch minimum rods.

F. Install hangers for cast-iron soil piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters:

1. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2: 60 inches with 3/8-inch rod. 2. NPS 3: 60 inches with ½-inch rod. 3. NPS 4 and NPS 5: 60 inches with 5/8-inch rod. 4. NPS 6 and NPS 8: 60 inches with ¾-inch rod. 5. NPS 10 and NPS 12: 60 inches with 7/8-inch rod. 6. Spacing for 10-foot lengths may be increased to 10 feet. Spacing for fittings is limited to

60 inches.

G. Install supports for vertical cast-iron soil piping every 15 feet.

H. Install hangers for PVC piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters:

1. NPS 2 and Smaller: 48 inches with 3/8-inch rod. 2. NPS 3: 48 inches with ½-inch rod. 3. NPS 4 and NPS 5: 48 inches with 5/8-inch rod. 4. NPS 6 and NPS 8: 48 inches with ¾-inch rod. 5. NPS 10 and NPS 12: 48 inches with 7/8-inch rod.

I. Install supports for vertical PVC piping every 48 inches.

J. Support piping and tubing not listed above according to MSS SP-58 and manufacturer's written instructions.

3.6 CONNECTIONS


B. Connect soil and waste piping to exterior sanitary sewerage piping. Use transition fitting to join dissimilar piping materials.

C. Connect waste and vent piping to the following:

1. Plumbing Fixtures: Connect waste piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than required by plumbing code.

2. Plumbing Specialties: Connect waste and vent piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than required by plumbing code.



3. Install test tees (wall cleanouts) in conductors near floor and floor cleanouts with cover flush with floor.

4. Install horizontal backwater valves concealed from public view but readily accessible. 5. Comply with requirements for backwater valves, cleanouts and drains specified in

Section 221319 "Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties." 6. Equipment: Connect waste piping as indicated.

a. Provide shutoff valve if indicated and union for each connection.

D. Where installing piping adjacent to equipment, allow space for service and maintenance of equipment.

3.7 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify exposed sanitary waste and vent and storm piping.

B. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 220553 "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."


A. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least 24 hours before inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or closing-in after roughing-in and before setting fixtures.

2. Final Inspection: Arrange for final inspection by authorities having jurisdiction to observe tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements.

B. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass test or inspection, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection.

C. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having jurisdiction.

D. Test sanitary waste, vent, storm and gravity and pumped condensate piping according to procedures of authorities having jurisdiction or, in absence of published procedures, as follows:

1. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired.

a. If testing is performed in segments, submit separate report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested.

2. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced waste and vent piping until it has been tested and approved.

a. Expose work that was covered or concealed before it was tested.

3. Roughing-in Plumbing Test Procedure: Test waste and vent piping except outside leaders on completion of roughing-in.



a. Close openings in piping system and fill with water to point of overflow, but not less than 10-foot head of water.

b. From 15 minutes before inspection starts to completion of inspection, water level must not drop.

c. Inspect joints for leaks.

4. Finished Plumbing Test Procedure: After plumbing fixtures have been set and traps filled with water, test connections and prove they are gastight and watertight.

a. Plug vent-stack openings on roof and building drains where they leave building. Introduce air into piping system equal to pressure of 1-inch wg.

b. Use U-tube or manometer inserted in trap of water closet to measure this pressure. c. Air pressure must remain constant without introducing additional air throughout

period of inspection. d. Inspect plumbing fixture connections for gas and water leaks.

5. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping, or portion thereof, until satisfactory results are obtained.

6. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action.


A. Clean interior of piping. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.

B. Protect sanitary waste and vent piping during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt and debris and to prevent damage from traffic and construction work.

C. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day and when work stops.

D. Repair damage to adjacent materials caused by waste and vent piping installation.


A. Flanges and unions may be used on aboveground pressure piping unless otherwise indicated.

B. Refer to Schedules on Drawings.


SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES


SECTION 221319 - SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes specialties for project sanitary, waste, vent, and storm piping systems:

1. Backwater valves. 2. Cleanouts. 3. Air Admittance Valves 4. Through-penetration firestop assemblies. 5. Miscellaneous sanitary drainage piping specialties.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. ABS: Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene.

B. FOG: Fats, oils, and greases.

C. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride.


A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include (as applicable) rated capacities, operating characteristics, and accessories for the following:

1. Backwater Valves. 2. Cleanouts 3. Air Admittance Valves


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For sanitary waste piping specialties to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ASSEMBLY DESCRIPTIONS

A. Sanitary waste piping specialties shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.

B. Comply with NSF 14 for plastic sanitary waste piping specialty components.



C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing, and marked for intended location and application.

2.2 BACKWATER VALVES

A. Horizontal, Plastic Backwater Valves:


a. Canplas LLC b. IPS Corporation c. NDS Inc. d. Oatey e. Plastic Oddities f. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Company, Inc. g. Zurn Industries, LLC

2. Size: Same as connected piping. 3. Body: PVC. 4. Check Valve: Removable swing check. 5. End Connections: Socket type. 6. Extension for floor access – Required. 7. Refer to Basis-of-Design on the Drawings.

2.3 CLEANOUTS

A. Cast-Iron Exposed Floor Cleanouts:


a. Jay R. Smith Mfg. Co. b. Josam Company c. Oatey d. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Company, Inc. e. Tyler Pipe; a subsidiary of McWane Inc. f. Watts; a Watts Water Technologies company g. Zurn Industries, LLC

2. Standard: ASME A112.36.2M for heavy-duty, adjustable housing cleanout. 3. Size: Same as connected branch. 4. Type: Heavy-duty, adjustable housing. 5. Body or Ferrule: Cast iron. 6. Clamping Device: Required. 7. Outlet Connection: Push-on. 8. Closure: Bronze or ABS plastic plug. 9. Adjustable Housing Material: Cast iron with threads. 10. Frame and Cover Material and Finish: Nickel-bronze, copper alloy. 11. Frame and Cover Shape: Round. 12. Top Loading Classification: Heavy-duty.



13. Vandalproof Top: Required. 14. Riser: ASTM A 74, Service class, cast-iron drainage pipe fitting and riser to cleanout.

2.4 AIR ADMITTANCE VALVES

A. Plastic Air Admittance Valves:


a. Oatey b. Studor

2. Body: PVC. 3. Refer to Basis-of-Design on the Drawings.

2.5 THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP ASSEMBLIES

A. Through-Penetration Firestop Assemblies:


a. ProSet Systems Inc.

2. Standard: UL 1479 assembly of sleeve-and-stack fitting with firestopping plug. 3. Size: Same as connected soil, waste, or vent stack. 4. Sleeve: Molded-PVC plastic, of length to match slab thickness and with integral nailing

flange on one end for installation in cast-in-place concrete slabs. 5. Stack Fitting: ASTM A 48, gray-iron, hubless-pattern wye branch with neoprene O-ring

at base and gray-iron plug in thermal-release harness. Include PVC protective cap for plug.

6. Special Coating: Corrosion resistant on interior of fittings.

2.6 MISCELLANEOUS SANITARY DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES

A. Sleeve Flashing Device:

1. Description: Manufactured, cast-iron fitting, with clamping device that forms sleeve for pipe floor penetrations of floor membrane. Include galvanized-steel pipe extension in top of fitting that will extend 1-inch above finished floor and galvanized-steel pipe extension in bottom of fitting that will extend through floor slab.

2. Size: As required for close fit to riser or stack piping. 3. Design: To provide 1-inch enclosed air space between outside of pipe and inside of

flashing collar extension, with counterflashing.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install backwater valve (with access extension to finished floor) in branch drain from floor drain in Server Room.

1. Install with adequate clearance for access and maintenance.

B. Install cleanouts in aboveground piping and building drain piping according to the following, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Size same as drainage piping up to NPS 4. Use NPS 4 for larger drainage piping unless larger cleanout is indicated.

2. Locate at each change in direction of piping greater than 45 degrees. 3. Locate at minimum intervals of 50 feet for piping NPS 4 and smaller and 100 feet for

larger piping. 4. Locate at base of each vertical soil and waste stack.

C. For floor cleanouts for piping below floors, install cleanout deck plates with top flush with finished floor.

D. For cleanouts located in concealed piping, install cleanout wall access covers, of types indicated, with frame and cover flush with finished wall.

E. Install air admittance valve on branch drain from floor drain in Server Room.

1. Install with adequate clearance for access and maintenance.

F. Install through-penetration firestop assemblies in plastic conductors and stacks at floor penetrations.

1. Comply with requirements in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping."

G. Install sleeve and sleeve seals with each riser and stack passing through floors with waterproof membrane.

H. Install wood-blocking reinforcement for wall-mounting-type specialties.

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Comply with requirements in Section 221316 "Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping" for piping installation requirements. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Install piping adjacent to equipment to allow service and maintenance.

3.3 FLASHING INSTALLATION

A. Fabricate flashing from single piece unless large pans, sumps, or other drainage shapes are required.



B. Install sheet flashing on pipes, sleeves, and specialties passing through or embedded in floors and roofs with waterproof membrane.

1. Pipe Flashing: Sleeve type, matching pipe size, with minimum length of 10 inches, and skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches around pipe.

2. Sleeve Flashing: Flat sheet, with skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches around sleeve. 3. Embedded Specialty Flashing: Flat sheet, with skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches

around specialty.

C. Set flashing on floors in solid coating of bituminous cement.

D. Secure flashing into sleeve and specialty clamping ring or device.


A. Tests and Inspections:

1. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist.


3. Verify proper operation of backwater and air admittance valves.

3.5 PROTECTION

A. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt or debris and to prevent damage from traffic or construction work.

B. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of each day or when work stops.


SANITARY DRAINS


SECTION 221319.13 - SANITARY DRAINS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Floor drains.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. ABS: Acrylonitrile-butadiene styrene.

B. FRP: Fiberglass-reinforced plastic.

C. HDPE: High-density polyethylene.

D. PE: Polyethylene.

E. PP: Polypropylene.

F. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 DRAIN ASSEMBLIES

A. Sanitary drains shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.

B. Comply with NSF 14 for plastic sanitary piping specialty components.

2.2 FLOOR DRAINS

A. Cast-Iron Floor Drains:


a. Jay R. Smith Mfg. Co.

SANITARY DRAINS


b. Josam Company c. MIFAB, Inc. d. Watts; a Watts Water Technologies company e. Zurn Industries, LLC

2. Standard: ASME A112.6.3. 3. Pattern: Floor drain with detachable funnel. 4. Body Material: Gray iron. 5. Seepage Flange: Required. 6. Anchor Flange: Required. 7. Clamping Device: Required. 8. Outlet: Bottom. 9. Backwater Valve: Required, but separate – refer to Basis-of-Design on Drawings. 10. Coating on Interior and Exposed Exterior Surfaces: Epoxy. 11. Sediment Bucket: Not required. 12. Top or Strainer Material: Nickel bronze. 13. Top of Body and Strainer Finish: Nickel bronze. 14. Top Shape: Round. 15. Dimensions of Top or Strainer: 5 inches. 16. Top Loading Classification: Medium duty. 17. Funnel: 4-inch-diameter, round. 18. Inlet Fitting: Not required. (Barrier-type trap seal is required.) 19. Basis-of-Design: Refer to Drawings.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install floor drains at low points of surface areas to be drained. Set grates of drains flush with finished floor, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Position floor drains for easy access and maintenance. 2. Set floor drains below elevation of surrounding finished floor to allow floor drainage. 3. Set with grates depressed according to the following drainage area radii:

a. Radius, 30 Inches or Less: Equivalent to one percent (1%) slope, but not less than ¼-inch total depression.

b. Radius, 30 to 60 Inches: Equivalent to one percent (1%) slope. c. Radius, 60 Inches or Larger: Equivalent to one percent (1%) slope, but not greater

than 1-inch total depression.

4. Install floor-drain flashing collar or flange, so no leakage occurs between drain and adjoining flooring.

a. Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes where penetrated.

5. Install individual traps for floor drains connected to sanitary building drain, unless otherwise indicated.

SANITARY DRAINS


3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Comply with requirements in Section 221316 "Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping" for piping installation requirements. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Comply with requirements in Section 221319 "Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties" for backwater valves, air admittance devices and miscellaneous sanitary drainage piping specialties.

C. Install piping adjacent to equipment to allow service and maintenance.

3.3 PROTECTION

A. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt or debris and to prevent damage from traffic or construction work.

B. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of each day or when work stops.


FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING


SECTION 221623 - FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Fuel gas piping, specialties, and accessories within the building, and outside the building, from the discharge side of the new exterior service meter/regulator installation to gas-fired equipment is this project’s work scope.

2. Seismic restraint systems SHALL be provided for this critical operations space. Refer to Section 220548 “Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment”.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of the following:

1. Valves. Include pressure rating, capacity, settings, and electrical connection data of selected models.

B. Shop Drawings: For facility natural-gas piping layout. Include plans, piping layout and elevations, and attachments to other Work.

1. Shop Drawing Scale: ¼-inch per foot.


A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

B. ANSI Standard: Comply with ANSI Z223.1, NFPA 54 "National Fuel Gas Code."

C. FM Standard: Provide components listed in FM's "Fire Protection Approval Guide" if specified to be FM approved.

D. UL Standard: Provide components listed in UL's "Gas and Oil Equipment Directory" if specified to be UL listed.




A. Existing Gas Service Conditions: A building gas service exists with two (2) meter/regulator installations. The service pressure appears to exceed 5 psig, as one (1) of the existing meters, installed downstream of its regulator, is labelled “5 psi metering pressure”.

B. Proposed Gas Service Alterations: The intent is to provide a separate new service meter/regulator installation to serve Emergency Communications Center (ECC) gas-fired equipment. The new ECC service shall tap into the existing service main upstream of any control valves associated with the existing building service meter/regulator installations. Gas company shall make service modifications, including providing new ECC service meter/regulator.

1. Refer to Section 012100 “Allowances”. 2. Confirm with SCG and provide rough-in and concrete housekeeping pad per their

requirements. 3. Arrange for gas company provision of 2 psi distribution pressure downstream of the new

ECC meter/regulator installation.

C. Contractor’s work begins at discharge of gas company’s new ECC service meter/regulator assembly.

D. Contractor shall provide AGA- and gas utility-approved secondary gas pressure regulators on branch pipe to each gas-burning item of equipment as required to regulate gas pressure to within equipment’s required range of inlet gas pressure. Secondary regulators located indoors may be listed vent-limiting type. Secondary regulators located outdoors shall be vented type, with downturned open vent termination.

E. Design values of fuel gas supplied for these systems are as follows:

1. Nominal Heating Value: 103,700 Btu/CCF of natural-gas. 2. Nominal Specific Gravity: 0.6.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Provide final ECC connected gas load (based on submitted and approved equipment) to the gas utility for meter sizing.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Appliance Connector Valves:

a. American Valve b. B&K Industries, Inc. c. Brass Craft Manufacturing Co.



d. Cimberio Valves, S. p. A. e. Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Div. f. E. M. Plastic and Electric Products, Ltd.; Neo Valve Div. g. Frey: John M. Frey Co. h. Jomar International, Ltd. i. Key Gas Components, Inc. j. Legend Valve and Fitting, Inc. k. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.

2. Gas Valves, NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller:

a. BMI Canada, Inc. b. Crane Valves c. Flow Control Equipment, Inc. d. Grinnell Corp. e. Honeywell, Inc. f. Milwaukee Valve Co., Inc. g. Mueller Co.; Mueller Gas Products Div. h. Nibco, Inc. i. Velan Valve Corp. j. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.


A. Refer to Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting and joining materials.

2.3 PIPES, TUBES, FITTINGS, AND JOINING MATERIALS

A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, black steel, Schedule 40, Type E or S, Grade B.

1. Maximum allowable size for cast-iron fittings within building is NPS 4 (DN 100). 2. Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.3, Class 150, standard pattern, with

threaded ends according to ASME B1.20.1. 3. Unions: ASME B16.39, Class 150, malleable iron with brass-to-iron seat, ground joint,

and threaded ends according to ASME B1.20.1. 4. Cast-Iron Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.1, Class 125. 5. Steel Welding Fittings: ASME B16.9, wrought steel or ASME B16.11, forged steel. 6. Joint Compound and Tape: Suitable for natural-gas. 7. Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5. 8. Gasket Material: Thickness, material, and type suitable for natural-gas.

2.4 SPECIALTY VALVES

A. Valves, NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Threaded ends according to ASME B1.20.1 for pipe threads.

B. Gas stops below are NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller and limited to 2 psig. Use at appliances with 2-psig-maximum gas pressure systems.



1. Gas Stops: Bronze body with AGA stamp, plug type with bronze plug and flat or square head, ball type with chrome-plated brass ball and lever handle or butterfly valve with stainless-steel disc and fluorocarbon elastomer seal and lever handle; 2-psig minimum pressure rating.

C. Valves in category below are used for shutoff in piping.

1. Gas Valves, NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: ASME B16.33 and IAS-listed bronze body and 125-psig pressure rating.

2. Tamperproof Feature: Include design for locking.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Close equipment shutoff valves before turning off natural-gas to premises or piping section. Perform leakage test as specified in "Field Quality Control" Article to determine that all equipment is turned off in affected piping section.

B. Comply with ANSI Z223.1, "Prevention of Accidental Ignition" Paragraph.

3.2 PIPING APPLICATIONS

A. Flanges, unions, transition, and special fittings with pressure ratings same as or higher than system pressure rating may be used in applications below, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Fuel Gas Piping, 2.0 psig or Less: Use the following:

1. NPS 3/4 and NPS 1 (DN 20 and DN 25): Steel pipe, malleable-iron threaded fittings and threaded joints.

2. NPS 1-1/4 to NPS 2 (DN 32 to DN 50): Steel pipe, malleable-iron threaded fittings and threaded joints.

3.3 VALVE APPLICATIONS

A. Appliance Shutoff Valves for Pressure 0.5 psig or Less: Gas stop.

B. Piping Line Valves, NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Gas valve.


A. Seismic restraint systems SHALL be provided for this critical operations space. Refer to Section 220548 “Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment”.

B. Concealed Location Installations: Except as specified below, install concealed natural-gas piping in airtight conduit constructed of Schedule 40, seamless, black steel pipe with welded joints. Vent conduit to outside and terminate with screened vent cap.

1. Above Accessible Ceilings: Natural-gas piping may be installed in accessible spaces, subject to approval of authorities having jurisdiction, whether or not such spaces are used as plenums. Do no locate valves above ceilings.



2. In Walls or Partitions: Do not install concealed piping in solid partitions. Protect tubing from physical damage when installed inside partitions or hollow walls.

a. Exception: Tubing passing through partitions or walls.

3. Prohibited Locations: Do not install natural-gas piping in or through circulating air ducts, clothes or trash chutes, chimneys or gas vents (flues), ventilating ducts, or dumbwaiter or elevator shafts.

a. Exception: Accessible above-ceiling space specified above.

C. Drips and Sediment Traps: Install drips at points where condensate may collect, including service-meter outlets. Locate where accessible to permit cleaning and emptying. Do not install where condensate is subject to freezing.

1. Construct drips and sediment traps using tee fitting with bottom outlet plugged or capped. Use nipple a minimum length of three (3) pipe diameters, but not less than 3 inches long and same size as connected pipe. Install with space below bottom of drip to remove plug or cap.

D. Conceal pipe installations above ceilings unless indicated to be exposed to view.

E. Install natural-gas piping at uniform grade of 0.1 percent slope upward toward risers.

F. Use eccentric reducer fittings to make reductions in pipe sizes. Install fittings with level side down.

G. Connect branch piping from top or side of horizontal piping.

H. Install unions in pipes NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to each valve, at final connection to each piece of equipment, and elsewhere as indicated. Unions are not required at flanged connections.


A. Use materials suitable for fuel gas.

1. Brazed Joints: Make with brazing alloy with melting point greater than 1000 deg F (540 deg C). Brazing alloys containing phosphorus are prohibited.


A. Comply with requirements for pipe hangers and supports specified in Section 220529 "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."

B. Install hangers for horizontal steel piping with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes:

1. NPS 1 and Smaller: Maximum span, 96 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8-inch. 2. NPS 1-1/4: Maximum span, 108 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8-inch. 3. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2: Maximum span, 108 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8-inch.



3.7 CONNECTIONS

A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of fuel gas piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Install piping adjacent to appliances to allow service and maintenance of appliances.

C. Connect piping to appliances using manual gas shutoff valves and unions. Install valve upstream from and within 72 inches of each gas-fired appliance and equipment. Install union downstream from valve.

D. Sediment Traps: Install tee fitting with capped nipple in bottom to form drip, as close as practical to inlet of each appliance using gas. Do NOT install drip legs in areas subject to freezing.

E. Ground equipment.

1. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.

2. Do not use gas pipe as grounding electrode.

3.8 PAINTING

A. Paint interior gas piping exposed to view, and all exterior natural-gas piping, providing a minimum of two (2) coats of rust-inhibiting paint, final coat per Property Owner’s Facility Standards; if Facility Standards do not exist for this parameter, final coat color shall be selected as selected by Property Owner’s facilities management representative.

B. Damage and Touchup: Repair marred and damaged factory-applied finishes with materials and by procedures to match original factory finish.


A. Test, inspect, and purge natural-gas according to ANSI Z223.1, Part 4 "Inspection, Testing and Purging," and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest system until satisfactory results are obtained.

C. Report test results promptly and in writing to Architect and authorities having jurisdiction.

D. Verify capacities, pressure settings and pressure ratings of pressure regulators, valves, and specialties.

E. Verify that specified piping tests are complete.

3.10 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust controls and safety devices. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and safety devices.




ELECTRIC, DOMESTIC-WATER HEATERS


SECTION 223300 - ELECTRIC, DOMESTIC-WATER HEATERS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Thermostat-control, electric, tankless, domestic-water heaters. 2. Domestic-water heater accessories.


A. Seismic Performance: Commercial domestic-water heaters shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to the State of Connecticut Building Code.

1. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the unit will be fully operational after the seismic event."


A. Product Data: For each type and size of domestic-water heater indicated. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories.

B. Shop Drawings:



A. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For commercial domestic-water heaters, accessories, and components, from manufacturer.


2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.

3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based and their installation requirements.

B. Product Certificates: For each type of commercial tankless, electric, domestic-water heater, from manufacturer.



C. Domestic-Water Heater Labeling: Certified and labeled by testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

D. Source quality-control reports.

E. Field quality-control reports.

F. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For electric, domestic-water heaters to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.



B. NSF Compliance: Fabricate and label equipment components that will be in contact with potable water to comply with NSF 61 Annex G, "Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects."

1.8 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided.

1.9 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of electric, domestic-water heaters that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.


a. Structural failures including storage tank and supports. b. Faulty operation of controls. c. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal use.

2. Warranty Periods: From date of Substantial Completion.

a. Electric, Tankless, Domestic-Water Heaters: 5-year warranty on leaks, 1-year warranty on parts.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ELECTRIC, TANKLESS, DOMESTIC-WATER HEATERS

A. Thermostat-Control, Electric, Tankless, Domestic-Water Heaters:

1. Standard: UL 499 for electric, tankless, (domestic-water heater) heating appliance.



2. Construction: Copper piping or tubing complying with NSF 61 Annex G barrier materials for potable water, without storage capacity.

a. Connections: ASME B1.20.1 pipe thread. b. Pressure Rating: 150 psig. c. Heating Element: Resistance heating system. d. Temperature Control: Thermostat. e. Safety Control: High-temperature-limit cutoff device or system. f. Jacket: Aluminum or steel with enameled finish or plastic.

3. Support: Bracket for wall mounting. 4. Capacity and Characteristics:

a. Flow Rate: 0.5 gpm at 41 deg F temperature rise. b. Temperature Setting: 140 deg F. c. Power Demand: 3.0 kilowatts. d. Electrical Characteristics:

1) Volts: 208. 2) Phases: Single. 3) Hertz: 60. 4) Amperes: 15.

2.2 DOMESTIC-WATER HEATER ACCESSORIES

A. Domestic-Water Heater Mounting Brackets: Manufacturer's factory-fabricated steel bracket for wall mounting, capable of supporting domestic-water heater and water.


A. Hydrostatically test domestic-water heaters to minimum of one and one-half (1½) times pressure rating before shipment.

B. Electric, domestic-water heaters will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. Comply with requirements in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements" for retesting and reinspecting requirements and Section 017300 "Execution" for requirements for correcting the Work.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 DOMESTIC-WATER HEATER INSTALLATION

A. Electric, Tankless, Domestic-Water Heater Mounting: Install electric, tankless, domestic-water heaters at least 18 inches above floor on wall bracket.

1. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances.



2. Arrange units so controls and devices that require servicing are accessible; coordinate provision of chase access door situated and large enough to allow service and replacement.

3. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.

4. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment. 5. Anchor domestic-water heaters to substrate.

B. Install electric, domestic-water heaters level and plumb, according to layout drawings, original design, and referenced standards. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances. Arrange units so controls and devices needing service are accessible.

1. Install shutoff valves on domestic-water-supply piping to domestic-water heaters and on domestic-hot-water outlet piping. Comply with requirements for shutoff valves specified in Section 220523.12 "Ball Valves for Plumbing Piping,"

C. Install electric, domestic-water heaters with seismic-restraint devices, if required by building and tenant seismic design criteria. Comply with requirements for seismic-restraint devices specified in Section 220548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."

D. Install thermometers on inlet and outlet piping of electric, domestic-water heaters. Comply with requirements for thermometers specified in Section 220519 "Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping."

E. Fill electric, domestic-water heaters with water.

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Comply with requirements for piping specified in Section 221116 "Domestic Water Piping." Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Where installing piping adjacent to electric, domestic-water heaters, allow space for service and maintenance of water heaters. Arrange piping and access doors for easy removal of domestic-water heaters.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 220553 "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."







3. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper operation.


B. Electric, domestic-water heaters will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. Comply with requirements in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements" for retesting and reinspecting requirements and Section 017300 "Execution" for requirements for correcting the Work.


3.5 DEMONSTRATION

A. Train Tenant’s maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain tankless, electric, domestic-water heaters.


COMMERCIAL WATER CLOSETS


SECTION 224213.13 - COMMERCIAL WATER CLOSETS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Water closets. 2. Flushometer valves. 3. Toilet seats.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Effective Flush Volume: Average of two (2) reduced flushes and one (1) full flush per fixture.

B. Remote Water Closet: Located more than 30 feet from other drain line connections or fixture and where less than 1.5 drainage fixture units are upstream of the drain line connection.



1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for water closets.


B. Shop Drawings: Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For flushometer valves to include in operation and maintenance manuals.


A. Furnish extra materials that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Flushometer-Valve Repair Kits: Equal to ten percent (10%) of amount of each type installed, but no fewer than one (1) of each type.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FLOOR-MOUNTED, BOTTOM-OUTLET TOP-SPUD WATER CLOSETS

A. Water Closets: Floor mounted, bottom outlet, top spud.


a. American Standard America b. Briggs Plumbing Products, Inc. c. Crane Plumbing, LLC d. Gerber Plumbing Fixtures LLC e. Kohler Co. f. Mansfield Plumbing Products LLC g. Sloan Valve Company h. TOTO USA, INC. i. Zurn Industries, LLC

2. Bowl:

a. Standards: ASME A112.19.2/CSA B45.1 and ASME A112.19.5. b. Material: Vitreous china. c. Type: Siphon jet. d. Style: Flushometer valve. e. Height: Handicapped/elderly, complying with ICC/ANSI A117.1. f. Rim Contour: Elongated. g. Water Consumption: 1.28 gal. per flush. h. Spud Size and Location: NPS 1-1/2; top. i. Color: White.

3. Bowl-to-Drain Connecting Fitting: ASTM A 1045 or ASME A112.4.3. 4. Refer to Fixture Schedule on Drawings for Basis-of-Design and additional requirements.

2.2 FLUSHOMETER VALVES

A. Lever-Handle, Diaphragm Flushometer Valves:


a. Delany Products b. Gerber Plumbing Fixtures LLC c. Sloan Valve Company d. Zurn Industries, LLC

2. Standard: ASSE 1037. 3. Minimum Pressure Rating: 125 psig. 4. Features: Include integral check stop and backflow-prevention device, and dual-filtered

State Project No. 051-0150 CV bypass. 5. Material: Brass body with corrosion-resistant components.



6. Exposed Flushometer-Valve Finish: Chrome plated. 7. Panel Finish: Chrome plated or stainless-steel. 8. Style: Exposed. 9. Consumption: 1.28 gal. per flush. 10. Minimum Inlet: NPS 1. 11. Minimum Outlet: NPS 1-1/4. 12. Refer to Fixture Schedule on Drawings for Basis-of-Design and additional requirements.

2.3 TOILET SEATS

A. Toilet Seats:


a. American Standard America b. Bemis Manufacturing Company c. Centoco Manufacturing Corporation d. Church Seats; Bemis Manufacturing Company e. Kohler Co. f. Olsonite Seat Co. g. TOTO USA, INC h. Zurn Industries, LLC

2. Standard: IAPMO/ANSI Z124.5. 3. Material: Plastic. 4. Type: Commercial (heavy-duty). 5. Shape: Elongated rim, open front. 6. Hinge: Self-sustaining, check. 7. Hinge Material: Noncorroding metal. 8. Seat Cover: Not required. 9. Color: White. 10. Refer to Fixture Schedule on Drawings for Basis-of-Design.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine roughing-in of water supply and sanitary drainage and vent piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections before water-closet installation.

B. Examine walls and floors for suitable conditions where water closets will be installed.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Water-Closet Installation:

1. Install level and plumb according to roughing-in Drawings.



2. Install floor-mounted water closets on bowl-to-drain connecting fitting attachments to piping or building substrate.

B. Flushometer-Valve Installation:

1. Install flushometer-valve, water-supply fitting on each supply to each water closet. 2. Attach supply piping to supports or substrate within pipe spaces behind fixtures. 3. Install lever-handle flushometer valves for accessible water closets with handle mounted

on open side of water closet. 4. Install actuators in locations that are easy for people with disabilities to reach.

C. Install toilet seats on water closets.

D. Wall Flange and Escutcheon Installation:

1. Install wall flanges or escutcheons at piping wall penetrations in exposed, finished locations and within cabinets and millwork.

2. Install deep-pattern escutcheons if required to conceal protruding fittings. 3. Comply with escutcheon requirements specified in Section 220518 "Escutcheons for

Plumbing Piping."

E. Joint Sealing:

1. Seal joints between water closets and walls and floors using sanitary-type, one-part, mildew-resistant silicone sealant.

2. Match sealant color to water-closet color. 3. Comply with sealant requirements specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Connect water closets with water supplies and soil, waste, and vent piping. Use size fittings required to match water closets.

B. Comply with water piping requirements specified in Section 221116 "Domestic Water Piping."

C. Comply with soil and waste piping requirements specified in Section 221316 "Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping."

D. Where installing piping adjacent to water closets, allow space for service and maintenance.

3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Operate and adjust water closets and controls. Replace damaged and malfunctioning water closets, fittings, and controls.

B. Adjust water pressure at flushometer valves to produce proper flow.


A. Clean water closets and fittings with manufacturers' recommended cleaning methods and materials.



B. Install protective covering for installed water closets and fittings.

C. Do not allow use of water closets for temporary facilities unless approved in writing by Owner.


COMMERCIAL LAVATORIES

Emergency Communications Center Tenant Fit-Out and Renovation -SHU/Fairfield 224216.13-1

SECTION 224216.13 - COMMERCIAL LAVATORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Lavatories. 2. Faucets. 3. Supports.



1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for lavatories.



A. Coordination Drawings: Counter cutout templates for mounting of counter-mounted lavatories.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For lavatories and faucets to include in operation and maintenance manuals.



1. Faucet Cartridges and O-Rings: Equal to five percent (5%) of amount of each type and size installed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 VITREOUS-CHINA, WALL-MOUNTED LAVATORIES

A. Lavatory: Vitreous china, wall mounted, with faucet ledge.




a. American Standard America b. Briggs Plumbing Products, Inc. c. Crane Plumbing, LLC d. Gerber Plumbing Fixtures LLC e. Kohler Co. f. Peerless Pottery Sales, Inc. g. Sloan Valve Company

2. Fixture:

a. Standard: ASME A112.19.2/CSA B45.1. b. Type: For concealed arms. c. Nominal Size: Rectangular, 18½ by 17 inches overall; 14¼-by-10¾-inch bowl

size. d. Faucet-Hole Punching: for 4-inch center set faucet (three (3) holes on 2-inch

centers). e. Faucet-Hole Location: Top. f. Color: White. g. Mounting: Concealed arms, floor-mounted wall support.

3. Lavatory Mounting Height: Handicapped/elderly according to ICC A117.1. 4. Refer to Fixture Schedule on Drawings for Basis-of-Design.

2.2 SOLID-METAL, MANUALLY OPERATED FAUCETS

A. NSF Standard: Comply with NSF/ANSI 61 Annex G, "Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects," for faucet materials that will be in contact with potable water.

B. Lavatory Faucets: Manual-type, single-control mixing, commercial, solid-metal valve.


a. American Standard America b. Bradley Corporation c. Chicago Faucets; Geberit Company d. Delta Faucet Company e. Elkay Manufacturing Co. f. Gerber Plumbing Fixtures LLC g. GROHE America, Inc. h. Just Manufacturing i. Kohler Co. j. Moen Incorporated k. Speakman Company l. Symmons Industries, Inc. m. T & S Brass and Bronze Works, Inc.

2. Standard: ASME A112.18.1/CSA B125.1.



3. General: Coordinate faucet inlets with supplies and fixture hole punchings; coordinate outlet with spout and fixture receptor.

4. Body Type: Center set. 5. Body Material: Commercial, solid brass. 6. Finish: Polished chrome plate. 7. Maximum Flow Rate: 0.5 gpm. 8. Mounting Type: Deck, exposed. 9. Valve Handle(s): Single lever, 6-inch. 10. Spout: Rigid type. 11. Spout Outlet: 0.5 GPM aerator. 12. Drain: Grid type; separate or may be part of faucet package. 13. Refer to Fixture Schedule on Drawings for Basis-of-Design.

2.3 SUPPORTS

A. Lavatory Carrier – Floor-mounted wall lavatory support for concealed arms:


a. Jay R. Smith Mfg. Co. b. Josam Company c. MIFAB, Inc. d. Wade Drains e. Watts; a Watts Water Technologies company f. Zurn Industries, LLC

2. Standard: ASME A112.6.1M.

2.4 SUPPLY FITTINGS

A. NSF Standard: Comply with NSF/ANSI 61 Annex G, "Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects," for supply-fitting materials that will be in contact with potable water.

B. Standard: ASME A112.18.1/CSA B125.1.

C. Supply Piping: Chrome-plated-brass pipe or chrome-plated copper tube matching water-supply piping size. Include chrome-plated-brass or stainless-steel wall flange.

D. Supply Stops: Chrome-plated-brass, one-quarter-turn, ball-type or compression valve with inlet connection matching supply piping.

E. Operation: Loose key.

F. Risers:

1. NPS 3/8. 2. Chrome-plated, soft-copper flexible tube or ASME A112.18.6, braided- or corrugated-

stainless-steel, flexible hose riser.



2.5 WASTE FITTINGS

A. Standard: ASME A112.18.2/CSA B125.2.

B. Drain: Grid type with NPS 1-1/4 offset and straight tailpiece.

C. Trap:

1. Size: NPS 1-1/2 by NPS 1-1/4. 2. Material: Chrome-plated, two-piece, cast-brass trap and swivel elbow with 0.032-inch-

thick brass tube to wall; and chrome-plated, brass or steel wall flange. 3. Material: Stainless-steel, two-piece trap and swivel elbow with 0.012-inch-thick

stainless-steel tube to wall; and stainless-steel wall flange.

2.6 SUPPORTS

A. Floor-mounted wall lavatory support for concealed arms:

1. Standard: ASME A112.6.1M.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine roughing-in of water supply and sanitary drainage and vent piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections before lavatory installation.

B. Examine walls for suitable conditions where lavatories will be installed.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install lavatories level and plumb according to roughing-in drawings.

B. Install supports, affixed to building substrate, for wall-mounted lavatories.

C. Install accessible wall-mounted lavatories at handicapped/elderly mounting height for people with disabilities or the elderly, according to ICC/ANSI A117.1.

D. Install wall flanges or escutcheons at piping wall penetrations in exposed, finished locations. Use deep-pattern escutcheons if required to conceal protruding fittings. Comply with escutcheon requirements specified in Section 220518 "Escutcheons for Plumbing Piping."

E. Seal joints between lavatories and walls using sanitary-type, one-part, mildew-resistant silicone sealant. Match sealant color to fixture color. Comply with sealant requirements specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."

F. Install protective shielding enclosures on exposed supplies and waste piping of accessible lavatories. Comply with requirements in Section 220719 "Plumbing Piping Insulation."



3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Connect fixtures with water supplies, stops, and risers, and with traps, soil, waste, and vent piping. Use size fittings required to match fixtures.



3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Operate and adjust lavatories and controls. Replace damaged and malfunctioning lavatories, fittings, and controls.

B. Adjust water pressure at faucets to produce proper flow.


A. After completing installation of lavatories, inspect and repair damaged finishes.

B. Clean lavatories, faucets, and other fittings with manufacturers' recommended cleaning methods and materials.

C. Provide protective covering for installed lavatories and fittings.

D. Do not allow use of lavatories for temporary facilities unless approved in writing by Owner.


COMMERCIAL SINKS


SECTION 224216.16 - COMMERCIAL SINKS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Service basins. 2. Stainless-steel, counter-mounted sinks. 3. Sink faucets. 4. Supply fittings. 5. Waste fittings.



1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for sinks.



A. Coordination Drawings: Counter cutout templates for mounting of counter-mounted lavatories.


A. Maintenance Data: For sinks to include in maintenance manuals.



1. Faucet Washers and O-Rings: Equal to ten percent (10%) of amount of each type and size installed.

2. Faucet Cartridges and O-Rings: Equal to five percent (5%) of amount of each type and size installed.

COMMERCIAL SINKS


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SERVICE BASINS (MSB)

A. Service Basins: Terrazzo, floor mounted.


a. Acorn Engineering Company b. Crane Plumbing, LLC c. Florestone Products Co., Inc. d. Stern-Williams Co., Inc.

2. Refer to Schedules on Drawings for characteristics, Basis-of-Design models, and accessories.

2.2 STAINLESS-STEEL, COUNTER-MOUNTED SINKS (S-1)

A. Sinks: Stainless-steel, counter mounted.


a. Elkay Manufacturing Co. b. Just Manufacturing

2. Refer to Schedules on Drawings for characteristics and Basis-of-Design models.

2.3 COUNTER-MOUNTED SINK FAUCETS

A. NSF Standard: Comply with NSF/ANSI 61 Annex G, "Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects," for faucet-spout materials that will be in contact with potable water.

B. Sink Faucets: Manual type, two-lever-handle mixing valve, with hose spray.

1. Commercial, Solid-Brass Faucets.


1) American Standard America 2) Chicago Faucets; Geberit Company 3) Elkay Manufacturing Co. 4) Just Manufacturing 5) Kohler Co. 6) Moen Incorporated 7) Sloan Valve Company 8) Speakman Company 9) T & S Brass and Bronze Works, Inc.

2. Refer to Schedules on Drawings for characteristics and Basis-of-Design models.

COMMERCIAL SINKS


2.4 SUPPLY FITTINGS

A. NSF Standard: Comply with NSF/ANSI 61 Annex G, "Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects," for supply-fitting materials that will be in contact with potable water.

B. Standard: ASME A112.18.1/CSA B125.1.

C. Supply Piping: Chrome-plated brass pipe or chrome-plated copper tube matching water-supply piping size. Include chrome-plated brass or stainless-steel wall flange.

D. Supply Piping, Risers and Stops: Refer to Schedule on Drawings.

E. Operation of Stops: Loose key.

2.5 WASTE FITTINGS

A. Standard: ASME A112.18.2/CSA B125.2.

B. Drain and Trap: Refer to Schedule on Drawings.

2.6 GROUT





PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine roughing-in of water supply and sanitary drainage and vent piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections before sink installation.

B. Examine walls, floors, and counters for suitable conditions where sinks will be installed.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install sinks level and plumb according to roughing-in drawings.

B. Refer to Architectural Drawings for counter heights for counter-mounted sinks.

C. Set floor-mounted sinks in leveling bed of cement grout.

D. Install water-supply piping with stop on each supply to each sink faucet.

COMMERCIAL SINKS


1. Exception: Use ball valves if supply stops are not specified with sink. Comply with valve requirements specified in Section 220523.12 "Ball Valves for Plumbing Piping."

2. Install stops in locations where they can be easily reached for operation.

E. Install wall flanges or escutcheons at piping wall penetrations in exposed, finished locations. Use deep-pattern escutcheons if required to conceal protruding fittings. Comply with escutcheon requirements specified in Section 220518 "Escutcheons for Plumbing Piping."

F. Seal joints between sinks and counters, floors, and walls using sanitary-type, one-part, mildew-resistant silicone sealant. Match sealant color to fixture color. Comply with sealant requirements specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."

G. Install protective shielding pipe covers and enclosures on exposed supplies and waste piping of accessible sinks, as required in Fixture Schedule on the drawings. Comply with requirements in Section 220719 "Plumbing Piping Insulation."

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Connect sinks with water supplies, stops, and risers, and with traps, soil, waste, and vent piping. Use size fittings required to match fixtures.



3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Operate and adjust sinks and controls. Replace damaged and malfunctioning sinks, fittings, and controls.

B. Adjust water pressure at faucets to produce specified flow.


A. After completing installation of sinks, inspect and repair damaged finishes.

B. Clean sinks, faucets, and other fittings with manufacturers' recommended cleaning methods and materials.

C. Provide protective covering for installed sinks and fittings.

D. Do not allow use of sinks for temporary facilities unless approved in writing by Owner.


BASIS MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS


SECTION 230000 - BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDED

A. Basic Mechanical Requirements specifically applicable to Division 23 Sections in addition to Division 01 General Requirements.

1.2 INTENT

A. It is the intention of the Specifications and Drawings to call for finished work, tested and ready for operation. All materials, equipment and apparatus shall be new and of first-class quality.

B. Any apparatus, appliance, material or work not shown on Drawings, but mentioned in the Specifications, or vice versa, or any incidental accessories or minor details not shown, but necessary to make the work complete and perfect in all respects and ready for operation, even if not particularly specified, shall be provided by the Contractor without additional expense to the Owner.

C. With submission of bid, the Contractor shall give notice to the Engineer of any materials apparatus or omissions believed to be in violation of laws, ordinances, rules or regulations or authorities having jurisdiction. In the absence of such written notice, it is mutually agreed that the Contractor shall include the cost of providing all systems in accordance with applicable regulations without extra compensation.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit under provisions of Division 01 Sections.

B. Include products as required by individual Sections.

C. Submit Shop Drawings and Product Data grouped to include complete submittals of related systems, products, and accessories in a single submittal.

D. Mark dimensions and values in units to match those specified.

E. Submit plan indicating measures being taken to maintain indoor air quality of occupied portion of building during construction.

1.4 DRAWINGS AND COORDINATION

A. Drawings are schematic in nature and do not indicate every item, piece of equipment and detail. Provide complete, operating systems.

B. Install work as closely as possible to layouts shown on drawings. Modify work as necessary to meet job conditions and to clear other equipment. Consult Architect before making changes which affect the function or appearance of systems.

C. Dimensions, elevations, and locations are shown approximately. Verify dimensions in field.



D. Architect reserves the right to order changes in layout of such items as piping, ducts, and equipment if such changes do not substantially affect costs and if effected items have not been fabricated or installed.

E. In some cases, drawings are based on products of one (1) or several manufacturers, as listed on Contract Documents. Contractor shall be responsible for modifications made necessary by substitution of products of other manufacturers. Modifications may be required in electrical distribution materials and components, structural supports, concrete pads, gas piping, breeching and chimneys, etc.

F. Do not install part of a system until all critical components of the system and related systems have been approved. Coordinate parts of systems.

G. Coordinate work with work specified in other Sections. Relocate work if required for proper installation and functioning of other systems.

H. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Notify Architect if Contract Documents conflict with manufacturer's instructions. Comply with Architect's interpretations.

I. Provide brackets, supports, anchors and frames required for installation of work specified in this division. Such metal work shall conform to the requirements of Section 055000 “Metal Fabrications”.

J. Where Contract Documents provide conflicting information, Contractor shall be responsible for design having highest cost.

1.5 PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS

A. Prepare project Record Drawings of mechanical systems in conformance with the requirements of the General Conditions and Division 01 Sections.

1.6 INDOOR AIR QUALITY

A. Provide measures to maintain minimum standard for indoor air quality in accordance with SMACNA guidelines, by preventing air contaminated by demolition and construction activities from being transferred to occupied portions of building when work includes renovation, addition or alteration to building occupied during demolition/construction.

B. Measures shall include but not be limited to the following:

1. Air filtration. 2. Temporarily sealing ductwork, air inlets and outlets and ventilation openings to prevent

transfer of contaminated air. 3. Installation of bypass ducts or openings and additional temporary system modifications

as required to prevent cross contamination, and to maintain proper system operation during construction.

C. Submit plan of cross contamination control measures in accordance with SMACNA guidelines prior to beginning construction.



1.7 PRELIMINARY OPERATION

A. Operate mechanical systems with required supervision for at least two (2) full days prior to substantial completion. Make necessary adjustments and check proper operation.

1.8 TESTS PRIOR TO SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION

A. Tests shall be attended by representatives of mechanical subcontractors, equipped with instruments required to demonstrate proper functioning of systems, as specified. Demonstrate the following:

1. Equipment installed and operating in accordance with the manufacturer's specifications and instructions and with these specifications.

2. Safety and temperature controls operating as specified. 3. Systems properly flushed, cleaned and free of contaminants. 4. Systems properly balanced. 5. Motors equipped with proper overload protection and not operating under overload.

Obtain ammeter readings. 6. Instruments recording properly. 7. Submit report listing system tested, date, results, and description of fault corrections, if

any.

1.9 WARRANTY

A. Submit written warranty of warranties covering work specified in Division 23.

B. Warranty will commence as the construction phases are completed.

C. Warranty period shall be one (1) year after the equipment/system has been put into permanent operating mode, equipment/system and components have been commissioned by the Commissioning Agent and accepted, and the operating and maintenance manuals have been submitted and approved.

D. Owner is to receive full use of equipment for period of warranty.

1.10 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A. Submit Operating and Maintenance manuals in accordance with this Section and Division 01 Sections.

B. Include operating and maintenance instructions for equipment where applicable.

C. List replacement parts and order procedure.

D. Include lubrication instructions and schedule, with types of lubricant to be used.

E. Instruct Owner's personnel in use of equipment specified in this Division.


A. Conform to applicable provisions of the 2018 Connecticut Basic Building Code which include the following:



1. 2015 International Building Code 2. 2015 International Mechanical Code

B. Amendments, alterations, deletions, and addition of certain provisions to the above as indicated in Connecticut Supplement.

C. New construction and renovation work will also conform to applicable provisions of the Connecticut Public Health Code.

D. Indoor air quality during construction will be maintained in accordance with SMACNA IAQ Guidelines for Occupied Buildings under Construction.

E. New construction and renovation work will also conform to applicable provisions of the Connecticut Fire Safety Code which include the following:

1. Amendments, alterations, deletions, and addition of certain provisions to the above as indicated in the Connecticut Supplement.

F. Work of this project shall be barrier free and will conform to the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), ICC/ANSI 117.1, 2010 and Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards (UFAS).

G. New construction and renovations work will comply with the requirements of the 2015 International Energy Conservation Code for energy efficiency.

H. Conform to applicable Town of Fairfield requirements.

I. Obtain and pay for permits and inspections from authorities having jurisdiction.




SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR HVAC PIPING


SECTION 230517 - SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR HVAC PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Sleeves. 2. Sleeve-seal systems. 3. Sleeve-seal fittings. 4. Grout.


1. Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping" for penetration firestopping installed in fire-resistance-rated walls, horizontal assemblies, and smoke barriers, with and without penetrating items.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SLEEVES

A. Galvanized-Steel Wall Pipes: ASTM A 53, Schedule 40, with plain ends and welded steel collar; zinc coated.

B. Galvanized-Steel-Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, zinc coated, with plain ends.

C. Galvanized-Steel Sheet Sleeves: 0.0239-inch minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded longitudinal joint.


A. Manufacturer:

1. Metraflex; Metraseal System 2. GPT EnPro Industries Company; Link-Seal 3. Calpico Inc.; Pipe Linx




1. Sealing Elements: EPDM-rubber interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include type and number required for pipe material and size.

2. Pressure Plates: Stainless-steel. 3. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Stainless-steel of length required to secure pressure plates to

sealing elements.


A. Manufacturer:

1. Metraflex; Metraseal System 2. GPT EnPro Industries Company; Link-Seal 3. Calpico Inc.; Pipe Linx

B. Description:

1. Manufactured plastic, sleeve-type, waterstop assembly, made for imbedding in concrete slab or wall.

2. Plastic or rubber waterstop collar with center opening to match piping OD.

2.4 GROUT

A. Description: Non-shrink, recommended for interior and exterior sealing openings in non-fire-rated walls or floors.

B. Standard: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, post-hardening and volume-adjusting, dry, hydraulic-cement grout.



PART 3 - EXECUTION




1. Sleeves are not required for core-drilled holes.


1. Permanent sleeves are not required for holes in slabs formed by molded-PE or -PP sleeves.





3. Using grout, seal space outside of sleeves in slabs and walls without sleeve-seal system.



and pipe or pipe insulation. 3. Seal annular space between sleeve and piping or piping insulation; use sealants

appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint.

E. Fire-Resistance-Rated Penetrations, Horizontal Assembly Penetrations, and Smoke-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire or smoke rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with fire- and smoke-stop materials. Comply with requirements for firestopping and fill materials specified in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping."


A. Install sleeve-seal systems in sleeves in exterior walls and slabs-on-grade at service piping entries into building.

B. Select type, size, and number of sealing elements required for piping material and size and for sleeve ID or hole size. Position piping in center of sleeve. Center piping in penetration, assemble sleeve-seal-system components, and install in annular space between piping and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make a watertight seal.


A. Install sleeve-seal fittings as new walls and slabs are constructed.



D. Using grout, seal space around outside of sleeve-seal fittings.



1. Leak Test: After allowing for a full cure, test sleeves and sleeve seals for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist.

B. Sleeves and sleeve seals will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.






a. Piping Smaller Than NPS 6 (DN 150): Cast-iron wall sleeves with sleeve-seal system.


b. Piping NPS 6 (DN 150) and Larger: Cast-iron wall sleeves with sleeve-seal system.



a. Piping Smaller Than NPS 6 (DN 150): Galvanized-steel-pipe sleeves with sleeve-seal fittings.

3. Interior Partitions:

a. Piping Smaller Than NPS 6 (DN 150): Galvanized-steel-pipe sleeves.


HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT


SECTION 230529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Metal pipe hangers and supports. 2. Trapeze pipe hangers. 3. Metal framing systems. 4. Fastener systems. 5. Equipment supports.


1. Section 230548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment" for vibration isolation devices.

2. Section 233113 “Metal Ducts” for duct hangers and supports.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer. Show fabrication and installation details and include calculations for the following, include Product Data for components:

1. Trapeze pipe hangers. 2. Metal framing systems. 3. Pipe stands. 4. Equipment supports.

C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For trapeze hangers indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

1. Detail fabrication and assembly of trapeze hangers. 2. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for designing trapeze hangers.






A. Structural-Steel Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."

B. Pipe Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements," to design trapeze pipe hangers and equipment supports.

B. Structural Performance: Hangers and supports for HVAC piping and equipment shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated according to ASCE/SEI 7.

1. Design supports for multiple pipes, including pipe stands, capable of supporting combined weight of supported systems, system contents, and test water.

2. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported equipment and connected systems and components.

3. Design seismic-restraint hangers and supports for piping and equipment.

2.2 METAL PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Carbon-Steel Pipe Hangers and Supports:

1. Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, factory-fabricated components. 2. Galvanized Metallic Coatings: Pregalvanized, hot-dip galvanized, or electro-galvanized. 3. Nonmetallic Coatings: Plastic coated or epoxy powder-coated. 4. Padded Hangers: Hanger with fiberglass or other pipe insulation pad or cushion to

support bearing surface of piping. 5. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of carbon steel.

B. Stainless-Steel Pipe Hangers and Supports:

1. Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, factory-fabricated components. 2. Padded Hangers: Hanger with fiberglass or other pipe insulation pad or cushion to


C. Copper Pipe and Tube Hangers:

1. Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, copper-plated steel, factory-fabricated components.

2. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of copper-plated steel.



2.3 TRAPEZE PIPE HANGERS

A. Description: MSS SP-58, Type 59, shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly made from structural carbon-steel shapes with MSS SP-58 carbon-steel hanger rods, nuts, saddles, and U-bolts.

2.4 METAL FRAMING SYSTEMS

A. MFMA Manufacturer Metal Framing Systems:


a. Flex-Strut Inc. b. Unistrut Corporation; Tyco International, Ltd. c. Wesanco, Inc. d. GS Metals Corp.

2. Description: Shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly for supporting multiple parallel pipes.

3. Standard: MFMA-4. 4. Channels: Continuous slotted steel channel with inturned lips. 5. Channel Nuts: Formed or stamped steel nuts or other devices designed to fit into channel

slot and, when tightened, prevent slipping along channel. 6. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of carbon steel. 7. Metallic Coating: Electroplated zinc.

B. Non-MFMA Manufacturer Metal Framing Systems:


a. Anvil International; a subsidiary of Mueller Water Products Inc. b. Empire Industries, Inc. c. ERICO International Corporation

2. Description: Shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly made of steel channels, accessories, fittings, and other components for supporting multiple parallel pipes.

3. Standard: Comply with MFMA-4. 4. Channels: Continuous slotted steel channel with inturned lips. 5. Channel Nuts: Formed or stamped steel nuts or other devices designed to fit into channel

slot and, when tightened, prevent slipping along channel. 6. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of carbon steel. 7. Coating: Zinc.

2.5 THERMAL-HANGER SHIELD INSERTS


1. Carpenter & Paterson, Inc.



2. Clement Support Services 3. ERICO International Corporation 4. National Pipe Hanger Corporation 5. PHS Industries, Inc.

B. Insulation-Insert Material for Cold Piping: ASTM C 552, Type II cellular glass with 100-psi minimum compressive strength and vapor barrier.

C. Insulation-Insert Material for Hot Piping: ASTM C 552, Type II cellular glass with 100-psi minimum compressive strength.

D. For Trapeze or Clamped Systems: Insert and shield shall cover entire circumference of pipe.

E. For Clevis or Band Hangers: Insert and shield shall cover lower 180 degrees of pipe.

F. Insert Length: Extend 2 inches beyond sheet metal shield for piping operating below ambient air temperature.


A. Description: Welded, shop- or field-fabricated equipment support made from structural carbon-steel shapes.

2.7 OUTDOOR EQUIPMENT STANDS

A. Description: Individual foot supports with elevated adjustable channel cross bars and clamps/fasteners/bolts for ground or roof supported outdoor equipment components, without roof membrane penetration, in a pre-fabricated system that can be modularly-assembled on site.

B. Foot Material: Rubber or polypropylene.

C. Rails Material: Hot dip galvanized carbon steel.


A. Carbon Steel: ASTM A 1011.

B. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36, carbon-steel plates, shapes, and bars; galvanized.

C. Threaded Rods: Continuously threaded. Zinc-plated steel or galvanized steel for indoor applications and stainless-steel for outdoor applications. Mating nuts and washers of similar material as rods.

D. Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-mixed and -packaged, dry, hydraulic-cement, non-shrink, and nonmetallic grout; suitable for interior and exterior applications.

1. Properties: Non-staining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous. 2. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATION

A. Comply with requirements in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping" for firestopping materials and installation for penetrations through fire-rated walls, ceilings, and assemblies.

B. Strength of Support Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength will be adequate to carry present and future static loads within specified loading limits. Minimum static design load used for strength determination shall be weight of supported components plus 200 lbs.


A. Metal Pipe-Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-58. Install hangers, supports, clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping from the building structure.

B. Metal Trapeze Pipe-Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-58. Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping, and support together on field-fabricated trapeze pipe hangers.

1. Pipes of Various Sizes: Support together and space trapezes for smallest pipe size or install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipes as specified for individual pipe hangers.

2. Field fabricate from ASTM A 36, carbon-steel shapes selected for loads being supported. Weld steel according to AWS D1.1.

C. Metal Framing System Installation: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of piping, and support together on field-assembled strut systems.

D. Thermal-Hanger Shield Installation: Install in pipe hanger or shield for insulated piping.

E. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary attachments, inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers, and other accessories.

F. Equipment Support Installation: Fabricate from welded-structural-steel shapes.

G. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and seismic movement of piping systems, to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units.

H. Install lateral bracing with pipe hangers and supports to prevent swaying.

I. Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel. Install additional attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, and strainers, NPS 2-1/2 and larger and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before concrete is placed; fasten inserts to forms and install reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts.

J. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so that piping live and dead loads and stresses from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment.

K. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and to not exceed maximum pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.9 for building services piping.



L. Insulated Piping:

1. Attach clamps and spacers to piping.

a. Piping Operating above Ambient Air Temperature: Clamp may project through insulation.

b. Piping Operating below Ambient Air Temperature: Use thermal-hanger shield insert with clamp sized to match OD of insert.

c. Do not exceed pipe stress limits allowed by ASME B31.9 for building services piping.

2. Install MSS SP-58, Type 39, protection saddles if insulation without vapor barrier is indicated. Fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation.


3. Install MSS SP-58, Type 40, protective shields on cold piping with vapor barrier. Shields shall span an arc of 180 degrees.


4. Shield Dimensions for Pipe: Not less than the following:

a. NPS 1/4 to NPS 3-1/2: 12 inches long and 0.048-inch-thick. b. NPS 4: 12 inches long and 0.06-inch-thick.

5. Thermal-Hanger Shields: Install with insulation same thickness as piping insulation.


A. Fabricate structural-steel stands to suspend equipment from structure overhead or to support equipment above floor.

B. Grouting: Place grout under supports for equipment and make bearing surface smooth.

C. Provide lateral bracing, to prevent swaying, for equipment supports.

3.4 METAL FABRICATIONS

A. Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for trapeze pipe hangers and equipment supports.

B. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field weld connections that cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations.

C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1 procedures for shielded, metal arc welding; appearance and quality of welds; and methods used in correcting welding work; and with the following:




2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. Finish welds at exposed connections so no roughness shows after finishing and so

contours of welded surfaces match adjacent contours.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Hanger Adjustments: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve indicated slope of pipe.

B. Trim excess length of continuous-thread hanger and support rods to 1½ inches.

3.6 PAINTING


1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils.


3.7 HANGER SUPPORT AND SPACING:

A. Install hangers for drawn-temper copper piping with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes:

1. Sizes through NPS 3/4: Maximum span, 5 feet; minimum rod size, ¼-inch. 2. NPS 1: Maximum span, 6 feet; minimum rod size, ¼-inch. 3. NPS 1-1/4Maximum span, 6 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8-inch. 4. NPS 1-1/2: Maximum span, 6 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8-inch. 5. NPS 2: Maximum span, 8 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8-inch.

3.8 HANGER AND SUPPORT SCHEDULE

A. Specific hanger and support requirements are in Sections specifying piping systems and equipment.

B. Comply with MSS SP-58 for pipe-hanger selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections.

C. Use hangers and supports with galvanized metallic coatings for piping and equipment that will not have field-applied finish.

D. Use nonmetallic coatings on attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments are in direct contact with copper tubing.

E. Use carbon-steel pipe hangers and supports, metal trapeze pipe hangers and metal framing systems and attachments for general service applications.



F. Use stainless-steel pipe hangers and stainless-steel or corrosion-resistant attachments for hostile environment applications.

G. Use copper-plated pipe hangers and copper or stainless-steel attachments for copper piping and tubing.

H. Use padded hangers for piping that is subject to scratching.

I. Use thermal-hanger shield inserts for insulated piping and tubing.

J. Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Adjustable, Steel Clevis Hangers (MSS Type 1): For suspension of non-insulated or insulated, stationary pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 30.

2. Pipe Hangers (MSS Type 5): For suspension of pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 4, to allow off-center closure for hanger installation before pipe erection.

3. U-Bolts (MSS Type 24): For support of heavy pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 30. 4. Clips (MSS Type 26): For support of insulated pipes not subject to expansion or

contraction. 5. Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 36): For support of pipes NPS 4 to NPS 36, with steel-

pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange or carbon-steel plate. 6. Pipe Stanchion Saddles (MSS Type 37): For support of pipes NPS 4 to NPS, with steel-

pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange or carbon-steel plate, and with U-bolt to retain pipe.

7. Adjustable Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 38): For stanchion-type support for pipes NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 36 if vertical adjustment is required, with steel-pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange.

8. Single-Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 41): For suspension of pipes NPS 1 to NPS 30, from two (2) rods if longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur.

9. Adjustable Roller Hangers (MSS Type 43): For suspension of pipes NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 24, from single rod if horizontal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur.

10. Complete Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 44): For support of pipes NPS 2 to NPS 42 if longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur but vertical adjustment is unnecessary.

11. Pipe Roll and Plate Units (MSS Type 45): For support of pipes NPS 2 to NPS if small horizontal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur and vertical adjustment is unnecessary.

12. Adjustable Pipe Roll and Base Units (MSS Type 46): For support of pipes NPS 2 to NPS 30 if vertical and lateral adjustment during installation might be required in addition to expansion and contraction.

K. Vertical-Piping Clamps: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Extension Pipe or Riser Clamps (MSS Type 8): For support of pipe risers NPS 3/4 to NPS 24.

2. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel Riser Clamps (MSS Type 42): For support of pipe risers NPS 3/4 to NPS 24 if longer ends are required for riser clamps.



L. Hanger-Rod Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Steel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 13): For adjustment up to 6 inches for heavy loads. 2. Steel Clevises (MSS Type 14): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations. 3. Swivel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 15): For use with MSS Type 11, split pipe rings. 4. Malleable-Iron Sockets (MSS Type 16): For attaching hanger rods to various types of

building attachments. 5. Steel Weldless Eye Nuts (MSS Type 17): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations.

M. Building Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Steel or Malleable Concrete Inserts (MSS Type 18): For upper attachment to suspend pipe hangers from concrete ceiling.

2. Top-Beam C-Clamps (MSS Type 19): For use under roof installations with bar-joist construction, to attach to top flange of structural shape.

3. Side-Beam or Channel Clamps (MSS Type 20): For attaching to bottom flange of beams, channels, or angles.

4. Center-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 21): For attaching to center of bottom flange of beams. 5. Welded Beam Attachments (MSS Type 22): For attaching to bottom of beams if loads are

considerable and rod sizes are large. 6. C-Clamps (MSS Type 23): For structural shapes. 7. Top-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 25): For top of beams if hanger rod is required tangent to

flange edge. 8. Side-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 27): For bottom of steel I-beams. 9. Steel-Beam Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 28): For attaching to bottom of steel I-

beams for heavy loads. 10. Linked-Steel Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 29): For attaching to bottom of steel I-

beams for heavy loads, with link extensions. 11. Malleable-Beam Clamps with Extension Pieces (MSS Type 30): For attaching to

structural steel. 12. Welded-Steel Brackets: For support of pipes from below or for suspending from above

by using clip and rod. Use one (1) of the following for indicated loads:

a. Light (MSS Type 31): 750 lb. b. Medium (MSS Type 32): 1500 lb. c. Heavy (MSS Type 33): 3000 lb.

13. Side-Beam Brackets (MSS Type 34): For sides of steel or wooden beams. 14. Plate Lugs (MSS Type 57): For attaching to steel beams if flexibility at beam is required. 15. Horizontal Travelers (MSS Type 58): For supporting piping systems subject to linear

horizontal movement where headroom is limited.

N. Saddles and Shields: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Steel-Pipe-Covering Protection Saddles (MSS Type 39): To fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation.

2. Protection Shields (MSS Type 40): Of length recommended in writing by manufacturer to prevent crushing insulation.



3. Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts: For supporting insulated pipe.

O. Spring Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Restraint-Control Devices (MSS Type 47): Where indicated to control piping movement. 2. Spring Cushions (MSS Type 48): For light loads if vertical movement does not exceed

1¼ inches. 3. Spring-Cushion Roll Hangers (MSS Type 49): For equipping Type 41, roll hanger with

springs. 4. Spring Sway Braces (MSS Type 50): To retard sway, shock, vibration, or thermal

expansion in piping systems. 5. Variable-Spring Hangers (MSS Type 51): Preset to indicated load and limit variability

factor to twenty-five percent (25%) to allow expansion and contraction of piping system from hanger.

6. Variable-Spring Base Supports (MSS Type 52): Preset to indicated load and limit variability factor to twenty-five percent (25%) to allow expansion and contraction of piping system from base support.

7. Variable-Spring Trapeze Hangers (MSS Type 53): Preset to indicated load and limit variability factor to twenty-five percent (25%) to allow expansion and contraction of piping system from trapeze support.

8. Constant Supports: For critical piping stress and if necessary, to avoid transfer of stress from one support to another support, critical terminal, or connected equipment. Include auxiliary stops for erection, hydrostatic test, and load-adjustment capability. These supports include the following types:

a. Horizontal (MSS Type 54): Mounted horizontally. b. Vertical (MSS Type 55): Mounted vertically. c. Trapeze (MSS Type 56): Two (2) vertical-type supports and one trapeze member.

P. Comply with MSS SP-58 for trapeze pipe-hanger selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections.

Q. Comply with MFMA-103 for metal framing system selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections.

R. Use powder-actuated fasteners or mechanical-expansion anchors instead of building attachments where required in concrete construction.


VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC


SECTION 230548 - VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Isolation pads. 2. Isolation mounts. 3. Restrained elastomeric isolation mounts. 4. Restrained spring isolators. 5. Elastomeric hangers. 6. Spring hangers with vertical-limit stops. 7. Pipe riser resilient supports. 8. Resilient pipe guides. 9. Seismic Snubbers. 10. Restraint channel bracings. 11. Restraint cables. 12. Seismic restraint accessories 13. Mechanical anchor bolts. 14. Adhesive anchors bolts. 15. Vibration isolation equipment bases.

1.3 DEFINITIONS



C. OSHPD: Office of Statewide Health Planning and Development (for the State of California owned and regulated medical facilities).




2. Include load rating for each wind-force-restraint fitting and assembly. 3. Illustrate and indicate style, material, strength, fastening provision, and finish for each

type and size of vibration isolation device and seismic- and wind-force-restraint component.

4. Annotate to indicate application of each product submitted and compliance with requirements.




B. Shop Drawings:

1. Detail fabrication and assembly of equipment bases. 2. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail fabrication including anchorages and attachments

to structure and to supported equipment. Include adjustable motor bases, rails, and frames for equipment mounting.

C. Delegated-Design Submittal:

1. For each seismic-restraint and wind-load protection device, including seismic-restrained mounting, pipe-riser resilient support, snubber, seismic restraint, seismic-restraint accessory and concrete anchor and insert that is required by this Section or is indicated on Drawings, submit the following:

a. Seismic and Wind-Load Restraint, and Vibration Isolation Base Selection: Select vibration isolators, seismic and wind-load restraints, and vibration isolation bases complying with performance requirements, design criteria, and analysis data.

b. Riser Supports: Include riser diagrams and calculations showing anticipated expansion and contraction at each support point, initial and final loads on building structure, spring deflection changes, and seismic loads. Include certification by professional engineer that riser system was examined for excessive stress and that none exists.

c. Concrete Anchors and Inserts: Include calculations showing anticipated seismic and wind loads. Include certification that device is approved by an NRTL for seismic reinforcement use.

d. Seismic Design Calculations: Submit all input data and loading calculations prepared under "Seismic Design Calculations" Paragraph in "Performance Requirements" Article.

e. Wind-Load Design Calculations: Submit all static and dynamic loading calculations prepared under "Wind-Load Design Calculations" Paragraph in "Performance Requirements" Article.

f. Qualified Professional Engineer: All designated-design submittals for seismic- and wind-restraint calculations are to be signed and sealed by qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

2. Seismic- and Wind-Restraint Detail Drawing:

a. Design Analysis: To support selection and arrangement of seismic and wind restraints. Include calculations of combined tensile and shear loads.

b. Details: Indicate fabrication and arrangement. Detail attachments of restraints to restrained items and to the structure. Show attachment locations, methods, and spacings. Identify components, list their strengths, and indicate directions and values of forces transmitted to the structure during seismic events. Indicate association with vibration isolation devices.

c. Coordinate seismic-restraint and vibration isolation details with wind-restraint details required for equipment mounted outdoors. Comply also with requirements in other Sections for equipment mounted outdoors.



3. All delegated-design submittals for seismic- and wind-restraint detail Drawings are to be signed and sealed by qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

4. Product Listing, Preapproval, and Evaluation Documentation: By an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, showing maximum ratings of restraint items and basis for approval (tests or calculations).

5. Design Calculations for Vibration Isolation Devices: Calculate static and dynamic loading due to equipment weight and operating forces required to select proper vibration isolators, and to design vibration isolation bases.

6. Riser Supports: Include riser diagrams and calculations showing anticipated expansion and contraction at each support point, initial and final loads on building structure, and spring deflection changes. Include certification that riser system was examined for excessive stress and that none exists.


A. Coordination Drawings: Show coordination of vibration isolation device installation and seismic bracing for HVAC piping and equipment with other systems and equipment in the vicinity, including other supports and restraints, if any.





A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, with the experience and capability to conduct testing indicated, be an NRTL as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7, and be acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Comply with seismic-restraint requirements in the IBC unless requirements in this Section are more stringent.

C. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel in accordance with AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."

D. Seismic- and Wind Load restraint devices shall have horizontal and vertical load testing and analysis and shall bear anchorage preapproval OPA number from OSHPD, preapproval by ICC-ES, or preapproval by another agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, showing maximum seismic-restraint ratings. Ratings based on independent testing are preferred to ratings based on calculations. If preapproved ratings are not available, submittals based on independent testing are preferred. Calculations (including combining shear and tensile loads) to support seismic-restraint designs must be signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, licensed in the state where the project is located.

1. Seismic and Wind-Load Performance: Equipment shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions and high wind events in accordance with CT State building code.

2.2 ISOLATION PADS


1. Cambridgeport 2. Mason Industries 3. Vibro-Acoustics, A Swegon Group Company 4. Vibration Eliminator Co., Inc. 5. Vibration Isolation.

B. Arranged in single or multiple layers of sufficient stiffness for uniform loading over pad area, molded with a nonslip pattern and galvanized-steel baseplates, and factory cut to sizes that match requirements of supported equipment.

C. Size: Factory or field cut to match requirements of supported equipment.

D. Pad Material: Oil and water resistant with elastomeric properties.

E. Load-bearing metal plates adhered to pads.

F. Sandwich-Core Material: Resilient and elastomeric.

1. Surface Pattern: Waffle pattern. 2. Infused nonwoven cotton or synthetic fibers.

2.3 ELASTOMERIC ISOLATION MOUNTS (Double Deflection)


1. Cambridgeport 2. Mason Industries 3. Vibro-Acoustics, A Swegon Group Company 4. Vibration Eliminator Co., Inc. 5. Vibration Isolation

B. Mounting Plates:

1. Top Plate: Encapsulated steel load transfer top plates, factory drilled and threaded with threaded studs or bolts.



2. Baseplate: Encapsulated steel bottom plates with holes provided for anchoring to support structure.

C. Elastomeric Material: Molded, oil-resistant rubber, neoprene, or other elastomeric material.



1. Mason Industries 2. Cambridgeport 3. Vibro-Acoustics, A Swegon Group Company 4. Vibration Eliminator Co., Inc. 5. Vibration Isolation

B. Description: All-directional isolator with restraints containing two (2) separate and opposing elastomeric elements that prevent central threaded element and attachment hardware from contacting the housing during normal operation.

1. Housing: Cast-ductile iron or welded steel. 2. Elastomeric Material: Molded, oil-resistant rubber, neoprene, or other elastomeric

material.

2.5 RESTRAINED SPRING ISOLATORS


1. Mason Industries 2. Cambridgeport 3. Vibro-Acoustics, A Swegon Group Company 4. Novia; A Division of C&P 5. Vibration Eliminator Co., Inc. 6. Vibration Isolation

B. Description: Freestanding, steel, open-spring isolators with seismic or limit-stop restraint.

1. Housing: Steel with resilient vertical-limit stops to prevent spring extension due to weight being removed; factory-drilled baseplate bonded to ¼-inch-thick, neoprene or rubber isolator pad attached to baseplate underside; and adjustable equipment mounting and internal leveling bolt that acts as blocking during installation.

2. Restraint: Seismic or limit stop as required for equipment and authorities having jurisdiction.


4. Minimum Additional Travel: Fifty percent (50%) of the required deflection at rated load. 5. Lateral Stiffness: More than eighty percent (80%) of rated vertical stiffness. 6. Overload Capacity: Support two hundred percent (200%) of rated load, fully

compressed, without deformation or failure.



2.6 HOUSED-RESTRAINED-SPRING ISOLATORS


1. Mason Industries 2. Cambridgeport 3. Vibro-Acoustics, A Swegon Group Company 4. Novia; A Division of C&P 5. Vibration Eliminator Co., Inc. 6. Vibration Isolation

B. Description:

1. Two-Part Telescoping Housing: A steel top and bottom frame separated by an elastomeric material and enclosing the spring isolators. Housings are equipped with adjustable snubbers to limit vertical movement.


b. Threaded top housing with adjustment bolt and cap screw to fasten and level equipment.


3. Minimum Additional Travel: Fifty percent (50%) of the required deflection at rated load. 4. Lateral Stiffness: More than eighty percent (80%) of rated vertical stiffness. 5. Overload Capacity: Support two hundred percent (200%) of rated load, fully

compressed, without deformation or failure.



1. Mason Industries 2. Vibro-Acoustics, A Swegon Group Company 3. Vibration Management Corp. 4. Vibration Eliminator Co., Inc. 5. Vibration Isolation

B. Description: Elastomeric Mount in a Steel Frame with Upper and Lower Steel Hanger Rods:






A. Description: All-directional, acoustical pipe anchor consisting of two (2) steel tubes separated by a minimum of ½-inch-thick neoprene. Include steel and neoprene vertical-limit stops arranged to prevent vertical travel in both directions. Design support for a maximum load on the isolation material of 500 psig and for equal resistance in all directions.


A. Description: Telescopic arrangement of two (2) steel tubes or post and sleeve arrangement separated by a minimum of ½-inch-thick neoprene. Where clearances are not readily visible, a factory-set guide height with a shear pin to allow vertical motion due to pipe expansion and contraction shall be fitted. Shear pin shall be removable and reinsertable to allow for selection of pipe movement. Guides shall be capable of motion to meet location requirements.

2.10 SEISMIC SNUBBERS


1. Mason Industries 2. Vibration Management Corp. 3. Vibration Mounting and Controls, Inc.






1. Atkore International (Unistrut) 2. Eaton (B-line) 3. Hilti, Inc 4. nVent CADDY

B. Description: MFMA-4, shop- or field-fabricated bracing assembly made of slotted steel channels with accessories for attachment to braced component at one end and to building structure at the other end and other matching components and with corrosion-resistant coating; rated in tension, compression, and torsion forces.

2.12 RESTRAINT CABLES




1. Vibro-Acoustics, A Swegon Group Company 2. nVent CADDY 3. Vibration Mounting and Controls Inc.

B. Restraint Cables: ASTM A 603 galvanized-steel cables. End connections made of steel assemblies with thimbles, brackets, swivel, and bolts designed for restraining cable service; with a minimum of two (2) clamping bolts for cable engagement.



1. Mason Industries 2. Eaton (B-line) 3. Vibro-Acoustics, A Swegon Group Company 4. nVent CADDY 5. Hilti, Inc.

B. General Requirements for Restraint Components: Rated strengths, features, and applications shall be as defined in reports by an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Structural Safety Factor: Allowable strength in tension, shear, and pullout force of components shall be at least four (4) times the maximum seismic forces to which they will be subjected.

C. Hanger Rod Stiffener: Steel tube or steel slotted-support-system sleeve with internally bolted connections to hanger rod.






1. Atkore International (Unistrut) 2. Eaton (B-line) 3. Hilti, Inc 4. Mason Industries 5. Powers Fasteners 6. Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Inc.



B. Mechanical Anchor Bolts: Drilled-in and stud-wedge or female-wedge type in zinc-coated steel for interior applications and stainless steel for exterior applications. Select anchor bolts with strength required for anchor and as tested according to ASTM E 488.

2.15 ADHESIVE ANCHOR BOLTS


1. Atkore International (Unistrut) 2. Eaton (B-line) 3. Hilti, Inc 4. Mason Industries 5. Powers Fasteners 6. Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Inc.

B. Adhesive Anchor Bolts: Drilled-in and capsule anchor system containing PVC or urethane methacrylate-based resin and accelerator, or injected polymer or hybrid mortar adhesive. Provide anchor bolts and hardware with zinc-coated steel for interior applications and stainless-steel for exterior applications. Select anchor bolts with strength required for anchor and as tested according to ASTM E 488.

2.16 VIBRATION ISOLATION EQUIPMENT BASES


1. Cambridgeport 2. Mason Industries 3. Vibro-Acoustics, A Swegon Group Company 4. Novia; A Division of C&P

B. Steel Rails: Factory-fabricated, welded, structural-steel rails.

1. Design Requirements: Lowest possible mounting height with not less than 1-inch clearance above the floor. Include equipment anchor bolts and auxiliary motor slide rails.

2. Structural Steel: Steel shapes, plates, and bars complying with ASTM A 36. Rails shall have shape to accommodate supported equipment.

3. Support Brackets: Factory-welded steel brackets on frame for outrigger isolation mountings and to provide for anchor bolts and equipment support.

C. Steel Bases: Factory-fabricated, welded, structural-steel bases and rails.

1. Design Requirements: Lowest possible mounting height with not less than 1-inch clearance above the floor. Include equipment anchor bolts and auxiliary motor slide bases or rails.

2. Structural Steel: Steel shapes, plates, and bars complying with ASTM A 36. Bases shall have shape to accommodate supported equipment.

3. Support Brackets: Factory-welded steel brackets on frame for outrigger isolation mountings and to provide for anchor bolts and equipment support.



2.17 FACTORY FINISHES

A. Finish: Manufacturer's standard paint applied to factory-assembled and -tested equipment before shipping.

1. Powder coating on springs and housings. 2. All hardware shall be galvanized. Hot-dip galvanized metal components for exterior use. 3. Baked enamel or powder coat for metal components on isolators for interior use. 4. Color-code or otherwise mark vibration isolation and seismic- and wind-control devices

to indicate capacity range.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and equipment to receive vibration isolation and seismic and wind control devices for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.



3.2 APPLICATIONS


B. Hanger-Rod Stiffeners: Install where indicated or scheduled on Drawings to receive them and where required to prevent buckling of hanger rods due to seismic forces.


3.3 INSTALLATION OF VIBRATION-CONTROL, WIND LOAD CONTROL, AND SEISMIC-RESTRAINT DEVICES

A. Provide vibration-control devices for systems and equipment where indicated in Equipment Schedules and/or Drawings.

B. Provide seismic-restraint and wind-load control devices for systems and equipment where indicated in Equipment Schedules and/or Drawings.

C. Coordinate location of embedded connection hardware with supported equipment attachment and mounting points and with requirements for concrete reinforcement and formwork specified in Division 03.

D. Installation of vibration isolators must not cause any change of position of equipment, piping, or ductwork resulting in stresses or misalignment.



E. Equipment Restraints:

1. Install seismic snubbers on HVAC equipment mounted on vibration isolators. Locate snubbers as close as possible to vibration isolators and bolt to equipment base and supporting structure.



F. Piping Restraints:



G. Install seismic and wind load restraint cables so they do not bend across edges of adjacent equipment or building structure.

H. Install seismic-restraint devices using methods approved by an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that provides required submittals for component.

I. Install bushing assemblies for anchor bolts for floor-mounted equipment, arranged to provide resilient media between anchor bolt and mounting hole in concrete base.

J. Install bushing assemblies for mounting bolts for wall-mounted equipment, arranged to provide resilient media where equipment or equipment-mounting channels are attached to wall.

K. Attachment to Structure: If specific attachment is not indicated, anchor bracing to structure at flanges of beams, at upper truss chords of bar joists, or at concrete members.

L. Drilled-in Anchors:

1. Identify position of reinforcing steel and other embedded items prior to drilling holes for anchors. Do not damage existing reinforcing or embedded items during coring or drilling. Notify Structural Engineer if reinforcing steel or other embedded items are encountered during drilling. Locate and avoid prestressed tendons, electrical and telecommunications conduit, and gas lines.


3. Wedge-Type Anchor Bolts: Protect threads from damage during anchor installation. Heavy-duty sleeve anchors shall be installed with sleeve fully engaged in the structural element to which anchor is to be fastened.

4. Adhesive-Type Anchor Bolts: Clean holes to remove loose material and drilling dust prior to installation of adhesive. Place adhesive in holes proceeding from the bottom of the hole and progressing toward the surface in such a manner as to avoid introduction of air pockets in the adhesive.


applications.




A. Provide flexible connections in piping systems where they cross structural seismic joints and other point where differential movement may occur. Provide adequate flexibility to accommodate differential movement as determined in accordance with ASCE/SEI 7.

3.5 INSTALLATION OF VIBRATION ISOLATION EQUIPMENT BASES

A. Installation of all vibration isolation materials and supplemental equipment bases specified in this section shall be accomplished as per the manufacturer’s written instructions and adjust mountings to level equipment.

B. On completion of installation of all isolation materials and before startup of isolated equipment, all debris shall be cleared from areas surrounding and from beneath all isolated equipment, leaving equipment free to move on the isolation supports.

C. No rigid connections between equipment and building structure shall be made that degrades the noise and vibration isolation system herein specified. Electrical conduit connections to isolated equipment shall be looped to allow free motion of isolated equipment.

D. No rigid connections between equipment and building structure shall be made that degrades the noise and vibration isolation system herein specified. Electrical conduit connections to isolated equipment shall be looped to allow free motion of isolated equipment. Coordinate with Division 26.

E. Coordinate location of embedded connection hardware with supported equipment attachment and mounting points and with requirements for concrete reinforcement and formwork specified in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete."

F. Coordinate dimensions of steel equipment rails and bases, concrete inertia bases, and restrained isolation roof-curb rails with requirements of isolated equipment specified in this and other Sections. Where dimensions of these bases are indicated on Drawings, dimensions may require adjustment to accommodate actual isolated equipment.

3.6 VIBRATION ISOLATION AND SEISMIC RESTRAINT OF DUCTWORK

A. Vibration Isolation of Ductwork

1. All discharge runs for a distance of 50 feet from the connected equipment shall be isolated from the building structure by means of specification 10 hangers or specification 5 floor isolators. Spring deflection shall be a minimum of 0.75-inch.

2. All duct runs having air velocity of 1000 fpm or more shall be isolated from the building structure by specification 11 hangers or 5 floor supports. Spring deflection shall be a minimum of 0.75-inch.

B. Seismic Restraint of Ductwork

1. Restrain rectangular ducts with cross sectional area of 6 square feet or larger. 2. Restrain round ducts with diameters of 28 inches or larger. 3. Restrain flat oval ducts the same as rectangular ducts of the same nominal size.



4. Transverse restraints shall occur at 30-foot intervals or at both ends of the duct run if less than the specified interval. Transverse restraints shall be installed at each duct turn and at each end of a duct run.

5. Longitudinal restraints shall occur at 60-foot intervals with at least one (1) restraint per duct run. Transverse restraints for one (1) duct section may also act as a longitudinal restraint for a duct section connected perpendicular to it if the restraints are installed within 4 feet of the intersection of the ducts and if the restraints are sized for the larger duct. Duct joints shall conform to SMACNA duct construction standards.

6. The ductwork must be reinforced at the restraint locations. Reinforcement shall consist of an additional angle on top of the ductwork that is attached to the support hanger rods. Ductwork is to be attached to both upper angle and lower trapeze.

7. A group of ducts may be combined in a larger frame so that the combined weights and dimensions of the ducts are less than or equal to the maximum weight and dimensions of the duct for which bracing details are selected.

8. Walls, including gypsum board nonbearing partitions, which have ducts running through them, may replace a typical transverse brace. Provide channel framing around ducts and solid blocking between the duct and frame.

9. Connection to the structure must be made with a non-friction connection.

C. Ductwork Exclusions

1. Rectangular and square and ducts that are less than 6 square feet in cross sectional area. 2. All trapezed ductwork where the distance from the suspension point to the trapeze

member is 12 inches or less. 3. Ductwork hung with straps where the top of the duct is 12 inches or less from the

suspension point and the strap has two (2) #10 sheet metal screws within 2 inches of the top of the duct.

4. If any suspension location in the run exceeds the above, the entire run must be braced.

3.7 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust isolators after system is at operating weight.

B. Adjust limit stops on restrained-spring isolators to mount equipment at normal operating height. After equipment installation is complete, adjust limit stops so they are out of contact during normal operation.

C. Adjust active height of spring isolators.

D. Adjust restraints to permit free movement of equipment within normal mode of operation.







2. Schedule test with Owner, through Architect, before connecting anchorage device to restrained component (unless post connection testing has been approved), and with at least seven (7) days advance notice.







IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT


SECTION 230553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Equipment labels. 2. Warning signs and labels. 3. Pipe labels. 4. Duct labels. 5. Warning tags.




C. Equipment Label Schedule: Include a listing of all equipment to be labeled with the proposed content for each label.

D. Valve numbering scheme.

E. Valve Schedules: For each piping system to include in maintenance manuals.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS




a. Brady Corporation b. Brimar Industries, Inc. c. Carlton Industries, LP d. Seton Identification Products

2. Material and Thickness: Brass, 0.032-inch minimum thickness, and having predrilled or stamped holes for attachment hardware.



3. Letter Color: White. 4. Background Color: Black. 5. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than




B. Label Content: Include equipment's Drawing designation or unique equipment number.

C. Equipment Label Schedule: For each item of equipment to be labeled, on 8½-by-11-inch bond paper. Tabulate equipment identification number and identify Drawing numbers where equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules) and the Specification Section number and title where equipment is specified. Equipment schedule shall be included in operation and maintenance data.



1. Brady Corporation 2. Brimar Industries, Inc. 3. Carlton Industries, LP 4. Champion America 5. Craftmark Pipe Markers 6. emedco 7. LEM Products Inc. 8. Marking Sevices Inc. 9. National Marker Company 10. Seton Identification Products 11. Stranco, Inc.


C. Letter Color: Black.

D. Background Color: Yellow.

E. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F (71 deg C).


G. Minimum Letter Size: ¼-inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches, ½-inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater



viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering.



J. Label Content: Include caution and warning information, plus emergency notification instructions.

2.3 PIPE LABELS


1. Actioncraft Products, Inc.; a division of Industrial Test Equipment Co., Inc. 2. Brady Corporation 3. Carlton Industries, LP 4. Champion America 5. Craftmark Pipe Markers 6. Brimar Industries, Inc. 7. LEM Products Inc. 8. Marking Sevices Inc. 9. National Marker Company 10. Seton Identification Products

B. General Requirements for Manufactured Pipe Labels: Preprinted, color-coded, with lettering indicating service, and showing flow direction according to ASME A13.1.


D. Self-Adhesive Pipe Labels: Printed plastic with contact-type, permanent-adhesive backing.

E. Pipe Label Contents: Include identification of piping service using same designations or abbreviations as used on Drawings; also include pipe size and an arrow indicating flow direction.

1. Flow-Direction Arrows: Integral with piping system service lettering to accommodate both directions or as separate unit on each pipe label to indicate flow direction.

2. Lettering Size: At least 1½ inches high.

2.4 DUCT LABELS


1. Brady Corporation 2. Brimar Industries, Inc. 3. Carlton Industries, LP 4. Champion America



5. Craftmark Pipe Markers 6. emedco 7. LEM Products Inc. 8. Marking Sevices Inc. 9. National Marker Company 10. Seton Identification Products


C. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F.

D. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2½-by-¾-inch.

E. Minimum Letter Size: ¼-inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches, ½-inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-quarters the size of principal lettering.

F. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets or self-tapping screws.

G. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.

H. Duct Label Contents: Include identification of duct service using same designations or abbreviations as used on Drawings; also include duct size and an arrow indicating flow direction.

1. Flow-Direction Arrows: Integral with duct system service lettering to accommodate both directions or as separate unit on each duct label to indicate flow direction.

2.5 ACCESS PANEL AND DOOR MARKERS

A. Access Panel and Door Markers: 1/16-inch-thick, engraved laminated plastic with abbreviated terms and numbers corresponding to identification. Provide 1/8-inch center hole for attachment. Fasteners: Self-tapping, stainless steel screws or contact type, permanent adhesive.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Clean piping and equipment surfaces of substances that could impair bond of identification devices, including dirt, oil, grease, release agents, and incompatible primers, paints, and encapsulants.


A. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of surfaces where devices are to be applied.









A. Piping Color-Coding: Painting of piping is specified in Section 099123 "Interior Painting."

B. Pipe Label Locations: Locate pipe labels where piping is exposed or above accessible ceilings in finished spaces; machine rooms; accessible maintenance spaces such as shafts, tunnels, and plenums; and exterior exposed locations as follows:

1. Near each valve and control device. 2. Near each branch connection, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and terminal units.

Where flow pattern is not obvious, mark each pipe at branch. 3. Near penetrations and on both sides of through walls, floors, ceilings, and inaccessible

enclosures. 4. At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view of concealed



C. Directional Flow Arrows: Arrows shall be used to indicate direction of flow in pipes, including pipes where flow is allowed in both directions.

D. Pipe Label Color Schedule:

1. Heating Water Piping: Black letters on a yellow background. 2. Refrigerant Piping: White letters on a safety-green background. 3. Make-Up Water Piping: White letters on a safety-green background.

3.5 DUCT LABEL INSTALLATION

A. Install self-adhesive duct labels with permanent adhesive on air ducts in the following color codes:

1. Blue: For cold-air supply ducts. 2. Yellow: For hot-air supply ducts. 3. Green: For exhaust-, outside-, relief-, return-, and mixed-air ducts. 4. ASME A13.1 Colors and Designs: For hazardous material exhaust.

B. Locate labels near points where ducts enter into and exit from concealed spaces and at maximum intervals of 50 feet in each space where ducts are exposed or concealed by removable ceiling system.




A. Install tags on valves and control devices in piping systems, except check valves, valves within factory-fabricated equipment units, shutoff valves, faucets, convenience and lawn-watering hose connections, and HVAC terminal devices and similar roughing-in connections of end-use fixtures and units. List tagged valves in a valve schedule.

B. Valve-Tag Application Schedule: Tag valves according to size, shape, and color scheme and with captions similar to those indicated in the following subparagraphs:


a. Refrigerant: 2 inches, round.

2. Valve Tag Color:

a. Toxic and Corrosive Fluids: Black letters on a safety-orange background. b. Flammable Fluids: Black letters on a safety-yellow background. c. Combustible Fluids: White letters on a safety-brown background. d. Potable and Other Water: White letters on a safety-green background.

3.7 WARNING-SIGNS AND LABELS INSTALLATION


3.8 ABOVE CEILING UNITS

A. Mark all above ceiling units so that the markings can be easily read from the most likely viewing position (e.g., through the ceiling below, etc.).

B. Units Installed Above T-Bar Ceiling: Label T-bar with terminal unit identifier as shown on the Drawings. Use label maker with peel and stick labels, blue background, and black lettering.


TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC


SECTION 230593 - TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Balancing Air Systems:

a. Constant-volume air systems. b. Variable-air-volume systems.

2. Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Equipment:

a. Energy Recovery Units b. Exhaust fans. c. Variable refrigerant flow systems. d. Condensing units.

3. Vibration tests. 4. Duct leakage tests. 5. Control system verification.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. AABC: Associated Air Balance Council.

B. BAS: Building automation systems.

C. NEBB: National Environmental Balancing Bureau.

D. TAB: Testing, adjusting, and balancing.

E. TABB: Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Bureau.

F. TAB Specialist: An independent entity meeting qualifications to perform TAB work.

G. TDH: Total dynamic head.


A. High Performance Building: Documentation of work performed for ASHRAE 62.1, Section 7.2.2 – “Air Balancing”



B. TAB Report: Documentation indicating that Work complies with ASHRAE/IES 90.1, Section 6.7.2.3 - "System Balancing."


A. Qualification Data: Within thirty (30) days of Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit documentation that the TAB specialist and this Project's TAB team members meet the qualifications specified in "Quality Assurance" Article.

B. Contract Documents Examination Report: Within thirty (30) days of Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit the Contract Documents review report as specified in Part 3.

C. Strategies and Procedures Plan: Within thirty (30) days of Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit TAB strategies and step-by-step procedures as specified in "Preparation" Article.

D. System Readiness Checklists: Within thirty (30) days of Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit system readiness checklists as specified in "Preparation" Article.

E. Examination Report: Submit a summary report of the examination review required in "Examination" Article.

F. Certified TAB reports.

G. Sample report forms.

H. Instrument calibration reports, to include the following:

1. Instrument type and make. 2. Serial number. 3. Application. 4. Dates of use. 5. Dates of calibration.


A. TAB Contractor Qualifications: Engage a TAB entity certified by AABC or NEBB.

1. TAB Field Supervisor: Employee of the TAB contractor and certified by AABC or NEBB.

2. TAB Technician: Employee of the TAB contractor and who is certified by AABC or NEBB as a TAB technician.

B. TAB Conference: Meet with Commissioning Authority on approval of the TAB strategies and procedures plan to develop a mutual understanding of the details. Require the participation of the TAB field supervisor and technicians. Provide seven (7) days' advance notice of scheduled meeting time and location.

1. Agenda Items:

a. The Contract Documents examination report. b. The TAB plan. c. Coordination and cooperation of trades and subcontractors.



d. Coordination of documentation and communication flow.

C. Certify TAB field data reports and perform the following:

1. Review field data reports to validate accuracy of data and to prepare certified TAB reports.

2. Certify that the TAB team complied with the approved TAB plan and the procedures specified and referenced in this Specification.

D. TAB Report Forms: Use standard TAB contractor's forms approved by Commissioning Authority.

E. Instrumentation Type, Quantity, Accuracy, and Calibration: As described in ASHRAE 111, Section 5, "Instrumentation."

F. ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 7.2.2 - "Air Balancing."

G. ASHRAE/IESNA Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1, Section 6.7.2.3 - "System Balancing."


A. Partial Owner Occupancy: Owner may occupy completed areas of building before Substantial Completion. Cooperate with Owner during TAB operations to minimize conflicts with Owner's operations.

1.8 COORDINATION

A. Notice: Provide seven (7) days' advance notice for each test. Include scheduled test dates and times.

B. A factory-authorized service representative and the BAS Contractor shall be present when balancing and testing major equipment.

C. Perform TAB after leakage and pressure tests on air and water distribution systems have been satisfactorily completed.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine the Contract Documents to become familiar with Project requirements and to discover conditions in systems designs that may preclude proper TAB of systems and equipment.

B. Examine the Contract Documents to become familiar with Project phasing plan and to become familiar with the TAB requirements at the end of each construction phase.



C. Examine installed systems for balancing devices, such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer wells, flow-control devices, balancing valves and fittings, and manual volume dampers. Verify that locations of these balancing devices are applicable for intended purpose and are accessible.

D. Examine the approved submittals for HVAC systems and equipment.

E. Examine design data including HVAC system descriptions, statements of design assumptions for environmental conditions and systems output, and statements of philosophies and assumptions about HVAC system and equipment controls.

F. Examine ceiling plenums and underfloor air plenums used for supply, return, or relief air to verify that they are properly separated from adjacent areas. Verify that penetrations in plenum walls are sealed and fire-stopped if required.

G. Examine equipment performance data including fan and pump curves.

1. Relate performance data to Project conditions and requirements, including system effects that can create undesired or unpredicted conditions that cause reduced capacities in all or part of a system.

2. Calculate system-effect factors to reduce performance ratings of HVAC equipment when installed under conditions different from the conditions used to rate equipment performance. To calculate system effects for air systems, use tables and charts found in AMCA 201, "Fans and Systems," or in SMACNA's "HVAC Systems - Duct Design." Compare results with the design data and installed conditions.

H. Examine system and equipment installations and verify that field quality-control testing, cleaning, and adjusting specified in individual Sections have been performed.

I. Examine test reports specified in individual system and equipment Sections.

J. Examine HVAC equipment and verify that bearings are greased, belts are aligned and tight, filters are clean, and equipment with functioning controls is ready for operation.

K. Examine terminal units and verify that they are accessible, and their controls are connected and functioning.

L. Examine strainers. Verify that startup screens have been replaced by permanent screens with indicated perforations.

M. Examine three-way valves for proper installation for their intended function of throttling, diverting, or mixing fluid flows.

N. Examine heat-transfer coils for correct piping connections and for clean and straight fins.

O. Examine system pumps to ensure absence of entrained air in the suction piping.

P. Examine operating safety interlocks and controls on HVAC equipment.

Q. Report deficiencies discovered before and during performance of TAB procedures. Observe and record system reactions to changes in conditions. Record default set points if different from indicated values.



3.2 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR MULTIPLE PHASES

A. At the end of each phase:

1. Performed TAB for all systems scheduled to operate as part of each phase. 2. Adjust heating and cooling systems, as required, to accommodate additional equipment at

each phase. 3. Generate report at the end of each phase.

B. At the completion of the project:

1. Perform TAB for the whole system. 2. Retest, readjust and rebalance all system previously tested and balanced at each phase. 3. Generate complete final report.

3.3 PREPARATION

A. Prepare a TAB plan that includes the following:

1. Equipment and systems to be tested. 2. Strategies and step-by-step procedures for balancing the systems. 3. Instrumentation to be used. 4. Sample forms with specific identification for all equipment.

B. Perform system-readiness checks of HVAC systems and equipment to verify system readiness for TAB work. Include, at a minimum, the following:

1. Airside:

a. Verify that leakage and pressure tests on air distribution systems have been satisfactorily completed.

b. Duct systems are complete with terminals installed. c. Volume, smoke, and fire dampers are open and functional. d. Clean filters are installed. e. Fans are operating, free of vibration, and rotating in correct direction. f. Variable-frequency controllers' startup is complete and safeties are verified. g. Automatic temperature-control systems are operational. h. Ceilings are installed. i. Windows and doors are installed. j. Suitable access to balancing devices and equipment is provided.

2. Hydronics:

a. Verify leakage and pressure tests on water distribution systems have been satisfactorily completed.

b. Piping is complete with terminals installed. c. Water treatment is complete. d. Systems are flushed, filled, and air purged. e. Strainers are pulled and cleaned. f. Control valves are functioning per the sequence of operation.



g. Shutoff and balance valves have been verified to be one hundred percent (100%) open.

h. Pumps are started and proper rotation is verified. i. Pump gage connections are installed directly at pump inlet and outlet flanges or in

discharge and suction pipe prior to valves or strainers. j. Variable-frequency controllers' startup is complete and safeties are verified. k. Suitable access to balancing devices and equipment is provided.

3.4 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR TESTING AND BALANCING

A. Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system according to the procedures contained in AABC's "National Standards for Total System Balance", NEBB's "Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems and in this Section.

1. Comply with requirements in ASHRAE 62.1-2004, Section 7.2.2, "Air Balancing."

B. Cut insulation, ducts, pipes, and equipment cabinets for installation of test probes to the minimum extent necessary for TAB procedures.

1. After testing and balancing, patch probe holes in ducts with same material and thickness as used to construct ducts.

2. After testing and balancing, install test ports and duct access doors that comply with requirements in Section 233300 "Air Duct Accessories."

3. Install and join new insulation that matches removed materials. Restore insulation, coverings, vapor barrier, and finish according to Section 230713 "Duct Insulation" and Section 230719 "HVAC Piping Insulation."

C. Mark equipment and balancing devices, including damper-control positions, valve position indicators, fan-speed-control levers, and similar controls and devices, with paint or other suitable, permanent identification material to show final settings.

D. Take and report testing and balancing measurements in inch-pound (IP) units.

3.5 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR BALANCING AIR SYSTEMS

A. Prepare test reports for both fans and outlets. Obtain manufacturer's outlet factors and recommended testing procedures. Cross-check the summation of required outlet volumes with required fan volumes.

B. Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as-built" duct layouts.

C. For variable-air-volume systems, develop a plan to simulate diversity.

D. Determine the best locations in main and branch ducts for accurate duct-airflow measurements.

E. Check airflow patterns from the outdoor-air louvers and dampers and the return- and exhaust-air dampers through the supply-fan discharge and mixing dampers.

F. Locate start-stop and disconnect switches, electrical interlocks, and motor starters.

G. Verify that motor starters are equipped with properly sized thermal protection.



H. Check dampers for proper position to achieve desired airflow path.

I. Check for airflow blockages.

J. Check condensate drains for proper connections and functioning.

K. Check for proper sealing of air-handling-unit components.

L. Verify that air duct system is sealed as specified in Section 233113 "Metal Ducts."

3.6 PROCEDURES FOR CONSTANT-VOLUME AIR SYSTEMS

A. Adjust fans to deliver total indicated airflows within the maximum allowable fan speed listed by fan manufacturer.

1. Measure total airflow.

a. Set outside-air, return-air, and relief-air dampers for proper position that simulates minimum outdoor-air conditions.

b. Where duct conditions allow, measure airflow by main Pitot-tube traverse. If necessary, perform multiple Pitot-tube traverses, close to the fan and prior to any outlets, to obtain total airflow.

c. Where duct conditions are not suitable for Pitot-tube traverse measurements, a coil traverse may be acceptable.

d. If a reliable Pitot-tube traverse or coil traverse is not possible, measure airflow at terminals and calculate the total airflow

2. Measure fan static pressures as follows to determine actual static pressure:

a. Measure outlet static pressure as far downstream from the fan as practical and upstream from restrictions in ducts such as elbows and transitions.

b. Measure static pressure directly at the fan outlet or through the flexible connection. c. Measure inlet static pressure of single-inlet fans in the inlet duct as near the fan as

possible, upstream from the flexible connection, and downstream from duct restrictions.

d. Measure inlet static pressure of double-inlet fans through the wall of the plenum that houses the fan.

3. Measure static pressure across each component that makes up an air-handling unit, rooftop unit, dedicated outdoor air unit and other air-handling and -treating equipment.

a. Report the cleanliness status of filters and the time static pressures are measured.

4. Measure static pressures entering and leaving other devices, such as sound traps, heat-recovery equipment, and air washers, under final balanced conditions.

5. Review Record Documents to determine variations in design static pressures versus actual static pressures. Calculate actual system-effect factors. Recommend adjustments to accommodate actual conditions.

6. Obtain approval from Commissioning Authority for adjustment of fan speed higher or lower than indicated speed. Comply with requirements in Division 23 Sections for air-



handling units for adjustment of fans, belts, and pulley sizes to achieve indicated air-handling-unit performance.

7. Do not make fan-speed adjustments that result in motor overload. Consult equipment manufacturers about fan-speed safety factors. Modulate dampers and measure fan-motor amperage to ensure that no overload will occur. Measure amperage in full-cooling, full-heating, economizer, and any other operating mode to determine the maximum required brake horsepower.

B. Adjust volume dampers for main duct, submain ducts, and major branch ducts to indicated airflows.

1. Measure airflow of submain and branch ducts. 2. Adjust submain and branch duct volume dampers for specified airflow. 3. Re-measure each submain and branch duct after all have been adjusted. 4. Continue to adjust submain and branch ducts to indicated airflows within specified

tolerances.

C. Adjust air inlets and outlets for each space to indicated airflows within specified tolerances of indicated values. Make adjustments using branch volume dampers rather than extractors and the dampers at air terminals.

1. Set airflow patterns of adjustable outlets for proper distribution without drafts. 2. Measure inlets and outlets airflow. 3. Adjust each inlet and outlet for specified airflow within specified tolerances. 4. Re-measure each inlet and outlet after they have been adjusted.

D. Verify final system conditions.

1. Re-measure and confirm that minimum outdoor, return, and relief airflows are within design. Readjust to design if necessary.

2. Re-measure and confirm that total airflow is within design. 3. Re-measure all final fan operating data, rpms, volts, amps, and static profile. 4. Mark all final settings with permanent marker. 5. Test system in economizer mode. Verify proper operation and adjust if necessary. 6. Measure and record all operating data. 7. Record final fan-performance data.

3.7 PROCEDURES FOR VARIABLE-AIR-VOLUME SYSTEMS

A. Adjust the variable-air-volume systems as follows:

1. Verify that the system static pressure sensor is located two-thirds of the distance down the duct from the fan discharge.

2. Verify that the system is under static pressure control. 3. Select the terminal unit that is most critical to the supply-fan airflow. Measure inlet static

pressure, and adjust system static pressure control set point so the entering static pressure for the critical terminal unit is not less than the sum of the terminal-unit manufacturer's recommended minimum inlet static pressure plus the static pressure needed to overcome terminal-unit discharge system losses.

4. Calibrate and balance each terminal unit for maximum and minimum design airflow as follows:



a. Adjust controls so that terminal is calling for maximum airflow. Some controllers require starting with minimum airflow. Verify calibration procedure for specific project.

b. Measure airflow and adjust calibration factor as required for design maximum airflow. Record calibration factor.

c. When maximum airflow is correct, balance the air outlets downstream from terminal units.

d. Adjust controls so that terminal is calling for minimum airflow. e. Measure airflow and adjust calibration factor as required for design minimum

airflow. Record calibration factor. If no minimum calibration is available, note any deviation from design airflow.

f. When in full cooling or full heating, ensure that there is no mixing of hot-deck and cold-deck airstreams unless so designed.

g. On constant volume terminals, in critical areas where room pressure is to be maintained, verify that the airflow remains constant over the full range of full cooling to full heating. Note any deviation from design airflow or room pressure.

5. After terminals have been calibrated and balanced, test and adjust system for total airflow. Adjust fans to deliver total design airflows within the maximum allowable fan speed listed by fan manufacturer.

a. Set outside-air, return-air, and relief-air dampers for proper position that simulates minimum outdoor-air conditions.

b. Set terminals for maximum airflow. If system design includes diversity, adjust terminals for maximum and minimum airflow so that connected total matches fan selection and simulates actual load in the building.

c. Where duct conditions allow, measure airflow by Pitot-tube traverse. If necessary, perform multiple Pitot-tube traverses to obtain total airflow.

d. Where duct conditions are not suitable for Pitot-tube traverse measurements, a coil traverse may be acceptable.

e. If a reliable Pitot-tube traverse or coil traverse is not possible, measure airflow at terminals and calculate the total airflow.

6. Measure fan static pressures as follows:

a. Measure static pressure directly at the fan outlet or through the flexible connection. b. Measure static pressure directly at the fan inlet or through the flexible connection. c. Measure static pressure across each component that makes up the air-handling

system. d. Report any artificial loading of filters at the time static pressures are measured.

7. Set final return and outside airflow to the fan while operating at maximum return airflow and minimum outdoor airflow.

a. Balance the return-air ducts and inlets the same as described for constant-volume air systems.

b. Verify that terminal units are meeting design airflow under system maximum flow.

8. Re-measure the inlet static pressure at the most critical terminal unit and adjust the system static pressure set point to the most energy-efficient set point to maintain the optimum system static pressure. Record set point and give to controls contractor.



9. Verify final system conditions as follows:

a. Re-measure and confirm that minimum outdoor, return, and relief airflows are within design. Readjust to match design if necessary.

b. Re-measure and confirm that total airflow is within design. c. Re-measure final fan operating data, rpms, volts, amps, and static profile. d. Mark final settings. e. Test system in economizer mode. Verify proper operation and adjust if necessary.

Measure and record all operating data. f. Verify tracking between supply and return fans.

3.8 PROCEDURES FOR HEAT-TRANSFER COILS

A. Measure, adjust, and record the following data for each water coil:

1. Entering- and leaving-water temperature. 2. Water flow rate. 3. Water pressure drop. 4. Dry-bulb temperature of entering and leaving air. 5. Wet-bulb temperature of entering and leaving air for cooling coils. 6. Airflow. 7. Air pressure drop.

B. Measure, adjust, and record the following data for each electric heating coil:

1. Nameplate data. 2. Airflow. 3. Entering- and leaving-air temperature at full load. 4. Voltage and amperage input of each phase at full load and at each incremental stage. 5. Calculated kilowatt at full load. 6. Fuse or circuit-breaker rating for overload protection.

C. Measure, adjust, and record the following data for each steam coil:

1. Dry-bulb temperature of entering and leaving air. 2. Airflow. 3. Air pressure drop. 4. Inlet steam pressure.

D. Measure, adjust, and record the following data for each refrigerant coil:

1. Dry-bulb temperature of entering and leaving air. 2. Wet-bulb temperature of entering and leaving air. 3. Airflow. 4. Air pressure drop. 5. Refrigerant suction pressure and temperature.

3.9 PROCEDURES FOR MOTORS

A. Motors 1/2 HP and Larger: Test at final balanced conditions and record the following data:



1. Manufacturer's name, model number, and serial number. 2. Motor horsepower rating. 3. Motor rpm. 4. Phase and hertz. 5. Nameplate and measured voltage, each phase. 6. Nameplate and measured amperage, each phase. 7. Starter size and thermal-protection-element rating. 8. Service factor and frame size.

B. Motors Driven by Variable-Frequency Controllers: Test for proper operation at speeds varying from minimum to maximum. Test the manual bypass of the controller to prove proper operation. Record observations including name of controller manufacturer, model number, serial number, and nameplate data.

3.10 PROCEDURES FOR CONDENSING UNITS

A. Verify proper rotation of fans.

B. Measure entering- and leaving-air temperatures.

C. Record compressor data.

3.11 VIBRATION TESTS

A. After systems are balanced and construction is Substantially Complete, measure and record vibration levels on equipment having motor horsepower equal to or greater than 10.

B. Instrumentation:

1. Use portable, battery-operated, and microprocessor-controlled vibration meter with or without a built-in printer.

2. The meter shall automatically identify engineering units, filter bandwidth, amplitude, and frequency scale values.

3. The meter shall be able to measure machine vibration displacement in mils of deflection, velocity in inches per second, and acceleration in inches per second squared.

4. Verify calibration date is current for vibration meter before taking readings.

C. Test Procedures:

1. To ensure accurate readings, verify that accelerometer has a clean, flat surface and is mounted properly.

2. With the unit running, set up vibration meter in a safe, secure location. Connect transducer to meter with proper cables. Hold magnetic tip of transducer on top of the bearing, and measure unit in mils of deflection. Record measurement, then move transducer to the side of the bearing and record in mils of deflection. Record an axial reading in mils of deflection by holding nonmagnetic, pointed transducer tip on end of shaft.

3. Change vibration meter to velocity (inches per second) measurements. Repeat and record above measurements.

4. Record CPM or rpm.



5. Read each bearing on motor, fan, and pump as required. Track and record vibration levels from rotating component through casing to base.

D. Reporting:

1. Report shall record location and the system tested. 2. Include horizontal-vertical-axial measurements for tests. 3. Verify that vibration limits follow Specifications, or, if not specified, follow the General

Machinery Vibration Severity Chart or Vibration Acceleration General Severity Chart from the AABC National Standards. Acceptable levels of vibration are normally "smooth" to "good."

4. Include in report General Machinery Vibration Severity Chart, with conditions plotted.

3.12 DUCT LEAKAGE TESTS

A. Witness the duct pressure testing performed by Installer.

B. Verify that proper test methods are used and that leakage rates are within specified tolerances.

C. Report deficiencies observed.

3.13 CONTROLS VERIFICATION

A. In conjunction with system balancing, perform the following:

1. Verify temperature control system is operating within the design limitations. 2. Confirm that the sequences of operation are in compliance with Contract Documents. 3. Verify that controllers are calibrated and function as intended. 4. Verify that controller set points are as indicated. 5. Verify the operation of lockout or interlock systems. 6. Verify the operation of valve and damper actuators. 7. Verify that controlled devices are properly installed and connected to correct controller. 8. Verify that controlled devices travel freely and are in position indicated by controller:

open, closed, or modulating. 9. Verify location and installation of sensors to ensure that they sense only intended

temperature, humidity, or pressure.

B. Reporting: Include a summary of verifications performed, remaining deficiencies, and variations from indicated conditions.

3.14 TOLERANCES

A. Set HVAC system's airflow rates and water flow rates within the following tolerances:

1. Supply, Return, and Exhaust Fans and Equipment with Fans: Between design airflow and plus ten percent (+10%) of design airflow.

2. Air Outlets and Inlets: Between design airflow and plus ten percent (+10%) of design airflow.

3. Heating-Water Flow Rate: Between design water flow and plus ten percent (+10%) of design water flow.



B. Maintaining pressure relationships as designed shall have priority over the tolerances specified above.

3.15 PROGRESS REPORTING

A. Initial Construction-Phase Report: Based on examination of the Contract Documents as specified in "Examination" Article, prepare a report on the adequacy of design for systems balancing devices. Recommend changes and additions to systems balancing devices to facilitate proper performance measuring and balancing. Recommend changes and additions to HVAC systems and general construction to allow access for performance measuring and balancing devices.

B. Status Reports: Prepare biweekly progress reports to describe completed procedures, procedures in progress, and scheduled procedures. Include a list of deficiencies and problems found in systems being tested and balanced. Prepare a separate report for each system and each building floor for systems serving multiple floors.

3.16 FINAL REPORT

A. General: Prepare a certified written report; tabulate and divide the report into separate sections for tested systems and balanced systems.

1. Include a certification sheet at the front of the report's binder, signed and sealed by the certified testing and balancing engineer.

2. Include a list of instruments used for procedures, along with proof of calibration. 3. Certify validity and accuracy of field data.

B. Final Report Contents: In addition to certified field-report data, include the following:

1. Pump curves. 2. Fan curves. 3. Manufacturers' test data. 4. Field test reports prepared by system and equipment installers. 5. Other information relative to equipment performance; do not include Shop Drawings and

Product Data.

C. General Report Data: In addition to form titles and entries, include the following data:

1. Title page. 2. Name and address of the TAB specialist. 3. Project name. 4. Project location. 5. Architect's name and address. 6. Engineer's name and address. 7. Contractor's name and address. 8. Report date. 9. Signature of TAB supervisor who certifies the report. 10. Table of Contents with the total number of pages defined for each section of the report.

Number each page in the report. 11. Summary of contents including the following:



a. Indicated versus final performance. b. Notable characteristics of systems. c. Description of system operation sequence if it varies from the Contract

Documents.

12. Nomenclature sheets for each item of equipment. 13. Data for terminal units, including manufacturer's name, type, size, and fittings. 14. Notes to explain why certain final data in the body of reports vary from indicated values. 15. Test conditions for fans and pump performance forms including the following:

a. Settings for outdoor-, return-, and exhaust-air dampers. b. Conditions of filters. c. Cooling coil, wet- and dry-bulb conditions. d. Face and bypass damper settings at coils. e. Fan drive settings including settings and percentage of maximum pitch diameter. f. Inlet vane settings for variable-air-volume systems. g. Settings for supply-air, static-pressure controller. h. Other system operating conditions that affect performance.

D. System Diagrams: Include schematic layouts of air and hydronic distribution systems. Present each system with single-line diagram and include the following:

1. Quantities of outdoor, supply, return, and exhaust airflows. 2. Water and steam flow rates. 3. Duct, outlet, and inlet sizes. 4. Pipe and valve sizes and locations. 5. Terminal units. 6. Balancing stations. 7. Position of balancing devices.

E. Air-Handling-Unit Test Reports: For air-handling units with coils, include the following:

1. Unit Data:

a. Unit identification. b. Location. c. Make and type. d. Model number and unit size. e. Manufacturer's serial number. f. Unit arrangement and class. g. Discharge arrangement. h. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore. i. Center-to-center dimensions of sheave and amount of adjustments in inches. j. Number, make, and size of belts. k. Number, type, and size of filters.

2. Motor Data:

a. Motor make, and frame type and size. b. Horsepower and rpm. c. Volts, phase, and hertz.



d. Full-load amperage and service factor. e. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore. f. Center-to-center dimensions of sheave and amount of adjustments in inches.

3. Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values):

a. Total airflow rate in cfm. b. Total system static pressure in inches. c. Fan rpm. d. Discharge static pressure in inches. e. Filter static-pressure differential in inches. f. Preheat-coil static-pressure differential in inches. g. Cooling-coil static-pressure differential in inches. h. Heating-coil static-pressure differential in inches. i. Outdoor airflow in cfm. j. Return airflow in cfm. k. Exhaust airflow in cfm. l. Outdoor-air damper position. m. Return-air damper position. n. Vortex damper position.

F. Apparatus-Coil Test Reports:

1. Coil Data:

a. System identification. b. Location. c. Coil type. d. Number of rows. e. Fin spacing in fins per inch o.c. f. Make and model number. g. Face area in sq. ft. h. Tube size in NPS. i. Tube and fin materials. j. Circuiting arrangement.


a. Airflow rate in cfm. b. Average face velocity in fpm. c. Air pressure drop in inches. d. Outdoor-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F. e. Return-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F. f. Entering-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F. g. Leaving-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F. h. Water flow rate in gpm. i. Water pressure differential in feet of head or psig. j. Entering-water temperature in deg F. k. Leaving-water temperature in deg F. l. Refrigerant expansion valve and refrigerant types. m. Refrigerant suction pressure in psig.



n. Refrigerant suction temperature in deg F. o. Inlet steam pressure in psig.

G. Electric-Coil Test Reports: For electric furnaces, duct coils, and electric coils installed in central-station air-handling units, include the following:

1. Unit Data:

a. System identification. b. Location. c. Coil identification. d. Capacity in Btu/h. e. Number of stages. f. Connected volts, phase, and hertz. g. Rated amperage. h. Airflow rate in cfm. i. Face area in sq. ft. j. Minimum face velocity in fpm.


a. Heat output in Btu/h. b. Airflow rate in cfm. c. Air velocity in fpm. d. Entering-air temperature in deg F. e. Leaving-air temperature in deg F. f. Voltage at each connection. g. Amperage for each phase.

H. Fan Test Reports: For supply, return, and exhaust fans, include the following:

1. Fan Data:

a. System identification. b. Location. c. Make and type. d. Model number and size. e. Manufacturer's serial number. f. Arrangement and class. g. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore. h. Center-to-center dimensions of sheave and amount of adjustments in inches.

2. Motor Data:

a. Motor make, and frame type and size. b. Horsepower and rpm. c. Volts, phase, and hertz. d. Full-load amperage and service factor. e. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore. f. Center-to-center dimensions of sheave, and amount of adjustments in inches. g. Number, make, and size of belts.




a. Total airflow rate in cfm. b. Total system static pressure in inches. c. Fan rpm. d. Discharge static pressure in inches. e. Suction static pressure in inches.

I. Round, Flat-Oval, and Rectangular Duct Traverse Reports: Include a diagram with a grid representing the duct cross-section and record the following:

1. Report Data:

a. System and air-handling-unit number. b. Location and zone. c. Traverse air temperature in deg F. d. Duct static pressure in inches. e. Duct size in inches. f. Duct area in sq. ft. g. Indicated airflow rate in cfm. h. Indicated velocity in fpm. i. Actual airflow rate in cfm. j. Actual average velocity in fpm. k. Barometric pressure in psig.

J. Air-Terminal-Device Reports:

1. Unit Data:

a. System and air-handling unit identification. b. Location and zone. c. Apparatus used for test. d. Area served. e. Make. f. Number from system diagram. g. Type and model number. h. Size. i. Effective area in sq. ft.


a. Airflow rate in cfm. b. Air velocity in fpm. c. Preliminary airflow rate as needed in cfm. d. Preliminary velocity as needed in fpm. e. Final airflow rate in cfm. f. Final velocity in fpm. g. Space temperature in deg F.

K. Instrument Calibration Reports:



1. Report Data:

a. Instrument type and make. b. Serial number. c. Application. d. Dates of use. e. Dates of calibration.

3.17 VERIFICATION OF TAB REPORT

A. The TAB specialist's test and balance engineer shall conduct the inspection in the presence of commissioning authority.

B. Commissioning authority shall randomly select measurements, documented in the final report, to be rechecked. Rechecking shall be limited to either ten percent (10%) of the total measurements recorded or the extent of measurements that can be accomplished in a normal 8-hour business day.

C. If rechecks yield measurements that differ from the measurements documented in the final report by more than the tolerances allowed, the measurements shall be noted as "FAILED."

D. If the number of "FAILED" measurements is greater than ten percent (>10%) of the total measurements checked during the final inspection, the testing and balancing shall be considered incomplete and shall be rejected.

E. If TAB work fails, proceed as follows:

1. TAB specialists shall recheck all measurements and adjust. Revise the final report and balancing device settings to include all changes; resubmit the final report and request a second final inspection.

2. If the second final inspection also fails, Owner may contract the services of another TAB specialist to complete TAB work according to the Contract Documents and deduct the cost of the services from the original TAB specialist's final payment.

3. If the second verification also fails, Owner or Architect may contact AABC Headquarters regarding the AABC National Performance Guaranty.

F. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.18 ADDITIONAL TESTS

A. Within ninety (90) days of completing TAB, perform additional TAB to verify that balanced conditions are being maintained throughout and to correct unusual conditions.

B. Seasonal Periods: If initial TAB procedures were not performed during near-peak summer and winter conditions, perform additional TAB during near-peak summer and winter conditions.

3.19 FOLLOW-UP SERVICES

A. Allow for three (3) scheduled visits during the 6-month period following substantial completion to adjust system parameters based on Owner's observations.




DUCT INSULATION


SECTION 230713 - DUCT INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes insulating the following duct services:

1. Indoor, concealed supply and outdoor air. 2. Indoor, exposed supply and outdoor air. 3. Indoor, concealed exhaust between isolation damper and penetration of building exterior. 4. Indoor, exposed exhaust between isolation damper and penetration of building exterior. 5. Outdoor, concealed supply and return. 6. Outdoor, exposed supply and return.


1. Section 233113 "Metal Ducts" for duct liners.


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include thermal conductivity, water-vapor permeance thickness, and jackets (both factory- and field-applied if any).



2. Detail insulation application at elbows, fittings, dampers, specialties, and flanges for each type of insulation.

3. Detail application of field-applied jackets. 4. Detail application at linkages of control devices.





DUCT INSULATION




B. Surface-Burning Characteristics: For insulation and related materials, as determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E84, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and adhesive, mastic, tapes, and cement material containers, with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.



C. HVAC Ducts Requiring Fire-Rated Enclosures: Submit products for fire-rated enclosures for HVAC ductwork, including manufacturer's UL Listings and acceptance by local authority or code having jurisdiction.



1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate sizes and locations of supports, hangers, and insulation shields specified in Section 230529 "Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment."

B. Coordinate clearance requirements with duct Installer for duct insulation application. Before preparing ductwork Shop Drawings, establish and maintain clearance requirements for installation of insulation and field-applied jackets and finishes and for space required for maintenance.

1.8 SCHEDULING


B. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each area of construction.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Comply with requirements in "Duct Insulation Schedule, General," "Indoor Duct and Plenum Insulation Schedule," and "Aboveground, Outdoor Duct and Plenum Insulation Schedule" articles for where insulating materials shall be applied.

DUCT INSULATION



C. Products that come in contact with stainless-steel shall have a leachable chloride content of less than 50 ppm when tested according to ASTM C 871.

D. Insulation materials for use on austenitic stainless-steel shall be qualified as acceptable according to ASTM C 795.


F. Mineral-Fiber Blanket Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 553, Type II and ASTM C 1290, Type III with factory-applied FSK jacket. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one (1) of the following:

a. CertainTeed Corp.; SoftTouch Duct Wrap b. Johns Manville; Microlite c. Knauf Insulation; Friendly Feel Duct Wrap d. Manson Insulation Inc.; Alley Wrap e. Owens Corning; SOFTR All-Service Duct Wrap

G. Mineral-Fiber Board Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 612, Type IA or Type IB. For duct and plenum applications, provide insulation with factory-applied FSK jacket. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.


a. CertainTeed Corp.; Commercial Board b. Fibrex Insulations Inc.; FBX c. Johns Manville; 800 Series Spin-Glas d. Knauf Insulation; Insulation Board e. Manson Insulation Inc.; AK Board f. Owens Corning; Fiberglas 700 Series

2.2 ADHESIVES

A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates and for bonding insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated unless otherwise indicated.

B. Mineral-Fiber Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A.


a. Childers Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company; CP-127

b. Eagle Bridges - Marathon Industries; 225 c. Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller

Company; 85-60/85-70

DUCT INSULATION


d. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 22-25


C. FSK Jacket Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A for bonding insulation jacket lap seams and joints.




Company; 85-50 d. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 22-25


D. PVC Jacket Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A for bonding insulation jacket lap seams and joints.






2.3 MASTICS AND COATINGS



B. Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor use on below ambient services.


a. Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company; 30-80/30-90

b. Vimasco Corporation; 749

DUCT INSULATION



3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 180 deg F (Minus 29 to plus 82 deg C). 4. Solids Content: ASTM D 1644, fifty-eight percent (58%) by volume and seventy percent



A. Description: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class I, Grade A and shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.



a. Childers Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company; CP-50 AHV2

b. Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company; 30-36

c. Vimasco Corporation; 713 and 714

3. Fire-resistant, water-based lagging adhesive and coating for use indoors to adhere fire-resistant lagging cloths over duct insulation.

4. Service Temperature Range: 0 to plus 180 deg F (Minus 18 to plus 82 deg C). 5. Color: White.

2.5 SEALANTS

A. FSK and Metal Jacket Flashing Sealants:





2. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates. 3. Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant. 4. Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 250 deg F (Minus 40 to plus 121 deg C). 5. Color: Aluminum. 6. For indoor applications, sealants shall have a VOC content of 420 g/L or less when


B. ASJ Flashing Sealants, and Vinyl and PVC Jacket Flashing Sealants:

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:

DUCT INSULATION


a. Childers Brand; H. B. Fuller Construction Products; CP-76

2. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates. 3. Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant. 4. Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 250 deg F. 5. Color: White. 6. For indoor applications, sealants shall have a VOC content of 420 g/L or less

when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

2.6 FIEFLD APPLIED FABRIC REINFORCING MESH

A. Woven Glass-Fiber Fabric: Approximately 6 oz./sq. yd. with a thread count of 5 strands by 5 strands/sq. in. for covering ducts.


a. Childers Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. b. Fuller Company; Chil-Glas No. 5

B. Woven Polyester Fabric: Approximately 1 oz./sq. yd. with a thread count of 10 strands by 10 strands/sq. in., in a Leno weave, for ducts.


a. Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. b. Fuller Company; Mast-A-Fab c. Vimasco Corporation; Elastafab 894



1. FSK Jacket: Aluminum-foil, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with Kraft-paper backing; complying with ASTM C1136, Type II.

2. FSP Jacket: Aluminum-foil, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with polyethylene backing; complying with ASTM C1136, Type II.

2.8 FIELD-APPLIED JACKETS

A. Field-applied jackets shall comply with ASTM C921, Type I, unless otherwise indicated.

B. FSK Jacket: Aluminum-foil-face, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with kraft-paper backing.

C. Metal Jacket:


a. Childers Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company; Metal Jacketing Systems

b. ITW Insulation Systems; Aluminum and Stainless-Steel Jacketing c. RPR Products, Inc.; Insul-Mate

DUCT INSULATION


2. Aluminum Jacket: Comply with ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105, or 5005, Temper H-14.

a. Sheet and roll stock ready for shop or field sizing. b. Finish and thickness are indicated in field-applied jacket schedules. c. Moisture Barrier for Indoor Applications: 1-mil-thick, heat-bonded polyethylene

and Kraft paper. d. Moisture Barrier for Outdoor Applications: 2.5-mil-thick polysurlyn.

3. Stainless-Steel Jacket: ASTM A 167 or ASTM A 240.

a. Sheet and roll stock ready for shop or field sizing, or factory cut and rolled to size. b. Material, finish, and thickness are indicated in field-applied jacket schedules. c. Moisture Barrier for Indoor Applications: 1-mil thick, heat-bonded polyethylene

and Kraft paper. d. Moisture Barrier for Outdoor Applications: 2.5-mil thick polysurlyn.

D. Self-Adhesive Outdoor Jacket: 60-mil-thick, laminated vapor barrier and waterproofing membrane for installation over insulation located aboveground outdoors; consisting of a rubberized bituminous resin on a cross-laminated polyethylene film covered with white aluminum-foil facing.


a. Polyguard Products, Inc.; Alumaguard 60

2.9 TAPES



a. ABI, Ideal Tape Division; 428 AWF ASJ b. Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division; Fasson 0836 c. Compac Corporation; 104 and 105 d. Venture Tape; 1540 CW Plus, 1542 CW Plus, and 1542 CW Plus/SQ




a. ABI, Ideal Tape Division; 491 AWF FSK

DUCT INSULATION


b. Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division; Fasson 0827 c. Compac Corporation; 110 and 111 d. Venture Tape; 1525 CW NT, 1528 CW, and 1528 CW/SQ




a. ABI, Ideal Tape Division; 491 AWF FSK b. Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division; Fasson 0827 c. Compac Corporation; 110 and 111 d. Venture Tape; 1525 CW NT, 1528 CW, and 1528 CW/SQ

2. Width: 2 inches. 3. Thickness: 6 mils. 4. Adhesion: 64 ounces force/inch in width. 5. Elongation: Five hundred percent (500%). 6. Tensile Strength: 18 lbf/inch in width.

D. Aluminum-Foil Tape: Vapor-retarder tape with acrylic adhesive.


a. ABI, Ideal Tape Division; 488 AWF b. Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division; Fasson 0800 c. Compac Corporation; 120 d. Venture Tape; 3520 CW

2. Width: 2 inches. 3. Thickness: 3.7 mils. 4. Adhesion: 100 ounces force/inch in width. 5. Elongation: Five percent (5%). 6. Tensile Strength: 34 lbf/inch in width.

2.10 SECUREMENTS

A. Bands:


a. ITW Insulation Systems; Gerrard Strapping and Seals b. RPR Products, Inc.; Insul-Mate Strapping, Seals, and Springs

DUCT INSULATION


2. Stainless-Steel: ASTM A 167 or ASTM A 240, Type 304; 0.015-inch-thick, ¾-inch-wide with wing seal.

3. Springs: Twin spring set constructed of stainless steel with ends flat and slotted to accept metal bands. Spring size determined by manufacturer for application.

B. Insulation Pins and Hangers:

1. Capacitor-Discharge-Weld Pins: Copper- or zinc-coated steel pin, fully annealed for capacitor-discharge welding, 0.106-inch- or 0.135-inch-diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated.

a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one (1) of the following:

1) AGM Industries, Inc.; CWP-1 2) GEMCO; CD 3) Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; CD

2. Cupped-Head, Capacitor-Discharge-Weld Pins: Copper- or zinc-coated steel pin, fully annealed for capacitor-discharge welding, 0.135-inch-diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated with integral 1½-inch galvanized carbon-steel washer.


1) AGM Industries, Inc.; CHP-1 2) GEMCO; Cupped Head Weld Pin 3) Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; Cupped Head 4) Nelson Stud Welding; CHP

3. Metal, Adhesively Attached, Perforated-Base Insulation Hangers: Baseplate welded to projecting spindle that is capable of holding insulation, of thickness indicated, securely in position indicated when self-locking washer is in place. Comply with the following requirements:


1) AGM Industries, Inc.; CHP-1 2) GEMCO; Cupped Head Weld Pin 3) Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; Cupped Head

b. Baseplate: Perforated, galvanized carbon-steel sheet, 0.030-inch-thick by 2 inches square.

c. Spindle: Copper- or zinc-coated, low-carbon steel, aluminum, stainless-steel, fully annealed, 0.106-inch-diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated.

d. Adhesive: Recommended by hanger manufacturer. Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation hanger securely to substrates indicated without damaging insulation, hangers, and substrates.

DUCT INSULATION


4. Insulation-Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed from 0.016-inch-thick, aluminum sheet, with beveled edge sized as required to hold insulation securely in place but not less than 1½ inches in diameter.


1) AGM Industries, Inc.; RC-150 2) GEMCO; R-150 3) Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; WA-150 4) Nelson Stud Welding; Speed Clips

b. Protect ends with capped self-locking washers incorporating a spring steel insert to ensure permanent retention of cap in exposed locations.

C. Staples: Outward-clinching insulation staples, nominal ¾-inch-wide, stainless-steel or Monel.

D. Wire: 0.062-inch soft-annealed, stainless steel.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. C & F Wire

2.11 CORNER ANGLES

A. Aluminum Corner Angles: 0.040-inch-thick, minimum 1-by-1-inch, aluminum according to ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105, or 5005; Temper H-14.

B. Stainless-Steel Corner Angles: 0.024-inch-thick, minimum 1-by-1-inch, stainless-steel according to ASTM A 167 or ASTM A 240, Type 304.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION


1. Verify that systems to be insulated have been tested and are free of defects. 2. Verify that surfaces to be insulated are clean and dry.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will adversely affect insulation application.

DUCT INSULATION



A. Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces, free of voids throughout the length of ducts and fittings.

B. Install insulation materials, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and thicknesses required for each item of duct system as specified in insulation system schedules.




F. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.

G. Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with adhesive recommended by insulation material manufacturer.

H. Install insulation with least number of joints practical.

I. Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in insulation at hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-barrier mastic.


legs from point of attachment to supported item to point of attachment to structure. Taper and seal ends at attachment to structure with vapor-barrier mastic.

3. Install insert materials and install insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by insulation material manufacturer.

J. Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate and wet and dry film thicknesses.

K. Install insulation with factory-applied jackets as follows:

1. Draw jacket tight and smooth. 2. Cover circumferential joints with 3-inch wide strips, of same material as insulation

jacket. Secure strips with adhesive and outward clinching staples along both edges of strip, spaced 4 inches o.c.

3. Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1½ inches. Clean and dry surface to receive self-sealing lap. Staple laps with outward clinching staples along edge at 2 inches o.c.

a. For below ambient services, apply vapor-barrier mastic over staples.

4. Cover joints and seams with tape, according to insulation material manufacturer's written instructions, to maintain vapor seal.

DUCT INSULATION


5. Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply vapor-barrier mastic on seams and joints and at ends adjacent to duct flanges and fittings.

L. Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than seventy-five percent (75%) of its nominal thickness.

M. Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and cracking due to thermal movement.

N. Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas. Extend patches at least 4 inches beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal patches similar to butt joints.

3.4 PENETRATIONS






B. Insulation Installation at Aboveground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through wall penetrations.





C. Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (That Are Not Fire Rated): Install insulation continuously through walls and partitions.

D. Insulation Installation at Fire-Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Terminate insulation at fire damper sleeves for fire-rated wall and partition penetrations. Externally insulate damper sleeves to match adjacent insulation and overlap duct insulation at least 2 inches.

1. Comply with requirements in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping."

E. Insulation Installation at Floor Penetrations:

DUCT INSULATION


1. Duct: For penetrations through fire-rated assemblies, terminate insulation at fire damper sleeves and externally insulate damper sleeve beyond floor to match adjacent duct insulation. Overlap damper sleeve and duct insulation at least 2 inches.

2. Seal penetrations through fire-rated assemblies. Comply with requirements in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping."


A. Blanket Insulation Installation on Ducts and Plenums: Secure with adhesive and insulation pins.

1. Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per unit area, for one hundred percent (100%) coverage of duct and plenum surfaces.

2. Apply adhesive to entire circumference of ducts and to all surfaces of fittings and transitions.

3. Install either capacitor-discharge-weld pins and speed washers or cupped-head, capacitor-discharge-weld pins on sides and bottom of horizontal ducts and sides of vertical ducts as follows:

a. On duct sides with dimensions 18 inches and smaller, place pins along longitudinal centerline of duct. Space 3 inches maximum from insulation end joints, and 16 inches o.c.

b. On duct sides with dimensions larger than 18 inches, place pins 16 inches o.c. each way, and 3 inches maximum from insulation joints. Install additional pins to hold insulation tightly against surface at cross bracing.

c. Pins may be omitted from top surface of horizontal, rectangular ducts and plenums. d. Do not overcompress insulation during installation. e. Impale insulation over pins and attach speed washers. f. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel with

insulation surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape matching insulation facing.

4. For ducts and plenums with surface temperatures below ambient, install a continuous unbroken vapor barrier. Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams and end joints with insulation by removing 2 inches from one (1) edge and one (1) end of insulation segment. Secure laps to adjacent insulation section with ½-inch outward-clinching staples, 1-inch o.c. Install vapor barrier consisting of factory- or field-applied jacket, adhesive, vapor-barrier mastic, and sealant at joints, seams, and protrusions.

a. Repair punctures, tears, and penetrations with tape or mastic to maintain vapor-barrier seal.

b. Install vapor stops for ductwork and plenums operating below 50 deg F at 18-foot intervals. Vapor stops shall consist of vapor-barrier mastic applied in a Z-shaped pattern over insulation face, along butt end of insulation, and over the surface. Cover insulation face and surface to be insulated a width equal to two (2) times the insulation thickness, but not less than 3 inches.

5. Overlap unfaced blankets a minimum of 2 inches on longitudinal seams and end joints. At end joints, secure with steel bands spaced a maximum of 18 inches o.c.

6. Install insulation on rectangular duct elbows and transitions with a full insulation section for each surface. Install insulation on round and flat-oval duct elbows with individually mitered gores cut to fit the elbow.

DUCT INSULATION


7. Insulate duct stiffeners, hangers, and flanges that protrude beyond insulation surface with 6-inch wide strips of same material used to insulate duct. Secure on alternating sides of stiffener, hanger, and flange with pins spaced 6 inches o.c.

B. Board Insulation Installation on Ducts and Plenums: Secure with adhesive and insulation pins.

1. Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per unit area, for one hundred percent (100%) coverage of duct and plenum surfaces.

2. Apply adhesive to entire circumference of ducts and to all surfaces of fittings and transitions.

3. Install either capacitor-discharge-weld pins and speed washers or cupped-head, capacitor-discharge-weld pins on sides and bottom of horizontal ducts and sides of vertical ducts as follows:

a. On duct sides with dimensions 18 inches and smaller, place pins along longitudinal centerline of duct. Space 3 inches maximum from insulation end joints, and 16 inches o.c.

b. On duct sides with dimensions larger than 18 inches, space pins 16 inches o.c. each way, and 3 inches maximum from insulation joints. Install additional pins to hold insulation tightly against surface at cross bracing.

c. Pins may be omitted from top surface of horizontal, rectangular ducts and plenums. d. Do not overcompress insulation during installation. e. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel with

insulation surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape matching insulation facing.

4. For ducts and plenums with surface temperatures below ambient, install a continuous unbroken vapor barrier. Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams and end joints with insulation by removing 2 inches from one (1) edge and one (1) end of insulation segment. Secure laps to adjacent insulation section with ½-inch outward-clinching staples, 1-inch o.c. Install vapor barrier consisting of factory- or field-applied jacket, adhesive, vapor-barrier mastic, and sealant at joints, seams, and protrusions.

a. Repair punctures, tears, and penetrations with tape or mastic to maintain vapor-barrier seal.

b. Install vapor stops for ductwork and plenums operating below 50 deg F at 18-foot intervals. Vapor stops shall consist of vapor-barrier mastic applied in a Z-shaped pattern over insulation face, along butt end of insulation, and over the surface. Cover insulation face and surface to be insulated a width equal to two (2) times the insulation thickness, but not less than 3 inches.

5. Install insulation on rectangular duct elbows and transitions with a full insulation section for each surface. Groove and score insulation to fit as closely as possible to outside and inside radius of elbows. Install insulation on round and flat-oval duct elbows with individually mitered gores cut to fit the elbow.

6. Insulate duct stiffeners, hangers, and flanges that protrude beyond insulation surface with 6-inch wide strips of same material used to insulate duct. Secure on alternating sides of stiffener, hanger, and flange with pins spaced 6 inches o.c.

DUCT INSULATION



A. Where glass-cloth jackets are indicated, install directly over bare insulation or insulation with factory-applied jackets.

1. Draw jacket smooth and tight to surface with 2-inch overlap at seams and joints. 2. Embed glass cloth between two (2) 0.062-inch-thick coats of lagging adhesive. 3. Completely encapsulate insulation with coating, leaving no exposed insulation.

B. Where FSK jackets are indicated, install as follows:

1. Draw jacket material smooth and tight. 2. Install lap or joint strips with same material as jacket. 3. Secure jacket to insulation with manufacturer's recommended adhesive. 4. Install jacket with 1½-inch laps at longitudinal seams and 3-inch-wide joint strips at end

joints. 5. Seal openings, punctures, and breaks in vapor-retarder jackets and exposed insulation

with vapor-barrier mastic.

C. Where PVC jackets are indicated, install with 1-inch overlap at longitudinal seams and end joints; for horizontal applications, install with longitudinal seams along top and bottom of tanks and vessels. Seal with manufacturer's recommended adhesive.


D. Where metal jackets are indicated, install with 2-inch overlap at longitudinal seams and end joints. Overlap longitudinal seams arranged to shed water. Seal end joints with weatherproof sealant recommended by insulation manufacturer. Secure jacket with stainless-steel bands 12 inches o.c. and at end joints.

3.7 FINISHES

A. Insulation with ASJ, Glass-Cloth, or Other Paintable Jacket Material: Paint jacket with paint system identified below.



B. Color: Final color as selected by Architect and Owner from manufacturer’s entire range. Vary first and second coats to allow visual inspection of the completed Work.

C. Do not field paint aluminum or stainless-steel jackets.




DUCT INSULATION


1. Inspect ductwork, randomly selected by Architect, by removing field-applied jacket and insulation in layers in reverse order of their installation. Extent of inspection shall be limited to one location for each duct system defined in the "Duct Insulation Schedule, General" Article.


3.9 DUCT INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL

A. Plenums and Ducts Requiring Insulation:

1. Indoor, concealed supply and outdoor air. 2. Indoor, exposed supply and outdoor air. 3. Indoor, concealed return located in unconditioned space. 4. Indoor, exposed return located in unconditioned space. 5. Indoor, concealed exhaust between isolation damper and penetration of building exterior. 6. Indoor, exposed exhaust between isolation damper and penetration of building exterior.

B. Items Not Insulated:

1. Fibrous-glass ducts. 2. Metal ducts with duct liner of sufficient thickness to comply with energy code and

ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1. Refer to Section 233113 “Metal Ducts” for duct liner requirements.

3. Factory-insulated flexible ducts. 4. Factory-insulated plenums and casings. 5. Flexible connectors. 6. Vibration-control devices. 7. Factory-insulated access panels and doors.

3.10 INDOOR DUCT AND PLENUM INSULATION SCHEDULE

A. Concealed, round and flat-oval, supply-air duct insulation shall be:

1. Mineral-Fiber Blanket: Minimum installed R Value of 6 and 0.75-lb/cu. ft. nominal density.

B. Concealed, round and flat-oval, return-air duct insulation shall be:


C. Concealed, round and flat-oval, outdoor-air duct insulation shall be:


D. Concealed, round and flat-oval, exhaust-air duct insulation shall be:

DUCT INSULATION



E. Concealed, rectangular, supply-air duct insulation shall be:


F. Concealed, rectangular, return-air duct insulation shall be:


G. Concealed, rectangular, outdoor-air duct insulation shall be:


H. Concealed, rectangular, exhaust-air and outside air duct insulation between isolation damper and penetration of building exterior shall be the following:


I. Concealed, supply-air plenum insulation shall be:


J. Concealed, return-air plenum insulation shall be:


K. Concealed, outdoor-air plenum insulation shall be:


L. Concealed, exhaust-air plenum insulation shall be:


M. Exposed, supply-air plenum insulation shall be:

1. Mineral-Fiber Board: Minimum installed R Value of 6 and 1.5-lb/cu. ft. nominal density.

N. Exposed, return-air plenum insulation shall be:


DUCT INSULATION


O. Exposed, outdoor-air plenum insulation shall be:


P. Exposed, exhaust-air plenum insulation shall be:


Q. Concealed and Exposed, supply, return, exhaust and outdoor-air ductwork and plenum located outside the building envelop insulation shall be:

1. Mineral-Fiber Board: Minimum installed R Value of 12 and 3-lb/cu. ft. nominal density.

R. Concealed and Exposed, supply, return, exhaust and outdoor-air ductwork and plenum located between isolation damper and penetration of building exterior:

1. Mineral-Fiber Board: Minimum installed R Value of 12 and 3-lb/cu. ft. nominal density.



B. Ducts and Plenums, Concealed:

1. None.

C. Ducts and Plenums, Exposed:

1. Painted Aluminum, Smooth: 0.016-inch-thick.


HVAC PIPING INSULATION


SECTION 230719 - HVAC PIPING INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes insulation for the following HVAC piping systems:

1. Heating-hot-water piping. 2. Refrigerant liquid, suction, hot-gas, discharge, and heat recovery piping.


1. Section 230713 "Duct Insulation" for duct insulation.


A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include thermal conductivity, water-vapor permeance thickness, and jackets (both factory and field applied if any).



2. Detail attachment and covering of heat tracing inside insulation. 3. Detail insulation application at pipe expansion joints for each type of insulation. 4. Detail insulation application at elbows, fittings, flanges, valves, and specialties for each

type of insulation. 5. Detail removable insulation at piping specialties. 6. Detail application of field-applied jackets. 7. Detail application at linkages of control devices.









B. Surface-Burning Characteristics: For insulation and related materials, as determined by testing identical products in accordance with ASTM E84, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and adhesive, mastic, tapes, and cement material containers, with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.





1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate sizes and locations of supports, hangers, and insulation shields specified in Section 230529 "Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment."

B. Coordinate clearance requirements with piping Installer for piping insulation application. Before preparing piping Shop Drawings, establish and maintain clearance requirements for installation of insulation and field-applied jackets and finishes and for space required for maintenance.

1.8 SCHEDULING


PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Comply with requirements in "Piping Insulation Schedule, General," "Indoor Piping Insulation Schedule," "Outdoor, Aboveground Piping Insulation Schedule," and "Outdoor, Underground Piping Insulation Schedule" articles for where insulating materials shall be applied.


C. Products that come into contact with stainless-steel shall have a leachable chloride content of less than 50 ppm when tested in accordance with ASTM C 871.



D. Insulation materials for use on austenitic stainless-steel shall be qualified as acceptable in accordance with ASTM C 795.


F. Flexible Elastomeric: Closed-cell, sponge- or expanded-rubber materials. Comply with ASTM C 534, Type I for tubular materials.


a. Aeroflex USA, Inc.; Aerocel b. Armacell LLC; AP Armaflex c. K-Flex USA; Insul-Lock, Insul-Tube, and K-FLEX LS

G. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe:


a. Johns Manville; Micro-Lok b. Knauf Insulation; 1000-Degree Pipe Insulation c. Manson Insulation Inc.; Alley-K d. Owens Corning; Fiberglas Pipe Insulation

2. Type I, 850 deg F Materials: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 547, Type I, Grade A, with factory-applied ASJ-SSL. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.

2.2 INSULATING CEMENTS

A. Mineral-Fiber Insulating Cement: Comply with ASTM C195.


a. Ramco Insulation, Inc.; Super-Stik

F. Mineral-fiber, hydraulic-setting cement is suitable for temperatures from 100 to 1200 deg F (38 to 649 deg C) and for a smooth surface.Mineral-Fiber, Hydraulic-Setting Insulating and Finishing Cement: Comply with ASTM C 449.


a. Ramco Insulation, Inc.; Ramcote 1200 and Quik-Cote

2.3 ADHESIVES

A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates and for bonding insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated unless otherwise indicated.

B. Flexible Elastomeric Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-24179A, Type II, Class I.




a. Aeroflex USA, Inc.; Aeroseal b. Armacell LLC; Armaflex 520 Adhesive c. K-Flex USA; R-373 Contact Adhesive


C. Mineral-Fiber Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A.




Company; 85-60/85-70 d. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 22-25


D. ASJ Adhesive and FSK and PVDC Jacket Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A, for bonding insulation jacket lap seams and joints.






E. PVC Jacket Adhesive: Compatible with PVC jacket.


a. Dow Corning Corporation; 739 b. Johns Manville; Zeston Perma-Weld, CEEL-TITE Solvent Welding Adhesive c. P.I.C. Plastics, Inc.; Welding Adhesive d. Speedline Corporation; Polyco VP Adhesive




2.4 MASTICS



B. Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor use on below-ambient services.


2. Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 180 deg F. 3. Solids Content: ASTM D 1644, fifty-eight percent (58%) by volume and seventy percent


C. Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Solvent based; suitable for outdoor use on below ambient services.


a. Childers Brand; H. B. Fuller Construction Products; Encacel b. Eagle Bridges - Marathon Industries c. Foster Brand; H. B. Fuller Construction Products; 60-95/60-96

2. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM F 1249, 0.05 perm at 30-mil dry film thickness. 3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 50 to plus 220 deg F. 4. Solids Content: ASTM D 1644, thirty-three percent (33%) by volume and forty-six

percent (46%) by weight. 5. Color: White.


A. Adhesives shall comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class I, Grade A, and shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.


2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. Childers Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company; CP-50 AHV2

b. Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company; 30-36

c. Vimasco Corporation; 713 and 714

3. Fire-resistant, water-based lagging adhesive and coating for use indoors to adhere fire-resistant lagging cloths over pipe insulation.

4. Service Temperature Range: 0 to plus 180 deg F (Minus 18 to plus 82 deg C). 5. Color: White.



2.6 SEALANTS

A. FSK and Metal Jacket Flashing Sealants:





2. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates. 3. Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant. 4. Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 250 deg F. 5. Color: Aluminum. 6. For indoor applications, sealants shall have a VOC content of 420 g/L or less when


B. ASJ Flashing Sealants and PVC Jacket Flashing Sealants:



2. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates. 3. Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant. 4. Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 250 deg F. 5. Color: White. 6. For indoor applications, sealants shall have a VOC content of 420 g/L or less when




1. ASJ: White, kraft-paper, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with aluminum-foil backing; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I.

2. ASJ-SSL: ASJ with self-sealing, pressure-sensitive, acrylic-based adhesive covered by a removable protective strip; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I.

3. FSK Jacket: Aluminum-foil, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with Kraft-paper backing; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type II.

4. FSP Jacket: Aluminum-foil, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with polyethylene backing; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type II.

5. Vinyl Jacket: White vinyl with a permeance of 1.3 perms when tested according to ASTM E 96, Procedure A, and complying with NFPA 90A and NFPA 90B.



2.8 FIELD-APPLIED JACKETS

A. Field-applied jackets shall comply with ASTM C 1136, Type I, unless otherwise indicated.

B. PVC Jacket: High-impact-resistant, UV-resistant PVC complying with ASTM D 1784, Class 16354-C; thickness as scheduled; roll stock ready for shop or field cutting and forming. Thickness is indicated in field-applied jacket schedules.


a. Johns Manville; Zeston b. P.I.C. Plastics, Inc.; FG Series c. Proto Corporation; LoSmoke d. Speedline Corporation; SmokeSafe

2. Adhesive: As recommended by jacket material manufacturer. 3. Color: Color-code jackets based on system. Color as selected by Architect and Owner

from manufacturer’s entire range. 4. Factory-fabricated fitting covers to match jacket if available; otherwise, field fabricate.

a. Shapes: 45- and 90-degree, short- and long-radius elbows, tees, valves, flanges, unions, reducers, end caps, soil-pipe hubs, traps, mechanical joints, and P-trap and supply covers for lavatories.

C. Metal Jacket:


a. Childers Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company; Metal Jacketing Systems

b. ITW Insulation Systems; Aluminum and Stainless-Steel Jacketing c. RPR Products, Inc.; Insul-Mate

2. Stainless-Steel Jacket: ASTM A 240.

a. Factory cut and rolled to size. b. Material, finish, and thickness are indicated in field-applied jacket schedules. c. Moisture Barrier for Indoor Applications: 1-mil- thick, heat-bonded polyethylene

and Kraft paper. d. Moisture Barrier for Outdoor Applications: 3-mil- thick, heat-bonded polyethylene

and Kraft paper, or 2.5-mil- thick polysurlyn. e. Factory-Fabricated Fitting Covers:

1) Same material, finish, and thickness as jacket. 2) Preformed 2-piece or gore, 45- and 90-degree, short- and long-radius

elbows. 3) Tee covers. 4) Flange and union covers. 5) End caps. 6) Beveled collars. 7) Valve covers.



8) Field fabricate fitting covers only if factory-fabricated fitting covers are not available.

2.9 TAPES



a. ABI, Ideal Tape Division; 428 AWF ASJ b. Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division; Fasson 0836 c. Compac Corporation; 104 and 105 d. Venture Tape; 1540 CW Plus, 1542 CW Plus, and 1542 CW Plus/SQ




a. ABI, Ideal Tape Division; 491 AWF FSK b. Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division; Fasson 0827 c. Compac Corporation; 110 and 111 d. Venture Tape; 1525 CW NT, 1528 CW, and 1528 CW/SQ




a. Compac Corporation; 130 b. Venture Tape; 1506 CW NS

2. Width: 2 inches. 3. Thickness: 6 mils. 4. Adhesion: 64 ounces force/inch in width. 5. Elongation: Five hundred percent (500%).



6. Tensile Strength: 18 lbf/inch in width.

2.10 SECUREMENTS

A. Bands:

1. Stainless-Steel: ASTM A 167 or ASTM A 240, Type 304, 0.015-inch-thick, ½-inch-wide with wing seal.

B. Staples: Outward-clinching insulation staples, nominal ¾-inch-wide, stainless-steel or Monel.

C. Wire: 0.062-inch soft-annealed, stainless-steel.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION


1. Verify that systems to be insulated have been tested and are free of defects. 2. Verify that surfaces to be insulated are clean and dry. 3. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will adversely affect insulation application.

B. Clean and prepare surfaces to be insulated. Before insulating, apply a corrosion coating to insulated surfaces as follows:

1. Stainless-Steel: Coat 300 series stainless-steel with an epoxy primer 5 mils thick and an epoxy finish 5 mils thick if operating in a temperature range between 140 and 300 deg F. Consult coating manufacturer for appropriate coating materials and application methods for operating temperature range.

2. Carbon Steel: Coat carbon steel operating at a service temperature of between 32 and 300 deg F with an epoxy coating. Consult coating manufacturer for appropriate coating materials and application methods for operating temperature range.

C. Coordinate insulation installation with the tradesman installing heat tracing. Comply with requirements for heat tracing that apply to insulation.

D. Mix insulating cements with clean potable water; if insulating cements are to be in contact with stainless steel surfaces, use demineralized water.


A. Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; free of voids throughout the length of piping, including fittings, valves, and specialties.



B. Install insulation materials, forms, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and of thicknesses required for each item of pipe system, as specified in insulation system schedules.




F. Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to piping, fittings, and specialties.

G. Keep insulation materials dry during storage, application, and finishing. Replace insulation materials that get wet.

H. Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with adhesive recommended by insulation material manufacturer.

I. Install insulation with least number of joints practical.

J. Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in insulation at hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-barrier mastic.


legs from point of attachment to supported item to point of attachment to structure. Taper and seal ends attached to structure with vapor-barrier mastic.

3. Install insert materials and insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by insulation material manufacturer.

4. Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation. Install shields over jacket, arranged to protect jacket from tear or puncture by hanger, support, and shield.

K. Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate and wet and dry film thicknesses.

L. Install insulation with factory-applied jackets as follows:

1. Draw jacket tight and smooth. 2. Cover circumferential joints with 3-inch- wide strips, of same material as insulation

jacket. Secure strips with adhesive and outward-clinching staples along both edges of strip, spaced 4 inches o.c.

3. Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1½ inches. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at bottom of pipe. Clean and dry surface to receive self-sealing lap. Staple laps with outward-clinching staples along edge at 2 inches o.c.

a. For below-ambient services, apply vapor-barrier mastic over staples.

4. Cover joints and seams with tape, in accordance with insulation material manufacturer's written instructions, to maintain vapor seal.



5. Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply vapor-barrier mastic on seams and joints and at ends adjacent to pipe flanges and fittings.

M. Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than twenty-five percent (25%) of its nominal thickness.

N. Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and cracking due to thermal movement.

O. Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas. Extend patches at least 4 inches beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal patches in similar fashion to butt joints.

P. For above-ambient services, do not install insulation to the following:

1. Vibration-control devices. 2. Testing agency labels and stamps. 3. Nameplates and data plates. 4. Manholes. 5. Handholes. 6. Cleanouts

3.4 PENETRATIONS






B. Insulation Installation at Underground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Terminate insulation flush with sleeve seal. Seal terminations with flashing sealant.

C. Insulation Installation at Aboveground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through wall penetrations.







D. Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (That Are Not Fire Rated): Install insulation continuously through walls and partitions.

E. Insulation Installation at Fire-Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through penetrations of fire-rated walls and partitions.

1. Comply with requirements in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping" for firestopping and fire-resistive joint sealers.

F. Insulation Installation at Floor Penetrations:

1. Pipe: Install insulation continuously through floor penetrations. 2. Seal penetrations through fire-rated assemblies. Comply with requirements in

Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping."

3.5 GENERAL PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION

A. Requirements in this article generally apply to all insulation materials, except where more specific requirements are specified in various pipe insulation material installation articles.

B. Insulation Installation on Fittings, Valves, Strainers, and Unions:

1. Install insulation over fittings, valves, strainers, unions, and other specialties with continuous thermal and vapor-retarder integrity unless otherwise indicated.

2. Insulate pipe elbows using preformed fitting insulation or mitered fittings made from same material and density as that of adjacent pipe insulation. Each piece shall be butted tightly against adjoining piece and bonded with adhesive. Fill joints, seams, voids, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement finished to a smooth, hard, and uniform contour that is uniform with adjoining pipe insulation.

3. Insulate tee fittings with preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material and thickness as that used for adjacent pipe. Cut sectional pipe insulation to fit. Butt each section closely to the next and hold in place with tie wire. Bond pieces with adhesive.

4. Insulate valves using preformed fitting insulation of same material, density, and thickness as that used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two (2) times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one (1) pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. For valves, insulate up to and including the bonnets, valve stuffing-box studs, bolts, and nuts. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement.

5. Insulate strainers using preformed fitting insulation of same material, density, and thickness as that used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two (2) times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one (1) pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement. Insulate strainers, so strainer basket flange or plug can be easily removed and replaced without damaging the insulation and jacket. Provide a removable reusable insulation cover. For below-ambient services, provide a design that maintains vapor barrier.

6. Insulate flanges, mechanical couplings, and unions using a section of oversized preformed pipe insulation to fit. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two (2) times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one (1) pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. Stencil or label the outside insulation jacket of each union with the word "union" matching size and color of pipe labels.



7. Cover segmented insulated surfaces with a layer of finishing cement and coat with a mastic. Install vapor-barrier mastic for below-ambient services and a breather mastic for above-ambient services. Reinforce the mastic with fabric-reinforcing mesh. Trowel the mastic to a smooth and well-shaped contour.

8. For services not specified to receive a field-applied jacket, except for flexible elastomeric and polyolefin, install fitted PVC cover over elbows, tees, strainers, valves, flanges, and unions. Terminate ends with PVC end caps. Tape PVC covers to adjoining insulation facing, using PVC tape.

9. Stencil or label the outside insulation jacket of each union with the word "union." Match size and color of pipe labels.

C. Insulate instrument connections for thermometers, pressure gages, pressure temperature taps, test connections, flow meters, sensors, switches, and transmitters on insulated pipes. Shape insulation at these connections by tapering it to and around the connection with insulating cement and finish with finishing cement, mastic, and flashing sealant.

D. Install removable insulation covers at locations indicated. Installation shall conform to the following:

1. Make removable flange and union insulation from sectional pipe insulation of same thickness as that on adjoining pipe. Install same insulation jacket as that of adjoining pipe insulation.

2. When flange and union covers are made from sectional pipe insulation, extend insulation from flanges or union at least two (2) times the insulation thickness over adjacent pipe insulation on each side of flange or union. Secure flange cover in place with stainless-steel or aluminum bands. Select band material compatible with insulation and jacket.

3. Construct removable valve insulation covers in same manner as for flanges, except divide the two-part section on the vertical center line of valve body.

4. When covers are made from block insulation, make two (2) halves, each consisting of mitered blocks wired to stainless-steel fabric. Secure this wire frame, with its attached insulation, to flanges with tie wire. Extend insulation at least 2 inches over adjacent pipe insulation on each side of valve. Fill space between flange or union cover and pipe insulation with insulating cement. Finish cover assembly with insulating cement applied in two (2) coats. After first coat is dry, apply and trowel second coat to a smooth finish.

5. Unless a PVC jacket is indicated in field-applied jacket schedules, finish exposed surfaces with a metal jacket.

3.6 INSTALLATION OF FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC INSULATION

A. Seal longitudinal seams and end joints with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated. Installation to maintain a continuous vapor barrier.


1. Install pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange. 2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the


adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of sheet insulation of same thickness as that of pipe insulation.



4. Secure insulation to flanges and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.


1. Install mitered sections of pipe insulation. 2. Secure insulation materials and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to

eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.


1. Install preformed valve covers manufactured of same material as that of pipe insulation when available.

2. When preformed valve covers are not available, install cut sections of pipe and sheet insulation to valve body. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation.

3. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application. 4. Secure insulation to valves and specialties, and seal seams with manufacturer's

recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.


A. Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes:

1. Secure each layer of preformed pipe insulation to pipe with wire or bands and tighten bands without deforming insulation materials.

2. Where vapor barriers are indicated, seal longitudinal seams, end joints, and protrusions with vapor-barrier mastic and joint sealant.

3. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on above-ambient surfaces, secure laps with outward-clinched staples at 6 inches o.c.

4. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on below-ambient surfaces, do not staple longitudinal tabs. Instead, secure tabs with additional adhesive, as recommended by insulation material manufacturer, and seal with vapor-barrier mastic and flashing sealant.


1. Install preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange. 2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the


adjacent straight pipe segments with mineral-fiber blanket insulation. 4. Install jacket material with manufacturer's recommended adhesive, overlap seams at least

1-inch, and seal joints with flashing sealant.


1. Install preformed sections of same material as that of straight segments of pipe insulation when available.



2. When preformed insulation elbows and fittings are not available, install mitered sections of pipe insulation, to a thickness equal to adjoining pipe insulation. Secure insulation materials with wire or bands.


1. Install preformed sections of same material as that of straight segments of pipe insulation when available.

2. When preformed sections are not available, install mitered sections of pipe insulation to valve body.

3. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation.

4. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application.


A. Where PVC jackets are indicated and for horizontal applications, install with 1-inch overlap at longitudinal seams and end joints. Seal with manufacturer's recommended adhesive.


B. Where metal jackets are indicated, install with 2-inch overlap at longitudinal seams and end joints. Overlap longitudinal seams arranged to shed water. Seal end joints with weatherproof sealant recommended by insulation manufacturer. Secure jacket with stainless-steel bands 12 inches o.c. and at end joints.

3.9 FINISHES

A. Pipe insulation with ASJ, Glass-Cloth, or Other Paintable Jacket Material: Paint jacket with paint system identified below.



B. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: After adhesive has fully cured, apply two (2) coats of insulation manufacturer's recommended protective coating.

C. Color: Final color as selected by Architect and Owner from manufacturer’s entire range. Vary first and second coats to allow visual inspection of the completed Work.

D. Do not field paint aluminum or stainless-steel jackets.






1. Inspect pipe, fittings, strainers, and valves, randomly selected by Architect, by removing field-applied jacket and insulation in layers in reverse order of their installation. Extent of inspection shall be limited to three (3) locations of straight pipe, three (3) locations of fittings and three (3) locations of valves for each pipe service defined in the "Piping Insulation Schedule, General" Article.


3.11 PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL

A. Insulation conductivity and thickness per pipe size shall comply with schedules in this Section or with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction, whichever is more stringent.

B. Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated, do not install insulation on the following:

1. Underground piping. 2. Chrome-plated pipes and fittings unless there is a potential for personnel injury.

3.12 INDOOR PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE

A. New and Existing Heating-Hot-Water Supply and Return, 200 Deg F and Below:

1. NPS 1 1/2 and Smaller: Insulation shall be the following:

a. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe, Type I: 1½ inches thick.

2. NPS 2 and Larger: Insulation shall be the following:

a. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe, Type I: 2 inches thick.

B. Refrigerant Suction and Hot-Gas Piping:

1. All Pipe Sizes: Insulation shall be the following:

a. Flexible Elastomeric: 1-inch-thick.

C. Refrigerant Suction and Hot-Gas Flexible Tubing:

1. All Pipe Sizes: Insulation shall be the following:

a. Flexible Elastomeric: 1-inch-thick.

3.13 OUTDOOR, ABOVEGROUND PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE

A. Refrigerant Suction and Hot-Gas Piping:

1. All Sizes: Insulation shall be:

a. Flexible Elastomeric, 2 inches thick.

B. Refrigerant Suction and Hot-Gas Tubing:



1. All Sizes: Insulation shall be:

a. Flexible Elastomeric, 2 inches thick.



B. Piping, Concealed:

1. None.

C. Piping, Exposed:

1. PVC: 20 mils thick.

3.15 OUTDOOR, FIELD-APPLIED JACKET SCHEDULE


B. Piping, Exposed:

1. Stainless-Steel, Type 304 or 316, Smooth 2B Finish with Z-Shaped Locking Seam: 0.020- or 0.024-inch-thick.


SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS FOR HVAC CONTROLS


SECTION 230993 - SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS FOR HVAC CONTROLS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes control sequences for all HVAC systems, subsystems, and equipment.

B. Coordinate required control interface with the manufacturers of packaged equipment.

1.3 GENERAL

A. All setpoints described in this sequence of operation shall be fully adjustable throughout the entire range of the sensors being used to measure the variable being controlled.

B. The installing contractor shall provide all the required sensors, cable, and interlock wiring to perform the sequence of operation.

C. For redundant operation, systems shall be alternated on a 7-day cycle (adj). or as directed by the Owner.

D. VRF manufacturer will provide wall mounted remote controller and return air thermistors.

E. VRF manufacturer shall coordinate and provide required documentation and support services.

F. Space setpoints shall be adjustable unless specifically noted otherwise:

1. Occupied Space Temperature Cooling Setpoint: 75°F. 2. Occupied Space Temperature Heating Setpoint: 70°F.

1.4 VARIABLE REFRIGERANT FLOW SYSTEM: EXISTING LG MULTI V SYSTEM (VRF-1)

A. The system consists of two (2) existing ducted type indoor units, one (1) heat recovery unit, existing outdoor heat pump unit, two (2) new ceiling cassette units and one (1) new heat recovery unit. The existing system standalone controller will be used.

B. The installing contractor shall be responsible for installation and communication wiring of all VRF control components to provide a complete and operational system including but not limited to remote wall mounted controllers, return air thermistors, indoor units (air handlers and heat recovery unit), and outdoor unit.

C. The existing VRF system serves Dispatch, Lounge and two (2) offices. The system is capable of providing simultaneous heating and cooling, via heat recovery units, to meet individual space needs.



D. Each indoor unit shall be energized via its own wall mounted controller. Areas served by each indoor unit is listed on the schedule sheet.

E. The ducted indoor unit serving Dispatch (FCU-1-1) will be provided with duct smoke detector. Upon detection of smoke in the main supply duct, the unit shall stop operating and a signal will be sent to the fire alarm system. The system will resume normal operation once released form the fire alarm system.

F. FCU-1-1 has an existing secondary drain pan. The installing contractor will provide new moisture sensor in the pan. The moisture sensor will be interlocked with the unit. Once moisture is detected in the pan, the unit will stop, and an alarm will be sent to the controller. Manual reset will be required to resume normal operation.

G. New secondary drain pan with moisture will be provided for FCU-1-2 by the installing contractor. The moisture sensor will be interlocked with the unit. Once moisture is detected in the pan, the unit will stop, and an alarm will be sent to the controller. Manual reset will be required to resume normal operation.

H. Each indoor unit will receive tempered outside air from ERV-1.

I. ERV-1 is an existing unit ducted directly to existing and new LG indoor units. The ERV consists of supply fan, exhaust fan, enthalpy type energy recovery heat exchanger, electric heating coil and duct mounted outside air and exhaust air dampers with end switch.

1. ERV-1 will be enabled whenever the existing LG system is operating. When LG system is off, the ERV-1 is off, OA and EA dampers are closed.

2. When enabled, the outside air and exhaust air dampers will open. Once fully opened as sensed by the end switches, the supply and exhaust fans shall be energized.

3. The outside air duct mounted electric coil will be energized from the ERV control board whenever the outside air temperature drops below 32 deg F (adj).

4. A manual controller will be provided for the ERV-1. The ERV can be turned ON/OFF from the manual controller.

5. An emergency switch will be provided for ERV-1. The emergency switch shall interrupt the power to the ERV-1 to permit closing of OA intakes, in accordance with NFPA 1221.

1.5 VARIABLE REFRIGERANT FLOW SYSTEM (VRF-2): REDUNDANT SYSTEM FOR DISPATCH ONLY

A. The system consists of two (2) indoor cassette unit and outdoor heat pump unit, and an energy recovery ventilator. The new system will be provided with standalone controller.

B. The installing contractor shall be responsible for installation and communication wiring of all VRF control components to provide a complete and operational system including but not limited to remote wall mounted controllers, return air thermistors, indoor units, energy recovery ventilator and the outdoor unit.

C. The system will be enabled from the controller. When enabled, the indoor units shall be set to AUTO mode during occupied times. The outdoor unit will monitor pre-defined high and low refrigerant temperature and pressure limits and signal an alarm on the local controller and error code on the outdoor unit control board if limits are exceeded.



D. The Wired MA RC (remote controller) will maintain temperature set-points based on the Owner’s request. Temperature set-points may be changed at the RC.

E. When enabled, the RC shall send the COOL mode command when the upper limit is exceeded or the HEAT mode command when the lower limit is exceeded.

F. When disabled, the RC shall send the OFF command to the indoor unit at the start of unoccupied times. The RC shall monitor local temperature in the space and command the unit ON in COOL or HEAT mode if the Owner specified setback limits are exceeded.

G. Whenever VRF-2 is operating, ERV-2 will be enabled. When VRF-2 is disabled, ERV-2 will be OFF.

H. ERV-2 will be ducted directly to the space. The ERV-2 consists of supply fan, exhaust fan, enthalpy type energy recovery heat exchanger, by-pass dampers, electric heating coil and duct mounted outside air and exhaust air dampers with end switch.

1. When enabled, the outside air and exhaust air dampers will open. Once fully opened as sensed by the end switches, the supply and exhaust fans shall be energized.

2. The outside air duct mounted electric coil will be energized from the ERV control board whenever the outside air temperature drops below 32 deg F (adj).

3. ERV-2 can be used to reduce cooling load. When the air outside is cooler than the air inside the building during the cooling season (such as early morning or at night), “By-pass” ventilation will draw in the cooler outside air and reduce the cooling load on the system. During cold season, fresh air can be drawn in and used as is to cool rooms where the temperature has risen due to the use equipment releasing heating loads.

4. An emergency switch will be provided for ERV-2. The emergency switch shall interrupt the power to the ERV-1 to permit closing of OA intake, in accordance with NFPA 1221.

1.6 TOILET ROOM EXHAUST FANS – TYPICAL OF TWO (2)

A. Fan will be started and stopped by occupancy sensor located in space.

1.7 CUSTODIAL EXHAUST FAN

A. Fan will be started and stopped by wall mounted light switch.

1.8 LOUNGE ROOM EXHAUST FAN

A. Fan will be started and stopped by wall mounted switch.

1.9 COMPUTER ROOM AIR CONDITIONING UNIT (CRAC)

A. The CRAC units will be provided with standalone controllers.

B. The unit operation will be in accordance with the manufacturer’s sequence of operation to maintain space temperature and relative humidity setpoint. Refer to section 238123.13 “Computer-Room Air-Conditioners, Ceiling-Mounted Units” for the CRAC unit sequence of operation.



C. The CRAC units will be provided with duct mounted smoke detector. The smoke detector will be connected to the fire alarm system and will be interlocked with the fire suppression system. When smoke is detected, the unit will shut down. It will resume normal operation when cleared from the fire alarm system.

1.10 DISPATCH ROOM HUMIDIFIER

A. The humidifier is a standalone, space mounted unit with built in blower pack to disperse steam directly to the space.

B. The unit operation will be in accordance with the manufacturer’s sequence of operation to maintain space relative humidity setpoint of 35 deg F (adj).

C. Refer to Section 238413.29 “Self-Contained Steam Humidifiers” for the humidifier sequence of operation.




REFRIGERANT PIPING


SECTION 232300 - REFRIGERANT PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Refrigerant pipes and fittings. 2. Refrigerant piping valves and specialties. 3. Refrigerants.


1. Section 230719 "HVAC Piping Insulation". 2. Section 238129 “Variable-Refrigerant-Flow HVAC Systems”.


A. Product Data: For each type of valve, refrigerant piping, and piping specialty.

1. Include pressure drop, based on manufacturer's test data, for the following:

a. Thermostatic expansion valves. b. Solenoid valves. c. Hot-gas bypass valves. d. Filter dryers. e. Strainers. f. Pressure-regulating valves.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Show layout of refrigerant piping and specialties, including pipe, tube, and fitting sizes; flow capacities; valve arrangements and locations; slopes of horizontal runs; oil traps; double risers; wall and floor penetrations; and equipment connection details.

2. Show piping size and piping layout, including oil traps, double risers, specialties, and pipe and tube sizes to accommodate, as a minimum, equipment provided, elevation difference between compressor and evaporator, and length of piping to ensure proper operation and compliance with warranties of connected equipment.

3. Show interface and spatial relationships between piping and equipment. 4. Shop Drawing Scale: ¼-inch equals 1 foot.



REFRIGERANT PIPING




A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For refrigerant valves and piping specialties to include in maintenance manuals.


A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to 2010 ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."

B. Comply with ASHRAE 15, "Safety Code for Refrigeration Systems."

C. Comply with ASME B31.5, "Refrigeration Piping and Heat Transfer Components."

1.7 PRODUCT STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Store piping with end caps in place to ensure that piping interior and exterior are clean when installed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Line Test Pressure for Refrigerant R-410A:

1. Suction Lines for Air-Conditioning Applications: 300 psig. 2. Suction Lines for Heat-Pump Applications: 535 psig. 3. Hot-Gas and Liquid Lines: 535 psig.

2.2 REFRIGERANT PIPING

A. Copper Tube: ASTM B 280, Type ACR.

B. Wrought-Copper Fittings: ASME B16.22.

C. Wrought-Copper Unions: ASME B16.22.

D. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8.

E. Flexible Connectors:

1. Body: Tin-bronze bellows with woven, flexible, tinned-bronze-wire-reinforced protective jacket.

2. End Connections: Socket ends. 3. Offset Performance: Capable of minimum ¾-inch misalignment in minimum 7-inch-long

assembly. 4. Working Pressure Rating: Factory test at minimum 500 psig. 5. Maximum Operating Temperature: 250 deg F.

REFRIGERANT PIPING


2.3 REFRIGERANT TUBING KITS

A. Factory-rolled and -bundled, soft-copper tubing with tubing termination fittings at each end. Standard one-piece length for connecting to indoor units. Pre-insulated with flexible elastomeric insulation of thickness to comply with governing energy code and sufficient to eliminate condensation.

B. Factory Charge: Dehydrated air or nitrogen.

2.4 REFRIGERANT ISOLATION BALL VALVES

A. Description: Uni-body full port design, rated for maximum system temperature and pressure, and factory tested under pressure to ensure tight shutoff. Designed for valve operation without removing seal cap.

B. Seals: Compatible with system refrigerant and oil. Seal service life of at least twenty (20) years.

C. Valve Connections: Flare or sweat depending on size.

2.5 VALVES AND SPECIALTIES


1. Danfoss Inc. 2. Heldon Products; Henry Technologies 3. Parker Hannifin Corp. 4. Paul Mueller Company

B. Diaphragm Valves:

1. Body and Bonnet: Forged brass or cast bronze; globe design with straight-through or angle pattern.

2. Diaphragm: Phosphor bronze and stainless-steel with stainless-steel spring. 3. Operator: Rising stem and hand wheel. 4. Seat: Nylon. 5. End Connections: Socket, union, or flanged. 6. Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig. 7. Maximum Operating Temperature: 275 deg F.

C. Packed-Angle Valves:

1. Body and Bonnet: Forged brass or cast bronze. 2. Packing: Molded stem, back seating, and replaceable under pressure. 3. Operator: Rising stem. 4. Seat: Nonrotating, self-aligning polytetrafluoroethylene. 5. Seal Cap: Forged-brass or valox hex cap. 6. End Connections: Socket, union, threaded, or flanged. 7. Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig. 8. Maximum Operating Temperature: 275 deg F.

REFRIGERANT PIPING


D. Check Valves:

1. Body: Ductile iron, forged brass, or cast bronze; globe pattern. 2. Bonnet: Bolted ductile iron, forged brass, or cast bronze; or brass hex plug. 3. Piston: Removable polytetrafluoroethylene seat. 4. Closing Spring: Stainless-steel. 5. Manual Opening Stem: Seal cap, plated-steel stem, and graphite seal. 6. End Connections: Socket, union, threaded, or flanged. 7. Maximum Opening Pressure: 0.50 psig. 8. Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig. 9. Maximum Operating Temperature: 275 deg F.

E. Service Valves:

1. Body: Forged brass with brass cap including key end to remove core. 2. Core: Removable ball-type check valve with stainless-steel spring. 3. Seat: Polytetrafluoroethylene. 4. End Connections: Copper spring. 5. Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig.

F. Solenoid Valves: Comply with AHRI 760 and UL 429; listed and labeled by a National Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL).

1. Body and Bonnet: Plated steel. 2. Solenoid Tube, Plunger, Closing Spring, and Seat Orifice: Stainless-steel. 3. Seat: Polytetrafluoroethylene. 4. End Connections: Threaded. 5. Electrical: Molded, watertight coil in NEMA 250 enclosure of type required by location

with ½-inch conduit adapter, and appropriate voltage ac coil. 6. Working Pressure Rating: 400 psig. 7. Maximum Operating Temperature: 240 deg F.

G. Safety Relief Valves: Comply with 2010 ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code; listed and labeled by an NRTL.

1. Body and Bonnet: Ductile iron and steel, with neoprene O-ring seal. 2. Piston, Closing Spring, and Seat Insert: Stainless-steel. 3. Seat: Polytetrafluoroethylene. 4. End Connections: Threaded. 5. Working Pressure Rating: 400 psig. 6. Maximum Operating Temperature: 240 deg F.

H. Thermostatic Expansion Valves: Comply with AHRI 750.

1. Body, Bonnet, and Seal Cap: Forged brass or steel. 2. Diaphragm, Piston, Closing Spring, and Seat Insert: Stainless-steel. 3. Packing and Gaskets: Non-asbestos. 4. Capillary and Bulb: Copper tubing filled with refrigerant charge. 5. Suction Temperature:40 deg F. 6. Superheat: Adjustable. 7. Reverse-flow option (for heat-pump applications).

REFRIGERANT PIPING


8. End Connections: Socket, flare, or threaded union. 9. Working Pressure Rating: 700 psig.

I. Hot-Gas Bypass Valves: Comply with UL 429; listed and labeled by an NRTL.

1. Body, Bonnet, and Seal Cap: Ductile iron or steel. 2. Diaphragm, Piston, Closing Spring, and Seat Insert: Stainless-steel. 3. Packing and Gaskets: Non-asbestos. 4. Solenoid Tube, Plunger, Closing Spring, and Seat Orifice: Stainless-steel. 5. Seat: Polytetrafluoroethylene. 6. Equalizer: External. 7. Electrical: Molded, watertight coil in NEMA 250 enclosure of type required by location

with ½-inch conduit adapter and 24-V ac coil. 8. End Connections: Socket. 9. Throttling Range: Maximum 5 psig 10. Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig. 11. Maximum Operating Temperature: 240 deg F.

J. Angle-Type Strainers:

1. Body: Forged brass or cast bronze. 2. Drain Plug: Brass hex plug. 3. Screen: 100-mesh monel. 4. End Connections: Socket or flare. 5. Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig. 6. Maximum Operating Temperature: 275 deg F.

K. Moisture/Liquid Indicators:

1. Body: Forged brass. 2. Window: Replaceable, clear, fused glass window with indicating element protected by

filter screen. 3. Indicator: Color coded to show moisture content in parts per million (ppm). 4. Minimum Moisture Indicator Sensitivity: Indicate moisture above 60 ppm. 5. End Connections: Socket or flare. 6. Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig. 7. Maximum Operating Temperature: 240 deg F.

L. Replaceable-Core Filter Dryers: Comply with AHRI 730.

1. Body and Cover: Painted-steel shell with ductile-iron cover, stainless-steel screws, and neoprene gaskets.

2. Filter Media: 10 micron, pleated with integral end rings; stainless-steel support. 3. Desiccant Media: Activated alumina or charcoal. 4. Designed for reverse flow (for heat-pump applications). 5. End Connections: Socket. 6. Access Ports: NPS 1/4 connections at entering and leaving sides for pressure differential

measurement. 7. Maximum Pressure Loss: 2 psig. 8. Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig. 9. Maximum Operating Temperature: 240 deg F.

REFRIGERANT PIPING


M. Permanent Filter Dryers: Comply with AHRI 730.

1. Body and Cover: Painted-steel shell. 2. Filter Media: 10 micron, pleated with integral end rings; stainless-steel support. 3. Desiccant Media: Activated alumina. 4. Designed for reverse flow (for heat-pump applications). 5. End Connections: Socket. 6. Access Ports: NPS 1/4 connections at entering and leaving sides for pressure differential

measurement. 7. Maximum Pressure Loss: 2 psig. 8. Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig. 9. Maximum Operating Temperature: 240 deg F.

N. Receivers: Comply with AHRI 495.

1. Comply with 2010 ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code; listed and labeled by an NRTL.

2. Comply with UL 207; listed and labeled by an NRTL. 3. Body: Welded steel with corrosion-resistant coating. 4. Tappings: Inlet, outlet, liquid level indicator, and safety relief valve. 5. End Connections: Socket or threaded. 6. Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig. 7. Maximum Operating Temperature: 275 deg F.

O. Liquid Accumulators: Comply with AHRI 495.

1. Body: Welded steel with corrosion-resistant coating. 2. End Connections: Socket or threaded. 3. Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig. 4. Maximum Operating Temperature: 275 deg F.

2.6 REFRIGERANTS

A. ASHRAE 34, R-410A: Pentafluoroethane/Difluoromethane.

B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one (1) of the following:

1. Atofina Chemicals, Inc. 2. DuPont Company; Fluorochemicals Div. 3. Honeywell, Inc.; Genetron Refrigerants 4. INEOS Fluor Americas LLC

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PIPING APPLICATIONS FOR REFRIGERANT R-410A

A. Suction Lines NPS 1-1/2 and Smaller for Conventional Air-Conditioning Applications: Copper, Type ACR, annealed-temper tubing and wrought-copper fittings with brazed joints.

REFRIGERANT PIPING


B. Hot-Gas and Liquid Lines: Copper, Type ACR annealed- or drawn-temper tubing and wrought-copper fittings with brazed joints.

C. Safety-Relief-Valve Discharge Piping: Copper, Type ACR, annealed- or drawn-temper tubing and wrought-copper fittings with brazed joints.

3.2 VALVE AND SPECIALTY APPLICATIONS

A. Install diaphragm packless valves in suction and discharge lines of compressor.

B. Install service valves for gage taps at inlet and outlet of hot-gas bypass valves and strainers if they are not an integral part of valves and strainers.

C. Install a check valve at the compressor discharge and a liquid accumulator at the compressor suction connection.

D. Except as otherwise indicated, install diaphragm packless valves on inlet and outlet side of filter dryers.

E. Install a full-size, three-valve bypass around filter dryers.

F. Install solenoid valves upstream from each expansion valve and hot-gas bypass valve. Install solenoid valves in horizontal lines with coil at top.

G. Install thermostatic expansion valves as close as possible to distributors on evaporators.

1. Install valve so diaphragm case is warmer than bulb. 2. Secure bulb to clean, straight, horizontal section of suction line using two (2) bulb straps.

Do not mount bulb in a trap or at bottom of the line. 3. If external equalizer lines are required, make connection where it will reflect suction-line

pressure at bulb location.

H. Install safety relief valves where required by 2010 ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. Pipe safety-relief-valve discharge line to outside according to ASHRAE 15.

I. Install moisture/liquid indicators in liquid line at the inlet of the thermostatic expansion valve or at the inlet of the evaporator coil capillary tube.

J. Install strainers upstream from and adjacent to the following unless they are furnished as an integral assembly for the device being protected:

1. Solenoid valves. 2. Thermostatic expansion valves. 3. Hot-gas bypass valves. 4. Compressor.

K. Install filter dryers in liquid line between compressor and thermostatic expansion valve, and in the suction line at the compressor.

L. Install receivers sized to accommodate pump-down charge.

M. Install flexible connectors at compressors.

REFRIGERANT PIPING



A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems; indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Shop Drawings.

B. Install refrigerant piping according to ASHRAE 15.

C. Install piping in concealed locations unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas.

D. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise.

E. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.

F. Install piping adjacent to machines to allow service and maintenance.

G. Install piping free of sags and bends.


I. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure.

J. Refer to Section 230993 "Sequence of Operations for HVAC DDC" for solenoid valve controllers, control wiring, and sequence of operation.

K. Install piping as short and direct as possible, with a minimum number of joints, elbows, and fittings.

L. Arrange piping to allow inspection and service of refrigeration equipment. Install valves and specialties in accessible locations to allow for service and inspection. Install access doors or panels if valves or equipment requiring maintenance is concealed behind finished surfaces.

M. Install refrigerant piping in protective conduit where installed belowground.

N. Install refrigerant piping in rigid or flexible conduit in locations where exposed to mechanical injury.

O. Slope refrigerant piping as follows:

1. Install horizontal hot-gas discharge piping with a uniform slope downward away from compressor.

2. Install horizontal suction lines with a uniform slope downward to compressor. 3. Install traps and double risers to entrain oil in vertical runs. 4. Liquid lines may be installed level.

REFRIGERANT PIPING


P. When brazing, remove solenoid-valve coils and sight glasses; also remove valve stems, seats, and packing, and accessible internal parts of refrigerant specialties. Do not apply heat near expansion-valve bulb.

Q. Install piping with adequate clearance between pipe and adjacent walls and hangers or between pipes for insulation installation.

R. Identify refrigerant piping and valves according to Section 230553 "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment."

S. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for sleeves specified in Section 230517 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for HVAC Piping."

T. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs. Comply with requirements for sleeve seals specified in Section 230517 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for HVAC Piping."

U. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors.

3.4 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.

B. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly.

C. Fill pipe and fittings with an inert gas (nitrogen or carbon dioxide), during brazing or welding, to prevent scale formation.

D. Soldered Joints: Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook."

E. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," Chapter "Pipe and Tube."

1. Use Type BCuP (copper-phosphorus) alloy for joining copper socket fittings with copper pipe.

2. Use Type BAg (cadmium-free silver) alloy for joining copper with bronze or steel.

F. Threaded Joints: Thread steel pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and to restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:

1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry-seal threading is specified.

2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.

G. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12.

H. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads.

REFRIGERANT PIPING


3.5 INSTALLATION OF HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Comply with requirements for seismic restraints in Section 230548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC."

B. Comply with Section 230529 "Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment" for hangers, supports, and anchor devices.

C. Install the following pipe attachments:

1. Adjustable steel clevis hangers for individual horizontal runs less than 20 feet long. 2. Roller hangers and spring hangers for individual horizontal runs 20 feet or longer. 3. Pipe Roller: MSS SP-58, Type 44 for multiple horizontal piping 20 feet or longer,

supported on a trapeze. 4. Spring hangers to support vertical runs. 5. Copper-clad hangers and supports for hangers and supports in direct contact with copper

pipe.

D. Install hangers for copper tubing, with maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters, to comply with MSS-58, locally enforced codes, and authorities having jurisdiction requirements, whichever are most stringent.

E. Support horizontal piping within 12 inches of each fitting.

F. Support vertical runs of copper tubing to comply with MSS-58, locally enforced codes, and authorities having jurisdiction requirements, whichever are most stringent.



1. Comply with ASME B31.5, Chapter VI. 2. Test refrigerant piping, specialties, and receivers. Isolate compressor, condenser,

evaporator, and safety devices from test pressure if they are not rated above the test pressure.

3. Test high- and low-pressure side piping of each system separately at not less than the pressures indicated in "Performance Requirements" Article.

a. Leak testing shall be in accordance with the associated equipment manufacturer’s requirements.

b. If leak is detected, remake leaking joints using new materials and retest in accordance with the associated equipment manufacturer’s requirements.

B. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.7 SYSTEM CHARGING

A. System charging shall be in accordance with the associated equipment manufacturer’s requirements.

REFRIGERANT PIPING


B. In the absence of equipment manufacturer’s written requirements, charge system using the following procedures:

1. Install core in filter dryers after leak test but before evacuation. 2. Evacuate entire refrigerant system with a vacuum pump to 500 micrometers. If vacuum

holds for 12 hours, system is ready for charging. 3. Break vacuum with refrigerant gas, allowing pressure to build up to 2 psig. 4. Charge system with a new filter-dryer core in charging line.

3.8 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust thermostatic expansion valve to obtain proper evaporator superheat.

B. Adjust high- and low-pressure switch settings to avoid short cycling in response to fluctuating suction pressure.

C. Adjust set-point temperature of air-conditioning or chilled-water controllers to the system design temperature.

D. Perform the following adjustments before operating the refrigeration system, according to manufacturer's written instructions:

1. Open shutoff valves in condenser water circuit. 2. Verify that compressor oil level is correct. 3. Open compressor suction and discharge valves. 4. Open refrigerant valves except bypass valves that are used for other purposes. 5. Check open compressor-motor alignment and verify lubrication for motors and bearings.

E. Replace core of replaceable filter dryer after system has been adjusted and after design flow rates and pressures are established.


METAL DUCTS


SECTION 233113 - METAL DUCTS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Single-wall rectangular ducts and fittings. 2. Single-wall round ducts and fittings. 3. Sheet metal materials. 4. Duct liner. 5. Duct lagging material. 6. Sealants and gaskets. 7. Hangers and supports. 8. Seismic-restraint devices.


1. Section 230593 "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC" for testing, adjusting, and balancing requirements for metal ducts.

2. Section 233300 "Air Duct Accessories" for dampers, sound-control devices, duct-mounting access doors and panels, turning vanes, and flexible ducts.


A. Delegated Duct Design: Duct construction, including sheet metal thicknesses, seam and joint construction, reinforcements, and hangers and supports, shall comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" and performance requirements and design criteria indicated in "Duct Schedule" Article.

B. Structural Performance: Duct hangers and supports and seismic restraints shall withstand the effects of gravity and seismic loads and stresses within limits and under conditions described in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" SMACNA's "Seismic Restraint Manual: Guidelines for Mechanical Systems."

C. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with requirements in ASHRAE 62.1.


A. Product Data: For each type of the following products:

1. Liners and adhesives. 2. Sealants and gaskets.

METAL DUCTS


3. Seismic-restraint devices.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Fabrication, assembly, and installation, including plans, elevations, sections, components, and attachments to other work.

2. Factory- and shop-fabricated ducts and fittings. 3. Duct layout indicating sizes, configuration, liner material, and static-pressure classes. 4. Elevation of top of ducts. 5. Dimensions of main duct runs from building grid lines. 6. Fittings. 7. Reinforcement and spacing. 8. Seam and joint construction. 9. Penetrations through fire-rated and other partitions. 10. Equipment installation based on equipment being used on Project. 11. Locations for duct accessories, including dampers, turning vanes, and access doors and

panels. 12. Hangers and supports, including methods for duct and building attachment, seismic

restraints, and vibration isolation. 13. Preparation for selecting hangers and supports and seismic restraints.

C. Delegated-Design Submittal:

1. Sheet metal thicknesses. 2. Joint and seam construction and sealing. 3. Reinforcement details and spacing. 4. Materials, fabrication, assembly, and spacing of hangers and supports. 5. Design Calculations: Calculations, including analysis data signed and sealed by the

qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation for selecting hangers and supports and seismic restraints.


A. Coordination Drawings: Plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved:

1. Duct installation in congested spaces, indicating coordination with general construction, building components, and other building services. Indicate proposed changes to duct layout.

2. Suspended ceiling components. 3. Structural members to which duct will be attached. 4. Size and location of initial access modules for acoustical tile. 5. Penetrations of smoke barriers and fire-rated construction. 6. Items penetrating finished ceiling including the following:

a. Lighting fixtures. b. Air outlets and inlets. c. Speakers. d. Sprinklers. e. Access panels. f. Perimeter moldings.

METAL DUCTS


B. Welding certificates.



A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:

1. AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code - Steel," for hangers and supports. 2. AWS D1.2, "Structural Welding Code - Aluminum," for aluminum supports. 3. AWS D9.1, "Sheet Metal Welding Code," for duct joint and seam welding.

B. ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 5 - "Systems and Equipment" and Section 7 - "Construction and System Start-up."

C. ASHRAE/IESNA Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1, Section 6.4.4 - "HVAC System Construction and Insulation."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SINGLE-WALL RECTANGULAR DUCTS AND FITTINGS

A. General Fabrication Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" based on indicated static-pressure class unless otherwise indicated.

B. Transverse Joints: Select joint types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-1, "Rectangular Duct/Transverse Joints," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

C. Longitudinal Seams: Select seam types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-2, "Rectangular Duct/Longitudinal Seams," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

D. Elbows, Transitions, Offsets, Branch Connections, and Other Duct Construction: Select types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Chapter 4, "Fittings and Other Construction," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

2.2 SINGLE-WALL ROUND DUCTS AND FITTINGS

A. General Fabrication Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Chapter 3, "Round, Oval, and Flexible Duct," based on indicated static-pressure class unless otherwise indicated.

METAL DUCTS



a. Lindab Inc. b. McGill AirFlow LLC c. SEMCO Incorporated d. Sheet Metal Connectors, Inc. e. Spiral Manufacturing Co., Inc.

B. Transverse Joints: Select joint types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-1, "Round Duct Transverse Joints," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

1. Transverse Joints in Ducts Larger Than 60 Inches in Diameter: Flanged.

C. Longitudinal Seams: Select seam types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-2, "Round Duct Longitudinal Seams," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

1. Fabricate round ducts larger than 90 inches in diameter with butt-welded longitudinal seams.

D. Tees and Laterals: Select types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-5, "90 Degree Tees and Laterals," and Figure 3-6, "Conical Tees," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

2.3 SHEET METAL MATERIALS

A. General Material Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods unless otherwise indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, and other imperfections.

B. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Comply with ASTM A 653.

1. Galvanized Coating Designation: G90. 2. Finishes for Surfaces Exposed to View: Mill phosphatized.

C. Carbon-Steel Sheets: Comply with ASTM A 1008, with oiled, matte finish for exposed ducts.

D. Stainless-Steel Sheets: Comply with ASTM A 480, Type 304 or 316, as indicated in the "Duct Schedule" Article; cold rolled, annealed, sheet. Exposed surface finish shall be No. 2B, No. 2D, No. 3, or No. 4 as indicated in the "Duct Schedule" Article.

METAL DUCTS


E. Aluminum Sheets: Comply with ASTM B 209 Alloy 3003, H14 temper; with mill finish for concealed ducts, and standard, one-side bright finish for duct surfaces exposed to view.

F. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: ASTM A 36, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.

1. Where black- and galvanized-steel shapes and plates are used to reinforce aluminum ducts, isolate the different metals with butyl rubber, neoprene, or EPDM gasket materials.

G. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, ¼-inch minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches or less; 3/8-inch minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches.

2.4 DUCT LINER

A. Flexible Elastomeric Duct Liner: Preformed, cellular, closed-cell, sheet materials complying with ASTM C 534, Type II, Grade 1; and with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B.

B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one (1) of the following:

1. Aeroflex USA, Inc.; Aerocel, minimum R value of 6 2. Armacell LLC; AP Armaflex Duct Liner, minimum R value of 6 3. K-Flex USA; K-Flex Duct Liner Gray, minimum R value of 6

C. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Maximum flame-spread index of 25 and maximum smoke-developed index of 50 when tested in accordance with UL 723; certified by an NRTL.

D. Liner Thickness: Thickness shall conform with minimum R values in accordance with current International Energy Conservation Code.

E. Liner Adhesive: As recommended by insulation manufacturer and complying with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B.

F. Adhesive shall have a VOC content of 80 g/L or less.

G. Insulation Pins and Washers:

1. Cupped-Head, Capacitor-Discharge-Weld Pins: Copper- or zinc-coated steel pin, fully annealed for capacitor-discharge welding, 0.106-inch-diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated with integral 1½-inch galvanized carbon-steel washer.

2. Insulation-Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed from 0.016-inch-thick galvanized steel or stainless-steel; with beveled edge sized as required to hold insulation securely in place but not less than 1½ inches in diameter.

H. Shop Application of Duct Liner: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 7-11, "Flexible Duct Liner Installation."

1. Adhere a single layer of indicated thickness of duct liner with at least ninety percent (90%) adhesive coverage at liner contact surface area. Attaining indicated thickness with multiple layers of duct liner is prohibited.

METAL DUCTS


2. Apply adhesive to transverse edges of liner facing upstream that do not receive metal nosing.

3. Butt transverse joints without gaps, and coat joint with adhesive. 4. Fold and compress liner in corners of rectangular ducts or cut and fit to ensure butted

edge overlapping. 5. Do not apply liner in rectangular ducts with longitudinal joints, except at corners of ducts,

unless duct size and dimensions of standard liner make longitudinal joints necessary. 6. Apply adhesive coating on longitudinal seams in ducts with air velocity of 2500 fpm. 7. Secure liner with mechanical fasteners 4 inches from corners and at intervals not

exceeding 12 inches transversely; at 3 inches from transverse joints and at intervals not exceeding 18 inches longitudinally.

8. Secure transversely oriented liner edges facing the airstream with metal nosings that have either channel or "Z" profiles or are integrally formed from duct wall. Fabricate edge facings at the following locations:

a. Fan discharges. b. Intervals of lined duct preceding unlined duct. c. Upstream edges of transverse joints in ducts where air velocities are higher than

2500 fpm or where indicated.

9. Secure insulation between perforated sheet metal inner duct of same thickness as specified for outer shell. Use mechanical fasteners that maintain inner duct at uniform distance from outer shell without compressing insulation.

a. Sheet Metal Inner Duct Perforations: 3/32-inch diameter, with an overall open area of twenty-three percent (23%).

10. Terminate inner ducts with buildouts attached to fire-damper sleeves, dampers, turning vane assemblies, or other devices. Fabricated buildouts (metal hat sections) or other buildout means are optional; when used, secure buildouts to duct walls with bolts, screws, rivets, or welds.

2.5 DUCT LAGGING MATERIAL


1. Sound Seal

B. Flexible, 2 lb./square foot reinforced foil-faced mass loaded vinyl noise barrier, 0.23-inch-thick.

C. Foil-faced lag tape.

2.6 SEALANT AND GASKETS

A. General Sealant and Gasket Requirements: Surface-burning characteristics for sealants and gaskets shall be a maximum flame-spread index of 25 and a maximum smoke-developed index of 50 when tested according to UL 723; certified by an NRTL.

B. Water-Based Joint and Seam Sealant:

METAL DUCTS


1. Application Method: Brush on. 2. Solids Content: Minimum sixty-five percent (65%). 3. Shore A Hardness: Minimum 20. 4. Water resistant. 5. Mold and mildew resistant. 6. VOC: Maximum 75 g/L (less water). 7. Maximum Static-Pressure Class: 10-inch wg, positive and negative. 8. Service: Indoor or outdoor. 9. Substrate: Compatible with galvanized sheet steel (both PVC coated and bare), stainless-

steel, or aluminum sheets.

C. Flanged Joint Sealant: Comply with ASTM C 920.

1. General: Single-component, acid-curing, silicone, elastomeric. 2. Type: S. 3. Grade: NS. 4. Class: 25. 5. Use: O.

D. Flange Gaskets: Butyl rubber, neoprene, or EPDM polymer with polyisobutylene plasticizer.

E. Round Duct Joint O-Ring Seals:

1. Seal shall provide maximum leakage class of 3 cfm/100 sq. ft. at 1-inch wg and shall be rated for 10-inch wg static-pressure class, positive or negative.

2. EPDM O-ring to seal in concave bead in coupling or fitting spigot. 3. Double-lipped, EPDM O-ring seal, mechanically fastened to factory-fabricated couplings

and fitting spigots.

2.7 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Hanger Rods for Noncorrosive Environments: Cadmium-plated steel rods and nuts.

B. Hanger Rods for Corrosive Environments: Electrogalvanized, all-thread rods or galvanized rods with threads painted with zinc-chromate primer after installation.

C. Strap and Rod Sizes: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Table 5-1 (Table 5-1M), "Rectangular Duct Hangers Minimum Size," and Table 5-2, "Minimum Hanger Sizes for Round Duct."

D. Steel Cables for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized steel complying with ASTM A 603.

E. Steel Cables for Stainless-Steel Ducts: Stainless steel complying with ASTM A 492.

F. Steel Cable End Connections: Cadmium-plated steel assemblies with brackets, swivel, and bolts designed for duct hanger service; with an automatic-locking and clamping device.

G. Duct Attachments: Sheet metal screws, blind rivets, or self-tapping metal screws; compatible with duct materials.

H. Trapeze and Riser Supports:

METAL DUCTS


1. Supports for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized-steel shapes and plates. 2. Supports for Stainless-Steel Ducts: Stainless-steel shapes and plates. 3. Supports for Aluminum Ducts: Aluminum or galvanized steel coated with zinc chromate.

2.8 SEISMIC-RESTRAINT DEVICES


1. Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries 2. Ductmate Industries, Inc. 3. Hilti Corp. 4. Kinetics Noise Control 5. Loos & Co.; Cableware Division 6. Mason Industries 7. TOLCO; a brand of NIBCO INC. 8. Unistrut Corporation; Tyco International, Ltd.

B. General Requirements for Restraint Components: Rated strengths, features, and applications shall be as defined in reports by an evaluation service member of the ICC Evaluation Service or an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Structural Safety Factor: Allowable strength in tension, shear, and pullout force of components shall be at least four (4) times the maximum seismic forces to which they will be subjected.

C. Channel Support System: Shop- or field-fabricated support assembly made of slotted steel channels rated in tension, compression, and torsion forces and with accessories for attachment to braced component at one (1) end and to building structure at the other end. Include matching components and corrosion-resistant coating.

D. Restraint Cables ASTM A 492, stainless-steel cables with end connections made of cadmium-plated steel assemblies with brackets, swivel, and bolts designed for restraining cable service; and with an automatic-locking and clamping device or double-cable clips.

E. Hanger Rod Stiffener: Reinforcing steel angle clamped to hanger rod.

F. Mechanical Anchor Bolts: Drilled-in and stud-wedge or female-wedge type. Select anchor bolts with strength required for anchor and as tested according to ASTM E 488.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 DUCT INSTALLATION

A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of duct system. Indicated duct locations, configurations, and arrangements were used to size ducts and calculate friction loss for air-handling equipment sizing and for other design considerations. Install duct systems as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Shop Drawings and Coordination Drawings.

METAL DUCTS


B. Install ducts according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" unless otherwise indicated.

C. Install round ducts in maximum practical lengths.

D. Install ducts with fewest possible joints.

E. Install factory- or shop-fabricated fittings for changes in direction, size, and shape and for branch connections.

F. Unless otherwise indicated, install ducts vertically and horizontally, and parallel and perpendicular to building lines.

G. Install ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural and permanent enclosure elements of building.

H. Install ducts with a clearance of 1-inch, plus allowance for insulation thickness.

I. Route ducts to avoid passing through transformer vaults and electrical equipment rooms and enclosures.

J. Where ducts pass through non-fire-rated interior partitions and exterior walls and are exposed to view, cover the opening between the partition and duct or duct insulation with sheet metal flanges of same metal thickness as the duct. Overlap openings on four (4) sides by at least 1½ inches.

K. Where ducts pass through fire-rated interior partitions and exterior walls, install fire dampers. Comply with requirements in Section 233300 "Air Duct Accessories" for fire and smoke dampers.

L. Protect duct interiors from moisture, construction debris and dust, and other foreign materials. Comply with SMACNA's "Duct Cleanliness for New Construction Guidelines."

M. Elbows: Use long-radius elbows wherever they fit.

1. Fabricate 90-degree rectangular mitered elbows to include double wall turning vanes. 2. Fabricate 90-degree round elbows with a minimum of three (3) segments for 12 inches

and smaller and a minimum of five (5) segments for 14 inches and larger.

N. Branch Connections: Use lateral or conical branch connections.

O. Install acoustic lagging material where indicated on plans.

3.2 INSTALLATION OF EXPOSED DUCTWORK

A. Protect ducts exposed in finished spaces from being dented, scratched, or damaged.

B. Trim duct sealants flush with metal. Create a smooth and uniform exposed bead. Do not use two-part tape sealing system.

METAL DUCTS


C. Grind welds to provide smooth surface free of burrs, sharp edges, and weld splatter. When carbon steel, grind the welds flush, polish the exposed welds, and treat the welds to remove discoloration caused by welding.

D. Maintain consistency, symmetry, and uniformity in the arrangement and fabrication of fittings, hangers and supports, duct accessories, and air outlets.

E. Repair or replace damaged sections and finished work that does not comply with these requirements.

3.3 DUCT SEALING

A. Seal ducts for duct static-pressure, seal classes, and leakage classes specified in "Duct Schedule" Article according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

B. Seal ducts to the following seal classes according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible":

C. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

1. Outdoor, Supply-Air Ducts: Seal Class A. 2. Outdoor, Exhaust Ducts: Seal Class A. 3. Outdoor, Return-Air Ducts: Seal Class A. 4. Unconditioned Space, Supply-Air Ducts in Pressure Classes 2-Inch wg and Lower: Seal

Class A. 5. Unconditioned Space, Supply-Air Ducts in Pressure Classes Higher Than 2-Inch wg: Seal

Class A. 6. Unconditioned Space, Exhaust Ducts: Seal Class A. 7. Unconditioned Space, Return-Air Ducts: Seal Class A. 8. Conditioned Space, Supply-Air Ducts in Pressure Classes 2-Inch wg and Lower: Seal

Class A. 9. Conditioned Space, Supply-Air Ducts in Pressure Classes Higher Than 2-Inch wg: Seal

Class A. 10. Conditioned Space, Exhaust Ducts: Seal Class A. 11. Conditioned Space, Return-Air Ducts: Seal Class A. 12. Conditioned Space, Return-Air Ducts: Seal Class A.


A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Chapter 5 "Hangers and Supports."

B. Building Attachments: Concrete inserts, powder-actuated fasteners, or structural-steel fasteners appropriate for construction materials to which hangers are being attached.

1. Where practical, install concrete inserts before placing concrete. 2. Install powder-actuated concrete fasteners after concrete is placed and completely cured. 3. Use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for standard-weight aggregate concretes or for

slabs more than 4 inches thick.

METAL DUCTS


4. Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for lightweight-aggregate concretes or for slabs less than 4 inches thick.

5. Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for seismic restraints.

C. Hanger Spacing: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Table 5-1 (Table 5-1M), "Rectangular Duct Hangers Minimum Size," and Table 5-2, "Minimum Hanger Sizes for Round Duct," for maximum hanger spacing; install hangers and supports within 24 inches of each elbow and within 48 inches of each branch intersection.

D. Hangers Exposed to View: Threaded rod and angle or channel supports.

E. Support vertical ducts with steel angles or channel secured to the sides of the duct with welds, bolts, sheet metal screws, or blind rivets; support at each floor and at a maximum interval of 16 feet.

F. Install upper attachments to structures. Select and size upper attachments with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.

3.5 SEISMIC-RESTRAINT-DEVICE INSTALLATION

A. Install ducts with hangers and braces designed to support the duct and to restrain against seismic forces required by applicable building codes. Comply with SMACNA's "Seismic Restraint Manual: Guidelines for Mechanical Systems."

B. Select seismic-restraint devices with capacities adequate to carry present and future static and seismic loads.

C. Install cables so they do not bend across edges of adjacent equipment or building structure.

D. Install cable restraints on ducts that are suspended with vibration isolators.

E. Install seismic-restraint devices using methods approved by an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

F. Attachment to Structure: If specific attachment is not indicated, anchor bracing and restraints to structure, to flanges of beams, to upper truss chords of bar joists, or to concrete members.

G. Drilling for and Setting Anchors:

1. Identify position of reinforcing steel and other embedded items prior to drilling holes for anchors. Do not damage existing reinforcement or embedded items during drilling. Notify the Architect if reinforcing steel or other embedded items are encountered during drilling. Locate and avoid prestressed tendons, electrical and telecommunications conduit, and gas lines.



4. Set anchors to manufacturer's recommended torque, using a torque wrench.

METAL DUCTS


5. Install zinc-coated steel anchors for interior applications and stainless-steel anchors for applications exposed to weather.

3.6 CONNECTIONS

A. Make connections to equipment with flexible connectors complying with Section 233300 "Air Duct Accessories."

B. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for branch, outlet and inlet, and terminal unit connections.

3.7 PAINTING

A. Paint interior of metal ducts that are visible through registers and grilles and that do not have duct liner. Apply one (1) coat of flat, black, latex paint over a compatible galvanized-steel primer. Paint materials and application requirements are specified in Division 09 painting Sections.



B. Leakage Tests: To be performed per system. A system will comprise of a mechanical equipment (such as air handling unit, exhaust fan) and associated duct distribution system.

1. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual". 2. Testing shall utilize currently certified test equipment. Submit a test report for each test. 3. Test the following systems:

a. Supply Ducts with a Pressure Class of 1-Inch wg or Higher: Test representative duct sections, selected by Architect from sections installed, totaling no less than fifty percent (50%) of total installed duct area for each designated pressure class.

b. Return Ducts with a Pressure Class of 1-Inch wg or Higher: Test representative duct sections, selected by Architect from sections installed, totaling no less than fifty percent (50%) of total installed duct area for each designated pressure class.

c. Exhaust Ducts with a Pressure Class of 1-Inch wg or Higher: Test representative duct sections, selected by Architect from sections installed, totaling no less than fifty percent (50%) of total installed duct area for each designated pressure class.

d. Outdoor Air Ducts with a Pressure Class of 1-Inch wg: Test representative duct sections, selected by Architect from sections installed, totaling no less than fifty percent (50%) of total installed duct area for each designated pressure class.

4. Disassemble, reassemble, and seal segments of systems to accommodate leakage testing and for compliance with test requirements.

5. Test for leaks before applying external insulation. 6. Conduct tests at static pressures equal to maximum design pressure of system or section

being tested. If static-pressure classes are not indicated, test system at maximum system design pressure. Do not pressurize systems above maximum design operating pressure.

7. Leak testing shall be witnessed by the Construction Manager or Commissioning Authority. Give seven (7) days’ notice prior to testing.

METAL DUCTS


C. Duct System Cleanliness Tests:

1. Visually inspect duct system to ensure that no visible contaminants are present. 2. Test sections of metal duct system, chosen randomly by Owner, for cleanliness according

to "Vacuum Test" in NADCA ACR, "Assessment, Cleaning and Restoration of HVAC Systems."

a. Acceptable Cleanliness Level: Net weight of debris collected on the filter media shall not exceed 0.75 mg/100 sq. cm.

D. Duct system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

E. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.9 DUCT CLEANING

A. Clean existing duct systems before testing, adjusting, and balancing.

B. Use service openings for entry and inspection.

1. Create new openings and install access panels appropriate for duct static-pressure class if required for cleaning access. Provide insulated panels for insulated or lined duct. Patch insulation and liner as recommended by duct liner manufacturer. Comply with Section 233300 "Air Duct Accessories" for access panels and doors.

2. Disconnect and reconnect flexible ducts as needed for cleaning and inspection. 3. Remove and reinstall ceiling to gain access during the cleaning process.

C. Particulate Collection and Odor Control:

1. When venting vacuuming system inside the building, use HEPA filtration with 99.97 percent collection efficiency for 0.3-micron-size (or larger) particles.

2. When venting vacuuming system to outdoors, use filter to collect debris removed from HVAC system, and locate exhaust downwind and away from air intakes and other points of entry into building.

D. Clean the following components by removing surface contaminants and deposits:

1. Air outlets and inlets (registers, grilles, and diffusers). 2. Supply, return, and exhaust fans including fan housings, plenums (except ceiling supply

and return plenums), scrolls, blades or vanes, shafts, baffles, dampers, and drive assemblies.

3. Air-handling unit internal surfaces and components including mixing box, coil section, air wash systems, spray eliminators, condensate drain pans, humidifiers and dehumidifiers, filters and filter sections, and condensate collectors and drains.

4. Coils and related components. 5. Return-air ducts, dampers, actuators, and turning vanes except in ceiling plenums and

mechanical equipment rooms. 6. Supply-air ducts, dampers, actuators, and turning vanes. 7. Dedicated exhaust and ventilation components and makeup air systems.

E. Mechanical Cleaning Methodology:

METAL DUCTS


1. Clean metal duct systems using mechanical cleaning methods that extract contaminants from within duct systems and remove contaminants from building.

2. Use vacuum-collection devices that are operated continuously during cleaning. Connect vacuum device to downstream end of duct sections so areas being cleaned are under negative pressure.

3. Use mechanical agitation to dislodge debris adhered to interior duct surfaces without damaging integrity of metal ducts, duct liner, or duct accessories.

4. Clean fibrous-glass duct liner with HEPA vacuuming equipment; do not permit duct liner to get wet. Replace fibrous-glass duct liner that is damaged, deteriorated, or delaminated or that has friable material, mold, or fungus growth.

5. Clean coils and coil drain pans according to NADCA 1992. Keep drain pan operational. Rinse coils with clean water to remove latent residues and cleaning materials; comb and straighten fins.

6. Provide drainage and cleanup for wash-down procedures. 7. Antimicrobial Agents and Coatings: Apply EPA-registered antimicrobial agents if

fungus is present. Apply antimicrobial agents according to manufacturer's written instructions after removal of surface deposits and debris.

3.10 START UP

A. Air Balance: Comply with requirements in Section 230593 "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC."

3.11 DUCT SCHEDULE

A. Fabricate ducts with galvanized sheet steel.

B. Supply Ducts:

1. Ducts Connected to Fan Coil Units:

a. Pressure Class: Positive 1-inch wg.

2. Ducts Connected to Energy Recovery Units:

a. Pressure Class: Positive 1-inch wg.

C. Return Ducts:

1. Ducts Connected to Fan Coil Units:

a. Pressure Class: Negative 1-inch wg.



D. Exhaust Ducts:

1. Ducts Connected to Fans Exhausting (ASHRAE 62.1, Class 1 and 2) Air:


METAL DUCTS


E. Outdoor-Air (Not Filtered, Heated, or Cooled) Ducts:


a. Pressure Class: Positive or negative 1-inch wg.

F. Intermediate Reinforcement:

1. Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized steel.

G. Elbow Configuration:

1. Rectangular Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 4-2, "Rectangular Elbows."

a. Velocity 1000 fpm or Lower:

1) Mitered Type RE 2 with vanes complying with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 4-3, "Vanes and Vane Runners," and Figure 4-4, "Vane Support in Elbows.”

2) Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 1.5 radius-to-diameter ratio. 3) Radius Type RE 3 with minimum 1.5 radius-to-diameter ratio and two (2)

vanes.

b. Velocity 1000 fpm to 1500 fpm:



vanes.

c. Velocity 1500 fpm or Higher:



vanes.

2. Round Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-3, "Round Duct Elbows."

a. Minimum Radius-to-Diameter Ratio and Elbow Segments: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Table 3-1, "Mitered Elbows." Elbows with less than 90-degree change of direction have proportionately fewer segments.

METAL DUCTS


1) Velocity 1000 fpm or Lower: 1.0 radius-to-diameter ratio and three (3) segments for 90-degree elbow.

2) Velocity 1000 to 1500 fpm: 1.5 radius-to-diameter ratio and four (4) segments for 90-degree elbow.

3) Velocity 1500 fpm or Higher: 1.5 radius-to-diameter ratio and five (5) segments for 90-degree elbow.

4) Radius-to Diameter Ratio: 1.5.

b. Round Elbows, 12 Inches and Smaller in Diameter: Stamped or pleated. c. Round Elbows, 14 Inches and Larger in Diameter: Welded.

H. Branch Configuration:

1. Rectangular Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 4-6, "Branch Connections."

a. Rectangular Main to Rectangular Branch: 45-degree entry. b. Rectangular Main to Round Branch: 45-degree entry and transition.

2. Round and Flat Oval: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-4, "90 Degree Tees and Laterals," and Figure 3-5, "Conical Tees." Saddle taps are permitted in existing duct.

a. Velocity 1000 fpm or Lower: 90-degree tap, conical. b. Velocity 1000 to 1500 fpm: Conical tap. c. Velocity 1500 fpm or Higher: 45-degree lateral.


AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES


SECTION 233300 - AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Manual volume dampers. 2. Control dampers. 3. Fire dampers. 4. Smoke dampers. 5. Combination fire and smoke dampers. 6. Flange connectors. 7. Turning vanes. 8. Duct-mounted access doors. 9. Flexible connectors. 10. Duct accessory hardware.


1. Section 233346 "Flexible Ducts" for insulated and non-insulated flexible ducts.



B. Shop Drawings: For duct accessories. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

1. Detail duct accessories fabrication and installation in ducts and other construction. Include dimensions, weights, loads, and required clearances, and method of field assembly into duct systems and other construction. Include the following:

a. Special fittings. b. Manual volume damper installations. c. Control-damper installations. d. Fire-damper, smoke-damper, combination fire- and smoke-damper, ceiling, and

corridor damper installations, including sleeves; and duct-mounted access doors and remote damper operators.

e. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.




A. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which ceiling- mounted access panels and access doors required for access to duct accessories are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from Installers of the items involved.

B. Source quality-control reports.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For air duct accessories to include in operation and maintenance manuals.



1. Fusible Links: Furnish quantity equal to ten percent (10%) of amount installed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ASSEMBLY DESCRIPTION

A. Comply with NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems," and with NFPA 90B, "Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems."

B. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods unless otherwise indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, and other imperfections.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Comply with ASTM A 653.

1. Galvanized Coating Designation: G90. 2. Exposed-Surface Finish: Mill phosphatized.

B. Stainless-Steel Sheets: Comply with ASTM A 480, Type 304, and having a No. 2 finish for concealed ducts and 1-side bright finish for exposed ducts.

C. Aluminum Sheets: Comply with ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, Temper H14; with mill finish for concealed ducts and standard, 1-side bright finish for exposed ducts.

D. Extruded Aluminum: Comply with ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063, Temper T6.

E. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: Galvanized-steel reinforcement where installed on galvanized sheet metal ducts; compatible materials for aluminum and stainless-steel ducts.



F. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, ¼-inch minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches or less; 3/8-inch minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches.

2.3 MANUAL VOLUME DAMPERS

A. Manual Volume Dampers: Round.


a. McGill AirFlow LLC b. Pottorff c. Nailor d. Ruskin Company e. Greenheck Fan Corp.

2. Suitable for horizontal or vertical applications. 3. Construction:

a. Frame: 20-gauge galvanized steel with stiffening beads. b. Blades: 16-gauge galvanized steel. c. Drive Shaft/Axle: 3/8-inch minimum square drive. d. Quadrant: Plated steel with hand locking quadrant.

4. Bearings: Synthetic. 5. Accessories: Hand quadrant standoff bracket, minimum of 2 inches for duct insulation

installation.

B. Manual Volume Dampers: Low leakage rectangular.


a. McGill AirFlow LLC b. Pottorff c. Nailor d. Ruskin Company e. Greenheck Fan Corp.

2. Construction:

a. Flanged Frame: 13-gauge galvanized steel hat channels. b. Blades: 16-gauge galvanized steel.

1) Multiple or single blade.

a) For multiple blades linkage concealed in frame. b) Parallel- or opposed-blade design for multiple blades.

2) Stiffen damper blades for stability.

c. Drive Shaft/Axle: ½-inch minimum diameter.



1) Factory installed jackshaft for multiple section damper.

d. Quadrant: Manual locking quadrant.

3. Bearings: Synthetic. 4. Accessories: Quadrant standoff bracket, minimum of 2 inches for duct insulation

installation.

C. Aluminum, Manual Volume Dampers: Rectangular.

1. Comply with AMCA 500-D testing for damper rating. 2. Low-leakage rating, with linkage outside airstream, and bearing AMCA's Certified

Ratings Seal for both air performance and air leakage. 3. Suitable for horizontal or vertical applications. 4. Frames: Hat shaped, 0.10-inch-thick, aluminum sheet channels; frames with flanges for

attaching to walls and flangeless frames for installing in ducts. 5. Blades:

a. Multiple or single blade. b. Parallel- or opposed-blade design. c. Roll-Formed Aluminum Blades: 0.10-inch-thick aluminum sheet. d. Extruded-Aluminum Blades: 0.050-inch-thick extruded aluminum.

6. Blade Axles: Stainless-steel. 7. Bearings:

a. Molded synthetic. b. Dampers in ducts with pressure classes of 3-inch wg or less shall have axles full

length of damper blades and bearings at both ends of operating shaft.

8. Blade Seals: Neoprene. 9. Jamb Seals: Cambered aluminum. 10. Tie Bars and Brackets: Aluminum. 11. Accessories:

a. Include locking device to hold single-blade dampers in a fixed position without vibration.

12. Jackshaft:

a. Size: 1-inch diameter. b. Material: Galvanized-steel pipe rotating within pipe-bearing assembly mounted on

supports at each mullion and at each end of multiple-damper assemblies. c. Length and Number of Mountings: As required to connect linkage of each damper

in multiple-damper assembly.

13. Damper Hardware:

a. Zinc-plated, die-cast core with dial and handle made of 3/32-inch-thick zinc-plated steel, and a ¾-inch hexagon locking nut.

b. Include center hole to suit damper operating-rod size.



c. Include standoff bracket to accommodate up to 3-inch-thick insulation.

2.4 CONTROL DAMPERS


1. Greenheck Fan Corporation 2. Nailor Industries Inc. 3. Pottorff 4. Ruskin Company

B. Low-leakage rating, with linkage outside airstream, and bearing AMCA's Certified Ratings Seal for both air performance and air leakage.

C. Frames:

1. Hat-shaped. 2. 0.094-inch-thick, galvanized sheet steel. 3. Mitered and welded corners.

D. Blades:

1. Multiple blade with maximum blade width of 8 inches. 2. Parallel- and opposed-blade design. 3. Galvanized steel. 4. 0.064-inch-thick single skin or 0.0747-inch-thick dual skin. 5. Blade Edging: Closed-cell neoprene. 6. Blade Edging: Inflatable seal blade edging, or replaceable rubber seals.

E. Blade Axles: ½-inch-diameter; galvanized steel; blade-linkage hardware of zinc-plated steel and brass; ends sealed against blade bearings.

1. Operating Temperature Range: From minus 40 to plus 200 deg F.

F. Bearings:

1. Oil-impregnated bronze, molded synthetic, oil-impregnated stainless-steel sleeve, or stainless-steel sleeve.

2. Dampers in ducts with pressure classes of 3-inch wg or less shall have axles full length of damper blades and bearings at both ends of operating shaft.

3. Thrust bearings at each end of every blade.

2.5 FIRE DAMPERS


1. Greenheck Fan Corporation 2. Pottorff 3. Ruskin Company



B. Type: Static; rated and labeled according to UL 555 by an NRTL.

C. Fire Rating: 1½ and 3 hours.

D. Frame: Curtain type with blades outside airstream except when located behind grille where blades may be inside airstream; fabricated with roll-formed, 0.034-inch-thick galvanized steel; with mitered and interlocking corners.

E. Mounting Sleeve: Factory- or field-installed, galvanized sheet steel.

1. Minimum Thickness: 0.138-inch-thick and of length to suit application. 2. Exception: Omit sleeve where damper-frame width permits direct attachment of

perimeter mounting angles on each side of wall or floor; thickness of damper frame must comply with sleeve requirements.

F. Mounting Orientation: Vertical or horizontal as indicated.

G. Blades: Roll-formed, interlocking, 0.024-inch-thick, galvanized sheet steel. In place of interlocking blades, use full-length, 0.034-inch-thick, galvanized-steel blade connectors.

H. Horizontal Dampers: Include blade lock and stainless-steel closure spring.

I. Heat-Responsive Device: Replaceable, 165 deg F rated, fusible links.

2.6 FLANGE CONNECTORS


1. CL WARD & Family Inc. 2. Ductmate Industries, Inc. 3. Hardcast, Inc. 4. Nexus PDQ 5. Ward Industries; a brand of Hart & Cooley, Inc.

B. Description: Add-on or roll-formed, factory-fabricated, slide-on transverse flange connectors, gaskets, and components.

C. Material: Galvanized steel.

D. Gage and Shape: Match connecting ductwork.

2.7 TURNING VANES


1. Aero-Dyne Sound Control Co. 2. CL WARD & Family Inc. 3. Ductmate Industries, Inc.



B. Manufactured Turning Vanes for Metal Ducts: Curved blades of galvanized sheet steel; support with bars perpendicular to blades set; set into vane runners suitable for duct mounting.

1. Acoustic Turning Vanes: Fabricate airfoil-shaped aluminum extrusions with perforated faces and fibrous-glass fill.

C. General Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible"; Figures 4-3, "Vanes and Vane Runners," and 4-4, "Vane Support in Elbows."

D. Vane Construction: Double wall.

2.8 DUCT-MOUNTED ACCESS DOORS


1. Aire Technologies 2. CL WARD & Family Inc. 3. Ductmate Industries, Inc.

B. Duct-Mounted Access Doors: Fabricate access panels according to SMACNA’s “HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible"; Figures 7-2, "Duct Access Doors and Panels," and 7-3, "Access Doors - Round Duct."

1. Door:

a. Double wall, rectangular. b. Galvanized sheet metal with insulation fill and thickness as indicated for duct

pressure class. c. Vision panel. d. Hinges and Latches: 1-by-1-inch butt or piano hinge and cam latches. e. Fabricate doors airtight and suitable for duct pressure class.

2. Frame: Galvanized sheet steel, with bend-over tabs and foam gaskets. 3. Number of Hinges and Locks:

a. Access Doors Less Than 12 Inches Square: No hinges and two (2) sash locks. b. Access Doors up to 18 Inches Square: Two (2) hinges and two (2) sash locks. c. Access Doors up to 24 by 48 Inches: Three (3) hinges and two (2) compression

latches with outside and inside handles. d. Access Doors Larger Than 24 by 48 Inches: Four (4) hinges and two (2)

compression latches with outside and inside handles.

2.9 DUCT ACCESS PANEL ASSEMBLIES


1. 3M 2. Ductmate Industries, Inc. 3. Flame Gard, Inc.



B. Labeled according to UL 1978 by an NRTL.

C. Panel and Frame: Minimum thickness 0.0528-inch carbon steel.

D. Fasteners: Carbon steel. Panel fasteners shall not penetrate duct wall.

E. Gasket: Comply with NFPA 96; grease-tight, high-temperature ceramic fiber, rated for minimum 2000 deg F.

F. Minimum Pressure Rating: 10-inch wg, positive or negative.

2.10 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS


1. CL WARD & Family Inc. 2. Ductmate Industries, Inc. 3. Duro Dyne Inc. 4. Elgen Manufacturing 5. Ventfabrics, Inc.

B. Materials: Flame-retardant or noncombustible fabrics.

C. Coatings and Adhesives: Comply with UL 181, Class 1.

D. Metal-Edged Connectors: Factory fabricated with a fabric strip 3½ or 5¾ inches wide attached to two (2) strips of 2¾-inch-wide, 0.028-inch-thick, galvanized sheet steel or 0.032-inch-thick aluminum sheets. Provide metal compatible with connected ducts.

E. Indoor System, Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with neoprene.

1. Minimum Weight: 26 oz./sq. yd. 2. Tensile Strength: 480 lbf/inch in the warp and 360 lbf/inch in the filling. 3. Service Temperature: Minus 40 to plus 200 deg F.

F. Outdoor System, Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with weatherproof, synthetic rubber resistant to UV rays and ozone.


G. High-Temperature System, Flexible Connectors: Glass fabric coated with silicone rubber.


H. Thrust Limits: Combination coil spring and elastomeric insert with spring and insert in compression, and with a load stop. Include rod and angle-iron brackets for attaching to fan discharge and duct.



1. Frame: Steel, fabricated for connection to threaded rods and to allow for a maximum of 30 degrees of angular rod misalignment without binding or reducing isolation efficiency.

2. Outdoor Spring Diameter: Not less than eighty percent (80%) of the compressed height of the spring at rated load.


without deformation or failure. 6. Elastomeric Element: Molded, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene. 7. Coil Spring: Factory set and field adjustable for a maximum of ¼-inch movement at start

and stop.

2.11 DUCT ACCESSORY HARDWARE

A. Instrument Test Holes: Cast iron or cast aluminum to suit duct material, including screw cap and gasket. Size to allow insertion of pitot tube and other testing instruments and of length to suit duct-insulation thickness.

B. Adhesives: High strength, quick setting, neoprene based, waterproof, and resistant to gasoline and grease.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install duct accessories according to applicable details in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for metal ducts and in NAIMA AH116, "Fibrous Glass Duct Construction Standards," for fibrous-glass ducts.

B. Install duct accessories of materials suited to duct materials; use galvanized-steel accessories in galvanized-steel and fibrous-glass ducts, stainless-steel accessories in stainless-steel ducts, and aluminum accessories in aluminum ducts.

C. Compliance with ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-2004 includes Section 6.4.3.3.3 - "Shutoff Damper Controls," restricts the use of backdraft dampers, and requires control dampers for certain applications. Install backdraft or control dampers at inlet of exhaust fans or exhaust ducts as close as possible to exhaust fan unless otherwise indicated.

D. Install volume dampers at points on supply, return, and exhaust systems where branches extend from larger ducts. Where dampers are installed in ducts having duct liner, install dampers with hat channels of same depth as liner, and terminate liner with nosing at hat channel.

1. Install steel volume dampers in steel ducts. 2. Install aluminum volume dampers in aluminum ducts.

E. Set dampers to fully open position before testing, adjusting, and balancing.

F. Install test holes at fan inlets and outlets and elsewhere as indicated.

G. Install fire dampers according to UL listing.



H. Install duct access doors on sides of ducts to allow for inspecting, adjusting, and maintaining accessories and equipment at the following locations:

1. On both sides of duct coils. 2. Upstream and downstream from duct filters. 3. At outdoor-air intakes and mixed-air plenums. 4. At drain pans and seals. 5. Downstream from manual volume dampers, control dampers, backdraft dampers, and

equipment. 6. Adjacent to and close enough to fire or smoke dampers, to reset or reinstall fusible links.

Access doors for access to fire or smoke dampers having fusible links shall be pressure relief access doors and shall be outward operation for access doors installed upstream from dampers and inward operation for access doors installed downstream from dampers.

7. At each change in direction and at maximum 50-foot spacing. 8. Upstream and downstream from turning vanes. 9. Upstream or downstream from duct silencers. 10. Control devices requiring inspection. 11. Elsewhere as indicated.

I. Install access doors with swing against duct static pressure.

J. Access Door Sizes:

1. One-Hand or Inspection Access: 8 by 5 inches. 2. Two-Hand Access: 12 by 6 inches. 3. Head and Hand Access: 18 by 10 inches. 4. Head and Shoulders Access: 21 by 14 inches. 5. Body Access: 25 by 14 inches. 6. Body plus Ladder Access: 25 by 17 inches.

K. Label access doors according to Section 230553 "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment" to indicate the purpose of access door.

L. Install flexible connectors to connect ducts to equipment.

M. For fans developing static pressures of 5-inch wg and more, cover flexible connectors with loaded vinyl sheet held in place with metal straps.

N. Connect diffusers to ducts directly or with maximum 24-inch lengths of flexible duct clamped or strapped in place.

O. Connect flexible ducts to metal ducts with liquid adhesive plus sheet metal screws and tape.

P. Install duct test holes where required for testing and balancing purposes.

Q. Install thrust limits at centerline of thrust, symmetrical on both sides of equipment. Attach thrust limits at centerline of thrust and adjust to a maximum of ¼-inch movement during start and stop of fans.




A. Tests and Inspections:

1. Operate dampers to verify full range of movement. 2. Inspect locations of access doors and verify that purpose of access door can be

performed. 3. Operate fire dampers to verify full range of movement and verify that proper heat-

response device is installed. 4. Inspect turning vanes for proper and secure installation. 5. Operate remote damper operators to verify full range of movement of operator and

damper.


FLEXIBLE DUCTS


SECTION 233346 - FLEXIBLE DUCTS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Insulated flexible ducts.



B. Shop Drawings: For flexible ducts.

1. Include plans showing locations and mounting and attachment details.


A. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which ceiling- mounted access panels and access doors required for access to duct accessories are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ASSEMBLY DESCRIPTION

A. Comply with NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems," and with NFPA 90B, "Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems."

B. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods unless otherwise indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, and other imperfections.

C. Comply with the Air Diffusion Council's "ADC Flexible Air Duct Test Code FD 72-R1."

D. Comply with ASTM E 96, "Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials."

2.2 INSULATED FLEXIBLE DUCTS


FLEXIBLE DUCTS


1. Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc. 2. JP Lamborn Co. 3. Thermaflex; a Flex-Tek Group company

B. Insulated, Flexible Duct: UL 181, Class 1, two-ply vinyl film supported by helically wound, spring-steel wire; fibrous-glass insulation; polyethylene or aluminized vapor- barrier film.

1. Pressure Rating: 10-inch wg positive and 1.0-inch wg negative. 2. Maximum Air Velocity: 4000 fpm. 3. Temperature Range: Minus 10 to plus 160 deg F. 4. Insulation R-Value: Comply with ASHRAE/IES 90.1 and minimum installed value of R

6.

C. Insulated, Flexible Duct: UL 181, Class 1, multiple layers of aluminum laminate supported by helically wound, spring-steel wire; fibrous-glass insulation; polyethylene or aluminized vapor-barrier film.


6.

D. Insulated, Flexible Duct: UL 181, Class 1, aluminum laminate and polyester film with latex adhesive supported by helically wound, spring-steel wire; fibrous-glass insulation; polyethylene or aluminized polyethylene or aluminized vapor-barrier film.


6.

2.3 FLEXIBLE DUCT CONNECTORS

A. Clamps: Stainless-steel band with cadmium-plated hex screw to tighten band with a worm-gear action in sizes 3 through 18 inches, to suit duct size.

B. Non-Clamp Connectors: Adhesive plus sheet metal screws.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install flexible ducts according to applicable details in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for metal ducts and in NAIMA AH116, "Fibrous Glass Duct Construction Standards," for fibrous-glass ducts.

B. Install in indoor applications only. Flexible ductwork should not be exposed to UV lighting.

FLEXIBLE DUCTS


C. Connect diffusers to ducts directly or with maximum 24-inch lengths of flexible duct clamped or strapped in place.

D. Connect flexible ducts to metal ducts with liquid adhesive plus tape, or adhesive plus sheet metal screws.

E. Install duct test holes where required for testing and balancing purposes.

F. Installation:

1. Install ducts fully extended. 2. Do not bend ducts across sharp corners. 3. Bends of flexible ducting shall not exceed a minimum of one duct diameter. 4. Avoid contact with metal fixtures, water lines, pipes, or conduits. 5. Install flexible ducts in a direct line, without sags, twists, or turns.

G. Supporting Flexible Ducts:

1. Suspend flexible ducts with bands 1½ inches wide or wider and spaced a maximum of 18 inches apart. Maximum centerline sag between supports shall not exceed ½-inch per 12 inches.

2. Install extra supports at bends placed approximately one duct diameter from center line of the bend.

3. Ducts may rest on ceiling joists or truss supports. Spacing between supports shall not exceed the maximum spacing per manufacturer's written installation instructions.

4. Vertically installed ducts shall be stabilized by support straps at a maximum of 72 inches o.c.


HVAC POWER VENTILATORS


SECTION 233423 - HVAC POWER VENTILATORS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Ceiling-mounted ventilators.


A. Project Altitude: Base fan-performance ratings on actual Project site elevations.

B. Operating Limits: Classify according to AMCA 99.


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories. Also include the following:

1. Certified fan performance curves with system operating conditions indicated. 2. Certified fan sound-power ratings. 3. Motor ratings and electrical characteristics, plus motor and electrical accessories. 4. Material thickness and finishes, including color charts. 5. Dampers, including housings, linkages, and operators. 6. Fan speed controllers.


1. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.

2. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring. 3. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail fabrication including anchorages and

attachments to structure and to supported equipment. Include adjustable motor bases, rails, and frames for equipment mounting.


A. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans and other details, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from Installers of the items involved:

1. Ceiling suspension assembly members.



2. Size and location of initial access modules for acoustical tile. 3. Ceiling-mounted items including light fixtures, diffusers, grilles, speakers, sprinklers,

access panels, and special moldings.



A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For power ventilators to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.



B. AMCA Compliance: Fans shall have AMCA-Certified performance ratings and shall bear the AMCA-Certified Ratings Seal.

C. UL Standards: Power ventilators shall comply with UL 705. Power ventilators for use for restaurant kitchen exhaust shall also comply with UL 762.

1.8 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of structural-steel support members.

B. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided.

C. Coordinate sizes and locations of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations with actual equipment provided.

1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Deliver fans as factory-assembled unit, to the extent allowable by shipping limitations, with protective crating and covering.

B. Disassemble and reassemble units, as required for moving to final location, according to manufacturer's written instructions.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CEILING-MOUNTED VENTILATORS


1. Greenheck Fan Corp. 2. PennBarry

B. Housing: Constructed of heavy gauge galvanized steel. Interior shall be lined with 0.5 inches of acoustical insulation.



C. Fan Wheel: Forward curve centrifugal wheels. Constructed of calcium carbonate filled polypropylene, statically and dynamically balanced in accordance to AMCA Standard 204-05.

D. Motors:

1. Motor enclosures shall be open driproof (ODP), opening in the frame body and or end brackets.

2. Motors are permanently lubricated sleeve bearing type to match with the fan load and furnished at the specific voltage and phase.

3. Motor shall be mounted on vibration isolators and be accessible for maintenance. 4. Compatible for use with speed controls. 5. Thermal overload protection.

E. Grille: Painted aluminum, louvered grille with flange on intake and thumbscrew attachment to fan housing.

F. Spring Loaded Aluminum Backdraft Damper:

1. Prevents air from entering back into the building when fan is off. 2. Eliminates rattling or unwanted backdrafts.

G. Outlet:

1. Type of Outlet: Round. 2. Duct collar shall include an aluminum backdraft damper.

H. External Electrical Access:

1. Eliminates removing the motor pack which saves time on installation.

I. Mounting Brackets:

1. Fully adjustable for multiple installation conditions.

J. Accessories:

1. Disconnect Switch. 2. Isolation: Rubber-in-shear vibration isolators. 3. Speed Controller wall cap, and transition fittings.

K. Capacities and Characteristics: See Schedule on Drawings.

2.2 MOTORS

A. Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure type, and efficiency requirements for motors.

1. Motor Sizes: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough so driven load will not require motor to operate in service factor range above 1.0.

2. Controllers, Electrical Devices, and Wiring: Comply with requirements for electrical devices and connections specified in Division 26 Sections.



B. Enclosure Type: Totally enclosed, fan cooled.


A. Certify sound-power level ratings according to AMCA 301, "Methods for Calculating Fan Sound Ratings from Laboratory Test Data." Factory test fans according to AMCA 300, "Reverberant Room Method for Sound Testing of Fans." Label fans with the AMCA-Certified Ratings Seal.

B. Certify fan performance ratings, including flow rate, pressure, power, air density, speed of rotation, and efficiency by factory tests according to AMCA 210, "Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Aerodynamic Performance Rating." Label fans with the AMCA-Certified Ratings Seal.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install power ventilators level and plumb.

B. Support units using restrained spring isolators. Devices are specified in Section 230548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment."

C. Secure roof-mounted fans to roof curbs with cadmium-plated hardware.

D. Ceiling Units: Suspend units from structure; use steel wire or metal straps.

E. Install units with clearances for service and maintenance.

F. Pipe housing drain to nearest drain or shall be provided with splashblock. Drain shall be copper.

G. Label units according to requirements specified in Section 230553 "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment."

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Duct installation and connection requirements are specified in other Division 23 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts and duct accessories. Make final duct connections with flexible connectors. Flexible connectors are specified in Section 233300 "Air Duct Accessories."

B. Install ducts adjacent to power ventilators to allow service and maintenance.

C. Ground equipment according to Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."

D. Connect wiring according to Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."







1. Verify that shipping, blocking, and bracing are removed. 2. Verify that unit is secure on mountings and supporting devices and that connections to

ducts and electrical components are complete. Verify that proper thermal-overload protection is installed in motors, starters, and disconnect switches.

3. Verify that cleaning and adjusting are complete. 4. Disconnect fan drive from motor, verify proper motor rotation direction, and verify fan

wheel free rotation and smooth bearing operation. Reconnect fan drive system, align and adjust belts, and install belt guards.

5. Adjust belt tension. 6. Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation. 7. Verify lubrication for bearings and other moving parts. 8. Verify that manual and automatic volume control and fire and smoke dampers in

connected ductwork systems are in fully open position. 9. Disable automatic temperature-control operators, energize motor, and adjust fan to

indicated rpm, and measure and record motor voltage and amperage. 10. Shut unit down and reconnect automatic temperature-control operators. 11. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.

C. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.


3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation.

B. Adjust belt tension.

C. Comply with requirements in Section 230593 "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC" for testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures.

D. Replace fan and motor pulleys as required to achieve design airflow.

E. Lubricate bearings.

3.5 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain units. Refer to Section 017900 "Demonstration and Training."




DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES


SECTION 233713 - DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Square ceiling, high performance three-cone diffusers. 2. Perforated diffusers. 3. Louver face diffusers. 4. Sidewall registers 5. Eggcrate return grilles.


1. Section 089000 "Louvers and Vents" for fixed louvers and wall vents, whether or not they are connected to ducts.

2. Section 233300 "Air Duct Accessories" for fire and smoke dampers and volume- control dampers not integral to diffusers, registers, and grilles.


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated, include the following:

1. Data Sheet: Indicate materials of construction, finish, and mounting details; and performance data including throw and drop, static-pressure drop, and noise ratings.

2. Diffuser, Register, and Grille Schedule: Indicate drawing designation, room location, quantity, model number, size, and accessories furnished.


A. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from Installers of the items involved:

1. Ceiling suspension assembly members. 2. Method of attaching hangers to building structure. 3. Size and location of initial access modules for acoustical tile. 4. Ceiling-mounted items including lighting fixtures, diffusers, grilles, speakers, sprinklers,

access panels, and special moldings. 5. Duct access panels.

B. Source quality-control reports.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SQUARE CEILING DIFFUSERS

A. Square Ceiling Diffusers: High performance three-cone diffuser.


a. Titus b. Krueger c. Price Industries

2. Material: Aluminum with steel support bar. 3. Finish: Baked anodic acrylic paint, color selected by Architect and Owner from

manufacturer’s entire range. 4. Face Style: Three-cone.

a. All cones shall be one-piece precision die-stamped.

1) The back cone shall also include an integrally drawn inlet (welded-in inlets and corner joints are not acceptable).

2) The two (2) inner cones shall be constructed as a single, removable inner cone assembly for easy installation and cleaning.

5. Mounting: Refer to Drawings. The mechanical contractor shall coordinate with the Architectural reflected ceiling plans.

6. Accessories:

a. Sectorizing baffles to restrict the discharge air in certain directions. b. Factory installed R-6 foil-backed insulation.

B. Square Ceiling Diffusers: Aluminum louvered face diffuser



2. Material: Aluminum with miscellaneous steel components. 3. Finish: Baked anodic acrylic paint, color selected by Architect and Owner from

manufacturer’s entire range. 4. These diffusers shall consist of an outer frame assembly of the sizes and mounting types

shown on the plans and outlet schedule. A square or rectangular inlet shall be an integral part of the frame assembly and a transition piece shall be available to facilitate attachment of round duct. An inner core assembly consisting of fixed deflection louvers shall be available in one-, two-, three- or four-way horizontal discharge patterns. The inner core assembly must be removable in the field without tools for easy installation, cleaning, or damper adjustment.




6. Accessories:

a. Factory installed R-6 foil-backed insulation.

2.2 SIDEWALL REGISTERS


1. Titus 2. Krueger 3. Price Industries

B. Material: Extruded Aluminum.

C. Finish: Baked enamel, white.

D. Face Blade Arrangement: Vertical spaced ¾-inch apart.

E. Core Construction: Integral.

F. Rear-Blade Arrangement: Horizontal spaced ¾-inch apart.

G. Frame: 1-inch-wide.

H. Mounting: Countersunk screw.

2.3 RETURN GRILLES

A. Eggcrate Ceiling Return Grille:



2. Finish: Baked anodic acrylic paint, color selected by Architect and Owner from manufacturer’s entire range.

3. Face Style:

a. Aluminum Grid: ½-x-½-x-½-inch providing free area of at least ninety percent (90%).





A. Verification of Performance: Rate diffusers, registers, and grilles according to ASHRAE 70, "Method of Testing for Rating the Performance of Air Outlets and Inlets."

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas where diffusers, registers, and grilles are to be installed for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of equipment.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install diffusers, registers, and grilles level and plumb.

B. Ceiling-Mounted Outlets and Inlets: Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts, fittings, and accessories. Air outlet and inlet locations have been indicated to achieve design requirements for air volume, noise criteria, airflow pattern, throw, and pressure drop. Make final locations where indicated, as much as practical. For units installed in lay-in ceiling panels, locate units in the center of panel. Where architectural features or other items conflict with installation, notify Architect for a determination of final location.

C. Install diffusers, registers, and grilles with airtight connections to ducts and to allow service and maintenance of dampers, air extractors, and fire dampers.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. After installation, adjust diffusers, registers, and grilles to air patterns indicated, or as directed, before starting air balancing.


AIR-TO-AIR ENERGY RECOVERY EQUIPMENT


SECTION 237200 - AIR-TO-AIR ENERGY RECOVERY EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. The fresh air ventilation system(s) shall utilize the Trane/Mitsubishi LOSSNAY total heat exchanger with outside air bypass damper and energy recovery ventilation. These units shall be selected in accordance with the building ventilation requirements.

B. The Lossnay ERV equipment will supply ventilation air to Dispatch.

C. The Lossnay® ERV shall be equipped with a dedicated remote programmable controller capable of manual ON/OFF control of the ERV unit.


A. Delegated Design: Design vibration isolation and seismic-restraint details, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated.


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories.

B. Shop Drawings: For air-to-air energy recovery equipment. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

1. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.


C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For air-to-air energy recovery equipment indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

1. Detail fabrication and assembly of air-to-air energy recovery equipment. 2. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail fabrication including anchorages and attachments

to structure and to supported equipment. Include adjustable motor bases, rails, and frames for equipment mounting.

3. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting vibration isolators and seismic restraints and for designing vibration isolation bases.




A. Coordination Drawings: Plans, elevations, and other details, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from Installers of the items involved:

1. Suspended ceiling components. 2. Structural members to which equipment or suspension systems will be attached.

B. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For air-to-air energy recovery equipment, accessories, and components, from manufacturer.






A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For air-to-air energy recovery equipment to include in maintenance manuals.



1. Filters: One (1) set of each type of filter specified.



B. ARI Compliance:

1. Capacity ratings for air-to-air energy recovery equipment shall comply with ARI 1060, "Performance Rating of Air-to-Air Heat Exchangers for Energy Recovery Ventilation Equipment."

2. Capacity ratings for air coils shall comply with ARI 410, "Forced-Circulation Air- Cooling and Air-Heating Coils."

C. ASHRAE Compliance:

1. Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 5 - "Systems and Equipment" and Section 7 - "Construction and Startup."



2. Capacity ratings for air-to-air energy recovery equipment shall comply with ASHRAE 84, "Method of Testing Air-to-Air Heat Exchangers."

D. UL Compliance:

1. Packaged heat recovery ventilators shall comply with requirements in UL 1812, "Ducted Heat Recovery Ventilators"; or UL 1815, "Non-Ducted Heat Recovery Ventilators."

2. Electric coils shall comply with requirements in UL 1995, "Heating and Cooling Equipment."

1.9 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of air-to-air energy recovery equipment and suspension system with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire-suppression system, and partition assemblies.

1.10 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of air-to-air energy recovery equipment that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period for Packaged Energy Recovery Units: Two (2) years.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PACKAGED ENERGY RECOVERY UNITS

A. General

1. The ERV unit shall be factory assembled, wired, and run tested. Contained within the unit shall be all factory wiring, control circuit board, and blowers with motors, filters, and insulated foam air guides. The unit shall have factory installed inlet air thermistors, control board with functions for local, remote, and optional control modes.

B. Unit Cabinet:

1. The cabinet shall be fabricated of galvanized steel and covered with polyurethane foam insulation as necessary with steel mounting points securely attached.

C. Blowers:

1. The unit shall be furnished with direct drive centrifugal blowers running simultaneously supplying and extracting air at the same rate for balanced ventilation air flow.

2. The blower motors shall be directly connected to the blower wheels and have permanently lubricated bearings.

D. Heat Exchanger



1. The enthalpic heat exchanger element shall be constructed of specially treated cellulous fiber membrane separated by corrugated layers to allow total heat (sensible and latent) energy recovery from the exhaust air to the supply air or from the supply air to the exhaust air as determined by design conditions.

2. Basis-of-Design heat exchanger does not require condensate drain. Contractor responsible for all additional costs relating to alternate brands which may require condensate drain connection.

E. Bypass Damper

1. The ERV shall have an automatic supply side by-pass damper to allow inbound ventilation air to by-pass the heat exchanger element when factory-installed thermistors measure outside ambient temperature being at least 7 degrees cooler than air returned from interlocked indoor units running in cooling mode.

2. The mechanism for opening and closing the bypass damper shall be a 208V-230V synchronous electric motor through an actuator. The motor will drive a steel cable connected to a mechanical damper flap to allow fresh air to bypass the element.

F. Filter:

1. The ERV shall be equipped with factory installed, washable air filters located at each intake face (both supply and exhaust sides) of the heat exchanger element to clean the air and prevent clogging.

G. Electrical:

1. The units will require a 208-230Volt, 1 Phase, 60Hz power supply.

H. Control:

1. ERV shall be capable of interlocked control with other systems by manufacturer. Communication must include MODE of interlocked indoor unit to allow benefit of proper operation of bypass damper

2. ERV control board shall allow independent control by contact closure from third-party sensor-driven controllers, switches, or timers.

I. Performance:

1. The ERV units shall have the following nominal capacities:

Model Size (CFM) Nominal Airflow External Static Capacity (In. WG)

at Nominal Airflow 300 300 CFM 0.46 470 470 CFM 0.60 600 600 CFM 0.66 1200 1200 CFM 0.59



2. The temperature recovery efficiency at extra low fan speed will be as follows:

Model Size (CFM) Temperature Recovery Enthalpic Recovery Heating Cooling 300 83% 81.5% 65% 470 84.5% 83% 72% 600 81% 80% 71% 1200 81% 80% 71%

3. ERV performance must be certified to ARI Standard 1060. 4. ERV operating sound level shall not exceed 41 dB(A) as measured 59 inches under

center of unit at maximum fan speed.

J. Preheater (For Winter Design Temperature Less than 14°F):

1. A suitable pre-heater shall be supplied and installed to pre-heat and maintain the air entering the ERV to above 14°F; heater size shall be based on scheduled CFM and heating (winter) design condition. See schedule for preheater capacity.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Examine casing insulation materials and filter media before air-to-air energy recovery equipment installation. Reject insulation materials and filter media that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged.

C. Examine roughing-in for electrical services to verify actual locations of connections before installation.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install units with clearances for service and maintenance.

B. Install new filters at completion of equipment installation and before testing, adjusting, and balancing.

3.3 DUCTWORK

A. The installer shall supply, install, test and commission all interconnecting ductwork for the Lossnay® ERV units.

1. Ductwork sizing, layout, fittings, etc. shall be in strict accordance with the design requirements.



2. The outdoor air and exhaust air ducts must be covered with insulation in order to prevent condensation from forming.

3. The outdoor air and exhaust ducts must be tilted at a gradient (1/30 or more) down toward the outdoor area from Lossnay® unit.

B. Suspended Units: Suspend units from structural-steel support frame using threaded steel rods and spring hangers. Comply with requirements for vibration isolation devices specified in Section 230548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC."

C. Install units with clearances for service and maintenance.

D. Install new filters at completion of equipment installation and before testing, adjusting, and balancing.





1. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation.

2. Adjust seals and purge. 3. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and

equipment. 4. Set initial temperature and humidity set points. 5. Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges as indicated.

C. Air-to-air energy recovery equipment will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.


3.5 DEMONSTRATION

A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain air-to-air energy recovery units.


COMPUTER-ROOM AIR-CONDITIONERS, CEILING-MOUNTED UNITS


SECTION 238123.13 - COMPUTER-ROOM AIR-CONDITIONERS, CEILING-MOUNTED UNITS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. These specifications describe requirements for a ceiling-mounted Thermal Management system. The system shall be designed to control temperature conditions in rooms containing electronic equipment, with good insulation and vapor barrier. The system has humidity control package.

B. The manufacturer shall design and furnish all equipment in the quantities and configurations shown on the project drawings.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. COP: Coefficient of performance.

B. EER: Energy efficiency ratio.

C. SCR: Silicon-controlled rectifier.



1. Include material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for computer-room air-conditioning units.


B. Shop Drawings: For computer-room air conditioners.

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details. 2. Include details of equipment assemblies. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads,

required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.





A. Coordination Drawings: Plans, elevations, and other details, drawn to scale, using input from installers of the items involved.

B. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For computer-room air conditioners, accessories, and components, from manufacturer.





D. Sample Warranty: For special warranty.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For computer-room air conditioners to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.



1. Filters: One set of filters for each unit.


A. The specified system shall be factory-tested before shipment. Testing shall include, but shall not be limited to: Quality Control Checks, “Hi-Pot” Test (two times rated voltage plus 1000 volts, per NRTL agency requirements), and Metering Calibration Tests. The system shall be designed and manufactured according to world-class quality standards. The manufacturer shall be ISO 9001 certified.

1.9 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of computer-room air conditioners that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: a. 1st Year Parts and Labor Warranty with cooling control optimization b. 2nd Through 5th Year Compressor Warranty c. Warranty Inspection/Start-up



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Liebert, a brand of Vertiv

B. Other manufacturer shall be permitted with prior approval only. Contractor to submit a detailed summary form listing all variations to include size deviations, electrical load differences, functional and component changes and savings to end user.


A. Seismic Performance: Computer-room air-conditioners, ceiling-mounted units shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.

1. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the unit will be fully operational after the seismic event."

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

C. ASHRAE Compliance:

1. Fabricate and label refrigeration system to comply with ASHRAE 15, "Safety Standard for Refrigeration Systems."

2. ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 4 - "Outdoor Air Quality," Section 5 - "Systems and Equipment," Section 6 - "Ventilation Rate Procedures," and Section 7 - "Construction and Startup."

D. ASHRAE/IES Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IES 90.1.

2.3 INDOOR UNIT STANDARD FEATURES

A. Evaporator Cabinet Construction 1. Constructed of heavy gauge galvanized steel for strength and corrosion resistance

with thermal/acoustical insulation to reduce sound levels and prevent condensation. Removable panels allow access to the electric panel or refrigeration components for service or maintenance. Hanging brackets are integral to the chassis with vibration isolators and hardware provided for field-supplied 3/8" threaded suspension rods.

B. Unit Controls, Protections and Communication Terminals 1. The Liebert Mini-Mate shall include Liebert iCOM control with remote 9” color

touchscreen display, a filter clog switch, common alarm contact and remote shutdown contacts. Filter clog switch shall be adjustable outside the cabinet and shall activate an iCOM alarm when the pressure drop across the filters exceed the customer-adjustable level. Common Alarm Contact shall be one set of normally open contacts which shall close for remote indication of alarms. Remote Shutdown Contact shall enable unit shutdown based on external input.



C. Air Distribution 1. The fan shall be plug/plenum type, with motorized impeller, single inlet and

dynamically balanced. The drive package shall be direct drive, electronically commutated (EC) and variable speed. The fan speed shall be automatically regulated by the Liebert iCOM control through all modes of operation. The fans shall be located to draw air over the coil to ensure even air distribution and maximum coil performance.

2. System shall be suitable for ducted supply and return air distribution or bottom-supply grille and ducted-return air distribution. Supply air location shall be field selectable, configured in one of three outlet locations: back of cabinet, right side, or bottom of cabinet.

D. Evaporator Coil 1. Constructed of rifled copper tubes in a staggered tube pattern. Tubes are expanded

into continuous high efficiency aluminum lance type fins. Coil is set in condensate drain pan, with float switch for unit shutdown. The evaporator drain is internally trapped.

E. Refrigeration System 1. Single refrigeration circuit, includes a liquid line filter drier, externally equalized

expansion valve, and a suction pressure transducer. The module is pre-charged with nitrogen and sealed. R-410A refrigerant must be field supplied and field charged by others.

F. Fan Assembly 1. Fan is plug type, with integral direct drive with backward curved blades and

Electronically Commutated (EC) motor. The fan speed shall be variable and automatically regulated by the Liebert iCOM® control through all modes of operation. The impeller shall be made of aluminum and is dynamically balanced. The fan shall be located to draw air through the coil to ensure even air distribution and maximum coil performance.

2.4 CONTROL SYSTEM

A. Liebert iCOM® Control, System 1. The Liebert iCOM® controls the variable capacity Liebert Mini-Mate and enables

Unit-to-Unit communication with other variable capacity Mini-Mate units. One (1) IntelliSlot communication card housing is standard and accessible from outside the unit.

2. Touch Screen Display. The standard user interface is a remote wall mountable 9-inch color touch screen which presents system information and allows all parameters to be viewed and adjusted. It comes in a plastic housing for mounting on the wall and is shipped loose with the unit.

3. Sensor a. Temperature and Humidity sensors are mounted in an attractive case with 30 ft.

(9m) of cable, shipped–loose and ready to be field-mounted on the room wall or in unit return air stream and field-wired to the Liebert iCOM® Control board.

4. Filter clog indicator 5. Common Alarm Contact



2.5 OUTDOOR AIR COOLED PROP FAN CONDENSING UNIT

A. The condensing unit shall be designed for outdoor use with either roof or ground level mounting. The condensing unit is constructed of galvanized and galvanneal painted steel for corrosion resistance. Removable exterior panels shall allow access to the electric panel or refrigeration components for service or maintenance. Both inlet and outlet air grilles shall be heavy duty steel with a durable polyester coating.

B. Condensing unit components shall include a condenser coil, a direct-drive propeller-type fan, a variable capacity Digital scroll compressor, high pressure switch, high compressor discharge temperature switch, Liebert® Lee-Temp™ insulated receiver with internal heater and head pressure control valve, and liquid line solenoid valve. The condensing coil shall be constructed of copper tubes and aluminum fins.

C. High head-pressure switch shall protect the unit from abnormal refrigerant pressure conditions. Switch and sensor inputs shall be integrated with Liebert iCOM for compressor protection while maintaining system and evaporator blower operation, displaying alarms at the wall display and providing system shutdown when required.

D. A pressure balancing valve shall be factory installed to reduce the chance of opening the high-pressure relief valve due to excessive refrigerant migration to the receiver due to changing outdoor temperatures during off-cycles.

E. All components shall be factory-assembled, charged with nitrogen and sealed. System shall be field-charged with field supplied R-410A refrigerant. No internal piping, brazing, or dehydration shall be required. Condensing unit shall be designed for 105°F ambient and shall be capable of starting and continuous operation down to -30°F .

F. The condensing unit shall be designed to operate at a sound level less than 58 dBA .

G. Digital Scroll High Temperature Protection 1. The control shall monitor digital scroll temperature during unit operation. A

compressor temperature limit shall be imposed to help prevent damage to the compressor. If the temperature reaches the maximum temperature limit, the compressor shall be locked out and an alarm shall be annunciated on the local display and through remote monitoring. After the initial lockout, the control shall continue to monitor compressor temperature during the off cycle and shall re-enable the circuit once a safe operating temperature is reached (minimum 30-minute lockout). After five high discharge temperature alarms within a rolling 4-hour period the control shall lock out the compressor until power is cycled to the evaporator unit.

H. Digital Scroll Sensor Failure 1. The control shall monitor the status of the digital scroll sensor(s). If the control

senses the thermistor becomes disconnected, shorted or the reading goes out of range, the user will be notified through an event on the local display and remote monitoring.



2.6 FACTORY-INSTALLED

A. Steam Generating Humidifier 1. The Thermal Management system shall be equipped with a steam generating

humidifier that is controlled by the microprocessor control system. It shall be complete with disposable canister, all supply and drain valves, 1" (25.4mm) air gap on fill line, inlet strainer, steam distributor and electronic controls. The need to change canister shall be annunciated on the wall-mounted controller. An LED light on the humidifier assembly shall indicate cylinder full, overcurrent detection, fill system fault and end of cylinder life conditions. The canister flush water shall not drain into the coil drain pan, due to risk of aggressive corrosion of the evaporator coil. The humidifier wand shall be mounted over the coil drain pan.

B. Smoke Sensor 1. Smoke Sensor samples the return air, shuts down the unit upon detection, and sends

visual and audible alarm. This smoke sensor is not intended to function as or replace any room smoke detection system that may be required by local or national codes. Smoke sensor trouble connections are available for external monitoring.

C. Disconnect Switch, Non-locking 1. The non-automatic, non-locking, molded case circuit breaker shall be factory-

mounted in the high voltage section of the electrical panel. The switch handle shall be accessible from the front of the indoor unit.

D. High-Temperature Sensor 1. The high temperature sensor shall immediately shut down the system when high

temperatures are detected. The high temperature sensor shall be mounted with the sensing element in the return air.

2.7 SHIP-LOOSE ACCESSORIES

A. Air Filter Box/Duct Flange. 1. The evaporator section shall be supplied with an optional air filter box kit for use

with ducted installations. Two (2) filters shall be included 4" x 20" x 20" each, pleated type, with a MERV 8 rating, based on ASHRAE 52.2-2007. A duct flange shall be supplied for use on the supply air opening of the unit.

B. Condensate Pump 1. The condensate pump shall be complete with integral float switch, pump, motor

assembly, discharge check valve, duct/wall mountable bracket and reservoir. A secondary float switch shall be provided to send an alarm upon a high water level condition.

C. Condensate Pump Bracket. 1. A condensate pump bracket shall be provided to mount condensate pump directly to

the end of the unit, allowing for easier installation and alignment of the condensate pump.

D. Liebert LIQUI-TECT™ 410 Point Leak-detection Sensor



1. A solid-state water sensor with no moving parts and hermetically sealed to keep out dust and dirt shall be provided.

2. The Liebert Liqui-tect 410 (LT410) shall provide a single-point detection of leaks. The point detection sensor shall have two gold-plated sensing probes to prevent corrosion resistance and to provide accurate readings.

3. The LT410 shall constantly monitor points for leaks, internal faults, and power failures and warn of any abnormal conditions. Mounting brackets shall allow for sensor height adjustment and leveling.

4. The LT410 shall provide two independent outputs to signal both a local alarm panel and a remote external equipment

5. The LT410 shall be rated for 24VAC, 50/60Hz and 0.10 amps. Liqui-tect sensor shall be field mounted and field wired to both monitoring contacts and 24VAC supply power.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION


B. Examine roughing-in for piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections before equipment installation.

C. Examine walls, floors, and above ceiling for suitable conditions where computer-room air conditioners will be installed.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install air conditioning unit in accordance with manufacturer’s installation instructions. Install unit plumb and level, firmly anchored to support the unit’s weight in location indicated and maintain manufacturer’s recommended clearances. Do not mount units above sensitive electronic equipment to minimize risk of water overflow/leakage damage and improve maintenance/service access.

B. Suspended Computer-Room Air Conditioners: Install using continuous-thread hanger rods and spring hangers with vertical-limit stop of size required to support weight of computer-room air conditioner.

C. Comply with requirements for vibration isolation devices specified in Section 230548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC." Fabricate brackets or supports as required.

D. Comply with requirements for hangers and supports specified in Section 230529 "Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment."



E. Field-Supplied Pan 1. A field-supplied pan with drain shall be installed beneath cooling units.

3.3 ELECTRICAL WIRING

A. Install and connect electrical devices furnished by manufacturer but not specified to be factory-mounted. Furnish copy of manufacturer’s electrical connection diagram submittal to electrical contractor.

3.4 CONNECTIONS

A. Coordinate piping installations and specialty arrangements with Drawings and with requirements specified in piping systems.

B. Where installing piping adjacent to computer-room air conditioners, allow space for service and maintenance.

C. Piping Connections 1. Install and connect devices furnished by manufacturer but not specified to be

factory-mounted. 2. Furnish copy of manufacturer’s piping connection diagram submittal to piping

contractor. 3. Supply and Drain Water Piping 4. Connect water supply and drains to air conditioning unit. Unit drain shall be trapped

internally and shall not be trapped externally. Refer to division 22 for more information

D. Refrigerant Piping: Comply with applicable requirements in Section 232300 "Refrigerant Piping." Provide shutoff valves and piping.

3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL /STARTUP SERVICE

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service.

B. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions.

C. Test controls and demonstrate compliance with requirements.


3.6 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain computer-room air conditioners.



PART 4 - SEQUENCE OF OPERATION

4.1 LIEBERT ICOM® CONTROL METHODS AND OPTIONS

A. The Liebert iCOM shall be factory-set to allow precise monitoring and control of the condition of the air entering and leaving the unit. This control shall include predictive methods to control air flow and cooling capacity based control sensors installed. Proportional and Tunable PID shall also be user-selectable options.

B. Controlling Sensor Options 1. The Liebert iCOM shall be flexible in the sense that it shall allow controlling the

capacity and fan from multiple different sensor selections. The sensor selections shall be:

a. Cooling Capacity 1) Remote 2) Return

b. Fan Speed 1) Remote 2) Return 3) Manual (for diagnostics or to receive a signal from the BMS through Liebert

remote monitoring devices or analog input)

C. Temperature Compensation 1. The Liebert iCOM shall have the ability to adjust the capacity output based on

return temperature conditions to meet SLA guidelines while operating to highest efficiency.

D. Humidity Control 1. Dew point and relative humidity control methods shall be available (based on user

preference) for humidity control within the space.

4.2 MULTI-UNIT COORDINATION

A. Liebert iCOM teamwork shall save energy by preventing multiple units in an area from operating in opposing modes. Teamwork allows the control to optimize a group of connected units equipped with Liebert iCOM using the U2U (Unit-to-Unit) network. Field wiring shall be required between units’ iCOM-display modules. There shall be two modes of teamwork operation:

1. Teamwork Mode 1 (Parallel): Is best in small rooms with balanced heat loads. The controlling temperature and humidity sensor readings of all units in operation (fan On) are collected to be used for an average or worst case sensor reading (user selectable). The master unit shall send the operating requirements to all operating units in the group. The control band (temperature, fan and humidity) is divided and shared among the units in the group. Each unit will receive instructions on how to operate from the Master unit based on how far the system deviates from the setpoints. Evaporator fans and cooling capacity are ramped in parallel.

2. Teamwork Mode 2: The Liebert iCOM calculates the worse-case demand for heating, cooling humidification and dehumidification. Based on the greatest demand within the group, each unit operates independently, meaning that the unit



may respond to the thermal load and humidity conditions based on the units controlling sensors.

4.3 STANDBY/LEAD-LAG

A. The Liebert iCOM shall allow planned rotation to keep equal run time on units and provide automated emergency rotation of operating and standby units.

4.4 STANDBY UNIT CASCADING

A. The Liebert iCOM cascade option shall allow the units to turn On and Off based on heat load when utilizing Teamwork Mode 1-Parallel, and remote temperature sensors. Cascade mode shall coordinate the fan speed dynamically to save energy and to meet cooling demands. As the heat load increases, the Liebert iCOM shall automatically respond to the new load and bring on another unit. As the heat load shifts up or down, the control shall meet the needs by cascading units On or putting them back into standby.

4.5 ALARMS

A. All unit alarms shall be annunciated through both audio and visual cues, clearly displayed on the screen, automatically recorded in the event log and communicated (4- and 5-ton require optional Communication Card) to the customer’s Building Management System/Building Automation System. The Liebert iCOM shall activate an audible and visual alarm in the event of any of the following conditions:

1. High Temperature 2. Low Temperature 3. High Humidity 4. Low Humidity 5. EC Fan Fault 6. Change Filters 7. Loos of Air Flow 8. Loss of power 9. Humidifier problem 10. High Water (Drain Pan) 11. High Head Pressure 12. High Discharge Temperature (Compressor) 13. Low Suction Pressure 14. Custom Alarm a. Smoke Alarm b. Standby Unit On


VARIABLE-REFRIGERANT-FLOW HVAC SYSTEMS


PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes New VRF System for Dispatch 120 redundant HVAC System 1. Complete VRF HVAC system including, but not limited to, delegated design and the

following components to make a complete operating system(s) according to requirements indicated: a. Indoor, recessed, ceiling-mounted units. b. Outdoor, air source high efficiency heat pump unit. c. System controls and software. d. System refrigerant and oil. e. System refrigerant piping. f. Refrigerant isolation valves

B. Section includes additional component for Existing VRF System 1. Complete VRF HVAC system including, but not limited to, delegated design and the

following components added to the existing system to make a complete operating system according to the requirements indicated: a. Indoor, recessed, ceiling-mounted units. b. Heat recovery unit. c. System refrigerant and oil. d. System refrigerant piping. e. Refrigerant isolation valves f. Existing system start up and recommissioning.

C. RELATED DOCUMENTS

1. Section 230529 “ Hangers and Supports for HVAC piping and Equipment” 2. Section 230548 “ Vibration and Seismic Controls or HVAC” 3. Section 230719 “ HVAC Piping Insulation” for insulation requirements. 4. Section 232300 "Refrigerant Piping" for system piping requirements. 5. Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables" for wiring

connections. 6. Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems" for grounding

connections. 7. Division 22 Sections for Condensate drain piping.

1.3 DEFINITIONS



A. Heat-Pump System Operation: System capable of operation with all zones in either heating or cooling, but not with simultaneous heating and cooling zones that transfer heat between zones.

B. Heat Recovery Heat Pump System Operation: System capable of operation with simultaneous heating and cooling zones that transfer heat between zones.

C. HRU: Heat Recovery Unit. HRUs are used in heat recovery VRF HVAC systems to manage and control refrigerant between indoor units to provide simultaneous heating and cooling zones.

D. Low Voltage: As defined in NFPA 70 for circuits and equipment operating at less than 50 V or for remote-control, signaling power-limited circuits.

E. Three-Pipe System Design: One high pressure refrigerant vapor line, one low pressure refrigerant vapor line, and one refrigerant liquid line connect a single outdoor unit or multiple manifold outdoor units in a single system to associated system HRCUs. One liquid line and refrigerant vapor line connect HRCUs to associated indoor units.

F. Two-Pipe System Design: One refrigerant vapor line and one refrigerant liquid line connect a single outdoor unit or multiple manifold outdoor units in a single system to associated system HRCUs. One refrigerant liquid line and refrigerant vapor line connect HRCUs to associated indoor units. HRCUs used in two pipe systems act as an intermediate heat exchanger and include diverting valves and gas/liquid separators to move high- and low-pressure refrigerant between indoor units.

G. VRF: Variable refrigerant flow.



1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for indoor and outdoor units and for HRCUs.


3. Include operating performance at design conditions and at extreme maximum and minimum outdoor ambient conditions.

4. Include description of system controllers, dimensions, features, control interfaces and connections, power requirements, and connections.

5. Include system operating sequence of operation in narrative form for each unique indoor- and outdoor-unit and HRCU control.

6. Include description of control software features. 7. Include total refrigerant required and a comprehensive breakdown of refrigerant required

by each system installed with supporting calculations. 8. Include refrigerant type and data sheets showing compliance with requirements indicated. 9. Indicate location and type of service access.

B. Shop Drawings: For VRF HVAC systems.

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and mounting details.



2. Include details of equipment assemblies. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.

3. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail fabrication including anchorages and attachments to structure and to supported equipment. Include adjustable motor bases, rails, and frames for equipment mounting.

4. Include diagrams and details of refrigerant piping and tubing showing installation requirements for manufacturer-furnished divided flow fittings.


C. Delegated-Design Submittals:

1. Include design calculations for selecting vibration isolators and seismic restraints and for designing vibration isolation bases.

2. Include design calculations with corresponding diagram of refrigerant piping and tubing sizing for each system installed.

3. Include design calculations with corresponding floor plans indicating that refrigerant concentration limits are within allowable limits of ASHRAE 15 and governing codes.

4. Include calculations showing that system travel distance for refrigerant piping and controls cabling are within horizontal and vertical travel distances set by manufacturer. Provide a comparison table for each system installed.


A. Coordination Drawings: Plans, elevations, sections, and details, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved:

1. Suspended ceiling components. 2. Structural floors, roofs and associated members to which equipment, piping, ductwork,

cables, and conduit will be attached. 3. Size and location of initial access modules for acoustical tile. 4. Wall-mounted controllers located in finished space showing relationship to light

switches, fire-alarm devices, and other installed devices. 5. Size and location of access doors and panels installed behind walls and inaccessible

ceilings for products installed behind walls and requiring access. 6. Items penetrating finished ceiling including the following:

a. Luminaires. b. Air outlets and inlets. c. Speakers. d. Sprinklers. e. Service access panels.

B. Qualification Data:

1. For Installer: Certificate from VRF HVAC system manufacturer certifying that Installer has successfully completed prerequisite training administered by manufacturer for proper installation of systems, including but not limited to, equipment, piping, controls, and accessories indicated and furnished for installation.

2. For VRF HVAC system manufacturer.



3. For VRF HVAC system provider.

C. Seismic Qualification Data: Certificates, for equipment, accessories, and components, from manufacturer.




D. Product Certificates: For each type of product.

E. Product Test Reports: Where tests are required, for each product, for tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency or a qualified testing agency.

F. Source quality-control reports.

G. Field quality-control reports.

H. Sample Warranties: For manufacturer's warranties.

1. Provide Manufacturer’s extended Warrantee for Contractor Certified installation.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For VRF HVAC systems to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

B. Software and Firmware Operational Documentation:

1. Software operating and upgrade manuals. 2. Program Software Backup: On CD or DVD, USB media, or approved cloud storage

platform, complete with data files. 3. Device address list. 4. Printout of software application and graphic screens.



B. Filters:

1. One set for each unit with replaceable filters. 2. One set for each unit type and unique size of washable filters.




A. The units shall be listed by Electrical Testing Laboratories (ETL) and bear the ETL label.

B. All wiring shall be in accordance with the National Electrical Code (N.E.C.).

C. The units shall be manufactured in a facility registered to ISO 9001 and ISO14001 which is a set of standards applying to environmental protection set by the International Standard Organization (ISO).

D. All units must meet or exceed the 2010 Federal minimum efficiency requirements and the ASHRAE 90.1 efficiency requirements for VRF systems. Efficiency shall be published in accordance with the Air-Conditioning, Heating, and Refrigeration Institute (AHRI) Standard 1230.

E. System start-up supervision shall be a required service to be completed by the manufacturer or a duly authorized, competent representative that has been factory trained in system configuration and operation. The representative shall provide proof of manufacturer certification indicating successful completion within no more than two (2) years prior to system installation. This certification shall be included as part of the equipment and/or controls submittals.

F. Manufacturer shall have a minimum of fifteen (15) years continuous experience providing VRF systems in the U.S. market.

G. All manufacturer technical and service manuals must be readily available for download by any local contractor should emergency service be required.

H. The VRF system shall be installed by a contractor with extensive VRF installation and service training. The mandatory contractor service and install training should be performed by the manufacturer. The installing contractor must be certified by the manufacturer for proper installation of systems.


A. Deliver and store products in a clean and dry place.

B. Comply with manufacturer's written rigging and installation instructions for unloading and moving to final installed location.

C. Handle products carefully to prevent damage, breaking, denting, and scoring. Do not install damaged products.

D. Unit shall be stored and handled according to the manufacturer’s recommendations.

E. Protect products from weather, dirt, dust, water, construction debris, and physical damage.

1. Retain factory-applied coverings on equipment to protect finishes during construction and remove just prior to operating unit.

2. Cover unit openings before installation to prevent dirt and dust from entering inside of units. If required to remover coverings during unit installation, reapply coverings over openings after unit installation and remove just prior to operating unit.



F. Replace installed products damaged during construction.

G. A full charge of R-410A for the condensing unit only shall be provided in the condensing unit for shipping from the factory.

1.10 WARRANTY

A. The VRF units shall be covered by the manufacturer’s limited warranty for a period of one (1) year parts and seven (7) year compressor to the original owner from date of installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified specialist, as defined in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements," to design complete and operational VRF HVAC system(s) complying with requirements indicated. 1. Provide system refrigerant calculations. 2. Refrigerant concentration limits shall be within allowable limits of ASHRAE 15 and

governing codes. 3. Indicate compliance with manufacturer's maximum vertical and horizontal travel

distances. Prepare a comparison table for each system showing calculated distances compared to manufacturer's maximum allowed distances.

4. Include a mechanical ventilation system and gas detection system as required to comply with ASHRAE 15 and governing codes.

5. System Refrigerant Piping and Tubing: a. Arrangement: Arrange piping to interconnect indoor units, HRCUs, and outdoor

unit(s) in compliance with manufacturer requirements and requirements indicated. b. Routing: Conceal piping above ceilings and behind walls to maximum extent

possible. c. Sizing: Size piping system, using a software program acceptable to manufacturer,

to provide performance requirements indicated.

B. Service Access: 1. Provide and document service access requirements. 2. Locate equipment, system isolation valves, and other system components that require

service and inspection in easily accessible locations. Avoid locations that are difficult to access if possible.

3. Where serviceable components are installed behind walls and above inaccessible ceilings, provide finished assembly with access doors or panels to gain access. Properly size the openings to allow for service, removal, and replacement.

4. If less than full and unrestricted access is provided, locate components within an 18-inch reach of the finished assembly.

5. Where ladder access is required to service elevated components, provide an installation that provides for sufficient access within ladder manufacturer's written instructions for use.

6. Comply with OSHA regulations.



C. System Design and Installation Requirements: 1. Design and install systems indicated according to manufacturer's recommendations and

written instructions. 2. Where manufacturer's requirements differ from requirements indicated, contact Architect

for direction. The most stringent requirements should apply unless otherwise directed in writing by Architect.

D. Isolation of Equipment: Provide isolation valves to isolate each indoor unit and outdoor unit for service, removal, and replacement without interrupting system operation.

E. System Capacity Ratio: The sum of connected capacity of all indoor units shall be within the following range of outdoor-unit rated capacity: 1. Range acceptable to manufacturer.

F. System Auto Refrigerant Charge: Each system shall have an automatic refrigerant charge function to ensure the proper amount of refrigerant is installed in system.

G. Outdoor Conditions: 1. Suitable for outdoor ambient conditions encountered. 2. Design equipment and supports to withstand wind loads of governing code and

ASCE/SEI 7. 3. Design equipment and supports to withstand snow and ice loads of governing code and

ASCE/SEI 7. 4. Provide corrosion-resistant coating for components and supports where located in coastal

or industrial climates that are known to be harmful to materials and finishes

H. Seismic Performance: VRF HVAC system(s) shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to governing code and ASCE/SEI 7. 1. The term "withstand" means "the system will remain in place without separation of any

parts when subjected to the seismic forces specified."

I. Sound Performance: Sound levels generated by operating HVAC equipment shall be within requirements indicated. 1. Indoor: Within requirements of governing authorities, Equal to or less than the sound

levels of the basis-of-design system components. 2. Outdoor: Within ordinance of governing authorities, and equal to or less than the sound

levels of the basis-of-design system

J. Thermal Movements: Allow for controlled thermal movements from ambient, surface, and system temperature changes.

K. Capacities and Characteristics: As indicated on Drawings.

2.2 NEW VRF SYSTEM : VRF-2

A. Per the equipment schedule, the variable capacity, heat pump air conditioning system basis of design is Trane CITY MULTI VRF (Variable Refrigerant Flow) zoning system(s).

B. Acceptable alternative manufacturers, assuming compliance with these equipment specifications, are Daikin and Panasonic. Contractor bidding an alternate manufacturer does so



with full knowledge that that manufactures product may not be acceptable or approved and that contractor is responsible for all specified items and intents of this document without further compensation

C. Outdoor Unit: Y-SERIES (HEAT/COOL MODEL) 1. General:

a. The outdoor unit modules shall be air-cooled, direct expansion (DX), multi-zone units used specifically with VRF components described in this section. The outdoor unit modules shall be equipped with a single compressor which is inverter-driven and multiple circuit boards—all of which must be manufactured by the branded VRF manufacturer. Each outdoor unit module shall be completely factory assembled, piped and wired and run tested at the factory.

b. Outdoor unit systems may be comprised of multiple modules with differing capacity if a brand other than basis of design is proposed. All units requiring a factory supplied twinning kits shall be piped together in the field, without the need for equalizing line(s). If an alternate manufacturer is selected, any additional material, cost, and labor to install additional lines shall be incurred by the contractor. Contractor responsible for ensuring alternative brand compatibility in terms of availability, physical dimensions, weight, electrical requirements, etc.

c. Outdoor unit shall have a sound rating no higher than 68 dB(A) individually or 69.5 dB(A) twinned. Units shall have a sound rating no higher than 55 dB(A) individually or 55.5 dB(A) twinned while in night mode operation. Units shall have 5 levels sound adjustment via dip switch selectable fan speed settings. If an alternate manufacturer is selected, any additional material, cost, and labor to meet published sound levels shall be incurred by the contractor.

d. Refrigerant lines from the outdoor unit to the indoor units shall be insulated in accordance with the installation manual.

e. The outdoor unit shall have the capability of installing the main refrigerant piping through the bottom of the unit.

f. The outdoor unit shall have an accumulator with refrigerant level sensors and controls. Units shall actively control liquid level in the accumulator via Linear Expansion Valves (LEV) from the heat exchanger.

g. The outdoor unit shall have a high pressure safety switch, over-current protection, crankcase heater and DC bus protection.

h. VRF system shall meet performance requirements per schedule and be within piping limitations & acceptable ambient temperature ranges as described in respective manufacturers’ published product catalogs. Non-published product capabilities or performance data are not acceptable.

i. The outdoor unit shall be capable of guaranteed operation in heating mode down to -25F ambient temperatures and cooling mode up to 126F without additional restrictions on line length & vertical separation beyond those published in respective product catalogs. Models with capacity data for required temperature range published as “for reference only” are not considered capable of guaranteed operation and are not acceptable. If an alternate manufacturer is selected, any additional material, cost, and labor to meet ambient operating range and performance shall be incurred by the contractor.

j. The outdoor unit shall have a high efficiency oil separator plus additional logic controls to ensure adequate oil volume in the compressor is maintained. Oil return sequences must be enabled only during extended periods of reduced refrigerant flow to ensure no disruption to correct refrigerant flow to individual zones during peak loads. Systems which might engage oil return sequence based on hours of



operation risk oil return during inopportune periods are not allowed. Systems which rely on sensors (which may fail) to engage oil return sequence are not allowed.

k. Unit must defrost all circuits simultaneously in order to resume full heating more quickly during extreme low ambient temperatures (below 23F). Partial defrost, also known as hot gas defrost which allows reduced heating output during defrost, is permissible only when ambient temperature is above 23F.

l. While in hot gas defrost the system shall slow the indoor unit fan speed down to maintain a high discharge air temperature, systems that keep fan running in same state shall not be allowed as they provide an uncomfortable draft to the indoor zone due to lower discharge air temperatures.

m. The outdoor unit shall be capable of operating in cooling mode down to -10F with manufacturer supplied low ambient kit. 1) Low ambient kit shall be provided with predesigned control box rated for

outdoor installation and capable of controlling kit operation automatically in all outdoor unit operation modes.

2) Low ambient kit shall be listed by Electrical Laboratories (ETL) and bear the ETL label.

3) Low ambient kit shall be factory tested in low ambient temperature chamber to ensure operation. Factory performance testing data shall be available when requested.

n. VRF four-legged outdoor unit mounting systems shall be provided by manufacturer. Stand shall be made from 7 gauge plate steel with thermally fused polyester powder coat finish that meets ASTM D3451-06 standards. Stands shall be provided with galvanized mounting hardware and meets all ASCE 7 overturning safety requirement.

2. Unit Cabinet: a. The casing(s) shall be fabricated of galvanized steel, bonderized and finished. b. The outdoor unit shall be tested in compliance with ISO9277 such that no unusual

rust shall develop after 960 hours of salt spray testing. c. Panels on the outdoor unit shall be scratch free at system startup. If a scratch

occurs the salt spray protection is compromised and the panel should be replaced immediately.

3. Fan: a. Each outdoor unit module shall be furnished with direct drive, variable speed

propeller type fan(s) only. Fans shall be factory set for operation at 0 in. WG external static pressure, but capable of normal operation with a maximum of 0.32 in. WG external static pressure via dipswitch.

b. All fan motors shall have inherent protection, have permanently lubricated bearings, and be completely variable speed.

c. All fans shall be provided with a raised guard to prevent contact with moving parts.

4. Coil: a. Outdoor Coil shall be constructed to provide equal airflow to all coil face surface

are by means of a 4-sided coil. b. Outdoor Coil shall be elevated at least 12” from the base on the unit to protect coil

from freezing and snow build up in cold climates. Manufacturer’s in which their coil extends to within a few inches from the bottom of their cabinet frame shall provide an additional 12” of height to their stand or support structure to provide equal protection from elements as Mitsubishi Electric basis of design. Any



additional support costs, equipment fencing, and tie downs required to meet this additional height shall be responsibility of Mechanical Contractor to provide.

c. The outdoor heat exchanger shall be of zinc coated aluminum construction with turbulating flat tube construction. The coil fins shall have a factory applied corrosion resistant finish. Uncoated aluminum coils/fins are not allowed.

d. The coil shall be protected with an integral metal guard. e. Refrigerant flow from the outdoor unit shall be controlled by means of an inverter

driven compressor. f. Unit shall have prewired plugs for optional panel heaters in order to prevent any

residual ice buildup from defrost. Panel heaters are recommended for operating environments where the ambient temperature is expected to stay below -1F for 72 hours.

g. Condenser coil shall have active hot gas circuit direct from compressor discharge on lowest coil face area to shed defrost condensate away from coil and protect from Ice formation after returning to standard heat pump operation. While in Heat Pump operation this lower section of the Outdoor Evaporator coil shall continually run hot gas from the compressor discharge to protect the coil from ice buildup and coil rupture. Manufacturers who do not have an active hot gas circuit in the lower section of the Outdoor coil to protect coil from freezing shall not be allowed to bid on project in markets where the outdoor unit will see temperatures below freezing.

5. Compressor: a. Each outdoor unit module shall be equipped with only inverter driven scroll

hermetic compressors. Non inverter-driven compressors, which may cause inrush current (demand charges) and require larger generators for temporary power shall not be allowed.

b. Each compressor shall be equipped with a multi-port discharge mechanism to eliminate over compression at part load. Manufacturer’s that rely on a single compressor discharge port and provide no means of eliminating over compression and energy waste at part load shall not be allowed.

c. Crankcase heat shall be provided via induction-type heater utilizing eddy currents from motor windings. Energy-wasting “belly-band” type crankcase heaters are not allowed. Manufacturers that utilize belly-band crankcase heaters will be considered as alternate only.

d. Compressor shall have an inverter to modulate capacity. The capacity for each compressor shall be variable with a minimum turndown not greater than 15%.

e. The compressor shall be equipped with an internal thermal overload. f. Field-installed oil equalization lines between modules are not allowed. Prior to

bidding, manufacturers requiring equalization must submit oil line sizing calculations specific to each system and module placement for this project.

g. Manufacturers that utilize a compressor sump oil sensor to equalize compressor oil volume within a single module shall not be allowed unless they actively shut down the system to protect from compressor failure.

6. Controls: a. The unit shall be an integral part of the system & control network and react to

heating/cooling demand as communicated from connected indoor e control circuit. Required field-installed control voltage transformers and/or signal boosters shall be provided by the manufacturer.

b. The outdoor unit shall have the capability of 4 levels of demand control for each refrigerant system based on external input.

7. Electrical



a. The outdoor unit electrical power shall be 208/230 volts, 3-phase, 60 hertz or 460

volts, 3-phase, 60 hertz per equipment schedule. b. The outdoor unit shall be controlled by integral microprocessors. c. The control circuit between the indoor units and the outdoor unit shall be 24VDC

completed using a 2-conductor, twisted pair shielded cable to provide total integration of the system

D. Indoor Units: 4-Way Ceiling Recessed Cassette with Grille 1. Description: Factory assembled, wired and run tested. Contained within the unit shall be

all factory wiring, piping, electronic modulating linear expansion device, control circuit board and fan motor. The unit shall have a self-diagnostic function, 3-minute time delay mechanism, an auto restart function, an emergency operation function, a test run switch, and the ability to adjust airflow patterns for different ceiling heights. Indoor unit and refrigerant pipes shall be charged with dehydrated air before shipment from the factory. The unit shall be suitable for use in plenums in accordance with UL1995 ed 4.

2. Unit Cabinet: a. The cabinet panel shall have provisions for a field installed filtered outside air

intake. b. Branch ducting shall be allowed from cabinet. c. Four-way grille shall be fixed to bottom of cabinet allowing two, three or four-way

blow. d. The grille vane angles shall be individually adjustable from a wired remote

controller to customize the airflow pattern for the conditioned space 3. Fan:

a. The indoor fan shall be an assembly with a statically and dynamically balanced turbo fan direct driven by a single motor with permanently lubricated bearings.

b. The indoor unit shall include an AUTO fan setting capable of maximizing energy efficiency by adjusting the fan speed based on the difference between controller set-point and space temperature. The indoor fan shall be capable of five (5) speed settings, Low, Mid1, Mid2, High and Auto.

c. The indoor unit shall have an adjustable air outlet system offering 4-way airflow, 3-way airflow, or 2-way airflow.

d. The indoor unit fan logic must include multiple setting that can be changed to provide optimum airflow based on ceiling height and number of outlets used.

e. The indoor unit vanes shall have 5 fixed positions and a swing feature that shall be capable of automatically swinging the vanes up and down for uniform air distribution.

f. The vanes shall have an Auto-Wave selectable option in the heating mode that shall randomly cycle the vanes up and down to evenly heat the space.

g. Grille shall include a factory-installed “i-see” sensor, or equal, to work in conjunction with indoor unit control sequence to prevent unnecessary cooling or heating in unoccupied areas of the zone without decreasing comfort levels. Sensor must detect occupancy (not simply motion) and location of occupants by measuring size & temperature of objects within a 39’ detecting diameter (based on 8.8ft mounting height) with 1,856 or more measuring points.

4. Filter: a. Return air shall be filtered by means of a long-life washable filter

5. Coil:



a. The indoor coil shall be of nonferrous construction with smooth plate fins on copper tubing. The tubing shall have inner grooves for high efficiency heat exchange. All tube joints shall be brazed with phos-copper or silver alloy.

b. The coils shall be pressure tested at the factory. c. The unit shall be provided with an integral condensate lift mechanism that will be

able to raise drain water 33 inches above the condensate pan. 6. Electrical:

a. Enclosure: Metal, suitable for indoor locations. b. Field Connection: Single point connection to power unit and integral controls. c. Disconnecting Means: Factory-mounted circuit breaker or switch. d. Control Transformer: Manufacturer's standard. Coordinate requirements with field

power supply. e. Wiring: Manufacturer's standard with each connection labeled and corresponding

to a unit-mounted wiring diagram. f. Raceways: Enclose line voltage wiring in raceways. g. The unit electrical power shall be 208/230 volts, 1-phase, 60 hertz. h. The system shall be capable of satisfactory operation within voltage limits of 187-

228 volts (208V/60Hz) or 207-253 volts (230V/60Hz). 7. Controls:

a. Indoor unit shall compensate for the higher temperature sensed by the return air sensor compared to the temperature at level of the occupant when in HEAT mode. Disabling of compensation shall be possible for individual units to accommodate instances when compensation is not required.

b. Control board shall include contacts for control of external heat source. External heat may be energized as second stage with 1.8°F – 9.0°F adjustable deadband from set point.

c. Indoor unit shall include no less than four (4) digital inputs capable of being used for customizable control strategies.

d. Indoor unit shall include no less than three (3) digital outputs capable of being used for customizable control strategies.

e. A factory-installed drain pan sensor shall provide protection against drain pan overflow by sensing a high condensate level in the drain pan. Should this occur the control shuts down the indoor unit before an overflow can occur. A thermistor error code will be produced should the sensor activate indicating a fault which must be resolved before the unit re-starts.

E. System Controls 1. The control system shall consist of a low voltage communication network. 2. System controls and control components shall be installed in accordance with the

manufacturer’s written installation instructions. 3. Network: Indoor units and outdoor units shall include integral controls and connect

through a manufacturer-selected control network. 4. Wired Controllers for Indoor Units serving the Dispatch Room.

a. Single controller capable of controlling multiple indoor units as group. b. Auto Timeout Touch Screen LCD: Timeout duration shall be adjustable. c. Multiple Language: English. d. Temperature Units: Fahrenheit and Celsius. e. On/Off: Turns indoor unit on or off. f. Hold: Hold operation settings until hold is released. g. Operation Mode: Cool, Heat, Auto, Dehumidification, Fan Only, and Setback. h. Temperature Display: 1-degree increments.



i. Temperature Set-Point: Separate set points for Cooling, Heating, and Setback. Adjustable in 1-degree increments.

j. Relative Humidity Display: 1 percent increments. k. Relative Humidity Set-Point: Adjustable in 1 percent increments. l. Fan Speed Setting: Select between available options furnished with the unit. m. Airflow Direction Setting: If applicable to unit, select between available options

furnished with the unit. n. Seven-day programmable operating schedule with up to five events per day.

Operations shall include On/Off, Operation Mode, and Temperature Set-Point. o. Auto Off Timer: Operates unit for an adjustable time duration and then turns unit

off. p. Occupancy detection. q. Service Notification Display: "Filter". r. Service Run Tests: Limit use by service personnel to troubleshoot operation. s. Error Code Notification Display: Used by service personnel to troubleshoot

abnormal operation and equipment failure. t. User and Service Passwords: Capable of preventing adjustments by unauthorized

users. u. Setting stored in nonvolatile memory to ensure that settings are not lost if power is

lost. Battery backup for date and time only. v. Low-voltage power required for controller shall be powered through non-polar

connections to indoor unit. 5. Controller power and communications shall be via a common non-polar communications

bus and shall operate at 30VDC.

6. Wiring: a. Control wiring shall be installed in a daisy chain configuration from indoor unit to

indoor unit, to the BC controller (main and subs, if applicable) and to the outdoor unit. Control wiring to remote controllers shall be run from the indoor unit terminal block to the controller associated with that unit.

b. Control wiring for centralized controllers shall be installed in a daisy chain configuration from outdoor unit to outdoor unit, to the system controllers (centralized controllers and/or integrated web based interface), to the power supply.

7. Wiring type: a. Wiring shall be 2-conductor (16 AWG), twisted, stranded, shielded wire as defined

by the Diamond System Builder output. b. Network wiring shall be CAT-5 with RJ-45 connection.

2.3 EXISTING VRF SYSTEM , VRF-1: ADDITIONAL COMPONENTS

A. 4-Way Ceiling-Recessed Cassette with Grille for 2X2 Grid Indoor Unit 1. Description:

a. The indoor unit shall be a four-way cassette style indoor unit that recesses into the ceiling with a ceiling grille. The indoor unit shall be factory assembled, wired and run tested. Contained within the unit shall be all factory wiring, piping, electronic modulating linear expansion device, control circuit board and fan motor. The unit shall have a self-diagnostic function, 3-minute time delay mechanism, an auto



restart function, an emergency operation function and a test run switch. Indoor unit and refrigerant pipes shall be charged with dehydrated air before shipment from the factory. The unit shall be suitable for use in plenums in accordance with UL1995 ed 4.

B. Unit Cabinet:

1. The cabinet shall be a compact 22-7/16” wide x 22-7/16” deep so it will fit within a standard 24” square suspended ceiling grid.

2. The cabinet panel shall have provisions for a field installed filtered outside air intake. 3. Four-way grille shall be fixed to bottom of cabinet allowing two, three or four-way blow.

C. Fan:

1. The indoor fan shall be an assembly with a turbo fan direct driven by a single motor. 2. The indoor fan shall be statically and dynamically balanced to run on a motor with

permanently lubricated bearings. 3. The indoor unit shall include an AUTO fan setting capable of maximizing energy

efficiency by adjusting the fan speed based on the difference between controller set-point and space temperature. The indoor fan shall be capable of five (4) speed settings, Low, Mid, High and Auto.

4. The indoor unit shall have an adjustable air outlet system offering 4-way airflow, 3-way airflow, or 2-way airflow.

5. The indoor unit vanes shall have 5 fixed positions and a swing feature that shall be capable of automatically swinging the vanes up and down for uniform air distribution.

D. Filter:

1. Return air shall be filtered by means of a long-life washable filter.

E. Coil:

1. The indoor coil shall be of nonferrous construction with smooth plate fins on copper tubing. The tubing shall have inner grooves for high efficiency heat exchange. All tube joints shall be brazed with phos-copper or silver alloy.

2. The coils shall be pressure tested at the factory. 3. The unit shall be provided with an integral condensate lift mechanism that will be able to

raise drain water 19-3/4” inches above the condensate pan.

F. Electrical:

1. The unit electrical power shall be 208/230 volts, 1-phase, 60 hertz. 2. The system shall be capable of satisfactory operation within voltage limits of 187-228

volts (208V/60Hz) or 207-253 volts (230V/60Hz).

G. Controls:

1. Indoor unit shall compensate for the higher temperature sensed by the return air sensor compared to the temperature at level of the occupant when in HEAT mode. Disabling of compensation shall be possible for individual units to accommodate instances when compensation is not required.



2. Control board shall include contacts for control of external heat source. External heat may be energized as second stage with 1.8°F – 9.0°F adjustable deadband from set point.

3. Indoor unit shall include no less than four (4) digital inputs capable of being used for customizable control strategies.

4. Indoor unit shall include no less than three (3) digital outputs capable of being used for customizable control strategies.

5. A factory-installed drain pan sensor shall provide protection against drain pan overflow by sensing a high condensate level in the drain pan. Should this occur, the control shuts down the indoor unit before an overflow can occur. A thermistor error code will be produced should the sensor activate indicating a fault which must be resolved before the unit re-starts.

H. Unit Accessories:

1. Wired Controller: Allows for remote sensing of space temperature. a. Customizable digital touchscreen interface b. Multiple Language: English. c. Temperature Units: Fahrenheit and Celsius. d. On/Off: Turns indoor unit on or off. e. Hold: Hold operation settings until hold is released. f. Operation Mode: Cool, Heat, Auto, Dry, Fan Only g. Temperature Display h. Seven-day programmable operating schedule. Operations shall include On/Off,

Operation Mode, and Temperature Set-Point. i. Auto Off Timer: Operates unit for an adjustable time duration and then turns unit

off. j. Error Code Notification Display: Used by service personnel to troubleshoot

abnormal operation and equipment failure. k. User and Service Passwords: Capable of preventing adjustments by unauthorized

users. l. Low-voltage power required for controller shall be powered through non-polar

connections to indoor unit. m. Communications cable: 3-conductor, stranded, twisted, unshielded AWG 22-3.

I. Heat Recovery Unit ( As required for simultaneous heat/cool systems) 1. The heat recovery unit shall include multiple branches to allow simultaneous heating and

cooling by allowing either hot gas refrigerant to flow to indoor unit(s) for heating or subcooled liquid refrigerant to flow to indoor unit(s) for cooling.

2. The heat recovery unit shall be equipped with a circuit board that interfaces to the controls system and shall perform all functions necessary for operation. The unit shall have a galvanized steel finish and be completely factory assembled, piped and wired. This unit shall be mounted indoors, with access and service clearance provided for each controller. Heat recovery unit shall be suitable for use in plenums in accordance with UL1995 ed 4.

3. HRU Cabinet: a. The casing shall be fabricated of insulated galvanized steel.

4. Refrigerant Piping (specifications in addition to those for outdoor unit): a. All refrigerant pipe connections shall be brazed. b. Future changes to indoor unit quantities or sizes served by heat recovery unit must

be possible with no piping changes except between the branch device and indoor unit(s) changing.



5. Refrigerant valves: a. Service shut-off valves shall be field-provided/installed for each branch to allow

service to any indoor unit without field interruption to overall system operation. 6. Condensate Management:

a. The heat recovery unit, if required by manufacturer, must have integral resin drain pan or insulate refrigeration components with removable insulation that allows easy access for future service needs. Cabinets filled with solid foam insulation do not allow for future service and are not allowed.

7. Electrical: a. The unit electrical power shall be 208/230 volts, 1 phase, 60 Hertz. b. The HRU shall be controlled by integral microprocessors c. The control circuit between the indoor units and outdoor units shall be 24VDC

completed using a 2-conductor, twisted pair shielded cable to provide total. d.

2.4 SYSTEM REFRIGERANT AND OIL

A. Refrigerant:

1. As required by VRF HVAC system manufacturer for system to comply with performance requirements indicated.

2. ASHRAE 34, Class A1 refrigerant classification. 3. R-410a.

B. Oil:

1. As required by VRF HVAC system manufacturer and to comply with performance requirements indicated.

2. Polyolester (POE) oil shall be required for the Design Basis Manufacturer’s equipment. Prior to bidding, manufacturers using alternate oil types shall submit material safety data sheets (MSDS) and comparison of hygroscopic properties for alternate oil with list of local suppliers stocking alternate oil for approval at least two weeks prior to bidding.

2.5 SYSTEM CONDENSATE DRAIN PIPING

A. Refer to Division 22 for VRF condensate drain piping.

2.6 SYSTEM REFRIGERANT PIPING

A. Comply with requirements in Section 232300 "Refrigerant Piping" for system piping requirements.

B. Refrigerant Piping:

1. Copper Tube: ASTM B 280, Type ACR, annealed and drawn temper. 2. Wrought-Copper Fittings: ASME B16.22. 3. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8/A5.8M.



C. Refrigerant Tubing Kits:

1. Factory-rolled and -bundled, soft-copper tubing with tubing termination fittings at each end. Copper tubing material shall be in accordance with VRF manufacturer’s requirement.

2. Standard one-piece length for connecting to indoor units. 3. Pre-insulated with flexible elastomeric insulation of thickness to comply with governing

energy code and sufficient to eliminate condensation. 4. Factory Charge: Dehydrated air or nitrogen.

D. Divided-Flow Specialty Fittings: Where required by VRF HVAC system manufacturer for proper system operation, VRF HVAC system manufacturer shall furnish specialty fittings with identification and instructions for proper installation by Installer.

E. Refrigerant Isolation Ball Valves:

1. Description: Uni-body full port design, rated for maximum system temperature and pressure, and factory tested under pressure to ensure tight shutoff. Designed for valve operation without removing seal cap.

2. Seals: Compatible with system refrigerant and oil. Seal service life of at least 20 years. 3. Valve Connections: Flare or sweat depending on size.

2.7 METAL HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Comply with requirements in Section 230529 "Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment".

2.8 PIPING AND TUBING INSULATION

A. Comply with requirements in Section 230719 "HVAC Piping Insulation" for system piping insulation requirements.

2.9 SYSTEM CONTROL CABLE

A. Comply with requirements in Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables" for wiring connections.

B. Comply with requirements in Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems" for grounding connections.

C. Comply with requirements in Section 260533 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems" for control wiring and cable raceways.


A. Factory Tests: Test and inspect factory-assembled equipment.

B. Equipment will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.



C. Prepare test and inspection reports for historical record. Submit reports only if requested.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION


B. Examine products before installation. Reject products that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged.

C. Examine roughing-in for piping and tubing to verify actual locations of connections before equipment installation.

D. Examine roughing-in for ductwork to verify actual locations of connections before equipment installation.

E. Examine roughing-in for wiring and conduit to verify actual locations of connections before equipment installation.

F. Examine walls, floors, roofs, and outdoor pads for suitable conditions where equipment will be installed.

G. Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work.

H. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Clearance:

1. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances for service and maintenance. 2. Maintain clearances required by governing code. 3. Loose Components: Install components, devices, and accessories furnished by

manufacturer, with equipment, that are not factory mounted. 4. Loose components shall be installed by manufacturer's service representative or system

Installer under supervision of manufacturer's service representative. 5. Equipment Restraint Installation: Install equipment with seismic-restraint device. Comply

with requirements for seismic-restraint devices specified in Section 230548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC."

3.3 INSTALLATION OF INDOOR UNITS

A. Install units to be level and plumb while providing a neat and finished appearance.



B. Unless otherwise required by VRF HVAC system manufacturer, support ceiling-mounted units from structure above using threaded rods; minimum rod size of 3/8 inch.

C. Adjust supports of exposed and recessed units to draw units tight to adjoining surfaces.

D. Protect finished surfaces of ceilings, floors, and walls that come in direct contact with units. Refinish or replaced damaged areas after units are installed.

E. In rooms with ceilings, conceal piping and tubing, controls, and electrical power serving units above ceilings.

F. In rooms without ceiling, arrange piping and tubing, controls, and electrical power serving units to provide a neat and finished appearance.

G. Provide lateral bracing if needed to limit movement of suspended units to not more than 0.25 inch.

H. For floor- and wall-mounted units that are exposed, conceal piping and tubing, controls, and electrical power serving units within walls.

I. Attachment: Install hardware for proper attachment to supported equipment.

J. Grouting: Place grout under equipment supports and make bearing surface smooth.

3.4 INSTALLATION OF OUTDOOR UNITS

A. Install units to be level and plumb while providing a neat and finished appearance.

B. Install outdoor units on support structures indicated on Drawings.

3.5 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR PIPING INSTALLATION

A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping and tubing systems. Install piping and tubing as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on coordination drawings.

B. Install piping and tubing in concealed locations unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas.

C. Install piping and tubing at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise.

D. Install piping and tubing above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.

E. Install piping and tubing to permit valve servicing.

F. Install isolation valves directly downstream the branch controller port or refrigerant tee leading to each indoor unit.



G. Install piping and tubing free of sags.


I. Install piping and tubing to allow application of insulation.

J. Install groups of pipes and tubing parallel to each other, spaced to permit applying insulation with service access between insulated piping and tubing.

K. Install sleeves for piping and tubing penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for sleeves specified in Section 230517 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for HVAC Piping."

L. Install escutcheons for piping and tubing penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for escutcheons specified in Section 230518 "Escutcheons for HVAC Piping."

3.6 INSTALLATION OF SYSTEM CONDENSATE DRAIN PIPING

A. General Requirements for Drain Piping and Tubing:

1. Install in accordance with manufacturer’s requirements and recommendations. 2. Refer to Division 22 for system condensate drain piping.

3.7 INSTALLATION OF REFRIGERANT PIPING

A. Comply with VRF manufacturer’s installation requirements and the requirements in Section 232300 "Refrigeration Piping".

3.8 INSTALLATION OF METAL HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Comply with requirements in Section 230529 "Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment".

3.9 INSTALLATION OF PIPING AND TUBING INSULATION

A. Comply with requirements in Section 230719 "HVAC Piping Insulation".

3.10 INSTALLATION OF DUCT, ACCESSORIES, AND AIR OUTLETS

A. Where installing ductwork adjacent to equipment, allow space for service and maintenance.

B. Comply with requirements for metal ducts specified in Section 233113 "Metal Ducts."

C. Comply with requirements for air duct accessories specified in Section 233300 "Air Duct Accessories."



D. Comply with requirements for flexible ducts specified in Section 233346 "Flexible Ducts."

E. Comply with requirements for registers and grilles specified in Section 233713 "Diffusers, Registers and Grilles."

3.11 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION

A. Comply with requirements indicated on Drawings and in applicable Division 26 Sections.

B. To extent electrical power is required for system equipment, components, and controls, and is not indicated on Drawings and addressed in the Specifications, the design for such electrical power shall be delegated to VRF HVAC system provider.

C. Delegated design of electrical power to equipment, components and controls, and associated installation shall be included at no additional cost to Owner.

D. Connect field electrical power source to each separate electrical device requiring field electrical power. Coordinate termination point and connection type with Installer.

E. Comply with requirements in Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables" for wiring connections.

F. Comply with requirements in Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems" for grounding connections.

G. Install nameplate or acrylic label with self-adhesive back for each electrical connection indicating electrical equipment designation and circuit number feeding connection.

H. Nameplate shall be laminated phenolic layers of black with engraved white letters. Letters at least 1/2 inch high.

I. Locate nameplate or label where easily visible.

J. Comply with requirements in Section 260533 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems" for raceway selection and installation requirements for boxes, conduits, and wireways as supplemented or revised in this Section.

K. Outlet boxes shall be no smaller than 2 inches wide, 3 inches high, and 2-1/2 inches deep.

L. Outlet boxes for cables shall be no smaller than 4 inches square by 1-1/2 inches deep with extension ring sized to bring edge of ring to within 1/8 inch of the finished wall surface.

M. Flexible metal conduit shall not be used.

N. Comply with TIA-569-D for pull-box sizing and length of conduit and number of bends between pull points.

O. Install manufactured conduit sweeps and long-radius elbows if possible.

P. Install metal conduits with grounding bushings and connect with grounding conductor to grounding system.



3.12 FIRESTOPPING

A. Comply with requirements in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping."

3.13 GROUNDING INSTALLATION

A. For low-voltage control cabling, comply with requirements in Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."

3.14 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system equipment, piping, tubing, and valves. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 230553 "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment."

B. Identify system electrical and controls components, wiring, cabling, and terminals. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

C. Identify each control cable on each end and at each terminal with a number-coded identification tag. Each cable shall have a unique tag.


A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage VRF HVAC system manufacturer's service representative to advise and assist installers; witness testing; and observe and inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including controls and connections.

B. Field service shall be performed by a factory-trained and -authorized service representative of VRF HVAC system manufacturer whose primary job responsibilities are to provide direct technical support of its products.

C. Additional factory-authorized representatives may assist with completion of certain activities only if supervised by manufacturer's employee. A factory-authorized representative shall not provide assistance without manufacturer's employee supervision.

D. Manufacturer shall provide on-site visits during the course of construction. System Installer shall coordinate each visit in advance to give manufacturer sufficient notice to plan the visit.

E. Final Inspection before Startup:

1. Before inspection, Installer to provide written request to manufacturer stating the system is fully installed according manufacturer's requirements and ready for final inspection.

2. All system equipment and operating components shall be inspected. If components are inaccessible for inspection, they shall be made accessible before the final inspection can be completed.

3. Manufacturer shall provide a comprehensive inspection of all equipment and each operating component that comprise the complete system(s). Inspection shall follow a detailed checklist specific to each equipment and operating component.

4. Inspection reports for indoor units shall include, but not be limited to, the following:



a. Unit designation on Drawings. b. Manufacturer model number. c. Serial number. d. Network address, if applicable. e. Each equipment setting. f. Mounting, supports, and restraints properly installed. g. Proper service clearance provided. h. Wiring and power connections correct. i. Line-voltage reading(s) within acceptable range. j. Wiring and controls connections correct. k. Low-voltage reading(s) within an acceptable range. l. Controller type and model controlling unit. m. Controller location. n. Temperature settings and readings within an acceptable range. o. Humidity settings and readings within an acceptable range. p. Condensate removal acceptable. q. Fan settings and readings within an acceptable range. r. Unit airflow direction within an acceptable range. s. Filter type and condition acceptable. t. Noise level within an acceptable range. u. Refrigerant piping properly connected and insulated. v. Condensate drain piping properly connected and insulated. w. If applicable, external interlocks properly connected.

5. Inspection reports for outdoor units shall include, but not be limited to, the following: a. Unit designation on Drawings. b. Manufacturer model number. c. Serial number. d. Network address, if applicable. e. Each equipment setting. f. Mounting, supports, and restraints properly installed. g. Proper service clearance provided. h. Wiring and power connections correct. i. Line-voltage reading(s) within acceptable range. j. Wiring and controls connections correct. k. Low-voltage reading(s) within an acceptable range. l. Noise level within an acceptable range. m. Refrigerant piping properly connected and insulated.

6. Installer shall provide manufacturer with the requested documentation and technical support during inspection.

7. Installer shall correct observed deficiencies found by the inspection. 8. Upon completing the on-site inspection, manufacturer shall provide a written report with

complete documentation describing each inspection step, the result, and any corrective action required.

9. If corrective action is required by Installer that cannot be completed during the same visit, provide additional visits, as required, until deficiencies are resolved and systems are deemed ready for startup.

10. Final report shall indicate the system(s) inspected are installed according to manufacturer's requirements and are ready for startup.

F. Perform the following tests and inspections with the assistance of manufacturer's service representative:



1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.


G. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation.


H. Refrigerant Tubing Positive Pressure Testing:

1. Comply with more stringent of VRF HVAC system manufacturer's requirements and requirements indicated.

2. After completion of tubing installation, pressurize tubing systems to a test pressure of not less than 1.2 times VRF HVAC system operating pressure, but not less than 600 psig, using dry nitrogen.

3. Successful testing shall maintain a test pressure for a continuous and uninterrupted period of 24 hours. Allowance for pressure changes attributed to changes in ambient temperature are acceptable.

I. Prepare test report to record the following information for each test:

1. Name of person starting test, company name, phone number, and e-mail address. 2. Name of manufacturer's service representative witnessing test, company name, phone

number, and e-mail address. 3. Detailed description of extent of tubing tested. 4. Date and time at start of test. 5. Test pressure at start of test. 6. Outdoor temperature at start of test. 7. Name of person ending test, company name, phone number, and e-mail address. 8. Date and time at end of test. 9. Test pressure at end of test. 10. Outdoor temperature at end of test. 11. Remarks:

a. Submit test reports for Project record.

J. Refrigerant Tubing Evacuation Testing:

1. Comply with more stringent of VRF HVAC system manufacturer's requirements and requirements indicated.

2. After completion of tubing positive-pressure testing, evacuate tubing systems to a pressure of 500 Insert value microns.

3. Successful testing shall maintain a test pressure for a continuous and uninterrupted period of one hour(s) with no change.

K. Prepare test report to record the following information for each test:

1. Name of person starting test, company name, phone number, and e-mail address.



2. Name of manufacturer's service representative witnessing test, company name, phone number, and e-mail address.

3. Detailed description of extent of tubing tested. 4. Date and time at start of test. 5. Test pressure at start of test. 6. Outdoor temperature at start of test. 7. Name of person ending test, company name, phone number, and e-mail address. 8. Date and time at end of test. 9. Test pressure at end of test. 10. Outdoor temperature at end of test. 11. Remarks:

a. Submit test reports for Project record. b. Upon successful completion of evacuation testing, system shall be charged with

refrigerant.

L. System Refrigerant Charge:

1. Using information collected from the refrigerant tubing evacuation testing, system Installer shall consult variable refrigerant system manufacturer to determine the correct system refrigerant charge.

2. Installer shall charge system following VRF HVAC system manufacturer's written instructions.

3. System refrigerant charging shall be witnessed by system manufacturer's representative. 4. Total refrigerant charge shall be recorded and permanently displayed at the system's

outdoor unit. 5. Products will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. 6. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.16 STARTUP SERVICE

A. Engage a VRF HVAC system manufacturer's service representative to perform system(s) startup service.

B. Service representative shall be a factory-trained and -authorized service representative of VRF HVAC system manufacturer.

C. Complete startup service of each separate system.

D. Complete system startup service according to manufacturer's written instructions.

E. Startup checks shall include, but not be limited to, the following:

1. Check control communications of equipment and each operating component in system(s). 2. Check each indoor unit's response to demand for cooling and heating. 3. Check each indoor unit's response to changes in airflow settings. 4. Check each indoor unit, HRCU, and outdoor unit for proper condensate removal. 5. Check sound levels of each indoor and outdoor unit.



F. Installer shall accompany manufacturer's service representative during startup service and provide manufacturer's service representative with requested documentation and technical support during startup service.

G. Installer shall correct deficiencies found during startup service for reverification.

H. System Operation Report:

1. After completion of startup service, manufacturer shall issue a report for each separate system.

2. Report shall include complete documentation describing each startup check, the result, and any corrective action required.

3. Manufacturer shall electronically record not less than two hours of continuous operation of each system and submit with report for historical reference.

4. All available system operating parameters shall be included in the information submitted.

I. Witness:

1. Invite Architect and Owner to witness startup service procedures. 2. Provide written notice not less than 14 business days before start of startup service.

3.17 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust equipment and components to function smoothly, and lubricate as recommended by manufacturer.

B. Adjust initial temperature and humidity set points. Adjust initial airflow settings and discharge airflow patterns.

C. Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges according to VRF HVAC system manufacturer's written instructions, and as indicated.

D. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months from date of Substantial Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting system to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to two visits to Project during other-than-normal occupancy hours for this purpose.

3.18 PROTECTION

A. Protect products from moisture and water damage. Remove and replace products that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged.

B. Protect equipment from physical damage. Replace equipment with physical damage that cannot be repaired to new condition. Observable surface imperfections shall be grounds for removal and replacement.

C. Protect equipment from electrical damage. Replace equipment suffering electrical damage.

D. Cover and seal openings of equipment to keep inside of equipment clean. Do not remove covers until finish work is complete.



3.19 MAINTENANCE SERVICE

A. Initial Maintenance Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, maintenance service shall include 12 months' full maintenance by skilled employees of system Installer who are manufacturer's authorized service representative. Include two service visits for preventive maintenance, repair or replacement of worn or defective components, lubrication, cleaning, and adjusting as required for proper equipment and system operation. Parts and supplies shall be manufacturer's authorized replacement parts and supplies.

3.20 SOFTWARE SERVICE AGREEMENT

A. Technical Support: Beginning at Substantial Completion, service agreement shall include software support for two years.

B. Upgrade Service: At Substantial Completion, update software to latest version. Install and program software upgrades that become available within two years from date of Substantial Completion. Upgrading software shall include operating system and new or revised licenses for using software.

C. Upgrade Notice: At least 30 days to allow Owner to schedule and access the system and to upgrade computer equipment if necessary.

3.21 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING

A. Engage a VRF HVAC system manufacturer's factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain entire system. Refer to Section 017900 "Demonstration and Training."


SELF-CONTAINED STEAM HUMIDIFIERS


SECTION 238413.29 - SELF-CONTAINED STEAM HUMIDIFIERS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Self-contained electrode humidifiers. 2. Complete and operable humidification system [which meets applicable building codes. 3. Equipment start-up and project inspection by qualified factory trained representative.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Low Voltage: As defined in NFPA 70 for circuits and equipment operating at less than 50 V or for remote-control, signaling power-limited circuits.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit product data under provisions of Section 23. Include product description, model, dimensions, component sizes, rough-in requirements, service sizes, and finishes. Include rated capacities, operating weights, furnished specialties, and accessories.

B. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions.

C. Submit operation and maintenance data.

D. Submit coordination drawings. Detail fabrication and installation of humidifiers. Include piping details, plans, elevations, sections, details of components, and dispersion tubes. Detail humidifiers and adjacent equipment. Show support locations, type of support, weight on each support, and required clearances.

E. Submit wiring diagrams including power, signal, and control wiring. Differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring.

F. Submit minimum water quality requirements and water pressure requirements.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For humidifiers to include in operation and maintenance manuals.




A. Certifications, C-UL US Listed.

B. ISO 9001-2008.

C. ANSI/NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.

D. ARI 640, "Standard for Commercial and Industrial Humidifiers.


A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Supply one replacement electrode cylinder with each self-contained humidifier.

1.8 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate location and installation of humidifiers with distributer tubes/manifolds in ducts and plenums or occupied space. Revise locations and elevations to suit field conditions and to ensure proper humidifier operation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS



B. Comply with AHRI 640.

C. Comply with UL 998.

D. Seismic Performance: Self-contained steam humidifiers shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.

1. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the unit will be fully operational after the seismic event."

2.2 SELF-CONTAINED ELECTRODE HUMIDIFIERS

A. Manufacturers: 1. Basis of Design: Condair: Nortec EL series



B. Provide Nortec EL electrode humidifier generating mineral-free, sterile steam from a potable water supply Packaged unit, wall mounted, atmospheric steam generation using an electrode steam cylinder. Resistive element technology and boiler steam (pressure steam) technology not acceptable.

C. Unit to be complete with: 1. a) Touchscreen controller with standard building automation:

1) Intuitive touchscreen control with color graphic user interface. 2) Standard building automation communication protocols BACnet IP,

BACnet MSTP (Slave) and Modbus. Additional hardware required for building automation communication not acceptable.

3) Embedded web interface for easy configuration and remote monitoring from any computer with a web browser over a local area network (LAN) connection.

4) USB interface for new software/feature upload and download of operational information.

5) Single or dual channel analog signal acceptance, supporting both demand and transducer control. Ability to control setpoint from humidifier control when using transducer controls.

2. Packaged system with Nortec electrode cylinder technology: a. Nortec cylinder optimized for humidifier capacity and supply voltage. Cylinder

must have welded seam to ensure watertight and have high water sensor to prevent overfilling.

b. Durable powder coated steel cabinet with zero side clearance requirement for minimal footprint.

c. Insulating air gap between plumbing and electrical compartment for increased electronic reliability.

d. Standard internal drain water tempering to ensure maximum 140° F [60° C] drain water. External drain water cooler not acceptable.

e. Integral fill cup with minimum 1-inch [25 mm] air gap to prevent back siphoning. f. Full cylinder indication and pre-notification of automatic shutdown at end of

cylinder life. g. Automatic pulse feature to clean any obstruction from the drain solenoid valve if

required. h. Automatic off-season shut-down after 3 days of "no call" will completely drain the

cylinder and automatically restart on call for humidity. Adjustable on/off and time sequence. Provides extended cylinder life, while ensuring stagnant water does not remain in the system.

3. Nortec Auto-Adaptive Control water management: a. Advanced water management utilizing the patented Proportional plus Integral

Auto-Adaptive Control system for optimal energy efficiency, water usage and cylinder life.

b. 98% thermal efficiency from startup until end of cylinder life. c. Drains automatically optimized to water conditions to maximize cylinder and

reduce water usage. d. Modulating output between 20% and 100% of rated capacity.

4. Steam Distribution Method – Blower Pack mounted on top of the unit a. The blower pack will be mounted on top of the unit and will be pre-assembled

from the factory.



b. The blower pack is constructed from durable materials and includes an integral steam distributor and internal steam and condensate connections.

c. A dual speed impeller fan, with a maximum output of 350 cfm, provides quiet and efficient steam distribution while minimizing absorption distances.

d. The two user adjustable fan speed settings allow the blower pack to be configured to meet the specific requirements of the room.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.

B. Examine roughing-in for piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections before humidifier installation.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install humidifiers with required clearance for service and maintenance, in accordance with manufacturer’s requirements.

B. Install all manufacturer-furnished accessories in accordance with manufacturer's written installation instructions.

3.3 PIPING CONNECTIONS

A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Sections.

1. Install piping adjacent to humidifiers to allow service and maintenance. 2. Install shutoff valve, strainer, backflow preventer, and union in humidifier makeup line.

B. Install piping specialties furnished by manufacturer but not factory mounted.

3.4 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS

A. Connect wiring according to Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."

B. Ground equipment according to Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."

C. Install nameplate for each electrical connection, indicating electrical equipment designation and circuit number feeding connection.



3.5 CONTROL CONNECTIONS

A. Install control and electrical power wiring to field-mounted control devices.

B. Connect control wiring between control devices.

C. Connect control wiring according to Section 260523 "Control Voltage Electrical Power Cables."

3.6 COMMISSIONING

A. Start-up of humidifier to be by factory trained technician

3.7 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain humidifiers.

PART 4 - SEQUENCE OF OPERATION

4.1 The humidifier will be activated when the space relative humidity drops below 35% (adj).

A. The following is the Basis of Design Unit general sequence of operation. 1. When the humidifier receives a valid humidity demand signal, the contactor closes and

directs power to the electrodes in the steam cylinder(s). 2. The current sensor on the driver board then monitors the current draw for 60 seconds. If

the current draw is less than the optimal current draw for the requested level of humidity, and the high water sensor is not activated, the operating sequence continues to step 3. If the high water sensor is activated, the operating sequence skips to step 4. If the measured current draw is higher than the optimal current draw for the requested level of humidity, but does not exceed 115% of the Full Load Amps (Full Load Amps is the current draw at the full rated capacity of the unit), the operating sequence skips to step 5.

3. The humidifier displays the status message “Filling” and activates the fill valve, which causes feed water to flow through the fill valve into the fill cup. The water then flows from the fill cup into the steam cylinder through the stem at the bottom of the cylinder. As soon as the electrodes come in contact with the water, current begins to flow between the electrodes, generating heat. As the water level continues to rise, more surface of the electrodes come in contact with the water, which results in a higher current draw. The fill valve remains open until the current draw matches the optimal current draw for the requested level of humidity, or the high water sensor is activated.

4. Once the fill/drain cycles stop, the water in the cylinder continues to heat until it turns into steam. As water level in the steam cylinder drops due to evaporation, the surface area of the electrodes exposed to the conductive water is also reduced, which results in a lower current draw. If the filling cycle in step 3 was interrupted by activation of the high water sensor, the operating sequence returns to step 2 once the water level drops below the high water sensor pin. Otherwise, it continues onto step 5.



5. As the humidifier continues to operate, the current draw begins to decrease due to a combination of two factors related to evaporation – reduced surface area of electrodes in contact with the water, and the increased concentration of TDS in the water. To offset this, the control software measures the time for the current draw to decrease across a predetermined threshold and performs the following action: a. If the time for the boil-down cycle is shorter than optimal, the Auto-adaptive Control algorithm initiates a drain cycle to replace some of the concentrated water in the steam cylinder with fresh water in order to lower the concentration levels of TDS. The fill valve is active during this drain cycle to lower the temperature of the waste water to below 140 °F (60 °C). b. If the time for the boil-down cycle is optimal or longer, the humidifier does not perform a drain cycle to lower the concentration levels of TDS.

6. The operating sequence loops back to step 2 and continues steam production as long as there is a valid humidity demand signal.

B. Blower Pack 1. Once hot steam is generated and reaches the blower pack, a control thermostat located

inside the blowerpack starts the blower fan and allows for steam distribution. The blower pack is equipped with a security loop which should be wired with the respective humidifier safety. The purpose of the security loop is to prevent humidifier operation should power be interrupted to the blower pack. The blower pack is equipped with a dual speed fan switch. The switch can be used to increase or decrease the fan speed effectively changing absorption distance and noise. Once desired speed is selected, no further change is required.


COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL


SECTION 260500 - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Electrical equipment coordination and installation. 2. Sleeves for raceways and cables. 3. Sleeve seals. 4. Grout. 5. Common electrical installation requirements.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber.

B. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For sleeve seals.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate arrangement, mounting, and support of electrical equipment:

1. To allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting heights that reduce headroom are indicated.

2. To provide for ease of disconnecting the equipment with minimum interference to other installations.

3. To allow right of way for piping and conduit installed at required slope. 4. So connecting raceways, cables, wireways, cable trays, and busways will be clear of

obstructions and of the working and access space of other equipment.

B. Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in cast-in-place concrete, masonry walls, and other structural components as they are constructed.

C. Coordinate location of access panels and doors for electrical items that are behind finished surfaces or otherwise concealed. Access doors and panels are specified in Section 083113 "Access Doors and Frames."

D. Coordinate sleeve selection and application with selection and application of firestopping specified in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping."



1.6 WARRANTY

A. Subcontractors shall provide a One (1) Year Labor & Material Warranty that all materials and equipment furnished shall be new and of good quality, free from faults and defects and in conformance with the Contract Documents. Any defects due to faulty workmanship or materials which appear during the first year shall be corrected by the subcontractor at no additional cost. The Warranty will be the responsibility of the subcontractor for a period of one (1) year from the date of Substantial Completion for that particular building area as the construction phases are completed.

B. For all major pieces of equipment, the Warranty will commence after the equipment has been put into permanent operating mode, equipment and components have been commissioned and accepted by the Commissioning Agent, and the Operating & Maintenance Manuals have been submitted and approved.

C. The subcontractor shall provide the cost of providing routine maintenance services as documented by manufacturer’s operating and maintenance literature. Subcontractor shall be responsible for the manufacturer’s recommended maintenance procedures for a period of one (1) year from the time the Warranty commences or until completion of the entire construction project, whichever is later.

D. Submit written warranties covering work specified in Division 26.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SLEEVES FOR RACEWAYS AND CABLES

A. Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized steel, plain ends.

B. Cast-Iron Pipe Sleeves: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe," equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Sleeves for Rectangular Openings: Galvanized sheet steel.

1. Minimum Metal Thickness:

a. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter less than 50 inches and no side more than 16 inches, thickness shall be 0.052-inch.

b. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter equal to, or more than, 50 inches and one (1) or more sides equal to, or more than, 16 inches, thickness shall be 0.138-inch.

2.2 SLEEVE SEALS

A. Description: Modular sealing device, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between sleeve and raceway or cable.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one (1) of the following into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Advance Products & Systems, Inc.



b. Calpico, Inc. c. Metraflex Co. d. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.

2. Sealing Elements: EPDM and/or NBR interlocking links shaped to fit surface of cable or conduit. Include type and number required for material and size of raceway or cable.

3. Pressure Plates: Plastic, carbon steel, or stainless-steel. Include two (2) for each sealing element.

4. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel with corrosion-resistant coating or stainless-steel of length required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements. Include one (1) for each sealing element.

2.3 GROUT

A. Nonmetallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-packaged, nonmetallic aggregate grout, noncorrosive, non-staining, mixed with water to consistency suitable for application and a 30-minute working time.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1.

B. Measure indicated mounting heights to bottom of unit for suspended items and to center of unit for wall-mounting items.

C. Headroom Maintenance: If mounting heights or other location criteria are not indicated, arrange and install components and equipment to provide maximum possible headroom consistent with these requirements.

D. Equipment: Install to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components of both electrical equipment and other nearby installations. Connect in such a way as to facilitate future disconnecting with minimum interference with other items in the vicinity.

E. Right of Way: Give to piping systems installed at a required slope.

3.2 SLEEVE INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS

A. Electrical penetrations occur when raceways, cables, wireways, cable trays, or busways penetrate concrete slabs, concrete or masonry walls, or fire-rated floor and wall assemblies.

B. Concrete Slabs and Walls: Install sleeves for penetrations unless core-drilled holes or formed openings are used. Install sleeves during erection of slabs and walls.

C. Use pipe sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening.

D. Fire-Rated Assemblies: Install sleeves for penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies unless openings compatible with firestop system used are fabricated during construction of floor or wall.



E. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces of walls.

F. Extend sleeves installed in floors 2 inches above finished floor level.

G. Size pipe sleeves to provide ½-inch annular clear space between sleeve and raceway or cable, unless indicated otherwise.

H. Seal space outside of sleeves with grout for penetrations of concrete and masonry

1. Promptly pack grout solidly between sleeve and wall so no voids remain. Tool exposed surfaces smooth; protect grout while curing.

I. Interior Penetrations of Non-Fire-Rated Walls and Floors: Seal annular space between sleeve and raceway or cable, using joint sealant appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Comply with requirements in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants".

J. Fire-Rated-Assembly Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at raceway and cable penetrations. Install sleeves and seal raceway and cable penetration sleeves with firestop materials. Comply with requirements in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping."

K. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Seal penetrations using steel pipe sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.

L. Underground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Install cast-iron pipe sleeves. Size sleeves to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between raceway or cable and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.

3.3 SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION

A. Install to seal exterior wall penetrations.

B. Use type and number of sealing elements recommended by manufacturer for raceway or cable material and size. Position raceway or cable in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between raceway or cable and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.

3.4 FIRESTOPPING

A. Apply firestopping to penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies for electrical installations to restore original fire-resistance rating of assembly. Firestopping materials and installation requirements are specified in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping."


LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES


SECTION 260519 - LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Building wires and cables rated 600 V and less. 2. Connectors, splices, and terminations rated 600 V and less. 3. Sleeves and sleeve seals for cables.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber.

B. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Qualification Data: For testing agency.

C. Field quality-control test reports.


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, that is a member company of the InterNational Electrical Testing Association or is a nationally recognized testing laboratory (NRTL) as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7, and that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Person currently certified by the InterNational Electrical Testing Association or the National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies to supervise on-site testing specified in Part 3.

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

C. Comply with NFPA 70.



1.6 COORDINATION

A. Set sleeves in cast-in-place concrete, masonry walls, and other structural components as they are constructed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES


1. Alcan Products Corporation; Alcan Cable Division 2. American Insulated Wire Corp.; a Leviton Company 3. General Cable Corporation 4. Senator Wire & Cable Company 5. Southwire Company

B. Copper Conductors: Comply with NEMA WC 70.

C. Conductor Insulation: Comply with NEMA WC 70 for Types THHN-THWN.

D. Multi-Conductor Cable: Comply with NEMA WC 70 for armored cable, Type AC, metal-clad cable, Type MC, mineral-insulated, and metal-sheathed cable, Type MI with ground wire.

2.2 CONNECTORS AND SPLICES


1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc. 2. Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 3. O-Z/Gedney; EGS Electrical Group LLC 4. 3M; Electrical Products Division 5. Tyco Electronics Corp.

B. Description: Factory-fabricated connectors and splices of size, ampacity rating, material, type, and class for application and service indicated.

2.3 SLEEVES FOR CABLES



C. Sleeves for Rectangular Openings: Galvanized sheet steel with minimum 0.052- or 0.138-inch thickness as indicated and of length to suit application.




2.4 SLEEVE SEALS


1. Advance Products & Systems, Inc. 2. Calpico, Inc. 3. Metraflex Co. 4. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.

B. Description: Modular sealing device, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between sleeve and cable.

1. Sealing Elements: EPDM interlocking links shaped to fit surface of cable or conduit. Include type and number required for material and size of raceway or cable.

2. Pressure Plates: Plastic, carbon steel, or stainless-steel. Include two (2) for each sealing element.

3. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Stainless-steel of length required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements. Include one (1) for each sealing element.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONDUCTOR MATERIAL APPLICATIONS

A. Feeders: Copper for all feeders. Solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger.

B. Branch Circuits: Copper. Solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger.

3.2 CONDUCTOR INSULATION AND MULTI-CONDUCTOR CABLE APPLICATIONS AND WIRING METHODS

A. Exposed Feeders: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway.

B. Feeders Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, Partitions, and Crawlspaces: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway.

C. Branch Circuits Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, and Partitions: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway and metal-clad cable, Type MC.

D. Class 1 Control Circuits: Type THHN-THWN, in raceway.

E. Class 2 Control Circuits: Type THHN-THWN, in raceway Power-limited cable, concealed in building finishes, Power-limited tray cable, in cable tray.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

A. Conceal cables in finished walls, ceilings, and floors, unless otherwise indicated.



B. Use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound used must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values.

C. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave wire/cable grips, that will not damage cables or raceway.

D. Install exposed cables parallel and perpendicular to surfaces of exposed structural members, and follow surface contours where possible.

E. Support cables according to Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems."

F. Identify and color-code conductors and cables according to Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

3.4 CONNECTIONS

A. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.

B. Make splices and taps that are compatible with conductor material and that possess equivalent or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than unspliced conductors.

1. Use oxide inhibitor in each splice and tap conductor for aluminum conductors.

C. Wiring at Outlets: Install conductor at each outlet, with at least 12 inches of slack.

3.5 SLEEVE INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS

A. Coordinate sleeve selection and application with selection and application of firestopping specified in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping."

B. Concrete Slabs and Walls: Install sleeves for penetrations unless core-drilled holes or formed openings are used. Install sleeves during erection of slabs and walls.

C. Use pipe sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening.

D. Rectangular Sleeve Minimum Metal Thickness:

1. For sleeve rectangle perimeter less than 50 inches and no side greater than 16 inches, thickness shall be 0.052-inch.

2. For sleeve rectangle perimeter equal to, or greater than, 50 inches and one (1) or more sides equal to, or greater than, 16 inches, thickness shall be 0.138-inch.

E. Fire-Rated Assemblies: Install sleeves for penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies unless openings compatible with firestop system used are fabricated during construction of floor or wall.

F. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both wall surfaces.

G. Extend sleeves installed in floors 2 inches above finished floor level.



H. Size pipe sleeves to provide ¼-inch annular clear space between sleeve and cable unless sleeve seal is to be installed or unless seismic criteria require different clearance.

I. Seal space outside of sleeves with grout for penetrations of concrete and masonry and with approved joint compound for gypsum board assemblies.

J. Interior Penetrations of Non-Fire-Rated Walls and Floors: Seal annular space between sleeve and cable, using joint sealant appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint according to Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."

K. Fire-Rated-Assembly Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at cable penetrations. Install sleeves and seal with firestop materials according to Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping."

L. Roof-Penetration Sleeves: Seal penetration of individual cables with flexible boot-type flashing units applied in coordination with roofing work.

M. Aboveground Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Size sleeves to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.

3.6 SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION

A. Use type and number of sealing elements recommended by manufacturer for cable material and size. Position cable in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between cable and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.

3.7 FIRESTOPPING

A. Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to restore original fire-resistance rating of assembly according to Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping."


A. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.


1. After installing conductors and cables and before electrical circuitry has been energized, test service entrance and feeder conductors, and conductors feeding the following critical equipment and services for compliance with requirements.

2. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.

3. Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than sixty (60) days after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each splice in cables and conductors No. 3 AWG and larger. Remove box and equipment covers so splices are accessible to portable scanner.



a. Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan of each splice eleven (11) months after date of Substantial Completion.

b. Instrument: Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for device.

c. Record of Infrared Scanning: Prepare a certified report that identifies splices checked and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.

C. Test Reports: Prepare a written report to record the following:

1. Test procedures used. 2. Test results that comply with requirements. 3. Test results that do not comply with requirements and corrective action taken to achieve

compliance with requirements.

D. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.


GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS


SECTION 260526 - GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Grounding systems and equipment.




A. Coordination Drawings: Plans showing dimensioned as-built locations of grounding features specified in "Field Quality Control" Article, including the following:

1. Ground rods. 2. Ground rings.



A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For grounding to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

1. In addition to items specified in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:

a. Instructions for periodic testing and inspection of grounding features at test wells, ground rings, and grounding connections for separately derived systems based on NETA MTS and NFPA 70B.

1) Tests shall determine if ground-resistance or impedance values remain within specified maximums, and instructions shall recommend corrective action if values do not.

2) Include recommended testing intervals.



B. Comply with UL 467 for grounding and bonding materials and equipment.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CONDUCTORS

A. Insulated Conductors: Copper wire or cable insulated for 600 V unless otherwise required by applicable Code or authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Bare Copper Conductors:

1. Solid Conductors: ASTM B 3. 2. Stranded Conductors: ASTM B 8. 3. Tinned Conductors: ASTM B 33. 4. Bonding Cable: 28 kcmil, fourteen (14) strands of No. 17 AWG conductor, ¼-inch in

diameter. 5. Bonding Conductor: No. 4 or No. 6 AWG, stranded conductor. 6. Bonding Jumper: Copper tape, braided conductors terminated with copper ferrules; 1-5/8

inches wide and 1/16-inch-thick. 7. Tinned Bonding Jumper: Tinned-copper tape, braided conductors terminated with copper

ferrules; 1-5/8 inches wide and 1/16-inch-thick.

2.2 CONNECTORS

A. Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for applications in which used and for specific types, sizes, and combinations of conductors and other items connected.

B. Bolted Connectors for Conductors and Pipes: Copper or copper alloy, pressure type with at least two (2) bolts.

1. Pipe Connectors: Clamp type, sized for pipe.

C. Welded Connectors: Exothermic-welding kits of types recommended by kit manufacturer for materials being joined and installation conditions.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATIONS

A. Conductors: Install solid conductor for No. 8 AWG and smaller, and stranded conductors for No. 6 AWG and larger unless otherwise indicated.

B. Conductor Terminations and Connections:

1. Pipe and Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Bolted connectors. 2. Connections to Structural Steel: Welded connectors.

3.2 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING

A. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with all feeders and branch circuits.



B. Signal and Communication Equipment: In addition to grounding and bonding required by NFPA 70, provide a separate grounding system complying with requirements in TIA/ATIS J-STD-607-A.

1. For telephone, alarm, voice and data, and other communication equipment, provide No. 4 AWG minimum insulated grounding conductor in raceway from grounding electrode system to each service location, terminal cabinet, wiring closet, and central equipment location.

2. Service and Central Equipment Locations and Wiring Closets: Terminate grounding conductor on a ¼-by-4-by-12-inch grounding bus.

3. Terminal Cabinets: Terminate grounding conductor on cabinet grounding terminal.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Grounding Conductors: Route along shortest and straightest paths possible unless otherwise indicated or required by Code. Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors where they may be subjected to strain, impact, or damage.

B. Bonding Straps and Jumpers: Install in locations accessible for inspection and maintenance except where routed through short lengths of conduit.

1. Bonding to Structure: Bond straps directly to basic structure, taking care not to penetrate any adjacent parts.

2. Bonding to Equipment Mounted on Vibration Isolation Hangers and Supports: Install bonding so vibration is not transmitted to rigidly mounted equipment.

3. Use exothermic-welded connectors for outdoor locations; if a disconnect-type connection is required, use a bolted clamp.

C. Grounding and Bonding for Piping:

1. Metal Water Service Pipe: Install insulated copper grounding conductors, in conduit, from building's main service equipment, or grounding bus, to main metal water service entrances to building. Connect grounding conductors to main metal water service pipes; use a bolted clamp connector or bolt a lug-type connector to a pipe flange by using one of the lug bolts of the flange. Where a dielectric main water fitting is installed, connect grounding conductor on street side of fitting. Bond metal grounding conductor conduit or sleeve to conductor at each end.

2. Water Meter Piping: Use braided-type bonding jumpers to electrically bypass water meters. Connect to pipe with a bolted connector.

3. Bond each aboveground portion of gas piping system downstream from equipment shutoff valve.

3.4 LABELING

A. Comply with requirements in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems" Article for instruction signs. The label or its text shall be green.

B. Install labels at the telecommunications bonding conductor and grounding equalizer and at the grounding electrode conductor where exposed.



1. Label Text: "If this connector or cable is loose or if it must be removed for any reason, notify the facility manager."





1. After installing grounding system but before permanent electrical circuits have been energized, test for compliance with requirements.

2. Inspect physical and mechanical condition. Verify tightness of accessible, bolted, electrical connections with a calibrated torque wrench according to manufacturer's written instructions.

3. Test completed grounding system at each location where a maximum ground-resistance level is specified, at service disconnect enclosure grounding terminal, at ground test wells, and at individual ground rods. Make tests at ground rods before any conductors are connected.

a. Measure ground resistance no fewer than two (2) full days after last trace of precipitation and without soil being moistened by any means other than natural drainage or seepage and without chemical treatment or other artificial means of reducing natural ground resistance.

b. Perform tests by fall-of-potential method according to IEEE 81.

4. Prepare dimensioned Drawings locating each test well, ground rod and ground-rod assembly, and other grounding electrodes. Identify each by letter in alphabetical order, and key to the record of tests and observations. Include the number of rods driven and their depth at each location and include observations of weather and other phenomena that may affect test results. Describe measures taken to improve test results.

C. Grounding system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.


E. Report measured ground resistances that exceed the following values:

1. Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity of 500 kVA and Less: 10 ohms. 2. Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity of 500 to 1000 kVA: 5 ohms. 3. Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity More Than 1000 kVA: 3 ohms. 4. Power Distribution Units or Panelboards Serving Electronic Equipment: 1 ohm. 5. Substations and Pad-Mounted Equipment: 5 ohms. 6. Manhole Grounds: 10 ohms.

F. Excessive Ground Resistance: If resistance to ground exceeds specified values, notify Architect promptly and include recommendations to reduce ground resistance.




HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS


SECTION 260529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems. 2. Construction requirements for concrete bases.


1. Section 260548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems" for products and installation requirements necessary for compliance with seismic criteria.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. EMT: Electrical metallic tubing.

B. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit.

C. RMC: Rigid metal conduit.


A. Delegated Design: Design supports for multiple raceways, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated.

B. Design supports for multiple raceways capable of supporting combined weight of supported systems and its contents.

C. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported equipment and connected systems and components.

D. Rated Strength: Adequate in tension, shear, and pullout force to resist maximum loads calculated or imposed for this Project, with a minimum structural safety factor of five (5) times the applied force.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For the following:

1. Steel slotted support systems.



2. Nonmetallic slotted support systems.

B. Shop Drawings: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer. Show fabrication and installation details and include calculations for the following:

1. Trapeze hangers. Include Product Data for components. 2. Steel slotted channel systems. Include Product Data for components. 3. Nonmetallic slotted channel systems. Include Product Data for components. 4. Equipment supports.



A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."

B. Comply with NFPA 70.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases.

B. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SUPPORT, ANCHORAGE, AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS

A. Steel Slotted Support Systems: Comply with MFMA 4, factory-fabricated components for field assembly.

1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Allied Tube & Conduit b. Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries c. ERICO International Corporation d. GS Metals Corp. e. Thomas & Betts Corporation f. Unistrut; Tyco International, Ltd. g. Wesanco, Inc.

2. Metallic Coatings: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and applied according to MFMA-4.

3. Nonmetallic Coatings: Manufacturer's standard PVC, polyurethane, or polyester coating applied according to MFMA-4.

4. Painted Coatings: Manufacturer's standard painted coating applied according to MFMA-4.

5. Channel Dimensions: Selected for applicable load criteria.



B. Nonmetallic Slotted Support Systems: Structural-grade, factory-formed, glass-fiber-resin channels and angles with 9/16-inch-diameter holes at a maximum of 8 inches o.c., in at least one (1) surface.


a. Allied Tube & Conduit b. Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries c. Fabco Plastics Wholesale Limited d. Seasafe, Inc.

2. Fittings and Accessories: Products of channel and angle manufacturer and designed for use with those items.

3. Fitting and Accessory Materials: Same as channels and angles, except metal items may be stainless-steel.

4. Rated Strength: Selected to suit applicable load criteria.

C. Raceway and Cable Supports: As described in NECA 1 and NECA 101.

D. Conduit and Cable Support Devices: Steel and malleable-iron hangers, clamps, and associated fittings, designed for types and sizes of raceway or cable to be supported.

E. Support for Conductors in Vertical Conduit: Factory-fabricated assembly consisting of threaded body and insulating wedging plug or plugs for non-armored electrical conductors or cables in riser conduits. Plugs shall have number, size, and shape of conductor gripping pieces as required to suit individual conductors or cables supported. Body shall be malleable iron.

F. Structural Steel for Fabricated Supports and Restraints: ASTM A 36, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.

G. Mounting, Anchoring, and Attachment Components: Items for fastening electrical items or their supports to building surfaces include the following:

1. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened Portland cement concrete, steel, or wood, with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.

a. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1) Hilti Inc. 2) ITW Ramset/Red Head; a division of Illinois Tool Works, Inc. 3) MKT Fastening, LLC 4) Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Inc.; Masterset Fastening Systems Unit

2. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, zinc-coated and stainless-steel, for use in hardened Portland cement concrete with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials in which used.



a. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1) Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries 2) Empire Tool and Manufacturing Co., Inc. 3) Hilti Inc. 4) ITW Ramset/Red Head; a division of Illinois Tool Works, Inc. 5) MKT Fastening, LLC

3. Concrete Inserts: Steel or malleable-iron, slotted support system units similar to MSS Type 18; complying with MFMA-4 or MSS SP-58.

4. Clamps for Attachment to Steel Structural Elements: MSS SP-58, type suitable for attached structural element.

5. Through Bolts: Structural type, hex head, and high strength. Comply with ASTM A 325. 6. Toggle Bolts: All-steel springhead type. 7. Hanger Rods: Threaded steel.

2.2 FABRICATED METAL EQUIPMENT SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES

A. Description: Welded or bolted, structural-steel shapes, shop or field fabricated to fit dimensions of supported equipment.

B. Materials: Comply with requirements in Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for steel shapes and plates.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATION

A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for application of hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems except if requirements in this Section are stricter.

B. Maximum Support Spacing and Minimum Hanger Rod Size for Raceway: Space supports for EMT, IMC, and RMC as required by scheduled in NECA 1, where its Table 1 lists maximum spacings less than stated in NFPA 70. Minimum rod size shall be ¼-inch in diameter.

C. Multiple Raceways or Cables: Install trapeze-type supports fabricated with steel slotted or other support system, sized so capacity can be increased by at least twenty-five percent (25%) in future without exceeding specified design load limits.

1. Secure raceways and cables to these supports with two-bolt conduit clamps single-bolt conduit clamps single-bolt conduit clamps using spring friction action for retention in support channel.

D. Spring-steel clamps designed for supporting single conduits without bolts may be used for 1½-inch and smaller raceways serving branch circuits and communication systems above suspended ceilings and for fastening raceways to trapeze supports.



3.2 SUPPORT INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except as specified in this Article.

B. Raceway Support Methods: In addition to methods described in NECA 1, EMT, IMC, and RMC may be supported by openings through structure members, as permitted in NFPA 70.

C. Strength of Support Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength will be adequate to carry present and future static loads within specified loading limits. Minimum static design load used for strength determination shall be weight of supported components plus 200 lb.

D. Mounting and Anchorage of Surface-Mounted Equipment and Components: Anchor and fasten electrical items and their supports to building structural elements by the following methods unless otherwise indicated by code:

1. To Wood: Fasten with lag screws or through bolts. 2. To New Concrete: Bolt to concrete inserts. 3. To Masonry: Approved toggle-type bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion anchor

fasteners on solid masonry units. 4. To Existing Concrete: Expansion anchor fasteners. 5. Instead of expansion anchors, powder-actuated driven threaded studs provided with lock

washers and nuts may be used in existing standard-weight concrete 4 inches thick or greater. Do not use for anchorage to lightweight-aggregate concrete or for slabs less than 4 inches thick.

6. To Steel: Welded threaded studs complying with AWS D1.1, with lock washers and nuts, Beam clamps (MSS Type 19, 21, 23, 25, or 27) complying with MSS SP-69, Spring-tension clamps.

7. To Light Steel: Sheet metal screws. 8. Items Mounted on Hollow Walls and Nonstructural Building Surfaces: Mount cabinets,

panelboards, disconnect switches, control enclosures, pull and junction boxes, transformers, and other devices on slotted-channel racks attached to substrate by means that meet seismic-restraint strength and anchorage requirements.

E. Drill holes for expansion anchors in concrete at locations and to depths that avoid reinforcing bars.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF FABRICATED METAL SUPPORTS

A. Comply with installation requirements in Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for site-fabricated metal supports.

B. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor electrical materials and equipment.

C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1.



3.4 PAINTING


1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils.



RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS


SECTION 260533 - RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes raceways, fittings, boxes, enclosures, and cabinets for electrical wiring.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. EMT: Electrical metallic tubing.

B. ENT: Electrical nonmetallic tubing.

C. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber.

D. FMC: Flexible metal conduit.

E. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit.

F. LFMC: Liquidtight flexible metal conduit.

G. LFNC: Liquidtight flexible nonmetallic conduit.

H. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber.

I. RNC: Rigid nonmetallic conduit.

J. MC: Metal Clad cable.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For surface raceways, wireways and fittings, floor boxes, hinged-cover enclosures, and cabinets.

B. Shop Drawings: For the following raceway components. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

1. Custom enclosures and cabinets.

C. Coordination Drawings: Conduit routing plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, based on input from installers of the items involved:

1. Structural members in the paths of conduit groups with common supports.



2. HVAC and plumbing items and architectural features in the paths of conduit groups with common supports.

D. Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that enclosures and cabinets and their mounting provisions, including those for internal components, will withstand seismic forces defined in Section 260548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems." Include the following:


a. The term "withstand" means "the cabinet or enclosure will remain in place without separation of any parts when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the unit will retain its enclosure characteristics, including its interior accessibility, after the seismic event."



E. Qualification Data: For professional engineer and testing agency.

F. Source quality-control test reports.


A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

B. Comply with NFPA 70.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 METAL CONDUIT AND TUBING


1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc. 2. Alflex Inc. 3. Allied Tube & Conduit; a Tyco International Ltd. Co. 4. Anamet Electrical, Inc.; Anaconda Metal Hose 5. Electri-Flex Co. 6. Manhattan/CDT/Cole-Flex 7. Maverick Tube Corporation 8. O-Z Gedney; a unit of General Signal 9. Wheatland Tube Company



B. Rigid Steel Conduit: ANSI C80.1.

C. Aluminum Rigid Conduit: ANSI C80.5.

D. IMC: ANSI C80.6.

E. PVC-Coated Steel Conduit: PVC-coated rigid steel conduit and IMC.

1. Comply with NEMA RN 1. 2. Coating Thickness: 0.040-inch, minimum.

F. EMT: ANSI C80.3.

G. FMC: Zinc-coated steel or aluminum.

H. LFMC: Flexible steel conduit with PVC jacket.

I. MC: Metal-clad cable.

J. Fittings for Conduit (Including all Types and Flexible and Liquidtight), EMT, and Cable: NEMA FB 1; listed for type and size raceway with which used, and for application and environment in which installed.

1. Conduit Fittings for Hazardous (Classified) Locations: Comply with UL 886. 2. Fittings for EMT: Steel or die-cast and set-screw or compression type. 3. Coating for Fittings for PVC-Coated Conduit: Minimum thickness, 0.040-inch, with

overlapping sleeves protecting threaded joints.

K. Joint Compound for Rigid Steel Conduit or IMC: Listed for use in cable connector assemblies and compounded for use to lubricate and protect threaded raceway joints from corrosion and enhance their conductivity.

2.2 NONMETALLIC CONDUIT AND TUBING


1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc. 2. Anamet Electrical, Inc.; Anaconda Metal Hose 3. Arnco Corporation 4. CANTEX Inc. 5. CertainTeed Corp.; Pipe & Plastics Group 6. Condux International, Inc. 7. ElecSYS, Inc. 8. Electri-Flex Co. 9. Lamson & Sessions; Carlon Electrical Products 10. Manhattan/CDT/Cole-Flex 11. RACO; a Hubbell Company 12. Thomas & Betts Corporation

B. ENT: NEMA TC 13.



C. RNC: NEMA TC 2, Type EPC-40-PVC, unless otherwise indicated.

D. LFNC: UL 1660.

E. Fittings for ENT and RNC: NEMA TC 3; match to conduit or tubing type and material.

F. Fittings for LFNC: UL 514B.

2.3 OPTICAL FIBER/COMMUNICATIONS CABLE RACEWAY AND FITTINGS


1. Arnco Corporation 2. Endot Industries Inc. 3. IPEX Inc. 4. Lamson & Sessions; Carlon Electrical Products

B. Description: Comply with UL 2024; flexible type, approved for plenum, riser, general-use installation.

2.4 METAL WIREWAYS


1. Cooper B-Line, Inc. 2. Hoffman 3. Square D; Schneider Electric

B. Description: Sheet metal sized and shaped as indicated, NEMA 250, Type 3R, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Fittings and Accessories: Include couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, hold-down straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways as required for complete system.

D. Wireway Covers: Hinged type, Screw-cover type, Flanged-and-gasketed type, or as indicated.

E. Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel finish.

2.5 NONMETALLIC WIREWAYS


1. Hoffman 2. Lamson & Sessions; Carlon Electrical Products

B. Description: Fiberglass polyester, extruded and fabricated to size and shape indicated, with no holes or knockouts. Cover is gasketed with oil-resistant gasket material and fastened with



captive screws treated for corrosion resistance. Connections are flanged, with stainless-steel screws and oil-resistant gaskets.

C. Description: PVC plastic, extruded and fabricated to size and shape indicated, with snap-on cover and mechanically coupled connections with plastic fasteners.

D. Fittings and Accessories: Include couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, hold-down straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways as required for complete system.

2.6 SURFACE RACEWAYS

A. Surface Metal Raceways: Galvanized steel with snap-on covers. Manufacturer's standard enamel finish in color selected by Architect.


a. Thomas & Betts Corporation b. Walker Systems, Inc.; Legrand c. Wiremold Company (The); Legrand

2.7 BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS


1. Cooper Crouse-Hinds; Div. of Cooper Industries, Inc. 2. EGS/Appleton Electric 3. Erickson Electrical Equipment Company 4. Hoffman 5. Hubbell Incorporated; Killark Electric Manufacturing Co. Division 6. O-Z/Gedney; a unit of General Signal 7. RACO; a Hubbell Company 8. Robroy Industries, Inc.; Enclosure Division 9. Scott Fetzer Co.; Adalet Division 10. Spring City Electrical Manufacturing Company 11. Thomas & Betts Corporation 12. Walker Systems, Inc.; Legrand 13. Woodhead, Daniel Company; Woodhead Industries, Inc. Subsidiary

B. Sheet Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA OS 1.

C. Cast-Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA FB 1, cast feralloy, Type FD, with gasketed cover.

D. Nonmetallic Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA OS 2.

E. Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA OS 1.



F. Hinged-Cover Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, with continuous-hinge cover with flush latch, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Metal Enclosures: Steel, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel. 2. Nonmetallic Enclosures: Plastic, finished inside with radio-frequency-resistant paint.

G. Cabinets:

1. NEMA 250, Type 1, galvanized-steel box with removable interior panel and removable front, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel.

2. Hinged door in front cover with flush latch and concealed hinge. 3. Key latch to match panelboards. 4. Metal barriers to separate wiring of different systems and voltage. 5. Accessory feet where required for freestanding equipment.

2.8 SLEEVES FOR RACEWAYS



C. Sleeves for Rectangular Openings: Galvanized sheet steel with minimum 0.052- or 0.138-inch thickness as indicated and of length to suit application.


2.9 SLEEVE SEALS


1. Advance Products & Systems, Inc. 2. Calpico, Inc. 3. Metraflex Co. 4. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.

B. Description: Modular sealing device, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between sleeve and cable.

1. Sealing Elements: EPDM interlocking links shaped to fit surface of cable or conduit. Include type and number required for material and size of raceway or cable.

2. Pressure Plates: Stainless-steel. Include two (2) for each sealing element. 3. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Stainless-steel of length required to secure pressure plates to

sealing elements. Include one (1) for each sealing element.